Canon ImagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 11.0

Can on Revision 11.
imagePRESS
imagePRESS C10000VP/
C10000VP/
C8000VP Series
C8000VP Series
Service
Service Manual
Manual
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Important Notices
Important Notices
O Application
This manual
This manual has
has been
been issued
issued byby Canon
Canon Inc.
Inc. for
for qualified
qualified persons
persons to
to learn
learn technical
technical theory,
theory, installation,
installation, maintenance,
maintenance, and
and repair
repair
of products.
of products.
This manual
This manual covers
covers all
all localities
localities where
where the
the products
products are
are sold.
sold. For
For this
this reason,
reason, there
there may
may be
be information
information in
in this
this manual
manual that
that does
does
not apply
not apply to
to your
your locality.
locality.
• Corrections
This manual
This manual may
may contain
contain technical
technical inaccuracies
inaccuracies oror typographical
typographical errors
errors due
due to
to improvements
improvements or or changes
changes in
in products.
products.
When changes
When changes occur
occur in
in applicable
applicable products
products or
or in
in the
the contents
contents of
of this
this manual,
manual, Canon
Canon will
will release
release technical
technical information
information as
as the
the
need arises.
need arises. In
In the
the event
event of
of major
major changes
changes in
in the
the contents
contents of
of this
this manual
manual over
over aa long
long or
or short
short period,
period, Canon
Canon will
will issue
issue a
a new
new
edition of
edition of this
this manual.
manual.
The following
The following paragraph
paragraph does
does not
not apply
apply to
to any
any countries
countries where
where such
such provisions
provisions are
are inconsistent
inconsistent with
with local
local law.
law.
O Trademarks
The product
The product names
names and
and company
company names
names used
used in
in this
this manual
manual are
are the
the registered
registered trademarks
trademarks of
of the
the individual
individual companies.
companies.
• Copyright
This manual
This manual isis copyrighted
copyrighted with
with all
all rights
rights reserved.
reserved. Under
Under the
the copyright
copyright laws,
laws, this
this manual
manual may
may not
not be
be copied,
copied, reproduced
reproduced or
or
translated into
translated into another
another language,
language, in
in whole
whole or
or in
in part,
part, without
without the
the consent
consent of
of Canon
Canon Inc.
Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
Caution
Use of
Use of this
this manual
manual should
should be
be strictly
strictly supervised
supervised to
to avoid
avoid disclosure
disclosure of
of confidential
confidential information.
information.
O Explanation of Symbols
The following
The following symbols
symbols are
are used
used throughout
throughout this
this Service
Service Manual.
Manual.
Symbols
Symbols Explanation Symbols
Symbols Explanation
Check. Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually. Insert the claw.
tO 1x
lx
Check a sound. Push the part.
CO. 01
Introduction
Introduction
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.
Cib
ile 1!
11! 1x
Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

4Nei
1x
. x
Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
(
----
- At 1x
ri
Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

OFF
'-- guide or wire saddle.
1x
x
i ei
Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.
(--
1x 1x
) 1x
Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

i
l!!iil
1x 01x
l
._.-
Cleaning is
Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
.//
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1.
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, representsthe
diagrams, Aisic represents thepath
pathofofmechanical
mechanicaldrive;
drive;where
whereaasignal
signalname
nameaccompanies
accompanies thethe symbol,
symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
2.
however, differs
(The voltage value, however, differs from
from circuit
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor
microprocessor cannot be checked in the field.field. Therefore,
Therefore, the operations
operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Contents
Safety
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Precautions 1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................
Laser Safety 2
2
Handling of
Handling of Laser
Laser System...................................................................................................................
System 2
2
Turn power
Turn power switch
switch ON
ON.........................................................................................................................3
3
Safety of
Safety of Toner....................................................................................................................................4
Toner 4
About Toner
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4
4
Toner on Clothing or Skin......................................................................................................................
Skin 4
Notes When
Notes When Handling
Handling a
a Lithium
Lithium Battery.............................................................................................
Battery 4
4
Notes Before
Notes Before it
it Works
Works Serving............................................................................................................
Serving 4
4
Points to
Points to Note
Note at
at Cleaning...................................................................................................................5
Cleaning 5
1. Product
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Overview 6
Product lineups....................................................................................................................................7
Product lineups 7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Host machine 7
Pickup/Delivery System
Pickup/Delivery System Options............................................................................................................
Options 8
8
Scanning System
Scanning System Options....................................................................................................................11
Options 11
Function expansion
Function expansion system
system options......................................................................................................
options 12
Features............................................................................................................................................ 14
Features 14
Product Features................................................................................................................................
Product Features 14
Features at
Features at servicing...........................................................................................................................
servicing 15
15
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 21
Specifications 21
Product Specifications
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 21
Power Supply
Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................................
Specifications 22
Weight and
Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................22
Size 22
Productivity (Print
Productivity (Print Speed)....................................................................................................................
Speed) 23
23
Paper type
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 27
Name of
Name of Parts...................................................................................................................................
Parts 33
33
External View......................................................................................................................................33
View 33
Cross
Cross Section
Section View.............................................................................................................................
View 39
Switch......................................................................................................................................39
Power Switch 39
Control
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................40
Panel 40
2. Technical Explanation...................................................................................
Explanation 42
Basic Configuration...........................................................................................................................
Basic Configuration 43
43
Functional Configuration......................................................................................................................
Functional Configuration 43
43
Controller System..............................................................................................................................44
Controller System 44
Overview............................................................................................................................................
Overview 44
Controls..............................................................................................................................................50
Controls 50
Laser Exposure
Laser Exposure System....................................................................................................................
System 64
64
Overview............................................................................................................................................
Overview 64
64
Controls..............................................................................................................................................67
Controls 67
Image Formation
Image Formation System..................................................................................................................
System 73
73
Overview............................................................................................................................................
Overview 73
73
Controls..............................................................................................................................................84
Controls 84
ii
Contents
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................140
Fixing System 140
Overview..........................................................................................................................................
Overview 140
Controls............................................................................................................................................155
Controls 155
Pickup Feed
Pickup System....................................................................................................................... 195
Feed System 195
Overview..........................................................................................................................................
Overview 195
195
Controls............................................................................................................................................210
Controls 210
External Auxiliary
External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................273
System 273
Counter Control.................................................................................................................................273
Counter Control 273
Fan Control
Control.......................................................................................................................................279
279
Power supply
Power supply.................................................................................................................................... 289
289
Protection function
Protection function.............................................................................................................................293
293
Function...................................................................................................................... 295
Power-saving Function 295
Effect of
Effect of the
the Hub Which Supports
Hub Which Supports Spanning
Spanning Tree................................................................................
Tree 299
299
Embedded RDS..............................................................................................................................
Embedded RDS 300
300
Product Overview..............................................................................................................................300
Product Overview 300
Limitations........................................................................................................................................ 302
Limitations 302
Service cautions
Service cautions................................................................................................................................302302
Setup.................................................................................................................................... 303
E-RDS Setup 303
Error code
Error code and
and strings
strings....................................................................................................................... 306306
Updater............................................................................................................................................310
U pdater 310
Functional Overview..........................................................................................................................
Overview 310
310
Limitations and
Limitations and Cautions....................................................................................................................315
Cautions 315
Preparation....................................................................................................................................... 316
Preparation 316
System Management
System Management Operations
Operations....................................................................................................... 324
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................
Maintenance 330
330
FAQ.................................................................................................................................................
FAQ 331
331
DCM................................................................................................................................................ 334
DCM 334
Function Overview ............................................................................................................................334 334
Export All
All by
by Remote
Remote UI.....................................................................................................................335
UI 335
Import/Export
Import/Export by by Service
Service Mode
Mode (External)...........................................................................................
(External) 337
337
Import/Export
Import/Export by by Service
Service Mode
Mode (Internal)............................................................................................
(Internal) 344
List of
List of items
items which
which cancan be imported.................................................................................................... 349
be imported 349
3. Periodical Service........................................................................................
Service 379
Periodical Service
Periodical Service Operation
Operation Item...................................................................................................380
Item 380
Process Unit.....................................................................................................................................
Process Unit 380
380
Primary Charging AssemblyAssembly...............................................................................................................382 382
Assembly........................................................................................................................ 384
Developing Assembly 384
ITB Unit
Unit (1/2)....................................................................................................................................
(1/2) 386
386
ITB Unit
Unit (2/2)....................................................................................................................................
(2/2) 388
388
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Unit Unit.................................................................................................................... 390
390
Registration Feed
Registration Unit....................................................................................................................... 392
Feed Unit 392
Filter.................................................................................................................................................394
Filter 394
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly (1/3)............................................................................................................396
(1/3) 396
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly (2/3)............................................................................................................398
(2/3) 398
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly (3/3)............................................................................................................400
(3/3) 400
Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Assembly
Assembly (1/3).......................................................................................................
(1/3) 402
Secondary Fixing
Assembly (2/3).......................................................................................................
(2/3) 404
Secondary Fixing
Assembly (3/3).......................................................................................................
(3/3) 406
406
Tandem
Tandem Pass Pass // Bypass
Bypass Pass Pass // Fixing
Fixing Merging
Merging Pass Unit......................................................................408
Pass Unit 408
ii
Contents
Delivery Reverse Unit Unit........................................................................................................................ 411

Duplex Decurler UnitUnit......................................................................................................................... 414
Options.............................................................................................................................................415
Options 415
4. Parts
4. Parts Replacement
Replacement and
and Cleaning...............................................................
Cleaning 419
List of
List of Parts
Parts .................................................................................................................................... 420420
External / Internal Cover....................................................................................................................
Cover 420
Main Unit
Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 426
Electrical Components.......................................................................................................................431
Electrical Components 431
Main Controller System...................................................................................................................
Main Controller System 478
478
Replacing the Main Controller
Controller PCB PCB 1..................................................................................................478
1 478
Replacing the
Replacing the VIDEO
VIDEO PCB.................................................................................................................479
PCB 479
Replacing the HDD............................................................................................................................482
HDD 482
Replacing the Main Controller
Controller PCB PCB 2..................................................................................................484
2 484
Replacing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................
PCB 486
486
Laser Exposure
Laser Exposure System..................................................................................................................
System 488
488
Dustproof Glass
Dustproof Glass (Y/M/C/Bk) Cleaning Procedure
(Y/M/C/Bk) Cleaning Procedure.................................................................................488 488
Replacing the
Replacing the Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk)...................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 489
489
Image Formation System................................................................................................................
Image Formation System 492
492
Replacing the Primary Charging
Charging Assemblies
Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................................492
(Y/M/C/Bk) 492
Replacing the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
MotorHP HP Sensors
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................495
(Y/M/C/Bk) 495
Charging Assembly
Assembly Grid GridPlate
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................495
(Y/M/C/Bk) 495
Primary Charging
Charging Assembly
AssemblyGrid GridPlate
PlateCleaning
CleaningPad Pad (Y/M/C/Bk)....................................502
(Y/M/C/Bk) 502
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Unit
Unit (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 503
503
Charging Assembly
Assembly Shield
ShieldPlatePlate (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................505
(Y/M/C/Bk) 505
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Pad Pad Holder
Holder (Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning
Cleaning PadPad Slider
Slider (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 506
506
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 507
507
Replacing the Drum
Drum Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk).................................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 509
509
Replacing the Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk)...................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 514
Replacing the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Front/Rear
Front/Rear Edge
Edge Seals
Seals (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................515
(Y/M/C/Bk) 515
Replacing the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Blades
Blades (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 516
516
Replacing the
Replacing the Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure Lamp
Lamp Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) ........................................................................... 517
Replacing the
Replacing the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drums
Drums (Y/M/C/Bk).................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 518
518
Cleaning Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure Units Units (Y/M/C/Bk)..............................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 520
520
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Pre-exposure UnitsUnits (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................521
(Y/M/C/Bk) 521
Cleaning Kits
Kits (Y/M/C/Bk).....................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 522
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Brush Brush Rollers
Rollers (Y/M/C/Bk).......................................................................524
(Y/M/C/Bk) 524
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk).....................................................................................526
(Y/M/C/Bk) 526
Replacing the
Replacing the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly LowerLowerPlate
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)...............................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 530
530
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Lower
LowerPlate
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk).................................................................532
(Y/M/C/Bk) 532
Replacing the
Replacing the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)...................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 532
532
Replacing the
Replacing the Potential
Potential Sensor..........................................................................................................
Sensor 536
536
Pulling out
Pulling out the
the Process
Process Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 538
538
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Drum
Drum Unit
Unit Support
Support Shaft
Shaft (Y/M/C/Bk)...............................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 541
Pulling out
Pulling out the
the Pre-registration/Feed
Pre-registration/Feed UnitUnit ........................................................................................... 542
Replacing the
Replacing Secondary Transfer
the Secondary Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt Unit
Unit...............................................................................542
542
Replacing the
the Secondary Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt Tension
Tension Roller...............................................................
Roller 543
543
Replacing the
Replacing the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer Belt......................................................................................547
Outer Belt 547
Replacing the
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer
Secondary Transfer Roller...................................................................................549
Outer Roller 549
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Roller
Roller Grounding
Grounding Spring Spring 1.....................................................
1 550
550
iii
Contents
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer OuterOuter Roller
Roller Grounding
Grounding SpringSpring 2.....................................................
2 550
550
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Unit Unit Edge
Edge SealSeal Bases
Bases (Rear
(Rear andand Front)
Front).............................551551
Replacing the
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Unit.................................................................................551
551
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Case...............................................................................552
Case 552
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaner
Cleaner Drive
Drive Unit
Unit(9,000,000
(9,000,000 Sheets)............................................
Sheets) 556
556
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaner
Cleaner Drive
Drive Unit
Unit(1,000,000
(1,000,000 Sheets)..............................................565
Sheets) 565
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Scraper
Scraper Sheet...............................................................................
Sheet 566
566
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Right/Left) (Right/Left)...................................................568 568
Replacing the
the Secondary Transfer Bias Bias Roller
Roller Cleaning
Cleaning Blade.............................................................
Blade 569
569
Replacing the
the Secondary Transfer InletInlet Lower
Lower Guide...........................................................................570
Guide 570
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Inlet
Inlet Lower
Lower Guide
Guide // Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outlet
Outlet Separation
Separation Guide Cleaning
Guide Cleaning
Procedure.....................................................................................................................................
Procedure 571
Pulling out
Pulling out the
the ITB
ITB Frame Unit
Unit............................................................................................................572
572
Replacing the
Replacing Leading Edge
the Leading Registration Patch
Edge Registration Patch Sensor
Sensor Cleaning Shutter............................................. 574
Cleaning Shutter
Leading Edge
Leading Registration Patch
Edge Registration Patch Sensor Cleaning Procedure
Sensor Cleaning Procedure..............................................................574 574
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Unit Unit.........................................................................................................575
575
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller Roller............................................................................................ 576576
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Blade...................................................................................................... 577
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit Unit.............................................................................580
580
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
Transfer InletInlet Upper
Upper Guide...........................................................................583
Guide 583
Replacing the ITB..............................................................................................................................585
ITB 585
Cleaning the ITB Idler Roller
Roller.............................................................................................................. 591
591
Cleaning the ITB Steering Roller
Roller........................................................................................................ 591591
Cleaning the
the ITB HP Sensor
Sensor.............................................................................................................. 592592
Cleaning the ITB Edge Sensor
Sensor........................................................................................................... 593
Replacing the ITB Inner Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit Unit....................................................................... 594
594
Replacing the ITB Torque Limiter
Limiter....................................................................................................... 595
Primary Transfer
Transfer Roller
Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)...............................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 596
596
Replacing the
Replacing the Process
Process Unit
Unit Cover......................................................................................................
Cover 597
Replacing the
Replacing the Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Stirring
Stirring Motors
Motors (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 598
598
Releasing the
Releasing the Pressure
Pressure ofof the
the ITB Unit............................................................................................... 599
ITB Unit
Replacing the
Replacing the Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor UnitUnit..................................................................................... 600
600
Cleaning the Registration
Cleaning the Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter,
Shutter, Registration
Registration Patch Patch Sensors
Sensors (Front/Middle/Rear),
(Front/Middle/Rear),
and
and ITB
ITB Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors (Y/M/C)......................................................................................................
(Y/M/C) 601
601
Replacing the
Replacing the Developing
Developing Assemblies
Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)...............................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 602
602
Replacing the
Replacing the Sub
Sub Hoppers
Hoppers (Y/M/C/Bk)..............................................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 605
605
Replacing the
Replacing the Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Unit.........................................................................................................605
Unit 605
Cleaning the Color
Cleaning the Color Sensor
Sensor Unit..........................................................................................................
Unit 610
610
Moving
Moving the
the Toner
Toner Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly (when (when the the POD
POD DeckDeck is is not
not connected)
connected)......................................... 613 613
Moving
Moving the
the Toner
Toner Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly (when (when the the POD Deck is
POD Deck is connected)
connected)...............................................614 614
Replacing the
Replacing the Hopper
Hopper Unit
Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................................617
(Y/M/C/Bk) 617
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................622
Fixing System 622
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump Unit Unit.....................................................................................................622
622
Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly
Assembly.............................................................................................623 623
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing
Fixing Web Unit Unit............................................................................................... 624
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing Web.....................................................................................
Web 626
626
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Air Nozzle.........................................................
Nozzle 628
628
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Collection Roller...........................................................................629
Roller 629
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.................................................................................
Unit 630
630
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Assembly (when working with 1 person)..................................................
person) 631
631
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Assembly (when working with with 22 or
or more people)......................................633
people) 633
Replacing the
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermoswitch...................................................................
Thermoswitch 635
635
iv
Contents
Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit Unit................................................................................... 637

637
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller, Bearings, and Insulating Bushes Bushes.................................................. 640 640
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Thermistor.............................................................................. 646 646
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Thermistor............................................................................ 646 646
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Thermistor........................................................................... 647
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch
Thermoswitch................................................................................ 648 648
Thermoswitch.............................................................................. 648
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch 648
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit Unit..................................................................................649
649
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt.........................................................................................651
Belt 651
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil Coating Roller.....................................................
Roller 653
653
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Belt Pressure Pad Cover and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Pressure
Pressure Pad.................................................................................................................................656
Pad 656
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Steering Roller..................................................................658
Roller 658
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Thermistor Thermistor.................................................................659 659
Replacing the Primary Fixing
Fixing Pressure Belt Belt Bearings
Bearings 1, 1, 3, 4 and 5 and the Primary Fixing Pressure
Bushings................................................................................................................................ 661
Belt Bushings 661
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide..............................................................................................
Guide 663
663
Replacing the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit Unit........................................................................... 664
664
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Thermistor Thermistor............................................. 671
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing Fixing External
External HeatHeat Cleaning Roller Roller................................................ 674
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Lower Roller
Roller Thermoswitch
Thermoswitch.............................. 675 675
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Upper Roller
Roller Thermoswitch
Thermoswitch.............................. 677
External HeatHeat Upper Roller Roller Heater.........................................
Heater 678
678
External HeatHeat Lower Roller Roller Heater.........................................
Heater 681
681
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Heat Belt/Roller
Belt/Roller Bearings/Insulating
Bearings/Insulating Bushes Bushes.............. 685 685
Replacement of
Replacement of the
the Primary/Secondary
Primary/Secondary Fixing Fixing External
External HeatHeat Drawer
Drawer Harness
Harness Unit Unit............................... 687
687
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Roller....................................................................................... 691691
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claw...............................................................
Claw 693
693
Replacing the Primary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claw.............................................................
Claw 693
693
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Separation Air Air Nozzle.........................................................694
Nozzle 694
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Separation Air Nozzle.......................................................
Nozzle 695
695
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Connection Lower Lower Guide and Roller....................................
Roller 697
697
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller....................................................................
Roller 698
698
Replacing the Primary Fixing Sub Station Air Flow Unit........................................................................700
Unit 700
Pulling Out
Pulling Out the
the Secondary Fixing Assembly
Secondary Fixing Assembly........................................................................................ 702
Replacing the
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Web Web Unit...........................................................................................703
Unit 703
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle.....................................................705
Nozzle 705
Fixing Roller Collection Roller......................................................................
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller 706
706
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.............................................................................707
Unit 707
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when 1 person working alone)...........................................
alone) 708
708
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when working with with 22 or more people).................................
people) 710
Opening/Closing
Opening/Closing the
the Secondary
Secondary FixingFixing Upper
Upper Unit..............................................................................
Unit 712
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller, Bearings, and Insulating Insulating Bushes
Bushes..............................................716 716
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Thermistor......................................................................... 721
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Thermistor........................................................................721 721
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Thermistor.......................................................................722 722
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing
Fixing Roller Thermoswitch
Thermoswitch............................................................................723 723
Fixing Roller Thermoswitch
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Thermoswitch..........................................................................723 723
Replacing the
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller,
Roller, Bearings,
Bearings, and and Insulating
Insulating Bushes
Bushes................................724 724
Cleaning the Secondary
Fixing Pressure Roller Sub
Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
Thermistor........................................................... 728
Replacing the
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure RollerRoller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor..........................................................729 729
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor Thermistor........................................................ 729
v
Contents
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller Roller.......................................................730730

Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller Roller.....................................................................731731
Fixing Inlet
Inlet Guide..........................................................................................733
Guide 733
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch Thermoswitch............................................................734 734
Replacing the
Replacing the Secondary Fixing External
Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit......................................................................
Heat Belt Unit 735
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Roller................................................................................... 742
Fixing Delivery
Delivery Lower
Lower Separation
Separation Claws.........................................................743
Claws 743
Replacing the
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Delivery
Delivery Lower
Lower Separation
Separation Claws.......................................................
Claws 744
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate..................................................745
Plate 745
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate................................................
Plate 746
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller Roller................................................................ 747
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit Unit....................................................................749
749
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit...............................................................
Unit 750
750
Atmospheric Pressure
Replacing the Atmospheric Pressure Relief
Relief Valve Unit Unit.........................................................................751
751
Replacing the Relief Valve Unit
Unit.......................................................................................................... 752
Replacing the
Replacing the Pressure
Pressure Gauge Unit....................................................................................................752
Gauge Unit 752
Replacing the Air Filter Unit................................................................................................................753
Unit 753
Replacing the Fixing Air Tube Filter
Filter.................................................................................................... 754
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump Filter
Filter................................................................................................... 755
Pickup // Feed
Pickup System..................................................................................................................... 757
Feed System 757
Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit Unit.............................................................................................757
757
Replacing the Main Station Duplex Feed Right Unit Unit............................................................................. 759
Replacing the
Replacing the Main Station Duplex
Main Station Duplex Feed Middle Unit
Feed Middle Unit........................................................................... 761
Replacing the
Replacing the Main Station Duplex
Main Station Duplex FeedFeed LeftLeft Unit
Unit............................................................................... 764
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed
Feed Sensor
Sensor 1/Secondary
1/Secondary TransferTransfer Outlet
Outlet Sensor............................................
Sensor 768
768
Replacing the
Replacing the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Unit Unit............................................................................................................768
768
Replacing the
Cross-feed RollerRoller Cleaning
Cleaning Member..............................................................................769
Member 769
Replacing the
Cross-feed Roller.........................................................................................................
Roller 769
769
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller Cleaning
Cleaning Member, Cross-feed Unit,
Member, Cross-feed Unit, and
and Cross-feed
Cross-feed RollersRollers.................. 770
Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning ProcedureProcedure.............................................................................................771 771
Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Brush Brush................................................................................771 771
Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed Left Unit Unit............................................................................................... 772
Cleaning the Tandem
Tandem Feed Roller 1, 1, Tandem Slave Roller 1, 1, Tandem
Tandem Feed Roller 2, Tandem Slave
Roller 2, and Tandem Guides Guides......................................................................................................... 773
Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Bypass
Bypass FeedFeed Roller
Roller 1, Bypass Slave
1, Bypass Slave Roller
Roller 1, Bypass Feed
1, Bypass Roller 2,
Feed Roller Bypass Slave
2, Bypass Slave
Roller 2,
Roller Bypass Feed
2, Bypass Roller 3,
Feed Roller Bypass Slave
3, Bypass Roller 3,
Slave Roller 3, and
and Bypass
Bypass Guide
Guide........................................ 775
Replacing the
Replacing the Sub
Sub Station
Station Duplex
Duplex FeedFeed LeftLeft Unit
Unit................................................................................ 776
Replacing the
Replacing the Sub Station Duplex
Sub Station Duplex Feed Right Unit
Feed Right Unit.............................................................................. 778
Replacing the
Replacing the Tandem
Tandem Feed Unit....................................................................................................... 782
Feed Unit
Replacing the
Tandem Feed Roller Roller 1 and Tandem Feed Roller 2.........................................................
2 785
785
Replacing the
Replacing the Bypass
Bypass Feed Unit.........................................................................................................788
Feed Unit 788
Replacing the
Bypass Feed Feed Roller
Roller 1/ 1/ Bypass
Bypass Feed Feed Roller
Roller 2/Bypass
2/Bypass Feed Roller 3.................................790
Feed Roller 3 790
Replacing the Fixing Merging Path Unit..............................................................................................
Unit 793
Replacing the Fixing
Fixing Merging
Merging Path Feed Belts Belts.................................................................................... 795
Replacing the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler Slave Roller and the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler
Drive Roller
Roller................................................................................................................................... 796
796
Cleaning the Fixing Merging Unit Bypass Decurler Drive Roller............................................................
Roller 797
Replacing the Fixing Merging Unit (Lower)..........................................................................................
(Lower) 797
Replacing the
Tandem Feed Roller 3..................................................................................................799
Feed Roller 3 799
Replacing the
Bypass Feed Roller 4...................................................................................................
Feed Roller 4 802
802
Cleaning the Fixing Merging Path Feed Feed BeltBelt Opposition
Opposition Roller.............................................................
Roller 805
805
Cleaning the Tandem Feed Roller 3, Tandem Feed Feed Slave
Slave Roller
Roller 3, 3, and
and Fixing
Fixing Merging Guide Guide............... 806 806
vi
Contents
Cleaning the Bypass

Bypass Feed Roller 4, Bypass Feed Slave Roller Roller 4, 4, and
and Fixing
Fixing Merging Guide Guide..................806 806
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Unit
Unit.................................................................................................... 807
807
Replacing the
Replacing the Duplex
Duplex Decurler
Decurler Unit
Unit (Upper)........................................................................................
(Upper) 808
808
Replacing the
Duplex Decurler
Decurler Unit
Unit Feed Belts................................................................................... 809
Feed Belts 809
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Slave Roller and Duplex Decurler Drive Roller Roller...................................... 810810
Pulling Out
Pulling Out the
the Delivery/Reverse Unit................................................................................................. 811
Delivery/Reverse Unit
Cleaning the Delivery/Reverse Flapper Flag........................................................................................811
Flag 811
Replacing the
Replacing Color Sensor
the Color Sensor Unit
Unit Sponge
Sponge Roller...................................................................................812
Roller 812
Replacing the Delivery
Delivery Decurler
Decurler Slave
Slave Roller
Roller 2, 2, Delivery
Delivery Slave Roller 1, and Delivery Slave Roller 2...... 2 813
Cleaning the Delivery Roller
Roller 1,
1, Delivery Slave Roller 1, Delivery Roller 2 and Delivery Slave Roller 2..... 2 816
Cleaning the Duplex Reverse Roller and Duplex Duplex Reverse
Reverse Rear Roller Roller.................................................. 817
Duplex Reverse Roller and Duplex Duplex Reverse
Reverse Rear Roller Roller.................................................818818
Delivery Reverse Roller 1 and Delivery Reverse Roller 2................................................
2 820
820
Replacing the S2M 30T
30T Pulley/Delivery
Pulley/Delivery Roller 1/Delivery Reverse Front Roller Roller..................................... 823823
Cleaning the Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Roller
Roller 1/Delivery
1/Delivery Reverse
Reverse Roller
Roller 2/Delivery
2/Delivery Reverse
Reverse Rear Roller Roller............ 826
826
Roller.........................................................................................828
Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Front Roller 828
Replacing the Delivery Roller 3..........................................................................................................
3 829
829
Replacing the
Delivery Upper
Upper Guide Unit............................................................................................ 831
Guide Unit 831
Replacing the
Delivery Guide
Guide (Lower)
(Lower) 3..............................................................................................
3 833
833
Replacing the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 1....................................................................................833
1 833
Replacing the Delivery Roller 2..........................................................................................................
2 834
834
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Rear Roller
Roller........................................................................................835835
Cleaning the Delivery Decurler Roller Opposition Roller.......................................................................836
Roller 836
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse Front Slave Roller Roller.............................................................................. 836
836
Replacing the
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse Unit One-way
Delivery/Reverse Unit One-way ClutchClutch.......................................................................... 840840
Replacing the
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse
Unit Decurler
Decurler Backup
Backup Roller
Roller Cleaning
Cleaning Brushes
Brushes.................................... 841
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Unit
Unit..................................................................................................... 841
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Pickup Unit..........................................................................................
Unit 844
Replacing the
Replacing the Left/Right
Left/Right Deck
Deck Separation
Separation Pad....................................................................................
Pad 846
846
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Lifter Motor Unit...................................................................................
Unit 847
External // Auxiliary
External Auxiliary System..............................................................................................................849
System 849
Replacing the
Replacing the Main
Main Station
Station Upper
Upper Right
Right Suction
Suction Filters
Filters........................................................................849849
Replacing the
Replacing the Main
Main Station
Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Suction
Suction Filters
Filters..........................................................................849849
Replacing the
Replacing the Main
Main Station
Station Rear
Rear Ozone
Ozone Filters
Filters (Y)
(Y) // (M/C/Bk)..............................................................
(M/C/Bk) 850
850
Replacing the Main Station
Station Rear
Rear Toner Filters
Filters (Y/M/C/Bk)...................................................................
(Y/M/C/Bk) 851
851
Disassembling/Cleaning the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone
Disassembling/Cleaning the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone Filter/Filter Base Filter/Filter Base............................. 852
852
Replacing/Cleaning the
Replacing/Cleaning the Sub
Sub Station
Station Rear
Rear Middle
Middle Ozone Filter..............................................................854
Ozone Filter 854
Replacing the
Replacing the Power Unit Station
Power Unit Station Ozone Filter.................................................................................... 855
Ozone Filter 855
Replacing the
Replacing the Sub
Sub Station
Station Front
Front Left
Left Cover.........................................................................................856
Cover 856
Replacing the
Replacing the Waste Toner Container
Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 856 856
Replacing the
Replacing the Main Station Front
Main Station Front Upper
Upper Cove.....................................................................................
Cove 857
857
Disengaging the
Disengaging the Power Unit Station
Power Unit Station....................................................................................................860860
Replacing the
Replacing the Main
Main Station
Station Rear Covers.............................................................................................862
Rear Covers 862
Disengaging the
Disengaging Sub Station
the Sub Station.............................................................................................................. 863
863
Options............................................................................................................................................
Options 870
870
Replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller...................................................................................870
Roller 870
Replacing the
Replacing the Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray Separation
Separation Roller............................................................................
Roller 871
Replacing the
Replacing the DADF
DADF + Reader Unit
Unit.................................................................................................... 872
5.
5. Adjustment...................................................................................................
Adjustment 877
Basic Adjustment
Basic Adjustment.............................................................................................................................878
878
vii
Contents
Image Position Adjustment

Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................878
878
Adjusting the
Adjusting the Side Registration...........................................................................................................888
Side Registration 888
Density Adjustment
Density Adjustment of
ofColor
ColorSensor
Sensor(Only(OnlyWhenWhen imagePRESS
imagePRESS Server Server Is Is Installed)
Installed)............................... 889889
When replacing
When replacing parts
parts...................................................................................................................... 894 894
Main Controller
Controller..................................................................................................................................894
894
Laser Exposure
Laser Exposure System
System ....................................................................................................................897 897
Image Formation System...................................................................................................................
899
Fixing System...................................................................................................................................
System 914
Pickup Feed
Pickup System..........................................................................................................................918
Feed System 918
6.
6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................922
Troubleshooting 922
Making Initial Checks......................................................................................................................
Making Initial Checks 923
923
List of Initial
Initial Check
Check Items...................................................................................................................
Items 923
923
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 924
Test Print 924
Overview..........................................................................................................................................
Overview 924
Selecting Test Print
Print TYPE..................................................................................................................924
TYPE 924
How to check
How to check test
test print
print...................................................................................................................... 925
925
Image Adjustment Basic
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure................................................................................................
Procedure 929
929
Making Pre-Checks...........................................................................................................................
Pre-Checks 929
929
Gradient adjustment in
Gradient adjustment in density
density between
between the the front
front side
side and
and the
the rear side................................................930
rear side 930
Adjustment of
Adjustment of density
density difference
difference (1/3).................................................................................................
(1/3) 931
931
Adjustment of
density difference
difference (2/3).................................................................................................
(2/3) 932
932
Adjustment of
density difference
difference (3/3).................................................................................................
(3/3) 933
933
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................934
Items 934
List of
List of Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items.............................................................................................................
Items 934
934
Failure diagnosis of the air flow in the fixing system.............................................................................
system 934
934
Wrinkles in the Pressure Belt
Belt............................................................................................................. 937
937
Forcible
Forcible stop
stop of
of paper
paper feed.................................................................................................................937
feed 937
Message "Adjusting the
Message "Adjusting fixing assembly"
the fixing assembly" does does notnot disappear...............................................................
disappear 939
939
Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow Flow....................................................................................................939939
Image failure....................................................................................................................................943
Image failure 943
Image with Crepe Marks/Image with Scrawled Marks..........................................................................
Marks 943
943
Image ofof separation failure in the Primary Fixing Assembly Assembly.................................................................. 946 946
direction.............................................................................................................. 947
Lines in the vertical direction
Soiled image
Soiled image on on the
the 1st
1st side
side ofof 2-sided
2-sided print
print....................................................................................... 947
Soiled trailing
Soiled trailing edge/soiled
edge/soiled paper edge on
paper edge on both
both sides
sides ofof 2-sided
2-sided print
print.....................................................948
948
Soiling of
Soiling of spots
spots atat Secondary
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
Transfer Outer Belt intervals
intervals.................................................................. 949 949
Soiling of
Soiling of spots
spots atat ITB intervals.......................................................................................................... 949
ITB intervals 949
Bk soiling
Bk soiling at at the
the front
front edge
edge on on the
the back side........................................................................................950
back side 950
Vertical white
Vertical white line
line onon solid
solid image
image of of each color....................................................................................951
each color 951
Vertical lines
Vertical lines due
due toto poor
poor transfer
transfer atat the
the ITB........................................................................................
ITB 952
952
Pinhole soiling (ring
(ring mark)..................................................................................................................952
mark) 952
Soiled image
Soiled image due due toto paper
paper dust
dust.......................................................................................................... 953
953
Lined image
Lined image at at the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of of the
the 2nd
2nd side
side ofof 2-sided
2-sided print
print............................................................ 955
955
Lined image
Lined image on on the
the 1st
1st side
side ofof 2-sided
2-sided print
print........................................................................................ 956
956
Image failure due
Image failure due toto poor
poor gradation
gradation performance
performance.................................................................................958 958
Soiled back
Soiled back (Slip-through
(Slip-through of of patch-like
patch-like toner)......................................................................................
toner) 960
960
Toner
Toner soiling
soiling atat the
the edge
edge ofof 13
13 xx 19
19 size
size paper....................................................................................960
paper 960
Actions to
Actions to Be
Be Taken
Taken WhenWhen Hue Hue Variation
VariationOccurs
Occurs(imagePRESS
(imagePRESSServer ServerB4100/B5100
B4100/65100 Series) Series).............. 967 967
Faulty Feeding.................................................................................................................................968
Faulty Feeding 968
viii
Contents
Measure against 0110JAM

Measure against (Secondary Transfer
0110JAM (Secondary Transfer Outlet
Outlet Sensor
Sensor DelayDelay Jam)..........................................
Jam) 968
968
Measure against (Pre-fixing Feed
0112JAM (Pre-fixing Feed Sensor
Sensor 22 Delay
Delay Jam)........................................................968
Jam) 968
Measure against 0300JAM (wrong
(wrong detection
detection of
of double
double feed)
feed) at at feeding
feeding of of Washi
Washi (JPN(JPN Paper)...............
Paper) 968
968
Actions to
Actions to Take
Take When
When Paper Double Feed
Paper Double Occurs.............................................................................. 968
Feed Occurs 968
Controller
Controller Self
Self Diagnosis.................................................................................................................983
Diagnosis 983
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................983
Introduction 983
Overview..........................................................................................................................................
Overview 983
983
Basic Flowchart
Basic Flowchart.................................................................................................................................985985
Controller
Controller System Error Diagnosis
System Error Diagnosis......................................................................................................985 985
Debug log
Debug log........................................................................................................................................ 991
991
Purpose............................................................................................................................................991
Purpose 991
Overview..........................................................................................................................................
Overview 991
991
Collecting System Information............................................................................................................
Collecting System Information 994
994
When to
When to Obtain
Obtain Logs
Logs.........................................................................................................................998998
Network
Network Packet Capture.................................................................................................................. 1000
Packet Capture 1000
Version upgrade
Version upgrade............................................................................................................................ 1007 1007
Overview........................................................................................................................................
Overview 1007
1007
Version Upgrade
Version Upgrade via via SST.................................................................................................................1010
SST 1010
Version Upgrade
Version using USB
Upgrade using flash drive
USB flash drive Storage
Storage Device.....................................................................1029
Device 1029
Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting 1044
Version Upgrade
Version Upgrade via via CDS................................................................................................................
CDS 1045
1045
7. Error/Jam/Alarm.........................................................................................
Error/Jam/Alarm 1080
Over View......................................................................................................................................1081
Over View 1081
Location Code.................................................................................................................................1081
Location Code 1081
Pickup position
Pickup position code........................................................................................................................1081
code 1081
Pickup size.....................................................................................................................................
size 1082
1082
Points to
Points to Note
Note When
When Clearing
Clearing MN-CON............................................................................................1082
MN-CON 1082
Points to
Points to Note
Note When
When Clearing
Clearing HDD..................................................................................................
HDD 1082
1082
Error Code.....................................................................................................................................1083
Error Code 1083
Error Code
Error Details........................................................................................................................... 1083
Code Details 1083
Jam Code......................................................................................................................................
Jam Code 1733
1733
Jam
Jam Type........................................................................................................................................1733
Type 1733
Jam screen display
Jam screen display specification
specification.......................................................................................................1733 1733
Host
Host Machine
Machine (Main Station)............................................................................................................ 1734
(Main Station)
Host
Host Machine
Machine (Sub Station)..............................................................................................................1736
(Sub Station) 1736
Duplex Color
Duplex Color Image
Image Reader Unit-K1................................................................................................. 1738
Reader Unit-K1 1738
Deck-D1................................................................................................................................. 1740
POD Deck-D1
Secondary POD
Secondary POD Deck-D1................................................................................................................
Deck-D1 1742
Lite-C1........................................................................................................................... 1745
POD Deck Lite-C1
Document Insertion
Document Insertion Unit-N1.............................................................................................................
Unit-N1 1745
Unit-J1...................................................................................................................... 1747
Paper Folding Unit-J1
Perfect Binder-E1............................................................................................................................
Binder-El 1748
High
High Capacity
Capacity Stacker-H1
Stacker-H1 // Secondary
Secondary High High Capacity
Capacity Stacker-H1......................................................
Stacker-H1 1750
1750
Multi Function
Function Professional
Professional Puncher-A1............................................................................................1753
Puncher-Al 1753
Finisher-AN1 / Saddle Finisher-AN2
Finisher-AN2................................................................................................. 1755 1755
BOOKLET TRIMMER-D1.................................................................................................................1757
TRIMMER-D1 1757
BOOKLET TRIMMER-F1.................................................................................................................
TRIMMER-F1 1758
1758
Two-Knife Booklet
Booklet Trimmer-A1.........................................................................................................1759
Trimmer-Al 1759
Alarm Code...................................................................................................................................
Alarm Code 1760
1760
ix
Contents
Alarm Code
Alarm Details..........................................................................................................................1760
Code Details 1760
8.
8. Service
Service Mode..............................................................................................
Mode 1962
1962
Overview.......................................................................................................................................
Overview 1963
1963
Entering Service
Entering Service Mode.....................................................................................................................1963
Mode 1963
Points to
Points to note
note when
when using
using Service
Service Mode...........................................................................................1963
Mode 1963
Service Mode
Service Mode Menu.........................................................................................................................1963
Menu 1963
Service mode
Service mode item
item explanations
explanations....................................................................................................... 1964 1964
I/O information enhancement...........................................................................................................
enhancement 1964
1964
Display of
Display of Error
Error Code/Alarm
Code/Alarm Code Code description
description................................................................................... 1966 1966
COPIER >> OPTION
OPTION >>BODY,
BODY,Item ItemSegmentation
Segmentation.............................................................................. 1967 1967
Security features.............................................................................................................................
Security features 1968
1968
Switching Screen
Switching Screen (Level
(Level 11 << -- >> 2)....................................................................................................
2) 1969
1969
Language switch
Language switch............................................................................................................................. 1970
1970
Back-up of
Back-up of service
service mode..................................................................................................................1971
mode 1971
The data output
The data output of
of the
the service
service data
data print
print........................................................................................... 1972
Introduction
Introduction of
of situation
situation mode...........................................................................................................1973
mode 1973
COPIER (Service mode
COPIER (Service mode for
for printer)
printer)...............................................................................................1975
1975
DISPLAY (State
DISPLAY (State display
display mode).........................................................................................................1975
mode) 1975
I/O (I/O display
I/O (I/O display mode)......................................................................................................................2101
mode) 2101
ADJUST (Adjustment
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................
mode) 2145
FUNCTION (Operation // inspection
FUNCTION (Operation inspection mode)........................................................................................
mode) 2242
OPTION (Specification setting
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................2297
mode) 2297
TEST (Print test
TEST (Print test mode)....................................................................................................................
mode) 2419
COUNTER (Counter mode)
COUNTER (Counter mode)..............................................................................................................2427
2427
FEEDER (ADF
FEEDER (ADF service
service mode)
mode).......................................................................................................2624
2624
DISPLAY (State
DISPLAY (State display
display mode).........................................................................................................2624
mode) 2624
ADJUST (Adjustment
mode) 2625
2625
mode) 2627
SORTER (Servicemode
SORTER (Service modefor
for delivery
delivery options)
options)...............................................................................2631
2631
ADJUST (Adjustment
mode) 2631
2631
mode) 2655
2655
OPTION (Specification setting
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................2660
mode) 2660
MISC (Individual setting
MISC (Individual setting mode).........................................................................................................2673
mode) 2673
9. Installation..................................................................................................
Installation 2679
How to Check
How to Check this
this Installation
Installation Procedure......................................................................................2680
Procedure 2680
Description on
Description on the
the parts
parts included
included in in the
the package...............................................................................
package 2680
2680
Symbols in
Symbols in the
the Illustration
Illustration................................................................................................................ 2680
2680
Checking before Installation
Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 2681
2681
Selecting the
Selecting the Installation
Installation Site............................................................................................................2681
Site 2681
Checking the Installation
Checking the Installation Space........................................................................................................2681
Space 2681
Order of Installing
Order of Installing the
the Host
Host Machine
Machine and and Options
Options.............................................................................. 26822682
Points to
to Note When Moving This Host Machine................................................................................2684
Machine 2684
Explanation for Safety......................................................................................................................2684
Safety 2684
Points to
Points to Note at Installation
Note at Installation.............................................................................................................2685
2685
Unpacking..................................................................................................................................... 2686
Unpacking 2686
Checking
Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................. 2688
the Contents 2688
Installation
Installation Procedure....................................................................................................................2690
Procedure 2690
x
Contents
Preparing the
Preparing the Starter.......................................................................................................................
Starter 2690
2690
Positioning and
Positioning and Securing
Securing the
the Main Station........................................................................................ 2690
Main Station 2690
Installing the Deck................................................................................................................
Before Installing Deck 2692
2692
Before Installing
Before Installing the
the Feed Assembly................................................................................................. 2693
Feed Assembly 2693
Installing
Installing the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer OuterOuter Belt......................................................................................2694
Belt 2694
Engaging the Primary Transfer Roller...............................................................................................
Roller 2702
Connecting
Connecting the the Main Station and
Main Station and thethe Sub
Sub Station
Station.............................................................................. 2705
2705
Connecting
Connecting the the Waste Toner Connecting
Waste Toner Connecting Pipe...................................................................................2711
Pipe 2711
Connecting
Connecting the the Main Station and
Main Station and Sub Station with
Sub Station with the
the Cable..............................................................2712
Cable 2712
Connecting
Connecting the the Power Unit Station
Power Unit Station................................................................................................... 2714
Installing the Primary Fixing Assembly..............................................................................................
Assembly 2719
Installing
Installing the Secondary Fixing Assembly..........................................................................................2721
Assembly 2721
Installing
Installing the
the Duplex
Duplex Feed Assembly
Assembly................................................................................................ 2722
Installing
Installing the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Receptacle..............................................................................................
Receptacle 2724
Installing
Installing the
the Process
Process Unit................................................................................................................2724
Unit 2724
Installing the Image
Installing the Image Reader Unit / Printer Cover................................................................................ 2730
Cover 2730
Installing
Installing the
the Upright
Upright Control
Control Panel...............................................................................................2731
Panel 2731
Product Name.................................................................................................................................
Product Name 2731
Checking before Installation
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 2731
Checking
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................2731
the Contents 2731
Installation
Installation Procedure......................................................................................................................
Procedure 2731
Installing
Installing Others............................................................................................................................
Others 2736
2736
Label...................................................................................................................................2736
R-HDD Label 2736
Service Book
Service Book Holder........................................................................................................................
Holder 2737
Turning
Turning ON the Main
ON the Main Power
Power Switch
Switch.............................................................................................. 2738
2738
Registering the
Registering the Speed License......................................................................................................... 2738
Speed License 2738
Checking
Checking thethe Settings
Settings of
of the
the Image
Image Reader Unit/Printer Cover...........................................................
Reader Unit/Printer Cover 2740
Setting the
Setting the Toner
Toner Container.............................................................................................................
Container 2740
Supplying the
Supplying the Starter.......................................................................................................................
Starter 2741
Checking the Height of the Primary Charging Assembly Assembly.....................................................................2744 2744
Executing Auto
Executing Auto Adjust
Adjust Gradation
Gradation (Full(Full Adjust)
Adjust)................................................................................... 2747
Registering Paper
Registering to Adjust
Paper to Adjust..............................................................................................................2747
2747
Executing Correct
Executing Correct Shading...............................................................................................................2748
Shading 2748
Auto Correct
Auto Correct Color
Color Tone Settings (Register
Tone Settings Correction Pattern)..........................................................2749
(Register Correction Pattern) 2749
Image Position Adjustment
Image Position Adjustment...............................................................................................................27502750
Paper Settings
Paper Settings................................................................................................................................ 2764
Affixing the Label.............................................................................................................................2765
Label 2765
Checking
Checking thethe Serial
Serial Number.............................................................................................................2769
Number 2769
Setting Method
Setting Method when when the
the High
High Capacity
Capacity Stacker-H1
Stacker-H1 Is Is Installed
Installed......................................................... 2769
2769
Record of
Record of Complete
Complete of of Instruct
Instruct to to User.............................................................................................
User 2770
Connecting
Connecting to to the
the Network...............................................................................................................
Network 2770
When Relocating
When Relocating the
the Machine......................................................................................................
Machine 2771
2771
Works Before
Works Before Relocation
Relocation................................................................................................................. 2771
Works After
Works After Relocation
Relocation.................................................................................................................... 2776
Tab Feeding Attachment-E1.........................................................................................................
Tab Feeding Attachment-El 2778
2778
Checking
the Contents 2778
Installation
Procedure 2778
Reader Heater
Reader Heater Unit
Unit....................................................................................................................... 2779
2779
Checking
Checking the
the Contents
Contents (Reader
(Reader Heater
Heater Unit-G1)...............................................................................
Unit-G1) 2779
Checking
Checking the Parts to
the Parts to be
be Installed
Installed (Europe,
(Europe, Australia
Australia only)
only).................................................................2779
2779
Check Items When Turning
Turning OFF OFF the Main Power..............................................................................
Power 2779
xi
Contents
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................2779

Drawing 2779
Installation
Procedure 2779
Cassette
Cassette Heater Unit-32................................................................................................................2784
Heater Unit-32 2784
Checking
the Contents 2784
Points to
2784
Check Items when Turning
Turning OFF
OFF the Main Power...............................................................................
Power 2784
Installation
Procedure 2784
Voice Guidance
Voice Guidance Kit-F2
Kit-F2.................................................................................................................. 2793
2793
Points to
2793
Check Items when Turning
Turning OFFOFF the Main Power...............................................................................
Power 2793
2793
Drawing 2793
Checking
the Contents 2793
Installation Procedure 2794
Checking the Settings
Checking the Settings...................................................................................................................... 2799
2799
Operation
Operation Check.............................................................................................................................
Check 2799
2799
HDD-related Option.......................................................................................................................2800
HDD-related Option 2800
Points to
2800
Combinations
Combinations of of HDD Options..........................................................................................................2800
HDD Options 2800
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD HDD Data DataEncryption
Encryption & & Mirroring
Mirroring Kit Kit................................................. 2800
2800
Checking
the Contents 2800
Setting Before Turning
Turning OFF
OFF the Power.............................................................................................
Power 2801
2801
Check Item When Turning
Turning OFFOFF the Main Power................................................................................
Power 2801
2801
Drawing 2802
Installation
Procedure 2802
2802
Installing
Installing the
the System
System Using
Using SST.......................................................................................................2810
SST 2810
The download of
The download of the
the Maintenance
Maintenance Assist Assist Tool
Tool................................................................................... 2811
Checking
Checking thethe Security
Security Version
Version..........................................................................................................2812 2812
Checking
Checking thethe Security
Security Mark..............................................................................................................2812
Mark 2812
Mirroring........................................................................................................................ 2812
Setting the Mirroring
Informing
Informing the
the System Administrator That
System Administrator That Installation
Installation Is Is Complete.......................................................
Complete 2813
2813
Executing Image
Executing Quality Adjustment
Image Quality Adjustment.................................................................................................2813 2813
Long Sheet
Long Sheet Tray-C1......................................................................................................................
Tray-C1 2814
2814
Drawing 2814
Checking the Contents 2814
Installation
Procedure 2814
10. Operator
10. Operator Maintenance.............................................................................
Maintenance 2815
2815
Overview of Operator
Overview of Operator Maintenance...............................................................................................2816
Maintenance 2816
Operator
Operator Maintenance Parts............................................................................................................ 2816
Maintenance Parts 2816
Preparation for
Preparation for Introduction
Introduction...........................................................................................................2817 2817
Target Equipment
Equipment............................................................................................................................2817 2817
List of
List of Parts
Parts Requiring
Requiring Replacement/Cleaning...................................................................................
Replacement/Cleaning 2817
Allocation of Work...........................................................................................................................
Work 2821
Installation
Installation ofof Operator
Operator Maintenance
Maintenance Software...................................................................................2821
Software 2821
Initial Setting...................................................................................................................................
Setting 2825
2825
Version Upgrade
Version Upgrade of of Operator
Maintenance SoftwareSoftware......................................................................... 2834 2834
Introduction
Introduction Workflow....................................................................................................................2838
Workflow 2838
Overview........................................................................................................................................
Overview 2838
2838
Installation
Installation // Initial
Initial Settings...............................................................................................................2839
Settings 2839
Replacement // Cleaning
Replacement Cleaning of of Parts
Parts...................................................................................................... 2839
2839
xii
Contents
Refurbishing the Fixing Assembly.....................................................................................................2840

Assembly 2840
Reconditioning of
Reconditioning of the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Assembly
Assembly and and thethe Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer BeltBelt Unit.....................
Unit 2840
2840
11. Maintenance
11. Maintenance Assist
Assist Tool.........................................................................
Tool 2841
Maintenance Assist Tool
Maintenance Assist Tool............................................................................................................... 2842
2842
Introduction.....................................................................................................................................
Introduction 2842
Overview........................................................................................................................................
Overview 2843
2843
Usage.............................................................................................................................................2844
Usage 2844
Announcement................................................................................................................................ 2846
Announcement 2846
APPENDICES..................................................................................................2848
APPENDICES 2848
Service Tools ................................................................................................................................2849
Service Tools 2849
Special Tools
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................. 2849
2849
Solvents and
Solvents Oils............................................................................................................................ 2851
and Oils 2851
General Timing Chart....................................................................................................................
General Timing Chart 2853
2853
Basic Sequence..............................................................................................................................
Basic Sequence 2853
2853
General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................2856
General Circuit Diagram 2856
General Circuit Diagram
General Circuit Diagram -- Main
Main Station
Station -- 1/5......................................................................................2856
1/5 2856
Main Station
Station -- 2/5......................................................................................2857
2/5 2857
Main Station
Station -- 3/5......................................................................................2858
3/5 2858
Main Station
Station -- 4/5......................................................................................2859
4/5 2859
Main Station
Station -- 5/5......................................................................................2860
5/5 2860
General Circuit Diagram - Sub Station - 1/2.......................................................................................2861
General Circuit Diagram - Sub Station - 1/2 2861
General Circuit Diagram -- Sub
Sub Station
Station -- 2/2.......................................................................................2862
2/2 2862
General Circuit Diagram -- Power
Power Unit
Unit Station
Station -- 1/2............................................................................
1/2 2863
2863
General Circuit Diagram -- Power
Power Unit
Unit Station
Station -- 2/2............................................................................
2/2 2864
2864
Backup Data..................................................................................................................................2865
Backup Data 2865
Detail of
Detail of HDD
HDD partition
partition ..................................................................................................................2875
2875
Soft
Soft Counter List............................................................................................................................2876
Counter List 2876
Soft counter
Soft counter specifications
specifications............................................................................................................... 2876
2876
Removal........................................................................................................................................ 2881
Removal 2881
Overview........................................................................................................................................
Overview 2881
2881
Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 2881
Work Procedure 2881
xiii
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Laser Safety.......................................... 2 2
Handling
Handling of
of Laser
Laser System.....................
System 2
2
Turn power switch
Turn power switch ON...........................3
ON 3
Safety of Toner......................................4
Safety of Toner 4
Notes When Handling
Notes When Handling aa Lithium
Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Battery 4
Notes Before it
Notes Before it Works
Works Serving
Serving.............. 4 4
Points to
Points to Note
Note at Cleaning.................... 5
at Cleaning 5
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Since radiation
Since radiation emitted
emitted inside
inside the
the machine
machine is
is completely
completely confined
confined within
within protective
protective housings and external
housings and external covers,
covers, the
the laser
laser beam
beam
cannot escape
cannot escape from
from the
the machine
machine during
during any
any phase
phase ofof user
user operation.
operation.
Therefore this
Therefore this machine
machine isis classified
classified in
in Class
Class 11 laser
laser products
products that
that are
are regarded
regarded as
as safe
safe during
during normal
normal use
use according
according to
to
International Standard
International Standard IEC60825-1.
IEC60825-1.
Handling of Laser System

This machine
This machine is
is classified
classified in
in Class
Class 11 laser
laser products.
products.
However, inside
However, inside the
the machine,
machine, Class
Class 3B
3B laser
laser beam
beam isis emitted
emitted and
and is
is hazardous
hazardous whenwhen entered
entered into
into an
an eye.
eye.
When servicing
When servicing the
the area
area around
around the
the laser
laser assembly,
assembly, bebe sure
sure to
to turn
turn off
off the
the main
main power.
power.
If you
If you must
must service
service while
while the
the power
power is
is turned
turned on,
on, be
be sure
sure to
to keep
keep the
the followings:
followings:
•• Do
Do not
not use
use aa screwdriver
screwdriver oror tools
tools that
that have
have a a high
high level
level of
of reflectance
reflectance in in the
the laser
laser path.
path.
•• Remove
Remove watches
watches and
and rings
rings before
before starting
starting the
the work.
work. (They
(They can
can reflect
reflect the
the laser
laser beam,
beam, possibly
possibly hitting
hitting an
an eye.)
eye.)
The machine's
The machine's covers
covers that
that confine
confine laser
laser beam
beam radiation
radiation are
are identified
identified byby means
means of of warning
warning labels
labels (Figure).
(Figure). If
If you
you must
must open
open the
the
cover, be
cover, be sure
sure not
not to
to enter
enter the
the laser
laser beam
beam intointo an
an eye
eye during
during the
the work.
work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Diese Maschine
Diese Maschine ist
ist der
der Klasse
Klasse 11 der
der Laserprodukte
Laserprodukte zugeordnet.
zugeordnet.
Innerhalb der
Innerhalb der Maschine
Maschine wirdwird jedoch
jedoch ein
ein Laserstrahl
Laserstrahl der
der Klasse
Klasse 3B
3B ausgestrahlt
ausgestrahlt und
und es
es ist
ist gefährlich,
gefahrlich, wenn
wenn dieser
dieser Strahl
Strahl in
in die
die
Augen gerat.
Augen gerät.
Bei Servicearbeiten
Bei Servicearbeiten am am oder
oder in
in der
der N5he
Nähe des
des Laserteils
Laserteils zuerst
zuerst das
das Hauptgerät
Hauptgerat abschalten.
abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten,
Bei Servicearbeiten, diedie unbedingt
unbedingt bei
bei eingeschaltetem
eingeschaltetem Gerät
Gerat durchgeführt
durchgefiihrt werden
werden müssen, auf jeden
miissen, auf jeden Fall
Fall die
die folgenden
folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
Vorsichtsmaanahmen beachten.
•• Keine
Keine stark
stark reflektierenden
reflektierenden Schraubenzieher
Schraubenzieher oder
oder ahnliche
ähnliche Werkzeuge
Werkzeuge direkt
direkt in
in den
den Lichtpfad
Lichtpfad des
des Laserstrahls
Laserstrahls bringen.
bringen.
•• Vor
Vor Beginn
Beginn der
der Arbeit
Arbeit Uhren,
Uhren, Ringe
Ringe und
und ähnliche
ahnliche Gegenstände
Gegenstande abnehmen.
abnehmen. (Reflektierende
(Reflektierende Laserstrahlen
Laserstrahlen könnten
kannten sonst
sonst inin
die
die Augen
Augen geraten.)
geraten.)
Die Geräte-Abdeckungen,
Die Gerate-Abdeckungen, die die Laserstrahlen
Laserstrahlen reflektieren
reflektieren !carmen,
können, werden
werden durch
durch besondere
besondere Warnaufkleber
Warnaufkleber gekennzeichnet
gekennzeichnet (siehe
(siehe
Bild).
Muss die
Muss die Abdeckung
Abdeckung geoffnet
geöffnet werden,
werden, besondere
besondere Vorsicht
Vorsicht walten
walten lassen,
lassen, damit
damit der
der Laserstrahl
Laserstrahl nicht
nicht in
in die
die Augen
Augen gerät.
gerat.
2
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
N.
..' DANGER - ...maim. when open. AVOID DIRECT ESPOSURE TO REAM. MS-0Sn
CAUTION - CLASS SO LASE9 RADLTION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE REAM.
ATTENTION - RATONNEMENT LASER OE CLAM SP EN CAS COOLIBEREIRE. Edna IMPOSITION AU PESOS..
VORSICHT - LASE9STRAN LUNG SLANE SD, WENN APPECKUNG GEOFFNET. NICHT DEN STRAIN. AUSSEMEN.
PRECAUCION - RAI:MACES. LASER DE CLASS SD PRESENTS AL APRIR. Eunm La IMPOSICION AL HAL
VARNING - MASSED LASERSTRALSING NAR DESNA DEL AR OPP., STRALEN AR FARM.
VAROITUS - LRCMS SP LASERNSATEILTA AVAITUNA VALTA ALTISTUMISTA SAMMIE.
2 2 - 1.7 44W. iMBOStiZit100t. eiMINflatilMAZ
A aATE et - 2 - #11:34394fflai1730111V&RIMMII . inalUi
21 - si..1°1 fre, ao Nom! vwdo1Re540. Fltlel fEi asEmAs.
i... il lf fi< t 4i903DWNffiptf5SIT, C—Alcilt t SM.... t,
DANGER -
Warman., Mon opn end larloc*.
NM LEW EPOSSIETO
CAUTION -
CUSS. LIM RAMOIMEN OPP MO
NEW= DIFIE91.010 STOBBIETELIF
ATTENTION rONISIENT LEER BS CLOSE NI SI CAS
D=OULORSOUE =Tr
.. rosmx
NI MOM
VORSICHT aFLUMFEE!
PRECAUCION RIBINCNIin OE CLAIM FREEMEN ASINI

VELA jEtalarain
YARNING - 2.3...2rd..3 ".".
VAROITUS - tal0=EIAL
L ML MA
• MfalteUtd9.9. 144.01113WN.
IIMSINRIMA
a it - F/111•1111111.*IPISNIMMEMIIMEI.
tpM
2r̀ 21 • WPM MI5 aCE d4 S93 9B *IA 11,401
446-14.55111 511..16141.42.
A It - f.s174444.°M.Irgagl.
FS11.1122
Turn power switch ON

machine is
The machine is equipped
equipped with
with 22 power
power switches:
switches: main
main power
power switch
switch and control
control panel power switch.
goes on
The machine goes on when
when the
the main
main power
power switch
switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low
low power
power mode,
mode, sleep mode).
A CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch
switch while
while the
the progress
progress bar
bar is
is indicated,
indicated, during
duringwhich
whichaccess
accessisismade
madeto
tothe
theHDD.
HDD. If
deprived of
of power,
power, the
the HDD
HDD can suffer
suffer aa fault
fault (E602).
(E602).
image PRESS
3
3
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Safety of Toner
O About Toner
The machine's
The machine's toner
toner is
is a
a non-toxic
non-toxic material
material made
made of
of plastic,
plastic, iron,
iron, and
and small
small amounts
amounts of
of dye.
dye.
A CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
O Toner on Clothing or Skin

•• If
If your
your clothing
clothing or
or skin
skin has
has come
come into
into contact
contact with
with toner,
toner, wipe
wipe itit off
off with
with tissue;
tissue; then,
then, wash
wash itit off
off with
with water.
water.
•• Do
Do not
not use
use warm
warm water,
water, which
which will
will cause
cause the
the toner
toner to
to jell
jell and
and fuse
fuse permanently
permanently with
with the
the fibers
fibers of
of the
the cloth.
cloth.
•• Tonner
Tonner isis easy
easy to
to react
react with
with plastic
plastic material,
material, avoid
avoid contact
contact with
with plastic.
plastic.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery
A CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
A CAUTION:
Wenn mit
Wenn mit dem
dem falschen
falschen Typ
Typ ausgewechselt,
ausgewechselt, besteht
besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung
gemaa der Anleitung beseitigen.
beseitigen.
MIi4 •3t .Tt 4tittif 114JM,

M iA Af-VNI ffl
Notes Before
Notes Before it
it Works
Works Serving
Serving
A CAUTION:
•• At
At servicing,
servicing, bebe sure
sure to
to turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the power
power source
source according
according toto the
the specified
specified steps
steps and
and disconnect
disconnect the
the power
power plug.
plug.
•• At
At the
the time
time of
of assembly and disassembly,
assembly and disassembly, bebe sure
sure to
to place
place a
a sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper under
under the
the parts
parts to
to prevent
prevent them
them from
from being
being
soiled or
soiled or foreign
foreign matter
matter from
from entering
entering the
the parts.
parts.
•• Before
Before installing
installing the
the parts
parts to
to the
the host
host machine,
machine, ensure
ensure that
that they
they are
are free
free of
of foreign
foreign matter.
matter.
4
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Points to Note at Cleaning
A CAUTION:
When performing
When performing cleaning
cleaning using
using organic
organic solvent
solvent such
such as
as alcohol,
alcohol, be
be sure
sure to
to check
check that
that the
the component
component of
of solvent
solvent is
is
vaporized completely
vaporized completely before
before assembling.
assembling.
5
1 Product Overview
Product
Product
Overview
Product lineups
lineups..................................... 7
Features..............................................
Features
7
14
14
Specifications......................................
Specifications 21
21
Name
Name ofof Parts
Parts..................................... 33
33
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Product lineups
Hostmachine
0 Host machine
㼕㼙㼍㼓㼑㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㻌㻯㻝㻜㻜㻜㻜㻌㼂㻼㻌㻛㻌㻯㻤㻜㻜㻜㻌㼂㻼
imagePRESS C10000 VP / C8000 VP
The underlined
The underlined numerical
numerical value
value indicates
indicates the
the print
print speed
speed (ppm:
(ppm: page
page per
per minute).
minute).
=NM
4.4
imagePRESS imagePRESS
C10000VP C8000VP
imagePRESS C10000VP
imagePRESS C10000VP imagePRESS C8000VP
imagePRESS C8000VP
Print speed 100 ppm 80 ppm
Positioning High-Production machine
Target machine: imagePRESS C7010/C6010 Series
*: The
*: The speed
speed of
of the
the host
host machine
machine is
is determined
determined by
by the
the license
license option.
option.
7
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Pickup/DeliverySystem
0 Pickup/Delivery System Options
Options
■
• Combination
Combination
The type
The type of
of connectable
connectable pickup/delivery
pickup/delivery system
system options
options differs
differs according
according to
to the
the model.
model.
LONG SHEET TRAY-A1

TRAY-Al
POD Buffer
Buffer Unit-A1
Unit-Al
Upright Control
Panel-F1
POD Deck Lite-C1
Lite-CI
I
L POD Deck
Adjuster-A1
Adjuster-Al
I g g
I AA!
imagePRESS C10000VP
POD Deck-D1
POD SecondaryPOD
Deck-D1 Secondary POD Deck-D1
Deck-D1
Multi Function
High Capacity Stacker-H1 Perfect Binder-E1
Binder-El Professional Puncher-A1
Professional Puncher-Al Document Insertion
Unit-NI
Unit-N1
Long Sheet Tray-C1

Tray-CI
Two-Knife Booklet Finisher-AN1

Finisher-ANI Paper Folding
Trimmer-A1
Trimmer-Al Booklet Trimmer-D1 Saddle Finisher-AN2 Unit-J1
Booklet Trimmer-F1
8
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
■ Required Options/Conditions
■Required Options/Conditions
Product name
Product name Required
- equired options,
options, conditions, etc.
conditions, etc. Remarks
Remarks
C10000
C10000 C8000
C8000
Secondary POD Deck- •• Pickup method: Air separation method Yes Yes
D1 •• Pickup
Pickup capacity:
capacity: 1,000x2+2,000
1,000x2+2,000 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m 2)
g/m2)
•• Paper
Paper type:
type: Plain
Plain paper, coated paper
paper, coated paper
•• Paper
Paper size:
size: B5
B5 (182
(182 xx 257
257 mm)
mm) to
to 13"
13" xx 19.2"
19.2" (330.2
(330.2 xx 487.7
487.7 mm)
mm)
•• Paper
Paper weight:
weight: 52
52 toto 350 g/m22
350 g/m
•• Double
Double feed
feed detection:
detection: Options
Options
** It
It cannot
cannot be
be used
used in
in combination
combination with
with LONG
LONG SHEET
SHEETTRAY-A1.
TRAY-Al.
POD Deck-D1 •• Pickup
Pickup method:
method: Air
Air separation
separation method
method Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Pickup
Pickup capacity:
capacity: 1,000x2+2,000
1,000x2+2,000 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m 2)
g/m2)
•• Paper
Paper type:
type: Plain
Plain paper,
paper, coated
coated paper
paper
•• Paper
Paper size:
size: B5
B5 (182
(182 xx 257
257 mm)
mm) to
to 13"
13" xx 19.2"
19.2" (330.2
(330.2 xx 487.7
487.7 mm)
mm)
•• Paper
Paper weight:
weight: 52
52 toto 350 g/m22
350 g/m
•• Double
Double feed
feed detection:
detection: Options
Options
** It
It cannot
cannot be
be used
used in
in combination
combination with
with LONG
LONG SHEET
SHEETTRAY-A1.
TRAY-Al.
LONG SHEET TRAY- •• Pickup
Pickup method:
method: Simple
Simple retard
retard method
method Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
A1
Al •• Pickup
Pickup capacity:
capacity: 11 sheet
sheet
•• Paper
Paper type:
type: Thin
Thin paper,
paper, plain
plain paper,
paper, heavy
heavy paper,
paper, recycled
recycled paper,
paper, color
color
paper,
paper, transparency,
transparency, film,
film, label
label paper,
paper, coated
coated paper,
paper, texture
texture paper,
paper,
bond
bond paper,
paper, letterhead,
letterhead, andand vellum
vellum paper
paper
•• Paper
Paper size:
size: Custom
Custom paper
paper size
size 13"
13" xx 19.2"
19.2" to
to 13"
13" xx 30"
30"
** Cannot
Cannot be
be used
used together
together with
with the
the POD
POD Deck-D1
Deck-D1
** Use
Use the
the extension
extension tray
tray together
together with
with the
the pickup/delivery
pickup/delivery side.
side.
POD Deck Lite-C1 •• Pickup
Pickup method:
method: Retard
Retard ++ air
air assist
assist method
method Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Pickup
Pickup capacity:
capacity: 4,000
4,000 sheets
sheets (64
(64 g/m2)
g/m2) // 3,500
3,500 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m2)
g/m2)
•• Paper
Paper type:
type: Plain
Plain paper
paper and
and coated
coated paper
paper
•• Paper
Paper size:
size: Postcard
Postcard (100
(100 xx 148
148 mm
mm toto 13"
13" xx 19.2"
19.2" (330.2
(330.2 xx 487.7
487.7 mm))
mm))
•• Paper
Paper weight:
weight: 52
52 to
to 350
350 g/m2
g/m2
** Cannot
Cannot be
be used
used together
together with
with the
the POD
POD Deck-D1
Deck-D1
Upright Control
Upright Control Panel-
Panel- Option
Option for
for the
the host
host machine
machine Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
F1
Fl
Control Panel
Control Panel Attach-
Attach- Kit for
Kit for installing
installing the
the Upright
Upright Control
Control Panel
Panel (hinge
(hinge and
and base).
base). Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
ment Kit-A1
ment Kit-Al Required when
Required when the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel is
is selected.
selected.
Document Insertion
Document Insertion •• Pickup
Pickup capacity:
capacity: Max.
Max. 400
400 sheets
sheets (200
(200 sheets
sheets each
each for
for the
the Upper
Upper Tray
Tray Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Unit-N1 and the Lower Tray)
•• Paper
Paper type:
type: Plain
Plain paper,
paper, recycled
recycled paper,
paper, color
color paper,
paper, heavy
heavy paper,
paper,
coated
coated paper,
paper, and
and thin
thin paper
paper
•• Paper size: B5 to 13" x 19" (330.2 x 482.6 mm)
•• Paper
Paper weight:
weight: 52
52 to
to 350 g/m22
350 g/m
Inserter Option
Inserter Option control-
control- Required for installing the Inserter when the Finisher is connected Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
ler Kit-A1
Kit-Al
Multi Function Profes- Staple Finisher/Booklet
Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher
Finisher is
is required
required at
at the
the downstream
downstream side.
side. Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
sional Puncher-A1
Puncher-Al (Not use
(Not use for
for (Not use
(Not use for
for
CKBS, CHK, CKBS, CHK,
TW) TW)
Perfect Binder-E1
Perfect Binder-El •• Paper size: Cover: B4 to 330.2 x 487.7 mm Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Contents: B5
Contents: B5 to
to 320.0
320.0 xx 228.6
228.6 mm
mm
•• Paper weight:
Paper weight: Cover:
Cover: 90
90 to
to 350 g/m22
350 g/m
•• Contents: 52
Contents: 52 to
to 163
163 g/m
g/m2 2
•• Stack thickness:
Stack thickness: 1 1 mm
mm toto 25
25 mm
mm (excluding
(excluding the
the cover)
cover)
•• Trimming range: Top and bottom: 13 to 79 mm
•• Fore edge:
Fore edge: 6.5
6.5 to
to 49.5
49.5 mm
mm
•• Max. finishing size: 216 mm to 297 mm
•• Min. finishing
Min. finishing size:
size: 138
138 mm
mm toto 203
203 mm
mm
High Capacity
High Capacity Stacker-
Stacker- •• Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
H1 •• Stacking
Stacking capacity:
capacity: 3,
3, 000
000 sheets
sheets xx 2
2 trays
trays
HC Stacker-F1
HC Stacker-F1 end-
end- Option
Option for
for High
High Capacity
Capacity Stacker-H1
Stacker-H1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
module cover
module cover (Not use
(Not use for
for (Not use
(Not use for
for
TW) TW)
9
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Product name
Product name Required options,
Required options, conditions,
conditions, etc.
etc. Remarks
Remarks
C10000
C10000 C8000
C8000
Paper Folding Unit-J1 •• Folding
Folding type:
type: In-3-fold,
In-3-fold, out-3-fold,
out-3-fold, 4-fold,
4-fold, and
and Z-fold
Z-fold Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Paper
Paper size:
size: In-3-fold,
out-3-fold, and
and 4-fold:
4-fold: A4R,
A4R, Z-fold:
Z-fold: A4R,
A4R, B4,
B4, and
and
A3
A3
•• Paper
Paper weight:
weight: In-3-fold,
out-3-fold, and
and Z-fold:
Z-fold: 52
52 to
to 105
105 g/m 2, 4-fold:
g/m2, 4-fold:
52
52 to
to 90
90 g/m
g/m22
* Finisher-AN1/Saddle Finisher-AN2 is required on the downstream side.

Puncher Unit-BS1 •• Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Inch,
Inch, 2
2 holes
holes // 3
3 holes
holes (Use for
(Use for USA, (Use for
USA, (Use for USA,
USA,
CAN, CLA, CA, CAN, CLA, CA,
CSPL, CIPL, CSPL, CIPL,
CKBS) CKBS)
Puncher Unit-BT1 •• Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• AB, 2 holes (Use for
(Use for USA,
USA,
CLA, EUR,
FRA, UK, DL,
ITA, CA, CSPL,
CIPL, CKBS,
CHK, TW)
Puncher Unit-BU1 •• Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• SWE, 4 holes (Use for
(Use for EUR, (Use for
EUR, (Use for EUR,
EUR,
FRA, UK, DL, FRA, UK, DL,
ITA, CA, CSPL, ITA, CA, CSPL,
and CIPL)
and CIPL) and CIPL)
and CIPL)
Finisher-AN1 •• Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Paper weight: 52
52 to
to 350 g/m22
350 g/m
•• Stacking capacity:
Stacking capacity: High
High capacity
capacity mode
mode ON:
ON: 1,000
1,000 +
+ 4,000
4,000 sheets
sheets
•• High capacity
High capacity mode
mode OFF:
OFF: 1,000
1,000 ++ 2,000
2,000 sheets
sheets
Saddle Finisher-AN2 •• Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Paper weight: 52
52 to
to 350 g/m22
350 g/m
•• Stacking capacity: High capacity mode
Stacking capacity: High capacity mode ON:
ON: 1,000
1,000 +
+ 4,000
4,000 sheets
sheets
•• High capacity
High capacity mode
mode OFF:
OFF: 1,000
1,000 ++ 2,000
2,000 sheets
sheets
•• Saddle stitch
Saddle stitch stacking
stacking capacity:
capacity: Max.
Max. 30
30 copies
copies
Long Sheet
Long Sheet Tray-C1
Tray-C1 Option
Option for
for the
the long
long length
length paper
paper pickup
pickup unit
unit Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
(Use for
(Use for USA, (Use for
USA, (Use for USA,
USA,
CAN, CLA, CAN, CLA,
EUR, FRA, UK, EUR, FRA, UK,
DL, ITA) DL, ITA)
Booklet Trimmer-D1/F1 •• Maximum
Maximum number
number of
of sheets
sheets for
for trimming:
trimming: 50
50 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m 2)
g/m2) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
•• Delivery
Delivery Tray
Tray capacity:
capacity: 30
30 booklets
booklets (Booklet
(Booklet size:
size: A4,
A4, 40
40 sheets,
sheets, 80
80 g/
g/
m2)
m2)
* Saddle Finisher-AN2 is required.
Two-Knife Booklet Trim- •• Maximum
Maximum number
number of
of sheets
sheets for
for trimming:
trimming: 50
50 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m 2)
g/m2) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
mer-A1
mer-Al •• Delivery
Delivery Tray
Tray capacity:
capacity: 30
30 booklets
booklets (Booklet
(Booklet size:
size: A4,
A4, 40
40 sheets,
sheets, 80
80 g/
g/
m2)
m2)
* Saddle Finisher-AN2 and Booklet Trimmer-D1 are required.
POD Buffer
Buffer Unit-A1
Unit-Al Required when
Required when installing
installing the
the External
External Pickup
Pickup Unit.
Unit. Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
POD Deck
POD Deck Adjuster-A1 Required when
Adjuster-Al Required when installing
installing the
the External
External Pickup
Pickup Unit.
Unit. Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
10
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
ScanningSystem
0 Scanning System Options
Options
Duplex Color
Image Reader
Unit-K1 Printer Cover-K1
ADF Access
Handle-Al
Handle-A1
Reader Heater
Unit-G1
Use for
USA,CLA,CA,CSPL
,CIPL,CKBS,CHK
Product name
conditions, etc.
etc. Remarks
Remarks
Duplex Color
Duplex Color Image
Image •• Simultaneous
Simultaneous duplex
duplex reading
reading
Reader Unit-K1
Reader Unit-K1 B/W (1-sided/2-sided)
B/W (1-sided/2-sided) :: 600
600 dpi=120/120
dpi=120/120 ipm,
ipm, 300
300 dpi
dpi :: 120/200
120/200 ipm
ipm
Color (1-sided/2-sided)
Color (1-sided/2-sided) :: 600
600 dpi=70/70
dpi=70/70 ipm,
ipm, 300
300 dpi
dpi :: 120/140
120/140 ipm
ipm
<1-sided> AB
<1-sided> AB configuration:
configuration: 38
38 to
to 220 g/m22 inch configuration: 50 to 22 0 g/m
220 g/m g/m22
<2-sided> 50
<2-sided> 50 to
to 220
220 g/m 2 g/m22
g/m2 Color original or color-mixed original: 64 to 220 g/m
•• Stacking
Stacking capacity:
capacity: Max.
Max. 300
300 sheets
sheets
*: Reader
*: Reader Attachment-B1
Attachment-B1 is
is required.
required.
Reader Attachment-B1
Reader Attachment-B1 Option for Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1
ADF Access
ADF Access Handle-A1 This handle
Handle-Al This handle is
is used
used to
to support
support opening
opening and
and closing
closing of
of the
the DADF.
DADF.
Reader Heater
Reader Heater Unit-G1
Unit-G1 JP, EUR, ASIA, AUS, KOREA, and CHINA: Option Use for
Use for
•• 230
230 V
V region:
region: Service
Service parts
parts USA,CLA,CA ,CSPL,C
USA,CLA,CA ,CSPL,C
•• 208
208 V
V region:
region: Service
Service parts
parts IPL,CKBS,CHK
11
11
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Product name
conditions, etc.
etc. Remarks
Remarks
Printer Cover-K1
Printer Cover-K1 Required separately
Required separately when
when used
used as
as a
a standalone
standalone printer
printer
Functionexpansion
0 Function expansionsystem
system options
options
■
■Required Options/Conditions
HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring
Mirroring Kit-E1
Kit-El
3.5inch/256GB
HDD-Q1
Removable
HDD Kit-AM1
Removable
HDD Kit-B1
imagePRESS Removable
Server HDD Kit-B2
B5000/B5100
imagePRESS
CR Server
A8000
imagePRESS
Server
B4000/B4100
PRISMAsync
Operating
PRISMAsync for Panel
imagePRESS C10000VP-A1/A2
12
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
● Hardware Products
• Hardware Products
Product name
conditions, etc.
etc. Remarks
Remarks
imagePRESS Server
imagePRESS Server B5000/
B5000/ Selectable Control
Selectable Control Panel:
Panel: Upright
Upright Control
Control Panel-F1.
Panel-F1.
B5100
B5100
imagePRESS Server
imagePRESS Server B4000/
B4000/ Selectable Control
Panel: Upright
Upright Control
Control Panel-F1.
Panel-F1.
B4100
B4100
Removable HDD Kit-B2 No compulsory
No compulsory options
options and
and particular
particular conditions.
conditions.
Removable HDD Kit-B3 No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions.
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring When executing
When executing the
the mirroring
mirroring function,
function, 3.5inch/256GB
3.5inch/256GB HDD-Q1
HDD-Q1 is
is required.
required.
Kit-E1
Kit-El
3.5inch/256GB HDD-Q1 It is required when using the mirroring function with HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit-E1.
Removable HDD Kit-AM1 No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions.
Voice Guidance
Kit-F2 No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions. Not use
Not use for
for
CKBS,CCN
CKBS,CCN
PRISMAsync for
PRISMAsync for imagePRESS
imagePRESS Selectable Control
Panel: PRISMAsync
PRISMAsync Operating
Operating Panel.
Panel.
C10000VP-A1/A2
C10000VP-Al /A2
PRISMAsync Operating Panel Selectable server: PRISMAsync for imagePRESS C10000VP-A1/A2.
imagePRESS CR
imagePRESS CR Server
Server A8000
A8000 A server,
A server, a
a monitor,
monitor, a
a keyboard
keyboard and
and a
a mouse
mouse are
are included
included in
in this
this product.
product.
● License Products
• License Products
At the
At the time
time of
of installation,
installation, obtain
obtain the
the license
license number
number according
according to
to the
the license
license certificate
certificate included.
included. Then,
Then, enter
enter the
the obtained
obtained license
license
number from
number from the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel of
of the
the machine.
machine.
The applicable
The applicable functions
functions are
are enabled.
enabled.
There is
There is no
no physical
physical installation
installation work
work at at the
the time
time of
of installation.
installation.
Product name
conditions, etc.
etc. Remarks
Remarks
Graphic ArtsPackage
GraphicArts Package Premium
Premium Web
Web Ac- No compulsory
Ac- No compulsory options
options and
and particular
particular conditions
conditions
tivate
tivate
GUI KIT-A1
KIT-Al No compulsory
options and
and particular
particular conditions Not use
conditions Not use for
for CKBS,
CKBS, CCN
CCN
Fiery Compose
Fiery Compose No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions
Fiery Impose No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions
Fiery Impose
Fiery Impose and
and Compose
Compose No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions
Color Universal
Color Universal Send
Send Kit-AB1
Kit-AB1 No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions Not use for FRA, UK, DL, ITA
Universal Send
Universal Send Advanced
Advanced Feature
Feature Set- No compulsory
Set- No compulsory options
options and
and particular
particular conditions Use for
conditions Use for USA,
USA, CAN,
CAN, CLA
CLA
G1
Universal Send
Universal Send Advanced
Advanced Feature
Feature Set- No compulsory
Set- No compulsory options
options and
and particular
particular conditions Use for
conditions Use for EUR,
EUR, CA,
CA, CSPL,
CSPL, CIPL,
CIPL, CKBS,
CKBS, CHK,
CHK,
H1 TW, CCN
Universal Send
Universal Send Security
Security Feature
Feature Set-D1 No compulsory
Set-D1 No compulsory options
options and
and particular
for CA
CA
Universal Send
Universal Send Digital
Digital User
User Signature
Signature No compulsory
options and
and particular
conditions
Kit-C1
Web Access
Web Access Software-H1
Software-H1 No compulsory
options and
and particular
for CKBS
CKBS
imagePRESS C10000
imagePRESS C10000 License
License No compulsory
options and
and particular
for CHK,
CHK, TW,
TW, CCN
CCN
imagePRESS C8000
imagePRESS C8000 LICENSE
LICENSE No compulsory
options and
and particular
for CHK,
CHK, TW,
TW, CCN
CCN
13
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Features
Features
lO Product Features
Product Features
High Primary High High

reliability Charging image quality image quality
Assembly
2 High High
Developing productivity productivity
High Assembly
image quality Laser
Scanner Unit Toner
(
High High
productivity reliability High
image quality
Fixing Y M C Bk
Assembly
Patch Sensor
r Y M
~ YilM jlcNat
C Bk ,
Y
CYD M C
Ca) Bk
of
0
=
00
High Secondary High Th

Color Sensor image quality Transfer reliability
Outer Unit
Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Unit
Unit
Adoption of
Adoption of a
a Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Unit
Unit supporting
supporting 2400dpi
2400dpi
Adoption of
Adoption of multiple
multiple laser
laser exposure
exposure
Adoption of
Adoption of VCSEL
VCSEL laser
laser
Developing Assembly
Adoption of
Adoption of cylinders
cylinders with
with groove
groove
Primary Charging Assembly

Adoption of a shutter mechanism in the Primary Charging Assembly
ITB Patch Sensor

An ITB Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor has
has been
been newly
newly added.
added.
Color Sensor
Color Sensor
A High-precision
A High-precision Color
Color Sensor
Sensor has
has been
been adopted.
adopted.
Fixing Assembly
Adoption of air separation function (Primary Fixing Assembly)
Adoption of External Heat Belt (Primary/Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of air cleaning of Refresh Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of
Addition of spiral
spiral projection
projection to
to Web
Web Roller
Roller (Primary/Secondary
(Primary/Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
Addition of shifting function of Fixing Separation Claw (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of
Addition of a
a Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller (on
(on the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller side
side of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
14
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Toner
Adoption of
Adoption of CV
CV toner
toner (Consistently
(Consistently Vivid
Vivid toner:
toner: Toner
Toner that
that is
is consistently
consistently vivid)
vivid)
Adoption of
Adoption of Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt
Adoption of
Adoption of Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt
Features at
Features at servicing
servicing
■
■Introducing the Maintenance Assist Tool
Maintenance assist
Maintenance assist tool
tool is
is a
a support
support tool
tool developed
developed to
to reduce
reduce the
the work
work time
time of
of service
service technicians.
technicians.
Use of
Use of this
this tool
tool enables
enables the
the service
service technicians
technicians to
to work
work efficiently
efficiently according
according to
to the
the use
use cases.
cases.
As a
As a result,
result, itit can
can contribute
contribute to to the
the reduction
reduction of
of work
work time
time as
as well
well as
as improvement
improvement of of workability
workability of
of the
the service
technicians.
Canon Maintenance Assist Tools Version 1.0.0
Diagnosis EP Process
Troubleshooting Error Code Log Jam Code Log
Information Monitor
1611
Adjustment Major
Installation Task
Information Adjustments
Parts Parts
Parts Catalog
Information Replacement
Inspection Preventive
Test Print
Information Maintenance
Support
ilwo Support Service General
Information Manual Circuit Diagram
Search
ALL Right Reserved Canon Inc., 2015
<Main
<Main Features>
Features>
1. Provides step-by-step
1. Provides step-by-step support
support for
for the
the works
works according
according to
to the
the use
use cases
cases
Service mode
Service mode can
can be
be executed
executed directly
directly from
from the
the content
content of
of the
the main
main menu.
menu.
2. Directly
2. Directly linked
linked to
to service
service mode
mode
3. Enables
3. Enables toto browse
browse various
various contents.
contents.
(Service Manuals
(Service Manuals of
of the
the machines
machines and
and options,
options, Parts
Parts Catalogs,
Catalogs, FAQs)
FAQs)
15
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
■
■ Improved
Improved Parts Lives
Parts Lives
Improvement was
Improvement was made
made to
to this
this machine
machine inin a
a way
way such
such that
that its
its major
major parts
parts would
would have
have longer
longer life
life than
than those
those of
of the
the existing
existing models.
models.
This has
This has reduced
reduced service
service visits
visits of
of the
the service
technicians.
Current model
Current Thismachine
model This machine
Primary Charging
Assembly
Developing Assembly —>
Secondary
Transfer Outer
Belt
0 30 100 150 200 300
Life (unit:
Life 10,000
(unit: sheets)
10,000 sheets) ->
■
■ Introduction
Introduction of
of Operator
Maintenance
This machine
This machine adopts
adopts operator
operator maintenance,
maintenance, in in which
which some
some of
of the
the maintenance
maintenance works
works such
such as
as periodical
periodical replacement
replacement of
of parts
parts
and cleaning
and cleaning that
that have
have been
been conventionally
conventionally performed
performed by by technicians
technicians are
are performed
performed by
by operators
operators at
at user
user sites.
sites.
This enables
This enables toto reduce
reduce service
service visits
visits of
of the
the service
technicians.
Furthermore,
Furthermore, inin order
order to
to have
have many
many users
users utilize
utilize this
this maintenance,
maintenance, improvement
improvement has
has been
been made
made to
to this
this machine
machine in
in a
a way
way such
such
that part
that part of
of the
the operator
operator replaceable
replaceable parts
parts can
can bebe easily
easily replaced.
replaced.
No
No screws
screws needed
needed for
for Fixing
Fixing Web
Web
16
16
1. Product Overview
No
No screws
screws needed
needed for
for Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Assembly
Assembly
A handle dedicated to Fixing Assembly
■ Reducing the
■Reducing the Load
Load in
in Cleaning
Cleaning the
the Inside
Inside of
of the
the Machine
Machine Due
Due to
to Toner
Toner
Scattering
Scattering
With the
With the existing
existing models,
models, a
a load
load was
was put
put on
on the
the service
service technicians
technicians due
due to
to the
the soiling
soiling inside
inside the
the machine
machine caused
caused byby toner
toner
scattering.
scattering.
With this
With this machine,
machine, the
the load
load in
in cleaning
cleaning the
the inside
inside of
of the
the machine
machine has
has been
been reduced
reduced by
by implementing
implementing the
the following
following three
three
improvements:
17
1. Product Overview
1.
1. Addition
Addition of
of Toner
Toner Holder
Holder on
on the rear side
the rear side of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Case
Case
Current Machine
Current Machine <
< iPR
iPR C7010VP
C7010VP Series
Series >
> This Machine
This Machine <
< iPR
iPR C10000VP
C10000VP Series
Series >
>
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Container
Container
Toner Holder
Toner Holder
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Waste Toner
Waste Toner
_i
18
18
1. Product Overview
2. Addition
2. Addition of
of toner
toner collection
collection mechanism
mechanism to
to the
the Drum
Drum Unit
Unit Support
Support Shaft
Shaft
Developing Assembly Drum Drum Cleaning Unit
ITB Drum Unit Support Shaft
Current Machine
Machine << iPR
iPR C7010VP
C7010VP Series > This Machine << iPR
iPR C10000VP
C10000VP Series >
Drum Unit Support Shaft Drum Unit Support Shaft
II
Developing Assembly
Lower Plate
Drum Unit Support Shaft Drum Unit Support Shaft
Drum Drum
7
Toner ITB Sponge Toner ITB
_}
19
1,
1. Product Overview
3. Addition
3. Addition of
of toner
toner cleaning
cleaning function
function to
to the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit (Toner
(Toner Tray
Tray +
+ Toner
Toner Cleaning
Cleaning Tool)
Tool)
Toner Ejection Lever

Screw
Driver
Toner Cleaning Tool
Toner
Toner Tray
Process Unit
20
20
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Specifications
Item
Item 3 Specifications
Machine installation
Machine installation method
method Console type
Console type
Photosensitive medium
Photosensitive medium 84-mm diameter
84-mm diameter OPC
OPC Drum
Drum
Exposure method
Exposure method Laser exposure
Laser exposure method
method
Charging method Corona charging
Corona charging method
method
Developing method
Developing method Dry, 2-component
Dry, 2-component development
development method
method
Transfer method Intermediate Belt
Intermediate Belt transfer
transfer method
method
(Primary transfer,
(Primary transfer, secondary
secondary transfer:
transfer: Transfer
Transfer Belt
Belt method)
method)
Separation method
Separation method Air separation
Air separation method
method (Primary
(Primary fixing),
fixing), Upper
Upper Separation
Separation Guide
Guide (Secondary
(Secondary fixing)
fixing)
Pickup method
Pickup method (Deck)
(Deck) Air separation
method
Drum cleaning method Cleaning Blade + Fur Brush Roller
ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning method
method Static cleaning
Static cleaning method
method
Fixing method Roller fixing method
Toner type
Toner type Non-magnetic negative
Non-magnetic negative toner
toner
Toner supplying method Set-on
Set-on
Toner level
Toner level detection
detection function
function Yes
Yes
Leading edge
Leading edge image
image margin
margin 2.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Left/right image margin 2.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Warm-up time
•• High
High speed
speed startup
startup OFF
OFF (Until
(Until 7 min
7 min or
or less
less
copy operation
copy operation is
is ready)
ready)
•• At
At recovery
recovery from
from sleep
sleep mode
mode 7 min or less
First copy time (full color) 25 sec.
25 sec. (at
(at pickup
pickup from
from the
the Right
Right Deck,
Deck, use
use of
of plain
plain A4/LTR
A4/LTR paper,
paper, and
and straight
straight delivery)
delivery)
Image gradations
Image gradations 256 gradations
256 gradations
Print resolution Max. 2400
Max. 2400 dpi
dpi xx 2400
2400 dpi
dpi
Maximum image
Maximum image guaranteed
guaranteed area
area 320.6 x 482.7 mm
mm (When
(When using
using Long
Long MP
MP Tray-A1:
Tray-Al: 320.6 x 757 mm)
Maximum printable area 323 x 482.7 mm
mm (When
(When using
using Long
Long MP
MP Tray-A1:
Tray-Al: 323 x 757 mm)
Paper type (Pickup from deck) Thin paper,
Thin paper, recycled
recycled paper,
paper, plain
plain paper,
paper, heavy
heavy paper,
paper, color
color paper,
paper, vellum
vellum paper,
paper, bond
bond paper,
paper,
texture paper,
texture paper, coated
coated paper,
paper, pre-punched
pre-punched paper,
paper, label
label paper,
paper, tracing
tracing paper,
paper, and
and film
film
Paper weight
•• Pickup from deck 60 to
60 to 350
350 g/m2
g/m2 (Coated
(Coated paper:
paper: 70
70 to
to 350
350 g/m2)
g/m2)
•• Auto
Auto 2-sided
2-sided mode
mode 60 to
60 to 350
350 g/m2
g/m2 (Coated
(Coated paper:
paper: 70
70 to
to 350
350 g/m2)
g/m2)
Paper size (Pickup from deck) B5R, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, SRA3, Exec-
A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, LTRR, A4, B5, LTR, Executive, BSR,
utiveR, 4
utiveR, 4 on
on 1
1 postcard
postcard
Pickup capacity
Pickup capacity
•• 1k
1k Receptacle
Receptacle 1,000 sheets
1,000 sheets
•• 2k
2k Receptacle
Receptacle 2,000 sheets
2,000 sheets
•• POD Deck Lite 2 3,500
3,500 sheets
sheets
Duplex method
Duplex method Through path
Through path
Memory capacity
Memory capacity For Main Controller 1: 1.5 GB
For Main Controller 2: 2 GB
HDD capacity
HDD capacity 1 TB
Environment temperature
Environment temperature range
range See Chapter
See Chapter 9,
9, "Checking
"Checking the
the Installation
Installation Environment."
Environment."
Environment humidity range See Chapter
See Chapter 9,
9, "Checking
"Checking the
the Installation
Installation Environment."
Environment."
Operation noise
Operation noise 84 dB
84 dB or
or less
less
Rated power
Rated power supply
supply Reference:“Power Supply
Reference:"Power Supply Specifications"
Specifications” on
on page
page 22
22
Maximum power consumption
•• At Printing 10000 W
10000 W or
or less
less (USA),
(USA), 13000
13000 W
W or
or less
less (Other)
(Other)
•• While in sleep mode 4998 kWh (USA), 4871 kWh (Other)
Dimension 2586 (width)
2586 (width) xx 1152
1152 (depth)
(depth) xx 1456
1456 (height)
(height) mm
mm
21
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Item Specifications
Weight Approx. 1215
Approx. 1215 kg
kg (Main
(Main Station
Station +
+ Sub
Sub Station
Station +
+ Power
Power Unit
Unit Station
Station ++ Upright
Upright Control
Control Panel-F1)
Panel-F1)
PowerSupply
0 Power SupplySpecifications
Specifications
Product
•roduct name
name Power supply
Power supply Japan
Japan North America
North America EUR
EUR
source
source V (V)
V (V) II (A)
(A) V (V)
V (V) II (A)
(A) V (V)
V (V) II (A)
(A)
(number of
(number of cables)
cables)
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP Power outlet
Power outlet (1
(1 or
or 2)
2) 200
200 60
60 208
208 3
3 in
in di- 380 -- 415
di- 380 415 32
32
(Main Station)
(Main Station) ameter:
ameter:
30
30
1 in di-
ameter:
ameter:
20
1
1 2 1
1
POD Deck
POD Deck Lite-C1
Lite-C1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100
100 2.4
2.4 120 -- 127
120 127 2.2
2.2 220 -- 240
220 240 1.2
1.2
POD Deck-D1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 200 -- 208
200 208 5.0
5.0 200
200 -- 208
208 5.0
5.0 220 -- 240
220 240 5.0
5.0
Secondary POD
Secondary POD Deck-D1
Deck-D1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 200 -- 208
200 208 5.0
5.0 200
200 -- 208
208 5.0
5.0 220 -- 240
220 240 5.0
5.0
Multi Function Professional
Professional Puncher-A1
Puncher-Al Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) -- - 115 3.8
3.8 230
230 2.0
2.0
Perfect Binder-E1
Perfect Binder-El Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 200
200 3.0
3.0 208
208 3.0
3.0 220 -- 240
220 240 3.0
3.0
Finisher-AN1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100
100 10.0 120 - 240 8.0
8.0 120 -- 240
120 240 8.0
8.0
Saddle Finisher-AN2 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100
100 10.0 120 - 240 8.0
8.0 120 -- 240
120 240 8.0
8.0
High Capacity
High Capacity Stacker-H1
Stacker-H1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100 - 240 2.5 100 - 240 2.5
2.5 100 -- 240
100 240 2.5
2.5
Document Insertion
Document Insertion Unit-N1
Unit-N1 Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100 -- 240
100 240 1.0
1.0 100 -- 240
100 240 1.0
1.0 100 -- 240
100 240 1.0
1.0
Paper Folding Unit-J1 Finisher -- -- - - - -
Trimmer-D1/F1 Finisher -- -- - - - -
Top/Bottom Edge
Edge Trimmer-A1
Trimmer-Al Power outlet
Power outlet (1)
(1) 100
100 4.5 120 --127
127 4.0 220 - 240 2.3
Weightand
0 Weight and Size
Size
Product name Width (mm)
Width (mm) Depth (mm)
Depth (mm) Height (mm)
Height (mm) Weight Ap-
Weight Ap-
IF
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP 2586
2586 1152 1456*1
1456*1
prox.
prox. (kg)
(kg)
1200
1200
(Main Station
(Main Station +
+ Sub
Sub Station
Station +
+ Power
Power Unit
Unit Station)
Station)
Duplex Color
Duplex Color Image
Image Reader
Reader Unit-K1
Unit-K1 590
590 635
635 263
263 7.5
7.5
(Including Reader Attachment-B1)
POD Deck Lite-C1 633
633 686
686 574 68
68
POD Deck-D1 982
982 792 1095
1095 250
250
POD Deck-D1 1793
1793 792 1095
1095 480
480
(When the
(When the Secondary
Secondary POD
POD Deck-D1
Deck-D1 is
is connected)
connected)
Multi Function Professional
Professional Puncher-A1
Puncher-Al 795 445 1040
1040 102
Perfect Binder-E1
Perfect Binder-El 922 791 1300
1300 308
308
Finisher-AN1
Finisher-AN1 800
800 792
792 1239
1239 132
132
(Including
Punch)
Saddle Finisher-AN2 800
800 792 1239
1239 184
(Including
Punch)
Puncher Unit-BT1 Built in the Finisher 3
Puncher Unit-BS1
Puncher Unit-BS1 (US)
(US) Inside the
Inside the finisher
finisher 3
3
Puncher Unit-BU1 (EUR) Inside the finisher 3
High Capacity
Stacker-H1 899
899 745 (1250*2)
(1250*2) 1141 120
High Capacity
Stacker-H1 1803
1803 745 (1250*2)
(1250*2) 1141 240
(Secondary)
(Secondary)
Document Insertion Unit-N1 746 793 1407 61
(Including Inserter Option controller Kit-A1)
22
22
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Product name
Product name Width (mm)
Width (mm) Depth (mm)
Depth (mm) Height (mm)
Height (mm) Weight Ap-
Weight Ap-
prox.
prox. (kg)
(kg)
I
Paper Folding Unit-J1 336
336 793 1190
1190 71
Trimmer-D1 1575
1575 770 1040
1040 152
(Including Con-
veyor
veyor Assem-
Assem-
bly
bly and
and Output
Output
Tray)
Trimmer-F1 2095
2095 779
779 1040
1040 178
Top/Bottom Edge
Edge Trimmer-A1
Trimmer-Al 536
536 770 1040
1040 145
(Excluding the
(Excluding the
conveyer
conveyer and
and
Output Tray)
*1: When
*1: When the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel is
is installed
installed
*2: When
*2: When outputting
outputting to
to the
the Output
Output Tray
Tray
Productivity (Print
Productivity (Print Speed)
Speed)
■
■ imagePRESS
imagePRESS C10000VP
C10000VP
Paper
II/Paper Productivity (sheets/min)
Productivity (sheets/min)
Size
Size Paper
Paper Paper
Paper Paper weight
Paper weight Color
Color B/W
B/W
width
width length
length (g/m2)
(g/m2) 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided
(mm)
(mm) (mm)
(mm) Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing
di Delivery
Delivery Delivery
Delivery
B5
B5 257.0 182.0
182.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 113.8
113.8 101.3
101.3 102.9
102.9 106.0
106.0 94.7
94.7 96.1
96.1
106 to
106 to 170
170 105.4
105.4 98.4
98.4
171 to 220 88.3
88.3 88.3
88.3 88.3
88.3 82.9
82.9 82.9
82.9 82.9
82.9
221 to
221 to 350
350
EXEC 266.7 184.2
184.2 60 to
60 to 105
105 112.7 101.3
101.3 102.9
102.9 104.9
104.9 94.6
94.6 96.1
96.1
106 to
106 to 170
170 104.3
104.3 97.3
97.3
171 to 220 87.3
87.3 87.3
87.3 87.3
87.3 82.0
82.0 82.0
82.0 82.0
82.0
221 to
221 to 350
350
K16 270.0
270.0 195.0
195.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 108.1
108.1 100.1
100.1 102.2 100.7
100.7 93.4
93.4 95.3
95.3
106 to
106 to 170
170 98.5
98.5 98.5
98.5 98.5
98.5 92.0
92.0 92.0
92.0 92.0
92.0
171 to 220 82.4 82.4 82.4 77.4 77.4 77.4
221 to
221 to 350
350
A4 297.0 210.0
210.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 102.0
102.0 100.0
100.0 102.0
102.0 95.0
95.0 93.2
93.2 95.0
95.0
106 to
106 to 170
170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350
LTR 279.4 215.9
215.9 60 to
60 to 105
105 100.0
100.0 100.0
100.0 100.0
100.0 93.1
93.1 93.1
93.1 93.1
93.1
106 to
106 to 170
170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350
B5R 182.0 257.0
257.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 87.0
87.0 87.7 73.6
73.6 81.0
81.0 81.6
81.6 69.0
69.0
106 to
106 to 170
170 65.8
65.8 65.8
65.8 65.8
65.8 62.0
62.0 62.0
62.0 62.0
62.0
171 to 220 49.5
49.5 49.5
49.5 49.5
49.5 47.4 47.4 47.4
221 to
221 to 350
350
EXEC-R 184.2 266.7
266.7 60 to
60 to 105
105 84.5
84.5 84.5 73.5 78.7 78.7 68.8
68.8
106 to
106 to 170
170 63.4
63.4 63.4
63.4 63.4
63.4 59.8
59.8 59.8
59.8 59.8
59.8
171 to 220 47.7 47.7 47.7 45.7 45.7 45.7
221 to
221 to 350
350
LTRR 215.9 279.4
279.4 60 to
60 to 105
105 81.4 81.4 73.4 75.8
75.8 75.8
75.8 68.6
68.6
106 to
106 to 170
170 60.6
60.6 60.6
60.6 60.6
60.6 57.2
57.2 57.2
57.2 57.2
57.2
23
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Paper
Paper Productivity (sheets/min)
Size
Size Paper
Paper Paper
Paper Paper weight
Paper weight Color
Color B/W
B/W
width
width length
length (g/m2)
(g/m2) 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided
(mm)
(mm) (mm)
(mm) Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing
Delivery
Delivery Delivery
Delivery
LTRR 215.9
215.9 279.4
279.4 171 to
171 to 220
220 45.5
45.5 45.5
45.5 45.5
45.5 43.7 43.7 43.7
221 to
221 to 350
350
A4R 210.0 297.0
297.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 77.4 77.4 73.2 72.1 72.1 68.3
68.3
106 to 170 57.0 57.0 57.0 53.8 53.8 53.8
171 to 220 42.8 42.8 42.8 41.2 41.2 41.2
221 to
221 to 350
350
LGL 215.9
215.9 355.6
355.6 60 to
60 to 105
105 66.5
66.5 66.5
66.5 60.1
60.1 61.9
61.9 61.9
61.9 56.2
56.2
106 to 170 47.6 47.6 47.6 45.2 45.2 45.2
171 to 220 35.7
35.7 35.7 35.7
35.7 34.6
34.6 34.6
34.6 34.6
34.6
221 to
221 to 350
350
B4 257.0
257.0 364.0
364.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 59.2
59.2 59.2
59.2 59.2
59.2 55.4
55.4 55.4
55.4 55.4
55.4
106 to 170 52.7 52.7 52.7 49.6 49.6 49.6
171 to 220 44.1 44.1 44.1 42.0 42.0 42.0
221 to
221 to 350
350
K8
K8 270.0
270.0 390.0
390.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 55.2
55.2 55.2
55.2 55.2
55.2 51.7 51.7 51.7
106 to 170 49.2 49.2 49.2 46.4 46.4 46.4
171 to 220 41.2 41.2 41.2 39.3 39.3 39.3
39.3
221 to
221 to 350
350
A3
A3 297.0 420.0
420.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 57.5
57.5 57.5
57.5 57.5
57.5 53.5
53.5 53.5
53.5 53.5
53.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 51.4 51.4 51.4 48.2 48.2 48.2
11 x 17 279.4 431.8
431.8 60 to
60 to 105
105 56.2
56.2 56.2
56.2 56.2
56.2 52.3
52.3 52.3
52.3 52.3
52.3
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 50.0
50.0 50.0
50.0 50.0
50.0 46.9
46.9 46.9
46.9 46.9
46.9
SRA3 320.0
320.0 450.0
450.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 54.2
54.2 54.2
54.2 54.2 50.5
50.5 50.5
50.5 50.5
50.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 47.8 47.8 47.8 44.8 44.8
44.8 44.8
44.8
12 x 18 304.8
304.8 457.2
457.2 60 to
60 to 105
105 53.5
53.5 53.5 53.5
53.5 49.8
49.8 49.8
49.8 49.8
49.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 47.2 47.2 47.2 44.3 44.3
44.3 44.3
44.3
13 xx 18.5
13 18.5 330.2
330.2 469.9
469.9 60 to
60 to 105
105 52.2 51.9
51.9 52.2 48.6
48.6 48.3
48.3 48.6
48.6
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 45.9
45.9 45.9
45.9 45.9
45.9 43.1 43.1 43.1
13 x 19 330.2
330.2 482.6
482.6 60 to
60 to 105
105 51.0
51.0 49.7 51.0
51.0 47.5 46.3
46.3 47.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 44.7
44.7 44.7 44.7 42.0 42.0 42.0
13 x 19.2 330.2
330.2 487.7
487.7 60 to
60 to 105
105 50.5
50.5 48.8
48.8 50.5
50.5 47.0 45.5
45.5 47.0
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.5 41.5 41.5
A4-Tab 297.0 222.7 60 to
60 to 105
105 97.5
97.5 97.5
97.5 97.5
97.5 90.8
90.8 90.8
90.8 90.8
90.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350 96.9
96.9 96.9
96.9 96.9
96.9 90.2
90.2 90.2
90.2 90.2
90.2
24
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Paper
Size
Size Paper
Paper Paper
Paper Paper weight
Paper weight Color
Color B/W
B/W
width
width length
length (g/m2)
(g/m2) 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided
(mm)
(mm) (mm)
(mm) Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing
Delivery
Delivery Delivery
Delivery
LTR-Tab 279.4 228.6
228.6 60 to
60 to 105
105 95.5 87.7 73.6
73.6 88.9
88.9 81.9
81.9 69.2
69.2
106 to
106 to 170
170
171 to 220
221 to 350 94.3 87.8
■
■ imagePRESS
imagePRESS C8000VP
C8000VP
_
Paper
Size
Size Paper
Paper Paper
Paper Paper weight
Paper weight Color
Color B/W
B/W
width
width length
length (g/m2)
(g/m2) 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided
1-sided 2-sided
2-sided
(mm)
(mm) (mm)
(mm) Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing Straight
Straight Reversing
Reversing
Delivery
Delivery Delivery
Delivery 4
B5
B5 257.0 182.0
182.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 90.9
90.9 90.9
90.9 90.9
90.9 85.9
85.9 85.9
85.9 85.9
85.9
106 to
106 to 170
170 84.3
84.3 84.3
84.3 84.3
84.3 79.8
79.8 79.8
79.8 79.8
79.8
171 to 220 70.6
70.6 70.6
70.6 70.6
70.6 67.2 67.2 67.2
221 to
221 to 350
350
EXEC 266.7 184.2
184.2 60 to
60 to 105
105 90.1
90.1 90.1
90.1 90.1
90.1 85.1
85.1 85.1
85.1 85.1
85.1
106 to
106 to 170
170 83.4
83.4 83.4
83.4 83.4
83.4 79.0
79.0 79.0
79.0 79.0
79.0
171 to 220 69.8
69.8 69.8
69.8 69.8
69.8 66.4
66.4 66.4
66.4 66.4
66.4
221 to
221 to 350
350
K16 270.0
270.0 195.0
195.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 86.0
86.0 86.0
86.0 86.0
86.0 81.3
81.3 81.3
81.3 81.3
81.3
106 to
106 to 170
170 78.7 78.7 78.7 74.5 74.5 74.5
171 to 220 65.9
65.9 65.9
65.9 65.9
65.9 62.7 62.7 62.7
221 to
221 to 350
350
A4 297.0 210.0
210.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 81.0
81.0 81.0
81.0 81.0
81.0 76.5
76.5 76.5
76.5 76.5
76.5
106 to
106 to 170
170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350
LTR 279.4 215.9
215.9 60 to
60 to 105
105 80.0
80.0 80.0
80.0 80.0
80.0 75.6
75.6 75.6
75.6 75.6
75.6
106 to
106 to 170
170
171 to 220
221 to
221 to 350
350
B5R 182.0 257.0
257.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 68.4
68.4 68.4
68.4 54.2 64.6
64.6 64.6
64.6 51.6
51.6
106 to
106 to 170
170 52.7 52.7 52.7 50.2
50.2 50.2
50.2 50.2
50.2
171 to 220 39.6
39.6 39.6
39.6 39.6
39.6 38.2
38.2 38.2
38.2 38.2
38.2
221 to
221 to 350
350
EXEC-R 184.2 266.7
266.7 60 to
60 to 105
105 66.3
66.3 66.3
66.3 54.2 62.6
62.6 62.6
62.6 51.6
51.6
106 to
106 to 170
170 50.8
50.8 50.8
50.8 50.8
50.8 48.5
48.5 48.5
48.5 48.5
48.5
171 to 220 38.1
38.1 38.1
38.1 38.1
38.1 36.8
36.8 36.8
36.8 36.8
36.8
221 to
221 to 350
350
LTRR 215.9 279.4
279.4 60 to
60 to 105
105 63.7
63.7 63.7
63.7 54.1 60.2
60.2 60.2
60.2 51.4
106 to
106 to 170
170 48.4 48.4 48.4 46.2 46.2 46.2
171 to 220 36.4
36.4 36.4
36.4 36.4
36.4 35.2
35.2 35.2
35.2 35.2
35.2
221 to
221 to 350
350
A4R 210.0 297.0
297.0 60 to
60 to 105
105 60.5
60.5 60.5
60.5 54.1 57.2 57.2 51.3
51.3
106 to
106 to 170
170 45.5
45.5 45.5
45.5 45.5
45.5 43.5
43.5 43.5
43.5 43.5
43.5
171 to 220 34.3
34.3 34.3
34.3 34.3
34.3 33.3
33.3 33.3
33.3 33.3
33.3
221 to
221 to 350
350
LGL 215.9
215.9 355.6
355.6 60 to
60 to 105
105 51.6
51.6 51.6
51.6 51.0
51.0 48.7 48.7 48.2
106 to
106 to 170
170 38.0
38.0 38.0
38.0 38.0
38.0 36.4
36.4 36.4
36.4 36.4
36.4
25
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Paper
Productivity
Size
Size Paper Paper Paper weight
Paper weight Color
Color B/W
B/W
width length (g/m2)
(g/m2) 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided 2-sided
2-sided 1-sided
1-sided 1-sided 2-sided
2-sided
(mm) (mm) Straight
Straight Reversing Straight
Straight Reversing
Delivery Delivery
LGL 215.9 355.6
355.6 171 to 220 28.6 28.6 28.6 27.9 27.9 27.9
221 to 350
B4 257.0 364.0 60 to 105 47.3 47.3 47.3 44.8 44.8 44.8
106 to 170 42.1 42.1 42.1 40.1 40.1 40.1
171 to 220 35.3 35.3 35.3 33.9 33.9 33.9
221 to 350
K8 270.0 390.0 60 to 105 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.9 41.9 41.9
106 to 170 39.3 39.3 39.3 37.5 37.5 37.5
171 to 220 32.9 32.9 32.9 31.7 31.7 31.7
221 to 350
A3 297.0 420.0 60 to 105 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.8 41.8 41.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 41.0 41.0 41.0 38.9 38.9 38.9
11 x 17 279.4 431.8 60 to 105 43.1 43.1 43.1 40.7 40.7 40.7
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 40.0 40.0 40.0 37.9 37.9 37.9
SRA3 320.0 450.0 60 to 105 41.5 41.5 41.5 39.2 39.2 39.2
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 38.2 38.2 38.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
12 x 18 304.8 457.2 60 to 105 40.9 40.9 40.9 38.6 38.6 38.6
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 37.6 37.6 37.6 35.7 35.7 35.7
13 x 18.5 330.2 469.9 60 to 105 39.0 39.0 39.0 36.9 36.9 36.9
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 36.6 36.6 36.6 34.7 34.7 34.7
13 x 19 330.2 482.6 60 to 105 38.9 38.9 38.9 36.8 36.8
36.8 36.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 35.6 35.6 35.6 33.8 33.8 33.8
13 x 19.2 330.2 487.7 60 to 105 38.6 38.6 38.6 36.5 36.5 36.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 35.3 35.3 35.3 33.5 33.5
33.5 33.5
A4-Tab 297.0 222.7 60 to 105 76.4 76.4 76.4 72.2 72.2 72.2
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
LTR-Tab 279.4 228.6 60 to 105 74.7 74.7 54.2 70.6 70.6 51.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
26
26
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Papertype
0 Paper type
Following shows
Following shows the
the types
types of
of usable
usable papers.
papers.
See the
See the table
table below
below for
for the
the custom
custom paper
paper size.
size.
Type
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)
Custom paper size 1-1 364 to 487.7 304.9 to 330.2
Custom paper size 1-2 297.1 to 363.9
Custom paper size 1-4 182.0 to 279.3 320.1 to 330.2
Custom paper size 1-5 228.7 to 279.3 304.9 to 320
Custom paper size 2-1 457.3 to 487.7 257 to 304.8
Custom paper size 2-2 364 to 432.0 257 to 297.0
Custom paper size 7 (long length) 487.8 to 630.0 139.7 to 330.2
Custom paper size 8 (long length) 630.1 to 660.0
Custom paper size 9 (long length) 660.1 to 762.0
Custom paper size 10-3 364 to 432.0 297.0 to 304.8
CAUTION:
Paper of
Paper of the
the custom
custom paper
paper size
size 7 to 9 (long length paper) can be used with
7 to with the
the External
External Pickup
Pickup Unit.However,
Unit.However, the minimum
size (width) is 279 mm.Therefore, do not use paper whose width is smaller than this size with the External Pickup Unit.
■
■Pickup
Pickup List_1
List_l
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Thin 1 (64 to 79), Thin 2 (60 to 63)
•• Plain
Plain (80
(80 to
to 105)
105)
•• Recycled
Recycled 1 1 (64
(64 to
to 79),
79), Recycled
Recycled 22 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), Recycled
Recycled 3 3 (210
(210 to
to 256)
256)
•• Color
Color (64
(64 to
to 79),
79), Heavy
Heavy 1 1 (106
(106 to
to 128),
128), Heavy
Heavy 2 2 (129
(129 to
to 150),
150), Heavy
Heavy 33 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), Heavy
Heavy 4
4 (181
(181 to
to 209),
209), Heavy
Heavy 5
5 (210
(210 to
to
256), Heavy
256), Heavy 6 6 (257
(257 to
to 300)
300)
27
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
•• 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated ThinThin (70
(70 to
to 79),
79), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 1 1 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 22 (106
(106 to
to 128),
128), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 3 3 (129
(129 to
to
150),
150), 1-Sided Coated 4
1-Sided Coated 4 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 5 5 (181
(181 to
to 209),
209), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 6 6 (210
(210 to
to 256),
256), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 7 7 (257
(257
to 300)
to 300)
•• 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated ThinThin (70
(70 to
to 79),
79), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 1 1 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 22 (106
(106 to
to 128),
128), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 3 3 (129
(129 to
to
150),
150), 2-Sided Coated 4
2-Sided Coated 4 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 5 5 (181
(181 to
to 209),
209), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 6 6 (210
(210 to
to 256),
256), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 7 7 (257
(257
to 300)
to 300)
•• Matte
Matte Coated
Coated Thin
Thin (70
(70 to
to 79),
79), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 1 1 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 2 2 (106
(106 to
to 128),
128), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 3 3 (129
(129 to
to 150),
150), Matte
Matte
Coated 4
Coated 4 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 5 5 (181
(181 to
to 209),
209), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 6 6 (210
(210 to
to 256),
256), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 77 (257
(257 toto 300)
300)
•• Textured
Textured 11 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), Textured
Textured 2 2 (106
(106 to
to 128),
128), Textured
Textured 3 3 (129
(129 to
to 150),
150), Textured
Textured 4 4 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), Textured
Textured 5 5 (181
(181 to
to 209),
209),
Textured 6
Textured 6 (210
(210 toto 256),
256), Textured
Textured 7 7 (257
(257 to
to 300)
300)
•• Vellum
Vellum 11 (80
(80 to
to 105),
105), Vellum
Vellum 2 2 (106
(106 to
to 128)
128)
•• Pre-Punched
Pre-Punched 1 1 (64
(64 to
to 79),
79), Pre-Punched
Pre-Punched 2 2 (80
(80 to
to 105)
105)
•• Bond
Bond (80
(80 to
to 105)
105)
Paper Type Pickup position

LONG SHEET Paper Deck of the POD Deck-D1/ POD Deck Lite-C1 Document !user-
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
TRAY-Al Main Unit Secondary
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
Deck-D1
A3 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R No No No Yes No
11x17 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LGL No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
STMTR No No No Yes No
SRA3 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXEC No Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXEC-R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
E-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
M-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-LTRR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLTR-R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLGL No Yes Yes Yes Yes
AFLS No Yes Yes Yes Yes
FLS No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K8 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K16 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K16R No Yes Yes Yes No
F4A No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Irregular size A* No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Irregular size B* No No No Yes No
Irregular size C* Yes No No No No
28
28
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Irregular size A: Irregular size 1-1, Irregular size 1-2, Irregular size 1-3, Irregular size 1-4, Irregular size 1-5, Irregular size 1-6,
Irregular size 2-1, Irregular size 2-2, Irregular size 2-3, Irregular size 2-4, Irregular size 2-5, Irregular size 2-6, Irregular size 3-1,
Irregular size 5-1, Irregular size 5-2, Irregular size 5-3, Irregular size 5-4, Irregular size 10-1, Irregular size 10-2, Irregular size
10-3, Irregular size 10-4, Irregular size 10-5, Irregular size 10-6
Irregular size B: Irregular size 6-1, Irregular size 6-2
Irregular size C: Irregular size 7 (LONG SHEET), Irregular size 8 (LONG SHEET), Irregular size 9 (LONG SHEET)
■
• Pickup
Pickup List_2
List_2
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Heavy
Heavy 7
7 (301
(301 to
to 325),
325), Heavy
Heavy 8 8 (326
(326 to
to 350)
350)
•• 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 8 8 (301
(301 to
to 325),
325), 1-Sided
1-Sided Coated
Coated 99 (326
(326 to
to 350)
350)
•• 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 8 8 (301
(301 to
to 325),
325), 2-Sided
2-Sided Coated
Coated 99 (326
(326 to
to 350)
350)
•• Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 8 8 (301
(301 to
to 325),
325), Matte
Matte Coated
Coated 9 9 (326
(326 to
to 350)
350)
Paper Type
Pickup position
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
a. Deck-D1 a.
A3 No Yes Yes Yes No
B4 No Yes Yes Yes No
A4R No Yes Yes Yes No
B5R No Yes Yes Yes No
A5R No No No Yes No
11x17 No Yes Yes Yes No
LGL No Yes Yes Yes No
LTR No Yes Yes Yes No
LTRR No Yes Yes Yes No
SRA3 No Yes Yes Yes No
EXEC No Yes Yes Yes No
EXEC-R No Yes Yes Yes No
OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
E-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
B-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
M-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
A-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
A-LTR No Yes Yes Yes No
A-LTRR No Yes Yes Yes No
GLTR-R No Yes Yes Yes No
GLTR No Yes Yes Yes No
GLGL No Yes Yes Yes No
AFLS No Yes Yes Yes No
FLS No Yes Yes Yes No
K8 No Yes Yes Yes No
F4A No Yes Yes Yes No
Irregular size A* No Yes Yes Yes No
29
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
*
■
■ Pickup
Pickup List_3
List_3
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Clear Film (151 to 180)
•• Translucent Film (151 to 180)
Paper Type
Pickup position
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
di Deck-D1 AL
A5R No No No Yes No
30
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
■
■Pickup List_4
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Labels
Labels (151
(151 to
to 180)
180)
Paper Type
Pickup position
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
Deck-D1
A5R No No No Yes No
*
31
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
CAUTION:
Paper of
Paper of the
the custom
custom paper
paper size
size C
C (long
(long length
length paper)
paper) can
can be
be used
used with
with the
the External
External Pickup
Pickup Unit.However,
Unit.However, the
the minimum
minimum
size (width) is 279 mm.Therefore, do not use paper whose width is smaller than this size with the External Pickup Unit.
■
■Pickup
Pickup List_Other
List_Other
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Transparency
Transparency (151
(151 to
to 180)
180)
Paper Type
Pickup position
LONG SHEET Paper Deck of the POD Deck-D1/ POD Deck Lite-C1 Document Inser-
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
Deck-D1
I illk
Paper Type
Paper (g/m2)
Type (g/m2)
•• Tab
Tab 1
1 (151
(151 to
to 180),
180), Tab
Tab 2
2 (181
(181 to
to 209)
209)
Paper Type
Pickup position
LONG SHEET Paper Deck of the POD Deck-D1/ POD Deck Lite-C1 Document Inser-
Document Inser-
TRAY-A1
Secondary POD
POD tion Unit-N1
Deck-D1
LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
32
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Name of Parts
External View
0 External View
■
■External Cover
● Front side
• Front side of
of the
the machine
machine
[5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[25]
[2]
[24] [1] [7]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[8]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[9]
[10]
[17]
[11]
[12]
[16] [13]
[14]
[15]
No. Name "1 No. Name

[1] Controller Left
Controller Left Cover
Cover [14] Waste Toner
Waste Toner Receptacle
Receptacle
[2]
[2] Controller Upper
Controller Upper Front
Front Cover
Cover [15]
[15] Sub Station
Sub Station Front
Front Left
Left Cover
Cover
[3]
[3] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Front
Front Cover
Cover [16]
[16] Sub Station
Sub Station Left
Left Lower
Lower Cover
Cover
[4] Toner Supply
Toner Supply Left
Left Cover
Cover [17]
[17] Sub Station
Sub Station Left
Left Upper
Upper Cover
Cover
[5]
[5] Toner Supply
Toner Supply Upper
Upper Cover
Cover [18]
[18] Sub Station
Sub Station Upper
Upper Front
Front Cover
Cover
[6]
[6] Toner Replacement
Toner Replacement Outer
Outer Cover
Cover [19]
[19] Sub Station
Sub Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Cover
Cover
[7] Main Station
Main Station Front
Front Upper
Upper Cover
Cover [20]
[20] Sub Station
Sub Station Upper
Upper Right
Right Cover
Cover
[8]
[8] Main Station Front Right Cover [21] Main Power Supply Switch Cover
[9]
[9] Main Station Front Right Lower Cover [22] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 1
1
[10] Right Deck [23]
[23] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 2
2
[11] Main Station
Main Station Front
Front Left
Left Cover
Cover [24] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 3
3
[12] Left Deck
Left Deck [25]
[25] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Left
Left Cover
Cover
[13]
[13] Sub Station
Sub Station Front
Front Right
Right Cover
Cover
33
33
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
●
• Rear Side of the Machine
[38] [1]
[2]
[37]
[36] [3]
[3]
[35] [4]
[4]
[34]
[33] [5]
[5]
[32]
[31]
[6]
[6]
[30]
[7]
[7]
[29]
[8]
[28]
[9]
j.
[10]
[22] IL
[11]
[27] [12]
[26]
[13]
[25]
[24] [14]
[23]
[22] [15]
[21]
[20] [16]
[19]
[18] [17]
No.
No. Name
Name i No.
No. Name
Name
[1]
[1] Reader Face
Reader Face Cover
Cover [20]
[20] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Rear
Rear Cover
Cover
[2]
[2] Sub Station
Sub Station Upper
Upper Rear
Rear Cover
Cover [21] Vertical Path
Vertical Path Rear
Rear Cover
Cover
[3] Fixing Filter
Fixing Filter Cover
Cover [22] Face Cover
Face Cover
[4]
[4] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 1
1 [23] Main Station Right Lower Cover
[5]
[5] Delivery Filter
Delivery Filter Cover
Cover [24]
[24] Vertical Path
Vertical Path Lower
Lower Cover
Cover
[6]
[6] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 2
2 [25] Vertical Path
Vertical Path Cover
Cover
[7]
[7] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan Cover
Cover 2
2 [26] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Front
Front Cover
Cover 3
3
[8]
[8] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 3
3 [27] Vertical Path Front Cover
[9]
[9] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan Cover
Cover 3
3 [28]
[28] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Front
Front Cover
Cover 1
1
[10]
[10] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 4
4 [29] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Middle
Middle Cover
Cover
[11]
[11] Sub Station
Sub Station Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan Cover
Cover 1
1 [30]
[30] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Front
Front Cover
Cover 2
2
[12] Main Station
Main Station Rear
Rear Right
Right Cover
Cover [31] Main Station
Main Station Right
Right Upper
Upper Cover
Cover
[13]
[13] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 1
1 [32]
[32] Toner Supply
Toner Supply Right
Right Filter
Filter Cover
Cover
[14] Main Station Rear Cover 1 [33]
[33] Toner Supply
Toner Supply Right
Right Cover
Cover
[15]
[15] Main Station
Main Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 2
2 [34] Toner Supply
Toner Supply Rear
Rear Cover
Cover
[16]
[16] Main Station
Main Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 4
4 [35]
[35] Controller Rear
Controller Rear Cover
Cover 4
4
[17]
[17] Main Station
Main Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 3
3 [36]
Cover 3
3
[18]
[18] Main Station
Main Station Upper
Upper Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 2
2 [37]
[37] Controller Rear Cover 2
[19] Main Station
Main Station Rear
Rear Left
Left Cover
Cover [38]
Cover 1
1
34
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
● Power Unit
• Power Unit Station
Station
[1] [2] [3]
[3]
[8] [9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[7]
-m-
No. Name No. al Name
[1] Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 1
1 [8] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 2
[2] Power Unit Station Rear Filter Cover [9]
[9] Sub Station
Sub Station Exhaust
Exhaust Duct
Duct
[3] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 1 [10]
[10] Sub Station
Sub Station Exhaust
Exhaust Duct
Duct Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 1
1
[4] Handle Protection
Handle Protection Cover
Cover [11]
[11] Sub Station
Sub Station Exhaust
Exhaust Duct
Duct Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 2
2
[5]
[5] Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 2
2 [12]
[12] Sub Station
Sub Station Exhaust
Exhaust Duct
Duct Filter
Filter Cover
Cover 3
3
[6]
[6] Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station Rear
Rear Auxiliary
Auxiliary Cover
Cover [13]
[13] Cable Cover
Cable Cover
[7] Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station Rear
Rear Cover
Cover 3
3
35
35
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
●
• Inner Cover
[1]
[4]
[2]
[28]
[27] [3]
[26]
[25] [5]
[24]
[23]
[6]
[22]
[21] [7]
[20] [8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[19]
[12]
[13]
[18] [14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
No.
No. Name
Name No.
No. Name
Name
[1] Toner Replacement Inner Cover [15]
[15] Sub Station
Sub Station Inner
Inner Cover
Cover 2
2
[2] Toner Supply Front Cover [16]
[16] Sub Station
Sub Station Duplex
Duplex Inlet
Inlet Cover
Cover
[3]
[3] Process Unit
Process Unit Cover
Cover [17] Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Cover
Cover 3
3
[4] Primary Charging Assembly Cover [18] Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Cover
Cover 5
5
[5]
[5] Intermediate Transfer
Intermediate Transfer Unit
Unit Cover
Cover [19] Delivery Reverse Cover 4
[6]
[6] Main Station Inner Right Lower Cover [20] Delivery Reverse Cover 2
[7] Lower Feed
Lower Feed Cover
Cover [21] Delivery Reverse Cover 1
[8]
[8] Pre-registration Cover
Pre-registration Cover [22] Fixing Frame Cover
[9]
[9] Main Station
Main Station Duplex
Duplex Feed
Feed Cover
Cover [23] Fixing Merging Cover
[10] Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [24] Secondary Fixing Front Lower Cover
[11] Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [25]
[25] Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Front
Front Upper
Upper Cover
Cover
[12] Pre-fixing Feed Left Cover [26] Tandem Feed
Tandem Feed Cover
Cover
[13] Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [27] Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover
[14]
[14] Sub Station
Sub Station Duplex
Duplex Feed
Feed Cover
Cover [28]
[28] Sub Station
Sub Station Inner
Inner Cover
Cover 1
1
36
36
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
●
• Lever
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
No.
No. Name
Name No.
No. Name
Name
[1]
[1] Process Unit
Process Unit Cover
Cover Release
Release Lever
Lever 1
1 [3] ITB Unit
ITB Unit Cover
Cover Release
Release Lever
Lever
[2]
[2] Process Unit
Process Unit Cover
Cover Release
Release Lever
Lever 2
2 [4] ITB Frame Unit Release Lever
37
1. Product Overview
• Long Sheet
● Tray -A1
Sheet Tray -Al (Option)
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
No.
o. Name
Name No. Name
Name
[1]
[1] Pickup Cover
Cover [4]
[4] Tray
[2]
[2] Side Guide Plate
Side Guide Plate [5]
[5] Pickup Side Cover
Pickup Side Cover
[3]
[3] Alignment Tray
Alignment Tray
●
• Upright Panel-Fl(Option)
ControlPanel-F1
Upright Control (Optio'
[4]
[5]
[3]
[7] [6]
[2]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[10]
[11]
No.
No. Name
Name No. Name
Name
[1] Control Panel Front Cover
Cover [7] Hinge Upper Cover
Hinge Upper Cover
[2]
[2] Clear Cover [8] Hinge Lower Cover
[3]
[3] Tally Lamp Lens
Tally Lamp Lens [9]
[9] Arm Upper Cover
Arm Upper Cover
[4]
[4] Cover 2
Control Panel Rear Cover 2 [10]
[10] Arm Lower Cover
[5]
[5] Cover 3
Control Panel Rear Cover 3 [11] Control Panel Mounting Base
Base
[6]
[6] Control Panel Rear Cover 1
38
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
Cross Section
Q Cross Section View
View
Toner Container
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk) Process Unit
Laser Scanner Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
Tandem Feed Unit
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Merging Path
Assembly Y M C Bk
Unit
Bypass Feed Unit
Y M C Bk
ITB Unit
Y M C Bk
Fo
Vertical Path
Unit
Sub Station Duplex

Left Feed Unit Secondary Transfer
Delivery Reverse Sub Station Duplex
Unit Main Station Lower Pre-registration Unit
Unit Right Feed Unit Left Deck
Feed Unit
Primary Fixing Main Station Duplex Right Deck
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container Assembly Feed Unit Registration Unit
Duplex Decurler
Unit
• Power Switch
Power Switch
■
■Types
Types of
of Power
Power Switches
Switches
This machine has the Main Power Switch and the Environment Heater Switch.
Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the machine is in sleep mode).
The Environment Heater Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater.
■
■Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch
•• Do
Do not
not turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the Main
Main Power
Power Switch
Switch while
while the
the progress bar (to
progress bar (to be
be displayed
displayed when
when the
the power
power is
is turned
turned ON)
ON) is
is displayed,
displayed,
which indicates
which indicates access
access to
to the
the HDD.
HDD.
•• Be
Be sure
sure to
to turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the main
main power
power switch
switch when
when turning
turning OFF
OFF the
the power.
power. (The
(The conventional
conventional shut-down
shut-down sequence
sequence process
process
is not
is not needed.)
needed.)
•• After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the main power switch again unless
the screen
the screen disappears.
disappears.
Do not
Do not turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the power
power during
during downloading.
downloading.
■
■Shutting Down the Host Machine in an Emergency
This equipment
This equipment isis equipped
equipped with
with a
a breaker
breaker for
for detecting
detecting overcurrent
overcurrent and
and electric
electric leakage
leakage inin order
order to
to prevent
prevent electrification.
electrification.
In the
In the event
event of
of an
an emergency,
emergency, be
be sure
sure to
to turn
turn the
the breaker
breaker switch
switch to
to OFF
OFF (toward
(toward the
the circle)
circle) to
to turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the power.
power.
39
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
ControlPanel
0 Control Panel
For PRISMAsync model, refer to PRISMAsync service manual.
■
• Control
Control Panel
Panel
Upright Control Panel-F1
[9]
[9] [7]
[7]
(--------
[1] =
-. [10]
[2] .= 00®
®C®, [8]
0 ®0
®O®
[3]
[3] = 1, =
[14]
[13]
[11]
[11]
[12]
[12]
f f
[4]
[4] [5]
[5] [[6]] [15] [16]
No. Name No.

Noih Name
[1] Main Menu Key [2] Custom Menu Key
[3] Status Monitor/Cancel Key [4] Volume Adjustment Dial
[5] Brightness Adjustment Key [6] Touch Panel Display
[7] Energy Saver Key [8] Numeric key
[9] Settings/registration Key [10] Counter Check Key
40
1. Product Overview
1. Product Overview
No.
No. Name
Name No.
No. Name
Name
[11] Stop Key
Stop Key [12] Operation Pen
Operation Pen
[13] ID (Authentication) Key
ID (Authentication) Key [14] Clear Key
Clear Key
[15]
[15] Key
Reset Key [16] Start Key
Key
• Main Menu
■
SSettings/
ett ings
Main Menu ..— Reg.Shortcut
iteg.Short cut 0
Select a furction. t F Show All

All ,
[1] 11 [2]
[2] • [3]
[3] [4]
[4] '
S,
Copy Scan an Access Print Server
Store Stored Foes
[5]
[5] r* [6]
[6]
Rings Fiery
Rey. Shortcut
No.
No. Name
Name No.
No. Name
Name
[1]
[1] Copy
Copy [2]
[2] Scan
Scan and Store
and Store
[3]
[3] Access Stored
Access Files
Stored Files [4] Print server
[5]
[5] to Settings/Registration
Shortcut to Settings/Registration [6]
[6] Fiery
• Settings/Registration Menu
■
Settis
Settings/
Of 6HWWLQJV5HJLVWUDWLRQ
Sett i ngs/Reg 1 st r at i on — Fteg. Shor tcut
Reg.Shortcut 0i
6HOHFWDQLWHPWRVHW
Select an item to eat
723
TOP 3UHIHUHQFHV
,Preferences
[ 1 [1]
]
[1]
0$GMXVWPHQW0DLQWHQDQFH
Adjustment/Ma i ntenance
[2]
)XQFWLRQ6HWWLQJV
0 Funct ion Settings
[3]
[3]
D Management
0DQDJHPHQW6HWWLQJV
Settings
[4]
1 /1
A
V
• •
/RJLQ
Log in &ORVH
Close A
No.
No. Name
Name No.
No. Name
Nam
[1] Preferences [2] Adjustment/Maintenance
[3]
[3] Function Settings
Function Settings [4]
[4] Management Settings
Management Settings
41
41
2
41111
)11k Technical
Technical
Explanation
Basic Configuration
Basic Configuration............................. 43 43
Controller System................................44
Controller System 44
Laser Exposure
Laser Exposure System......................
System 64
64
Image Formation System....................
73
Fixing
Fixing System....................................140
System 140
Pickup Feed
Pickup System......................... 195
Feed System 195
External Auxiliary
External Auxiliary System.................
System 273
273
Embedded RDS................................
Embedded RDS 300
300
Updater............................................. 310
Updater 310
DCM.................................................. 334
DCM 334
2. Technical
2. Technical Explanation
Explanation
Basic Configuration
FunctionalConfiguration
0 Functional Configuration
The machine
The machine may
may broadly
broadly be
be divided
divided into
into the
the following
following functional
functional system
system blocks;
blocks; document
document exposure
exposure system
system block,
block, controller
controller
system block,
system block, laser
laser exposure
exposure system
system block,
block, image
image formation
formation system
system block,
block, fixing
fixing system
system block
block and
and pickup/feed
pickup/feed system
system block.
block.
Controller system
HDD 1 Main Laser exposure system
controller
Option 1/2 Laser Laser Laser Laser
scanner scanner scanner scanner
board unit(Y) unit(M) unit(C) unit(Bk)
DC
controller
— _ _
Document exposure system
Drum unit Drum unit Drum unit Drum unit
Reader Exposure (Y)
(Y) (M) (C) (Bk)
CCD
controller lamp
ITB
Image
Imag,
formation system
Pickup/feed system I Fixing system r
Decurler Registration
Delivery Fixing 1.1 Transfer 1111- Pickup
.
Unit Unit
L
A
H Duplexing feed
Flow of paper Left Deck Right Deck

Flow of signal
Laser beam
43
4.2
2. Technical
Explanation
Controller System
0 Overview
Main controller
Main controller PCB 1 controls
PCB 1 controls the entire system.
the entire system. Main
Main controller
controller PCB
PCB 22 mainly
mainly controls
controls image
image processing
processing
Main controller
Main controller PCBs
PCBs 1 and 22 are
1 and are connected
connected through
through the
the riser
riser PCB.
PCB.
■
■Specifications/configuration
Specifications/configuration
●
• PCBs
[8] [7]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[1]
No.. Name
Name Reference
Reference
[1]
[1] Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 1
1
[2]
[2] TPM PCB
TPM PCB
[3]
[3] Flash PCB
Flash PCB
[4]
[4] Memory PCB
Memory PCB (512MB)
(512MB)
[5]
[5] Riser PCB
Riser PCB
[6]
[6] Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 2
2
[7]
[7] SRAM PCB
SRAM PCB
[8]
[8] COUNTER PCB
COUNTER PCB
[9]
[9] Memory PCB
Memory PCB (1GB)
(1GB)
[10]
[10] HDD1
HDD1
[11]
[11] Video PCB
Video PCB
[12]
[12] ECO PCB
ECO PCB
Parts name
Parts name Function, specifications,
Function, specifications, features
features
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 1
1 CPU: Control
CPU: Control of
of the
the entire
entire system
system
Various controls
Various controls (memory,
(memory, control
controlpanel,
panel, electric
electricpower,
power,voice),
voice),I/Fs,
I/Fs, RTC
RTC
Flash PCB
Flash PCB Boot program
Boot program
TPM PCB
TPM PCB To generate
To generate and
and save
save encryption
encryption key
key
Available only
Available only when
when TPM
TPM settings
settings is
isON:
ON: Management
Management Settings
Settings>> Data
Data Management
Management >
> TPM Settings
TPM Settings
(default:
(default: OFF)
OFF)
Not available
Not available with
with China models
China models
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 2
2 CPU: Image
CPU: Image control
control
Various image
Various image processing
processing (color
(color space
space conversion,
conversion, enlarge,
enlarge, reduction,
reduction, rotation,
rotation, composition,
composition, com-
com-
pression,
pression, rasterizing,
rasterizing, resolution
resolution conversion,
conversion, image
image binarization),
binarization), delay
delay memory control between
memory control between drums,
drums,
HDD control,
HDD control, I/Fs
I/Fs (reader,
(reader, USB (device))
USB (device))
44
2. Technical
Explanation
Parts name
features 111
Open I/F
Open I/F PCB
PCB Interface: Print Server
imagePRESS Server
imagePRESS Server B5000/imagePRESS Server B4000/PRISMAsync
B5000/imagePRESS Server B4000/PRISMAsync for
for iPR
iPR C10000VP-A1/
C10000VP-A1/ IPR
IPR CR
CR
Svr
Riser PCB I/F (main controller 1 - 2, main controller - HDD, main controller - DC controller)
HDD 3.5 inch
3.5 inch SATA
SATA I/FI/F
Up to
Up to 2
2 HDDs
HDDs can
can be
be mounted
mounted inin the
the case
case of
of mirroring
mirroring configuration.
configuration.
BOX data,
BOX data, Address
Address book,
book, security
security information
information (password,
(password, certificate)
certificate)
Op.: Option HDD MIRROR KIT (2.5inch / 250GB)
The details
The details are
are appendixes
appendixes :: Backup
Backup Data
Data
● Memory
• Memory
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 1
1
DDR2-SDRAM DDR2-SDRAM
(On Board) (DIMM)
J12
J13 㻰㻵㻼㼋㻿㼃㼋㻭㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
DIPSWA BOARD
BAT1
Parts name
features
DDR2-SDRAM (On
DDR2-SDRAM (On Board)
Board) 1 GB
1 GB (standard)
(standard)
Used for
Used for saving
saving image,
image, program
program data
data
DDR2-SDRAM (DIMM) 512 MB
512 MB (standard)
(standard)
Used for
Used for saving
saving image,
image, program
program data
data
DIP SW A BOARD Select Priter
Select Priter Server(imagePRESS
Server(imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync)
Server/PRISMAsync)
Lithium battery (BAT1)) For RTC
Life: approx.
Life: approx. 5
5 years
years
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 2
2
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM(M1) DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
J13
DDR3-SDRAM(S)
DDR3-SDRAM(P)
Parts name
features
DDR2-SDRAM (M1:
DDR2-SDRAM 1 GB
(Ml: On Board) 1 GB (standard)
(standard)
Rasterizing, rendering,
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution
conversion, coding
coding // decoding
decoding
DDR2-SDRAM (MO:
DDR2-SDRAM (M0: DIMM) 1 GB
1 GB (standard)
(standard)
Rasterizing, rendering,
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution
conversion, coding
coding // decoding
decoding
DDR3-SDRAM (P) 2 GB
2 GB (standard)
(standard)
Print image
Print image processing,
processing, delay
delay processing
processing between
between drums
drums
DDR3-SDRAM (S) 256 MB
256 MB (standard)
(standard)
45
45
2. Technical
Explanation
Parts name
features
SRAM 2 MB
To save
To save data
data in
in Settings
Settings // Registration
Registration // Service
Service Mode
Mode and
and image
image data
data management
management information
information
in HDD
The details
The details are
are appendixes
appendixes :: Backup
Backup Data
Data
Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM
For SRAM backup,
backup, Life:
Life: approx.
approx. 5
5 years
years
●
• I/F, connector
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 1
1
J1025 J20 J21
J8 J5 USB(H)
Riser J17 TPM
J11
J7 LAN
Flash
J15 Fan
J4 UI
External I/F
J6 Mini-USB
Internal I/F J13
DIP_SW
No.
No. Function, specifications
Function, specifications No.
No. Function, specifications
Function, specifications
J13
J13 DIP SW BOARD J11 Flash PCB I/F
J4
J4 Control panel
Control panel I/F
I/F J5
J5 USB I/F
USB I/F (Host)
(Host) *For
*For Service
Service use
use only(System
only(System version
version
Upgrade, Collecting
Upgrade, Collecting Debug
Debug Log,
Log, DCM(Import/Export)
DCM(Import/Export)
J6
J6 Unused
Unused J8
J8 TPM PCB I/F
J15
J15 Fan I/F J1025 Unused
J1025 Unused
J7 LAN I/F J21 Unused
Unused
1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
Priter Server(imagePRESS
Priter Server(imagePRESS Server/
Server/
PRISMAsync/IPR CR Svr)
J17 Riser PCB I/F J20
J20 Unused
Unused
Main controller
Main controller PCB
PCB 2
2
External I/F
Internal I/F
J1010 J14
Riser
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F
J22
Reader
Jack No.
Jack No. Function, specifications
Function, specifications
J14 Riser PCB I/F
J22 Reader I/F
Reader I/F
J1010
J1010 Open I/F
Open I/F PCB
PCB
imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync/IPR CR Svr
46
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Function expansion
Main controller PCB1
Main controller PCB1

controller BOTTOM VIEW
\
DIP_SW A BOARD
DIP_SW_A
DIP_SW_A BOARD
Name Function, specifications,

features
DIP SW A BOARD Select Priter Server(imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync)
DIP SW ABOARD
Via the DIP
DIP switch
switch settings,
settings, the
the communication
communication between
between engine
engine and
and Priter
Priter Server
Server isenabled.
isenabled.
SW1
SW2 SW1 ISW4
SW3 / 2
SW4
11
■
Off(0) JoL
Off(0) / \
On(1) 4 \3
i
No.
No. Name
1
1 DIP switch
2 Power switch
3 Power LED
4 Tally LED
switch has
The DIP switch has four
four bi-state
bi-state (OFF/ON)
(OFF/ON) switches.
switches. The
The table
table below
below gives
gives an
an overview
overview ofdifferent
ofdifferent states.
states.
DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode

Boot Mode IP Address
IP Address
PRISMAsync Normal boot mode 134.188.254.21
㻻㻲㻲
OFF
㻻㻺
ON
㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟
SW1 SW2 㻿㼃㻠
SW3 SW4
47
2. Technical
Explanation
DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode

Boot Mode IP Address
IP Address
PRISMAsync Safe download mode (2 + 8 key boot) 134.188.254.21
㻻㻲㻲
OFF
㻻㻺
ON

SW1 SW2 SW3 㻿㼃㻠
SW4
EFI Normal boot mode 10.255.255.1

㻻㻲㻲
OFF
㻻㻺
ON

SW1 SW2 SW3 㻿㼃㻠
SW4
Power switch:
The Power
The Power switch
switch (push
(push button)
button) located
located on
on the DIP switch
the DIP switch board
board is
is not
not used.
used.
The behaviour
The behaviour of
of the
the switch
switch isis equal
equal to
to the
the "Energy
"Energy safer
safer key"
key" on
on the
the Canon
Canon user
user interface.
interface.
LED:
switch board
The DIP switch board has
has two
two LEDs.
LEDs.
The Power
The Power LED
LED is
is used
used to
to identify
identify wether
wether the
the engine
engine is
is energized
energized oror not.
not.
CAUTION:
If the
the Power
Power LED
LED isis On
On and
and the
the Tally
Tally LED
LED is
is OFF
OFF this
this could
could indicate
indicate a
a problem
problem during
during the
the start-upsequence.
start-upsequence. The
The problem
problem
occurs before
occurs before the
the main
main controller
controller software
software is
is fully
fully operational.
operational.
LED Color
Color Function
Function Information
Tally LED Amber Processing / data indi-cator Controlled by maincontroller software
Power LED Green Main power indicator Controlled by hard-ware
Main controller PCB 2
Main controller PCB 2 BOTTOM VIEW
Open I/F PCB
Open I/F PCB
Name Function, specifications,

features
Open I/F PCB imagePRESS Server B5000/imagePRESS Server B4000 /PSYNC IPR C10000VP-A1
48
48
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• HDD
FSTDEV Image data (Box, etc.)

• TMP_GEN
TMP GEN Universal data (temporary file)
TMP_PSS
TMP PSS For
For PDL
PDL spooling
TMP_FAX
TMP FAX FAX data
APL_SEND
APL SEND Address book, filter
• APL_MEAP
APL MEAP MEAP application
APL_GEN Universal data
APL_KEEP MEAP saving data
APL_LOG System log
IMG_MNG Text management table
PDLDEV PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
• FSTCDEV l Job archiving (chasing)
• THUMDEV Thumbnail
• BOOTDEV System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
CRBDEV For Advanced Box
APL_CDS For distribution server
■
• Boot / Shutdown sequence
● Boot sequence
• Boot sequence
Main power switch ON [ ]: program storage location
- Hardware initialization processing
- Initialization process of hardware

- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
4
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU
[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
[Main controller PCB 2]
image PRE SS - Starting application
4V
Standby screen display
NOTE:
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized. For this reason, the progress bar
cannot be utilized for troubleshooting. See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
Related Error
Related Error Codes
Codes (major
(major error
error codes):
codes):
E602: Error in HDD
•• 0001: Failure in recognizing HDD. Boot
Boot partition
partition (BOOTDEV)
(BOOTDEV) is
is not
not found
found at
at startup.
startup.
49
2. Technical
Explanation
•• 0002:
0002: There
There is is no
no system
system software
software for
for the
the main
main CPU.
CPU.
•• 0006:
0006: There
There is is no
no system
system software
software for
for the
the sub
sub CPU.
CPU.
E613: Failure
E613: Failure in
in memory
memory (main
(main controller
controller PCB
PCB 2)
2)
•• 1536: Capacity shortage
1536: Capacity shortage of
of DDR2-SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM (MO, (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
M1) (1.5GB required)
E748: Error
E748: Error in
in board
board (Flash
(Flash PCB)
PCB)
•• 2010:
2010: IPL
IPL (Initial
(Initial Program
Program Loader)
Loader) is
is not
not found.
found.
•• 2011:
2011: OS
OS isis not
not found.
found.
● Shutdown sequence
• Shutdown sequence
Before turning
Before turning OFF the main
OFF the main power
power switch,
switch, it
it is
is necessary
necessary to to perform
perform HDD completion processing
HDD completion processing (to
(to prevent
prevent damage
damage on on the
the
HDD), cooling of
HDD), cooling of the
the internal
internal printer
printer (to
(to prevent
prevent fixed
fixed toner
toner due
due to
tohigh
hightemperature)
temperature) and
and exhaust
exhaust (to
(to prevent
prevent smeared
smeared image
image due
due
to chemical
to chemical reaction
reaction of
of ozone
ozone inin the
the machine
machine and
and photosensitive
photosensitive drum). This sequential
drum). This sequential processing
processing is
is called
called "shutdown
"shutdown sequence"
sequence"
and was executed
and was executed on on the
the legacy
legacy models
models manually
manually (by (by holding
holding down
down the
the power
power supply
supply switch
switch on
on the Control Panel
the Control for aa specific
Panel for specific
duration).
duration).
When the
When the main
main power
power switch
switch is
is turned
turned OFF on the
OFF on the main
main body,
body, Main Controller PCB
Main Controller PCB 11 detects
detects this
this operation
operation and then the
and then the shutdown
shutdown
sequence starts
sequence starts // executes
executes automatically.
automatically.
NOTE:
In addition, hardware
In addition, shutdown sequence
hardware shutdown exists. If
sequence exists. If shutdown
shutdown sequence
sequence is is not
not executed
executed normally
normally due
due to
to occurrence
occurrence of of software
software
trouble, the
trouble, machine is
the machine is shut
shut down
down in
in after
after during
during some
some period
period ofof time
time progress
progress byby the
the timer
timer in
in the
the AC
AC Driver
Driver PCB.
PCB. IfIf itit is
is not
not shut
shut
down within
down within after
after during
during some
some period
period of
of time
time progress,
progress, failure
failure of
of the
the AC
AC Driver
Driver PCB
PCB isis suspected.
suspected.
Controls
0 Controls
■
■Overview
MI Item Control Detail
Control Detail Reference
Reference
Image processing control
Image processing control Convert the
Convert the image
image data
data input
input from
from the
the external
external device
device or
or
reader unit into
reader unit into the
the video
video data and send
data and send itit to
to DC
DC controller.
controller.
Backup battery
Backup battery Data backup
Data backup battery
battery in
in case
case of
of power
power failure
failure or
or disconnection
disconnection
of power plug.
Power save
Power save function
function Reduce the
Reduce the power
power consumption
consumption at standby mode.
at standby mode.
Security function
Security function Encryption key,
Encryption certificate, protection
key, certificate, protection of
of password.
password.
HDD mirroring
HDD mirroring function
function (option) Mirroring processing
Mirroring processing of
of HDD
HDD data.
HDD (option)
Removable HDD (option) HDD is
HDD is installable/removable
installable/removable by
by user.
user.
■ Image Processing
■Image Processing Control
Control
Copy
Copy
To DC Controller
HDD Reader
HDD
I/F
writing/reading
witting/reading V
• Image processing
R䚷esolution conversion,
Resolution
䚷
IImage
mage rotation,
rotation,
Print type image 䚷
JPEG
JPEG compression/extension
compression/extension
processing
Extension processing
Tile raster conversion
Image data buffer

(memory)
Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller

PCB 1I
PCB PCB 2
50
50
2. Technical
2. Explanation
Technical Explanation
Print
Network To DC Controller
HDD
111110t HOD
I/F Rendering
HDD
writing/reading
Imagedata
H Image databuffer
buffer
(memory)
LAN
Controller

PCB 1 PCB 2
SEND
HDD
Network
Reader
HDD Image processing

writing/reading
䚷
Resolution conversion,
䚷
Image rotation,
䚷
JPEG compression/extension
compression/wdension
Data conversion
䚷Tile
Tile raster conversion
䚷JPEG encode
LAN Image data buffer
Controller (memory)

PCB 1 PCB 2
■ Backup Battery
■Backup Battery
Main controller
Main of the
controller PCB of the host
host machine
machine has
has one
one lithium
lithium battery
battery as
as a
a data
data backup
backup battery
battery in
in case
case of
of power
power failure
failure or
or disconnection
disconnection
of the
of the power
power plug.
plug.
Main Controller PCB1
Item Description
Type of
Type of battery
battery Lithium battery
Lithium battery (3V,
(3V, 620
620 mAh)
mAh)
Life of
Life of battery
battery Approx 5
Approx 5 years
years (when
(when the
the power
power plug
plug is
is disconnected)
disconnected)
Replacement of
Replacement of battery
battery Battery cannot
Battery cannot be
be replaced
replaced independently
independently on
on service
service site.
site.
Main Controller PCB2
Item Description
Type of
Type of battery
(3V, 620
620 mAh)
mAh)
Life of
Life of battery
battery Approx 5
Approx 5 years
years (when
(when the
the power
power plug
plug is
is disconnected)
disconnected)
Replacement of
Battery cannot be
be replaced
independently on
on service
service site.
site.
DC Controller PCB
Item a Description
Type of
Type of battery
(3V, 620
620 mAh)
mAh)
Life of
Life of battery
battery Approx 5
Approx 5 years
years (when
(when the
the power
power plug
plug is
is disconnected)
disconnected)
51
2. Technical
Explanation
Item
Item Description
Description
Replacement of
Battery cannot be
be replaced
independently on
on service
service site.
site.
■
■ Security
Security Features
Features (Encryption
(Encryption Key,
Key, Certificate,
Certificate, Password
Password Protection)
Protection)
The main
The main controller PCB 1
controller PCB 1 of
of the
the host
host machine
machine holds
holds a
a new PCB named
new PCB named "TPM
"TPM PCB".
PCB". "TPM"
"TPM" stands
stands for
for "Trusted
"Trusted Platform
Platform Module",
Module",
which collectively
which collectively refers
refers to
to the
the chip
chip set
set for
for generating
generating and
and storing
storing encryption
encryption keys
keys and
and computing
computing public
public key
key encryption.
encryption.
TPM Board
}
The TPM
The TPM PCB
PCB protects
protects security
information (passwords,
(passwords, certificates,
certificates, and
and encryption
encryption keys)
keys) stored
stored in
in the
the HDD
HDD and
and SRAM.
SRAM. Note
Note
that this
that PCB does
this PCB does not
not protect
protect set,
set, registered
registered or
or stored
stored data
data other
other than
than security
security information.
information.
The TPM
The TPM key
key embedded
embedded inin the
the chip
chip is
is used
used to
to encrypt
encrypt // decrypt
decrypt security
security information.
information.
TPM PCB
IAD
HDD / SRAM
Encryption
ncryption key Public key for User
forr password SSL certificate
communication
The TPM
The TPM keykey is
is protected
protected from
from illegal
illegal access
access in
in a
a virtually
virtually perfect
perfect manner,
manner, thus
thus the
the security
information of
of the
the host
host machine
machine is is
securely protected
securely protected even
even inin the
the following
following conditions.
conditions.
•• When
When thethe HDD and // or
HDD and or the
the main
main controller PCB is
controller PCB is taken
taken out
out from
from the
the host
host machine
machine and
and installed
installed in
in the
the MFP
MFP with
with the
the different
different
serial number
serial number (the
(the model
model information
information held
held in
in the TPM PCB
the TPM PCB isis specific
specific to
to the
the machine
machine originally
originally enabled
enabled the TPM setting)
the TPM setting)
•• When
When thethe system
system ofof the
the host
host machine
machine is
is hacked
hacked viavia the
the network
network
Enable this
Enable this function
function in
in Setting
Setting // Registration
Registration mode.
mode.
Management Setting
Management Setting >> Data
Data Management
Management > TPM Setting
> TPM Setting ->
-> ON
ON (OFF
(OFF by
by default)
default)
52
52
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Operation overview (When the TPM setting is "ON")
MN-CON1
TPM PCB
TPM key
HDD
MN-CON2
•
1 .4 .
.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 111111111
• -----'
SRAM 4t II
Password
Password
Password • 4, Certificate
4, Key
Certificate 444.
4 4:
•44 ipp
Key ) -4
•
Common Key
.
P /
!11111111111111111111
Security information
Security information (password,
(password, certificate
certificate and
and encryption
encryption key key to
to be
be used
used for
for various
various applications) is linked
applications) is linked with
with the
the common
common key,
key,
so itit is
so is encrypted
encrypted and
and stored
stored inin the
the HDD/SRAM. Without the
HDD/SRAM. Without the common
common key,
key, decoding
decoding isis disabled.
disabled.
When the
When TPM setting
the TPM setting isis set
set to
to "ON",
"ON", the
the common
common key key itself
itself is
is encrypted.
encrypted. The
The common
common key key is
is linked
linked with
with the
the TPM key. Without
the TPM key, key, decoding
decoding is is disabled.
disabled.
It is
It is extremely
extremely difficult
difficult to
to take
take out
out the TPM key
the TPM key from
from thethe outside.
outside.
TPM PCB
TPM PCB can
can be
be used
used onon this
this machine
machine only,
only, so
so itit cannot
cannot be
be used
used onon the
the other
other machines.
machines. (E746
(E746 occurs)
occurs)
Related Error
Related Error Codes
Codes
E746 (Error in encryption)
•• 0031
0031 Hardware error
Cause: TPM
Cause: TPM PCB
PCB isis not
not mounted,
mounted, TPM PCB from other machine is installed, TPM chip is faulty
Remedy: Mount
Remedy: Mount the
the appropriate
appropriate TPM PCB, Replace with a new TPM PCB
●
• Works before / after introduction
Execute the
Execute the following
following in
in Setting
Registration mode
mode ("TPM setting" is
("TPM setting" is OFF
OFF by
by default).
default).
1. Enable the
1. Enable the feature
feature
2. Backup the TPM key
2.
3. Restore
3. Restore the
the TPM key
4. Disable
4. Disable the
the feature
feature
The works
The works above
above are are basically
basically done
done by
by users.
users.
CAUTION:
When the
When TPM setting
the TPM setting is
is set
set to
to "ON",
"ON", advice
advice users
users onon the
the following:
following:
Back up the TPM TPM key
key swiftly
swiftly after
after the
the setting
setting isis ON
ON
•• Keep
Keep the
the password
password usedused at at backup
backup securely
securely
•• Never
Never lose
lose the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive with
with the
the backup
backup TPM
TPM key
key file
file saved
saved
•• The
The TPM
TPM key
key should
should be be restored
restored after
after the TPM PCB
the TPM PCB isis replaced
replaced due
due toto failures
failures or
or the
the like.
like.
Unless the
Unless the key
key is
is restored,
restored, the
the security
information (passwords,
(passwords, encryption
encryption key,
key, and
and certificates)
certificates) cannot
cannot be
be used.
used.
When the
When the key
key restoration
restoration isis failed
failed due
due to
to the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive lost
lost or
or others,
others, "Initialize
"Initialize All
All Data
Data // Settings"
Settings" should
should be
be executed
executed
to reactivate
to reactivate TPM
TPM functionality.
functionality. The
The security
security may
may bebe undermined
undermined ifif thethe old
old Setting
Registration data
data are
are maintained
maintained as
as itit
is.
is.
53
2. Technical
Explanation
1. Enable
1. Enable Functionality
Functionality
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Setup of
Setup of "System
"System Management
Management PIN"
PIN"
It
It is
is recommended
recommended for
for users
users (administrators)
(administrators) to
toset
set the
the system
systemmanagement
management PIN before installing
PIN before installing TPM.
TPM.
The TPM
The TPM key
keyis
is backed
backed up
up after
after the
the TPM
TPMsetting
settingis
is set
set to
to "ON".
"ON". However,
However, the
the key
key backup
backup is
is permitted
permitted only
only once. Unless
once. Unless
the key
the key is
is properly
properly backed
backed up,
up, users
users other
other than
than administrators
administrators may
may illegally
illegally obtain
obtain the
the backup
backup file.
file. To
To avoid
avoid such
such risks
risks
effectively, the
effectively, the system
system management
management PIN should be
PIN should set.
be set.
1. SetManagement
1. Set ManagementSetting
Setting >> Data
Data Management
Management >> TPM
TPMSetting
Setting to
to "ON".
"ON".
Top Cj HOD Data Complete Deletion
1—
Management Settings
Data Management • Initialize All Data/Settings
• TPM Settings
► Off
un
t
2. Click
2. Click "Yee,
"Yes",and
andrestart
restart the
the machine.
machine.
Top HOD Data Complete Deletion

Managemen
Data Manag Do you want to use a TPM key?

If so, press [Yes], then restart the main unit.
(After restarting you can perform TPM key back
up using this setting even if the TPM key is
corrupted.)
Yes No
Close
This setting
This setting is
is enabled
enabled after
after the machine is
the machine is restarted.
restarted.
2. TPM
2. TPM Key
Key Backup
Backup
The TPM
The TPM key
keybackup
backup file
file can
can be
be stored
stored only
only in
in USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive (supported
(supported file
file system:
system: FAT32).
FAT32).
Note that
Note that this
this file
file requires
requires the
the memory
memory free
free space
space of
of several
several MBs.
MBs.
1. Insert the
1. Insert the USB
USBflash
flash drive
drive to
to the
the machine.
machine.
The USB
The USB I/F I/F(host)
(host)isis found
found at
at the
the side
side of
of the
the control
control panel
panel as
as well
well as
as the
the main
main controller
controller PCB.
PCB.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Ensure to
Ensure to insert
insert only
only one
one USB flash drive.
USB flash drive.
If
If the backup job
the backup job is
is started
started with
with 2
2 or
or more
more USB flash drives
USB flash drives connected,
connected, the
the message
message is
is shown
shown to
to notify
notify that
that the
the backup
backup is
is
failed.
failed.
NOTE:
NOTE:
The USB
The USB flash
flash drive
drive holds
holds the
the TPM
TPM key
key backup
backup files
files by
by serial
serial number.
number. Thus,
Thus, backup
backup files
files for
for multiple
multiple machines
machines can
can be
be saved in
saved in
a USB
a USB flash
flash drive.
drive.
54
2. Technical
Explanation
2. Click
2. Click[Back
[Back up
up TPM
TPM Key]
Key] in
in Management
Management Setting
Setting >> Data
Data Management
Management >
> TPM
TPM Setting.
Setting.
<TPM Settings>
■Use TPM ► On
Backup TPM
Key
Restore TPM
Key
OK
3. Click
3. Click [Password]
[Password] to
to enter
enter the
the password
password (4-12
(4-12 digits).
digits). Then,
Then, enter
enter the
the password
password for
for confirmation.
confirmation.
4. Click
4. Click [OK]
[OK] to
to initiate
initiate TPM
TPM key
key backup.
backup.
User Mode
The TPM key backup will begin.

Check that the memory media to be used is
Top connected, then press [OK]
Man
Data
X Cancel OK
55
55
2. Technical
Explanation
5. Click
5. Click[OK]
[OK] on
on Backup
Backup Completion
Completion Screen
Screen and
and remove
remove the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive.
drive.
CAUTION:
The following
The following may
may cause
cause failures
failures in
in backup.
backup.
If any
If any of of the
the following
following is
is detected,
detected, the
the backup
backup process
process is
is aborted
aborted and
and the
the message
message and
and the
the cause
cause for
for the
the failure
failure are
are shown
shown
on the
on the screen.
screen. Take
Take an
an appropriate
appropriate measure
measure to to recover
recover this.
this.
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive is
is not
not inserted
inserted to
to the
the machine
machine
•• 22 or
or more
more USB
USB flash
flash drives
drives are
are inserted
inserted to
to the
the machine
machine
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive has
has insufficient
insufficient free
free memory
memory space
space
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive is
is write-protected
write-protected
•• No
No key
key is
is found
found
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The USB
The USB flash
flash drive
drive should
should be
be securely
securely stored.
stored.
Give advice users on the following points.
Give advice users on the following points.
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive should
should be
be securely
securely stored
stored
•• Once
Once the
the TPM
TPM keykey backup
backup file
file is
is saved
saved in
in the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive,
drive, never
never save
save the
the backup
backup file
file on
on a
a server
server or
or the
the like
like
accessible to unanimous users.
accessible to unanimous users.
NOTE:
Name of
Name of TPM
TPM key
key backup
backup file
serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.
The serial
3. Restore
3. Restore of
of TPM
TPM key
key
Procedure is
Procedure is about
about the
the same
same as
as the
the backup
backup work.
work.
Difference between restore work and
Difference between restore work and backupbackup work:
work: Rebooting
Rebooting is
is necessary
necessary (turn
(turn OFF
OFF and
and then
then ON
ON the
the main
main power)
power) after
after
completion of restore work.
completion of restore work.
1. Connect
1. Connect the
the USB
USB memory
memory that
that saves
saves TPM
TPM key.
key.
2. Select the following: Management setting
2. Select the following: Management setting > > Data
Data management
management > > TPM
TPM setting;
setting; and
and click
click [Restore
[Restore TPM
TPM key].
key].
<TPM Settings)
Top
Man • Use TPM ► On
Data
Backup TPM
Key
Restore TPM
Key
3. Enter
3. Enter the
the password
password set
set in
in the
the backup
backup process.
process.
4. Click
4. Click [OK]
[OK] on
on Start
Start Restoration
Restoration Screen.
Screen. The
The restoration
restoration process
process is
is started.
started.
5. Click
5. Click [OK]
[OK] on
on Restoration
Restoration Completion
Completion Screen.
Screen. Remove
Remove the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive and
and turn
turn OFF/
OFF/ ON
ON the
the main
main power
power switch.
switch.
56
56
2. Technical
Explanation
CAUTION:
The following
The following may
may cause
cause failures
failures in
in restoration.
restoration.
If any
If any ofof the
the following
following is
is detected,
detected, the
the restoration
restoration process
process isis aborted
aborted and
and the
the message
message and
and the
the cause
cause for
for the
the failure
failure are
are
shown on
shown on the
the screen.
screen. Take
Take an an appropriate
appropriate measure
measure forfor recovery.
recovery.
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive is
is not
not inserted
inserted to
to the
the machine
machine
•• 2
2 or
or more
more USB
USB flash
flash drives
drives are
are inserted
inserted toto the
the machine
machine
•• The
The USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive is
is security-protected
security-protected
•• No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive
•• The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
•• The
The wrong
wrong password
password is is entered
entered
•• After
After the
the TPM
TPM key
key was
was backed
backed up,
up, [Initialize
[Initialize All
All Systems/
Systems/ Settings]
Settings] was
was executed
executed
•• SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
4. Disable
4. Disable the
the feature
feature
To set
To set "OFF"
"OFF" for
for the
the TPM
TPM setting,
setting, execute
execute [Initialize
[Initialize All
All Data
Data // Settings].
Settings].
Top HOD Data Complete Deletion

Management Settings
I ■ Initialize All Data/Settings
- TPM Settings
► Off
Close
● Related Error
• Related Error Code
Code
E746: Error in encryption
•• 0031: Error in hardware
•• 0032:
0032: Error
Error occurred
occurred and
and the
the system
system is
is unrecoverable
unrecoverable
•• 0033:
0033: Error
Error occurred
occurred but
but the
the system
system is
is recoverable
recoverable
•• 0034: The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON
●
• Target
Target data
data for
for encryption/decryption
encryption/decryption (reference)
(reference)
Type Application/Function Security Information
Security Information Storage Desti-
Storage Desti-
Al nation
Password/PIN BOX BOX Password HDD
Password for encryption at BOX backup SRAM
Password for SMB server at BOX backup SRAM
Send Password for a file destination of Address Book HDD
Password for POP3 server SRAM
Password of time stamp PDF SRAM
PIN for destination list (in destination setting) SRAM
UI Service mode password SRAM
Network FTP authentication password SRAM
User name and password of proxy authentication client SRAM
Others A password for AeAgent UI login SRAM
User info of the device login HDD
Department management data (including administrator pass- SRAM
word)
Encryption key MIB
M IB Authentication key and encryption key for SNMPv3 SRAM
57
57
2. Technical
Explanation
Type
Type Application/Function ■ Security Information
Security Information Storage Desti-
Storage Desti-
nation
Certificate/Private SSL, AMS Device key pair (SSL, AMS) HDD
key Signature SEND User key pair HDD
Others User environment data Keyring information (password) HDD
■
■HDD mirroring feature (option)
This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).
If one
If one of
of the
the HDDs
HDDs is
is faulty,
faulty, the
the other
other one
one operates
operatesas
as"master".
"master.
Master
Master (HDD1)
HDD Mirroring Kit

HDD Mirroring
250GB
Standard Mirroring
Mirroring PCB
PCB
LED PCB
Ch A
00
Backup (HDD2)
Backup (HDD2) 00
Ch B
250GB
Option
58
2. Technical
Explanation
■ Works before
■Works before using
using this
this functionality
functionality (installation)
(installation)
Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the
for HDD1 mirroring PCB
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH B
CH A
Install HDD2 HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the

mirroring PCB.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Slot.1 (HDD1) /
Turn ON the main power
CH B
CH AA.
CH
1 V
Turn ON the mirroring feature
Turn ON the main power
The storage data of the 1st HDD is

“Rebuild”
Start "Rebuild" automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
“Rebuild”.
operation is called "Rebuild".
•
“Rebuild”
Complete "Rebuild"
Rebuild progress
Rebuild progress is
is shown
shown as
as messages on the
messages on the status
status line
line of
of the
the control
control panel.
panel.
"Copying data
"Copying data to
to HDD. xx%"
HDD. xx%"
NOTE:
NOTE:
•• This
This machine
machine can
can be
be used
used even
even during
during "rebuild"
"rebuild" process
process (operation
(operation is
is performed
performed with
withHDD1)
HDD1)
•• The
The HDD
HDDwill
will not
not be
be damaged
damagedeven evenififturning
turning OFF
OFFthe thepower
powerduring
during"rebuild"
"rebuild" process.
process. "Rebuild"
"Rebuild" is
is resumed
resumed once
once the
the power
power
is turned
is turned ON the next
ON the next time.
time. This
This does
doesnotnotapply
applyin
inthe
thecase
caseof
ofblackout
blackoutor ordisconnecting
disconnecting the
the power
powercode
codeduring
during "rebuild"
"rebuild"
process
process
59
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• HDD reading / writing operation
At reading: At writing:
Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) The same data is written to each HDD at
only the same timing
Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB 2
Mirroring PCB Mirroring PCB
LA
■
HDD
HDD HDD
HDD HDD HDD
1 2 1 2
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD is performed properly.
In the
In the case
case of
of failure:
failure:
•• The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If one of the HDDs is faulty, the operation continues by using the other one as
"master".
"master"
•• If
If both
both two
two HDDs
HDDs are
are faulty,
faulty, E602
E602 error
error is
is shown
shown on
on the
the control
control panel
panel to
to stop
stop the
the operation.
operation.
●
• List of operation status (LED)
HDD operation
HDD operation statuses
statuses are
are indicated
indicated with
with 4
4 LEDs
LEDs mounted
mounted on
on the
the LED
LED PCB.
PCB.
The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates any failures.
The table
The table below
below lists
lists HDD
HDD statuses
statuses indicated
indicated by
by each
each LED.
LED.
For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a high speed.
Status
Status HDD 1 (Ch A) HDD 2 (Ch B) Name of
Name of Mode
Mode
GREEN LED RED LED GREEN LED RED LED
Normal (standby) --- --- --- --- Mirror mode
Accessing to HDD1 A (*1) --- --- --- ----
Accessing to HDD2 --- --- A (*1) ---
___ ----
HDD1 failed --- A --- --- Degrade mode
HDD2 is faulty --- --- --- A Degrade mode
Copying data to HDD1 (Rebuild) --- / A B --- / A --- Rebuild mode
Copying data to HDD2 (Rebuild) --- / A --- --- / A B Rebuild mode
Both HDDs failed or Master HDD failed --- (*2) A --- (*2) A Halt mode
--- : Not lit A : Lit B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds

*1: The LED is blinking in a high speed
*2: The green LED may be lit
●
• Description of Modes
The mirroring
The mirroring system
system ofof this
this machine
machine consists
consists of
of 4
4 modes.
modes.
The modes
The modes inin parentheses
parentheses showshow the
the mirroring
mirroring system
system statuses.
statuses.
The status
The status flows
flows among
among thethe modes
modes below
below during
during operation.
operation.
The table
The table below
below lists
lists descriptions
descriptions of
of modes
modes and
and operational
operational overview.
overview.
Name of
Name of Mode
Mode Description Master HDD
Master HDD Status
Status Backup HDD
Backup HDD Status
Status
Mirror Mode Both HDDs are normally operated In normal operation In normal operation
Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in the backup HDD sus- In normal operation With troubles (HDD not installed/
pends mirroring operation. The machine can HDD in trouble)
be used under this condition, however, the
backup HDD should be replaced at the earliest
convenience.
60
60
2. Technical
Explanation
Name of
Name of Mode
Mode Description
Description Master HDD
Master HDD Status
Status Backup HDD
Backup HDD Status
Status
Rebuild mode
Rebuild mode The data
The data of
of the
the master
master HDD
HDD is
is copied
copied (rebuilt) In normal
(rebuilt) In normal operation
operation In recovery
In recovery from
from the
the trouble
trouble
to the
to the backup
backup HDD.
HDD. The
The machine
machine can
can be
be used
used (Copying data
(Copying data of
of Master
Master HDD)
HDD)
under this
under this condition.
condition.
Halt mode
Halt mode Both HDDs
Both HDDs are
are in
in trouble
trouble (see
(see *1)
*1) In trouble
In trouble (HDD
(HDD notnot installed/
installed/ With troubles
With troubles (HDD
(HDD not
not installed/
installed/
HDD installed
HDD installed not
not registered/
registered/ HDD installed
HDD installed not
not registered/
registered/
HDD disconnected while the mir- HDD disconnected while the mir-
roring board
roring board is
is in
in operation)
operation) roring board is in operation)
*1: Turn
*1: Turn OFF/
OFF/ ON
ON the
the power
power in
in this
this mode,
mode, the
the mode
mode returns
returns to
to the
the previous
previous mode.
mode.
Mode Flow
Mode Flow at
at Start-up
Start-up
( Turn
TurnON
ONMain
MainPower
Power Switch
Switch
Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
'Jr •
Halt Mode
I Mirror Mode Degrade Mode
Degrade Mode I I Rebuild
RebuildMode
Mode
•
Trouble See Overview of ( Trouble
Trouble
Trouble Recovers
Recovery
Both HDDs Backup HDD

Either HDD
In which HDD? In which HDD?
!Degrade
Degrade Mode
Mode 'Degrade
Degrade Mode
Mode
Master HDD
See Overview of See Overview of

(Trouble Recovery,
Trouble Recovery ( Trouble Recovery
• •
Unable to detect ( Unable to detect
Halt Mode
( Master HDD at Start-up Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode Halt Mode Halt Mode
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mirror Mode
61
2. Technical
Explanation
Mode Flow
Mode Flow during
during Operation
Operation
Mirror Mode
Trouble
Either HDD
In which HDD?
1
Both HDDs Degrade Mode
See Overview of
(Trouble
Trouble Recovery
Recovery,
Halt Mode
Master HDD
In which HDD?
Backup HDD
Halt Mode
I Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Unable to detect Unable to detect

Master HDD Backup HDD
HDD Status?
When successfully
successfully I Degrade Mode
Rebuilt
Halt Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
(Unable HOD)
Halt Mode
See Overview of
No‘Trouble Recovery III
I Mirror Mode I
Mirror Mode
●
• Overview of Trouble Recovery
When any
When any trouble
trouble occurs
occurs inin the
the mirroring
mirroring system,
system, take
take the
the action
action for
for recovery
recovery appropriate
appropriate to
to each
each mode.
mode.
The HDD
The HDD inin trouble
trouble can
can be
be located
located by
by the
the red
red LED
LED onon the
the LED
LED PCB.
PCB.
In case
In case the
the master
master HDD
HDD cannot
cannot be
be located,
located, turn
turn OFF/
OFF/ ON
ON the
the power
power toto check
check whether
whether the
the green
green LED
LED is
is lit
lit on
on the
the LED
LED PCB.
PCB.
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly. The green LED not
lit on
lit on a
a channel
channel tells
tells the
the location
location of
of Backup
Backup HDD.
HDD.
Name of
Name of Mode
Mode Status
Status Action for
Action for Recovery
Recovery HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red LED Red LED
Mirror Mode Normal (at standby) Under normal operation --- ---
Degrade Mode HDD1 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD1 and
1. A ---
(see *1) Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered, replace
2.
the HDD1
HDD2 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD2 and
1. --- A
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2.
HDD2.
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild) B ---
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild) --- B
(Rebuild)
Halt mode Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see
1. A A
*2)
2.
the two HDDs (format the replaced HDD and
download the system software).
--- : Not lit A : Lit B : Blinking

Blinking at
at an
an interval
interval of
of 0.5
0.5 seconds
seconds
62
62
2. Technical
Explanation
*1 "The hard
*1 "The hard disk
disk needs
needs toto be
be replaced.
replaced. (Call
(Call service
service rep.)"
rep.)" is
is displayed
displayed on on the
the Touch
Touch Panel Display. The
Panel Display. The alarm
alarm history
history of
of the
the
service mode
service mode 310006
310006 is is displayed
displayed by by CODE list.
CODE list.
COPIER >> DISPLAY
DISPLAY > ALARM-2
*2: Never install
*2: Never install the
the HDD
HDD used
used in in the
the other
other model.
model. The
Theused
usedHDD
HDDholds
holdsthe theID
IDspecific
specifictotothe
thefirstly-installed
firstly-installed machine,
machine, thus
thus this
this
machine is
machine is unable
unable toto recognize
recognize it. it. If
If done, you need
done, you to reinstall
need to reinstall the
the HDD recognized in
HDD recognized in this
this machine.
machine.
*3: Degrade or
*3: Degrade or Halt
Halt mode
modeis is aacondition
condition where
where data
dataprotection
protection that
that is
is the
the purpose
purpose of
of mirroring
mirroring isis not
not enabled.
enabled. It is necessary
It is necessary toto
swiftly replace
swiftly replace the
the faulty
faulty HDD with aa new
HDD with one and
new one and perform
perform Rebuild
Rebuild process.
process.
●
• Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality
1. The modes
1. The modes other
other than
than Mirror
Mirror Mode
Mode indicate
indicate troubles,
troubles, which
which require
require swift
swift recovery.
recovery.
The power
The power cancan be
be turned
turned OFF OFFevenevenduring
during Rebuild
Rebuild process.
process. However,
However,itit is is recommended
recommended not not to
to turn
turn off
off the
the power
power andand wait
wait
until the
until the mode
mode flows
flows to to Mirror
MirrorMode.
Mode. In In addition,
addition, HDD
HDD removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
2. The mirroring board
2. board controls
controlsMaster
Master HDD HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
HDD. This performed based
based on
on the
the HDD
HDD serial number and
the model
the model serial
serial number
number instead
instead of of slot
slot locations.
locations.
If
If HDDs
HDDs are are replaced
replaced in in aa careless
careless manner
manner during
during servicing
servicing in
in the
the field,
field, the
the Master
Master and
and Backup
Backup HDDs
HDDs maymay bebe switched.
switched.
Ex) When
Ex) When the the master
master HDD HDDisisin in trouble,
trouble, the the mirroring
mirroring board
board automatically
automatically recognizes
recognizes the the backup
backup HDDHDD asas the
the master.
master. Thus,
Thus,
the master
the master andand backup
backup HDDs HDDsare areswitched
switchedeven evenwithout
without changing
changing thethe slot
slot locations.
locations.
If
If the
the Master HDD cannot
Master HDD cannot be be located,
located, turnturn OFF/
OFF/ ONONthethepower
power toto check
check on on which
which channel
channel thethe green
green LED
LED isis lit
lit on
on the
the LED
LED
PCB.
The firstly-blinked
The firstly-blinked LED
LED (ChA(ChA or or ChB) shows the
ChB) shows Master HDD,
the Master HDD,which
which isis accessed
accessed firstly
firstly after
after power-on.
power-on.
3. For
3. For users
users who
who intend
intend to to use
use the
the removable
removable and and mirroring
mirroring functionality
functionality concurrently,
concurrently, instruct
instruct them
them not
not to
tochange
change thethe removable
removable
HDD location in advance.
HDD location
Change of
Change of HDD
HDDlocations
locations afterafter power-OFF
power-OFFisisallowed allowed asasspecifications
specifications only
only in in Mirror
Mirror Mode.
Mode.
Otherwise, HDD
Otherwise, HDD removal
removal or or change
change of of location
location isis not
not guaranteed.
guaranteed.
The following
4. The following conditions
conditionsare are required
requiredto toreplace
replaceHDDs
HDDs atat power-ON.
power-ON.
•• Removable
Removable HDD HDD is is extended
extended
•• Either HDD
HDD isis in
in trouble
trouble
CAUTION:
Be sure to use a new HDD when
when replacing the
the HDD.
HDD.
5. Upgrading
Upgradingshould
shouldbe
bedone
doneonly
onlyin
inMirror
Mirror Mode
Modewhile
whilemirroring
mirroring in
in ongoing.
Upgrading in
Upgrading in Degrade or Rebuild
Degrade or Rebuild mode
mode isis basically
basically prohibited.
prohibited. Always
Always prioritize
prioritize Mirror
Mirror Mode
Mode when
when you
you take any actions.
take any actions.
■
■Removable HDD (option)
With this
With this option,
option, users
users can
can easily
easily install
install or
or remove
remove the
the HDD (slot-in/out).
HDD (slot-in/out).
This option
This option is
is assumed
assumed to to be
be used
used for:
for: enhancing
enhancing information
information security
security at government/public offices
at government/public offices or
or private
private companies.
companies.
•• Remove
Remove the the HDD
HDD after
after the
the close
close of
of work
work to
to be kept in
be kept in a
a safe.
safe.
•• Install
Install the
the HDD at the
HDD at the start
start of
of work.
work. Make the HDD
Make the HDDlocked
locked during
during operation.
operation.
NOTE:
•• To use
use this
this option, no setting is required with the software.
•• The user needs
needs to
to prepare
prepare aa key
key because
becausethere
thereisisno
no key
keywith
with this
this kit.
63
33
2. Technical
Explanation
Laser Exposure System
Overview
0 Overview
This machine
This machine has
has four
four Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units
Units above
above each
each color
color station.
station.
Main Controller PCB 2 (UN986㸧

(UN986)
t Video signal
Riser PCB (UN985) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)

Video signal Control signal
Laser Interface PCB (UN950)

A
Signal
Scanner Motor Drive Signal
Laser Drive Signal
BD Signal
To
in Laser 1
Laser 2
cr,) Laser
Laser 31
Laser 32
Secondary Collimator Lens

BD Lens
Cylindrical Lens
Laser Driver PCB
APC-PD PCB
APC Lens
Via ,
Half Mirror
Polygon Mirror
BD PCB
1 Laser Scanner Motor

--.............-*-r*.
.
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens
La
se
r 32
La
La ser
se 2
r1
Photosensitive Drum
It applies
It applies laser
laser to
to the
the image
image on
on the
the negatively-charged
negatively-charged drum.
drum.
Image area
Non-Image area Non-Image area
11111111111111111111111
ftftt
Laser ON
Enlarged view
■
■ Characteristics
Characteristics
Adoption of
Adoption of new
new Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units
Units
64
2. Technical
Explanation
32 beams Laser 1
Laser
Shooting
"--\ Port
Laser Driver Laser 2
Laser 31 /
Laser ,
00
‘s., Laser 32 /
Laser 32
Polygon Mirror
2400dpi
<Vertical Scanning
<Vertical Scanning
Reflection Mirror Direction>
Imaging Lens Current This
machine
machine machine
machine
--
2400dpi
._
1200dpi
cs,
2400dpi
<Horizonal Scanning Direction>
0
1200dpi
• • • f) 1200dpi I. machine
Current 0 0
machine
• •
Photosensitive Drum • •
This • •
••• 0 0 b 64-06 machine Scanning of 2nd line
2400dpi
32
16
32
1
'17
17
Scanning
of 1st line
4-
Multiple
exposure
Higher
Higher Image
Image Quality
Quality
•• 2400
2400 dpi
dpi resolution
resolution
The engine
The engine resolution
resolution has
has been
been increased
increased to
to 2400
2400 dpi
dpi from
from the
the previous
previous 1200
1200 dpi
dpi in
in both
both the
the horizontal
horizontal scanning
scanning direction
direction
and vertical
and vertical scanning
scanning direction.
direction.
•• Multiple
Multiple exposure
exposure
This machine
This machine performs
performs exposure
exposure twice
twice by
by overlapping
overlapping the
the 16
16 beams
beams which
which are
are half
half the
the total
total beams.
beams.
Higher
Higher speed
speed
•• Simultaneous
Simultaneous emission
emission of
of laser
laser beams
beams producing
producing 32
32 lines
lines
High
High speed
speed printing
printing is
is achieved
achieved by
by the
the simultaneous
simultaneous emission
emission of
of 32-line
32-line laser
laser beams
beams at
at a
a time.
time.
■
• Specifications
Specifications
Item Description
Laser Beam
Laser Beam Wave length Approx. 680 nm
Laser type
Laser type Red laser
Red laser
Laser output
Laser output 1mW
lmW
Number of
Number of laser
laser beams
beams 32 beam
32 beam
Resolution
Resolution 2400 dpi
Scanner Motor
Scanner Motor Type Brushless motor
Brushless motor
Revolution
Revolution Approx. 32,800
Approx. 32,800 rpm
rpm
Number of
Number of Polygon
Polygon Mirror
Mirror surfaces
surfaces 5
5
65
65
2. Technical
Explanation
Item m IF M. Description
Description
List of
List of Controls
Controls Laser Activation Timing Control Laser ON/OFF
Laser ON/OFF Control
Control
Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control
Laser Intensity
Laser Intensity Control
Control APC Control
APC Control
Image Position
Image Position Correction
Correction Control Horizontal Scanning
Control Horizontal Scanning Write
Write Start
Start Position
Position Correction
Correction (Explained
(Explained in
in the
the
Image Formation
Image Formation section)
section)
Vertical Scanning
Vertical Scanning Write
Write Start
Start Position
Position Correction
Correction (Explained
(Explained in
in the
the Im-
Im-
age Formation
age Formation section)
section)
Horizontal Scanning Copy Ratio Correction (Explained in the Image
Formation section)
Formation section)
Horizontal Scanning Single Copy Ratio Correction (Explained in the Im-
age Formation
age Formation section)
section)
Duplex Copy
Duplex Copy Ratio
Ratio Correction
Correction
Others Laser Scanner Motor Control
Laser OFF
Laser OFF Control
Control
■
■ Parts
Parts Configuration
Configuration
BD Lens
Secondary Collimator Lens Cylindrical Lens
APC-PD PCB
Laser Driver PCB
APC Lens
Half Mirror
Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor
BD PCB
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens
BOTTOM VIEW Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
66
2. Technical
Explanation
Name
Name a Function
Function
Laser Driver PCB Generates a
Generates a laser
laser beam.
beam.
Cylindrical Lens Adjusts the focus (vertical scanning direction).
Secondary Collimator
Secondary Collimator Lens
Lens Adjusts the
Adjusts the focus
focus (horizontal
(horizontal scanning
scanning direction).
direction).
BD Lens Collects the
Collects the light
light beam
beam for
for BD
BD (write
(write start
start timing
timing detection).
detection).
APC Lens
APC Lens Collects the
Collects the light
light beam
beam for
for APC
APC (Auto
(Auto Power
Power Control/light
Control/light intensity
intensity adjustment).
adjustment).
Half Mirror Reflects part of the laser beam to the APC-PD PCB.
Imaging Lens Causes the
Causes the laser
laser beam
beam to
to form
form an
an image
image on
on the
the drum.
drum.
Reflection Mirror Reflects the
Reflects the laser
laser beam
beam to
to the
the drum.
drum.
APC-PD PCB Ensures constant
Ensures constant laser
laser beam
beam light
light intensity
intensity for
for each
each line.
line.
Polygon Mirror Scans the laser beam in horizontal scanning direction.
Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Motor
Motor Rotates the
Rotates the Polygon
Polygon Mirror
Mirror at
at a
a specified
specified speed.
speed.
BD PCB Detects laser
Detects laser beam
beam as
as a
a BD
BD signal.
signal.
Controls
0 Controls
■
■Overview
Laser Interface PCB Laser Scanner Unit
Laser ON/OFF Control

Laser Driver PCB
Horizontal scanning
Synchronous Control
Vertical scanning
Main Synchronous Control
Riser Scanner Motor Unit
Controller
LoUFILWIlel
PCB 2 Board 4-+
APC Control
Laser Scanner Motor Control
Laser Shutter Control
Item
Item Purpose/Content
Purpose/Content
Laser Activation Timing Con- Laser
Laser ON/OFF
ON/OFF Control
Control Turns the
Turns the laser
laser beam
beam ON
ON or
or OFF
OFF according
according to
to the
the combination
combination of
of laser
laser con-
con-
trol
trol trol signals.
trol signals.
Horizontal Scanning Syn- Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
chronization Control
Vertical Scanning
Vertical Scanning Syn-
Syn- Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction.
chronization Control
Laser Intensity
Laser Intensity Control
Control APC (Auto
APC (Auto Power
Power Control) Ensures constant
Control) Ensures constant laser
laser beam
beam light
light intensity
intensity for
for each
each line.
line.
Digital Registration
Digital Registration Control
Control Digitally corrects
Digitally corrects distortion
distortion and
and skew
skew of
of the
the image
image data.
data.
Duplex Copy
Duplex Copy Ratio
Ratio Correction
Correction Corrects the
Corrects the magnification
magnification ratio
ratio on
on the
the front
front and
and back
back sides
sides by
by performing
performing
image processing.
image processing.
Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Motor
Motor Control
Control Rotates the
Rotates the Polygon
Polygon Mirror
Mirror at
at a
a specified
specified speed.
speed.
Control to
Control to Turn
Turn OFF
OFF Laser
Laser (Safety
(Safety of
of Laser)
Laser) Prevents the
Prevents the inside
inside of
of the
the machine
machine from
from being
being exposed
exposed by
by laser
laser beams.
beams.
■
■Laser Activation Timing Control
●
• Laser ON/OFF Control
Turns the
Turns the laser
laser beam
beam ON
ON or
or OFF
OFF according
according to
to the
the combination
combination of
of laser
laser control
control signals.
signals.
67
2. Technical
Explanation
Control signal Polygon Morror

Laser
Laser Interface Driver
PCB PCB
Video signal Laser Beam
<Execution timing>
After power-on
After power-on
<Control
<Control description>
description>
The Laser
The Laser Interface
Interface PCB
PCB switches
switches between
between four
four modes
modes (Force
(Force Off
Off Mode,
Mode, APC
APC Mode,
Mode, Print
Print Mode,
Mode, and
and Standby
Standby Mode)
Mode) based
based on
on
the laser
the laser control
control signals.
signals.
Mode
Mode Laser Status
Laser Status Remarks im
ill
Force Off OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC.
APC ON Adjusts the laser intensity.
Print mode OFF/ON Emits the laser according to the video signal.
Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode.
Print Image formation

instruction ready timing
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
BD
i
- n II IT
I Laser
1
1 i I-1 If I-7-F I-
2 Laser
1 IF I-1 11 I-7- t I-
3 Laser
11- I I-1 1 I-7- 1 I—
࣭ .
࣭ .
࣭
.
࣭ .
࣭ .
࣭
.
࣭ .
࣭ .
࣭
32 Laser
1 F F I-7- If I—
Mode name Standby APC Forcible Standby
mode APC mode/PRINT mode OFF
mode mode
mode
●
• Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control
Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
<Execution timing>
Every 32 lines.
<Control
description>
1. Laser phase
1. Laser phase coefficient
coefficient inside
inside the
the ROM
ROM on on the
the Laser
Laser Driver
Driver is
is sent
sent to
to the
the Laser
Laser Interface
Interface PCB
PCB (when
(when replacing
replacing the
the Laser
Laser
Scanner Unit).
Scanner Unit).
2. The
2. The Laser
Laser Interface
Interface PCB
PCB forcefully
forcefully activates
activates the
the Laser
Laser 32
32 laser
laser diode
diode on
on the
the Laser
Laser Driver
Driver PCB
PCB by by setting
setting the
the APC
APC mode
mode toto
the Laser
the Laser 32
32 laser
laser control
control signal.
signal.
3. The
3. The BD
BD PCB
PCB is is located
located on
on the
the light
light path
path of
of Laser
Laser 3232 laser
laser beam
beam andand the
the laser
laser beam
beam isis emitted
emitted to
to the
the BD
BD PCB.
PCB.
4. The
4. The BD
BD PCB
PCB generates
generates thethe reference
reference BDBD signal
signal byby detecting
detecting the
the Laser
Laser 32
32 laser
laser beam,
beam, and
and sends
sends the
the signal
signal to
to the
the Laser
Laser
Interface PCB.
Interface PCB.
5. The
5. The Laser
Laser Interface
Interface PCB
PCB generates
generates thethe horizontal
horizontal scanning
scanning synchronization
synchronization signal
signal every
every 32
32 lines
lines based
based onon the
the laser
laser phase
phase
coefficient and
coefficient and the
the reference
reference BD
BD signal.
signal.
6. The
6. The video
video signal
signal sent
sent from
from the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller is
is output
output to
to the
the Laser
Laser Driver
Driver PCB
PCB according
according to
to the
the horizontal
horizontal scanning
scanning
synchronization signal.
68
2. Technical
Explanation
BD BD PCB
BDPCB
PBD ASIC signal
- (UN965/UN966/
signal
al
Horizontal UN967/UN968)
UN967/UN968)
scanning Laser
synchronous phase
signal coefficient Laser 32
EEPROM
generation
assembly Laser 31
I P
Main
Controller Video Laser
PCB 2 Video signal Driver Polygon Mirror
(UN986) signal Horizontal PCB
scanning (UN953/UN954/ Laser 2
synchronous UN955/UN956)
UN955/UN956) I P
signal
(T) Laser 1
I N.
Laser Interface PCB
(UN950)
APC-PDPCB
PCB
(UN961/UN962/
UN963/UN964)
UN963/UN964)
Laser 1
[t T 11111111111111111111111111111111111 1111111111111111
Laser 2 T
T J11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
Laser 3
Laser 3 T J1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
Laser 32
Laser 32 T J111111111111111111
Standard BD
Standard
●
• Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control
Aligns the
Aligns the write
write start
start position
position in
in the
the vertical
vertical scanning
scanning direction.
direction.
<Execution
<Execution timing>
timing>
At every print
<Control
description>
•• Synchronization control in the vertical scanning direction is performed with reference to the PTOP signal (image formation
start signal).
start signal).
•• When
When image
image formation
formation becomes
becomes possible,
possible, the PTOP signal
the PTOP signal (image
(image formation
formation start
start signal)
signal) is
is generated,
generated, and
and each
each color
color laser
laser
lights up
lights up at
at the
the timing
timing delayed
delayed by
by the
the spacing
spacing between
between drums
drums based
based on
on this
this signal.
signal.
69
69
2. Technical
Explanation
Print request signal Image formation

(Start Key ON) ready timing
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Interval to stabilize
Motor (Y,M,C,Bk) the rotation*1
te
PTOPVLJQDO
PTOP signal
Y-TOPVLJQDO
Y-TOP signal i
Laser Y is ON I 1
M-TOPVLJQDO
M-TOP signal ,
I
Laser M is ON JE I
C-TOPVLJQDO
C-TOP signal
Laser C is ON w- 1
Bk-TOPVLJQDO
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk is ON r I
■ Laser Intensity
• Laser Intensity Control
Control
●
• APC (Auto Power Control)
Ensures constant
Ensures constant laser
laser beam
beam intensity
intensity for
for each
each 32
32 beam.
beam.
<Execution timing>
While the Polygon Mirror is rotating (non-imaged area)
<Control
description>
1. The Laser
1. The Laser Interface
Interface PCB
PCB outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Laser Driver PCB.
2. The
2. The Laser
Laser Driver
Driver IC
IC sets
sets APC
APC mode,
mode, andand sequentially forcibly activates
sequentially forcibly activates laser
laser diodes
diodes (LD1
(LD1 to
to LD329
LD329 ).
). At
At the
the same
same time,
time, the
the
Laser Driver
Laser Driver IC
IC monitors
monitors the
the light
light intensity
intensity of
of the
the laser
laser diodes
diodes (LD1
(LD1 to
to LD32)
LD32) using
using photodiodes
photodiodes (PD), and adjusts
(PD), and adjusts the
the input
input
to the
to the laser
laser diodes
diodes to
to ensure
ensure that
that the
the light
light intensity
intensity from
from each laser diode
each laser diode has
has uniform
uniform intensity.
intensity.
Laser Driver PCB
KI LD32
Laser Beam
APC-PD PCB E
a)
m
O a)
PD
Power Supply +5V CI3

Laser Control
Circuit -Id Signal
. Laser Driver
1
Laser
IC Interface PCB
A
•
Amplifiter
Circuit K1 LD2
K1 LD1
■
• Digital Registration Control
In the
In the printer
printer engine,
engine, the
the image
image dots
dots are
are formed
formed at
at undesirable
undesirable positions
positions for
for a
a variety
variety of
of reasons,
reasons, causing
causing color
color displacement
displacement andand
color unevenness.
color unevenness.
While image
While image position
position (color
(color displacement)
displacement) correction
correction control
control can
can correct
correct the
the positional
positional displacement
displacement caused
caused by
by offset
offset in
in the
the
vertical/horizontal scanning
vertical/horizontal scanning direction
direction or
or the
the copy
copy ratio,
ratio, distortion
distortion or
or skew
skew ofof the
the image
image cannot
cannot be
be corrected.
corrected.
Therefore the
Therefore the digital
digital registration
registration digitally
digitally corrects
corrects image
image data
data using
using the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller based
based on
on distortion
distortion or
or skew
skew information
information
sent from
sent from the
the image
image position
position (color
(color displacement)
displacement) correction
correction control.
control.
■ Duplex Copy
• Duplex Copy Ratio
Ratio Correction
Correction
Corrects the
Corrects the magnification
magnification difference
difference between
between the
the front
front and
and the
the rear
rear due
due to
to shrinkage
shrinkage level
level between
between the
the 1st
1st side
side and
and the
the 2nd
2nd
side.
side.
70
2. Technical
Explanation
During 2-sided printing, the paper temporarily shrinks when it passes through the fixing area after the image formation of the 1st
side. If
side. If image
image formation
formation on
on the
the 2nd
2nd side
side is
is continued
continued as-is,
as-is, the
the image
image on
on the
the 2nd
2nd side
side is
is extended
extended (which
(which makes
makes the
the the
the image
image
on the
on the 2nd
2nd side
side larger
larger than
than that
that on
on the
the the
the 1st
1st side
side and
and causes
causes a a mismatch
mismatch in
in copy
copy ratio)
ratio) when
when the
the paper
paper size
size returns
returns to
to the
the
original size
original size after
after the
the paper
paper is
is delivered
delivered outside
outside the
the machine.
machine.
<Execution timing>
At image
At image formation
formation on
on the
the 2nd
2nd side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print
<Control
description>
When the
When the 2nd
2nd side
side is
is printed,
printed, the
the following
following controls
controls are
are executed
executed with
with consideration
consideration of
of paper's
paper's shrinkage
shrinkage level.
level.
Reduces the
Reduces the image
image by
by skipping
skipping image
image data.
data.
Enlarges the
Enlarges the image
image by
by adding
adding image
image data.
data.
<Laser Lighting:.
Lighting>
Horizontal scanning
Haizontal scanning ► 'TM I I
Without Correction
last CaTectian
I I I
I I
With Correction
Vertical scanning
■ Laser Scanner
■Laser Scanner Motor
Motor Control
Control
Rotates the
Rotates the Polygon
Polygon Mirror
Mirror at
at a
a specified
specified speed.
speed.
<Execution timing>
At power-on
At power-on and
and startup.
startup.
<Control
description>
1. The motor
1. The motor speed
speed control
control unit
unit on
on the
the Laser
Laser Interface PCB forcefully
Interface PCB forcefully rotates
rotates the
the motor.
motor.
2. It
2. It detects
detects the
the speed
speed detection
detection signal
signal (FG, BD), compares
(FG, BD), compares itit with
with the
the reference
reference signal
signal generated
generated by
by the
the reference
reference signal
signal
generator, and
generator, and controls
controls the
the acceleration
acceleration signal
signal (ACC)
(ACC) and
and deceleration
deceleration signal
signal (DEC)
(DEC) to
to keep
keep the
the standard
standard speed.
speed.
APC-PD PCB (UN961/UN962/UN963/UN964)
Laser Scanner Motor(M104/M105/M106/M107)
BD PCB
(UN965/UN966/UN967/UN968)
ACC
DEC
FG
BD
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Control Signal (UN950)
<Related
<Related error
error code>
code>
•• E100:
E100: Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Motor
Motor BD Error
•• E110: Laser Scanner Motor Error
71
2. Technical
Explanation
■ Control to
■Control to Turn
Turn OFF
OFF Laser
Laser (Safety
(Safety of
of Laser)
Laser)
Prevents the
Prevents the inside
inside of
of the
the machine
machine from
from being
being exposed
exposed to
to laser
laser beams.
beams.
<Execution timing>
At power-on
At power-on and
and startup.
startup.
<Control
description>
The Main
The Main Station
Station Power
Power Supply Relay PCB
Supply Relay PCB stops
stops the
the Laser
Laser Driver
Driver power
power and
and the
the output
output signal
signal when
when a
a cover
cover (e.g.
(e.g. the
the Main
Main
Station Front
Station Front Cover)
Cover) is
is opened.
opened. By
By doing
doing so,
so, laser
laser exposure
exposure is
is prevented.
prevented.
Laser Driver PCB

(UN953/UN954/UN955/UN956)
For driving the driver circuit

(data retention)
For driving
drivinglaser
laser _
Laser Interface PCB Main Station

(UN950) Power Supply Relay
PCB
(UN1 die)
(UN102)
DC5V
DC/DC Main Station Front Right Cover Switch
SW111
DC3.3V
DC/DC
Y Main Station Front Left Cover Switch
SW112
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Switch

SW113
Y Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Switch

SW116
DC12V
12V Power Supply
Power Unit Limiter
PCB B
PCB (UN401)
(UN531)
72
72
2. Technical
Explanation
Image Formation System
Overview
P.) Overview
An elastic
An elastic ITB
ITB is
is adopted
adopted toto achieve
achieve optimal
optimal secondary
secondary transfer
transfer for
for various
various types
types of
of paper.
paper. TheThe material
material of
of the
the elastic
elastic ITB
ITB has
has
been
been changed from resin
changed from resin to
to rubber
rubber in
in order
order to
to realize
realize highly
highly reproducible
reproducible images
images with
with increased
increased transfer
transfer efficiency
efficiency even
even on
on rough-
rough-
textured paper.
textured paper.
In addition,
In addition, high
high image
image quality
quality has
has been
been realized
realized by
by the
the addition
addition of
of a
a cooling
cooling function
function toto the
the Color
Color Developing
Developing Assembly,
Assembly, which
which
lowers the
lowers the temperature
temperature inin the
the area
area surrounding
surrounding the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly to to improve
improve stability
stability of
of hue
hue and
and prevent
prevent deterioration
deterioration of
of
developer
developer and
and toner.
toner.
■ Roles/Functions
• Roles/Functions
Various Specifications
Various Specifications
Item
Item Roles/Functions
Roles/Functions
Specifications of
Specifications of the
the Drum
Drum Unit
Unit Drum type OPC Drum
(Photosensitive Drum) Drum diameter (mm) 84 in diameter
Cleaning mechanism Brush Roller + Blade
Process speed
Process speed (mm/s)
(mm/s) iPRC10000VP : 464, iPRC8000VP : 348
Specifications of
the Developing Diameter of
Developing Diameter of the
the Developing
Developing Cyl-
Cyl- Upper: 24.5 in diameter, Lower: 20 in diameter
Assembly
Assembly inder (mm)
Developing method
Developing method Dry, 2-component
Toner Non-magnetic negative
Non-magnetic negative toner
toner
Detection of
Detection of the
the toner
toner level
level in
in None
the Developing Assembly
Specifications of
the Primary
Primary Charging method Corona charging
Corona charging
Charging Assembly Diameter of the Discharge Wire 60
60 in
in diameter
diameter
(micro meter)
(micro meter)
Cleaning mechanism Engagement of
Engagement of the
the Cleaning
Cleaning Pad
Pad
25-second cycle
25-second cycle
Specifications of
the Toner
Toner Con- Toner level
Con- Toner level detection
detection Detection by
Detection by video
video count/Piezo
count/Piezo (Piezoelectric
(Piezoelectric Oscillator)
Oscillator) Sensor
Sensor
tainer
tainer Toner fill-up amount Approx. 1600 g for each of Y, M, C, and Bk
Specifications of
the Intermedi-
Intermedi- ITB (Intermediate
ITB (Intermediate Transfer
Transfer Belt) Elastic, seamless
Belt) Elastic, seamless
ate Transfer
ate Transfer Unit
Unit Circumferential length 2236 mm
Width 360 mm
360 mm
Belt drive
Belt drive Driven via gears by the ITB Drive Motor
Cleaning mechanism Bias Roller + Brush Roller + Blade
73
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Parts
Parts Configuration
Configuration
I
Toner Container
--------"\...........
Laser Scanner Unit
Thermopile
Potential Sensor
Encoder Thermopile
j
Thermistor
Potential Sensor Thermistor
Developing Primary Charging Assembly

Upper Cylinder
Developing
Assembly
Developing Drum Cleaning Brush Roller

Lower Cylinder ‘ 1_
Lower Cylinder
1.
Photosensitive Drum
Primary Transfer Roller ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
Process Unit (Y) Process Unit (M) Process Unit (C) Process Unit (Bk)
ITB Patch Sensor /

Registration Patch Sensor
ITB Drive
Drive Roller—
Roller ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream
(Downstream)
Steering Roller
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream)
(Upstream
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream)
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor

Intermediate Transfer Unit
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller
■
■Drive Configuration
● Process Unit
• Process Unit
The Process
The Process Unit
Unit of
of each
each color
color has
has one
one of
of each
each of
of these
these motors.
motors.
Motor Driven object

Developing Motor •• Developing Upper Cylinder
•• Developing Lower
Developing Lower Cylinder
Cylinder
•• A Screw
A Screw
•• B Screw
B Screw
•• C Screw
C Screw
•• Waste Toner
Waste Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw (Developing
(Developing Assembly
Assembly side)
side)
Drum Drive Motor Photosensitive Drum
Drum Cleaner
Drum Cleaner Motor
Motor •• Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
•• Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw (Drum
(Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit side)
side)
74
2. Technical
Explanation
Motor Driven object

Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly Knock
Knock Motor
Motor Knock Plate
Knock Plate
Solenoid Driven object

Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter Solenoid
Solenoid Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter
Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB 1-1
1-1 (UN198)
(UN198)
V V
Drum Driver
DriverPCB
PCB(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)(UN125/UN126/UN127/UN128)
(UN125/UN126/UN127/UN128)
M133 M142
M127 M141
M115 M M M139
M
M121 M140
Knocking Plate Cam
I I
Photosensitive
I I M203 Drum
I I M204
M205
M 0
I I M206
I I
I I Main Station Power Supply
Supply Relay
Relay PCB
I (UN102)
I
I I
Drum Cleaning
A Screw P Brush Roller
B Screw
-/o
Developing
Upper Cylinder B Screw Developing
Lower Cylinder M134
Waste Toner Feed Screw M
M128
M116
M122
C Screw
Process Kit
Process KitDriver
DriverPCB
PCB(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Controller PCB
1-2 (UN124)
(UN124)
Code
Code
illh
Parts name
Parts name
M133/M127/M115/M121
M133/M127/M115/M121 Developing Motor
Developing Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M142/M141/M139/M140
M142/M141/M139/M140 Drum Drive
Drum Drive Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M134/M128/M116/M122
M134/M128/M116/M122 Drum Cleaner
Drum Cleaner Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M203/M204/M205/M206
M203/M204/M205/M206 Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly Knock
Knock Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E012:
E012: Drum/ITB
Drum/ITB Drive
Drive Motor
Motor error
error
0x00: Drum
Ox00: Drum Drive
Drive Motor
Motor error
error(x
(x==1:
1:Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
FF**: Drum Drive
FF**: Drum Drive Motor
Motor drive
drive convergence
convergence timeout
timeout
•• E016:
E016: Drum
Drum Cleaner
CleanerMotor
Motorerror
errorWhen
Whenthethemotor
motorlock
lock signal
signal is
is not
not detected
detected although
although aa specified
specified period
period of
of time
time has
has passed.
passed.
0x00: Drum
Ox00: Drum Cleaner
Cleaner Motor
Motor error
error(x
(x==1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
•• E023:
E023: Developing
Developing Motor
Motor error
error
0x00: Developing
Ox00: Developing Motor
Motorerror
error(x
(x==1:
1:Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
75
2. Technical
Explanation
•• E820:
E820: Drum
Drum Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan error
error
010x: Suction
010x: Suction Side
Side Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan error
error (x
(x == 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
020x: Exhaust
020x: Exhaust Side
Side Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan error
error (x
(x =
= 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
0301: Error
0301: Error in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Side
Side Front
Front Cooling
Cooling FanFan (Y)
(Y)
0302: Error
0302: Error in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Side
Side Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling FanFan (Y)
(Y)
0303: Error
0303: Error in
in the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Cooling
Cooling FanFan 11 (Y)
(Y)
•• E998:
E998: PCB
PCB connection
connection error
error PCB
PCB connection
connection detection
detection port
port error
error
010x: Suction
010x: Suction Side
Side Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan error
error (x
(x == 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
1000: Process
1000: Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Bk)
(Bk)
1001: Process
1001: Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (C)
(C)
1010: Process
1010: Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (M)
(M)
1011: Process
1011: Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Y)
(Y)
1100: Drum
1100: Drum Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Bk)
(Bk)
1101: Drum
1101: Drum Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (C)
(C)
1110: Drum
1110: Drum Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (M)
(M)
1111: Drum
1111: Drum Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Y)
(Y)
76
● Transfer Area
DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124)
Cartridge Motor
Drive Signal
Hopper Hopper Hopper Hopper
Driver Driver Driver Driver
PCB (Y) PCB (M) PCB (C) PCB (Bk)
(UN165) (UN166) (UN167) (UN168)
M146 M145 M143 M144
Hopper Assembly Y M C Bk
\\_ Jf
Y M C Bk
Developing Assembly M133 M127 M115 M121
ITB Drive Motor Drive Signal M142 M141 M139 M140
M109
A A
ITB
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
8 8 8
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
0 To 0 To 0 To
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
2 c 2 c c
0.) .2) 0.) .2) ca .2)
c c c co
a .>a) a .>a) a .>
a)
o o o =
a) = a) =
>0 >0
0 0
ITB Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB
(Middle) (UN217) (Y) (UN125) (M) (UN126) (C) (UN127) (Bk) (UN128)
A A A —A
I
Code la Parts name Code Parts name

M109
M109 ITB Drive
ITB Drive Motor
Motor M141
M141 Drum Drive
Drum Drive Motor
Motor (M)
(M)
M115
M115 Developing Motor
Developing Motor (C)
(C) M142
M142 Drum Drive
Drum Drive Motor
Motor (Y)
(Y)
M121
Developing Motor (Bk)
(Bk) M143
M143 Toner Container
Toner Container Motor
Motor (C)
(C)
M127
Developing Motor (M)
(M) M144
Motor (Bk)
(Bk)
M133
Developing Motor (Y)
(Y) M145
Motor (M)
(M)
M139
M139 Drum Drive
Drum Drive Motor
Motor (C)
(C) M146
Motor (Y)
(Y)
M140
M140 Drum Drive
Drum Drive Motor
Motor (Bk)
(Bk)
77
2. Technical
Explanation
For information
For information on
on the
the drive
drive configuration
configuration of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit,
Unit, refer
refer to
to Overview
Overview of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit.
Unit.
●
• Toner
Toner Supply
Supply Area
Area
1
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Hopper Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN165/UN166/UN167/UN168)
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB

(UN102)
M138 ♦ M137 M193 M146 M195

M132 M M131 M M191 M M145 M M198 M
M120 M119 M190 M143 M197
M126 M125 M192 M144 M196
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Code Parts name

M137/M131/M119/M125 Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M146/M145/M143/M144 Toner Container
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Toner Container Slide
Slide Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M195/M198/M197/M196
M195/M198/M197/M196 Hopper Motor
Hopper Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M138/M132/M120/M126 Toner Feed
Toner Feed Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E025-0100: Hopper
E025-0100: Hopper Motor
Motor error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E025-0200: Hopper
Motor error
error (M)
(M)
•• E025-0300: Hopper
Motor error
error (C)
(C)
•• E025-0400: Hopper
Motor error
error (K)
(K)
•• E025-0110: Toner
E025-0110: Toner Container
Container Motor
Motor overcurrent
overcurrent detection
detection error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E025-0210: Toner
Container Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (M)
(M)
•• E025-0310: Toner
Container Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (C)
(C)
•• E025-0410: Toner
Container Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (K)
(K)
78
2. Technical
Explanation
•• E025-0120: Sub
E025-0120: Sub Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E025-0220: Sub
Hopper Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (M)
(M)
•• E025-0320: Sub
Hopper Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (C)
(C)
•• E025-0420: Sub
Hopper Motor
Motor overcurrent
detection error
error (K)
(K)
•• E025-0150: TD ratio upper limit error (Y)
•• E025-0250: TD ratio upper limit error (M)
•• E025-0350: TD ratio upper limit error (C)
•• E025-0450: TD ratio upper limit error (K)
•• E025-0151: TD ratio upper limit error (Y)
•• E025-0251: TD ratio upper limit error (M)
•• E025-0351: TD ratio upper limit error (C)
•• E025-0451: TD ratio upper limit error (K)
79
2. Technical
Explanation
● Waste Toner
• Waste Toner Feeding
Feeding Area
Area
V_ V V
Fixing Duplex Pre-fixing Feed Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit
Feed Driver PCB Driver PCB Driver PCB (Y) Driver PCB (M) Driver PCB (C) Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN311) (UN1O7)
(UN107) (UN161) (UN162) (UN163) (UN164)
M138 M134 M132 M128 M120 M116 M126 M122
I I
Developing
Developing • I 1
Assembly Y M
M . C Bk
I I I Drum Cleaning Unit
I Toner Exit Slot
211fAi 11.10044:
.
Developing
Toner
014DA
Toner ----.."
i, 14LCIOA
Exit Slot
1
II 11
M180 1111 11111111111 1111111 111
I
NN ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
I
Waste Toner
Container ITB
M108 Secondary Transfer
M179 Inner Roller
)000000000000000IRM
000000L 10-07 Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Buffer
M314 ITB Cleaning Unit
Toner Discharge Screw
M183 M210
7—
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer/
Duplex Driver PCB
(UN106)

(UN124)
■
• Bias Types
● Process Unit
• Process Unit
•• As
As preparation
preparation for
for laser
laser exposure,
exposure, the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum is
is uniformly
uniformly charged
charged with
with negative
negative potential.
potential.
•• Residual
Residual toner
toner on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum is
is collected
collected and
and cleaned
cleaned to
to prepare
prepare for
for the
the next
next printing
printing (primary
(primary
charging, laser
charging, laser exposure,
exposure, developing,
developing, and
and primary
primary transfer).
transfer).
80
2. Technical
Explanation
Item Specifications
Specifications
Photosensitive Drum Primary charging method Corona charging
charging DC component rating specification range -1300 to 0 V (standard value: -1100 to -700 V)
DC component
DC component voltage
voltage correction
correction factor
factor Environment Sensor
Developing bias
Developing bias AC component
AC component standard
standard value
value 1700 Vp-p
1700 Vp-p (fixed)
(fixed)
DC component
DC component rating
rating specification
specification range
range -1000 to
-1000 to 0
0VV (standard
(standard value:
value: -700
-700 to
to -500
-500 V)
V)
Voltage correction factor Environment Sensor
Toner blocking
Toner blocking bias
bias DC component
DC component standard
standard value
value -1350 to
-1350 to -1550
-1550 V
V
\
1Primary Charging Grid Plate
OV
0V
-1300V
.1
Developing Cylinder
OV
0V
-700V
1700Vp-p
r Splash Prevention
0V
-1350V
/
-1550V
●
• Transfer Area
Item Specifications
Specifications
Primary transfer bias Transfer method
Transfer method Roller transfer
Transfer target
Transfer target Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
DC component
DC component rating
rating specifica- -2,000 to
specifica- -2,000 to +7,000
+7,000 V
V
tion range
tion range
Voltage correction
Voltage correction factor
factor Environment Sensor
Secondary transfer
Secondary transfer cleaning
cleaning bias
bias DC component
DC component rating
rating specifica- Upstream: +2,500
specifica- Upstream: +2,500 to
to +3,000
+3,000 VV
tion range
tion range Downstream: -2,000
Downstream: -2,000 to
to -1,000
-1,000 V
V
Secondary transfer
Secondary transfer bias
bias Transfer method
Transfer method Roller transfer
Transfer target
Transfer target Paper (transfer
Paper (transfer material)
material)
DC component
DC component rating
rating specifica- -10,000 to
specifica- -10,000 to 0
0VV
tion range
tion range
Voltage correction
Voltage correction factor
factor Paper type, Environment Sensor
Post-Secondary Transfer
Post-Secondary Transfer Static
Static Elimination
Elimination DC component
DC component rating
rating specifica- 0 to
specifica- 0 to +2,500
+2,500 V
V
Bias tion range
tion range
ITB cleaning bias DC component
DC component rating
rating specifica- Upstream: -5,000
specifica- Upstream: -5,000 to
to 0
0VV
tion range
tion range Downstream: 0
Downstream: 0 to
to +5,000
+5,000 V
V
81
2. Technical
Explanation
(ITB Cleaning Bias (Downstream) Primary Transfer Bias
7,000V
5,000V
ITB Cleaning Bias (Upstream)
0V
OV
0V
OV -2,000V
0V
OV ..)
-5,000V
Secondary Transfer Bias •

Secondary Transfer
0V
OV Cleaning Bias (Downstream)
0V
OV
-10,000V
-1,000V
Secondary Transfer -2,000V
I-Post-Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Bias (Upstream)
Static Elimination Bias
3,000V
2,500V
2,500V
0V
OV
0V
OV
_.)
High voltage
High is supplied
voltage is by the
supplied by the High
High Voltage
Voltage Unit
Unit to
to the
the blocks
blocks of
of the
the image
image formation
formation system.
system. See
See the
the various
various sections
sections for
for details.
details.
Developing High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN133/UN134/YM135/YM136)
Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN137/UN138/YM139/YM140)
Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN194/UN193/YM191/YM192)
-Fr
Y M C Bk
Developing Cylinder
Photosensitive Drum
82
2. Technical
Explanation
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Primary Transfer Roller

Post-Secondary
Transfer Static Secondary Transfer
Eliminator Cleaning Bias Roller
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Bias Roller
ITB Cleaner ITB Cleaner Post-secondary Transfer Secondary Cleaning Secondary Transfer Primary Transfer
High Voltage PCB 1 High Voltage PCB 2 Static Elimination High Voltage PCB
PCB (+1-)
(+/-) High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Upstream) (Downstream) High Voltage PCB (UN971/UN972) (UN116) (UN112/UN113/UN114/UN115)
(UN148) (UN149) (UN108)
** 1
1 sheet
sheet each
each for
for Y,
Y, M,
M, C
C and
and Bk
Bk
■
■ Print
Print Process
Process
2.Laser Beam Exposure Photosensitive Drum
1.Charging
-7-•(i.Charging)
8.Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
3.Developing
Y M C Bk
4. Primary
Transfer
AIL 4. Primary
Transfer
416.. 4. Primary
Transfer
4. Rimer),
Primary
Transfer
7. ITB Cleaning ITB
Delivery Fixing
CC:= GEED
6.Separation 5. Secondary
Transfer Pickup
Secondary Transfer Outer

(Secondary Outer Belt
Belt Cleaning
Cleaning) Rotation Of Photosensitive Drum/ITB
Flow Of Paper
Function Block
Function Block STEP
STEP Function
Function
Static latent
Static latent image
image for-
for- 1
1 Primary charg-
Primary charg- 1. As
1. As preparation
preparation for
for pre-exposure
pre-exposure primary
primary charging,
charging, the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive
mation block
mation block ing Drum is
Drum is irradiated
irradiated by
by the
the Pre-Exposure
Pre-Exposure LED LED to
to remove
remove residual
residual charge
charge
from the
from the drum
drum surface
surface inin order
order to
to prevent
prevent density
density unevenness.
unevenness.
2. As
2. As preparation
preparation for
for primary
primary charging
charging laser
laser exposure,
exposure, the
the surface
surface of
of the
the
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum is uniformly charged with negative potential. The Pri-
mary Charging
mary Charging Assembly
Assembly has has been
been adopted
adopted toto indirectly
indirectly apply
apply charges
charges
from the
from the Charging
Charging Wire
Wire toto the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum.
Drum.
2 Laser exposure
Laser exposure On
On the
the negatively
negatively charged
charged surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum,
Drum, the
the area
area ex-
ex-
posed to
posed to the
the laser
laser beam
beam has
has higher
higher potential,
potential, and
and that
that area
area form
form a
a static
static latent
latent
image.
image.
Developing block 3
3 Development
Development Contact development
Contact development isis performed
performed byby non-magnetic,
non-magnetic, 2-component
2-component develop-
develop-
ment. Negatively
ment. Negatively charged
charged toner
toner from
from the
the 2
2 (upper
(upper and
and lower)
lower) Developing
Developing Cyl-
Cyl-
inders adheres
inders adheres to
to the
the static
static latent
latent image
image on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive
Drum to
Drum to create
create a
a visible
visible image.
image.
Transfer block 4 The purpose
Primary transfer The purpose is
is to
to transfer
transfer the
the toner
toner image
image on
on the
the surface
surface ofof the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive
Drum to
Drum to the
the paper
paper via
via the
the ITB.
ITB. Toner
Toner on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum
is transferred
is transferred to
to the
the ITB
ITB by
by applying
applying positive
positive charge
charge from
from the
the back
back side
side of
of the
the
ITB. This
ITB. This process
process isis sequentially performedon
sequentially performed on each
each of
of the
the Y,
Y, M,
M, C
C and
and Bk
Bk Drum
Drum
Units.
Units.
83
8
2. Technical
Explanation
Function Block
Function Block STEP
STEP Function
Function
Transfer block 5
5 Secondary
Secondary Toner on
Toner on the
the ITB
ITB is
is transferred
transferred to
to paper.
paper.
transfer
6
6 Separation
Separation With the
With the curvature
curvature separation
separation method,
method, the
the paper
paper is
is separated
separated from
from the
the Secon-
Secon-
dary Transfer
dary Transfer Outer
Outer Belt.
Belt. A
A positive
positive charge
charge determined
determined byby the
the paper
paper type
type is
is
applied to
applied to the
the Static
Static Eliminator
Eliminator to
to ease
ease separation
separation of
of the
the paper
paper from
from the
the Sec-
Sec-
ondary Transfer Outer Belt.
Intermediate Transfer
Intermediate Transfer 7 ITB cleaning After secondary
After secondary transfer
transfer the
the ITB
ITB is
is cleaned
cleaned byby the
the Brush
Brush Rollers
Rollers to
to remove
remove
Belt (ITB) cleaning residual toner from the ITB. The Brush Rollers which are engaged with the ITB
block
block attract residual
attract residual toner
toner with
with the
the charged
charged Bias
Bias Rollers.
Rollers. Toner
Toner collected
collected by
by the
the
Brush Rollers,
Brush Rollers, after
after being
being scraped
scraped off
off via
via the
the Bias
Bias Rollers
Rollers by
by the
the Cleaning
Cleaning
Blades, is
Blades, is fed
fed by
by the
the Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw
Screw andand ejected
ejected to
to the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Buffer.
Photosensitive Drum 8
8 Photosensitive 1. Drum
1. Drum Cleaning
Pre-exposure
cleaning block Drum cleaning Due to
Due to the
the potential
potential difference
difference atat the
the edge
edge of
of the
the toner
toner layer
layer on
on the
the ITB,
ITB, a
a
minute gap
minute gap is
is formed
formed between
between thethe drum
drum and
and the
the ITB,
ITB, where
where a a discharge
discharge
phenomenon occurs
phenomenon occurs and
and a a drum
drum memory
memory is is formed.
formed. Residual
Residual toner
toner ad-
ad-
hering to the Cleaning Blades is attracted to this drum memory area. Drum
cleaning pre-exposure
cleaning pre-exposure is is performed
performed to to erase
erase this
this drum
drum memory.
memory.
2. Drum cleaning
2.
Residual toner
Residual toner adhering
adhering toto the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive DrumDrum is
is removed
removed toto clean
clean
the Photosensitive
the Photosensitive Drum.
Drum.
Secondary transfer
Secondary transfer - The residual
The residual toner
toner from
from the
the patch
patch image
image is is removed
removed andand the
the ITB
ITB and
and Secondary
Secondary
cleaning block Transfer Outer
Transfer Outer Belt
Belt are
are cleaned.
cleaned. The
The brush
brush rollers
rollers applied
applied toto the
the Secondary
Secondary
Transfer Outer
Transfer Outer Belt
Belt are
are charged
charged by by the
the bias
bias rollers
rollers to
to attract
attract the
the residual
residual toner.
toner.
Toner collected
Toner collected by
by the
the Brush
Brush Rollers, after being
Rollers, after being scraped off via
scraped off via the
the Bias
Bias Rollers
Rollers
by the
by the Cleaning
Cleaning Blades,
Blades, isis fed
fed by
by the
the Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw
Screw andand ejected
ejected to
to the
the
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Controls
0 Controls
■
■Process
Process Unit
Unit
The Process
The Process Unit
Unit consists
consists of
of the
the Developing
Developing Assembly,
Assembly, Photosensitive
Drum, Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Assembly and the
Assembly and the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning
Unit.
Unit.
There is
There is one
one of
of each
each of
of them
them for
for each
each color
color (Y,
(Y, M,
M, C
C and
and Bk),
Bk), and
and the
the basic
basic configuration
configuration is
is the
the same
same for
for all
all colors.
colors.
Developing Assembly
Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Patch Sensor Photosensitive Drum
Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
● Primary Charging
• Primary Charging Bias
Bias Control
Control
The primary
The primary charging
charging bias
bias generates
generates a
a uniform
uniform negative
negative charge
charge over
over the
the entire
entire surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum to
to prepare
prepare in
in
for electrostatic
for electrostatic latent
latent image
image formation
formation by
by laser
laser exposure.
exposure.
There are
There are two
two types
types of
of primary
primary charging
charging bias
bias as
as follows.
follows.
•• Primary
Primary charging
charging DCDC bias
bias (PRIMARY-Y,
(PRIMARY-Y, PRIMARY-M,
PRIMARY-M, PRIMARY-C,
PRIMARY-C, PRIMARY-K)
PRIMARY-K)
•• Grid
Grid DC
DC bias
bias (GRID-Y,
(GRID-Y, GRID-M,
GRID-M, GRID-C,
GRID-C, GRID-K)
GRID-K)
84
2. Technical
Explanation
<Control
description>
The primary
The primary charging
charging bias
bias is
is generated
generated byby each
each of
of circuit
circuit boards
boards UN137,
UN137, UN138, UN139, and UN140 (the Primary Charger High
UN138, UN139,
Voltage PCB)
Voltage PCB) and
and applied
applied at
at specified
specified timings
timings to
to the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire and
and the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Grid
Grid Plate
Plate according
according to
to
signals (HV-PRIM-Y-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-M-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-C-GRID-ON,
HV-PRIM-C-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-K-GRID-ON)
HV-PRIM-K-GRID-ON) fromfrom DC Controller PCB
1-1.
The grid
The grid DC
DC bias
bias value
value is
is determined
determined byby the
the result
result of
of potential
potential control.
control.
Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN137/UN138/UN139/UN140)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E065-0101: Primary
E065-0101: Primary Charging
Charging High
High Voltage
Voltage output
output error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E065-0201: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (M)
•• E065-0301: Primary
Charging High
High Voltage
Voltage output
output error
error (C)
(C)
•• E065-0401: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (K)
●
• Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Control
The Primary Charging Assembly has a Cleaning Pad to prevent soiling of the Primary Charging Wire and Grid Plate.
<Execution timing>
•• When
When thethe fixing
fixing temperature
temperature is is 50
50 deg
deg C C at
at power-on
power-on (warm-up
(warm-up rotation)
rotation)
•• Whenever
Whenever the the time
time count
count reaches
reaches thethe following
following values
values during
during continuous
continuous printing
printing (job
(job interruption)
interruption)
•• iPR
iPR C10000VP:
C10000VP: When When drum
drum rotation
rotation time
time reaches
reaches the
the equivalent
equivalent of
of 6,500
6,500 images
images
•• iPR
iPR C8000VP:
drum rotation
rotation time
time reaches
reaches the
the equivalent
equivalent of
of 5,200
5,200 images
images
•• At
At last
last rotation
rotation for
for jobs
jobs that
that take
take more
more than
than the
the time
time indicated
indicated below
below
•• iPR
iPR C10000VP:
drum rotation
rotation time
time reaches
reaches the
the equivalent
equivalent of
of 5,500
5,500 images
images (A4)
(A4)
•• iPR
iPR C8000VP:
drum rotation
rotation time
time reaches
reaches the
the equivalent
equivalent of
of 4,400
4,400 images
images (A4)
(A4)
•• In
In the
the case
case ofof executing
executing "Clean
"Clean Wire"
Wire" inin Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration
<Control
description>
When the
When the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor rotates
rotates the
the Cleaner
Cleaner Screw
Screw clockwise/counterclockwise,
clockwise/counterclockwise, thethe Primary
Primary Charging
Charging
Wire and
Wire and Grid
Grid Plate
Plate are
are cleaned
cleaned by
by reciprocating
reciprocating motion
motion (approx.
(approx. 35
35 seconds)
seconds) ofof the
the Cleaning
Cleaning Pad
Pad that
that moves
moves inin conjunction
conjunction
with the
with the Cleaner
Cleaner Screw.
Screw.
DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor drive signals via the respective Process Unit Driver PCBs
to perform Primary Charger cleaning control.
The signals output to the respective Process Unit Driver PCBs by DC Controller PCB 1-2 are "PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_
CW" and "PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CCW".
"PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CCW". Primary PrimaryCharger
Chargercleaning
cleaningis
is performed
performed when
when the respective Process Unit Driver
PCBs output
PCBs output drive
drive signals
signals (see
(see Memo
Memo below)
below) to
to their
their respective
respective Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motors.
Motors.
The relationship
The relationship between
between signals
signals output
output by
by DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-2
1-2 and
and Primary
Primary Charger
Charger cleaning
cleaning operation
operation is
is as
as follows.
follows.
•• When PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CW is "1": The Cleaning Pad moves to the front side.
•• When PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CCW is "1": The Cleaning Pad moves to the rear side.
85
85
2. Technical
Explanation
NOTE:
NOTE:
Drive signals
Drive signals from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Y) to the
(Y) to the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor (Y):
(Y):
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CW
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CCW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CCW
Drive signals
Drive signals from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (M) to the
(M) to the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor (M):
(M):
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CW
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CCW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CCW
Drive signals
Drive signals from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (C) to the
(C) to the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor (C):
(C):
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CW
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CCW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CCW
Drive signals
Drive signals from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Bk) to the
(Bk) to the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk):
(Bk):
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CW
•• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CCW
PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CCW
Controller PCB
(UN124)
Process Kit
Process KitDriver
DriverPCB
PCB(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Cleaning Screw
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner Primary Charging
Hp Sensor Wire Cleaning Motor
(Y/M/C/Bk) (Y/M/C/Bk)
Grid Plate
Primary Charging Wire
Grid Plate Cleaning Pad
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
● Primary Charging
• Primary Charging Shutter
Shutter Control
Control
To prevent
To prevent uneven
uneven potential
potential on
on the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum caused
caused by
by discharge
discharge products
products (nitrogen
(nitrogen oxide)
oxide) accumulated
accumulated on
on the
the
Primary Charging
Primary Charging Assembly.
Assembly.
86
2. Technical
Explanation
Screw
\\\
vt
Primary Charging Wire Cleaninng
Grid Plate
(M118, M124,
Motor (M118,
Motor M130, M136)
M124, M130,
Cleaninng Pad
Cleaninng Pad
Grid Plate
Shutter
<Execution
<Execution timing>
timing>
•• When the Main Power is turned OFF
•• When
When aa specified
specified period
period of
of time
time has
has passed
passed after
after the
the machine
machine moved
moved to
to the
the energy
energy saver
saver mode
mode
•• During engine sleep
<Control
description>
The shutter
The shutter is
is opened
opened oror closed
closed by
by the
the cleaning
cleaning mechanism
mechanism of of the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire.
Wire.
The Primary
The Primary Charging
Charging Shutter
Shutter is
is made
made of
of fiber
fiber and
and usually
usually taken
taken up
up by
by the
the bobbin.
bobbin.
The drive
The drive of
of the
the Primary
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Motor (M1)
(M1) moves
moves the
the Cleaning
Cleaning Pad
Pad to
to the
the rear
rear and
and the
the shutter
shutter taken
taken up
up by
by the
the
bobbin
bobbin becomes
becomes extended
extended toto make
make the
the shutter
shutter closed.
closed.
Because the
Because the shutter
shutter comes
comes between
between the
the Grid
Grid Plate
Plate and
and the
the Photosensitive
Drum, discharge
discharge products
products from
from the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging
Assembly do
Assembly do not
not reach
reach the
the Photosensitive
Drum.
The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (PS240/PS241/PS242/PS243) detects opening/closing of the shutter.
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E060-0101: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire Shutter
Shutter operation
operation start
start error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E060-0201: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire Shutter
Shutter operation
operation start
start error
error (M)
(M)
•• E060-0301: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire Shutter
Shutter operation
operation start
start error
error (C)
(C)
•• E060-0401: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire Shutter
Shutter operation
operation start
start error
error (K)
(K)
•• E060-0110: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (Y)
•• E060-0210: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (M)
•• E060-0310: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (C)
•• E060-0410: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (K)
●
• Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure LED
LED Activation
Activation Control
Control
Pre-exposure LED
Pre-exposure LED activation
activation control
control eliminates
eliminates residual
residual charge
charge of
of the
the static
static latent
latent image
image before
before the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Assembly
Assembly
applies negative
applies negative potential
potential charge
charge to
to the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Drum.
By eliminating
By eliminating residual
residual charge
charge from
from the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum surface,
surface, uneven
uneven density
density in
in the
the print
print image
image can
can be
be prevented
prevented and
and
images can
images can be
be formed
formed stably.
stably.
<Control
description>
The DC
The DC Controller PCB 1-2
Controller PCB 1-2 outputs
outputs a
a Pre-Exposure LED Unit
Pre-Exposure LED Unit irradiation
irradiation signal
signal via
via each
each Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB to
to execute
execute Pre-
Pre-
Exposure LED
Exposure LED activation
activation control.
control.
87
2. Technical
Explanation
The signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to each Process Unit Driver PCB is "PRE_EXPOSURE_LED". When each
Process Unit Driver PCB outputs the irradiation signal (PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_Y, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_M, PRE_
EXPOSURE_LED_C, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_K)
EXPOSURE_LED_C, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_K) to to each Pre-exposure LED Unit, pre-exposure (elimination of residual charge)
is executed.
is executed.
The relationship between the irradiation signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and lighting of the Pre-Exposure LED is
as follows.
as follows.
•• When PRE_EXPOSURE_LED is "0": The Pre-Exposure LED turns OFF.
•• When PRE_EXPOSURE_LED is "1": The Pre-Exposure LED turns ON.
Process Kit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Pre-exposure LED
(Y/M/C/Bk)
<Related error codes>

•• E065-0111: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (Y)
•• E065-0211: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (M)
•• E065-0311: Pre-Exposure
E065-0311: Pre-Exposure LED
LED open-circuit
open-circuit error
error (C)
(C)
•• E065-0411: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (C)
●
• Drum Cleaning Unit
The Drum
The Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit is
is located
located next
next to
to the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum inin the
the Process
Process Unit,
Unit, and
and collects
collects residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the
surface of
surface of the
the Photosensitive
Drum.
In preparation
In preparation for
for the
the next
next printing,
printing, the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum isis cleaned
cleaned by
by collecting
collecting residual
residual toner
toner that
that was
was not
not
transferred to
transferred to the
the ITB.
ITB.
The Drum
The Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit consists
consists ofof the
the following
following parts.
parts.
•• Drum Cleaning Blade
•• Scraper
Scraper
•• Side
Side Seal
Seal
•• Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
•• Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw
•• Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED
88
2. Technical
Explanation
Waste toner
Waste toner collected
collected by
by the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller and
and the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade isis scraped
scraped off
off by
by the
the scraper
scraper in
in contact
contact
with the
with the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller and
and is
is fed
fed to
tothe
theWaste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed/Collection
Feed/Collection Unit
Unit by
bythe
theWaste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw.
Screw.
Drum Cleaning Blade
Scraper
/ Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
Waste Toner Feed Screw

/0
Drum Cleaning
Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/Bk)
Pre-exposure LED
M134
M128
M
M116
M122
Process KitDriver
Process Kit DriverPCB
PCB(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)

Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124)
(UN124)
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M134/M128/M116/M122 Drum Cleaner Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
A. Drum Cleaning Brush Roller/Waste Toner Feed Screw Drive

The DC
The DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-2
1-2outputs
outputs the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor drive
drive signal
signal via
via each
each Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB to execute
PCB to execute
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive cleaning.
Drum cleaning.
The signal
The signal output
output from
fromthe
theDC
DCController
ControllerPCB
PCB1-21-2to toeach
eachProcess
ProcessUnit UnitDriver
DriverPCB
PCBisis"DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON".
"DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON". When When a a
Process Unit
Process Unit Driver
DriverPCB
PCBoutputs
outputsaadrive
drivesignal (DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-Y,
signal (DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-Y,DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-M,
DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-M, DRUM- DRUM-
CLEANERMTR-ON-C,or
CLEANERMTR-ON-C, orDRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-K)
DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-K) toto
itsitsDrum
DrumCleaning
CleaningMotor,
Motor,cleaning
cleaningofofthe
thePhotosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum isis
performed.
performed.
•• When
When "DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON"
"DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON"isis"0", "0",the
theDrum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller and
and Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw do
do not
not rotate.
rotate.
•• When
When "DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON"
"DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON"isis"1", "1", the
the Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller and
and Waste Toner Feed
Screw rotate.
rotate.
<Related error
codes>
•• E016-0100: Drum
E016-0100: Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Motor
Motor error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E016-0200: Drum
Cleaning Motor
Motor error
error (M)
(M)
•• E016-0300: Drum
Cleaning Motor
Motor error
error (C)
(C)
•• E016-0400: Drum
Cleaning Motor
Motor error
error (K)
(K)
Pre-Exposure
B. Drum Cleaning Pre -Exposure LED
The surface
The surface potential
potential of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum maymay be be changed (become uneven)
changed (become uneven) due
due to
to gap
gap discharge
discharge that
that can
can occur
occur during
during
the primary transfer.
the primary transfer.
Gap discharge occurs
Gap discharge occurs when
when aa solid
solid image
image on
on the
the upstream
upstream side
side (primary
(primary transfer
transfer is
is performed
performed first)
first) of
of the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit passes
passes
through the downstream side (primary transfer is performed later) of the
through the downstream side (primary transfer is performed later) of the Process Unit. Process Unit.
When the
When the surface
surface potential
potential of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum changes,
changes, a a latent
latent image
image is
is created,
created, causing
causing occurrence
occurrence of of lines
lines on
on the
the
image.
image.
To avoid
To avoid this
this latent
latent image
image (uneven potential), the
(uneven potential), the Drum
Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs
Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs make
make the
the potential
potential uniform.
uniform.
The DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED irradiation signal
The DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED irradiation signal via each Process Unit via each Process Unit Driver
Driver PCB to
PCB to
control light of the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure
control light of the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs. LEDs.
The signal
The signal output
output from
fromthetheDC
DCController
ControllerPCB
PCB1-2 1-2to toeach
eachProcess
ProcessUnit UnitDriver
DriverPCB
PCBisis"PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED".
"PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED".
When each Process Unit Driver PCB outputs the irradiation signal (PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_Y,PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_M,
When each Process Unit Driver PCB outputs the irradiation signal (PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_Y, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_M,
89
89
2. Technical
Explanation
PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_C, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_K) to each Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED, drum cleaning pre-
exposure (removal
exposure (removal of
of uneven
uneven potential)
potential) is
is executed.
executed.
The relationship between the irradiation signal from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and lighting of the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure
LEDs is as follows.
•• When "PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED" is "0", the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs turn OFF.
•• When "PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED" is "1", the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs turn ON.
<Related error
codes>
•• E065-0112: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (Y)
•• E065-0212: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (M)
•• E065-0312: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (C)
•• E065-0412: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (K)
● Drum Patch
• Drum Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter Open/Close
Open/Close Control
Control
ATR patch
ATR patch detection
detection (supply
(supply amount
amount adjustment)
adjustment) and
and real-time
real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone correction
correction (Bk
(Bk only)
only) are
are performed
performed by
by reading
reading the
the
patch
patch image
image formed
formed between
between sheets
sheets with
with the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor.
Sensor.
<Execution timing>
Timing of when each patch image is formed
•• ATR
ATR patch
patch detection:
detection: small
small size
size -- every
every 28
28 sheets
sheets (large
(large size
size -- every
every 14
14 sheets)
sheets)
•• Real-time
Real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone correction
correction (Bk
(Bk only):
only): small
small size
size -- 9
9 times
times every
every 56
56 sheets
sheets (large
(large size
size -- 9
9 times
times every
every 28
28 sheets)
sheets)
* When both overlap, ATR has priority, and no patch image is formed during ATVC control.
<Control
description>
Normally, the
Normally, the Film
Film Shutter
Shutter is
is closed
closed to
to reduce
reduce soiling
soiling on
on the
the window
window of of the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor.
Sensor.
During patch
During patch detection,
detection, the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter Solenoid
Solenoid isis turned
turned ONON toto pull
pull the
the wire
wire and
and open
open the
the Film
Film Shutter.
Shutter. Moreover,
Moreover,
between sheets before
between sheets before execution
execution of
of ATR
ATR patch
patch detection, the Film
detection, the Film Shutter
Shutter isis opened
opened andand closed
closed to
to perform
perform background
background detection.
detection.
The position
The position of
of the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor differs
differs between
between Y/M-color
Y/M-color and
and C/Bk-color
C/Bk-color because the position
because the position of
of the
the patch
patch image
image differs.
differs.
In addition,
In addition, patch
patch images
images ofof Y/C-color
Y/C-color and
and M/Bk-color
M/Bk-color are
are formed
formed alternately
alternately between
between sheets.
sheets.
The patch
The patch images
images ofof the
the four
four colors
colors do
do not
not overlap
overlap onon the
the ITB
ITB because
because the the four
four color
color patches
patches are
are formed
formed atat different
different positions
positions
and different timings.
Drum Patch Sensor
Wire
Film Shutter
Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid Open Sensor
#72
Drum Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
●
• Drum Heater Control
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum sensitivity
sensitivity varies
varies according
according toto the
the installation
installation environment
environment (temperature
(temperature andand humidity).
humidity).
This machine
This machine has
has a
a planar
planar Drum
Drum Heater
Heater on
on the
the inside
inside of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum and
and aa thermopile
thermopile and
and thermistor
thermistor on
on the
the surface
surface
of the
of the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum toto control
control the
the temperature
temperature of of the
the Photosensitive
Drum.
The surface
The surface temperature
temperature ofof the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum is is continually
continually measured
measured byby the
the thermopile
thermopile and
and thermistor,
thermistor, and
and is
is kept
kept
constant by
constant by repeating
repeating ON/OFF
ON/OFF of of the
the Drum
Drum Heater.
Heater.
This machine
This machine uses
uses aa thermopile
thermopile (contact-less
(contact-less infrared
infrared sensor)
sensor) that
that better
better tracks
tracks the
the surface
surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive
Drum and
Drum and detects
detects the
the temperature
temperature with
with higher
higher accuracy
accuracy as as compared
compared with
with conventional
conventional thermo
thermo sensors.
sensors.
<Execution timing>
•• When the Main Power Switch is ON
90
2. Technical
Explanation
•• When
When the
the Main
Main Power
Power Switch
Switch isis OFF
OFF and
and the
the Environment
Environment Switch
Switch is
is ON
ON (with
(with the
the power
power plug
plug connected)
connected)
The control
The control temperature
temperature of
of the
the Drum
Drum Heater is controlled
Heater is controlled so
sothat
thatthe
thedrum
drumsurface
surfacetemperature
temperatureisisbetween
between36.5
36.5 and
and 42.5
42.5 deg
deg C
C
(the setting can
(the setting can be
be changed
changed in in service
service mode
mode (Lv.2)).
(Lv.2)).
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >> IMG-LSR
IMG-LSR >> DH-ADJ
DH-ADJ
<Control
description>
1. Based on
1. Based on the
the value
value of
of the
the Environment
Environment Sensor
Sensor 2 (UN142),select
2 (UN142), selectthe
thePhotosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum surface
surface control
control temperature
temperature by
by
referring to
referring to the
the table
table of
of temperature and moisture
temperature and moisture content.
content.
2. The
2. The drum
drum surface
surface temperature
temperature isis detected
detected by
by the
the thermopile.
thermopile.
3. Based on
3. Based on the
the detected
detected temperature
temperature of
of the
the drum
drum surface,
surface, the
the drum
drum surface
surface temperature
temperature is
is kept
kept constant
constant by
by repeating
repeating
ON/OFF of
ON/OFF of the
the Drum
Drum Heater.
Heater.
4. When
4. When thethe Drum
Drum Thermistor
Thermistor detects
detects the
the upper
upper limit
limittemperature
temperature(50
(50 deg
deg C),
C), the
the Drum
Drum Heater is turned
Heater is turned OFF.
OFF.

(UN124)
A A
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Photosensitive Drum
Thermopile
Thermistor
Drum Heater
Environment HeaterDriver
Environment Heater Drive PCB
PCB (UN101)
(UN101)
DC Controller PCB1-1
Controller PCB -1 (UN198)
k
91
11
2. Technical
Explanation
Main Power Switch

Environment Sensor 2 (SW108)
(UN142)
ON
ON
Environment
Switch (SW107)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E062-0100: Drum
E062-0100: Drum Heater
Heater (Y)
(Y) initial
initial low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0200: Drum
Heater (M)
(M) initial
initial low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0300: Drum
Heater (C)
(C) initial
initial low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0400: Drum
Heater (K)
(K) initial
initial low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0101: Drum
Heater (Y)
(Y) high
high temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0201: Drum
Heater (M)
(M) high
high temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0301: Drum
Heater (C)
(C) high
high temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0401: Drum
Heater (K)
(K) high
high temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0102: Drum
Heater (Y)
(Y) low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0202: Drum
Heater (M)
(M) low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0302: Drum
Heater (C)
(C) low
low temperature
temperature error
error
•• E062-0402: Drum
Heater (K)
(K) low
low temperature
temperature error
error
■
■ Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly
The Developing
The Developing Assembly
Assembly develops
develops electrostatic
electrostatic latent
latent images
images formed
formed on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum through
through
Developing Bias
Developing Bias Control,
Control, thereby
thereby making
making them
them visible.
visible.
Developer inside
Developer inside the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly is is stirred
stirred and
and circulated by multiple
circulated by multiple screws
screws and
and cylinders.
cylinders. Toner
Toner Blocking
Blocking Bias
Bias Control
Control
is performed
is performed to
to prevent
prevent contamination
contamination by by undeveloped
undeveloped straystray developer.
developer.
ACR Control
ACR Control is
is performed
performed toto extend
extend the
the life
life of
of developer.
developer.
The names
The names and
and functions
functions of
of the
the main
main parts
parts making
making up up the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly are
are as
as follows.
follows.
Part
Part Role
Role
A Screw
A Screw (Supply
(Supply Cham-
Cham- To
To supply
supply developer
developer to
to the
the Developing
Developing Upper
Upper Cylinder.
Cylinder.
ber)
ber)
92
Part Role
Role"
B Screw
B Screw (Stirring
(Stirring Cham- It stirs
Cham- It stirs toner
toner supplied
supplied from
from the
the Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper and
and developer
developer returned
returned from
from the
the Developing
Developing Lower
Lower Cylinder
Cylinder and
and
ber)
ber) sends itit to
sends to the
the Supply
Supply Chamber.
Chamber.
Blade
Blade It levels developer of the Developing Upper Cylinder to forms it into a uniform layer.
Developing Upper Cylin- It
It retains
retains developer.
developer.
der
der
Developing Lower Cylin-
der
der
C Screw
C Screw It sends
It sends developer
developer that
that was
was not
not developed
developed from
from the
the Developing
Developing Lower
Lower Cylinder
Cylinder to
to the
the Stirring
Stirring Chamber.
Chamber.
Developing Assembly It vibrates
It vibrates the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly to
to prevent
prevent toner
toner from
from coagulating.
coagulating.
Knock Motor
Knock Plate
Knock Plate
Developing Assembly Temperature and
Temperature and humidity
humidity of
of developer
developer is
is detected.
detected.
Environment Sensor
Cam
Developing Knocking Motor
Knocking Plate Blade
Developing Assembly
A Screw
Developing Lower Cylinder

Developing Upper Cylinder
B Screw
Developing Environment Sensor Collection roller

C Screw
●
• Developing Bias Control
There are
There are two
two types
types of
of developing
developing bias
bias as
as follows.
follows.
•• Developing
Developing DC
DC bias:
bias: The
The bias
bias that
that generates
generates potential
potential difference
difference with
with the
the Photosensitive
Drum, causing
causing developer
developer to
to stick.
stick.
•• Developing
Developing AC
AC bias:
bias: Helps
Helps improve
improve image
image quality.
quality.
These biases
These biases are
are generated
generated by
by the
the various
various Developing
Developing Voltage
Voltage PCBs
PCBs (UN133,
(UN133, UN134,
UN134, UN135,
UN135, and
and UN136)
UN136) and
and applied
applied to
to the
the
upper and
upper and lower
lower Developing
Developing Cylinders
Cylinders at
at prescribed
prescribed timings
timings determined
determined byby DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-1.
1-1.
93
2. Technical
Explanation
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)
Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)(UN133/UN134/UN135/UN136)
●
• Toner Blocking Bias Control
The toner
The toner blocking
blocking bias
bias returns
returns toner
toner scattered
scattered from
from the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly back
back to
to the
the Developing
Developing Cylinder
Cylinder due
due to
to the
the
difference
difference in
in bias
bias between
between the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller and
and the
the Developing
Developing Cylinder
Cylinder during
during development.
development.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-1
1-1 applies
applies the
the toner
toner blocking
blocking bias
bias (negative
(negative DC)
DC) generated
generated on
on each
each Toner
Toner Blocking
Blocking High
High Voltage
Voltage PCB
PCB
through each
through each Developing
Developing High
High Voltage
Voltage PCB
PCB toto the
the Collection
Collection Roller.
Roller.
The bias
The bias value
value is
is determined
determined by
by the
the developing
developing DCDC bias
bias and
and the
the developing
developing AC
AC bias.
bias.
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB DC Controller PCB 1-1

(UN102) (UN198)
Jr
Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN133/UN134/UN135/UN136)
1
Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN194/UN193/UN191/UN192)
i
\
\—\
/—i
0
\____ ........
-
●
• ACR Control
With ACR
With ACR (auto
(auto carrier
carrier refresh)
refresh) control,
control, developer
developer inin the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly is
is replaced
replaced a
a bit
bit at
at a
a time
time in
in order
order to
to extend
extend the
the
life of
life of the
the developer.
developer.
Carrier is
Carrier is supplied
supplied a
a bit
bit at
at a
a time
time along
along with
with the
the toner.
toner.
94
2. Technical
Explanation
When the
When the amount
amount ofof developer
developer increases,
increases, itit is
is discharged from an
discharged from an outlet
outlet located
located on
on the
the downstream
downstream side
side of
of the
the supply
supply chamber
chamber
inside the
inside the Developing
Developing Assembly.
Assembly.
An ACR
An ACR Discharge
Discharge Selection
Selection Switch
Switch is
is provided
provided on on the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly to to correct
correct for
for shortages
shortages or
or excesses
excesses of
of developer
developer
that may
that may result
result from
from differences
differences in
in printing
printing speed
speed byby the
the host
host machine.
machine.
A Screw
B Screw
ACR Ejection Rate Change Switch
●
• Toner
Toner Anticoagulation
Anticoagulation Control
Control
The Developing
Assembly Knock
Knock Unit
Unit just
just above
above the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly provides
provides toner
toner anticoagulation
anticoagulation control.
control.
In the
In the Developing Assembly Knock
Developing Assembly Knock Unit
Unit ,, the
the Developing
Developing Assembly Knock Motor
Assembly Knock Motor rotates
rotates the
the cams,
cams, and
and the
the Knock
Knock Plates
Plates vibrate
vibrate
up and
up and down
down toto the
the movement
movement ofof the
the cams.
cams.
The Knock
The Knock Plates
Plates are
are located
located on
on the
the front
front side
side and
and the
the rear
rear side,
side, and
and they
they move
move up
up and
and down
down alternately.
alternately.
The vibration
The vibration of
of the
the two
two Knock
Knock Plates
Plates atat the
the front
front and
and rear
rear prevents
prevents toner
toner from
from coagulating
coagulating in
in the
the Developing
Assembly.
95
95
2. Technical
Explanation
Developing Knocking Motor

(M203/M204/M205/M206) Developing
Assembly
Developing Knocking Unit
Knocking Plate Cam
Developing
Assembly
●
• Environment Control in the Developing Assembly
Environment control
Environment control in
in the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly is is executed
executed to
to reduce
reduce hue
hue variation
variation due
due to
to environment
environment change
change in
in the
the Developing
Developing
Assembly.
Assembly.
Based on
Based on the
the temperature
temperature and
and humidity
humidity of
of the
the developer
developer measured
measured every
every second
second byby the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Environment
Environment
Sensor, the
Sensor, the laser
laser power
power determined
determined by
by potential
potential control
control and
and the
the amount
amount ofof toner
toner supplied
supplied by
by ATR
ATR control
control are
are corrected.
corrected.
The correction
The correction is
is performed
performed during
during potential
potential control
control or
or PASCAL
PASCAL control.
control.
●
• Airflow Control
In order
In order to
to prevent
prevent toner
toner soiling
soiling on
on the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor,
Sensor, toner
toner around
around the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor is
is ejected
ejected through
through the
the Primary
Primary
Exhaust Duct.
Exhaust Duct.
Primary Exhaust Duct
Drum Patch Sensor
96
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit (ITB
(ITB Unit)
Unit)
The Transfer
The Transfer Mechanism
Mechanism consists
consists of
of the
the Primary
Primary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit and
and the
the Secondary Transfer Unit.
Secondary Transfer Unit.
•• Primary
Primary Transfer
Transfer Unit:
Unit: Toner
Toner on
on the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum is transferred
Drum is transferred to
to the
the ITB.
ITB.
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit:
Unit: Toner on the
Toner on the ITB
ITB is
is transferred
transferred to
to paper.
paper.
Photosensitive Drum Photosensitive Drum
ITB Patch Sensor /

Registration Patch Sensor
0
ITB Drive Roller
Primary Transfer Roller Primary Transfer Roller

Primary Transfer
Steering Roller
Assembly
Secondary Transfer Leading EdgeRegistration Patch Sensor

Assembly ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
ITB Drive Roller

Primary Transfer Roller
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream)

ITB Cleaning Bias Roller(Downstream)
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream)
ITB Cleaning Blade

ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller (Upstream)
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Upstream) Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade (Upstream) Cleaning Blade (Downstream)
Blade (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
●
• Transfer Bias Control
The three
The three types
types of
of transfer
transfer bias
bias used
used in
in the
the Primary
Primary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit are
are as
as follows.
follows.
1. Primary transfer
1. Primary transfer bias
bias
DC positive
DC positive bias
bias used
used for
for transferring
transferring toner
toner from
from the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum toto the
the ITB.
ITB.
This is
This is generated
generated byby the
the various
variouscolors'
colors'Primary
PrimaryTransfer
Transfer High Voltage
High PCBs
Voltage PCBs (Y/M/C/K)
(Y/M/C/K)(UN112,
(UN112,UN113,
UN113,UN114,
UN114, UN115)
UN115)
upon
upon command
command fromfrom DC Controller 1-2,
DC Controller and applied
1-2, and applied to
to the
the Primary
Primary Transfer
Transfer Roller.
Roller.
Upon jam
Upon jam recovery,
recovery, this
this becomes reverse DC
becomes reverse DC bias
bias (with
(with the
the same
same polarity
polarity as
as the
the toner)
toner) to
to return
return toner
toner from
from the
the ITB to the
ITB to the
97
2. Technical
Explanation
2. ITB cleaning
2. cleaning bias
bias (upstream)
(upstream)
DC negative
DC negative bias
bias used
used for
for removing
removing positively
positively charged
charged residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the ITB.
This is
This is generated
generated by by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148) upon command from DC Controller 1-2, and
applied to
applied to the
the ITB Cleaning Bias
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller
Roller (Upstream).
(Upstream).
After adhering
After adhering toto the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller (Upstream),
(Upstream), residual
residual toner
toner on
on the
the ITB
ITB is
is attracted
attracted to
to the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias
Roller (Upstream)
Roller (Upstream) by by the
the applied
applied bias.
bias. The
The toner
toner is
is then
then collected
collected byby the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade (Upstream)
(Upstream) that
that is
is engaged
engaged
with the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream).
3. ITB cleaning bias (downstream)
3.
DC negative
DC negative bias
bias used
used for
for removing
removing negatively
negatively charged
charged residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the ITB.
This is generated by the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149) upon command from DC Controller 1-2,
and applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
After adhering
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller (Downstream),
(Downstream), residual
residual toner
toner on
on the
the ITB
ITB is
is attracted
attracted to
to the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning
Bias Roller
Bias Roller (Downstream)
(Downstream) by by the
the applied
applied bias.
bias. The
The toner
toner is
is then
then collected
collected by
by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade (Downstream)
(Downstream) thatthat is
is
engaged with the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
The four
The four types
types of
of transfer
transfer bias
bias used
used in
in the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit are
are as
as follows.
follows.
1. Secondary transfer
1. Secondary transfer biasbias
DC negative
DC negative biasbias used
used for
for transferring
transferring toner
toner from
from the
the ITB
ITB to
to the
the paper.
paper.
This bias
This bias is
is generated
generated by by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer High
High Voltage
Voltage PCBPCB (UN116)
(UN116) upon
upon command
command from from DC
DC Controller
Controller 1-1,
1-1, and
and
applied to
applied to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Inner
Inner Roller.
Roller.
2. Secondary
transfer cleaning
cleaning (upstream)
(upstream)
DC positive
DC positive bias
bias used
used forfor removing
removing negatively
negatively charged
charged residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt.
Belt.
This bias
This bias is
is generated
generated by by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning High
High Voltage
Voltage PCB
PCB (UN971)
(UN971) upon
upon command
command fromfrom DCDC Controller
Controller
1-2,
1-2, and
and applied
applied to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Upstream).
(Upstream).
After adhering
After adhering to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
Roller (Upstream),
(Upstream), residual
residual toner
toner on
on the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer
Belt is
Belt is attracted
attracted to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Upstream)
(Upstream) by by the
the applied
applied bias.
bias. The
The toner
toner is
is then
then collected
collected
by
by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Belt
Belt Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade (Upstream)
(Upstream) that
that is
is engaged
engaged with
with the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller
(Upstream).
(Upstream).
3. Secondary
transfer cleaning
cleaning (downstream)
(downstream)
DC positive
DC positive bias
bias used
used forfor removing
removing negatively
negatively charged
charged residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt.
Belt.
This bias
This bias is
is generated
generated by by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning High
High Voltage
Voltage PCB
PCB (UN972)
(UN972) upon
upon command
command fromfrom DCDC Controller
Controller
1-2,
1-2, and
and applied
applied to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Downstream).
(Downstream).
After adhering
After adhering to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Roller
(Downstream), residual
residual toner
toner on
on the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer
Outer Belt
Outer Belt is
is attracted
attracted to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Downstream)
(Downstream) by by the
the applied
applied bias.
bias. The
The toner
toner is
is then
then
collected by
collected by thethe Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Belt
Belt Cleaning
Cleaning Blade
Blade (Downstream)
(Downstream) that that is
is engaged
engaged with
with the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer
Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
4. Post-secondary
4. Post-secondary transfer
transfer static
static elimination
elimination bias
bias
DC bias
DC bias used
used for for to
to prevent
prevent corrupt
corrupt images
images onon paper
paper separated
separated from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Belt;
Belt; eliminates
eliminates charge
charge from
from
the back
the back ofof the
the paper
paper to to prevent
prevent the
the toner
toner image
image from
from shifting
shifting due
due toto charge
charge movement.
movement.
This bias
This bias is
is generated
generated by by the
the Post-secondary
Post-secondary Transfer
Transfer Static
Static Eliminator
Eliminator High
High Voltage
Voltage PCBPCB (UN108)
(UN108) upon
upon command
command fromfrom
DC Controller
DC Controller 1-2,
1-2, and
and isis applied
applied toto the
the Post-secondary
Transfer Static
Static Eliminator.
Eliminator.
98
2. Technical
Explanation
ITB Cleaner ITB Cleaner Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer
High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB
(Downstream) (Upstream) (Y) (UN112) (M) (UN113) (C) (UN114)
(D) (Bk) (UN115)
(UN149) (UN148)

(Downstream)
a43
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream) Primary Transfer Roller
Secondary Transfer
Static Elimination
secondary cleaning high voltage PCB (+/-)

1 Secondary Transfer
High Voltage PCB
High Voltage PCB (UN116)
(UN108) (UN971/972)

DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) (UN198)
●
• Overview of the Primary Transfer Unit
The Primary
The Primary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit has
has five
five motors
motors toto drive
drive the
the rollers
rollers and
and open/close
open/close thethe shutter.
shutter.
Their operation is controlled by the DC Controller through the ITB Driver PCB or the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB.
•• ITB
ITB Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M109)
(M109)
It rotates the ITB Drive Roller to move the ITB.
•• Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M155)
It opens
It opens andand closes
closes the
the shutter
shutter when
when the
the Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors (PS134
(PS134 to to 136)
136) detect
detect the
the patch
patch image
image ofof each
each color
color
on the ITB.
Reference: "Image
Reference: “Image Position
Position (Color
(Color Displacement)
Displacement) Correction"
Correction” onon page
page 135“Real-time
135"Real-time Multiple
Multiple Tone
Tone Control”
Control" on
on page
page 131
131
•• ITB
ITB Steering
Steering Motor
Motor (M111)
(M111)
It tilts
It tilts the
the shaft
shaft of
of the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller to
to correct
correct skew
skew of of the
the ITB.
ITB.
•• Leading
Leading EdgeEdge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter Motor
Motor (M114)
(M114)
It opens
It opens andand closes
closes the
the shutter
shutter when
when the
the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor (PS110)
(PS110) detects
detects the
the leading
leading edge
edge patch
patch
image on the ITB.
•• ITB
ITB Cleaner
Cleaner Motor
Motor (M108)
(M108)
It rotates
It rotates the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Rollers
Rollers to
to collect
collect residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the ITB.
ITB.
It also
It also rotates
rotates the
the screws
screws in in the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning UnitUnit to
to eject
eject the
the collected
collected toner.
toner.
99
2. Technical
Explanation
DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198) DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124)
Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB

ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
(UN159)
M109 ITB Drive Roller ITB M155 PS134-136

411P
Steering Roller
0
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
00-ier •
00 ITB Cleaning Unit •
Screw
• •
M108 0• M114 M111
PS110
ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219) ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)
●
• ITB
ITB Speed
Speed Control
Control
The ITB
The ITB Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M109)
(M109) rotates
rotates the
the ITB
ITB Drive
Drive Roller
Roller to
to drive
drive the
the Intermediate
Transfer Belt
Belt at
at a
a constant
constant speed.
speed.
However, in
However, in actuality
actuality the
the ITB
ITB speed
speed isis subject
subject to
to variations
variations inin speed
speed itself,
itself, and
and the
the load
load applied
applied when
when paper
paper enters
enters the
the Secondary
Secondary
Transfer Outer
Transfer Outer Belt
Belt causes
causes variations
variations asas well.
well.
To maintain
To maintain constant
constant ITBITB speed,
speed, this
this machine
machine monitors
monitors encoders
encoders that
that are
are coupled
coupled toto the
the ITB
ITB Drive
Drive Roller.
Roller.
ITB Drive
ITB Drive Roller
Roller Encoder
Encoder Sensors
Sensors A/BA/B (PS221/222)
(PS221/222) countcount encoder
encoder rotation
rotation as
as pulses
pulses and
and feed
feed back
back the
the amount
amount ofof ITB
ITB Drive
Drive
Roller rotation
Roller rotation to
to DC
DC Controller
Controller 1-1
1-1 to
to control
control speed.
speed.
At this time, ITB Driver Roller HP Sensor (PS223) determines the starting position of ITB Drive Roller rotation (the home home position).
position).
Further, since
Further, since variations
variations inin ITB
ITB speed
speed differ
differ for
for each
each individual
individual Intermediate
Transfer Belt,
Belt, a
a profile
profile of
of speed
speed variations
variations is
is
automatically generated
automatically generated forfor each
each unit.
unit.
This profile
This profile is
is stored
stored in
in DC
DC Controller
Controller RAM
RAM eacheach time
time the
the Intermediate
Transfer Belt
Belt rotates.
rotates.
DC Controller
DC Controller 1-1
1-1 corrects
corrects ITB
ITB speed
speed by by referring
referring to
to this
this profile
profile and
and the
the results
results of
of measurement
measurement by by the
the encoders.
encoders.

(UN198)
Encoder
ITB Drive Roller
ITB
PS222 PS221
ITB Driver PCB (Middle) ITB
(UN217)
PS223
M109
ITB Drive Roller ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
The home
The home position
position of
of the
the Intermediate
Transfer Belt
Belt is
is detected
detected by
by sensing
sensing reflective
reflective spots
spots that
that are
are located
located at
at the
the edges
edges of
of the
the
ITB by
ITB by the
the ITB
ITB HP
HP Lower
Lower Sensor
Sensor (PS101)
(PS101) and
and the
the ITB
ITB HP
HP Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS102).
(PS102).
100
2. Technical
Explanation
Since the
Since the home
home position
position can
can be
be detected
detected by
by either
either the
the ITB
ITB HP
HP Lower
Lower Sensor
Sensor or
or the
the ITB
ITB HP Upper Sensor,
HP Upper Sensor, itit can
can be
be determined
determined
more quickly
more quickly than
than would
would be possible with
be possible with a single sensor.
a single sensor.
Controller PCB
1-1 (UN198)
(UN198)
ITB
PS102
ti
ITB Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (Middle)
t
(Middle) (UN217)
(UN217)
A
Reflecting Surface
PS101
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
PS101 ITB HP Lower Sensor PS102 ITB HP Upper Sensor
● ITB Displacement
• ITB Displacement Correction
Correction Control
Control
Images can be
Images can be displaced
displaced due
due to
to the
the ITB
ITBshifted
shifted off
off center
center of
of the
the rollers
rollers while
while the
the ITB
ITB is
is running.
running.
<Control
description>
This machine
This machine prevents
prevents imageimage displacement
displacement by by detecting
detecting thethe direction
direction and
and amount
amount of of the
the ITB
ITB displacement
displacement every
every 70 msec with
70 msec with
a sensor and
a sensor and correcting
correcting the the displacement
displacement of of the
the ITB.
ITB.
When the
When the ITB
ITB has
has shifted
shifted toward
toward the the front
front oror rear,
rear, the
the displacement
displacement amount
amount of of the
the ITB
ITB Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor Flag is detected
Flag is detected by
by the
the ITB
ITB
Edge Sensor
Edge Sensor (PS100)
(PS100) and and is is fed
fed back
back to to the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller 1-1.1-1.
Based on
Based on the
the displacement
displacement amount, amount, the the DC Controller 1-1
DC Controller 1-1 drives
drives the
the ITB
ITB Steering
Steering Motor
Motor (M111)
(M111) toto rotate
rotate the
the cam.
cam.
When the
When the cam
cam rotates
rotates andand moves
moves the the Support
Support Arm Arm on on the
the front
front side
side of
of the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller up
up and
and down,
down, the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller tilts
tilts
upward/downward.
upward/downward.
Tilting the
Tilting the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller generates
generates a difference in
a difference in the
the displacement
displacement force force at
at the
the front
frontandandrear
rear of
ofthe
the ITB,
ITB, and
and the
the ITB
ITB can
can be
be
thus shifted
thus shifted back
back toto the center of
the center of the
the rollers.
rollers.
The home
The home position
position ofof the
the ITB
ITB Steering
Steering MotorMotor is is detected
detectedby bythetheITB
ITBSteering
SteeringMotor
MotorHP HP Sensor
Sensor (PS104).
(PS104).
Since the
Since the configuration
configuration of of the
the edge
edge of of the
the ITB differs from
ITB differs from ITB
ITB toto ITB,
ITB, aa profile
profile of
of the edge configuration
the edge configuration needs
needs to
to be
be created
created inin
service mode
service mode when
when thethe ITB
ITB isis replaced.
replaced.
ITB displacement is
ITB displacement is corrected
corrected by by checking
checking the the profile
profile and
and the
the result
resultofofmeasurement
measurement by by the
the ITB
ITB Edge
Edge Sensor.
Sensor.
101
2. Technical
Explanation
ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
ITB
PS100
ITB Displacement Sensor Flag
Cam
M111
PS104 Steering Roller
Support Arm
The home
The home position
position of
ofthe
theITB
ITBisisdetected
detectedby
bythe
theITB
ITBHP
HPLower
LowerSensor
Sensor(PS101)
(PS101) and
andthe
theITB
ITB HP
HP Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS102). For
(PS102). For
details, refer
details, to "ITB
refer to "ITB Speed Control".
Speed Control".
NOTE:
ITB, create
After replacing the ITB, create aaprofile
profile of
of the
the edge
edgeconfiguration
configuration in
in the following
following service mode.
FUNCTION >> INSTALL
COPIER > FUNCTION INSTALL > INIT-ITB
●
• Leading Edge Registration Control
The machine
The machine forms
forms aa leading
leading edge
edge patch
patch image
image immediately
immediately before
before the
the image
image to
to be
be printed
printed in
in order
order to
to align
align the
the paper
paper with
with the
the
image on the ITB.
When the
When the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor (PS110) detects the
(PS110) detects the leading
leading edge
edge patch
patch image, paper feed
image, paper feed starts.
starts. The
The image
image
on the
on the ITB is transferred
ITB is transferred to
to the
the paper
paper at
at the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit after
after paper
paper skew
skew and
and speed
speed are adjusted.
are adjusted.
The Leading
The Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor is is normally
normally separated
separated from
from the
the ITB
ITB by
by the
the shutter,
shutter, and
and performs
performs detection
detection when
when
the shutter
the shutter is
is opened
opened when
when necessary.
necessary.
The shutter
The shutter is
is opened
opened and
and closed
closed byby the
the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor Shutter
Shutter Motor
Motor (M114).
(M114).
The shutter
The shutter home
home position
position isis detected
detectedbybythetheLeading
LeadingEdge
Edge Registration
RegistrationPatch
PatchSensor
SensorShutter
ShutterHP HPSensor
Sensor(PS105).
(PS105).
102
2. Technical
Explanation

(UN198)
ITB Driver PCB (Right)

(Right) (UN219)
(UN219)
A
M114
Shutter
PS110
ITB
PS105
●
• ITB Cleaning Control
A residue
A residue of of positively
positively and
and negatively
negatively charged toner remains
charged toner remains onon the
the ITB
ITB following
following secondary
secondary transfer.
transfer.
The ITB
The ITB Cleaning
Cleaning UnitUnit electro-statically
electro-statically removes
removes each
each ofof these
these from
from thethe ITB.
ITB.
Reverse DC
Reverse DC bias
bias is
is applied
applied to to the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (Upstream),
(Upstream), applying
applying aa negative
negative charge
charge toto the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush
(Upstream) with
Roller (Upstream) with which
which itit is in contact.
After adhering
the ITB Cleaning Brush
Roller (Upstream),
(Upstream), positively
positively charged toner is
charged toner is attracted
attracted to
to the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller
(Upstream)
(Upstream) and and then
then scraped
scraped off off by
by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Blade.
Blade.
DC bias
DC bias is
is applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Bias Roller
(Downstream), applying
applying aa positive
positive charge to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
(Downstream)
(Downstream) with with which
which itit is in contact.
After adhering
the ITB Cleaning Brush
Roller (Downstream), negatively charged
(Downstream), negatively charged toner
toner is
is attracted
attracted to
to the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning Bias
Cleaning Bias
Roller (Downstream)
Roller (Downstream) and and then
then scraped
scraped off
off by
by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Blade.
Blade.
The scraped-off
The scraped-off toner
toner isis fed
fed by
by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw andand ejected to the
ejected to the Waste
Waste Toner Buffer by
Toner Buffer by the
the ITB
ITB Cleaning
Cleaning
Unit Toner
Unit Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw.
Screw.
All rollers
rollers and
and screws
screws in inthe
theITBITB Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit are
are driven
drivenbybythe
theITB
ITB Cleaner
Cleaner Motor
Motor (M108).
(M108).
103
2. Technical
Explanation

ITB Drive Roller ITB

(Downstream)

(Downstream)
ITB Cleaning Blade

(Upstream)
M108
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Discharge Screw
● Overview of
• Overview of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit
The Secondary
The Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit
Unit has
has three
three motors
motors to
to drive
drive the
the rollers
rollers and
and to
to engage
engage and
and disengage
disengage the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Unit.
Unit.
These operations
These operations are
are controlled
controlled by
by the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller through
through the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer/Duplex
Transfer/Duplex Driver
Driver PCB.
PCB.
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M183)
(M183)
The following
The following rollers
rollers and
and screw
screw rotate
rotate to
to perform
perform secondary
secondary transfer
transfer and
and eject
eject the
the collected
collected toner.
toner.
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Roller
Roller
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Rollers
Rollers (2
(2 pcs)
pcs)
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Rollers
Rollers (2
(2 pcs)
pcs)
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw
NOTE:
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Error
Error Sensor
Sensor (PS168)
(PS168) detects
detects rotation
rotation of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M183).
(M183).
<Related error
codes>
•• E013-0010:
E013-0010: Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor speed
speed error
error (with
(with the
the sensor
sensor ON)
ON)
•• E013-0011:
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor speed
speed error
error (with
(with the
the sensor
sensor OFF)
OFF)
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure Release
Release Motor
Motor (M184)
(M184)
It engages the Secondary Transfer Unit with
It engages the Secondary Transfer Unit with the
the ITB when secondary
ITB when secondary transfer
transfer is
is performed,
performed, and
and disengages
disengages the
the Secondary
Secondary
Transfer Unit when secondary transfer is not performed.
Transfer Unit when secondary transfer is not performed.
•• Secondary
Secondary Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor (M210)
(M210)
•• Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner Ejection
Toner Ejection Screw
Screw
104
2. Technical
Explanation
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

ITB
PS166 Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Brush Roller
M183
Secondary Transfer
PS920 Cleaning Bias Roller
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Pressure Release Shaft
Secondary Transfer
M184 Cleaning Brush Roller
PS205,PS167
Secondary Transfer
M210
Waste Toner Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106)
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
PS166 Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
PS168 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Error Sensor M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Mo-
tor
PS920 Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Rotation Sensor
●
• Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Cleaning Control
The Secondary
Transfer UnitUnit collects
collects residual
residual toner
toner from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt and
and ejects
ejects itit to
to the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Buffer.
Secondary transfer
Secondary transfer cleaning
cleaning consists
consists ofof secondary
secondary transfer
transfer cleaning
cleaning (upstream)
(upstream) and
and secondary
secondary transfer
transfer cleaning
cleaning (downstream)
(downstream)
for attracting
for attracting residual
residual toner
toner of of different
different polarity
polarity from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt.
Belt.
Positive DC
Positive DC bias
bias isis applied
applied to to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Roller
Roller (upstream)
(upstream) andand negative
negative DCDC biasbias is
is applied
applied to
to the
the
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias Bias Roller
Roller (downstream),
(downstream), and and their
their Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Brush
Brush Rollers
Rollers contacting
contacting them
them
are charged
are charged (+1-)
(+/-) ..
After the
After the residual
residual toner
toner from
from the the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt is
is picked
picked up
up by
by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning BrushBrush Rollers
Rollers
according to
according to the
the polarity,
polarity, itit is
is attracted
attracted to
to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Bias
Bias Rollers
Rollers and
and scraped
scraped off
off by
by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer
Cleaning Blades.
Cleaning Blades.
The scraped
The toner is
scraped toner is carried
carried by by the
the Secondary
Secondary Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw and
and ejected
ejected into
into the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer by by the
the Secondary
Secondary
Transfer Waste
Transfer Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw.
Screw.
The rollers
The rollers in
in the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt and
and the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw are are driven
driven byby the
the
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer DriveDrive Motor
Motor (M183).
(M183).
The Secondary
Transfer Waste
Waste TonerToner Ejection
Ejection Screw
Screw isis driven
driven by
by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor (M210).
(M210).
Due to
Due to clogging
clogging with
with waste
waste toner,
toner, rotation
rotation of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw
Screw slows
slows down,
down, which
which also
also slows
slows
down
down rotation
rotation of of the
the Secondary
Secondary Waste Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor ,and
,and an
an error
error is
is detected.
detected.
When this
When this period
period exceeds
exceeds a a specific
specific amount,
amount, the the DC
DC Controller
Controller 1-2
1-2 displays
displays the
the error
error on
on the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
105
105
2. Technical
Explanation
/ ITB
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Brush Roller
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Blade
M183
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller Waste Toner Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Blade

M210
Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Discharge Screw
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M183
Secondary Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor M210
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor
Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
M210 Cleaning Brush Roller M183
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106)
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M183
Drive Motor
Motor M210
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor
106
106
2. Technical
Explanation
● Secondary Transfer
• Secondary Transfer Unit
Unit Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement Control
Control
The Secondary
Transfer Unit
Unit is
is engaged
engaged with
with the
the ITB
ITB when
when the
the image
image isis transferred from the
transferred from the ITB
ITB to
to the
the paper,
paper, and
and is
is disengaged
disengaged
when not needed.
when not needed.
The engagement/disengagement
The engagement/disengagement operationoperation is
is performed
performed by by the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure Release
Release Motor
Motor (M184)
(M184) controlled
controlled
by
by the DC Controller PCB 1-2 through the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB. This operation is detected by
the DC Controller PCB 1-2 through the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB. This operation is detected by the
the Secondary
Secondary
Transfer Pressure
Transfer Pressure Release
Release Motor
Motor Position
Position Sensor
Sensor (PS205)
(PS205) and and the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure Release
Release HP
HP Sensor
Sensor (PS167).
(PS167).
When engaged, the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor rotates the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Shaft
When engaged, the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor rotates the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Shaft
clockwise.
clockwise.
The Secondary
The Transfer Unit
Secondary Transfer Unit is
is pushed up along
pushed up along with
with the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed
Feed Unit
Unit to
to aaposition
position where
where the
theSecondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure
Release Motor Position Sensor switches from ON
Release Motor Position Sensor switches from ON to OFF. to OFF.
To disengage,
To disengage, the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure Release Motor rotates
Release Motor rotates the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure Release
Release Shaft
Shaft
counterclockwise.
counterclockwise.
The Secondary
Transfer Unit
Unit is
is lowered
lowered along
along with
with the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed Unit to
Feed Unit to a
a position
position where
where the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Pressure
Pressure
Release HP Sensor switches from ON
Release HP Sensor switches from ON to OFF. to OFF.
NOTE:
Disengagement is executed also during initial rotation.
M184
PS167
PS205
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PC (UN106)
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor
PS205 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor Position Sensor
107
2. Technical
Explanation
When
< TheSecondary
When The SecondaryTransfer
Transfer Assembly !
Assembly Is Locked >
ITB
Pre-Fixing Feed Unit
10T11.1.
AII
11-1
• ift
Secondary Transfer
Pressure Release Shaft
0 0° \ 1
M PS205 PS167
0
0
°A _P
M184 PS205,PS167
When
< TheSecondary
When The SecondaryTransfer
Transfer Assembly
Assembly Is
Is Unlocked !
Unlocked >
PS205 PS167
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor
PS205 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor Position Sensor
M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
■
• Toner Container
●
• Toner Supply Mechanism
The Toner
The Toner Supply
Supply Mechanism
Mechanism consists
consists of
of the
the Toner
Toner Container,
Container, Stirring
Stirring Screw,
Screw, Feed
Feed Screw,
Screw, Hopper
Hopper and
and Sub
Sub Hopper.
Hopper.
The toner
The toner fill-up
fill-up amount
amount isis 1600
1600 g
g for
for the
the Toner
Toner Container,
Container, 2100
2100 g
g for
for the
the Hopper,
Hopper, and
and 40
40 g
g for
for the
the Sub
Sub Hopper.
Hopper.
As described
As described later,
later, Toner
Toner Container
Container Presence
Presence Detection,
Detection, Hopper
Hopper Unit
Unit Drive
Drive Control,
Control, Toner
Toner Level
Level Detection
Detection and
and Toner
Toner Supply
Supply
Control are
Control are the
the same
same for
for each
each color.
color.
108
2. Technical
Explanation
Toner Container
Toner Strring Blade Toner Strring Blade
Hopper
Sub Hopper
Toner Feed Screw
ii.
li
-z----------)---.
Toner Strring Blade
●
• Toner
Toner Container
Container Detection
Detection
The presence/absence
The presence/absence of of Toner
Toner Containers
Containers in
in the
the Hopper
Hopper Unit
Unit is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container Sensors
Sensors (Y:
(Y: PS126,
PS126, M:
M: PS125,
PS125,
C: PS123, Bk: PS124).
The detection
The detection results
results are
are passed
passed to
to DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-2
1-2 via
via the
the various
various Hopper
Hopper Driver
Driver PCBs.
PCBs.
1
Sensor Flag Toner
Sensor Flag TonerContainer
Container Sensor
Sensor
ON OFF
FRONT Toner Container
IIMIEIME
, 1
1_1111 E
●
• Toner Supply Mechanism Drive Control
The Toner
The Toner Supply
Supply Mechanism
Mechanism is
is driven
driven by
by the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container Motor,
Motor, Toner
Toner Container
Container Slide
Slide Motor,
Motor, Hopper
Hopper Motor,
Motor, Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper
Motor, Toner
Motor, Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor and
and gears.
gears. The
The Toner
Toner Supply
Supply Mechanism
Mechanism ofof each
each color
color has
has one
one of
of each
each of
of these
these motors.
motors.
109
2. Technical
Explanation
Motor
Motor Driven object
Driven object
Toner Container
Motor Toner Stirring Blade (Toner Container)
Toner Container Slide Motor Toner Container
Hopper Motor
Hopper Motor •• Toner Stirring Blade (Hopper)
•• Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw (Hopper,
(Hopper, between
between Hopper
Hopper and
and Sub
Sub Hopper)
Hopper)
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Motor
Motor Toner Stirring
Toner Stirring Blade
Blade (Sub
(Sub Hopper)
Hopper)
Toner Feed
Toner Feed Motor
Motor Toner Feed
Toner Feed Screw
Screw (Sub
(Sub Hopper)
Hopper)

I
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB

(UN102)
M138 M137 M193 M146 M195

M132 M M131 M M191 M M145 M M198 M
M120 M119 M190 M143 M197
M126 M125 M192 M144 M196
J r
Toner Strring Blade
-o-
O A
if
wf. O
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Code
Code Parts name
Sub Hopper Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Toner Container Slide
Slide Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M195/M198/M197/M196
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M138/M132/M120/M126 Toner Feed
Toner Feed Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
●
• Toner
Toner Level
Level Detection
Detection
Piezo sensors
Piezo sensors are
are located
located at
at the
the sides
sides of
of the
the Hopper
Hopper and
and Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper to
to detect
detect whether
whether toner
toner is
is present.
present.
Toner in
Toner in the
the Hopper is detected
Hopper is by Hopper
detected by Hopper Toner Level Sensors1
Toner Level Sensors1 and
and 2,
2, and
and toner
toner in
in the
the Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper isis detected
detected by
by Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper
Toner Level
Toner Level Sensor
Sensor 1.
1.
110
2. Technical
Explanation
The toner
The toner level
level is
is judged
judged from
from the
the combined
combined detection
detection results
results (ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF) of
of the
the various
various sensors.
sensors.
Sensor name
Sensor name Y
Y M C Bk
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 TS130
TS130 TS132 TS134 TS136
TS136
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 TS131 TS133 TS135 TS137
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1
1 TS106
TS106 TS104 TS100
TS100 TS102
The results
The results of
of toner
toner detection
detection by
by the
the various
various sensors
sensors are
are conveyed
conveyed to
to DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-2
1-2 via
via the
the Hopper
Hopper Driver
Driver PCB
PCB or
or the
the
various Process
various Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs.
PCBs.
Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 1
(Y/M/C/Bk) Sub Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 1 (Y/M/C/Bk)
Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 2 (Y/M/C/Bk)
I II
The Remaining
The Remaining Toner
Toner Level
Level is
is judged
judged from
from the
the ON/OFF
ON/OFF combinations
combinations of
of the
the respective
respective sensors
sensors and
and relevant
relevant information
information is
is
displayed
displayed onon the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
The relationship
The relationship between
between sensor
sensor ON/OFF
ON/OFF results,
results, toner
toner levels,
levels, and
and Control
Control Panel
Panel display
display is
is as
as follows.
follows.
Control Panel
Control Panel display
display Sensor
Sensor ON/OFF
ON/OFF Toner level
Toner level
- Hopper Toner
Hopper Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1:
1: ON
ON Toner Container
Toner Container contains
contains toner,
toner, Hopper
Hopper contains
contains
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: ON toner (full):
toner (full): 100
100 to
to 54%
54%
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1:
1: ON
ON
Ready to
Ready to replace
replace the
the toner
toner car-
car- Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container
Toner Container empty,
empty, Hopper
Hopper contains
contains toner
toner
tridge.
tridge. Hopper Toner
Hopper Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2:
2: ON
ON (full, 2
(full, 2 hours
hours worth):
worth): 54
54 to
to 16%
16%
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1:
1: ON
ON
Replace toner
Replace toner cartridge.
cartridge. Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container
Toner Container empty,
empty, Hopper
Hopper contains
contains less
less
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: OFF than 2
than 2 hours
hours worth
worth of
of toner:
toner: 16
16 to
to 0%
0%
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1:
1: ON
ON
Replace toner
Replace toner cartridge.
cartridge. Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container
Toner Container and
and Hopper
Hopper both
both empty:
empty: 0%
0%
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: OFF
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1:
1: OFF
OFF
●
• Detection of New Toner Container
Toner Container ID Read Sensor

(lJN909,UN910,UN911,UN912)
(UN909,UN910,UN911,UN912)
Barcode
Toner Container
Each Toner
Each Toner Container
Container has
has a
a unique
unique bottle
bottle ID.
ID.
111
11
2. Technical
Explanation
The bottle
The bottle ID
ID is
is printed
printed as
as a
a bar
bar code
code on
on the
the Toner
Toner Container,
Container, and
and is
is read
read by
by its
its Toner
Toner Container
Container ID
ID Read
Read Sensor
Sensor (UN112,
(UN112, UN113,
UN114, or UN115) when when the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container is
is installed
installed to
to the
the host
host machine.
machine.
The read
The read Toner
Toner Bottle
Bottle ID
ID is
is saved
saved in
in the
the DC
DC Controller,
Controller, where
where upup to
to 1,000
1,000 IDs
IDs can
can be
be stored.
stored. The
The host
host machine
machine determines
determines
whether the
whether the Toner
Toner Container
Container isis new
new or
or old
old on
on the
the basis
basis of
of the
the read
read bottle
bottle ID.
ID.
Toner Bottle Counters
Counters (X
(X ==11 to
to 4:
4: Bk, Y, M, and C)
General Name Counter No. Advancement of the counter

Toner Bottle Counter 007X When a new part (a new bottle ID number) is detected
Toner Container Installation/Removal Counter 008X When a new part (a new bottle ID number) is detected
(including premature removal) When the same bottle ID number as that of a bottle which had been
inserted before is detected
When a Toner Bottle with an unidentified bar code is detected
Unidentified Bottle Counter 018X When a Toner Container with an unidentified bar code is detected
<Related
<Related alarms>
alarms>
Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle replacement
replacement alarm:
alarm:100100-XXXX
1001004000( (-XXXX representsthe
(4000( represents the foregoing
foregoing counter
counter number.)
number.)
An alarm
An alarm is
is generated
generated when
when 007X
007X or
or 018X
018X advances.
advances.
The 008X
The 008X alarm
alarm isis generated
generated only
only when
when a
a partially
partially used
used toner
toner bottle
bottle previously
previously removed
removed from
from the
the Host
Host machine
machine is
is reinserted.
reinserted. (It
(It
is not
is not generated
generated when
when a
a new
new Toner
Toner Container
Container or
or a
a Toner
Toner Container
Container with
with unidentified
unidentified bar
bar code
code is
is detected.)
detected.)
The alarm
The alarm log
log is
is maintained
maintained in
in the
the host
host machine,
machine, and
and aa notification
notification is
is sent
sent to
to UGW.
UGW.
●
• Toner Supply Control
Toner supply
Toner supply type
type depends
depends on on conditions
conditions at
at each
each sensor.
sensor. There
There are
are three
three types
types of
of toner
toner supply,
supply, as
as follows.
follows.
•• Supply
Supply from
from Toner
Toner Container
Container to to Hopper
Hopper
•• Supply
Supply from
from Hopper
Hopper toto Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper
•• Supply
Supply from
from Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper to to Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly
When three
When three hours
hours passes
passes after
after the
the last
last toner
toner supply,
supply, such
such as
as during
during low-duty
low-duty image
image printing
printing or
or after
after non-use
non-use for
for a
a long
long time,
time, the
the
Hopper Motor
Hopper Motor rotates
rotates for
for five
five seconds
seconds toto stir
stir the
the toner
toner and
and prevent
prevent solidification.
solidification.
Supply from
A. Supply from Toner
Toner Container
Container to
to Hopper
Hopper
Hopper Toner
Hopper Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 detects
detects toner
toner every
every 100
100 msec.
msec. When
When Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 is
is continuously
continuously OFF
OFF for
for 20
20
times (two
times (two seconds),
seconds), DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB 1-2 1-2 outputs
outputs aa drive
drive signal
signal to
to the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container Motor
Motor and
and through
through the
the Hopper
Hopper Driver
Driver
PCB to
PCB to the
the Hopper
Hopper Motor.
Motor. The
The Toner
Toner Container
Container Motor
Motor runs
runs for
for five
five seconds
seconds toto supply
supply toner
toner from
from the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container toto the
the
Hopper. The
Hopper. The Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor stirs
stirs the
the supplied
supplied toner.
toner. After
After toner
toner is
is supplied,
supplied, Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 returns
returns its
its new
new toner
toner
detection
detection status.
status.
If Hopper
If Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 is
is still
still OFF
OFF when
when the
the toner
toner detection
detection status
status is
is returned,
returned, the
the toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation is
is repeated.
repeated.
When this
When this toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation hashas repeated
repeated 100
100 times
times the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container is
is judged
judged to
to be
be empty,
empty, and
and the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container
Replacement message
Replacement message isis displayed
displayed on on the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
However, pressing the Hopper Cover Switch (Y: SW104, M: SW103, C: SW101, Bk: Sw102) stops toner supply immediately.
B. Supply
B. Supply from
from Hopper
Hopper to
to Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 detects
detects tonertoner every
every 100
100 ms.ms. When
When SubSub Hopper
Hopper Toner Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 11 is
is continuously
continuously OFFOFF forfor
seven times
seven times (0.7
(0.7 seconds),
seconds), DC DC Controller
Controller PCB PCB 1-2 1-2 outputs
outputs a a drive
drive signal
signal through
through the the Hopper
Hopper Driver
Driver PCB
PCB to to the
the Hopper
Hopper Motor.
Motor.
The Hopper
The Hopper MotorMotor runs
runs for
for six
six seconds
seconds to to supply
supply toner
toner from
from the
the Hopper
Hopper to to the
the Sub
Sub Hopper.
Hopper. After
After toner
toner is
is supplied,
supplied, Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper
Toner Level
Toner Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 returns
returns its
its new
new toner
toner detection
detection status.
status.
If Sub
If Sub Hopper
Hopper TonerToner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 is
is still
still OFF
OFF when
when the
the toner
toner detection
detection status
status is is returned,
returned, thethe toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation is
is repeated.
repeated.
When this
When this toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation hashas repeated
repeated three three times
times the the toner
toner is
is judged
judged to to be
be exhausted
exhausted and and printing
printing stops
stops as
as the
the no-toner
no-toner
animation is
animation is displayed
displayed on on the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
Toner Supply After No-Toner Animation Display
After a
After a print
print job
job has
has been
been stopped
stopped with
with Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 turned
turned OFF, OFF, the
the following
following operations
operations are
are executed
executed
when the
when the Toner
Toner Container
Container is is replaced.
replaced. At At this
this time,
time, "Preparing
"Preparing toner..."
toner..." is
is displayed
displayed on on the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel and
and no
no new
new print
print jobs
jobs
are accepted.
are accepted.
1. The Toner
1. The Toner Container
Container Motor
Motor continues
continues to to run
run until
until Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 turns
turns ON.
ON.
Hopper Toner
Hopper Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 detects
detects tonertoner every
every 100
100 ms.ms. When
When Hopper
Hopper Toner Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 is
is continuously
continuously OFFOFF forfor ten
ten
times (one
times (one second),
second), the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container Motor Motor runs
runs forfor ten
ten seconds
seconds to to supply
supply tonertoner from
from the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container toto the
the Hopper.
Hopper.
After toner
After toner is is supplied,
supplied, Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 returns
returns its
its new
new toner
toner detection
detection status.
status.
If Hopper
If Hopper TonerToner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 is
is still
still OFF
OFF when
when the
the toner
toner detection
detection status
status is is returned,
returned, thethe toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation is
is repeated.
repeated.
When this
When this toner
toner supply operation has
supply operation has repeated
repeated 50 50 times
times thethe Toner
Toner Container
Container is is judged
judged to to be
be empty,
empty, and
and the
the Toner
Toner Container
Container
Replacement message
Replacement message is is displayed
displayed on on thethe Control
Control Panel.
Panel. The
The print
print job
job remains
remains halted.
halted.
When Hopper
When Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 2 2 turns
turns ON,ON, operation
operation proceeds
proceeds to to 2).
2).
112
2. Technical
Explanation
2. The
2. TheHopper
Hopper Motor
Motor continues
continues toto run
run until
until Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 turns
turns ON.
ON.
Sub Hopper
Sub Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 detects
detects toner
toner every
every 100
100 msec.
msec. When
When SubSub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 11 is
is continuously
continuously
OFF for
OFF for seven
seven times
times (0.7
(0.7 seconds), the Hopper
seconds), the Motor runs
Hopper Motor runs for
for six
six seconds
seconds toto supply
supply toner
toner from
from the
the Hopper
Hopper to
to the
the Sub
Sub Hopper.
Hopper.
After toner
After toner is
is supplied,
supplied, Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 returns
returns its
its new
new toner
toner detection
detection status.
status.
If Sub
If Sub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 is
is still
still OFF
OFF when
when the
the toner
toner detection
detection status
status isis returned,
returned, the
the toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation is
is
repeated. When
repeated. When this
this toner
toner supply
supply operation
operation has has repeated
repeated 3030 times
times the
the toner
toner isis judged
judged toto be
be exhausted
exhausted and
and printing
printing stops
stops as
as
the no-toner
the no-toner indication
indication is
is displayed
displayed onon the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
When Sub
When Sub Hopper
Hopper Toner
Toner Level
Level Sensor
Sensor 1 1 turns
turns ON,
ON, the
the "Preparing
"Preparing toner..."
toner..."
indication is
indication is cleared
cleared from
from the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel and and normal
normal printing
printing operation
operation resumes.
resumes.
C.
C. Supply
Supply from
from Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper to
to Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly
Toner is
Toner is supplied
supplied from
from the
the Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper to
to the
the Developing
Assembly.
DC Controller
DC Controller PCB
PCB 1-2
1-2 outputs
outputs a
a drive
drive signal
signal through
through the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB to
to the
the Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor to
to supply
supply toner
toner to
to
the Developing
the Developing Assembly.
Assembly.
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
M195 M146 M137

M198 M145 M131
M M M
M197 M190 Toner Container M119
M196 M192 M125
fiY,o,9p/\
p 66
f fffffff
1;
A.: ,
Sub Hopper Assembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Developing Assembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M137/M131/M119/M125
Sub Hopper Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
M195/M198/M197/M196
(Y/M/C/Bk)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E025:
E025: Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor error
error When
When the the motor
motor lock
lock signal
signal is
is not
not detected
detected although
although a
a specified
specified period
period of
of time
time has
has passed.
passed.
0x00: Hopper
0x00: Hopper Motor
Motor error
error (x
(x == 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
•• E027:
E027: Block
Block Supply
Supply Toner
Toner Motor
Motor error
error
0x01: Toner
Ox01: Toner Motor
Motor lock
lock (x
(x == 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
0x02: Toner
0x02: Toner Motor
Motor sequence
sequence errorerror (x(x == 1:
1: Y,
Y, 2:
2: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
•• E028:
E028: Toner
Toner Container
Container Slide
Slide Motor
Motor error
error
0x01: Toner
Ox01: Toner Container
Container Slide
Slide Motor
Motor lock
lock (x
(x =
= 1:
1: Y,
Y, 20:
20: M,
M, 3:
3: C,
C, 4:
4: Bk)
Bk)
113
113
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Toner Collection Mechanism
●
• Toner Collection
This machine
This machine feeds
feeds and
and collects
collects used
used toner
toner discharged
discharged from
from the
the outlets
outlets of
of the
the four
four image
image formation
formation units
units (Developing
(Developing Assembly,
Assembly,
Drum Cleaning Unit, Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit).
Waste toner
Waste toner is
is collected
collected at
at two
two locations:
locations: in
in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container and
and the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
The metal
The metal spring
spring has
has been
been eliminated
eliminated from
from the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer,
Buffer, and
and the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Solenoid
Solenoid has
has been
been added
added as
as a
a
measure to
measure to keep
keep the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full Sensor
Sensor Window
Window clean.
clean.
When the
When the predetermined
predetermined condition
condition is
is met,
met, the
the solenoid
solenoid vibrates
vibrates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer so
so that
that waste
waste toner
toner drops
drops away
away from
from the
the
sensor window.
Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid(SL420)

Sheet
(SL420=OFF
Sheet Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor
(TS128)
Toner
SL420
TS128
SL420=ON
SL420
Toner
TS128
Flow of Toner
To Waste Toner Container
114
1'
2. Technical
Explanation
Sub Station Main Station
Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Unit

Developing
Deve oping Developing
Deve oping Developing Developing
Deve oping
Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly
Y M C Bk
- - - - 7 7-
ITB Cleaning Unit
111
1/ 1
.pl ittc 11
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit

d
Waste Toner Buffer
Waste Toner
Container
Developing Assembly
The Developing
The Developing Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) (M133/M127/M115/M121)
(M133/M127/M115/M121) rotates
rotates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw to
to feed
feed toner.
toner.
Drum Cleaning Unit

The Drum
The Drum Cleaner
Cleaner Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) (M134/M128/M116/M122)
(M134/M128/M116/M122) rotates
rotates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw toto feed
feed toner.
toner.
Toner collected
Toner collected from
from the
the Developing
Developing Assemblies
Assemblies and
and Drum
Drum Cleaning
Cleaning Units
Units is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer by
by rotation
rotation of
of the
the
screw in
screw in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe
Pipe driven
driven by
by the
the Drum
Drum Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor (M180).
(M180).
The Drum
The Drum Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor is
is also
also used
used to
to stir
stir accumulated
accumulated toner
toner in
in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit
The Secondary
Transfer Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M183)
(M183) rotates
rotates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Screw
Screw to
to feed
feed toner,
toner, and
and the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor (M210)
(M210) rotates
rotates the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Screw
Screw to
to collect
collect toner
toner into
into the
the Waste
Waste
Toner Buffer.
<Related error
codes>
•• E013-0012:
E013-0012: Error
Error in
in speed
speed of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor
ITB Cleaning Unit

The ITB
The Cleaner Motor
ITB Cleaner Motor (M108)
(M108) rotates
rotates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner FeedFeed Screw
Screw toto feed
feed toner
toner into
into the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Toner in
Toner in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer is
is fed
fed by
by rotation
rotation of of the
the screw
screw inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe
Pipe driven
driven by
by the
the Buffer
Buffer Motor
Motor (M179).
(M179).
The Buffer
The Buffer Motor
Motor is
is also
also used
used to
to stir
stir accumulated
accumulated toner toner in in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Toner fed
Toner fed from
from the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer is
is fed
fed into
into the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container by
by rotation
rotation ofof the
the screw
screw in
in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe
Pipe
driven
driven by by the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor (M314).
(M314).
Until the
Until the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container becomes
becomes full,full, toner
toner is is fed
fed into
into the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container without
without being
being accumulated
accumulated in
in the
the
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
When the
When the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container has
has become
become full, full, toner
toner can
can be
be temporarily
temporarily accumulated
accumulated in in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer,
Buffer, but
but the
the
Waste Toner
Waste Toner Container
Container must
must be
be promptly
promptly replaced.
replaced.
115
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Duplex Pre-fixing Feed Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit
Feed Driver PCB Driver PCB Driver PCB (Y) Driver PCB (M) Driver PCB (C) Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN311) (UN107) (UN161) (UN162) (UN163) (UN164)
M138 M134 M132 M128 M120 M116 M126 M122
I I I I
Developing Y I 1 I
Assembly Y M
M I 1 C Bk
I I 1 I I Drum Cleaning Unit
I 1101 4 Toner Exit Slot
*,
Developing 0,101 A:::Vo A:::100
Toner
Exit Slot
MI /1
11
M180 ma ofillimis imill *01
I . •
-
ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
I l f f
Waste Toner
Container ITB
M179 Inner Roller
000000000000000Ci—IM
0000003 Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Buffer
M314 ITB Cleaning Unit
Toner Discharge Screw
M183 M210
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer/
Duplex Driver PCB
(UN106)

(UN124)
Code
Code a Parts name
Parts name Code
Code illParts
Parts name
name
M108 ITB Cleaner
ITB Cleaner Motor
Motor M134 Drum Cleaner Motor (Y)
M116 Drum Cleaner
Drum Cleaner Motor
Motor (C)
(C) M133 Developing Motor
Developing Motor (Y)
(Y)
Developing Motor (C)
(C) M179 Buffer Motor
Buffer Motor
M122 Drum Cleaner Motor (Bk) M180 Drum Waste
Drum Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
M121 Developing Motor (Bk) M183
Drive Motor
Motor
M128 Drum Cleaner Motor (M) M210 Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Toner Ejection
Ejection Motor
Motor
M127 Developing Motor (M) M314 Waste Toner
Waste Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
116
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Waste Toner Full Level Detection
This machine
This machine uses
uses aa magnetic
magnetic sensor
sensor and
and waste
waste toner
toner count
count to
to detect
detect the
the level
level of
of waste
waste toner.
toner.
DC Controller 1-2 refers to the detection result of the magnetic sensor and waste
DC Controller 1-2 refers to the detection result of the magnetic sensor and waste toner counttoner count for
for each
each output
output when
when the
the power
power is
is
turned on or the front cover is opened or closed.
turned on or the front cover is opened or closed.
On these
On these occasions,
occasions, ifif the
the detection
detection result
result of
of either
either the
the magnetic
magnetic sensor
sensor oror the
the waste
waste toner
toner count
count exceeds
exceeds aa specified
specified level,
level, DC
DC
Controller 1-2 sends either "Waste toner full alert" or a "Waste toner full" message to the Main
Controller 1-2 sends either "Waste toner full alert" or a "Waste toner full" message to the Main Controller.Controller.
Detection by
A. Detection by Magnetic
Magnetic Sensors
Sensors
1. Detection in
1. Detection in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container
There are
There are two
two magnetic
magnetic sensors
sensors onon the
the left
left side
side of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container:
Container: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensors
Sensors 11 (TS301) and 2
(T5301) and 2
(TS300).
(T5300).
When the
When the toner
toner level
level detected
detected by
by the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensor
Sensor 2 2 exceeds
exceeds the
the specified
specified value,
value, the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container
nearly full
nearly full notification
notification message
message is is displayed.
displayed. Printing
Printing is
is allowed
allowed to
to continue.
continue.
When the
When the toner
toner level
level detected
detected by
by the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensor
Sensor 1 1 exceeds
exceeds the
the specified
specified value,
value, the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container
full message
full message is is displayed.
displayed. Printing
Printing can
can still
still continue,
continue, but
but after
after the
the message
message appears,
appears, the
the Buffer
Buffer Motor
Motor (M179)
(M179) and
and Waste
Waste
Toner Feed
Toner Feed Motor
Motor (M314)
(M314) are
are stopped,
stopped, and
and thethe subsequent
subsequent waste
waste toner
toner accumulates
accumulates inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Detected to
Detected to (location)
(location) Waste toner
Waste toner Message type
Message type Message
Message
level
Waste Toner Full Sensor 2 (TS300) 80 % Waste Toner Container Waste toner is near full. (Replacement not yet nee-
nearly full notification ded.)
Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 (TS301) 100 % Waste Toner Container Replace the waste toner container.
full
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The display
The display timing
timing of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container messages
messages (nearly
(nearly full
full notification
notification and
and full
full message)
message) cannot
cannot be
be changed.
changed.
2. Detection
2. Detection atat the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer
The Waste
The Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full Sensor
Sensor (TS128)
(T5128) isis on
on the
the rear
rear of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
To keep
To keep the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full Detection
Detection Sensor
Sensor Window clear, when
Window clear, when the
the specified
specified condition is met,
condition is met, the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Buffer Tapping
Buffer Tapping Solenoid
Solenoid vibrates
vibrates the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer so
so that
that waste
waste toner
toner drops
drops away
away from
from the
the sensor
sensor window
window (the
(the
solenoid is
solenoid is turned
turned ONON and
and OFF
OFF three
three times
times in
in aa period
period of
of 100
100 ms
ms in
in each
each tapping
tapping operation
operation ). ).
When the
When the toner
toner level
level exceeds the specified
exceeds the specified value,
value, the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full message
message isis displayed.
displayed. Also,
Also, the
the Drum
Drum Waste
Waste
Toner Feed
Toner Feed Motor
Motor (M180)
(M180) stops,
stops, and
and the
the machine
machine operation
operation stops.
stops.
Detected to
Detected to (location)
(location) Waste toner
Waste toner Message
Message type
type Message
Message
level
Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor (TS128) 100% Waste Toner Buffer full Replace the waste toner container.
When replacing
When replacing the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container,
Container, the
the recovery
recovery mode
mode is
is activated
activated and
and toner
toner in
in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer is
is fed
fed to
to
the Waste
the Waste Toner
Toner Container.
Container. Operation
Operation restarts
restarts automatically
automatically when
when the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full Sensor
Sensor turns
turns OFF.
OFF.
CAUTION:
The display
The display timing
timing of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer Full
Full message
message cannot
cannot be
be changed.
changed.
NOTE:
•• The output of the Magnetic Sensor for detecting magnetic bodies changes depending on the amount of carrier in the waste
toner. The DC Controller PCB 1-2 determines the amount of toner collected in the Waste Toner Container or the Waste Toner
Buffer according to the change in sensor output.
•• The recovery mode is activated when the Waste Toner Container is replaced after the Waste Toner Buffer has become full.
During replacement, when the OFF state of the Waste Toner Full Sensors 1 and 2 is detected,
detected, waste toner in the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Buffer is automatically fed to the Waste Toner Container.
117
2. Technical
Explanation

A A A
V
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB
(UN311) (UN107)
SL420 TS128
M180
Waste Toner Buffer

SW109
• \LN
• 1f
Waste Toner
Container • r\:\
M179
SW300
SW300
—L—I J000000000000000 ,1177F—
TS301f
TS301 7 00000000000.iir7
(r)7 0-0-07
SW110
•
-
TS3001
TS300 M314
.
Code
Code _._Parts
Parts name
name Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M179 Buffer Motor SW300 Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch
M180 Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor TS128 Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor
M314 Waste Toner Feed Motor TS300 Waste Toner Full Sensor 2
SW109 Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch TS301 Waste Toner Full Sensor 1
SW110 Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch SL420 Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid
B. Detection
B. Detection by
by waste
waste toner
toner count
count
With this
With this machine,
machine, a a waste
waste toner
toner count
count is is used
used asas an
an auxiliary
auxiliary means
means of of detecting
detecting waste
waste toner
toner quantity,
quantity, protecting
protecting against
against thethe
possibility
possibility of
of problems
problems that
that result
result ifif the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensor
Sensor fails.
fails.
The waste
The waste toner
toner count
count uses
uses a
a software
software counter
counter isis used
used toto count
count the
the number
number of of sheets
sheets printed,
printed, and
and the
the quantity
quantity of
of waste
waste toner
toner
collected in
collected in the
the waste
waste toner
toner container
container is is calculated
calculated from
from that
that value.
value.
When the
When the counter
counter value
value reaches
reaches 150,000,
150,000, a a alert
alert message
message is is displayed
displayed to to warn
warn that
that the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container is is almost
almost full.
full.
Printing is allowed to continue.
When the
When the counter
counter value
value reaches
reaches 200,000,
200,000, a a message
message is is displayed indicating that
displayed indicating that the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container is
is full.
full. Printing
Printing can
can
still continue,
still continue, but
but after
after the
the message
message appears,
appears, thethe Buffer
Buffer Motor
Motor (M179)
(M179) andand Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor (M314)
(M314) are
are stopped,
stopped, and and
the subsequent
the subsequent waste
waste toner
toner accumulates
accumulates in in the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer.
Buffer.
Counter values
Counter values Message type
Message type Message
Message
150000 Waste Toner Container almost full alert Waste toner is near full. Replacement not yet needed.
200000 Waste Toner Container full Replace the waste toner container.
CAUTION:
The display
The display timing
timing of
of the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container messages
messages (nearly
(nearly full
full notification
notification and
and full
full message)
message) cannot
cannot be
be changed.
changed.
This counter
This counter value
value is
is reset
reset when when the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Receptacle
Receptacle is is pulled
pulled out.
out.
Therefore, if the Waste Toner Receptacle is opened and
Therefore, if the Waste Toner Receptacle is opened and closed before the closed before the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Container
Container is is replaced,
replaced, the
the waste
waste toner
toner
quantity calculated from the waste toner count will not reflect the actual
quantity calculated from the waste toner count will not reflect the actual toner quantity. toner quantity.
Be aware
Be aware that
that the
the waste
waste toner
toner count
count is
is only
only anan auxiliary
auxiliary backup
backup to to the
the Magnetic
Magnetic Sensor.
Sensor.
Further, if the waste toner message disappears when the Waste Toner Receptacle
Further, if the waste toner message disappears when the Waste Toner Receptacle isis inserted,
inserted, itit means
means that
that the
the waste
waste toner
toner
count is showing that that the container is full. Since this may indicate trouble with the Waste Toner Full Sensor, you should
count is showing that that the container is full. Since this may indicate trouble with the Waste Toner Full Sensor, you should check
check
the sensor
the sensor and
and replace
replace itit ifif necessary.
necessary.
118
2. Technical
Explanation

•• E013-0001:
E013-0001: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Path
Path lock
lock error
error
When output
When output of
of the
the Drum
Drum Waste Toner Lock
Waste Toner Lock Switch
Switch (SW109)
(SW109) is is "1"
"1" for
for more
more than
than 1 1 second
second
If
If clogging
clogging ofof toner
toner collected
collected from
fromthe
theDeveloping
Developing Assembly
Assemblyand and Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit prevents
prevents rotation
rotationofofthe
theWaste
Waste Toner
Toner Screw
Screw
when the
when the Drum
Drum Waste Toner Feed
Waste Toner Feed Motor
Motor (M180)
(M180)is is driven,
driven, the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Screw
Screw Drive
Drive Gear
Gearis is pressed
pressed and
and the
the switch
switch
goes ON.
goes ON.
After checking
After checking thethe Drum Waste Toner
Drum Waste Toner Feed
FeedMotor
Motorand andreplacing
replacingitit ifif necessary,
necessary, startstart the
the following
following service
service mode
mode toto clear
clear the
the
error.
<When ejecting all toner toner inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner Pipe>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P MISC-P >> WTNR-ALL
WTNR-ALL
<When ejecting all
<When ejecting all toner
toner inin the
the Waste Toner Pipe
Waste Toner Pipe from
from the
the Developing
Developing Assembly Assembly and and Cleaning
Cleaning Unit
Unit to
to the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Buffer>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BUF
•• E013-0002:
E013-0002: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Path
Path lock
lock error
error
When output
When output of
of the
the Waste Toner Ejection
Waste Toner Ejection Lock
Lock Switch
Switch (SW300)
(SW300) is is "1"
"1" for
for more than 1
more than second
1 second
If
If clogging
clogging ofof toner
toner collected
collectedprevents
preventsrotation
rotationofofthe
theWaste
WasteToner TonerScrewScrew on on the
the Sub
Sub Station
Station side
side when
when the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner
Feed Motor (M314)
Feed Motor (M314) is is driven,
driven, thethe Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Screw
Screw Drive
Drive Gear
Gear is is pressed
pressed and and the
the switch
switch goes
goes ON.
ON.
After checking
After checking thethe Waste Toner Feed
Waste Toner FeedMotor
Motorandandreplacing
replacingitit ifif necessary,
necessary, start start the
the following
following service
service mode
mode toto clear
clear the
the error.
error.
<When ejecting all toner toner inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner Pipe>
WTNR-ALL
<When ejecting all
toner inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe from the
Pipe from the Waste
Waste Toner Toner Buffer
Buffer to to the
the Waste
Waste Toner Container>
Toner Container>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BOX
•• E013-0003:
E013-0003: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Path
Path lock
lock error
error
When output
When output of
of the
the Transfer
Transfer Waste Toner Lock
Waste Toner Lock Switch
Switch (SW110)
(SW110) is is "1"
"1" for
for more
more than
than 1 1 second
second
If
If clogging
clogging ofof toner
toner fed
fed from
fromthethe Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Buffer
Buffer prevents
prevents rotation
rotationof ofthe
theWaste
Waste Toner
Toner Screw
Screw on on the
the Main Station side
Main Station side
when the
when the Buffer
Buffer Motor
Motor (M179)
(M179) is is driven,
driven, the
the Waste Toner Screw
Waste Toner Screw Drive Drive Gear
Gear isis pressed
pressed and and the
the switch
switch goes
goes ON.
ON.
To clear
To clear the
the error,
error, check
check or or replace
replace the
the Buffer
Buffer Motor,
Motor, and
and then
then execute
execute the the following
following service
service mode.
mode.
<When ejecting all
toner inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe>
Pipe>
WTNR-ALL
<When ejecting all
toner inin the
the Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Pipe from the
Pipe from the Waste
Waste Toner Toner Buffer
Buffer to to the
the Waste
Waste Toner Container>
Toner Container>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BOX
•• E013-0006:
E013-0006:WasteWasteTonerTonerFullFullSensor
Sensor adjustment
adjustment error
•• E013-0021:
E013-0021: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensor
Sensor 1 error
error
•• E013-0022:
E013-0022: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Full
Full Sensor
Sensor 2 error
error
•• E013-0023:
E013-0023: Waste
WasteTonerTonerBuffer
Buffer Full
Full Sensor
Sensor error
•• E013-0033:
E013-0033:Soiled
Soiled Waste
WasteTonerTonerBuffer
Buffer Full
Full Sensor
Sensor window
window
•• E019-0001:
E019-0001: DrumDrum Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor error
error
•• E019-0002:
E019-0002: Waste
Waste Toner
Toner Feed
Feed Motor
Motor error
error
•• E019-0003:
E019-0003: Buffer
Buffer Motor
Motor error
■ Image Stabilization
■Image Stabilization Control
Control
●
• Overview
Overview of
of Image
Image Stabilization
Stabilization Control
Control
The quality
The quality of
of the
the printed
printed image
image is
is affected
affected by
by changes
changes inin the
the installation
installation environment
environment and
and deterioration
deterioration of
of the image formation
the image formation
parts due
parts to long-term
due to long-term operation.
operation.
This machine
performs image
image stabilization
stabilization control
control to
to achieve stable printing
achieve stable printing over
over a long period
a long period of
of time.
time.
Image Stabilization
Image Stabilization Control
Control
Control
Control Description
Description
Potential control the charging
Determines the charging condition, laser power and developing bias
ATR control
ATR control Determines the toner supply amount
PASCAL control
D-max PASCAL control image density
Determines the image density correction
correction voltage
PASCAL control
PASCAL control and gradation
Determines the laser power and gradation adjustment table
Real-time multiple
Real-time multiple tone control
control Determines the gradation adjustment table (partially laser power)
ATVC control
ATVC control Determines the transfer bias
119
119
2. Technical
Explanation
Laser Scanner Unit
\ //
Potential Sensor
II _ v
— Developing Toner
Density Sensor
Drum Patch Sensor
DC Controller
Contorl
D-max PASCAL Contort ATR Control Potential
Control
Real Time Multiple Tone Control Drum Patch Sensor

(ITB Upper Patch Sensor:Y/M/C) (Bk Only)
Main Controller
gamma-LUT
gamma-LUT
Color Sensor PASCAL Contorl
** D-max
D-max PASCAL
PASCAL control
control is
is performed
performed as
as one
one step
step of
of PASCAL
PASCAL control.
control.

ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream) (Upstream)
Constant Current Control ATVC Control
●
• Image Stabilization Control Timing
Execution items
Execution items for
for image
image stabilization
stabilization control
control differ
differ according to the
according to the machine's
machine's environment,
environment, condition
condition of
of image
image formation
formation parts,
parts,
etc.
etc.
120
2. Technical
Explanation
Timing Time Type of control

Conditions for
Conditions for re-
re- Cleaning Poten- D-max
Cleaning Poten- D-max Grada- Real- Image Primary Patch ATR
execution
execution quired of the tial PASCA- tion PAS- time
time mul- position Transfer
mul- position Transfer Sensor
Sensor (patch
(patch
(sec.) Primary Con- LAL CAL
CAL tiple tone
tiple correc-
tone correc- ATVC
ATVC Adjust-
Adjust- forma-
forma-
Charging trol control
control tion
tion ment
ment tion)
tion)
Wire/Pre-
Transfer
Charging
Wire
Warm-up rotation
Warm-up rotation auto
auto adjustment
adjustment (at
(at power-on)
power-on)
The temperature
The temperature Approx. Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes*2
Yes*2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
of the Fixing Roller 160
160
is
is 50
50 deg
deg CC or
or low-
low-
er.
er.
At recovery
At recovery from
from sleep
sleep mode
mode
15
15 Yes
Yes *3
*3 Yes
Yes
Paper interval
Paper interval auto
auto adjustment
adjustment (during
(during a
a job)
job)
At every
At every specified
specified ----
---- Yes*1
Yes*1 Yes
Yes
paper
paper interval
interval
At job interruption Approx. Yes
every 6,500
every 6,500 120
sheets
sheets (5,200
(5,200 (Approx.
sheets)*4
sheets)*4 140)*4
140)4
Last rotation
Last rotation auto
auto adjustment
adjustment (at
(at the time of
the time of completion
completion of
of a
a job)
job)
At last rotation Approx. Yes Yes
when
when 5,500
5,500 20
20
sheets
sheets (4,400
(4,400
sheets)*4
sheets)*4 have
have
been
been processed
processed
Full adjustment
Ful adjustment
At auto
At auto gradation
gradation Approx. Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes*2
Yes*2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
adjustment
adjustment 180
180
o: Implemented
o: Implemented
In real-time
In real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone control,
control, the
the conditions
conditions for
for the
the patches
patches to
to use
use change
change depending
depending when
when the
the control
control starts
starts and
and the
the
execution conditions.
execution conditions.
Yes*1: Up
Yes*1: Up to to 5-gradation
5-gradation patches
patches are
are generated
generated onon 3 3 types
types of
of screen
screen between
between sheets.
sheets.
Yes*2: Multiple
Yes*2: Multiple tonetone control
control is
is executed
executed by
by generating
generating 10-gradation
10-gradation patches
patches on
on 3
3 types
types of
of screen.
screen.
Yes*3: Executed
Yes*3: Executed as as appropriate
appropriate according
according to
to the
the time
time elapsed
elapsed from
from the
the previous
previous job
job to
to the
the current
current job.
job.
*4: The
*4: The figure
figure inin parentheses
parentheses indicates
indicates the
the case
case ofof iPR
iPR C8000VP.
C8000VP.
The control
The control items
items executed
executed inin each
each sequence
sequence areare shown
shown below
below using
using iPR
iPR C10000VP
C10000VP asas an
an example.
example.
Power On Print Start

V
PRINT
WUPR STBY STBY .....
Page 1 Page 2 ........ Page 28 ........ Page 56 ........ Page 90
CNTR
A
approx. 160 (sec.)
• ))
1 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning

: ATR Control (Patch Sensor)
2 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
PotentialControl
3 Potential Control
4 Primary Transfer ATVC Control
ImagePosition
5 Image PositionCorrection
CorrectionControl
Control(Color
Displacement)
6 Real Time Multiple Tone Control
Sequence Control description

CNTR At warm-up
At warm-up rotation
rotation after
after the
the first
first power-on
power-on
121
2. Technical
Explanation
Print Start (7,500

(7,500 Print
Print :: iPR C10000VP)
PRINT
...... STBY INTR
Page 1 ........ Page 2468 ........ Page 2500 ........ Page 4500 ........
approx. 10 - approx. 25 (sec.)
1 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control *1

3 Image Position Correction Control (Color Displacement) *1
PRINT
LSTR
........ Page 6500 STOP1 Page 6501 ........ Page 6972 ........ Page 7500
•
approx. 120 (sec.) approx. 20 (sec.)
1 Feed Screw
Toner Feed Screw Rotation
Rotation *2 1 Toner Feed Screw Cleaning
2 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
4 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
5 Fixing Refresh Roller
♦ : ATR Control (Patch Sensor) 6 Patch Potential Control
Sequence
Sequence Control description
Control description
A._
INTR At initial
At initial rotation
rotation
STOP1
STOP1 At job
At job interruption,
interruption, every
every 6,500
6,500 sheets
sheets for
for iPR
iPR C10000VP,
C10000VP, and
and every
every 5,200
5,200 sheets
sheets for
for iPR
iPR C8000VP
C8000VP
LSTR At last
At last rotation
rotation after
after 5,500
5,500 sheets
sheets (iPR
(iPR C10000VP)
C10000VP) or
or 4,400
4,400 sheets
sheets (iPR
(iPR C8000VP)
C8000VP) have
have been
been processed
processed
*1: Executed
*1: Executed as
as appropriate
appropriate according
according to
to the
the time
time elapsed
elapsed from
from the
the previous
previous job
job to
to the
the current
current job.
job.
*2: The
*2: The screw
screw is
is rotated
rotated in
in the
the reverse
reverse direction
direction to
to increase
increase the
the effect
effect of
of ejecting
ejecting waste
waste toner
toner in
in the
the ITB Cleaning Unit.
ITB Cleaning Unit.
●
• Potential Control
Even when
Even when thethe same
same voltage
voltage is
is applied,
applied, the
the surface
surface potential
potential ofof the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum will
will vary
vary with
with deterioration
deterioration of
of drum
drum
sensitivity, environmental variations, and electrostatic latent image factors.
sensitivity, environmental variations, and electrostatic latent image factors.
This machine
This machine usesuses potential
potential control
control to
to achieve
achieve stable
stable print
print quality.
quality.
Potential Control is performed by charging the surface
Potential Control is performed by charging the surface of of the
the Photosensitive Drum to
Photosensitive Drum to a
a uniform
uniform voltage,
voltage, and
and then
then measuring
measuring the
the
potential
potential while
while varying
varying laser
laser power
power and
and graphing
graphing the
the relationship.
relationship.
Based on
Based on this
this graph,
graph, laser
laser power
power is
is de3termined
de3termined according
according toto the
the voltage
voltage required
required to
to obtain
obtain the
the specified
specified contrast.
contrast.
<Execution timing>
•• At
At time
time of
of warm-up
warm-up rotation
rotation at
at first
first power-on
power-on (when
(when turning OFF and
turning OFF and then ON at
then ON at less
less than
than 50
50 deg
deg C
C fixing
fixing temperature)
temperature)
•• When
When executing
executing the
the service
service mode
mode after
after drum
drum replacement
replacement (forcible
(forcible warm-up
warm-up rotation,
rotation, drum
drum replacement
replacement mode,
mode, etc.)
etc.)
•• At
At auto
auto gradation
gradation adjustment
adjustment
NOTE:
Potential control
Potential control can
can also
also be
be performed
performed at
at any
any time
time with
with the
the following
following service
service mode.
mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC
At this
At this time,
time, ATR
ATR control
control (patch
(patch background
background detection)
detection) and
and ATVC
ATVC control
control are
are also
also performed.
performed.
122
2. Technical
Explanation
<Control
description>
1. Setting the
1. Setting the drum
drum surface
surface reference
reference potential
potential
First, set
First, set the
the dark
dark area
area potential
potential Vd,
Vd, which
which becomes
becomes the the reference
reference for for voltage
voltage control.
control.
Take the
Take the target
target value
value of
of dark
dark area
area potential
potential under
under a a given
given temperature
temperature and and humidity
humidity asas Vd_target.
Vd_target.
Take the
Take the Potential
Potential Sensor
Sensor measurement
measurement resulting
resulting when
when Vgrid
Vgrid = = Vd_target
Vd_target -- 8080 (where
(where VV isis the
the offset
offset value)
value) isis applied
applied to
to the
the
Primary Charging
Primary Charging Grid
Grid Plate
Plate as
as Vd_rgh.
Vd_rgh.
Calculate the
Calculate the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Grid
Grid Plate
Plate correction
correction voltage
voltage as
as the
the difference
difference between
between thethe measurement
measurement result
result and
and target
target
value (Vd_rgh
value (Vd_rgh -- V_target).
V_target).
The target
The target value
value Vd_target
Vd_target is
is achieved
achieved through
through correction
correction of of Vgrid
Vgrid byby application
application of
of the
the calculated
calculated correction
correction voltage
voltage to
to the
the
Primary Charging
Primary Charging Grid
Grid Plate.
Plate.
Note that
Note that measured
measured drum
drum surface
surface potential
potential Vd_rgh
Vd_rgh declines
declines asas the
the sensitivity
sensitivity of
of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive DrumDrum deteriorates.
deteriorates.
Also note
Also note that
that the
the calculated
calculated correction
correction voltage
voltage for
for the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Grid Grid Plate
Plate will
will vary
vary according
according toto temperature
temperature and and
humidity.
humidity.
2. Measurement
2. Measurement of of Drum
Drum surface
surface potential
potential
Next is
Next is measurement
measurement of of the
the potential
potential VL,
VL, which
which isis produced
produced in in bright
bright areas
areas by
by laser
laser beam
beam exposure.
exposure.
The potential
The potential of of the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum's
Drum's surface
surface isis measured
measured by by Potential
Potential Sensor
Sensor while
while varying
varying the
the laser
laser power
power through
through
14
14 levels,
levels, andand a a graph
graph of
of the
the results
results is
is prepared
prepared as as shown
shown in in the
the figure
figure below.
below.
Potential (V)
V70 — .0*
V80 — , .0.'
Vgo — 0* '
,
VA — V
VB0 — d'
v. - 0
VE0 —
VFO 0/
I I I I I I I I I
F0H
FOH E0H
EOH D0H
DOH C0H
COHB0H
BOHA0H
AOH90H
90H 80H 70H
80H 70H Laser power
3. Determination
3. Determination of of laser
laser power
power
Finally, required
Finally, required laser
laser power
power isis calculated
calculated from
from the
the bright
bright area
area potential
potential target
target value
value VL_target
VL_target forfor a
a given
given temperature
temperature and
and
humidity.
humidity.
VL_target is
VL_target is obtained
obtained from
from the
the following
following expression.
expression.
VL_target =
VL_target = Vd_target
Vd_target -- (Vback
(Vback + + Vcont)
Vcont)
Where (Vback
Where (Vback + + Vcont)
Vcont) isis the
the voltage
voltage for
for obtaining
obtaining needed
needed contrast,
contrast, and
and varies
varies according
according to to the
the environmental
environmental humidity
humidity and
and
temperature.
temperature.
Vback is
Vback is the
the voltage
voltage for
for removing
removing fogging
fogging when
when copying,
copying, and
and Vcont
Vcont is
is the
the voltage
voltage for
for correcting
correcting image
image density.
density.
The value
The value obtained
obtained forfor VL_target
VL_target is is applied
applied to
to the
the above
above graph,
graph, and
and laser
laser power
power isis determined
determined from
from the
the corresponding
corresponding point.
point.
Potential (V)
/0-
VL_target
JD'
a
,0
0'
I V
F0H E0H
FOH EOH D0H
DOH C0H
COHB0H
BOHA0H
AOH90H
90H 80H 70H
80H 70H •• Laser power
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
•• E060-0131: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire cleaning
cleaning error
error (Y)
(Y)
•• E060-0231: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire cleaning
cleaning error
error (M)
(M)
•• E060-0331: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire cleaning
cleaning error
error (C)
(C)
•• E060-0431: Primary
Charging Wire
Wire cleaning
cleaning error
error (K)
(K)
•• E061-0111: Potential
E061-0111: Potential control
control grid
grid bias
bias lower
lower limit
limit error
error (Y)
(Y) *1
*1
control grid
grid bias
bias lower
lower limit
limit error
error (M)
(M) *1
*1
control grid
grid bias
bias lower
lower limit
limit error
error (C)
(C) *1
*1
control grid
grid bias
bias lower
lower limit
limit error
error (K)
(K) *1
*1
control grid
grid bias
bias upper
upper limit
limit error
error (Y)
(Y) *2
*2
123
2. Technical
Explanation
•• E061-0212:
E061-0212: Potential
Potential control
control grid
grid bias
bias upper
upper limit
limit error
error (M)
(M) *2
*2
•• E061-0312:
Potential control
control grid
grid bias
bias upper
upper limit
limit error
error (C)
(C) *2
*2
•• E061-0412:
Potential control
control grid
grid bias
bias upper
upper limit
limit error
error (K)
(K) *2
*2
•• E061-0181:
E061-0181: Insufficient
Insufficient laser
laser power
power error
error (Y)
(Y) *3
*3
•• E061-0281:
Insufficient laser
laser power
power error
error (M)
(M) *3*3
•• E061-0381:
Insufficient laser
laser power
power error
error (C)
(C) *3
*3
•• E061-0481:
Insufficient laser
laser power
power error
error (K)
(K) *3
*3
•• E061-0182:
E061-0182: Laser
Laser power
power adjustment
adjustment error
error (Y)
(Y) *4*4
•• E061-0282:
E061-0282: Laser
Laser power
power adjustment
adjustment error
error (M)
(M) *4*4
•• E061-0382:
E061-0382: Laser
Laser power
power adjustment
adjustment error
error (C)
(C) *4
*4
•• E061-0482:
E061-0482: Laser
Laser power
power adjustment
adjustment error
error (K)
(K) *4*4
•• E061-0191:
E061-0191: Patch
Patch potential
potential control
control error
error (Y)
(Y) *5
*5
•• E061-0291:
E061-0291: Patch
Patch potential
potential control
control error
error (M)
(M) *5
*5
•• E061-0391:
E061-0391: Patch
Patch potential
potential control
control error
error (C)
(C) *5
*5
•• E061-0491:
E061-0491: Patch
Patch potential
potential control
control error
error (K)
(K) *5
*5
•• E061-0192:
E061-0192: Upper
Upper limit
limit error
error in
in the
the patch
patch image
image laser
laser power
power determined
determined byby the
the patch
patch potential
potential control
control (Y)
(Y) *6
*6
•• E061-0292:
E061-0292: Upper
Upper limit
limit error
error in
in the
the patch
patch image
image laser
laser power
power determined
determined byby the
the patch
patch potential
potential control
control (M)
(M) *6
*6
•• E061-0392:
E061-0392: Upper
Upper limit
limit error
error in
in the
the patch
patch image
image laser
laser power
power determined
determined byby the
the patch
patch potential
potential control
control (C)
(C) *6
*6
•• E061-0492:
E061-0492: Upper
Upper limit
limit error
error in
in the
the patch
patch image
image laser
laser power
power determined
determined byby the
the patch
patch potential
potential control
control (K)
(K) *6
*6
*1: When
*1: When Vgrid
Vgrid >1=
>/= -400
-400 VV
*2: When
*2: When Vgrid
Vgrid <1=
</= -1200
-1200 V V
*3: When
*3: When the
the difference
difference between
between Vd Vd and
and VI
Vl is
is less
less than
than 200
200 V V with
with the
the Potential
Potential Control
Control Laser
Laser at
at maximum
maximum output
output
*4: When
*4: When the
the difference
difference between
between VI VI at
at maximum
maximum and and minimum
minimum output
output of
of the
the Potential
Potential Control
Control Laser
Laser is
is less
less than
than 100
100 V
V
*5: When
*5: When the
the Patch
Patch Image
Image Laser
Laser power
power <1=
</= 30(H)
30(H)
*6: When
*6: When the
the Patch
Patch Image
Image Laser
Laserpower
power>1=>/= DO(H)
D0(H)
● ATR Control
• ATR Control
This machine
performs ATR
ATR control
control to
to supply
supply the
the appropriate
appropriate amount
amount of
of toner
toner to
to the
the Developing
Assembly.
ATR control
ATR control involves
involves the
the following
following three
three processes.
processes.
•• Calculate
Calculate the
the toner
toner supply
supply amount
amount from
from the
the video
video count
count value.
value.
•• Measure
Measure thethe patch
patch density
density with
with the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor and
and correct
correct the
the toner
toner supply
supply amount.
amount.
•• Measure
Measure thethe toner
toner density
density in
in the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly with
with the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Toner
Toner Density
Density Sensor
Sensor and
and correct
correct the
the
toner supply
toner supply amount.
amount.
M137/M131/
M119/M125
M
O
TS129/TS124/
TS126/TS125
PS120/PS117/
PS111/PS114
Process Unit Driver PCB

㸦Y/M/C/Bk㸧(UN161/UN162/UN613/UN164)
(Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN613/UN164)
124
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Parts name
Parts name
M137/M131/M119/M125 Sub
Sub Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
TS129/TS124/TS126/TS125 Developing Assembly
Assembly Toner
Toner Density
Density Sensor
Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114 Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sensor
Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Developing
Main Controller DC
DC Controller
Controller Assembly Drum
Sub Hopper Motor
Ipoi
Toner M
Ipoi Toner
Video Supply
Count
PG
PS
Measured Density Drum
Patch Sensor
Target Density
T/D Ratio
TS
Developing Toner
Density Sensor
<Execution timing>
•• Control
Control of
of the
the supply
supply amount
amount by
by the
the video
video count:
count: When
When printing,
printing, executed
executed for
for every
every sheet
sheet
•• Correction
Correction by
by the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor:
Sensor: When
When printing,
printing, executed
executed every
every 28
28 sheets
sheets of
of small
small size
size (14
(14 sheets
sheets of
of large
large size)
size)
•• Correction
Correction by
by the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Toner
Toner Density
Density Sensor:
Sensor: When printing, executed
When printing, executed for
for every
every sheet
sheet
<Control
description>
1. Control of
1. Control of the supply amount
the supply by the
amount by the video
video count:
count:
The amount
The amount ofof toner
toner supplied
supplied is
is obtained
obtained from
from aa graph
graph showing
showing the
the relationship
relationship between
between the
the video
video count
count value
value and
and the
the toner
toner
supply amount.
supply amount.
This graph
This graph is
is obtained
obtained by
by linear
linear interpolation
interpolation of
of five
five points
points at
at the
the boundary
boundary conditions.
conditions.
The Sub
The Sub Hopper
Hopper Motor
Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M137/M131/M119/M125)rotates
(Y/M/C/Bk) (M137/M131/M119/M125) rotatesaccording
accordingtotothe
theobtained
obtainedtoner
toner supply
supply amount.
amount.
Toner Supply Quantity (mg)
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0 200
200 400
400 600
600 800 1000
800 1200
1000 12001400
14001600
1600 1800
1800
Video Count (dec)

2. Correction
2. Correction by by the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller forms
forms a patch image
a patch on the
image on the Photosensitive
Photosensitive DrumDrum ofof each
each color
color(Y,
(Y, M,
M, C, Bk).
C, Bk).
The patch
The patch image
image isis read
read by
by the
theDrum
DrumPatch
PatchSensor
Sensor(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)(PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114),
(PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114), and andthe
the DC
DCController
Controller is
is
notified of
notified of the
the measured density.
measured density.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller compares
compares the
the measured
measuredresult
result with
with the
the target
target density
density and
and corrects
corrects the
the toner
toner supply
supply amount.
amount.
125
125
2. Technical
Explanation
3. Correction
3. Correction by
by the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly Toner
Toner Density
Density Sensor
Sensor
The Developing
Assembly Toner
Toner Density
Density Sensor
Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) (TS129/TS124/TS126/TS125)
(TS129/TS124/TS126/TS125) detectsdetects the
the TD
TD ratio
ratio of
of toner
toner in
in
the Developing Assembly.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller suppresses
suppresses excessive
excessive correction
correction by
by the
the Drum
Drum Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor depending
depending onon the
the difference
difference between
between thethe
detection
detection result
result and
and the
the target
target density
density 9%.
9%.
In the
In the [A]
[A] part
part in
in the
the following
following figure,
figure, despite
despite the
the high
high TD
TD ratio,
ratio, a
a low
low patch
patch density
density is
is detected
detected and
and excessive
excessive toner
toner supply
supply
is attempted.
is attempted.
In the [B] part,
part, despite
despite the
the low
low TD
TD ratio,
ratio, high
high patch
patch density
density is
is detected
detected and
and toner
toner supply
supply stoppage
stoppage is
is attempted.
attempted.
In these
In these cases,
cases, correction
correction processing
processing isis stopped
stopped and
and only
only supply
supply control
control by
by video
video count
count is
is executed.
executed.
T/D Ratio(%)
ATR
1/4TR Error
I
A 13
Supply Stop
12
[A]
11
Normal Supply
8
Light Dark
6
[B]
5
Forcible Supply
4
Forcible Max Supply
3
Error
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
When the
When the drum
drum background
background measurement
measurement value
value (service
(service mode:
mode: P-B-P-Y/M/C/K*1)
P-B-P-Y/M/C/K*1) is is less
less than
than 150
150
•• E029-0110: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (Y)
•• E029-0210: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (M)
•• E029-0310: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (C)
•• E029-0410:Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (K)
*1: Service
*1: Service mode
mode for
for the
the drum
drum background
background measurement
measurement valuevalue
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-M
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-C
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-K
●
• PASCAL control
PASCAL control
PASCAL control (image
(image characteristic
characteristic correction
correction control)
control) is
is performed
performed to
to obtain
obtain ideal
ideal image
image characteristics.
characteristics.
Printer PASCAL is performed as PASCAL control.
NOTE:
PASCAL control is performed by executing "Auto Gradation Adjustment" in the Settings/Registration.
Basically, correction is carried out using the Color Sensor Unit, regardless of whether a Reader Unit is attached.
<Control
description>
Patch images
Patch images are
are read
read by
by the
the four
four Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903)
(UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) on on the
the Host
Host Machine's
Machine's Reverse/Outer
Reverse/Outer
Delivery Unit, and image characteristics are corrected based on the results.
Delivery Unit, and image characteristics are corrected based on the results.
1. D-max PASCAL
1. D-max PASCAL control:
control: One
One sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper is
is output
output that
that contains
contains 10
10 patch
patch patterns
patterns for
for each
each color.
color.
2. Gradation PASCAL control: Four sheets of paper are output that contain 22 patch patterns for
2. Gradation PASCAL control: Four sheets of paper are output that contain 22 patch patterns for each
each color.
color.
3. Based
3. Based on
on the
the results,
results, the
the machine
machine rebuilds
rebuilds the
the image
image characteristic
characteristic table.
table.
D-max
D -max PASCAL Control
The image
The image density
density varies
varies depending
depending on
on factors
factors such
such as
as environmental
environmental changes,
changes, photosensitive
photosensitive drum
drum sensitivity
sensitivity degradation
degradation and
and
toner deterioration.
toner deterioration.
This machine
performs D-max
D-max PASCAL
PASCAL control
control (image
(image density
density correction
correction control)
control) to
to achieve
achieve stable
stable printing.
printing.
D-max PASCAL control forms a halftone image on the Photosensitive Drum while changing the laser beam emission time, and
the potential
the potential at
at each
each emission
emission is
is measured.
measured.
126
2. Technical
Explanation
Next, the
Next, the density
density and
and potential
potential are
are coordinated
coordinated by
by scanning
scanning the
the halftone
halftone image
image on
on the
the test
test print
print with
with the
the color
color sensors,
sensors, and
and the
the
voltage Vcont
voltage Vcont for
for correcting
correcting the
the image
image density
density is
is determined.
determined.
Main Controller DC Controller Drum
PG
41,1 UN
6
Potential Sensor Paper
PG
I I-
UN
Color Sensor
Vcont
Potential Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
Potential Measurement PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk) (UN129/UN130/UN131/UN132)
At At
Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904)
T
Color Sensor Unit 1 Color Sensor Unit 2 Color Sensor Unit 3 Color Sensor Unit 4
(Bk) (UN900) (Y) (UN901) (M) (UN902) (C) (UN903)
<Execution timing>
at PASCAL
at PASCAL control
control (the
(the first
first sheet
sheet of
of test
test print).
print).
127
2. Technical
Explanation
<Control
description>
1. Measurement of
1. Measurement of the
the bright
bright area
area potential
potential
A solid
A solid image
image (test
(test print)
print) generated
generated byby the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller is
is formed
formed onon the
the Photosensitive
Drum.
At this
At this time,
time, while
while changing
changing the
the laser
laser intensity
intensity at
at each
each pixel
pixel in
in 10
10 levels,
levels, the
the potential
potential in
in the
the bright
bright area
area is
is measured
measured by by the
the
Potential Sensor.
Potential Sensor.
Based on
Based on the
the measurement
measurement results,
results, the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller creates
creates a a graph
graph of
of the
the relationship
between the
the laser
laser light
light intensity
intensity
and the
and the bright
bright area
area potential.
potential.
Potential (V)
(W V9 —
—
vs — 13,
V4 -
- 'OS
Vs —
V8 —
v9 — 00
V —
V8A—
vp 'o
-o.o..
47 o
111111111 Laser-irradiating
0 1 2
2 a
3 4 5Is 6 789ABCDEF time
7 8 9 A B C D E time
F length
length
2. Measurement
2. Measurement of of the
the density
density value
value
The solid
The solid image
image (test
(test print)
print) generated
generated by by the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller is
is printed.
printed.
Just
Just like
like the
the foregoing
foregoing step,
step,halftone
halftoneimages
imagesareareoutput
outputwhile
whilechanging
changingthe thelaser
laserintensity
intensityatat
each
eachpixel*1.
pixel.
These halftone
These halftone images
images are
are scanned
scanned byby the
the Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units*2,
Units*2, andand the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller is
is notified
notified of
of the
the density
density values.
values.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller creates
creates a a graph
graph of
of the
the relationship
between thethe laser
laser light
light intensity
intensity and
and the
the measured
measured density.
density.
Density
Dens'ty
1.8
1.8 —
1.6
1.6 — .0-04>°
1.4
1.4 —
,o-
1.2
1.2 —
1.0
1.0 —
0.8
0.8 —
0.6
0.6 — 0
0.4
0.4 — O
0.2
0.2 —
0.0
0.0 — o- o
I I
o0 11234
2 3 4 55 66 7 8
7 8 9 A B C D E
9ABCD E F Laser-irradiating
F Laser-irradiating
time length
time length
*1. With
*1. With printer
printer PASCAL
PASCAL control,
control, only
only the
the major
major 11
11 levels
levels are
are output
output because
because the
the patch
patch is
is too
too large
large to
to form
form all
all levels
levels on
on a
a
sheet.
sheet.
*2. In
*2. In the
the case
case of
of printer
printer PASCAL
PASCAL control,
control, the
the image
image is
is scanned
scanned by
by the
the Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units 11 to
to 4
4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/
(UN900/UN901/UN902/
UN903) of
UN903) of the
the Reverse/Outer
Reverse/Outer Delivery
Delivery Unit.
Unit.
128
128
2. Technical
Explanation
3. Determination
3. Determination of
of the
the image
image density
density correction
correction voltage
voltage (Vcont)
(Vcont)
The above
The above two
two graphs
graphs areare combined,
combined, and
and the
the bright
bright area
area potential
potential VL_target
VL_target required
required to
to obtain
obtain the
the specific
specific density
density (1.6)
(1.6) is
is
obtained.
obtained.
Potential (V)
Vd—
Vi_terget ,
0.0 Laser-irradiating
0.2
time length
time length
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Density
From this
From this VL_target,
VL_target, the
the image
image density
density correction
correction voltage
voltage Vcont
Vcont is
is calculated.
calculated.
Vcont =
Vcont = Vd
Vd -- VL_target
VL_target -- Vback
Vback
Where Vd is the dark area potential, and Vback is the voltage for removing fogging when copying.
In the
In the potential
potential control,
control, based
based on
on the
the Vcont
Vcont obtained
obtained in
in D-max
D-max PASCAL
PASCAL control,
control, the
the laser
laser power
power required
required to
to obtain
obtain the
the
specified bright
specified bright area
area potential
potential is
is determined.
determined.
Gradation PASCAL
Gradation PASCAL
Gradation PASCAL corrects
Gradation PASCAL corrects image
image characteristics
characteristics using
using the
the 44 Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units at
at the
the Reverse/Outer
Delivery Unit,
Unit, and
and control
control
can be
can be provided
provided from
from only
only the
the host
host machine
machine without
without the
the reader.
reader.
A 22-gradation
A 22-gradation patch
patch image
image for
for each
each color
color (C,
(C, Y,
Y, M
M and
and Bk)
Bk) isis created
created by
by the
the Main
Main Controller,
Controller, generating
generating four
four sheets.
sheets.
The patch
The patch images
images are
are scanned
scanned by by Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units 1
1 to
to 4
4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903)
(UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) when when each
each sheet
sheet reaches
reaches the
the
Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit,
Unit, and
and the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller is
is notified
notified of
of the
the density
density values.
values.
From these
From these density
density values,
values, the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller creates
creates a a gradation
gradation characteristic
characteristic table
table to
to obtain
obtain ideal
ideal image
image characteristics.
characteristics.
129
2. Technical
Explanation
Activation
Main Controller
Output Patch Image
• Printer
Feed To Reversing/External Delivery Unit
Color Sensor
Scan Patch Image
y Color Sensor
Output Luminance Value

Actual Image
D-Max Correction C
Characteristic
Charade ' tic
100
1.7
(Color Sensor)
Density Value
(Color Sensor)
Output Luminance Value
o cn 1.6
1.6 o°,
cL4
<
ois 1.4 Cr
5
8g
—3.
250
250 290
290 300
300 Ideal Image
Voltage
Voltage Vcont Characteristic
13)
Main Controller CD
Create Image Characteristic Table 0 100

(M,Y,C,Bk) Data Output (Main Controller)
Auto Gradation
Auto Gradation Adjustment
Adjustment
PASCAL
PG
First Sheet
(D-Max)
UN
Potential Sensor Paper
PG
P
UN
Color Sensor
Vcont
Second
To PG
Fifth Sheet UN
LUT Color Sensor
Real Time
PG
Multiple Tone - 10 blocks
Control Reference Data
PS - 3 screen x 4 color
Target Density Drum Patch Sensor
(Bk Only)
PG
- 10 block
PS - 3 screen x 4 color
Target Density ITB Patch Sensor
(Y/M/C)
ITB
130
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Real-time Multiple Tone Control
This machine
This machine carries
carries out
out real-time
real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone control
control to
to realize
realize ideal
ideal gradation
gradation characteristics.
characteristics.
Real-time multi-gradation control uses
Real-time multi-gradation control uses ITB Patch Sensors to read patch images
Patch Sensors to read patch images formed
formed onon the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum or
or between
between
images on the Photosensitive Drum, and the gradation characteristics are adjusted to maintain uniform density
images on the Photosensitive Drum, and the gradation characteristics are adjusted to maintain uniform density variation. variation.
The two
The two types
types of
of this
this control
control operate
operate according
according to to the
the situation
situation determined
determined by by machine
machine location.
location.
•• Real-time
Real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone correction
correction (full
(full correction)
correction) "Real-time
“Real-time Multiple
Multiple Tone
Tone Correction
Correction (Full
(Full Adjustment)"
Adjustment)” on
on page
page 132
132
•• Real-time
Real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone correction
correction (paper
(paper interval
interval correction)
correction) "Real-time
“Real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone correction
correction (paper
(paper interval
interval correction)"
correction)”
on page
on page 132
132
PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Code Parts name

PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114 Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sensor
Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
121
PG
- 10 blocks
- 3 screen x 4 color
Convert PS
Measured Density Drum Patch Sensor
(Bk Only)
Target Density
LUT
131
1:
2. Technical
Explanation
Main Controller DC Controller ITB
121
PG
- 1 block
- 3 screen x 4 color
-441 Convert .441 PS
Measured Density ITB Patch Sensor
(Y/M/C)
Target Density
I
LUT
Real-time Multiple
Real-time Multiple Tone
Tone Correction
Correction (Full
(Full Adjustment)
Adjustment)
This adjustment
This adjustment is is performed
performed for
for gradation
gradation adjustment.
adjustment.
At power-on,
At power-on, after
after auto
auto gradation
gradation adjustment,
adjustment, or
or after
after multiple
multiple tone
tone correction,
correction, a real-time multiple
a real-time multiple tone
tone patch
patch is
is printed,
printed, and
and the
the
controller is
controller is updated
updated based on the
based on the scanned
scanned density
density detection
detection result.
result.
<Execution timing>
•• At
At warm-up
warm-up rotation
rotation after
after the
the first
first power-on
power-on
•• After
After execution
execution of
of full
full adjustment
adjustment of of auto
auto gradation
adjustment
•• After
After execution
execution of
of quick
quick adjustment
adjustment of of auto
auto gradation
adjustment
<Control
description>
A 10-gradation
A 10-gradation patch
patch image
image pattern
pattern isis formed
formed onon the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum for
foreach
each color
color(Y,
(Y, M,
M, C,
C, Bk)
Bk) or
or on
on the
the ITB.
ITB.
The patch
The patch image
image pattern
pattern isisscanned
scannedby bythe
theDrum
DrumPatch
PatchSensor
Sensor(Bk)
(Bk)(PS114)
(PS114)andandthe
theITB
ITBPatch
PatchSensors
Sensors(Y/M/C)
(Y/M/C)(PS902/PS903/
(PS902/PS903/
PS904),and
PS904), andthe
theDC
DCController
Controllerisis notified
notified ofof this
this data.
data.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller converts
converts itit to
to density
density values and notifies
values and notifies the
the Main Controller.
Main Controller.
Based on
Based on the
the amount
amount ofof change
change in in this
this density
density value,
value, the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller creates
creates aagradation
gradation characteristic
table for
for obtaining
obtaining
an ideal halftone
an ideal halftone image.
image.
<Patch
<Patch pattern>
pattern>
A YMC
A YMC patch
patch to
to be
be printed
printed on
on the
the ITB
ITB and
and aaBkBkpatch
patchtoto be
beprinted
printed on
on the
the drum
drum are
are printed
printed separately
separately to
to perform
perform sampling.
sampling.
For each color, a pattern of 30 patches is printed at 2-mm intervals, each approx. 16 mm in the horizontal scanning
For each color, a pattern of 30 patches is printed at 2-mm intervals, each approx. 16 mm in the horizontal scanning direction direction and
and
20 mm
approx. 20 mm inin the
the vertical
vertical scanning
scanning direction.
direction.
Real-time
Real multiple tone
-time multiple tone correction
correction (paper
(paper interval
interval correction)
correction)
Adjustment applied
Adjustment applied to
to paper
paper interval
interval gradation
gradation adjustment.
adjustment.
In between paper
In between paper sheets,
sheets, real-time
real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone patches
patches are
are printed,
printed, and
and the
the Controller
Controller is
is updated
updated based on the
based on the read
read density
density
detection result.
detection result.
<Execution timing>
•• Real-time
Real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone patches
patches are
are printed
printed in
in 20 out of
20 out of 28 paper intervals
28 paper intervals (large-size
(large-size conversion).
conversion).
** This
This does
does not
not affect
affect productivity
productivity because it is
because it is done by paper
done by paper interval
interval control.
control.
<Control
description>
The Main
The Main Controller
Controller sends
sends the
the screen
screen pattern
pattern to
to the DC Controller.
the DC Controller.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller creates
creates patch
patch image
imagepatterns
patternsbyby combining
combining the
the screen
screen pattern
pattern received
received with
with dither
dither images
images corresponding
corresponding to
to
the various
the various colors
colors (Y,
(Y, M, C, BK)
M, C, BK) and
and forms
forms color
color patches
patches in
in between
between images.
images.
The patch
The patch image
image pattern
pattern is
isscanned
scannedby bythe
theDrum
DrumPatch
PatchSensor
Sensor(Bk)
(Bk)(PS114)
(PS114)and
andthe
theITB
ITBPatch
PatchSensors
Sensors(Y/M/C)
(Y/M/C)(PS902/PS903/
(PS902/PS903/
PS904),and
PS904), andthe
theDC
DCController
Controllerisis notified
notified of
of this
this data.
data.
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller converts
converts this
this data
data into
into density
density values
values and
and sends
sends those
those values to the
values to Main Controller.
the Main Controller.
The Main
The Main Controller
Controller compares
compares the the density
density values
values with
with the
the real-time
real-time multiple
multiple tone
tone reference data and
reference data and corrects
corrects the
the gradation
gradation
<Patch
<Patch pattern>
pattern>
A YMC
A YMC patch
patch to
to be
be printed
printed on
on the
the ITB
ITB and
and aaBkBkpatch
patchto
to be
beprinted
printed on
on the
the drum
drum are
are printed
printed separately
separately toto perform
perform sampling.
sampling.
The size
The size of
of the
the patches
patches is
is about
about 16
16 mmmminin the
thehorizontal
horizontal scanning
scanning direction,
direction, and
and about
about 2020 mm
mm in
in the
the vertical
vertical scanning
scanning direction.
direction.
132
2. Technical
Explanation
Patterns of
Patterns of different
different densities
densities are
are printed
printed in
in each
each interval
interval between
between paperpaper sheets.
sheets.
•• Dark
Dark current
current correction
correction control
control
With the LED unitunit unlit,
unlit, the
the sensor
sensor values
values are
are read
read and
and retained
retained as as the
the dark
dark current
current values.
values.
When the
When the real-time
real-time multiple
multiple gradation
gradation patches
patches areare read,
read, the
the retained
retained dark
dark current
current values
values are
are subtracted, and the
subtracted, and the results
results are
are
used as
used as the
the patch
patch reading
reading results.
results.
•• Window
Window soiling
soiling correction
correction control
control
Because the
Because the registration
registration patch
patch detection
detection window
window deteriorates
deteriorates asas itit becomes
becomes soiled,
soiled, control
control is
is performed to correct
performed to correct the
the values
values
read by
read by the
the sensors
sensors according
according to to how
how much
much the
the window
window is is soiled.
soiled.
● ATVC Control
• ATVC Control
Voltage is
Voltage is applied
applied to
to the
the Primary
Primary Transfer Roller to
Transfer Roller to transfer
transfer the
the toner
toner from
from the
the Photosensitive Drum to
Photosensitive Drum to the
the ITB.
ITB. Voltage
Voltage is
is applied
applied
to the
to the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Inner
Inner Roller
Roller to
to transfer
transfer the
the toner
toner from
from the
the ITB
ITB to
to the
the paper.
paper.
Although the
Although the voltage
voltage applied
applied is
is the
the same,
same, thethe potential
potential on
on the
the roller
roller surface
surface varies
varies due
due to
to factors
factors such
such as
as moisture
moisture in
in the
the device
device
and individual variability in the rollers.
The machine
The machine performs
performs ATVC
ATVC control
control to
to determine
determine the
the optimal
optimal transfer
transfer bias.
bias.
Due to
Due to the
the ATVC
ATVC control,
control, the
the current
current flowing
flowing through
through the
the roller
roller when
when voltage
voltage is
is applied
applied is
is measured
measured and and aa graph
graph showing
showing thethe
relationship between the
the current
current and
and the
the applied
applied voltage
voltage is
is created.
created.
On the
On the basis
basis of
of the
the graph,
graph, the
the voltage
voltage to
to be
be applied
applied to
to obtain
obtain the
the target
target potential
potential on
on the
the roller
roller is
is determined.
determined.
Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer

High Voltage PCB (Y) High Voltage PCB(M) High Voltage PCB(C) High Voltage PCB(Bk)
(UN112) (UN113) (UN114) (UN115)
Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116)
<Execution timing>
•• At warm-up rotation after the first power-on
•• At warm-up rotation (door open or recovery from a jam)
•• At last rotation after 5,500 sheets (4,400 sheets for iPR C8000VP)
•• At initial rotation every hour (Primary Transfer Roller)
•• At initial rotation 5, 10, 20, 40 and 60 minutes after job start and every 60 minutes thereafter (Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller)
•• At job interruption every 6,500 sheets (5,200 sheets for iPR C8000VP)
On the
On the basis
basis of
of the
the measured
measured results,
results, linear
linear interpolation
interpolation is
is performed
performed twice,
twice, and
and aa graph
graph showing
showing the
the relationship
between the
the
applied voltage
applied voltage and
and the
the detected
detected current
current is
is created.
created.
On the
On the basis
basis of
of the
the graph,
graph, the
the target
target voltage
voltage Vtarget
Vtarget required
required to
to obtain
obtain the
the target
target current
current Itarget
!target is
is determined.
determined.
1. Determination of
1. Determination of the
the target
target current
current
The target
The target current
current !target
Itarget is
is determined
determined based
based on
on the
the temperature
temperature and
and humidity
humidity information
information obtained
obtained from
from the
the Environment
Environment
Sensors.
Sensors.
133
2. Technical
Explanation
2. Derivation
2. Derivation of of the
the approximate
approximate voltage
voltage value
value
Measure the
Measure the current
current la
Ia while
while applying
applying thethe voltage
voltage Va
Va which
which isis estimated
estimated to to be
be close
close toto the
the target
target voltage
voltage Vtarget.
Vtarget.
If la
If Ia is
is larger
larger than
than the
the target
target current
current [target,
Itarget, Vb
Vb =
= Va
Va -- AVr
∆Vr (offset
(offset value)
value) is is applied.
applied. If
If la
la is
is smaller,
smaller, Vb
Vb == Va
Va +
+ AVr
∆Vr is
is applied.
applied.
Then, the
Then, the current
current Ib at that
lb at that moment
moment is is measured.
measured.
By connecting
By connecting the the two
two points
points (Va,
(Va, Ia) and (Vb,
la) and (Vb, Ib)
Ib) with
with aa straight
straight line,
line, aa linear
linear graph
graph of of primary
primary approximation
approximation isis obtained.
obtained.
The voltage
The voltage value
value Vrough
Vrough for
for [target
Itarget is
is determined
determined onon the
the basis
basis of
of this
this graph.
graph.
Current (A)
A
Id •
Ic •
lb
Ib
la
Ia •
Voltage (V)
Va Vb Vc Vd
3. Derivation
3. Derivation ofof the
the target
target voltage
voltage value
value
Irough is measured while applying Vrough.
The current value !rough
Irough is larger than [target,
If !rough Itarget, Vc = Vrough - AVe
∆Ve (offset value) is applied. If Irough
!rough is smaller, Vc = Vrough + ∆Ve
AVe is applied.
Then, the
Then, the current
current Ic
Ic at
at that
that moment
moment isis measured.
measured.
By connecting the two points (Vrough, (rough) Irough) and (Vc, Ic) with a straight line, a linear graph of primary approximation is
obtained.
obtained.
The voltage
The voltage value
value Vtr
Vtr for
for [target
Itarget is
is determined
determined on
on the
the basis
basis of
of this
this graph.
graph.
Current (A)
Id •
Ic
!target
Itarget
lb
Ib
Ia
Voltage (V)
Va Vb
Vb Vtr
Vtr Vc
Vc Vd
In the
In the case
case of
of the
the secondary
secondary transfer
transfer bias,
bias, the
the paper
paper type
type is
is added
added to
to the
the correction
correction factors. A voltage
factors. A voltage with
with the
the paper
paper allotted
allotted
voltage Vp
voltage Vp added
added is
is applied
applied to
to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Roller.
Roller.
● Low-Duty Discharge
• Low-Duty Discharge Sequence
Sequence
To prevent
To prevent decrease
decrease in
in density
density caused
caused by
by charge
charge buildup
buildup on
on the
the toner
toner when
when low-duty
low-duty images
images are
are continuously
continuously output.
output.
<Execution timing>
At last rotation or paper interval after a specified number of sheets* have been printed in a job whose average image duty is lower
than the specified value (default: 2%)
* Varies depending on the average image duty.
When executing the discharge sequence for a certain color, if another color is close to the discharge execution condition, they
are executed at the same time.
<Control
description>
When the
When the foregoing
foregoing conditions
conditions are
are met,
met, after
after discharging
discharging toner
toner of
of the
the particular
particular color
color on
on the
the Photosensitive
Drum, the
the toner
toner is
is
recovered by
recovered by the
the Photosensitive
Photosensitive Drum
Drum Cleaner.
Cleaner.
<Related
<Related service
service modes>
modes>
Setting of
Setting of the
the image
image duty
duty integrated
integrated values
values for
for low-duty
low-duty toner
toner discharge
discharge
134
2. Technical
Explanation
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >
> IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV >
> DEVVTH-Y
DEVVTH-Y
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >
> IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV >
> DEVVTH-M
DEVVTH-M
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >
> IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV >
> DEVVTH-C
DEVVTH-C
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >
> IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV >
> DEVVTH-K
DEVVTH-K
●
• Image Position Correction Control
Image
Image Position
Position (Color
Displacement) Correction
Correction
Color displacement
Color displacement caused
caused by
by shift
shift of
of the
the irradiation
irradiation position
position of
of the
the Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Unit
Unit is
is corrected.
corrected.
Execution timing
•• At
At warm-up
warm-up rotation
rotation after
after the
the first
first power-on
power-on
•• At
At interruption
interruption during
during a
a job
job after
after aa specified
specified period
period of
of time
time has
has passed
passed (after
(after 5
5 min,
min, 17
17 min,
min, 47
47 min,
min, and
and 107
107 min,
min, and
and every
every
60 minutes
60 minutes thereafter),
thereafter), or
or at
at initial
initial rotation
rotation when
when aa job
job starts
starts (executed
(executed between
between sheets
sheets when
when aa specified
specified period
period of
of time
time has
has
passed
passed during
during aa job)
job)
Control
Control description
description
M pattern
M pattern isis used
used as
as the
the reference.
reference. The
The amount
amount of
of displacement
displacement of
of the
the patch
patch pattern
pattern of
of each
each color
color is
is detected,
detected, and
and the
the image
image
position
position is
is corrected.
corrected.
UN159
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
M155 (PS136)
Patch Image
Registration Patch Sensor (Center)

PS133 (PS135)
Shutter
Registration Patch Sensor (Front)

Steering Roller (PS134)
Type of
Type of control
control Control description
Control description Patch pattern
Patch pattern position
position used*
used* Execution timing
Execution timing
Correction of
Correction of the
the write
write The laser
The laser write
write start
start timing
timing is
is changed.
changed. Rear/Front/Center
Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
start position
start position in
in the
the hori-
hori-
zontal scanning
zontal scanning direction
direction
Correction of
Correction of the
the write
write The write
The write start
start timing
timing in
in the
the vertical
vertical scan-
scan- Rear/Front/Center
start position
start position in
in the
the verti- ning direction
verti- ning direction (TOP
(TOP signal)
signal) is
is changed.
changed.
cal scanning
cal scanning direction
direction
Image skew
Image skew correction
correction The digital
The digital registration
registration correction
correction value
value is
is Rear/Front/Center
changed.
changed.
135
135
2. Technical
Explanation
Type of
Type of control
control Control description
Control description Patch pattern
Patch pattern position
position used*
used* Execution timing
Correction of the magnifi- The overall number of pixels in the hori- Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
cation ratio in the horizon-
horizon- zontal scanning direction is increased or
tal scanning direction decreased.
* Patch pattern position used (Rear: PS134, Front: PS135, Center: PS136)
<Tilt> <Horizontal Scanning>
Reading Direction Of The Patch Reading Direction Of The Patch
M Y M
MMM Y
Y M
M M Y
Y M
MMM YY M
Displacement Amount
DisplacementAmount Displacement Amount Displacement
DisplacementAmount DisplacementAmount
Amount Displacement Amount
Displacement Amount Displacement Amount
<Vertical Scanning> <Magnification>
Reading Direction Of The Patch Reading Direction Of The Patch
M Y M M
[AmyY MM M
MYY M M
MMY Y M
Displacement Amount
DisplacementAmount Displacement Amount
Dispitmement
Displacement Amount
-4 Displacement Amount
Patch reading
Patch reading direction
direction
136
136
2. Technical
Explanation
miryrifrrrr
M
M Bk M
MBk MCC M
MYY M Bk M
MBk
M
C M YM
MCM YM
MISIMINIUSSIMINMISSUNIMINIMISIMISMINI
10 Sets
Reading Direction Of The Patch
● Overview of
• Overview of Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor
With this
With this machine,
machine, patch
patch images
images ofof each
each color
color are
are read
read regularly
regularly by
by the
the Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors toto perform
perform halftone
halftone correction.
correction.
There are
There are two
two types
types ofof Patch
Patch Sensors
Sensors (one
(one for
for color
color and
and one
one for
for Bk).
Bk).
As for
As for the
the Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor for
for color
color printing,
printing, 3
3 sensors
sensors areare arranged
arranged toto read
read patches
patches onon the
the ITB
ITB (PS902, PS903, and
(PS902, PS903, and PS904).
PS904).
Floating toner
Floating toner inin the
the vicinity
vicinity of
of the
the Intermediate
Transfer Belt
Belt contaminates
contaminates the the Patch
Patch Sensors.
Sensors. ThisThis can
can lower
lower the
the output
output ofof the
the
light-emitting part.
Because of
Because of this,
this, the
the Guide
Guide Plate
Plate has
has been
been provided
provided on
on the
the shutter
shutter surface,
surface, and
and the
the Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor emits
emits light
light and
and receives
receives reflecting
reflecting
light from
light from the
the Guide
Guide Plate
Plate on
on a
a regular
regular basis.
basis.
This makes
This makes itit possible
possible to to raise
raise the
the sensor
sensor output
output level
level to
to maintain
maintain itit at
at a
a constant
constant level
level when
when output
output ofof the
the LED
LED Assembly
Assembly is is
reduced by
reduced by contamination
contamination of of the
the Patch
Patch Sensor.
Sensor.
Patch images
Patch images cannot
cannot be be read
read with
with the
the Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor for
for B&W
B&W printing
printing because
because color
color of
of the
the ITB
ITB is
is black.
black. Therefore,
Therefore, patch
patch images
images
are formed
are formed on on the
the drum,
drum, and
and the
the sensor
sensor reads
reads the
the images.
images. Because
Because of of that,
that, the
the sensor
sensor for
for B&W
B&W printing
printing (PS114)
(PS114) isis located
located
opposite the
opposite the drum.
drum.
ITB Patch Sensor (C)

(PS904)
ITB Patch Sensor (Y)
(PS902)
Normal image area ITB Patch Sensor (M)
(PS903)
,--,
C Patch
Y Patch
IF
ITB
M Patch
137
Bk Drum
Drum Patch Sensor (Bk)

(PS114)
Bk Patch
<Shutter:Close> <Shutter:Open>
Guide Plate Sensor

Shutter
47i
Patch
ITB
Sampling of
Sampling of the
the drum
drum background
background (Bk)
(Bk)
To prevent
To prevent uneven
uneven reflection
reflection from
from the drum, the
the drum, the background
background for
for aa whole
whole circumference
circumference ofof the
the drum
drum is
is sampled
sampled by
by the
the Patch
Patch
Sensor without forming patches.
Sensor without forming patches.
When reading
When reading patch
patch images,
images, the
the sampling
sampling results
results of
of the
the drum
drum background
background are corrected.
are corrected.
<Related
<Related service
service modes>
modes>
•• Display of Bk patch target laser power
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > P-LPW-K
•• Display of Y target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (2/3
(2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-Y
•• Display of M target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (2/3
(2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-M
•• Display of C target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (2/3
(2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-C
•• Display of K target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (2/3
(2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-K
•• Display of Y target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (1/2
(1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-Y
•• Display of M target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (1/2
(1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-M
•• Display of C target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (1/2
(1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-C
•• Display of K target patch contrast
contrast potential
potential (1/2
(1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-K
•• Adjustment of Patch Sensor
Sensor light
light intensity
COPIER > FUNCTION >> MISC-PMISC-P >> PT-LPADJ
PT-LPADJ
•• Display of Patch Sensor LED
LED light
light intensity
intensity
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-LED-DA
•• Display of Bk base light intensity
intensity (P
(P wave) at ATRATR control
control
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-P
•• Display of Bk base light intensity
intensity (S
(S wave) at ATRATR control
control
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-S
138
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Automatic Color Tone Correction
Automatic color
Automatic color tone
tone correction
correction uses
uses thethe 44 Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units of
of the
the Reverse/Outer
Delivery Unit
Unit to
to correct
correct the
the color
color
characteristics (changes in color), and this control works only on host machines that do not have the Reader Unit.
characteristics (changes in color), and this control works only on host machines that do not have the Reader Unit. A
A multicolor
multicolor
one-screen patch image is created by the Main Controller, and a total of 3 sheets
one-screen patch image is created by the Main Controller, and a total of 3 sheets are output. are output.
The patch
The patch images
images are
are read
read byby the
the Color
Color Sensor
Sensor Units
Units 1
1 to
to 4
4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903)
(UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) when when each
each sheet
sheet arrives
arrives at
at the
the
Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit, and the Main Controller is notified of the chromaticity values. On the basis of these
Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit, and the Main Controller is notified of the chromaticity values. On the basis of these chromaticity chromaticity
values, the
values, the Main
Main Controller
Controller creates
creates a a four-dimensional
four-dimensional image
image characteristic
table and
and corrects
corrects the
the image
image data
data so
so as
as to
to conform
conform
to the chromaticity data of the correction pattern.
to the chromaticity data of the correction pattern.
C
Startup
Main Controller
)
C
Output the patch image
)
Printer
Feed to the Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit
Color Sensors
C
Read the patch image
)
Correction pattern Printer
Chromaticity values of
the correction pattern
110•
liftliEwom. I C
Output the chromaticity values
)
=MI 111.• I
Check the differences between the chromaticity
values of the correction pattern and the chromaticity
values at the moment, and create four-dimensional
LUT so as to conform to the chromaticity values
of the correction pattern.
- • -
V Main Controller
Create four-dimensional LUT

(CMYK -> C’M’Y’K’)
C'M'Y'K')
)
Main Controller DC Controller
1 screen, 3 sheets
PG
LL Paper
Chromaticity
H Current
Current
values of the chromaticity Color Sensor 141I1
Color Sensor
correction values
pattern
.1
Four-
dimensional
LUT
139
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing System
0 Overview
1.
1. Supporting of high speed printing
The belt
The belt method
method has
has been
been adopted
adopted for
for external
external heating
heating of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller. This
This enables
enables higher
higher speed
speed printing
printing compared
compared
to the
to the previous roller heating
previous roller heating method,
method, because
because itit has
has a
a wider
wider nip
nip width
width and
and more
more heat
heat that
that can
can be
be applied
applied to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller.
2. Adoption of the air-blowing method to separate thin paper in the Primary Fixing Assembly
2.
This machine is equipped with an Air Pump
Pump (compressor).
(compressor). This improves
improves the paper
paper separation
separation performance
performance when separating
thin paper by blowing air on the separation nip area (the paper leading edge).
thin paper by blowing air on the separation nip area (the paper leading edge).
3. Adoption of the air-blowing method to clean the Refresh Roller

3.
Air is blown to the Refresh Roller while performing the refresh operation for the Fixing Roller to prevent the Refresh Roller
from being
from being clogged.
clogged.
Cleaning by
Cleaning by blowing
blowing air
air enables
enables a
a longer
longer Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller life
life compared
compared to
to the
the previous
previous adhesive
adhesive cleaning
cleaning method
method using
using aa
rubber roller,
rubber roller, because
because the
the burden
burden on
on the
the Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller is
is reduced.
reduced. The
The longer
longer life
life of
of the
the Refresh Roller also
Refresh Roller also leads to a
leads to a longer
longer
life for the Fixing Roller.
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
--Cleaning
Primary Fixing
Refresh Roller
Primary Fixing Roller
Primary Fixing
External. Heat Belt Unit
Primary
Fixing Roller
Separation
Air Nozzle
Paper
Paper Primary
PrimaryFixing
Fixing
Pressure Belt
Primary Fixing Assembly
NOTE:
Illustrations/Text in This Chapter
IllustrationsiText
•• The illustrations in this chapter only show the Primary Fixing Assembly in some cases (replace images of the Pressure Belt
with the Pressure Roller for the Secondary Fixing Assembly).
•• When the symbols and names of electrical components (such as motors and sensors) and signal names of the Primary Fixing
Assembly and Secondary Fixing Assembly are described in illustrations and text, the symbols and names and signal names
of the Secondary Fixing Assembly are described in parentheses.
Example) M300 (M305): Primary Fixing Drive Motor (Secondary Fixing Drive Motor)
140
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Specifications
Specifications
Item
Item Function/Method
Function/Method
Fixing method Single fixing (belt fixing)
Tandem fixing (belt fixing + roller fixing)
• Primary Fixing Assembly: Belt fixing
•• Secondary Fixing Assembly: Roller fixing
Heater
Heater Primary Fixing In the Fixing Roller Two (main
Two (main heater/sub
heater/sub heater
heater integrated)
integrated)
Assembly
Assembly In the Inlet Roller One
One
In the
In the External
External Heat
Heat Upper/
Upper/ Two/two (main
Two/two (main heater/sub
heater/sub heater
heater integrated
integrated in
in both)
both)
Lower Rollers
Secondary
Secondary In the Fixing Roller Two (main
Two (main heater/sub
heater/sub heater
heater integrated)
integrated)
Fixing Assem- In the Pressure Roller One
One
bly
bly
In the
In the External
External Heat
Heat Upper/
Upper/ Two/two (main
Two/two (main heater/sub
heater/sub heater
heater integrated
integrated in
in both)
both)
Lower Rollers
Control tempera-
Control tempera- Refer to
Refer to the
the control
control temperature
temperature for
for each
each mode
mode
ture
ture
Detection of fixing Primary Fixing Fixing Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM301
THM301 (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, non-contact)
non-contact)
temperature
temperature Assembly
Assembly •• Sub
Sub Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM304
THM304 (far
(far edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
Inlet Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM300M
THM300M (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM300S
THM300S (rear
(rear edge
edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
External Heat Upper Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM302M
THM302M (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor 1: THM302S1
Thermistor 1: (rear edge
THM302S1 (rear edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2:
2: THM302S2
THM302S2 (front
(front edge
edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, con-
con-
tact)
tact)
External Heat Lower Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM303M
THM303M (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2:
2: THM303S2
THM303S2 (front
(front edge
edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, con-
con-
tact)
Secondary
Secondary Fixing Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM306
THM306 (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
non-contact)
Fixing Assem- •• Sub
Sub Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM309
THM309 (rear
(rear edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
bly
bly Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM310
THM310 (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
non-contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM311
THM311 (rear
(rear edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
External Heat Upper Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM307M
THM307M (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2:
2: THM307S2
THM307S2 (front
(front edge
edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, con-
con-
tact)
tact)
External Heat Lower Roller •• Main
Main Thermistor:
Thermistor: THM308M
THM308M (center
(center of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub Thermistor 1: THM308S1 (rear edge of the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
•• Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2:
2: THM308S2
THM308S2 (front
(front edge
edge ofof the
the roller,
roller, con-
con-
tact)
tact)
During warm-up/standby/printing/last
Fixing temperature During warm-up/standby/printing/last rotation/power-saving
rotation/power-saving mode
mode
control
control
Down sequence Yes
Protection function
Protection function Detects
Detects the
the following
following errors,
errors, and
and stops
stops the
the power
power distribution
distribution to
to the
the heater
heater when
when an
an error
error is
is detected
detected
•• Temperature
Temperature detection
detection by
by the
the Main/Sub
Main/Sub Thermistor
Thermistor
•• Stop
Stop of
of power
power distribution
distribution by
by the
the thermoswitch
thermoswitch (TP)
(TP)
Primary Fixing Fixing Roller TP300 (front
TP300 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
Assembly Operating temperature: 218 +/- 8 deg C
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt TP301 (center
TP301 (center of
of the
the belt,
belt, non-contact)
non-contact)
Operating temperature:
Operating temperature: 150
150 +/-
+/- 5
5 deg
deg C
C
External Heat Upper Roller TP302 (front
TP302 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
250 +/-
+/- 10
10 deg
deg CC
External Heat Lower Roller TP303 (front
TP303 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
250 +/-
+/- 10
10 deg
deg CC
Secondary
Secondary Fixing Roller TP304 (front
TP304 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
Fixing Assem- Operating temperature:
218 +/-
+/- 8
8 deg
deg C
C
bly
bly Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller TP305 (front
TP305 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
non-contact)
150 +/-
+/- 5
5 deg
deg C
C
External Heat Upper Roller TP306 (front
TP306 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
250 +/-
+/- 10
10 deg
deg CC
141
2. Technical
Explanation
Item
Item Function/Method
Function/Method
Secondary
Protection function Secondary External Heat
External Heat Lower
Lower Roller
Roller TP307 (front
TP307 (front edge
edge of
of the
the roller,
roller, contact)
contact)
Fixing Assem- Operating temperature:
250 +/-
+/- 10
10 deg
deg CC
bly
•• Disconnection
Disconnection of
of thermistor
thermistor (software
(software detection)/Paper
detection)/Paper wrap
wrap detection
detection
Separation mecha-
Separation mecha- Primary Fixing •• Separation Roller + air blow*
nism Assembly
Assembly Separates the
Separates the paper
paper by
by engaging/compressing
engaging/compressing a a small-diameter
small-diameter (20
(20 mm)
mm) Separation
Separation Roller
Roller
to the
to the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller to
to make
make aa localized
localized curvature
curvature change
change and
and blowing
blowing air
air from
from the
the Inner
Inner
Delivery Upper Separation Air Nozzle. Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Fixing
Roller.
•• Lower
Lower Separation
Separation Claw
Claw
Prevents the
Prevents the paper
paper from
from wrapping
wrapping around
around the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt due
due to
to downward
downward curl.
curl.
Secondary
Secondary •• Upper
Upper Separation
Separation Guide
Guide
Fixing Assem- Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Fixing Roller due to upward curl.
bly •• Lower
Lower Separation
Separation Claw
Claw
Prevents the
Prevents the paper
paper from
from wrapping
wrapping around
around the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller due
due to
to downward
downward curl.
curl.
Cleaning mecha- Fixing Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing As- By the Collection Roller, Cleaning Web, and Refresh Roller
nism sembly)
Pressure Belt (Primary Fixing Assembly) None
None
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly) By the Refresh Roller
External Heat Belt (Primary/Secondary Fixing By the Cleaning Roller
Assembly)
Assembly)
Refresh Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing As- By blowing air
sembly)
Pressure Refresh
Pressure Refresh Roller
Roller (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing By the Refresh Cleaning Roller
Assembly)
*: Separation
*: Separation by
by blowing
blowing air
air is
is only
only performed
performed for
for thin
thin paper.
paper.
142
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Parts
Parts Configuration
Configuration
● Cross Section
• Cross Section View
View
Fixing
Fixing Feed
Feed Assembly
Assembly
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Refresh Roller
Assembly Cleaning Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Tandem Feed Path

Refresh Roller
Primary Fixing
Assembly
External Heat Belt Unit
Single Feed Path Separation Air Nozzle
NOTE:
NOTE:
•• Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly:
Assembly: Belt
Belt fixing
fixing
•• Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly:
Assembly: Roller
Roller fixing
fixing
143
2. Technical
Explanation
Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
Refresh Roller Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Web
External Heat Belt
Web Roller
External Heat Cleaning Roller
Collection roller
Fixing Roller
Separation Air Nozzle

Th
-
Inlet Guide
Separation Claw x --,..rn-rj---

Inlet Roller
i
Steering Roller
Separation Pad Pressure Belt
Pressure Pad
Oil Coating Roller
Name Features/Function/Method Remarks

1
Fixing Roller Fixes toner
Fixes toner to
to paper
paper 80 mm
80 mm diameter
diameter
External Heat Belt Keeps the
Keeps the temperature
temperature from
from being
being decreased
decreased during
during continuous
continuous Width: 355
Width: 355 mm
mm
printing
External Heat Cleaning Roller Cleans the
Cleans the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Cleans the Fixing Roller via the Collection Roller
Web Roller Engages the
Engages the Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web to
to the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller
Collection Roller
Collection Roller Temporarily collects the toner on the Fixing Roller
Refresh Roller Removes damage
Removes damage on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Improves the
Improves the evenness
evenness of
of gloss
gloss Width: 348 mm +/- 2 mm
Inlet Roller Controls the
Controls the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt temperature
temperature 20 mm diameter
Steering Roller Corrects belt
Corrects belt displacement
displacement
Oil Coating
Oil Coating Roller
Roller Reduces friction
Reduces friction on
on the
the sliding
sliding area
area of
of the
the inner
inner surface
surface of
of the
the belt 10 mm
belt 10 mm diameter
diameter
Includes silicone
Includes silicone oil
oil
Pressure Pad
Pressure Pad Forms proper fixing nip
Separation Roller
Separation Roller Separates paper
Separates paper from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller 21 mm diameter
Inlet Guide
Inlet Guide Determines the
Determines the entry
entry angle
angle to
to the
the fixing
fixing nip
nip area
area (to
(to prevent
prevent the
the
paper trailing edge from curling up, wrinkles, and scraping)
Separation Air
Nozzle Separates thin
Separates thin paper
paper by
by blowing
blowing air
air to
to the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge
Fixing Separation Claw Separates paper
from the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle Cleans the Refresh Roller by blowing air
144
2. Technical
Explanation
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
Refresh Roller Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Web External Heat Belt
Web Roller
External Heat Cleaning Rolle
Collection roll
Fixing Roller
Separation Upper Guid
Separation Claw
Inlet Guide
Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller

Pressure Roller
Name
Name Features/Function/Method
Features/Function/Method Remarks
Remarks
I
Fixing Roller Fixes toner
Fixes toner to
to paper
paper 80 mm
80 mm diameter
diameter
External Heat Belt Keeps the
Keeps the temperature
temperature from
from being
being decreased
decreased during
during continuous
continuous Width: 355
Width: 355 mm
mm
printing
External Heat Cleaning Roller Cleans the
Cleans the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Cleans the Fixing Roller via the Collection Roller
Web Roller
Web Roller Engages the
Engages the Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web to
to the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller
Collection Roller
Collection Roller Temporarily collects the toner on the Fixing Roller
Refresh Roller Removes damage
Removes damage on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller Fixes toner
Fixes toner to
to paper
paper 70 mm diameter
Inlet Guide
Inlet Guide Determines the
Determines the entry
entry angle
angle to
to the
the fixing
fixing nip
nip area
area (to
(to prevent
prevent the
the
paper trailing edge from curling up, wrinkles, and scraping)
Upper Separation
Upper Separation Guide
Guide Guides paper
Guides paper to
to the
the inner
inner delivery
delivery area
area
Fixing Separation Claw Separates paper
from the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle Cleans the Refresh Roller by blowing air
Pressure Refresh
Roller Removes damage
Removes damage on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller
Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller Cleans the
Cleans the Pressure
Pressure Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller
145
●
• Thermistor/Thermoswitch/Heater
Primary Fixing
Assembly
THM302
THM302 THM303
THM303
S2
S2 TP303
TP303 S2
S2 THM303
THM303
M
THM302
THM302
H308
H308 M
M
THM301 THM302
S1
S1
THM303
THM303
t
I S1
S1
THM304
THM304 t____
TP302
TP302
--------,5_
r'
ap, H307
THM300
THM300 >. TP300
TP300
S
S
H306
H306
TP301
TP301
THM300
THM300
M
M
H305
H305
Code
Code Name
Name
A Function/Method
Function/Method
Thermistor
THM301 Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type
Non-contact type (temperature
(temperature control,
control, abnormal
abnormal
temperature rise
temperature rise detection)
detection)
THM304 Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Contact type
Contact type (abnormal
(abnormal temperature
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM300M
THM300M Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor Contact type
Contact type (temperature
control, abnormal
abnormal tem-
tem-
perature rise
perature rise detection)
detection)
THM300S
THM300S Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM302M
THM302M Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller
Roller Main
Main Thermistor
Thermistor Contact type
control, abnormal
abnormal tem-
tem-
perature rise
detection)
THM302S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM302S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM303M
THM303M Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor Contact type
control, abnormal
abnormal tem-
tem-
perature rise
detection)
THM303S1
THM303S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM303S2
THM303S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
Thermoswitch
TP300
TP300 Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (218
Contact-type (218 +/-
+/- 8
8 deg
deg C)
C)
TP301
TP301 Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Thermoswitch
Thermoswitch Non-contact type
Non-contact type (150
(150 +/-
+/- 5
5 deg
deg C)
C)
TP302 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250
+/- 10
10 deg
deg C)
C)
TP303
TP303 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250
+/- 10
10 deg
deg C)
C)
Heater
Heater
H305
H305 Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Heater
Heater Halogen heater:
Halogen heater: 400
400 W
W
146
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name
Name Function/Method
Function/Method
H306
H306 Primary Fixing Roller Heater Halogen heater:
Halogen heater: 1300
1300 WW
Main/sub heater
Main/sub heater integrated
integrated
H307
H307 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
Main/sub heater
integrated
H308
H308 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
Main/sub heater
integrated
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
THM308
THM308
S2 TP307 THM308
THM308
THM307 M
M
"--,, S2
S2 THM307
"y.
H302
H302 M
Ce0
THM306 THM308
THM308
S1
S1
THM307
THM307
S1
THM309
THM309
\ TP306
TP306
H301
H301
THM311 ' Aci
TP304
THM310
THM310 H300
H300
H303
H303
TP305
TP305
Code
Code Name
Name Function/Method
Function/Method
Thermistor
THM306
THM306 Secondary Fixing Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type
control, abnormal
abnormal
temperature rise
detection)
THM307M Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller
Roller Main
Main Thermistor
control, abnormal
abnormal tem-
tem-
perature rise
detection)
THM307S1 Secondary Fixing
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 11 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2
2 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM308M
THM308M Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor Contact type
control, abnormal
abnormal tem-
tem-
perature rise
detection)
THM308S1
External Heat
Heat Lower
Lower Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 11 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM308S2
External Heat
Heat Lower
Lower Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor 2
2 Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM309
THM309 Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Contact type
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
THM310 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type
control, abnormal
abnormal
temperature rise
detection)
THM311 Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
temperature rise
rise detec-
detec-
tion)
tion)
Thermoswitch
TP304 Secondary Fixing Fixing Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (218
+/- 8
8 deg
deg C)
C)
147
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
jCode ■ Name
Names Function/Method
TP305
TP305 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch Non-contact type
Non-contact type (150
(150 +/-
+/- 5
5 deg
deg C)
C)
TP306
TP306 Secondary Fixing External Upper Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250
+/- 10
10 deg
deg C)
C)
TP307 Secondary Fixing External Lower Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250
+/- 10
10 deg
deg C)
C)
Heater
Heater
H300
H300 Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Roller
Roller Heater
Halogen heater: 1300
1300 WW
Main/sub heater
integrated
H301
H301 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
Main/sub heater
integrated
H302
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller
Roller Heater
Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
Main/sub heater
integrated
H303
Pressure Roller
Roller Heater
Halogen heater: 400
400 W
W
● Sensor
• Sensor
Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
PS301
PS301 PS352
PS352
PS302
PS302 PS382
PS906
PS906
PS306
PS907
PS907
PS300
PS300
PS303
PS305
PS305 PS905
PS307
PS307
PS304
PS304 PS311
PS309
PS309
PS308
PS308
Code Name
PS300
PS300 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor
PS301
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Detection Sensor (Front)
PS302
PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Detection Sensor (Rear)
PS303
PS303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Sensor
PS304
PS304 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS305
PS305 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
PS306
PS306 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
PS307
PS307 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
PS308
PS308 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement HP Sensor
PS309
PS309 Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor
PS311 Primary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor
PS352
PS352 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Retry Sensor
PS382
PS382 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
PS905
PS905 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor
PS906
PS906 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor
PS907
PS907 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor
148
2. Technical
Explanation
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
PS315 PS383
PS383
PS314
PS910
PS910
PS316
PS316
PS909
PS909
PS312
PS312
PS908
PS908
PS313
PS313
PS317 PS320
PS917
PS318
PS318
Code
Code II Name
Name
ill
PS312 Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor
PS313
PS313 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
PS314 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
PS315
Pressure Roller
Roller HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
PS316
Pressure Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Sensor
Sensor
PS318
Secondary Fixing Web
Web HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
PS320
Web Absence
Absence Advance
Advance Notice
Notice Sensor
Sensor
PS383
PS383 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
PS908
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
PS909
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Position
Position Front
Front Sensor
Sensor
PS910
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Position
Position Rear
Rear Sensor
Sensor
Secondary Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
149
■
• Drive
Drive Configuration
Configuration
Refresh Roller
M302 Cleaning Air Nozzle
Irk Refresh Roller

PS311
External Heat Belt

M301 M335
SL302
n
PS306
PS382
Irk
Cleaning Web
PS309
External Heat Cleaning Roller
PS369
El
1
Web Roller PS307
PS305 Fixing Roller

Collection Roller IYI
M300
PS304
Separation Air Nozzle PS303
PS300 PS303 Ei
M M
PS308
Fixing Separation Claw
1 -.1 PS352
PS301 PS302 M Inlet Guide
M303
Inlet Roller
M304
'LP Pressure Pad
Steering Roller
Separation Roller
Oil Coating Roller
Code
Code Name
Name Code
Code Name
Name
SL302 Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Web
Web Solenoid
Solenoid PS300 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front)
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Rear)
M301 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor PS303 Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure Sensor
Sensor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor PS304 Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor
M303 Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor PS305 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
M304 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Mo- PS306 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
tor
tor
M335 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control PS307 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
Motor
Motor
PS309 Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor
PS311 Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Web
Web Absence
Absence Advance
Advance Notice
Notice Sensor
Sensor
PS352 Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Displacement
Displacement Retry
Retry Sen-
Sen-
sor
sor
PS369 Primary Fixing Lever Sensor
PS382 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
150
2. Technical
Explanation
M307 Refresh Roller

Cleaning Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
PS320
External Heat Belt

M306 M336
SL303
Cleaning Web PS314

PS383
PS318
PS318 External Heat
El " Cleaning Roller
0
Web Roller PS370
■
PS317 M305
Collection Roller PS313

r
Fixing Roller
PS312
PS316
PS315 PS316
Separation Upper Guide
Separation Claw
Inlet Guide
M308
Pressure Roller
Pressure Refresh
Cleaning Roller Refresh Roller
Code
Code Name
Name Code
Code Name
Name
SL303
SL303 Secondary Fixing
Web Solenoid
Solenoid PS312
PS312 Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS313
M305
M305 Secondary Fixing
Secondary Fixing Drive
Drive Motor
Motor PS314 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
M306
External Heat
Heat Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor PS315
PS315 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor
M307
Web Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor PS316
Pressure Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Sensor
Sensor
M308
Pressure Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor PS317 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
M336
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Displacement
Displacement PS318
Web HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
Control Motor
Control Motor
PS320
Web Absence
Absence Advance
Advance Notice
Notice Sen-
Sen-
sor
sor
PS370
Assembly Lever
Lever Sensor
Sensor
PS383
PS383 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
■ Basic Sequence
• Basic Sequence
● At Power-on
• At Power-on
First power-on conditions
The surface
The surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller is
is 50
50 deg
deg C
C or
or less
less
151
2. Technical
Explanation
Power ON
Code Name WMUP䠍 WMUP䠎 WMUP䠏 STBY
H306M Primary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main)
H306S Primary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Roller Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub)
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater
Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller

H308M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) ////////////////// ////////////////// //////////////////
Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
H307M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) ////////////////////////////////////// /////////////////
H308S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub) ///////////////////////////////////// //////////////////
H307S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub) /////////////////// //////////////////(///////////////8
H300M Secondary Fixing
Fixing Roller
Heater(Main)
H300S Secondary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Heater(Sub)
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater
Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller

H302M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) ////////////////// ////////////////// ///////////////////
Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
H301M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
H302S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub) ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
H301S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub) /////////////////// ////////////////// /////////////////
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor
M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor Detach→

Detach —> Attach→
Attach —> Detach→
Detach—>
11 11"
M308
Detach→
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Motor Detach —>
Attach→
Detach—>
11 11"
Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Detach→
Detach—>
M301
M301
Motor
Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Detach→
Detach—>
M306
Motor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Detach→

Detach—>
11 11-
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Detach→
Detach—>
11 11-
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1
FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan

111111111111111111111
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
FM337 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5
FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan

111111111111111111111
FM420 Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
Turned on
in the time
in the time
Rotated at
3/4 speed
Rotated at
1/4speed
1 1/4 speed
[um Duty
Duty control
control
sharing mode
Interval
Interval Definition
Definition
WMUP1 (warm-up
WMUP1 (warm-up 1)
1) The time
The time until
until the
the surface
surface temperature
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller reaches
reaches 160
160 deg
deg C
C after
after the
the power
power is
is turned
turned
ON
ON
After reaching
After reaching this,
this, the
the machine
machine shifts
shifts to
to WMUP2
WMUP2
Purpose: To
Purpose: To clean
clean the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller with
with the
the web,
web, and
and heat
heat the
the Pressure
Pressure Pad
Pad to
to prevent
prevent image
image failure
failure
(Primary Fixing
(Primary Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
152
152
2. Technical
Explanation
Interval
Interval Definition
Definition
WMUP2 (warm-up 2) The time
The time until
until the
the surface
surface temperature
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt reaches
reaches 100
100 deg
deg C
C (Primary
(Primary Fixing
Fixing As-
As-
sembly)
The time
The time until
until the
the surface
surface temperature
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller reaches
reaches 90
90 deg
deg C
C (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing
Assembly)
Assembly)
After reaching
this, the
the machine
machine shifts
shifts to
to WMUP3
WMUP3
Purpose: To
Purpose: To heat
heat the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (Pressure
(Pressure Roller)
Roller)
WMUP3 (warm-up
WMUP3 (warm-up 3)
3) The time until the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller reaches 174 deg C (Primary Fixing As-
sembly)
The time
The time until
until the
the surface
surface temperature
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller reaches
reaches 160
160 deg
deg C
C (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing
Assembly)
Assembly)
After reaching
this, the
the machine
machine shifts
shifts to
to STBY
STBY
Purpose: To disengage the web, Pressure Belt (Primary Fixing Assembly), and Pressure Roller (Sec-
ondary Fixing Assembly)
STBY (Standby)
STBY (Standby) The machine
The machine can
can receive
receive print
print request
request signals
signals
153
153
2. Technical
Explanation
● At Printing
• At Printing
--on
Code . Name 䠯䠰䠞䠵 INTR
STBY 䠥䠪䠰䠮䠬䠮䠥䠪䠰
PRIN 䠨䠯䠰䠮䠍
.
- 䠨䠯䠰䠮䠎
LSTR2 䠨䠯䠰䠮䠏
LSTR3 䠯䠰䠞䠵
STBY
H306M Primary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Heater(Main)
/ A
H306S Primary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Heater(Sub) ----
W A
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater

H308M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) //////////////////////////////////////////////
H307M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) //////////////////////////////////////////////
H308S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub)
H307S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub)
Fixing Roller
H300M Secondary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main)
H300S Secondary Fixing

Fixing Roller
Heater(Sub)
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater

H302M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) //////////////////////////////////////////////
H301M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Heater(Main) //////////////////////////////////////////////
H302S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub)
H301S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
Heater(Sub)
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor

MI
M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor - Attach Detach
it 11
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Attach Detach
M308
Motor IV .1.
Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Attach Detach
M301
Motor Er
- or
Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Attach Detach
M306
Pressure Motor Or •
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Attach Detach
Ur el
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Attach Detach
Mr •
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5 Depends on the paper size
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1 Depends on the paper size
FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan

1111111 11111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 11111111111 11111111111 11111111111 11111111
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan _____ Depends on the temperature
FM337
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling
____ Depends
Depends on
on the
the paper
paper size
size
Fan 55
Fan
FM315
FM315 Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Inner
Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
Delivery Cooling Fan
1111111 11111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 11111111111 11111111111 11111111111 11111111
FM420
FM420
Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Main
Main Thermistor
Thermistor Cooling
Cooling
Fan
Fan
Turned on
Rotated at Rotated at
in the time Duty control
3/4 speed 1/4 speed
1/4 speed IDE
sharing mode
Interval ...Definition
STBY (Standby)
STBY (Standby) The machine
The machine can
can receive
receive print
print request
request signals
signals
INTR (Initial
INTR (Initial Rota-
Rota- The interval
The interval from
from when
when the
the print
print request
request signal
signal is
is received
received until
until the
the image
image signal
signal is
is sent
sent
tion)
tion)
PRINT (Print)
PRINT (Print) The interval
The interval from
from when
when image
image formation
formation starts
starts until
until paper
paper is
is delivered
delivered
LSTR1 (Last
LSTR1 (Last Rota-
Rota- The interval
The interval until
until the
the temperature
temperature detected
detected by
by the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor is
is 10
10 deg
deg C
C or
or less
less above
above the
the
tion 1)
tion 1) print
print control
control temperature
temperature
LSTR2 (Last
LSTR2 (Last Rota-
Rota- The interval
The interval until
until the
the temperature
temperature detected
detected by
by the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Main
Main Thermistor
Thermistor is
is 10
10 deg
deg C
C or
or less
less above
above the
the
tion 2)
tion 2) print
print control
control temperature and the
temperature and the temperature detected by
temperature detected by the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Sub
Sub Thermistor
Thermistor is
is 10
10 deg
deg C
C or
or less
less
below
below the
the print
print control
control temperature
temperature
154
154
2. Technical
Explanation
Interval
Interval Definition
Definition
LSTR3 (Last
LSTR3 (Last Rota-
Rota- The interval
The until the
interval until the surface
surface temperature of the
temperature of the Fixing
Fixing Roller,
Roller, the
the surface
surface temperature of the
temperature of the External
External Heat
Heat Roller,
Roller,
tion 3)
tion 3) and the
and the surface
surface temperature
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt become
become higher
higher than
than the
the standby
standby control
control temperature
temperature
Controls
0 Controls
■
■ Overview
Overview
Item
Item Description
Description AN.
Fixing Path
Fixing Path Switch
Switch Control
Control Switches between
Switches between the
the single
single fixing
fixing path
path and
and tandem
tandem fixing
fixing path
path
Fixing Drive Control Drives the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller)
Fixing Roller Temperature Control Adjusts the
Adjusts the fixing
fixing temperature
temperature to
to prevent
prevent fixing
fixing failure
failure
Down Sequence
Down Sequence Control
Control Reduces the
Reduces the print
print speed
speed according
according to
to the
the paper
paper type
type and
and temporarily
temporarily puts
puts the
the machine
machine in
in standby
standby
to prevent fixing failure
Paper Wrap
Paper Wrap Detection
Detection Detects paper
Detects paper wrapping
wrapping around
around the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (Pressure
(Pressure Roller)
Roller)
External Heat
External Heat Belt
Belt Unit
Unit Engagement/ Engages and
Engagement/ Engages and heats
heats the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller to
to assist
assist fixing
fixing temperature
temperature control
control
Disengagement Control
Disengagement Control
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Displacement
Displacement Control
Control Adjusts
Adjusts the
the displacement
displacement of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and the
the belt
belt
(Primary Fixing
(Primary Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
External Heat
External Heat Belt
Belt Displacement
Displacement Corrects the
Corrects the displacement
displacement of
of the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage to
to the
the belt
belt
Control
Control
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Engagement/Disen-
Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure to the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt for fixing
gagement Control (Primary Fixing Disengages the
Disengages the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt to
to improve
improve jam
jam removability
removability and
and prevent
prevent the
the tem-
tem-
Assembly)
Assembly) perature increase
perature increase of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller Engagement/Disen-
Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure to the Fixing Roller and Pressure Roller for fixing
gagement Control
gagement Control (Secondary
(Secondary Fix- Disengages the
Fix- Disengages the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller to
to prevent
prevent fixing
fixing failure
failure and
and improve
improve jam
jam
ing Assembly) removability
Cleaning Web Drive Control Removes toner remaining on the Fixing Roller with the Cleaning Web to prevent fixing offset
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Level
Level Detection
Detection Detects the
Detects the remaining
remaining Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web
Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Engagement/Disen-
Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure
Applies pressure to
to the
the Web
Web Roller
Roller and
and the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller to
to remove
remove toner
toner remaining
remaining on
on the
the
gagement Control
gagement Control Collection roller
Collection roller
Disengages the
Disengages the Web
Web Roller
Roller and
and Collection
Collection Roller
Roller to
to prevent
prevent deformation
deformation of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
Refresh Roller Engagement/Disen- Engages the Fixing Roller with the Refresh Roller and evens out the surface of the Fixing Roller
gagement Control
gagement Control to prevent
to prevent scratches
scratches on
on the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and uneven
uneven gloss
gloss
Pressure Refresh Roller Engage- Engages the
Engages the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller with
with the
the Pressure
Pressure Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller and
and evens
evens out
out the
the surface
surface of
of the
the
ment/Disengagement Control
ment/Disengagement Control (Sec- Pressure Roller
(Sec- Pressure Roller to
to remove
remove claw
claw marks
marks onon the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller made
made by
by the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw
ondary Fixing Assembly)
Separation Air Blow Control (Primary
Separation Blows air
(Primary Blows air towards
towards the
the leading
leading edge
edge of
of paper
paper to
to separate
separate thin
thin paper
paper
Fixing Assembly)
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Blow Blows air on the Refresh Roller to prevent clogging of the Refresh Roller
Control
Control
Fixing Separation Claw Engage- Engages the
Engages the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw to
to prevent
prevent thin
thin paper
paper from
from wrapping
wrapping around
around the
the Pressure
Pressure
ment/Disengagement Control
ment/Disengagement Control (Sec- Roller
(Sec- Roller
ondary Fixing Assembly) Disengages the
Disengages the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw according
according to
to the
the type
type of
of paper
paper to
to feed
feed to
to prevent
prevent Sepa-
Sepa-
ration Claw
ration Claw marks
marks onon the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller
Protection function
Protection function Stops power
Stops power distribution
distribution to
to the
the heater
heater when
when the
the fixing
fixing temperature
temperature is
is abnormally
abnormally high
high
■
■ Fixing
Fixing Path
Path Switch
Switch Control
Control
The fixing
The fixing path
path is
is switched
switched by
by turning
turning the
the Fixing
Fixing Flapper
Flapper Motor
Motor (M309)
(M309) ON
ON and
and then
then OFF
OFF toto move
move the
the flapper
flapper up
up and
and down.
down.
During standby, the flapper waits in the home position (approx. 110 degrees clockwise from the sensor OFF position). When
During standby, the flapper waits in the home position (approx. 110 degrees clockwise from the sensor OFF position). When
printing
printing starts,
starts, it
it switches
switches to
to the
the position
position for
for either
either the
the tandem
tandem fixing
fixing path
path (primary
(primary fixing
fixing +
+ secondary
secondary fixing)
fixing) or
or single
single fixing
fixing path
path
(primary fixing
(primary fixing only),
only), according
according toto the
the following
conditions.
155
2. Technical
Explanation
Conditions for the single fixing path

•• Plain
Plain paper,
paper, recycled
recycled paper,
paper, color
color paper,
paper, tab
tab paper,
paper, vellum
vellum paper
paper that
that are
are 150 g/m22 or
150 g/m or less
less
•• When
When gloss
gloss correction
correction is
is set
set to
to "-4"
"-4" in
in Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration (System
(System management
management mode)
mode)
•• Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration >> Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance > > Adjust
Adjust Image
Image Quality
Quality >
> Correct
Correct Uneven
Uneven Gloss
Gloss
M309
Single Feed Path Flapper
Code Name
M309 Fixing Flapper Motor
156
156
2. Technical
Explanation
Conditions
Conditions for
for the
the tandem
tandem fixing
fixing path
path
Paper other
Paper other than
than the
the above
above (heavy
(heavy paper
paper that
that is
is 151 g/m22 or
151 g/m or above,
above, and
and transparency,
transparency, coated
coated paper,
paper, and
and embossed
embossed paper,
paper,
regardless of
regardless of its
its weight)
weight)
Tandem Feed Path
M309
Flapper
Code
Code Name
Name
M309
M309 Fixing Flapper
Fixing Flapper Motor
Motor
■
■ Fixing
Fixing Drive
Drive Control
Control
Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
The Fixing
The Fixing Roller
Roller and
and Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt are
are driven
driven by
by the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M300).
(M300).
The Pressure
The Pressure Belt
Belt is
is driven
driven by
by the
the transmission
transmission of of the
the drive
drive to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Drive
Drive Motor
Motor via
via the
the Gear/Timing
Gear/Timing
Belt. This
Belt. This drive
drive configuration is adopted
configuration is adopted toto prevent slip when
prevent slip when the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt is
is driven
driven by
by following
following the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller (to
(to prevent
prevent
the Pressure
the Pressure Belt
Belt from
from slipping
slipping against
against the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller).
Roller).
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
The Fixing
The Fixing Roller
Roller and
and Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller are
are driven
driven by
by the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Drive
Drive Motor
Motor (M305).
(M305).
The Pressure
The Pressure Roller
Roller rotates
rotates by
by following
following the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller.
157
2. Technical
Explanation
M300
(M305)
Fixing Roller
Timing Belt
Pressure Belt
Code
Code Name
Name
M300 (M305)
M300 (M305) Primary Fixing Drive Motor (Secondary Fixing Drive Motor)
Each Fixing
Each Fixing Motor
Motor is
is driven
driven at
at 1/3
1/3 of
of speed
speed during
during standby
standby and
and at
at normal
normal speed
speed during
during printing.
printing.
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
E014-0100 // E008-0101:
E014-0100 E008-0101: Fixing
Fixing Motor
Motor error
error (Primary
(Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
E014-0200 // E008-0201:
E014-0200 E008-0201: Fixing
Fixing Motor
Motor error
error (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
■
■ Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller Temperature
Temperature Control
Control
This is
This is a
a control
control for
for adjusting
adjusting the
the fixing
fixing temperature
temperature to
to prevent
prevent fixing
fixing failure.
failure.
This machine
This machine has
has fixing
fixing temperature
temperature control
control tables
tables that
that are
are selected
selected according
according to
to the
the fixing
fixing temperature
temperature control
control mode
mode and
and the
the
paper
paper type.
type.
The fixing
The fixing temperature
temperature control
control mode
mode is
is classified
classified into
into the
the following
following two
two modes.
modes.
1. Productivity Priority
1. Productivity Priority (Auto/Manual)
(Auto/Manual)
2. Image
2. Image Quality
Quality Priority
Priority (Standard
(Standard Gloss/Low
Gloss/Low Gloss)
Gloss)
This fixing
This fixing temperature
temperature control
control mode
mode can
can be
be switched
switched in
in Settings/Registration.
Settings/Registration.
Settings/Registration > > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance > > Adjust
Adjust Image
Image Quality
Quality > > Switch
Switch Fixing
Fixing Temperature
Temperature Adjustment
Adjustment Mode
Mode
Setting values:
Setting values: Productivity
Productivity Priority
Priority (Auto)
(Auto) (default),
(default), Productivity
Productivity Priority
Priority (Manual),
(Manual), Image
Image Quality
Quality Priority
Priority (Standard
(Standard Gloss),
Gloss),
Image Quality
Image Quality Priority
Priority (Low
(Low Gloss)
Gloss)
158
158
2. Technical
Explanation
Settings.
Settings/Registration Reg. Shortc
<Switch Fixing Temperature Adjustment Mode>
Top
Adju
Adju
Productivity Priority Productivity Priority
(Auto) (Manual)
Image Quality Priority Image Quality Priority

(Standard Gloss) (Low Gloss)
X Cancel OK AI
■
System Management Mode - Lhg Gut
The gloss
The can be
gloss can be adjusted
adjusted for
for each
each paper
paper type.
type. (However,
(However, itit cannot
cannot be
be adjusted
adjusted for
for some
some paper
paper types.)
types.)
Settings/Registration >> Preferences
Preferences > > Paper Settings >
Paper Settings > Paper
Paper Type
Type Management
Management Settings*
Settings*
Setting value:
Setting value: -4
-4 to
to +4
+4 (default:
(default: 0)
0)
Increasing
Increasing the
the value
value increases
increases the
the gloss.
gloss.
Decreasing
Decreasing the
the value
value decreases
decreases thethe gloss.
gloss.
*: This
*: This item
item is
is not
not displayed
displayed in
Settings/Registration by
by default.
default. ItItcan
can be
be displayed
displayed and made available
and made available by
by setting
setting "1"
"1" for
for the
the
following service
following service mode.
mode.
COPIER >> OPTION
COPIER OPTION >> DSPLY-SW
DSPLY-SW >> IMGC-ADJ
IMGC-ADJ
● Temperature Control
• Temperature Control in
in the
the "Productivity
"ProductivityPriority
Priority (Manual)"
(Manual)" Mode
Mode
NOTE:
NOTE:
The productivity
The productivity in
in "Productivity
"Productivity Priority"
Priority"mode
mode is
is not
not always more improved
always more improved than
thanthe
theproductivity
productivityinin"Quality
"Quality Priority"
Priority" mode in all
mode in all
prints.
prints.
The productivity
The productivity may
mayremain
remainunchanged
unchanged according
according to
to the
the paper type.
paper type.
When [Productivity
When [Productivity Priority
Priority(Manual)]
(Manual)]isispressed,
pressed,44modes
modesare
are displayed.
displayed. The
The most
most frequently
frequently used
used combination
combination of
of paper
paper type
type
and weight
and weight can
can be
be selected from the
selected from the 4
4 modes.
modes.
::ettings/
‘i0 Settings/Registration ieg.Shortcut
ot an item to s•
<Productivity Priority (Manual)>
Top
Adju Thin Paper Priority Uncoated (60-180 g/m2)
Coated (80-180 g/m2)
Adju
Standard Uncoated (60-300 g/m2)

Coated (106-256 g/m2)
Heavy Paper Priority A I Uncoated (129-350 g/m2)

Coated (129-256 g/m2)
3/4
X
Heavy Paper Priority 6
Cancel
Uncoated (129-350 g/m2)
Coated (129-350 g/m2)
OK
•
AJ
A System Management Mode Log Out
The temperature
The temperature control
control table
table is
is switched
switched to
to an appropriate table
an appropriate table (The
(The control
control temperature
temperature isis raised or lowered.)
raised or lowered.) depending
depending onon
the paper
the paper type
type ifif necessary. Theswitching
necessary. The switchingof
of the
the tables
tablesisisexecuted
executedbefore
beforestarting
startingprint
printor
orduring
duringprinting.
printing. In
In the
the case of switching
case of switching
during
during printing,
printing, the the printing
printingisistemporarily
temporarilystopped
stoppedtotoswitch
switchthe
thetables,
tables, which
which generates
generates aa waiting
waiting time.
time.
159
159
2. Technical
Explanation
Purpose: To
Purpose: To secure
secure the
the fixing
fixing performance
performance and
and feedability.
feedability.
NOTE:
With the "Quality Priority" mode described below, the operation for switching to the
the appropriate
appropriate temperature
temperature control table according
according
to the paper type is performed more times than the "Productivity Priority" mode.
<Viewing this table>

Yes: The
Yes: The default
default temperature
temperature control
control table
table
Numeric value
Numeric value columns:
columns: The
The top
top row
row indicates
indicates the
the control
control temperature
temperature of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly and
and the
the bottom
bottom row
row
indicates the
indicates the control
control temperature
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly.
Assembly.
-: Not
-: Not used
used
S: Single fixing path
S:
T: Tandem fixing path
any: The
any: The previous
previous control
control temperature
temperature used
used for
for the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
*A waiting
*A waiting time
time is
is generated
generated when
when the
the control
control temperature
temperature isis switched.
switched.
160
Uncoated paper
Uncoated paper (plain
(plain paper),
paper), 1-sided
1-sided coated
coated paper
paper
Environment tempera- Uncoated paper
(plain paper)
paper) 1-sided
1-sided coated
coated paper
paper
ture of
ture of 20
20 deg
deg C
C or
or
more
more
Mode type
Mode type Pri-
Pri- Sec-
Sec- Paper weight (g/m 2)
(g/m2) Paper weight (g/m2)
(g/m2)
mar on-
on- 60
60 to
to 80
80 to 106 129
to 106 129 151
151 181181 210210 257
257 301
301 70
70 to
to 80
80 to 106
to 106 129
129 151 181 210 257 301
y
y dary 79
dary 79 105105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
Fix- Fix- 150 180
128 150 180 209209 256256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
ing ing
S
S S
S S
S S TT T T T T T T T T T T T T T
As- As-
As-
sem-
sem- sem-
sem-
bly
bly bly
(deg
(deg (deg
(deg
C)
C) C)
C)
Heavy Pa- 185 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Heavy Pa- 180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Standard 174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Thin Paper 164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - 152 Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - -
120
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
161
161
2. Technical
Explanation
2-sided coated paper, recycled paper

Environment tempera- 2-sided coated
2-sided coated paper
paper Recycled paper
Recycled paper
ture of
ture of 20
20 deg
deg C
C or
or
more
more
Mode type
Mode type Pri-
Pri- Sec-
Sec- Paper weight (g/m 2)
(g/m2)
mar on-
on- 70
70 to
to 80
80 to 106 129
to 106 129 151
151 181181 210210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to 106
to 106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
y
y dary 79
dary 79 105105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
Fix- Fix- 150 180
128 150 180 209209 256256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
ing ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
As- As-
As-
sem-
sem- sem-
sem-
bly
bly bly
(deg
(deg (deg
(deg
C)
C) C)
C)
Heavy Pa- 185 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B
160 - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - Yes - - - - -
Heavy Pa- 180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - -
A
●
• Temperature
Temperature Control
Control for
for the
the "Productivity Priority (Auto)"
"Productivity Priority (Auto)" Mode
Mode
The optimal
The optimal temperature
temperature of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly is
is automatically
automatically adjusted.
adjusted. Gloss
Gloss may
may slightly
slightly change
change because
because productivity
productivity is
is
prioritized.
If there
If there is
is no
no "Yes"
"Yes" inin the
the column
column of
of the
the set
set mode,
mode, the
the mode
mode shifts
shifts to
to the
the nearest
nearest mode
mode for
for temperature
temperature control.
control.
E.g. When
E.g. When uncoated
uncoated paper
paper (80
(80 to
to 105
105 g/m 2
g/m2)) is
is used
used with
with "Heavy
"Heavy Paper
Paper Priority
Priority B"
B" set
set as
as the
the mode
mode type:
type:
There is
There is no
no "Yes"
"Yes" in
in the
the column
column ofof the
the Heavy
Heavy Paper
Paper Priority
Priority B
B mode
mode => => There
There isis no
no "Yes"
"Yes" also
also in
in the
the column
column of
of the
the Heavy
Heavy Paper
Paper
Priority A mode => Temperature control is performed in standard mode with "174 deg C" for the Primary Fixing and "any (The
previous
previous control
control temperature
temperature used
used for
for the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)"
Assembly)" forfor the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing.
Fixing.
●
• Temperature
Temperature Control in the
Control in the "Quality
"Quality Priority"
Priority" Mode
Mode
With the
With the "Quality
"Quality Priority"
Priority" mode
mode described
described below,
below, the
the operation
operation for
for switching
switching to
to the
the appropriate
appropriate temperature
temperature control
control table
table (to
(to
increase or
increase or decrease
decrease the
the control
control temperature)
temperature) according
according to
to the
the paper
paper type
type is
is performed
performed to
to obtain
obtain the
the optimal
optimal fixing
fixing quality
quality (fixing
(fixing
performance
performance and
and gloss).
gloss).
The switching of the tables is executed before starting print or during printing. In the case of switching during printing, the printing
is temporarily
is temporarily stopped
stopped toto switch
switch the
the tables,
tables, which
which generates
generates aa waiting
waiting time.
time.
<Viewing this
<Viewing this table>
table>
Yes: The
Yes: The default
default temperature
temperature control
control table
table
-4 to
-4 to +4:
+4: The
The temperature
temperature control
control table
table when
when the
the value
value in
in "Adjust
"Adjust Gloss"
Gloss" is
is changed
changed
-: Not
-: Not used
used
S: Single fixing path
S:
T: Tandem fixing path
any: The
any: The previous
previous control
control temperature
temperature used
used for
for the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
NOTE:
NOTE:
The default control temperatures after the "Productivity Priority" mode is switched to the "Quality Priority" mode are as follows:
164 deg C for the Primary Fixing Assembly 160 deg C for the Secondary Fixing Assembly
162
2. Technical
Explanation
Uncoated paper
(plain paper),
paper), 1-sided
1-sided coated
coated paper
paper
Environ- Uncoated paper (plain paper) 1-sided coated paper
ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
Pri- Sec- Paper weight (g/m 2)
(g/m2) (g/m2)
Paper weight (g/m2)
mary on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
Fix- dary 79 105 to to to to to to to 79 105 to to to to to to to
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
S S S S T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C) ... ... ...
190 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - +4 +4 - - - - - - - +4 +4
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1
160 - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - -2 -2
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -
180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - +2 +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - -
160 - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes -3 -3 - - - - +2 Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4 - - -
174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - +1 - - - -
160 - - - - Yes -2 -2 - - - - - - Yes -2 -2 - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 +2 +2 +1 +1 -1 -3 -3 - - - - - - -1 -3 -3 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any +1 +1 Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - -4 - - - -
164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes - - - - -
150 - - - - -2 - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - -
163
163
2. Technical
Explanation
Environ-
Environ- Uncoated paper (plain
Uncoated paper (plain paper)
paper) 1-sided
coated paper
ment
ment tem-
tem-
perature
perature of
of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Pri-
Pri- Sec-
Sec- Paper
Paper weight (g/m2)
weight (g/m2) Paper
Paper weight (g/m2)
weight (g/m2)
mary
mary on-
on- 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 70
70 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301
Fix-
Fix- dary
dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing
ing Fix-
Fix- 128
128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128
128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As-
As- ing
ing
S S
S S
S S
S T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T
sem-
sem- As-
As-
bly
bly sem-
sem-
(deg
(deg bly
bly
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
--
II-2 it Ai
164 140 -- -- -- -- -
-
- - - - - -2 -2 - - - -
130 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
120 - - - - -3 - - - - - - - - - - - - --
110 - - - - - - - - - - +1 -3 -3 -3 - - - --
any Yes Yes -1 -1 - - - - - - - -4 -4 - - - - -
152 180 - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
170 - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
160 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
150 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
140 - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
130 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
120 - - - - - - - - - +1 Yes - - -- -- -- -- -
110 - - - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - -
any -1 -1 - - - - - - - - -4 - - - - - - --
144 180 - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
170 - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
160 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
150 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
140 - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
130 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
120 - - - - - - - - - Yes - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - -- -- -- --
any -2 -2 - - - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - -
2-sided coated paper,

2-sided coated paper, recycled
recycled paper
paper
Environ-
Environ- 2-sided coated
Recycled paper
ment
ment tem-
tem- N
-I
perature
perature of
of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Pri-
Pri- Sec-
Sec- Paper
Paper weight (g/m2)
weight (g/m2) Paper
Paper weight (g/m2)
weight (g/m2)
mary
mary on-
on- 70
70 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301
Fix-
Fix- dary
dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing
ing Fix-
Fix- 128
128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128
128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As-
As- ing
ing
T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T S
S S
S S
S S
S T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T
sem-
sem- As-
As-
bly
bly sem-
sem-
(deg
(deg bly
bly
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
190 180 - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
164
164
2. Technical
Explanation

Recycled paper
ment tem-
ment tem-
perature of
perature of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Sec-
Pri- Sec- Paper weight (g/m2)
(g/m2)
mary on-
on- 70
70 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
dary
Fix- dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing Fix- 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As- ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
sem- As-
sem-
bly sem-
bly sem-
(deg bly
(deg
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
A
190 160 -- -- - -- - - - +4 +4 - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1
160 - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes - - - - - - - Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - -2 -2
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - +2 +1 +1 - -
160 - - - - +2 Yes Yes - - - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes -3 -3
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - +1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes -2 -2 - - - - - - Yes -2 -2 - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - -1 -3 -3 - - - +2 +1 +1 -1 -3 -3 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - -4 - - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes - - - - -
164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - -2 - - - -
140 - - -2 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3 - - - -
165
165
2. Technical
Explanation

Recycled paper
ment tem-
ment tem-
perature of
perature of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Sec-
(g/m2)
mary on-
on- 70
70 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
dary
Fix- dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing Fix- 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As- ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
sem- As-
sem-
bly sem-
bly sem-
(deg bly
(deg
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
.111 Jili ii
164 110 - +1 -3 -3 -3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - -4 -4 - - - - - +1 Yes -1 -1 - - - - -
152 180 - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
170 - - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
140 - - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
130 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
120 +1 Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
any - -4 - - - - - - - Yes -1 - - - - - - -
144 180 - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
150 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
140 - - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
130 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
120 Yes - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
110 -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
any -4 - - - - - - - - -1 -2 - - - - - - -
Texture paper,
Texture paper, vellum
vellum paper
paper
Environ-
tem-
ment tem-
perature of
perature
20 deg
20 deg C
of
C or
or
Texture paper
Texture paper
r Vellum
ellum paper
pat
more
more
Pri- Sec-
Sec- Paper weight (g/m2)
(g/m2)
mary on-
on- 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
Fix- dary
dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing Fix- 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As- ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
sem-
sem- As-
bly sem-
bly
(deg bly
C)
C) (deg
C)
C)
111_ 1. 1
190 180 - - - - - - - +2 +2 - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - - --
160 - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
150 - - - - - -- - -1 -1 - - - - - -- -- -- --
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - - -
166
166
2. Technical
Explanation
Environ- Texture paper

Texture paper Vellum paper
Vellu
ment tem-
ment tem-
perature of
perature of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Sec-
(g/m2)
mary on-
on- 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
dary
Fix- dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing Fix- 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As- ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
sem- As-
sem-
bly sem-
bly sem-
(deg bly
(deg
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
A
190 130 -- -- - -- - -- - -- -- - -- - -- - -- -- - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes
170 - - +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -3 -3 - - - - - - - - -
150 - - -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - -4 -4 -4 -4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
180 180 +2 +2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 +1 +1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 Yes Yes -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 - - - - - - - Yes Yes - -
150 -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any -4 -4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 -3 -3 - - - - - - - - - - - Yes - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes - - - - -
164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes -1 -1 - - - - -
152 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
167
167
2. Technical
Explanation
Environ- Texture paper

Texture paper Vellum paper
Vellu
ment tem-
ment tem-
perature of
perature of
20 deg
20 deg C
C or
or
more
more
Sec-
(g/m2)
mary on-
on- 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181
181 210
210 257
257 301
301 60
60 to
to 80
80 to
to 106
106 129
129 151
151 181 210 257 301
dary
Fix- dary 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to 79
79 105
105 to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to to
to
ing Fix- 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350 128 150
150 180
180 209
209 256
256 300
300 350
350
As- ing
T T T T T T T T T S
S S
S S
S S
S T T T T T
sem- As-
sem-
bly sem-
bly sem-
(deg bly
(deg
C)
C) (deg
(deg
C)
C)
.111
152 170 -- - - -- - -- - -- -- - -- - -- - -- -- - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
any - - - -- - -- - -- -- - - - - - -- -- - --
144 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
any - - - -- - -- - -- -- - -- - -- - -- -- - --
Film,
Film, label
label paper,
paper, postcard,
postcard, bond
bond paper
paper
Environment
temperature of
of 20
20 deg
deg C Film
Flin Label
Label paper
paper Postcard
Postcard Bond
Bond paper
paper
or
or more
more
Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing As- Secondary Fixing
As- Secondary Fixing T T T T
sembly (deg C) Assembly (deg
sembly (deg C) Assembly (deg C) C)
190 180 - - - -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 - - - -
any - - - -
185 180 +2 +2 +2 -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 - - - -
any - - - -
168
168
2. Technical
Explanation
Environment temperature of
of 20
20 deg
deg C
C Film Label paper
Label paper Postcard
Postcard Bond paper
Bond paper
or
or more
more
Primary Fixing As- Secondary Fixing T T T T
sembly (deg
sembly (deg C) Assembly (deg
C) Assembly (deg C)
C)
180 180 +1 +1 +1 -
170 - - - -
160 Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 - - - -
any - - - -
174 180 - - - -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 - - - -
any - -2 -2 -
164 180 - - - -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 - - - -
any - - - -
152 180 - - - -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 -1 -1 -1 -
any - - - -
144 180 - - - -
170 - - - -
160 - - - -
150 - - - -
140 - - - -
130 - - - -
120 - - - -
110 -2 - - -
any - - - -
●
• Energy Saver Mode
When the
When the machine
machine has
has migrated
migrated toto a
a power-saving
power-saving mode
mode (energy
(energy saver
saver mode/low
mode/low power
power mode/sleep
mode/sleep mode)
mode) from
from standby,
standby, the
the
target control
target control temperature
temperature is
is set
set lower
lower than
than during
during standby,
standby, and
and the
the amount
amount of
of power
power to
to the
the heater
heater is
is reduced.
reduced. In
In addition,
addition, the
the
fixing drive
fixing drive system
system is
is stopped
stopped during
during a a power-saving
power-saving mode.
mode.
169
169
2. Technical
Explanation
Mode type
Mode type Target control
Target control temperature
temperature (deg
(deg C)
C) (with
(with the
the standard
standard mode)
mode)
Primary Fixing
Assembly Secondary Fixing
Assembly
Fixing Roller
Fixing External Heat
Roller External Pressure Belt
Heat Pressure Fixing Roller
Belt Fixing External Heat
Roller External Heat Pressure
Pressure
Roller (Top/
Roller (Top/ Roller (Top/
Roller (Top/ Roller
Roller
Bottom)
Bottom)
_N.
Bottom)
Bottom)
Standby mode
Standby mode 174 190
190 100
100 140 150
150 80
80
Energy saver Set to
Set to -10%
-10% 172 0
0 0
0 140 150
150 80
80
mode
mode Set to
Set to -25%
-25% 172 0
0 0
0 114 113 68
68
Set to
Set to -50%
-50% 143 0
0 0
0 7
7 0
0 40
40
Low power
Low power mode
mode 172 0
0 0
0 32
32 0
0 47
Sleep mode
Sleep mode 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0
■
• Down
Down Sequence
Sequence Control
Control
Down
Down Sequence
Sequence due
due to
to Continuous
Continuous Printing
Printing
When the
When the fixing
fixing temperature
temperature dropped
dropped during
during continuous
continuous printing
printing with
with previous
previous models
models using
using the
the roller
roller fixing
fixing method,
method, the
the print
print
speed was
speed was lowered
lowered or
or printing
printing was
was stopped
stopped until
until the
the target
target temperature
temperature waswas restored
restored (down
(down sequence).
sequence).
This machine
This machine uses
uses two
two External
External Heat
Heat Rollers
Rollers for
for both
both the
the Primary
Primary andand Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assemblies
Assemblies toto prevent
prevent the
the temperature
temperature
from dropping
from dropping during
during continuous
continuous printing,
printing, so
so the
the print
print speed
speed isis not
not lowered
lowered with
with a
a down
down sequence
sequence like
like previous
previous models.
models.
However,
However, printing
printing is
is stopped
stopped in in the
the following
following cases:
cases:
1. When the
1. When the paper
paper width
width is
is switched
switched from
from aa small
small size
size to
to a
a large
large size
size
Reason: To
Reason: To prevent
prevent the
the gloss
gloss ofof the
the image
image edge
edge from
from becoming
becoming too
too high
high due
due to
to the
the temperature
temperature rise
rise on
on the
the edges
edges of
of the
the
Fixing Roller.
Fixing Roller.
2. When
2. When the
the control
control temperature
temperature is is switched
switched toto that
that of
of another
another paper
paper type
type
3. When
3. When a a temperature
temperature increase
increase of of 25
25 deg
deg CC from
from the
the control
control temperature
temperature is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Main
Main Thermistor
Thermistor of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure
Belt
Belt
Reason: To
Reason: To prevent
prevent image
image failure
failure and
and uneven
uneven gloss.
gloss.
Down
Down Sequence
Sequence for
for Low
Low Temperature
Temperature Environments
Environments
When the
When the environment
environment temperature
temperature is
is low,
low, the
the print
print speed
speed is
is lowered or the
lowered or the machine
machine is
is put
put into
into standby
standby to
to prevent
prevent image
image failure.
failure.
Environment temperature 1 I it Description
Description
15 deg C or higher and less than The
The productivity
productivity of
of coated
coated paper
paper that
that is
is 257 g/m22 or
257 g/m or more
more is
is halved
halved
20 deg
20 deg C
C
10 deg
10 deg C
C or
or higher
higher and
and less
less than The productivity
than The productivity of
of all
all paper
paper is
is halved
halved
15 deg
15 deg C
C
Lower than
Lower than 10
10 deg
deg C
C Print operations
Print operations are
are not
not performed,
performed, to
to prevent
prevent toner
toner from
from sticking
sticking to
to the
the inside
inside of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
Down
Down Sequence
Sequence due
due to
to Edge
Edge Temperature
Temperature Rise
Rise
The print
The print speed
speed of
of this
this machine
machine is is 100
100 ppm
ppm for
for 1-sided
1-sided printing
printing of
of A4/LTR
A4/LTR paper.
paper. The
The print
print speed
speed differs
differs according
according to
to the
the paper
paper
size and
size and print
print mode
mode (1-sided/2-sided).
(1-sided/2-sided).
Even with
Even with the
the same
same size
size paper,
paper, ifif the
the paper
paper width
width is
is less
less than
than A4
A4 (279.4
(279.4 mm)
mm) and
and the
the paper
paper weight
weight is
is the
the prescribed
prescribed weight
weight (106
(106
g/m2) or
g/m2) or more,
more, the
the print
print speed
speed is
is decreased
decreased because
because it
it is
is necessary
necessary to
to increase
increase the
the paper
paper interval
interval to
to prevent
prevent fixing
fixing failure
failure due
due to
to
the temperature
the temperature rise
rise at
at the
the edges.
edges.
■
• Paper
Paper Wrap
Wrap Detection
Detection
Paper wrapping
Paper wrapping around
around the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (Pressure
(Pressure Roller)
Roller) is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Inner
Inner Delivery
Delivery Sensor.
Sensor.
When the
When the Inner
Inner Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor detects
detects aa delay
delay of
of the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge,
edge, it
it determines
determines that
that a
a paper
paper wrap
wrap jam
jam has
has occurred,
occurred,
stops the
stops the Fixing
Fixing Motor
Motor with
with a
a brake,
brake, and
and then
then disengages
disengages the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (Pressure
(Pressure Roller)
Roller) from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller to
to perform
perform
jam removal.
jam removal.
The Fixing
The Fixing Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor executes
executes detection
detection of
of remaining
remaining paper
paper atat recovery
recovery from
from paper
paper wrapping
wrapping jam
jam following
following its
its occurrence.
occurrence.
170
2. Technical
Explanation
PS305
PS304
Code
Code Name
PS304 (PS312) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor)
PS305 (PS313) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1)
The sensor
The sensor flag
flag of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor links
links with
with the
the engagement/disengagement
engagement/disengagement of of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit and
and has has a
a
mechanism for moving up and down.
At power-on
At power-on or or recovery
recovery from
from aa jam
jam (when
(when the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit is
is disengaged),
disengaged), itit moves
moves above
above the
the paper
paper feed
feed surface
surface and
and
detects
detects remaining
remaining paper.
paper.
During printing
During printing (when
(when the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit is
is engaged),
engaged), itit is
is positioned
positioned below
below the
the paper
paper feed
feed surface
surface so
so that
that itit does
does not
not affect
affect
the paper
the paper feedability.
feedability.
Fixing Roller
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag

Pressure Belt Unit
Fixing Inlet Guide
PS304 (PS312)
171
1
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Roller
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag

Pressure Belt Unit
Fixing Inlet Guide
PS304 (PS312)
Code
Code Name
PS304 (PS312) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor)
The Secondary
The Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly has
has the
the same
same mechanism,
mechanism, except
except for
for the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit being
being replaced
replaced by
by the
the Pressure
Pressure
Roller.
Control description
1. When the
1. When the Inner
Inner Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor detects
detects aa delay
delay of
of the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge during
during printing,
printing, the
the Fixing
Fixing Motor
Motor is
is stopped
stopped with
with
a brake.
a brake.
•• Jam
Jam code
code
0114: When
0114: When a a jam
jam occurs
occurs in
in the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
0119: When
0119: When a a jam
jam occurs
occurs in
in the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
2. The
2. TheFixing
Fixing Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor detects
detects remaining
remaining paper
paper at
at recovery
recovery from
from aa jam
jam and
and at
at power-on/off.
power-on/off.
•• Jam
Jam code
code
0A13: When
0A13: When a a jam
jam occurs
occurs inin the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
0A18: When
0A18: When a a jam
jam occurs
occurs inin the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
■ External Heat
■External Heat Belt
Belt Engagement/Disengagement
Control
The External
The External Heat
Heat Roller
Roller in
in the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Unit
Unit has
has a a heater,
heater, and
and the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt engages
engages and
and heats
heats the
the Fixing
Fixing
Roller when
Roller when printing
printing to to assist
assist temperature
temperature control.
control.
During standby,
During standby, itit is
is disengaged
disengaged from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller to
to prevent
prevent the
the deformation
deformation of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller due
due to
to pressure.
pressure.
The External
The External Heat
Heat BeltBelt (External
(External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Unit)
Unit) is
is engaged
engaged to/disengaged from the
to/disengaged from the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller by
by the
the transmission
transmission of
of the
the drive
drive
of the
of the External
External Heat
Heat Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement Motor Motor toto the
the Cam
Cam Shaft.
Shaft.
The External
The External Heat
Heat BeltBelt HP Sensor detects
HP Sensor detects the
the home
home position
position to
to control
control engagement/disengagement
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt.
Belt.
172
2. Technical
Explanation
M301
(M306)
Cam Shaft
PS382
(PS383)
Cam Shaft
External Heat Unit
External Heat Belt
Fixing Roller
Code
Code Name
Name
M301 (M306) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roll-
er Pressure Motor)
PS306 (PS314) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller
HP Sensor)
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
E842-0101: External Heat Roller HP error (hardware detection) (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0201: External Heat Roller HP error (hardware
HP error (hardware detection)
detection) (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
E842-0121: External Heat Roller Engagement/Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0221: External
E842-0221: External Heat
Heat Roller
Roller Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement errorerror (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
E842-0122: External Heat Roller Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0222: External Heat Roller Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0123: External Heat Roller Engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0223: External Heat Roller Engagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■
■Pressure Belt Displacement Control (Primary Fixing Assembly)
The Pressure
The Pressure Belt
Belt tends
tends to
to be
be displaced
displaced toward
toward the
the direction
direction of
of the
the shaft
shaft when
when driven.
driven. Since
Since the
the displacement
displacement of of the
the Pressure
Pressure
Belt may damage the Fixing Roller, it is controlled to always detect the position of the Pressure Belt while it is driven
Belt may damage the Fixing Roller, it is controlled to always detect the position of the Pressure Belt while it is driven to to keep
keep itit in
in
the center.
the center.
173
2. Technical
Explanation
M304 Fixing Roller
PS308
Steering Roller
Pressure Belt
PS301
PS302
Swinging Arm
Sensor Arm
Code Name
M304
M304 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor
PS301
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front)
PS302
PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Rear)
PS308
Control
Control description
description
1. Before the
1. Before the drive
drive of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt starts,
starts, the
the home
home position
position of
of the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller Shaft
Shaft (displacement)
(displacement) is
is detected.
detected. The
The
position
position where
where the
the sensor
sensor flag
flag above
above the
the Swing
Swing ArmArm Shaft
Shaft blocks
blocks the
the light
light path
path of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt
Displacement HP Sensor
Displacement Sensor (PS308)
(PS308) is
is the
the home
home position.
position.
M304
PS308
Sensor Flag
174
2. Technical
Explanation
2. The
2. Theposition
positionof
ofthe
thePressure
Pressure Belt
Belt is
is detected
detected using
using the
the Sensor
Sensor Arm
Arm engaged
engaged to
to the
the end
end surface
surface of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt and
and the
the
Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Position
Position Sensor
Sensor (Front/Rear)
(Front/Rear) (PS301/PS302).
(PS301/PS302).
Pressure Belt PS301 Sensor Arm
PS302
[D] [B] [A] [C] [E]
ECIEI
PS302 1
PS302 PS302 0
PS302 PS302 0
PS302 PS302 1
PS302 PS302 1
PS302
PS301 I
PS301 PS301 1
PS301 PS301 0
PS301 PS301 0
PS301 PS301 I
PS301
Code
Code
111
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt position
position
[A]
[A] Center
Center
[B]
[B] Towards the
Towards the far
far side
side
[C]
[C] Towards the
Towards the near
near side
side
[D]
[D] Further towards
Further towards the
the far
far side
side than
than position
position [B]
[B]
[E]
[E] Further towards
Further towards the
the near
near side
side than
than position
position [C]
[C]
175
2. Technical
Explanation
3. When
3. When position
position [B]
[B] or
or [C]
[C] is
is detected,
detected, the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt is
is moved
moved to
to the
the center.
center. The
The drive
drive of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt
Displacement Control Motor
Motor (M304)
(M304) turns
turns the
the Shaft
Shaft Supports
Supports of
of the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller on
on the
the far
far side
side and
and near
near side
side in
in the
the
opposite direction
opposite direction from
from each
each other.
other. This
This tilts
tilts the
the Steering
Steering Roller
Roller Shaft
Shaft and
and moves
moves the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt to
to the
the near
near side
side or
or far
far
side in
side in the
the shaft
shaft direction.
direction.
M304
Pressure Belt
Steering Roller Steering Roller

Support Support
M304
Pressure Belt
/
----YSteering
Support Support
M304
\
a
Pressure Belt

Support Support
176
2. Technical
Explanation
4. When
4. When position
position [D]
[D] or
or [E]
[E] is
is detected,
detected, an
an error
error occurs
occurs and
and the
the drive
drive stops
stops because
because the
the belt
belt displacement
displacement correction
correction will
will not
not
make it in time.
However, when
However, when the
the first
first time
time this
this happens
happens anan error
error avoidance
avoidance jam
jam occurs
occurs (0CF1),
(0CF1), which
which can
can be
be cleared
cleared by
by the
the user.
user.
If belt
If belt displacement is detected
displacement is detected again
again after
after the
the jam
jam is
is cleared,
cleared, an
an error
error occurs
occurs and
and the
the drive
drive stops
stops (and
(and cannot
cannot be
be recovered).
recovered).
Belt full displacement detection
This is the first time that the NO

achine detects full displacement
machine displacemen
of the belt
YES
Retry Error jam (0CF1)
Clear the jam
E007-0101 error (Stops the drive)
Standby
<Related error
codes>
E007-0101: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt displacement error
E007-0110: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor drive error (from far side to near side)
E007-0111: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor Drive error (from near side to far side)
■ External Heat
■External Heat Belt
Belt Displacement
Control
The displacement
The displacement ofof the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt is
is adjusted
adjusted to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage to
to the
the belt.
belt. Adjustment
Adjustment is
is performed
performed by
by tilting
tilting the
the entire
entire
External Heat
External Heat Belt
Belt Unit.
Unit.
The Pressure
The Pressure Belt
Belt is
is controlled
controlled to
to retain
retain a
a center
center position,
position, but
but the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt is
is controlled
controlled by
by displacing
displacing the
the belt
belt so
so that
that
its far
its far side
side and
and near
near side
side change
change forfor a
a prescribed
prescribed time.
time.
PS906
(PS909) External Heat Belt Unit
PS907
(PS910)
PS306
(PS314)
M335
(M336) Fixing Roller
Code
Code Name
PS906 (PS909) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front
Sensor)
PS907 (PS910) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear
Sensor)
PS306 (PS314) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor)
177
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name
M335 (M336) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displace-
ment Control Motor)
The first
The first time
time the
the External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt is
is fully
fully displaced,
displaced, an
an error
error avoidance
avoidance jam
jam occurs
occurs (0CF1),
(0CF1), which
which can
can be
be fixed
fixed by
by the
the user.
user.
If belt
If belt displacement
displacement is
is detected
detected again
again after
after the
the jam
jam is
is cleared,
cleared, an
an error
error occurs
occurs and
and the
the drive
drive stops
stops (and
(and cannot
cannot be
be recovered).
recovered).
Belt full displacement detection
his is the first time that the

This NO
machine detects full displacement
of the belt
YES
•
Retry Error jam (0CF1)
Clear the jam

•
E007-0102(E007-0202) error
(Stops the drive)
Standby
<Related error
codes>
E007-0102: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt full displacement error
E007-0120: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from far side to near side)
E007-0121: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from near side to far side)
E007-0202: Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt full displacement error
E007-0220: Secondary Fixing
Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Displacement
Control Motor
Motor error
error (from
(from far
far side
side to
to near
near side)
side)
E007-0221: Secondary Fixing
Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Belt
Belt Displacement
Control Motor
Motor error
error (from
(from near
near side
side to
to far
far side)
side)
■
■Pressure Belt/Pressure Roller Engagement/Disengagement Control
The Pressure
The Pressure Belt
Belt (Pressure
(Pressure Roller)
Roller) is
is engaged to/disengaged from
engaged to/disengaged from the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller according
according to
to the
the status
status of
of the
the machine,
machine, such
such
as whether it is printing or in standby.
The Pressure
The Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit rises
rises to
to engage/disengage the Fixing
engage/disengage the Fixing Roller
Roller by
by the
the transmission of the
transmission of the drive
drive of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure
Motor to
Motor to the
the Swing
Swing Shaft.
Shaft.
178
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Roller
M303
(M308)
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Unit
Support Mount
Pressure Belt Unit
PS300
(PS316)
Swing Shaft
Sha
PS303
(PS315)
Code
Code Name
Nam:
M303 (M308)
M303 (M308) Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Motor)
Motor)
PS300 (PS315)
PS300 (PS315) Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor)
PS303 (PS316)
PS303 (PS316) Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure Sensor
Sensor (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller Pressure
Pressure Sensor)
Sensor)
The position
The position control
control of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit is
is performed
performed based
based on
on the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt HP Sensor.
Sensor. The
The Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Pressure
Pressure
Sensor detects
Sensor detects the
the status
status of
of engagement/disengagement.
engagement/disengagement.
PS300
Paper
PS303
Swing Shaft
The Secondary
The Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly has
has the
the same
same mechanism,
mechanism, except
except for
for the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt Unit
Unit being
being replaced
replaced by
by the
the Pressure
Pressure
Roller.
Roller.
<Related
<Related error
error codes>
codes>
E842-0111: Pressure
E842-0111: Pressure Belt
Belt Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement error
error (Primary
(Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
E842-0211: Pressure
E842-0211: Pressure Roller
Engagement/Disengagement error
error (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
E842-0112: Pressure
E842-0112: Pressure Belt
Belt Disengagement
Disengagement error
error (Primary
(Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly)
Assembly)
179
2. Technical
Explanation
E842-0212: Pressure Roller Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)

E842-0113 Pressure Belt Engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0213: Pressure Roller Engagement error(Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■
■ Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web Drive
Drive Control
Control
In order
In order to
to prevent
prevent fixing
fixing offset,
offset, toner
toner residue
residue on
on the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller is
is collected
collected on
on the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller and
and then
then removed
removed by
by the
the
Cleaning Web.
Cleaning Web.
Web take-up Roller
Fixing Web Unit
Cleaning Web
Collection Roller
Fixing Roller
The Cleaning
The Cleaning Web
Web is
is wound
wound around
around the
the Web
Web Take-up
Take-up Roller
Roller by
by the
the transmission
transmission of
of the
the drive
drive of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Web
Web Solenoid
Solenoid to
to the
the
Web Take-up
Web Take-up Roller
Roller Drive
Drive Gear
Gear via
via the
the One-way
One-way Clutch.
Clutch.
Cleaning Web
Web take-up Roller
Ne.
Fixing Web Solenoid

(SL302/SL303)
Code
Code
SL302 (SL303)
lir Name
Primary Fixing Web Solenoid (Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid)
180
2. Technical
Explanation
Amount of
Amount of web
web taken-up
taken-up
Condition
Condition Paper size Number of
Number of times
times Web
Web Solenoid
Solenoid is
is turned
turned ON
ON
At power-on*1 - Twice a second
At jam recovery
At Fixing Roller refresh
At printing Small*2 Once every two sheets fed
Large*3 Once every sheet fed
*1: Only when jam history remains (when the power is turned OFF and then ON without performing jam removal)
*2: Paper whose length is LTR or shorter
*3: Paper whose length is longer than LTR
■ Cleaning Web
■Cleaning Web Level
Level Detection
Detection
Whether the
Whether the level
level of
of Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web is
is low
low is
is detected.
detected.
Control
Control description
description
1. The Cleaning
1. The Cleaning Web
Web that
that was
was wound
wound around
around the
the Web
Web Feed
Feed Roller
Roller when
when itit is
is first
first started to be
started to be used
used is
is wound
wound around
around the
the Web
Web
Take-up Roller as copying and printing is performed.
2. When
2. When the
the remaining
remaining Cleaning
Cleaning Web
Web isis less
less than
than the
the prescribed
prescribed amount,
amount, the
the Web
Web Level
Level Detection
Detection Arm
Arm 11 is
is moved
moved in
in the
the
direction
direction of
of the
the arrow
arrow by
by the
the cut-off
cut-off that
that alerts
alerts the
the level
level which
which is
is provided
provided at at the
the edge
edge of
of the
the Cleaning
Cleaning Web.
Web. Then,
Then, the
the Web
Web
Level Detection
Level Detection Arm
Arm 22 linked
linked to
to the
the Web
Web Level
Level Detection
Detection Arm
Arm 1 1 blocks
blocks the
the light
light path
path of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Web
Web Absence
Absence Advance
Advance
Notice Sensor. This sensor displays the warning "Cleaning web is nearly low (Printing is possible)" on the Control Panel.
Cleaning web cut-off
Web take-up Roller
Edge of the cleaning web Edge of the cleaning web
PS311
(PS320)
Cleaning Web
Web feed Roller Web Remaining Level Detection Arm 2
Web Remaining Level Detection Arm 1
181
1
2. Technical
Explanation
If printing
3. If printing continues
continues without
without replacing
replacing the
the Fixing
Fixing Web,
Web, the
the machine
machine stops
stops when
when approximately
approximately 48,000
48,000 sheets
sheets (converted
(converted to
to
A4/LTR) have
A4/LTR) have been
been printed,
printed, and
and displays
displays the
the message
message "Replace
"Replace cleaning
cleaning web
web unit"
unit" on
on the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
CAUTION:
Take care,
Take care, as
as printing
printing cannot
cannot be
be performed
performed ifif the
the machine
machine is
is turned
turned OFF
OFF and
and then
then ON
ON again.
again.
<Related
<Related service
service modes>
modes>
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB
: Primary Fixing Web Parts Counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX2-WEB
:: Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Web
Web Parts
Parts Counter
Counter
■ Cleaning Web
■Cleaning Web Engagement/Disengagement
Control
When cleaning the Fixing Roller, the Cleaning Web is engaged to the Collection Roller by the Web Roller.
When the Fixing Roller is stopped, the Web Roller is disengaged from the Collection Roller to prevent deformation of the Fixing
Roller due
Roller due to
to pressure.
pressure. (It
(It is
is disengaged
disengaged from
from the
the entire
entire Web
Web Unit.)
Unit.)
The Web
The Web Roller
Roller is
is engaged
engaged to/disengaged
to/disengaged from
from the
the Collection
Collection Roller
Roller by
by transmitting
transmitting the
the drive
drive of
of the
the Web
Web Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor to
to the
the
Swing Shaft.
Swing Shaft.
The Web
The Web HP
HP Sensor
Sensor detects
detects thethe position
position to
to control
control the
the engagement/disengagement
the Web
Web Roller.
Roller.
M302
(M307)
Swing Shaft
Web Roller
Fixing Roller PS309

(PS318)
Code
Code Name
M302 (M307) Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor)
PS309 (PS318) Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor)
182
182
2. Technical
Explanation
Engagement/Disengagement Operation
Engagement/Disengagement Operation Conditions
Conditions
[A] Engaged while the Fixing Roller is driving (to remove toner remaining on the Collection Roller)
[A]
[B] Disengaged
[B] Disengaged while
while the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller is
is stopped
stopped (to
(to prevent
prevent deformation
deformation of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller due
due to
to pressure)
pressure)
[A] [B]
VI
Swing Shaft
Web Roller
Collection Roller
Fixing Roller
Sensor Flag
PS309 (PS318)
Code
Code Name
PS309 (PS318) Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor)
<Related
<Related error
error code>
code>
E842-0131: Fixing Web engagement/disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0231: Fixing Web engagement/disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0132: Fixing Web disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0232: Fixing Web disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0133: Fixing Web engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0233: Fixing Web engagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■
• Refresh Roller Engagement/Disengagement Control
When a
When a large
large volume
volume of of paper
paper is
is fed
fed continuously,
continuously, streaks
streaks ofof damage
damage may
may occur
occur on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller. The
The Fixing
Fixing
Roller is
Roller is refreshed
refreshed atat the
the prescribed
prescribed timing
timing to
to remove
remove this
this damage.
damage.
The Fixing
The Fixing Roller
Roller is
is rotated
rotated for
for the
the prescribed
prescribed amount
amount ofof time
time with
with the
the Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller (that
(that has
has a
a rough
rough surface)
surface) engaged
engaged toto the
the
Fixing Roller,
Fixing Roller, to
to scrape
scrape thethe surface
surface ofof the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller and
and remove
remove the
the damage.
damage.
183
2. Technical
Explanation
.\
Refresh Roller Refresh Roller
Fixing Roller
K --. , Fixing Roller
Scar
The engagement
The engagement andand disengagement
disengagement of of the
the Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller is
is performed
performed with
with the
the drive
drive of
of the
the Web Pressure Motor,
Web Pressure Motor, as
as is
is the
the
engagement
engagement andand disengagement
disengagement of of the
the web.
web.
The position
The position control
controlofofthe
theRefresh
RefreshRoller
Rollerisisperformed
performedbased
basedon onthe
theWeb
WebHP
HP Sensor.
Sensor. The
The Refresh
Refresh HP Sensor also
HP Sensor also detects
detects that
that
the Refresh
the Refresh Roller
Roller is
is in
in the
the prescribed
prescribed engagement
engagement position.
position.
The Refresh
The Refresh Roller
Roller is
is cleaned
cleaned by
by air
air blown
blown from
from the
the Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller Air
Air Nozzle to maintain
Nozzle to maintain the
the refresh
refresh performance
performance of
of the
the Refresh
Refresh
Roller.
Roller.
M307
(M302) Web Unit
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
Swing Shaft
PS382
(PS383)
Refresh Roller
PS309
(PS318)
Code
Code Name
Name
M302 (M307)
M302 (M307) Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Web
Web Pressure
Pressure Motor
Motor (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Web
Web Pressure Motor)
Pressure Motor)
PS309 (PS318)
Primary Fixing Web
Web HP Sensor (Secondary
HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing
Fixing Web
Web HP Sensor)
HP Sensor)
PS382 (PS383)
Primary Fixing Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller HP
HP Sensor
Sensor (Secondary
(Secondary Fixing
Fixing Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller HP
HP Sensor)
Sensor)
184
2. Technical
Explanation
Transition of
Transition of Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement States
States
[A] During
[A] During standby/printing
standby/printing
The Web
The Web Roller
Roller (Web
(Web Unit)
Unit) and
and Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller are
are disengaged
disengaged from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller.
[B] During
[B] During cleaning
cleaning of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
The Web
The Web Roller
Roller (Web
(Web Unit)
Unit) is
is engaged
engaged to
to the
the Collection
Collection Roller.g
Roller.g The
The Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller is
is not
not engaged
engaged to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller.
[C] During
[C] During refresh
refresh
The Web
The Web Roller
Roller (Web
(Web Unit)
Unit) and
and Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller are
are engaged
engaged to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller.
Roller.
[A] [B] [C]
Web Roller
Web Roller Web Roller
OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
PS382
(PS383)
PS309 Collection Roller Fixing Roller
(PS318)
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air
Refresh Roller Refresh Roller Refresh Roller
Nozzle
Swing Shaft
Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Fixing Roller
Execution timing
Execution timing
Whether to
Whether to execute
execute the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation isis determined
determined at at the
the following
following timing.
timing. If
If determined
determined to to "execute",
"execute", refresh
refresh operations
operations will
will
be
be executed.
executed. The
The execution
execution timetime differs
differs according
according toto the
the refresh
refresh level
level setting
setting value
value described
described below.
below.
•• When
When starting
starting to
to interrupt
interrupt during
during printing
printing (*1)
(*1)
•• When
When switching
switching the
the paper
paper size
size during
during printing
printing (from
(from aa smaller
smaller paper
paper size
size to
to aa larger
larger paper
paper size*2)
size*2)
•• At
At the
the last
last rotation
rotation after
after printing
printing
•• At
At warm-up
warm-up on on the
the first
first start
start up
up ofof the
the day
day (when
(when thethe surface
surface temperature
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller is
is lower
lower than
than 50
50 deg
deg C)
C)
*1: When
*1: When the
the continuous
continuous drum
drum rotation
rotation time
time reaches
reaches 4400
4400 seconds
seconds (which
(which corresponds
corresponds to
to approx.
approx. 4000
4000 to
to 5500
5500 sheets
sheets of
of
continuous printing
continuous printing of
of small
small size
size paper),
paper), the
the printing
printing is
is stopped,
stopped, and
and cleaning
cleaning of
of the
the Primary
Primary Charging
Charging Wire
Wire is
is forcibly
forcibly executed.
executed.
Refreshing operation
Refreshing operation isis also
also executed
executed atat the
the same
same time.
time.
*2: Determined
*2: Determined based
based onon an
an internally
internally referenced
referenced table
table for
for refresh
refresh control.
control.
185
185
2. Technical
Explanation
Job A Job B Job C
•• • PRINT • • • •• • PRINT • • • •• • LAST

LAST PRINT
PRINT LSTR
►O
A
Cleaning of the Change of the paper size

primary charging wire (from small size to large size)
V
Nth PRINT STOP !! I N+1th
STOP N+1thPRINT
PRINT• • • N+9th PRINT STOP !! I N+10th
STOP N+10thPRINT
PRINT • •
A
p® A
p®
Is refresh sequence No
to be executed?
Yes
Refresh sequence
END
Conditions
Conditions for
for execution
execution
When the
When the total
total value
value of
of the
the refresh
refresh counter*
counter* reaches
reaches the
the specified
specified value
value (the
(the specified
specified value
value differs
differs according
according to
to the
the refresh
refresh level
level
setting value
setting value described
described below)
below)
*: The
*: The number
number counted
counted for
for this
this counter
counter differs
differs according
according to
to the
the paper
paper type
type and
and size,
size, and
and a
a maximum
maximum of of two
two is
is added
added for
for each
each
sheet fed.
sheet fed.
Example:
Paper size Number counted

Number counted Paper size Number counted
Number counted
A5R 1
1 STMTR 1
1
A4R 2 LTRR 2
A4 1
1 LTR 1
1
A3 2 LGL 2
LGR 2
<Refresh level setting for the Fixing Roller>

The following
The following service
service modes
modes andand Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration items
items enable
enable to
to change
change the
the timing
timing to
to start
start the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation and
and the
the
execution time.
execution time.
Service mode (Lv. 2):

COPIER > OPTION > USER > FX-CLNLV
Settings/Registration:
Settings/Registration >
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance >
> Maintenance
Maintenance >
> Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller Auto
Auto Refresh
Refresh Level
Level
NOTE:
The above Settings/Registration item is displayed on the "Maintenance" screen by setting "1" for the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > IMGC-ADJ
Setting range:
Setting range: -5
-5 to
to +5
+5 (default:
(default: 0)
0)
186
2. Technical
Explanation
The setting
The setting value
value changes
changes the
the timing
timing to
to start
start the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation (refresh
(refresh counter
counter threshold
threshold value)
value) and
and the
the execution
execution time.
time.
Refresh level setting values -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Primary Minimum operation counter - 7500 7500 500 500 500 500 250 250 250 250
Fixing As- threshold value
sembly Refresh time per sheet None Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- High High
mal mal mal mal mal mal mal mal
Secondary Minimum operation counter - - 7500 - 2000 1000 500 - 250 250 250
Fixing As- threshold value
sembly Refresh time per sheet None None Low None Low Low Nor- None Nor- High High
mal mal
CAUTION:
Advancing the
Advancing the timing
timing to
to start
start the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation or
or lengthening
lengthening the
the execution
execution time
time may
may abrade
abrade the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing
Roller and
Roller and accelerate
accelerate the
the wear.
wear.
<Related
<Related service
service modes>
modes>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX1-CL-E
: Executing the refresh operation of the Primary Fixing Roller
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2-CL-E
: Executing the refresh operation of the Secondary Fixing Roller
<Related
<Related Setting/Registration
Setting/Registration modes>
modes>
> Maintenance
Maintenance >
> Refresh
Refresh Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
NOTE:
■
■Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw Engagement/Disengagement
Control (Secondary
(Secondary
Fixing Assembly)
In the
In the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly, the Fixing
Assembly, the Fixing Separation Claw engages
Separation Claw engages the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller to
to separate thin paper
separate thin paper from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing
Roller in order to prevent thin paper from wrapping around the Pressure Roller.
In addition,
In addition, the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw isis disengaged
disengaged from
from the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller according
according to
to the
the type
type of
of paper
paper fed
fed to
to prevent
prevent
damage
damage on on the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller by
by the
the Separation
Separation Claw.
Claw.
187
Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw = Engagement
Condition: Coated paper (180g/m2 or less)
Plain paper (150g/m2 or less)
Fixing Separation
Fixing Separation Claw
Claw = Disengagement
Condition: Coated paper (181g/m2 or more)
Plain paper (151g/m2 or more)
Fixing Roller
r
Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
Separation Claw Separation Claw

Separation Claw
Pressure Pressure Pressure Roller
Roller Roller
Execution timing
Interval
Interval Condition
Condition Condition
Condition
During printing Engagement When the
When the humidity
humidity is
is less
less than
than 65
65 %
%
g/m22
Plain paper: Less than 210 g/m
Coated paper:
Coated paper: Less
Less than
than 257 g/m22
257 g/m
Textured paper:
Textured paper: Less
Less than
than 210 g/m22
210 g/m
Transparency, Film, Labels
When the
When the humidity
humidity is
is 65
65 %
% or
or more
more
g/m22
Plain paper: Less than 210 g/m
Coated paper:
Coated paper: Less
Less than
than 301 g/m22
301 g/m
Textured paper:
Textured paper: Less
Less than
than 257 g/m22
257 g/m
Transparency, Film, Labels
Disengagement
Disengagement Paper other
Paper other than
than the
the above
above
The Fixing
The Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw isis engaged/disengaged
engaged/disengaged byby the
the drive
drive of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw Disengagement
Disengagement
Solenoid (SL412).
Solenoid (SL412).
In addition
In addition to
to separating
separating thin
thin paper,
paper, the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw is
is also
also engaged/disengaged in the
engaged/disengaged in the following
following cases
cases to
to detect
detect errors
errors
and notify
and notify error
error codes.
codes.
•• At
At power-on
power-on
•• At
At recovery
recovery from
from sleep
sleep mode
mode
•• When
When thethe door
door is
is closed
closed
<Related error
codes>
E197-02A2: Fixing
E197-02A2: Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw Disengagement
Disengagement Solenoid
Solenoid connection
connection error
error
188
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■ Pressure
Pressure Refresh
Refresh Roller
Control (Secondary
(Secondary
Fixing Assembly)
Fixing Assembly)
•• Refreshing
Refreshing to to remedy
remedy damage
damage from from the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw
Since the
Since the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw is is engages
engages to to the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller when
when separating
separating thin
thin paper,
paper, the
the claw
claw damages
damages thethe
surface of
surface of the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller.
Roller.
The Pressure
The Pressure Roller
Roller is
is periodically
periodically refreshed
refreshed toto prevent
prevent image
image failure
failure due
due to
to damage
damage from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw.
Claw.
•• Refreshing
Refreshing to to remedy
remedy the
the accumulation
accumulation of of foreign
foreign matter
matter on
on the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller
When a
When a large
large volume
volume ofof paper
paper isis fed,
fed, paper
paper dust
dust and
and toner
toner components
components can can get
get stuck
stuck on
on the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller.
Roller.
When these
When these are
are accumulated,
accumulated, uneven
uneven gloss
gloss may
may appear
appear on
on the
the image
image after
after fixing
fixing due
due to
to the
the change
change inin the
the releasing
releasing and
and
fixing performance of toner.
The Pressure
The Pressure Roller
Roller is
is periodically
periodically refreshed
refreshed toto prevent
prevent this.
this.
The Pressure
The Pressure Roller
Roller is
is refreshed
refreshed byby being
being engaged
engaged with
with the
the Pressure
Pressure Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller for
for approximately
approximately 5 5 seconds
seconds each
each time.
time.
Execution timing
During printing.
Conditions
Conditions for
for execution
execution
The above
The above two
two refresh
refresh operations
operations are
are executed
executed when
when either
either of
of them
them reaches
reaches thethe following
following threshold
threshold value,
value, with
with the
the decision
decision
made in parallel.
•• When
When the
the Fixing
Fixing Separation
Separation Claw
Claw has
has been
been engaged
engaged for
for 500
500 seconds
seconds oror more
more (total
(total time)
time)
•• When
When the
the counter
counter that
that counts
counts according
according to
to the
the paper
paper length
length (small
(small size
size advanced
advanced by by 1
1 and
and large
large size
size advanced
advanced byby 2)
2) reaches
reaches
500 sheets
500 sheets or
or more
more
<Refresh level setting for the Pressure Roller>

The following
service modes
modes and
and Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration items
items enable
enable to
to change
change the
the refresh
refresh frequency
frequency and
and the
the refresh
refresh time.
time.
Service mode (Lv. 2):

COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > FXPCLNLV
> Maintenance
Maintenance >
> Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller Auto
Auto Refresh
Refresh Level
Level
NOTE:
Setting range:
Setting range: -5
-5 to
to +5
+5 (default:
(default: 0)
0)
The setting
The setting value
value changes
changes the
the timing
timing to
to start
start the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation (refresh
(refresh counter
counter threshold
threshold value)
value) and
and the
the execution
execution time.
time.
Refresh level
Refresh level setting
setting values
values -5
-5 -4
-4 -3 -2 -1 0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Refreshing the damage Refresh frequency - 6000 500 500 - 500 250 - 500 500 100
by Separation Claw (seconds/refresh)
Time for each re- - 18 1.5 3 - 3 1.5 - 5 10 5
fresh (seconds)
Refreshing the soiling Refresh frequency - 6000 500 - 500 500 - 250 500 500 100
on the surface (sheets/refresh)
Time for each re- - 18 1.5 - 3 3 - 1.5 5 10 5
fresh (seconds)
CAUTION:
Advancing the
Advancing the timing
timing to
to start
start the
the refresh
refresh operation
operation or
or lengthening
lengthening the
the execution
execution time
time may
may abrade
abrade the
the surface
surface of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing
Roller and
Roller and accelerate
accelerate the
the wear.
wear.
189
2. Technical
Explanation
<Related
<Related service
service modes>
modes>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX-CLN
:: Refresh
Refresh operation
operation for
for the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller (glossy
(glossy streaks)
streaks)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2PR-CL
: Refresh Operation for the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller (image failure)
NOTE:
Make sure to output a 2-sided solid Y-color PG after executing FX2PR-CL.
■
■Separation Air Blow Control (Primary Fixing Assembly)
With the Primary Fixing Assembly, air is blown to the leading edge of the paper when performing fixing separation to achieve
separation of
separation of thin
thin paper.
paper.
Primary Fixing
Paper Pressure Belt
Execution timing
When thin paper reaches the primary fixing nip outlet
Control
Control description
description
An air
An air pump
pump is
is started
started to
to blow
blow air
air once
once for
for 150
150 msec.
msec.
■
■Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Blow Control
Air is blown to the Refresh Roller to prevent the Refresh Roller from becoming clogged.
190
2. Technical
Explanation
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
Primary Fixing
Refresh Roller
Execution timing
This is executed at the same time as the Fixing Roller refresh operation.
Control
Control description
description
1.
1. The Air Pump is started, and the Refresh Roller Air Cleaning Nozzle blows air to the Refresh Roller while reciprocating, by
periodically turning a solenoid valve ON and OFF*.
*: Cycles
*: Cycles of
of blowing
blowing for
for 50
50 msec
msec thenthen waiting
waiting for
for 300
300 msec
msec
When refreshing the Refresh Roller of the Primary Fixing Assembly and Secondary Fixing Assembly at the same time, air
is blown
is blown to
to both
both Refresh
Refresh Rollers
Rollers alternately,
alternately, because
because ifif the
the solenoid
solenoid valves
valves are
are opened
opened at
at the
the same
same time
time the
the air
air pressure
pressure
drops
drops and
and the
the cleaning
cleaning ability
ability is
is lowered.
lowered.
2. When
2. When the
the Refresh
Refresh Roller
Roller is
is disengaged,
disengaged, thethe Air
Air Pump
Pump andand motor
motor are
are shut
shut down
down to
to complete
complete the
the operation.
operation.
191
■ Protection Function
● Protection Circuit
Duplex
Fixing Dup ex
Feed Driver PCB
Primary Fixing Assembly (UN311)
(UN311
DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) CPU
Thermoswitch
Mai
Main ISub
Sub Sub
Sub
External Heat
Upper Roller Excessive temperature
increase detection
Mein
Main Sub ISub
Sub (software detection)
External Heat
ADC FPGA
Lower Roller
Main
IIM
Fixing Roller Sub
Main Sub
WD
Pressure Belt
moni oring
monitoring
circuit
y
Primary Fixing
Outer Driver PCB Divider circuit
(UN304)
Connection
VVVVVVVV detection
Excessive temperature
increase detection
(hardware detection)
V
Heater
error detection
Thermistor
tear detection
CPU
moni oring
monitoring
✓ V circuit
Heater error detection

Triac
short detection
VV
OR
Heater
Heater OFF circuit
control circuit 41
AC Relay AC Relay 41 Relay

FET Relay OFF circuit
(H) (N) control circuit 411
Relay OFF circuit Relay

FET
control circuit 4
Paper wind
detection circuit
Primary Fixing
Heater Driver PCB Sensor failure FPGA
detection circuit Error detection
(UN306)
192
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB
Secondary Fixing Assembly (UN311) DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) CPU
CPU
— —
Thermoswitch
Main Sub l Sub
External Heat
Upper Roller Excessive temperature
increase detection
Main Sub l Sub (software detection)
External Heat
ADC FPGA
Lower Roller
Main
Sub
Fixing Roller
Pressure Main
Sub
WD
I
Roller — moni oring
monitoring
circuit
L -1
y m
Secondary Fixing
Driver PCB
Outer Dnver Divider circuit
(UN305)
• Connection
• detection
VVVVVVVV
Excessive temperature
Heater
increase detection
(hardware detection) error detection
CPU
monitoring
circuit
• Heater error detection

Triac
mac
short detection
OR
Heater
Heater OFF circuit
control circuit
AC
AC FRelay ACRelay
elay AC Relay Relay OFF
OFF circuit
drcuit Relay
FET
(H) (N) control circuit
control circuit I
Relay
FET Relay OFF
OFF circuit
drcuit
control circuitcircuit 4
control
Paper wind
detection circuit
Secondary Fixing Sensor failure FPGA

Heater Driver PCB detection circuit Error detection
(UN307)
Name
Name Function
Function Remarks
Remarks
CPU Monitoring
CPU Monitoring Circuit
Circuit Monitors erratic
Monitors erratic behavior
behavior of
of the
the CPU
CPU
Connection detection
Connection detection Detects the
Detects the disconnection
disconnection of
of thermistor
thermistor connector
connector
Detection of
Detection of heater
heater error
error Detects abnormal
Detects abnormal temperature
temperature rise
rise of
of the
the heater
heater
Detection of
Detection of External
External Heat
Heat Roller
Roller Detects the engagement of the External Heat Roller when the Fixing Mo-
HP tor is
tor is Stopped
Stopped
Prevents the External Heat Roller from staying engaged on the Fixing
Roller.
Detection of
Detection of triac
triac short-circuit
short-circuit Detects damage/short-circuit
Detects damage/short-circuit of
of triac
triac
Detection of
Detection of abnormal
abnormal temperature Detects abnormal
temperature Detects abnormal temperature
temperature rise
rise of
of the
the heater
heater
rise (hardware
rise (hardware detection)
detection)
Thermistor open
Thermistor open circuit
circuit detection
detection Detects the
Detects the disconnection/connection
disconnection/connection status
status of
of thermistor
thermistor Primary Fixing Assem-
bly only
Detection of
Detection of heater
heater error
error (hardware Detects abnormal
(hardware Detects abnormal temperature
temperature of
of heater
heater
detection)
detection)
Heater Control
Heater Control Circuit
Circuit Heater Off
Heater Off
Relay Control
Relay Control Circuit
Circuit AC Relay Off
193
193
2. Technical
Explanation
Name
Name 1 Function
Function Remarks
Remarks
Heater Off
Heater Off Circuit
Circuit Heater Off
Heater Off
Relay Off
Relay Off Circuit
Circuit AC Relay Off
AC Relay
AC Relay Blocks AC Line
Thermoswitch Blocks AC Line
Detection of
Detection of abnormal
abnormal temperature Detects abnormal
temperature Detects abnormal temperature
temperature rise
rise of
of thermistor
thermistor (by
(by software
software detection),
detection),
rise (software
rise (software detection)
detection) Heater/AC Relay
Heater/AC Relay Off
Off
194
2. Technical
Explanation
Pickup Feed System
0 Overview
■
■ Specifications
Specifications
Item
Item Description
Description ■
Paper storage
Paper storage method
method Front-loading method
Front-loading method
Pickup Assembly
Pickup Assembly 2 Decks
2 Decks (Right,
(Right, Left)
Left)
Long Sheet
Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option)
Tray-Al (Option)
Paper size Deck (Right, Left) B5/B5R to
B5/B5R to 330
330 mm
mm xx 487
487 mm
mm (13"
(13" xx 19.2")
19.2")
60 g/m22 to
60 g/m to 350 g/m22
350 g/m
Long Sheet
Tray-Al (Option) Length: 487.7
Length: 487.7 mm
mm to
to 762
762 mm,
mm, Width:
Width: 210
210 mm
mm to
to
330.2 mm
64 g/m22 to
64 g/m to 256 g/m22
256 g/m
Stacking capacity
Stacking capacity Deck (Right, Left) 2000
2000 sheets
sheets (80
(80 g/m2)
g/m2)
Long Sheet
Tray-Al (Option) 1 sheet
1 sheet
Paper size switching Deck (Right,
Deck (Right, Left)
Left) By user *1
Long Sheet
Tray-Al (Option) By user *1
Pickup method
Pickup method Air separation
method
Paper feed
Paper feed reference
reference Center reference
Center reference
Display of
Display of Recording
Recording Pa-
Pa- Yes (Control Panel/Level LED)
per Level
per Level
Transparency detection
Transparency detection Yes (Transmissive
Yes (Transmissive Sensor)
Sensor)
Heavy Paper
Heavy Paper Auto
Auto Detec- Yes (Displacement
Detec- Yes (Displacement Sensor)
Sensor)
tion
tion
Double Feed
Double Feed Detection
Detection Yes (Ultrasonic
Yes (Ultrasonic Sensor)
Sensor)
Paper Length Detection Yes (Prism
Yes (Prism Reflection
Reflection Sensor)
Sensor)
2-Sided Copying
2-Sided Copying Method
Method Through-pass
Through-pass duplexing
duplexing
Related Settings/Regis-
Related Settings/Regis- Display Remaining
Display Remaining Paper
Paper Message
Message
tration *2 Inch Entry
Cassette Auto
Cassette Auto Selection
Selection ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Select Paper
Select Paper Type
Type
Paper Type
Paper Type Selection
Selection Screen
Screen Priority
Priority
LTRR/STMT Original
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Selection
Multi-Purpose Tray
Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Defaults
Register Custom
Register Custom Size
Size
Offset Jobs
Offset Jobs
Job
Job Separator
Separator Between
Between Jobs
Jobs
Job
Job Separator
Separator Between
Between Copies
Copies
*1: Input
*1: Input from
from the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel
*2: For
*2: For details,
details, refer
refer to
to the
the user
user manual.
manual.
195
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Parts
Parts Configuration
Configuration
● Unit (Main
• Unit (Main Station)
Station)
Registration Unit
ITB Unit Pre-registration Unit
Secondary Transfer
Outer Belt Unit
Pre-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing Feed Pre-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing
Right Unit
Left Unit
--nm_r—r-
um'
Main Station
Station Duplex MainStation
Duplex Main
Feed Left Unit
Station Duplex
Duplex
Feed Middle Unit Left Pickup Unit
1
Lower Feed Unit Right Pickup Unit

1
Main Station Duplex Right Deck Vertical Path Unit
Left Deck
Feed Right Unit
196
196
2. Technical
Explanation
● Unit (Sub
• Unit (Sub Station)
Station)
Secondary Fixing
Secondary FixingAssembly TandemFeed
Assembly Tandem Feed Unit
Unit
Delivery/Reverse FixingMerging
Unit Fixing
Delivery/Reverse Unit Merging Path
Path Unit Bypass Feed Unit Primary Fixing Assembly
Duplex DecurlerUnit
Duplex Decurler SubStation
Unit Sub Station Duplex
Duplex Sub Station Duplex
Feed Left Unit Feed Right Unit
197
2. Technical
Explanation
● Sensors (Main
• Sensors (Main Station)
Station)
[15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
[23] [22] [21] [20] [19]
[24] [25] [26] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
No. Name Code No.

AO. ... Name ... ... Code
Mode
[1] Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor PS701 Double Feed
Double Feed Sensor
Sensor (Transmission)
(Transmission) UN122
[12]
[2] Left Deck Merging Sensor PS160
PS160 Double Feed
[12]Double Feed Sensor
Sensor (Reception)
(Reception) UN123
[3]
[3] Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 1
1 PS161 [13]
[13] Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 PS139
PS139
[4]
[4] Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Left PS210
(Left PS210 [14] Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 PS140
Rear)
Rear)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Left
(Left PS212 [15] Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 PS141
Front)
[5]
[5] Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor PS214 [19]
[19] Registration Front
Registration Front Sensor
Sensor PS146
(Right Rear)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor PS217 [20]
[20] Registration Sensor
Registration Sensor PS151
(Right Front)
[6]
[6] Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 PS162 [21]
[21] Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Outlet
Outlet Sensor
Sensor PS166
PS166
[7] Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor PS601
PS601 [22] Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 PS172
[8] Right Deck Merging Sensor PS163
PS163 [23] Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 PS200
PS200
[9]
[9] Vertical Path
Vertical Path Sensor
Sensor PS164 [24] Duplex Standby
Duplex Standby Sensor
Sensor 3
3 PS171
[10] POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Sensor
Sensor PS220 [25]
[25] Duplex Standby
Sensor 2
2 PS170
[11] Transparency Sensor
Transparency Sensor (Rear)
(Rear) PS137 [26]
[26] Duplex Standby
Sensor 11 PS169
PS169
198
198
2. Technical
Explanation
No. Name
ame Code No. Name Code
[11] Transparency Sensor
Transparency Sensor (Front)
(Front) PS138
PS138
● Sensor (Sub
• Sensor (Sub Station)
Station)
[15] [14] [13] [9] [12] [8]
[8] [7]
[7] [6] [11] [5] [10] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[16] [17] [19]

[19] [26]
[26] [27]
[27] [18]
[18] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25]
No. 1111 Name 1- Code No. liir Name Code

[1] Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS304
PS304 [15] Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 3
3 PS339
PS339
[2] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 PS305
PS305 [16] Delivery/Reverse Front
Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor
Sensor PS342
PS342
[3] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 PS307
PS307 [17] Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 PS335
PS335
[4]
[4] Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 1
1 PS326
PS326 [18]
[18] Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Sensor
Sensor 2
2 PS336
PS336
[5]
[5] Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 2
2 PS327 [19] Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Sensor
Sensor PS340
PS340
[6]
Inlet Sensor
Sensor PS312 [20] Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Rear
Rear Sensor
Sensor PS341
PS341
[7] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 PS313 [21] Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS344
PS344
[8]
Secondary Fixing Inner
Inner Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor 2
2 PS317
PS317 [22]
[22] Duplex Standby
Sensor 6
6 PS347
PS347
[9] Merging Path
Merging Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor PS325
PS325 [23] Duplex Standby
Sensor 5
5 PS346
PS346
[10]
[10] Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 11 PS322 [24] Duplex Standby
Sensor 4
4 PS345
PS345
[11] Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 2
2 PS323
PS323 [25]
[25] Duplex Path
Duplex Path Sub
Sub Station
Station Outlet
Outlet Sensor
Sensor PS350
PS350
[12]
[12] Merging Path
Merging Path Lower
Lower Sensor
Sensor PS321
PS321 [26]
[26] Reverse Remaining
Reverse Remaining Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor (Left)
(Left) PS919
PS919
[13] Delivery Sensor 1 PS337
PS337 [27] Reverse Remaining Paper Sensor (Right) PS918
PS918
[14] Delivery Sensor 2 PS338
PS338
199
199
2. Technical
Explanation
● Roller (Main
• Roller (Main Station)
Station)
[21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14]
[26] [25] [24] [23] [22]
[28] [30] [1] [3]

[3] [32] [6] [33]
[6] [33] [7]
[7] [9] [11] [13]
[27] [29] [31] [2] [4] [5]
[5] [8]
[8] [10] [12]
Code
Code Name
Name Code
Code Name
Name II Code
Code di Name
Name ii
[1] Left Deck Belt Drive Roller [12] Right Deck Merging Roller [23]
[23] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
* 2: Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Roller
Roller [13]
[13] Vertical Path
Vertical Path Feed
Feed Roller
Roller [24]
[24] Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller
Roller
[3]
[3] Left Deck Pullout Auxiliary Roller [14] POD Deck Path Feed Roller [25] Fixing Feed Drive Roller 1
[4] Left Deck Merging Roller [15]
[15] Feed Roller 1 [26] Fixing Feed Drive Roller 2
[5]
[5] Lower Feed Roller 1 [16]
[16] Feed Roller 2 [27] Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Roller
Roller 3-2
3-2
[6]
[6] Lower Feed Roller 2 [17] Feed Roller
Feed Roller 3
3 [28] Duplex Feed Roller 3-1
[18] Feed Roller 4 [29]
[29] Duplex Feed Roller 2-2
[8]
[19] Cross-feed Roller
Cross-feed Roller 1
1 [30]
[9] Right Deck Belt Drive Roller [20]
[20] Cross-feed Roller
Cross-feed Roller 2
2 [31]
[10] Right Deck Pullout Roller [21] Cross-feed Roller
Cross-feed Roller 3
3 [32]
[11] Right Deck Pullout Auxiliary Roller [22] Registration Roller
Registration Roller (Lower)
(Lower) [33]
[33] Paper Retainer Roller
200
200
2. Technical
Explanation
● Roller (Sub
• Roller (Sub Station)
Station)
[22] [20] [23] [17] [15] [9]
[9] [8] [5]
[5] [3]
[3] [1]
[21] [19] [18] [11] [10] [7]
[7] [6] [4] [2]
[24] [26] [28] [30] [32] [16] [14] [13] [12] [38]
[25] [27] [29] [31] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37]
[37]
-.- -.-
Code Name Code Name
Name Code
rode ... Name
NaTne
[1]
[1] Primary Fixing
Roller [14]
[14] Bypass Feed
Bypass Feed Roller
Roller 3
3 [27]
[27] Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Roller
Roller 2
2
[2]
[2] Separation Roller
Separation Roller [15]
[15] Bypass Decurler
Bypass Decurler Upper
Upper Roller
Roller [28] Duplex Reverse Roller
[3] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Up- [16] Bypass Decurler Drive Roller [29]
[29] Duplex Post-reverse Roller
per Roller
[4] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Low- [17] Bypass Feed Roller 4 [30]
[30] Duplex Decurler Upper Roller
er Roller
[5]
[5] Tandem Feed Roller 1 [18] Delivery Roller 1 [31]
[31] Duplex Decurler Drive Roller
[6]
[6] Tandem Feed Roller 2 [19] Delivery Roller 2 [32]
[32] Duplex Feed Roller 7
[7]
[7] Secondary Fixing Roller [20] Delivery Decurler 1 [33]
[33] Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Roller
Roller 6-2
6-2
[8]
[8] Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller [21] Delivery Decurler 2 [34]
[9]
[9] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery [22] Delivery Roller 3 [35]
[35] Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Roller
Roller 5-2
5-2
Upper Roller
Upper Roller
[10] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery [23] Delivery Pre-reverse Roller [36]
[36] Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Roller
Roller 5-1
5-1
Lower Roller
[11] Tandem Feed
Tandem Feed Roller
Roller 3
3 [24] Delivery Reverse Rear Roller [37]
[12] Bypass Feed
Bypass Feed Roller
Roller 1
1 [25] Delivery Reverse Roller 1 [38]
[13]
[13] Bypass Feed
Bypass Feed Roller
Roller 2
2 [26]
[26] Color Sensor
Color Sensor Backup
Backup Roller
Roller
201
201
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Drive Configuration
●
• Main Station
M181 M188 M183 M164 M168 M159 M158 M157 M156
M176
M178
M177
M187 M186 M185 M701 M702 M175 M173 M174 M172 M601 M602
Code
Code Name
Name Code
Code Name
Name
M156 Pre-registration Motor
Pre-registration Motor 1
1 M178 Vertical Path
Vertical Path Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
M157 Pre-registration Motor 2 M181 Pre-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing Feed Drive
Drive Left
Left Motor
Motor
3 M183
Drive Motor
Motor
4 M185 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 1
1
M164 Registration Motor
Registration Motor M186 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 2
2
M168
M168 Cross-feed Motor
Cross-feed Motor M187 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 3
3
M172 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Motor
Motor 4
4 M188 Pre-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing Feed Drive
Drive Right
Right Motor
Motor
M173 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Motor
Motor 2
2 M601 Right Deck
Right Deck Pickup
Pickup Belt
Belt Motor
Motor
M174 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Motor
Motor 3
3 M602 Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Motor
Motor
M175 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Motor
Motor 1
1 M701 Left Deck
Left Deck Pickup
Pickup Belt
Belt Motor
Motor
M176 POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Feed
Feed Motor
Motor M702 Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Motor
Motor
M177 Right Deck
Right Deck Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
202
● Sub Station
• Sub Station
M318 M324 M323 M312 M305 M310 M300
I
\-
M334
M320
M321 M322 M332 M331 M329 M311 M327 M330 M328
Code
Cod Name
Name com
Code di Name
Name
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor M323 Pre-delivery Feed
Pre-delivery Feed Motor
Motor 1
1
M305
Secondary Fixing Drive
Drive Motor
Motor M324 Pre-delivery Feed
Motor 2
2
M310
M310 Tandem Feed
Tandem Feed Motor
Motor M327
M327 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 6
6
M311 Bypass Feed
Bypass Feed Motor
Motor M328 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 4
4
M312 Merging Path
Merging Path Feed
Feed Motor
Motor M329 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 7
7
M318 Delivery Motor
Delivery Motor M330
M330 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 5
5
M320
M320 Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Motor
Motor M331
M331 Duplex Feed
Duplex Feed Motor
Motor 8
8
M321 Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Motor
Motor M332 Duplex Decurler Drive Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse
Duplex Post-reverse Motor
Motor M334
M334 Bypass Decurler Drive Motor
■
■Paper
Paper Path/Interval
Path/Interval Speed
Speed
1. Pickup Position - Pre-registration Position
<
< Other
Other Than
Than Long
Long Length
Length Paper
Paper >
>
2033
p1
A
IMF Interval Paper feed

Paper feed speed
speed
[A] 1000 mm/sec
p1: Pre-registration
p1: Pre-registration stop
stop position
position
< Long Length Paper >
A
p1
Interval Paper feed speed

[A] 285 mm/sec
stop position
position
2. Pre-registration Position - Primary Pre-fixing

< Other Than Long Length Paper >
204
2. Technical
Explanation
p2 p1
D C A
B
Interval Paper feed

Paper feed speed
speed
[A]
[A] 853.3 mm/sec (100 ppm), 652.4 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[B]
[B] 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm)*1
[C]
[C] 464 mm/sec (100 ppm), 348 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
[D]
[D] 467 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
** 1:
1: Approximately
Approximately 928
928 mm/sec
mm/sec (100
(100 ppm),
ppm), 696
696 mm/sec
mm/sec (80(80 ppm)
ppm) (the
(the feed
feed speed
speed cannot
cannot be
be identified
identified because
because itit is
is an
an interval
interval
where paper is cross-fed)
where paper is cross-fed)
2: Performs
* 2: Performs leading
leading edge
edge registration
registration control
control and
and decelerates.
decelerates.
stop position
position
p2: Deceleration
p2: Deceleration position
position (the
(the deceleration
deceleration point
point is
is determined
determined by
by the
the registration
registration control)
control)
< Long Length Paper >
p2 p1
D C A
B
Interval Paper feed

Paper feed speed
speed
[A]
[A] 285 mm/sec
[B]
[B] 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm)*1
205
205
2. Technical
Explanation
Interval ■■ Paper feed

Paper feed speed
speed
[C]
[C] 464 mm/sec (100 ppm), 348 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
[D]
[D] 467 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
** 1:
1: Approximately
Approximately 928
928 mm/sec
mm/sec (100
(100 ppm),
ppm), 696
696 mm/sec
mm/sec (80(80 ppm)
ppm) (the
(the feed
feed speed
speed cannot
cannot be
be identified
identified because
because itit is
is an
an interval
interval
where paper
where paper is
is cross-fed)
cross-fed)
2: Performs
* 2: Performs leading
leading edge
edge registration
control and
and decelerates.
decelerates.
stop position
position
p2: Deceleration
p2: Deceleration position
position (the
(the deceleration
deceleration point
point is
is determined
determined by
by the
the registration
control)
3. Primary Fixing Assembly -- Secondary Fixing Assembly Delivery Position
C B
D
B A
Interval Paper feed

Paper feed speed
speed
[A]
[A] 470 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[B]
[B] 472 mm/sec (100 ppm), 356 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[C]
[C] 482 mm/sec (100 ppm), 366 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[D]
[D] 489 mm/sec (100 ppm), 373 mm/sec (80 ppm)
206
206
4. Secondary Fixing Assembly Delivery Position - Delivery Position

(a) During
(a) During face-up
face-up delivery
delivery
Interval
Inter Paper feed
Paper feed speed
speed V
[A] 489 mm/sec
489 mm/sec (100
(100 ppm)
ppm) =>
=> 1000
1000 mm/sec
mm/sec (100
(100 ppm),
ppm), 373
373 mm/sec
mm/sec (80
(80 ppm)
ppm) =>
=> 1000
1000 mm/sec
mm/sec (80
(80 ppm)
ppm)
(b) During
(b) During face-down
face-down delivery
delivery
p1
p2
p4
B p3
207
207
2. Technical
Explanation

[A]
[A] 325 mm/sec => 750 mm/sec
[B]
[B] 750 mm/sec
Paper feed
Paper feed speed
speed accelerates
accelerates atat the
the stage
stage where
where the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through
through the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
or Bypass
or Bypass Decurler.
Decurler. In
In terms
terms of
of control,
control, itit accelerates
accelerates when
when thethe leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper reaches
reaches the
the acceleration
acceleration position.
position.
The acceleration
The acceleration position
position differs
differs depending
depending on on the
the paper
paper sizes
sizes as
as follows.
follows.
p1: Acceleration position 1 (227.1 mm or shorter paper)
p1:
p2: Acceleration
p2: Acceleration position
position 2
2 (B4
(B4 (364.0
(364.0 mm)
mm) oror shorter
shorter paper)
paper)
p3: Acceleration
p3: Acceleration position
position 3
3 (paper
(paper longer
longer than
than B4
B4 (364.0
(364.0 mm))
mm))
p4: Delivery
p4: Delivery reverse
reverse position
position
(c) Duplex
(c) Duplex path
path
Main Station:
Main Station:
A
p5 p6 p7
208
208
2. Technical
Explanation
Sub Station:
Sub Station:
A
p1 p2 p3 p4

[A] 750 mm/sec
p1: Duplex
p1: Duplex reverse
reverse position
position
p2: Duplex
p2: Duplex standby
standby position
position 6
6
p3: Duplex
p3: Duplex standby
standby position
position 5
5
p4: Duplex
p4: Duplex standby
standby position
position 4
4
p5: Duplex
p5: Duplex standby
standby position
position 33
p6: Duplex
p6: Duplex standby
standby position
position 2
2
p7: Duplex
p7: Duplex standby
standby position
position 11
209
209
2. Technical
Explanation
Controls
0 Controls
■
■Overview
●
• Main Station
Pre-registration Unit Vertical Path Unit
re-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing Secondary Transfer
Left Unit Outer Belt Unit
Pre-fixing Feed
Righit Unit Registration Unit
Left Deck Left Pickup Unit

Right Deck Lower Feed Unit
Main Station
StationDuplex
Duplex Main
MainStation
StationDuplex MainStation
Duplex Main Station Duplex
Duplex Right Pickup Unit
Feed Left Unit Feed Middle Unit Feed Right Unit
Unit name
Unit name 1r Control name
Control name
Right Deck/Left
Right Deck/Left Deck
Deck •• Lifter control
Lifter control
•• Open/Close control
Open/Close control
•• Paper surface
Paper surface detection
detection
•• Paper level
Paper level detection
detection
•• Paper detection
Paper detection
•• Paper size
Paper size switch-over
switch-over control
control
•• Auto change
Auto change function
function
Right Pickup Unit/Left Pickup Unit •• Air pickup control
•• Pickup fan control
•• Pickup
Pickup operation
operation
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Unit
Unit Paper length
Paper length detection
detection
210
2. Technical
Explanation
Unit name Control name

Pre-registration Unit
Pre-registration Unit •• Pre-registration control
Pre-registration control
•• Double feed
Double feed detection
detection
•• Paper thickness
Paper thickness detection
detection
•• Registration Roller
Registration Roller engagement/disengagement
engagement/disengagement control
control
Registration Unit
Registration Unit •• Cross-feed
Cross-feed registration
control
•• Leading edge registration control
•• Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller engagement/disengagement
control
Secondary Transfer
Outer Belt
Belt Unit
Unit Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Roller
Roller engagement/disengagement
control
Main Station
Main Station Duplex
Duplex Feed
Feed Unit
Unit Duplex standby
Duplex standby control,
control, Page
Page passing
passing control
control
● Sub Station
• Sub Station
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
Fixing Merging Bypass Feed Unit
Delivery/Reverse Unit Path Unit Tandem Feed Primary Fixing
Unit Assembly
[
>--- O
o
o
Duplex DecurlerUnit
Duplex Decurler Unit Sub
SubStation
Station Duplex
Duplex Sub Station Duplex
MI
Unit name
ME Control name
•• Fixing Path switch control*
•• Fixing drive control*
Tandem Feed
Tandem Feed Unit
Unit --
Bypass Feed
Bypass Feed Unit
Unit --
Secondary Fixing Assembly Fixing drive control*
Fixing Merging Path Unit Bypass Decurler
Bypass Decurler control
control
Delivery/Reverse Unit •• Delivery control
•• Reverse control
Reverse control
•• Duplex reverse
Duplex reverse control
control
•• Jam
Jam residual
residual paper
paper ejection
ejection control
control
•• Delivery Decurler control
•• Path switch
Path switch control
control
211
2. Technical
Explanation
Unit name Control

ontrol name
name
Duplex Decurler Unit Duplex Decurler control
Sub Station Duplex Feed Unit Duplex standby control, Page passing control
*: Refer
*: Refer to
to the
the Fixing
Fixing System
System for
for details.
details.
■ Basic Sequence
■Basic Sequence
●
• Pickup Timing from the Deck
This machine performs image formation before pickup in both the Right Deck and Left Deck.
The pickup
The pickup start
start time
time is
is determined
determined by
by the
the calculation
calculation shown
shown below
below based
based on
on the
the Y-TOP
Y-TOP signal
signal (vertical
(vertical scanning
scanning synchronization
synchronization
signal (Y)).
Pickup Start
Pickup Start Time
Time =
= Timage
Timage -- Tpaper
Tpaper -- Tstop
Tstop
•• Timage: Image travel time from Y Exposure Position (A) to Secondary Transfer Position (D)
•• Tpaper:
Tpaper: Paper
Paper feed
feed time
time from
from Pickup
Pickup Start
Start Position
Position (B)
(B) to
to Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Position
Position (D)
(D)
•• Tstop:
Tstop: Pre-registration
Pre-registration Standby
Standby Time*
Time* (Pre-registration
(Pre-registration Stop
Stop Position
Position (C))
(C))
*: The
*: The Pre-registration
Pre-registration Standby
Standby Time
Time isis 100
100 mm/sec
mm/sec
T image
D
C
PS141 T paper
B B
■ Long Sheet
■Long Sheet Tray
Tray
● Configuration
• Configuration
NOTE:
The Long Sheet Tray is optional (Long Sheet Tray-A1).
Paper can be fed manually from the Multi-Purpose Tray when the Long Sheet Tray-A1 is mounted.
212
2. Technical
Explanation
Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray

Separation Roller Pickup Roller
Manual Feed Extraction
Upper Roller
7
PS801
Last Paper
PS800 Sensor Roller
Manual Feed
Extraction Lower Roller Paper Sensor Flag
Code
Code Name
PS800
PS800 Multi-purpose Tray
Multi-purpose Tray Paper
Paper Path
Path Sensor
Sensor
PS801
PS801 Multi-purpose Tray
Multi-purpose Tray Last
Last Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor
●
• Pickup Operation
1. When the
1. When Multi-purpose Tray
the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid (SL800)
(SL800) turns ON, the
turns ON, the drive
drive is
is transmitted
transmitted to
to the
the Semi-toothed
Semi-toothed Gear
Gear which
which
rotates. The
rotates. The Middle
Middle Plate
Plate Fixation
Fixation Member
Member is
is released,
released, and
and the
the Middle
Middle Plate
Plate rises.
rises.
Semi-toothed Gear Semi-toothed Gear
SL800
Holding Plate Holding Plate Holding Plate Holding Plate
Fixing Members Fixing Members
2. The
2. The Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray Pullout
Pullout Roller,
Roller, Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray Pickup
Pickup Roller,
Roller, and
and Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray Separation
Separation Roller
Roller are
are
rotated by
rotated by the
the drive
drive from
from the
the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor
Motor (M800),
(M800), and
and only
only a
a single
single sheet
sheet of
of paper is picked
paper is picked up
up and
and fed.
fed.
Manual Feed Manual Separation Roller/

Extraction Roller Manual Feed Roller
M800
●
• Paper size detection
The paper
The paper width
width is
is detected
detected according
according to
to the
the output
output from
from the
the variable
variable resistor
resistor driven
driven by
by the
the Slide
Slide Guide
Guide movement.
movement.
Width alignment
Width alignment of
of the
the Slide
Slide Guides
Guides in
in the
the Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray is
is performed
performed by
by the
the user
user moving
moving the
the Slide
Slide Guides
Guides when
when loading
loading
the paper.
the paper.
213
2. Technical
Explanation
Veriable Resistor
Manual Feed Tray
Side Guide(Rear)
Side Guide(Front)
●
• Last paper detection
Last Paper
Last Paper Detection
Detection is
is performed
performed toto ensure
ensure that
that image
image formation
formation is
is not
not performed
performed on on the
the ITB
ITB when
when there
there is
is no
no paper.
paper.
The Last
The Last Paper
Paper Pickup
Pickup Roller
Roller only
only rotates
rotates when
when the
the last
last paper
paper has
has been
been fed.
fed. When
When the the Last
Last Paper
Paper Pickup
Pickup Roller
Roller rotates,
rotates, a
a pulse
pulse
signal is
signal is output
output from
from the
the Multi-purpose Tray Last
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor (PS801)
(PS801) by by the
the slit
slit in
in the
the roller.
roller. The
The last
last paper
paper is
is detected
detected ifif four
four
or more
or more output
output pulses
pulses are
are detected.
detected.
PS801
Last Paper Roller
PS801
Last paper roller
214
2. Technical
Explanation
■ Left Deck/Right
■Left Deck/Right Deck
Deck
●
• Lifter control
The lifter
The lifter is
is driven
driven by
by the
the Lifter
Lifter Motor
Motor via
via the
the Lifter
Lifter Wire.
Wire. The
The lifter
lifter ascends
ascends or
or descends
descends as
as the
the rotation
rotation direction
direction of
of this
this Lifter
Lifter Motor
Motor
changes.
changes.
Ascent Control
Ascent Control
When the
When the Deck
Deck Interlock
Interlock Switch
Switch and
and Deck
Deck Open/Close
Open/Close Sensor
Sensor turn
turn ON,
ON, the
the deck
deck is
is judged
judged to
to be
be loaded
loaded and
and the
the lifter
lifter ascends.
ascends.
After this,
After this, the
the paper
paper surface
surface is
is monitored
monitored by by the
the Upper
Upper Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, and
and
Intermediate Paper
Intermediate Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, and
and the
the lifter
lifter stops
stops when
when itit reaches
reaches the
the lower
lower limit
limit of
of the
the area
area where
where pickup
pickup is
is possible.
possible.
In case
In case the
the lifter
lifter does
does not
not stop
stop ascending
ascending for for some
some reason
reason after
after the
the Upper
Upper Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor turns
turns OFF,
OFF, thethe machine
machine
has a
has a Lifter
Lifter Upper
Upper Limit
Limit Sensor
Sensor toto prevent
prevent breakage
breakage of of the
the host
host machine
machine duedue toto excessive
excessive ascent.
ascent.
Furthermore, a
Furthermore, a Foreign
Foreign Matter
Matter Sensor
Sensor is is fitted
fitted toto prevent
prevent damage
damage to to the
the Lifter
Lifter Wire,
Wire, plastic
plastic gears,
gears, etc.
etc. to
to take
take into
into account
account the
the
cases where
cases where there
there is
is foreign
foreign matter
matter in
in the
the receptacle
receptacle thatthat strikes
strikes the
the ceiling
ceiling before
before itit reaches
reaches the
the position
position where
where separation
separation ofof
paper
paper by
by air
air can
can begin.
begin.
Descent Control
Descent Control
The lifter
The lifter begins
begins descending
descending whenwhen the
the Open
Open button
button is
is pressed
pressed on on the
the Deck
Deck Front
Front Cover,
Cover, andand descends
descends until
until itit reaches
reaches the
the position
position
where itit passes
where passes thethe sensor
sensor flag
flag on
on the
the Deck
Deck Supply
Supply Position
Position Sensor
Sensor (sensor
(sensor OFF OFF =>=> ON ON =>
=> OFF).
OFF).
Since the
Since the sensor
sensor flag
flag of
of the
the Deck
Deck Supply
Supply Position
Position Sensor
Sensor is is held
held back
back byby the
the paper
paper ifif paper
paper is
is supplied
supplied in
in this
this state,
state, the
the lifter
lifter
descends
descends further
further to
to the
the position
position where
where the
the stacked
stacked paper
paper passes
passes thethe sensor
sensor flag.flag.
The lifter
The lifter repeats
repeats this
this descend
descend operation
operation each
each time
time paper
paper is
is supplied
supplied until
until itit reaches
reaches thethe position
position where
where the
the Lifter
Lifter Lower
Lower Limit
Limit
Sensor turns
Sensor turns ONON (maximum
(maximum paper paper supply
supply position).
position).
In case
In case the
the lifter
lifter does
does not
not stop
stop descending
descending for
for some
some reason
reason after
after the
the Lifter
Lifter Lower
Lower LimitLimit Sensor
Sensor turns
turns ON,
ON, the
the machine
machine hashas aa Lifter
Lifter
Lower Limit
Lower Limit Switch
Switch toto prevent
prevent breakage
breakage of
of the
the host
host machine
machine duedue to
to excessive
excessive descent.
descent.
Storage close sensor

Foreign Particle Lifter Upper
Sensor Limit Sensor
Trailing Edge Lifter
Trailing Edge Sensor 2 Lifter Wire
Sensor 1
Deck Level Sensor (Left)
Deck Level Sensor (Right)
Left Side Fan
Lifter Motor
Deck Open/Close Deck Interlock Switch

Solenoid
Lifter Wire
Receptacle Supply
Position Sensor
Right Side Fan

Lifter Lower Limit Switch
Lifter Lower Limit Sensor
Name Code
Code Name Code
Code
(Left Deck/Right
(Left Deck/Right Deck)
Deck) (Left Deck/Right
Deck)
Trailing Edge Sensor 1 PS715 / PS615 Deck Interlock Switch SW703 / SW603
Trailing Edge Sensor 2 PS716 / PS616 Deck Supply Position Sensor PS709 / PS609
Foreign Particle Sensor PS713 / PS613 Right Side Fan FM706 / FM606
215
2. Technical
Explanation
Name Code
Code Name i Code
Code
(Left Deck/Right
Deck) (Left Deck/Right
Deck)
1 i a
Deck Open/Close
Deck Open/Close Sensor
Sensor PS707 // PS607
PS707 PS607 Lifter Lower
Lifter Lower Position
Position Sensor
Sensor PS712 // PS612
PS712 PS612
Lifter Upper
Lifter Limit Sensor
Upper Limit Sensor PS714 // PS614
PS714 PS614 Lifter Lower
Lifter Limit Switch
Lower Limit Switch SW702
SW702 // SW602
SW602
Deck Level
Deck Level Sensor
Sensor (Left)
(Left) PS711 // PS611
PS711 PS611 Deck Open/Close
Deck Open/Close Solenoid
Solenoid SL703
SL703 // SL602
SL602
Deck Level
Deck Level Sensor
Sensor (Right)
(Right) PS710 // PS610
PS710 PS610 Left Side
Left Side Fan
Fan FM707 // FM607
FM707 FM607
Lifter Motor
Lifter Motor M703
M703 // M603
M603
UN603
Right Deck
Storage Close Sensor Pickup
Foreign Particle Sensor Driver PCB

I
Lifter Upper Limit Switch
UN703
Lifter Wire
Left Deck
4-
Pickup
Driver PCB
Lifter Motor
UN602
Right Deck
•Right
Driver PCB
Deck
eck Interlock
Lifter Wire Switch
Storage Supply UN702
Position Sensor
Left Deck
► Left
Driver PCB
Lifter Lower Position
Position Sensor
First Page Lift Down Limit Control

In
In the
the case of paper
case of that has
paper that has excessive
excessive downward
downward curl
curl or
or upward
upward curl,
curl, it
it cannot
cannot bebe attracted
attracted because
because the
the paper
paper surface
surface separates
separates
from the
from the Attraction
Attraction Belt.
Belt.
In
In the case of
the case of downward
downward curl,
curl, the
the air
air blown
blown from
from the
the Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Nozzle
Nozzle lifts
lifts up
upthe
the leading
leadingedge
edge of
of the
the paper.
paper. Since
Since the
the paper
paper
surface height
surface height is
is determined
determined by by the leading edge
the leading of the
edge of the paper
paper surface
surface link,
link, the
the paper cannot be
paper cannot attracted.
be attracted.
In the case
In the case of
of upward
upward curl,
curl, since
since the
the air
air blows
blows to
to push
push the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge downwards,
downwards, thethe paper
paper cannot
cannot be
be separated.
separated.
216
2. Technical
Explanation
When the paper has a lower curl
Paper surface link Paper Floatation nozzle
When the paper has an upper curl
In order
In order to
to ensure
ensure that
that the
the gap
gap between
between the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt and
and the
the paper
paper does
does not
not become
become too
too large,
large, the
the lifter
lifter is
is controlled
controlled to
to
ensure that
ensure that itit does
does not
not descend
descend below
below a
a designated
designated amount
amount while
while preparing
preparing for
for pickup.
pickup.
Paper Surface
Paper Surface Height
Height Control
Control
If the
If the paper
paper surface
surface height
height of
of the
the leading
leading edge
edge becomes
becomes unstable
unstable due
due to
to separation
separation of
of paper
paper by
by air,
air, smooth
smooth transfer
transfer to
to the
the next
next
pickup
pickup operation
operation may
may not
not be
be possible.
possible.
In this
In this machine,
machine, control
control is
is performed
performed while
while preparing
preparing for
for pickup
pickup and
and during
during pickup
pickup so
so that
that the
the lifter
lifter moves
moves toto the
the appropriate
appropriate
position
position in in preparation
preparation for
for the
the next
next pickup.
pickup.
When the
When the Intermediate
Intermediate Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor is
is ON
ON and
and the
the height
height of
of the
the paper
paper trailing
trailing edge
edge reaches
reaches reference
reference AA or
or reference
reference
B, itit is
B, is judged
judged to
to be
be the
the appropriate
appropriate position
position and
and the
the lifter
lifter stops.
stops.
Whether to
Whether to employ
employ reference
reference A A or
or reference
reference BB is
is determined
determined by by the
the paper
paper size,
size, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature,
nature, and
and environment.
environment.
Bottom surface of
the suction belt
Trailing Edge
Trailing Edge Sensor Trailing Edge
Sensor11 Trailing Edge Sensor
Sensor 2
14 mm
ON 17 mm
Reference A
ON
OFF
Reference B
OFF
Furthermore, when
Furthermore, when the
the Intermediate
Intermediate Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor isis ON
ON and
and the
the amount
amount of of ascension
ascension ofof the
the lifter
lifter per
per sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper
becomes
becomes greater
greater than than a
a designated
designated amount,
amount, the
the lifter
lifter stops.
stops.
The designated
The designated amountamount ofof ascension
ascension per
per sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper is is determined
determined by
by the
the paper
paper size,
size, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature,
nature, and
and environment.
environment.
In cases
In cases other
other thanthan the
the above,
above, the
the lifter
lifter ascends.
ascends.
Note that
Note that ifif the
the Intermediate Paper Surface
Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor
Sensor turnsturns ON
ON while
while the
the lifter
lifter is
is ascending
ascending and and the
the following
following time
time elapses
elapses after
after the
the
trailing edge
trailing edge of of the
the preceding
preceding paper
paper passes
passes the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (ON
(ON =>
=> OFF),
OFF), thethe lifter
lifter stops.
stops.
•• Paper
Paper of of weight
weight 150
150 g/m2
g/m2 or
or less:
less: 6060 mm/sec
mm/sec or or more
more
•• Paper
Paper of of weight
weight greater
greater than
than 150
150 g/m2:
g/m2: 100
100 mm/sec
mm/sec or or more
more
Lifter Control Timing
At power-on
At power-on
After the
After the lifter
lifter has
has ascended
ascended untiluntil the
the Lower
Lower LimitLimit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor turns
turns ON
ON to to judge
judge the
the presence
presence ofof paper,
paper, the
the lifter
lifter
descends
descends to to the
the lower
lower limit
limit position
position and
and thethe counted
counted number
number ofof paper
paper level
level is
is reset.
reset.
If there
If there is
is no
no paper
paper atat this
this time,
time, automatic
automatic air air flow
flow adjustment
adjustment of
of the
the fan
fan is
is performed.
performed. After
After the
the lifter
lifter has
has ascended
ascended until
until the
the Lower
Lower
Limit Paper
Limit Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor turns
turns ONON again,
again, itit descends
descends to
to the
the supply
supply position
position (the
(the position
position where
where thethe Deck
Deck Supply
Supply Position
Position
Sensor changes
Sensor changes OFF OFF => => ON
ON =>=> OFF).
OFF).
If there
If there is
is paper,
paper, the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends until
until the
the paper
paper surface
surface reaches
reaches thethe area
area where
where thethe paper
paper can
can bebe picked
picked up
up (Lower
(Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper
Surface Sensor
Surface Sensor turns
turns ON)
ON) without
without performing
performing the the automatic
automatic air
air flow
flow adjustment
adjustment of of the
the fan.
fan.
217
2. Technical
Explanation
When the
When the deck
deck is
is open
open
NOTE:
If the power is turned ON while the deck is open, the lifter descends until it reaches the lower limit position. The counted number
of the paper level is reset but the automatic air flow adjustment of the fan is not performed.
When the
When the Open
Open button
button is
is detected
detected as
as pressed,
pressed, the
the lifter
lifter descends
descends for
for 1.0
1.0 sec
sec and
and then
then the
the deck
deck opens.
opens.
The lifter
The lifter descends
descends to
to the
the supply
supply position.
position.
When the
When the deck
deck is
is closed
closed
The lifter
The lifter ascends
ascends untiluntil the
the paper
paper surface
surface reaches
reaches the the area
area where
where paper
paper can
can be
be picked
picked upup (Lower
(Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor
turns ON).
turns ON).
Note that
Note that ifif a
a level
level difference
difference isis formed
formed when
when the the paper
paper is
is loaded
loaded such
such that
that the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper is
is at
at a
a higher
higher position
position
than the
than the leading
leading edge,
edge, the
the upper
upper limit
limit of
of the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge paper
paper surface
surface detection
detection (Trailing
(Trailing Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor 1 1 OFF
OFF and
and Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge
Sensor 2
Sensor 2 ON)
ON) may may bebe reached
reached before
before the
the lifer
lifer reaches
reaches the
the area
area where
where the
the paper
paper can
can be
be picked
picked upup (Lower
(Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface
Sensor OFF).
Sensor OFF).
If this
If this happens,
happens, the the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends for
for a
a maximum
maximum period period of
of 300
300 mm/sec
mm/sec (approximately
(approximately 3 3 mm).
mm). IfIf Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface
Sensor turns
Sensor turns ON ON within
within the
the 300
300 mm/sec,
mm/sec, the the lifter
lifter stops
stops at
at that
that point.
point.
When preparing for pickup

First page
First page liftlift down
down limit
limit control
control and and paper
paper surface
surface height
height control
control are are performed.
performed.
1. The lifter
1. The lifter position
position (encoder
(encoder count count value)
value) isis recorded.
recorded.
2. Each
2. Each fanfan isis driven
driven atat the
the appropriate
appropriate air air flow
flow according
according toto conditions
conditions such such as as the
the paper
paper size
size and
and environment.
environment.
3. The
3. The lifter
lifter stops
stops after
after the
the following
following operation
operation is is performed
performed for for a a maximum
maximum of of 10.0
10.0 sec.
sec.
•• If
If the
the paper
paper surface
surface is is lower
lower thanthan the
the middle
middle ofof the
the area
area where
where paper
paper can can be
be picked
picked up
up (Intermediate
(Intermediate Paper Paper Surface
Surface
Sensor OFF),
Sensor OFF), the
the lifter
lifter ascends.
ascends.
•• If
If the
the paper
paper surface
surface is is higher
higher thanthan the
the pickup
pickup upper
upper limit
limit (Upper
(Upper Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor OFF
OFF and
and Lower
Lower Limit Limit Paper
Paper
Surface Sensor
Surface Sensor ON),
ON), the the lifter
lifter descends.
descends. The The operation
operation of of descending
descending for for 300
300 mm/sec
mm/sec and
and then
then stopping
stopping for for 700
700
mm/sec repeats.
mm/sec repeats. When
When the the paper
paper surface
surface has has reached
reached the the appropriate
appropriate position
position (Intermediate
(Intermediate Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor Sensor
and Upper
and Upper Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor bothboth ON),
ON), the
the lifter
lifter stops
stops atat that
that time.
time.
4. The
4. Thefollowing
following operation
operation is is performed
performed for for approximately
approximately 3.0 3.0 sec.
sec.
•• When
When the the lifter
lifter has
has descended
descended by by the
the designated
designated amount
amount or or more
more from
from the
the position
position recorded
recorded inin Step
Step 1, 1, itit ascends
ascends to
to
the designated
the amount. IfIf the
designated amount. the designated
designated amount
amount is is not
not enough,
enough, thethe lifter
lifter stops
stops at
at that
that point.
point. Note
Note that
that ifif the
the Intermediate
Intermediate
Paper Surface
Paper Surface Sensor
Sensor is is OFF,
OFF, the the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends until
until itit turns
turns ON.
ON.
5. The
5. The Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid is is turned
turned ON. ON.
During pickup
Paper surface
Paper surface height
height control
control is
is performed.
performed.
If the paper surface is above the pickup
If the paper surface is above the pickup lower
lower limit
limit (Lower
(Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor ON)
ON) after
after the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge ofof the
the preceding
preceding
paper has passed the Pullout Sensor (ON => OFF), the Deck Pickup
paper has passed the Pullout Sensor (ON => OFF), the Deck Pickup Solenoid is turned ON. Solenoid is turned ON.
If the
If the paper
paper isis adhered
adhered to to the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt (Suction
(Suction Completion
Completion Sensor
Sensor ON)
ON) after
after 140
140 mm/sec
mm/sec havehave elapsed
elapsed from
from when
when the
the
Pullout Sensor turned OFF, paper pickup
Pullout Sensor turned OFF, paper pickup becomes possible.becomes possible.
If paper
If paper is is not
not adhered
adhered (Suction
(Suction Completion
Completion SensorSensor OFF),
OFF), paper
paper pickup
pickup becomes
becomes possible
possible after
after a
a maximum
maximum of of 300
300 mm/sec
mm/sec wait
wait
time. If the Suction Completion Sensor turns ON within 300 mm/sec, paper pickup becomes
time. If the Suction Completion Sensor turns ON within 300 mm/sec, paper pickup becomes possible at that point. possible at that point.
If paper
If paper pickup
pickup isis possible,
possible, and
and ifif the
the paper
paper interval
interval from
from the
the preceding
preceding paper
paper isis sufficient,
sufficient, pickup
pickup begins.
begins.
Once the leading edge of the paper has passed the Pullout Sensor, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns
Once the leading edge of the paper has passed the Pullout Sensor, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns OFF.
OFF.
*: If
*: If Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor remains
remains OFF OFF after
after 140
140 mm/sec
mm/sec have
have elapsed
elapsed after
after the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor turns
turns OFF,
OFF, the
the
Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON after a maximum of 1 minute wait time. If the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns ON
Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON after a maximum of 1 minute wait time. If the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns ON
within 1
within 1 minute,
minute, the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns ON
ON atat that
that point.
point.
On Pickup
On Pickup Completion/When
Completion/When Jam
Jam Occurs
Occurs
In order
In order toto wait
wait for
for the
the air
air flow
flow from
from the
the fans
fans to
to abate,
abate, thethe lifter
lifter stops
stops for
for 5.0
5.0 sec
sec after
after all
all fans
fans have
have stopped.
stopped.
At this
At this time,
time, ifif Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor is is ON,
ON, the
the lifter
lifter descends
descends temporarily
temporarily until
until the
the sensor
sensor turns
turns OFF,
OFF, and
and then
then itit
ascends until
ascends until the
the sensor
sensor turns
turns ON
ON again.
again.
If the
If the Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor isis OFF,
OFF, the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends until
until the
the sensor
sensor turns
turns ON.ON.
Note that
Note that ifif a
a jam
jam occurs
occurs oror paper
paper gets
gets caught
caught inin the
the Pickup
Pickup Assembly,
Assembly, Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor will
will not
not turn
turn OFF
OFF even
even
ifif the
the lifter
lifter descends
descends becausebecause thethe Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Link
Link will
will not
not descend.
descend.
Because of
Because of this,
this, ifif the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor isis ON,
ON, the
the lifter
lifter descends
descends until until the
the Lifter
Lifter Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Sensor
Sensor turns
turns ON.
ON.
Lifter Error Detection Control

During Lifter
During Lifter up
up and
and down
down motion
motion operation,
operation, the
the following
following three
three error
error detection
detection controls
controls are
are performed.
performed.
218
2. Technical
Explanation
An alarm
An alarm occurs
occurs on
on the
the deck
deck where
where a
a fault
fault is
is detected,
detected, and
and cannot
cannot be
be used.
used.
Upper Limit
Upper Limit Detection
Detection
The lifter
The lifter might
might not
not stop
stop ascending due to
ascending due to a
a failure
failure of
of Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, etc.
etc. and
and may
may damage
damage the
the receptacle
receptacle or
or Air-operated
Air-operated
Pickup Mount.
Pickup Mount.
The Lifter
The Lifter Upper
Upper Limit
Limit Sensor
Sensor detects
detects the
the lifter
lifter upper
upper limit
limit to
to prevent
prevent the
the lifter
lifter from
from ascending
ascending excessively.
excessively.
Lower Limit Detection

The lifter
The lifter might
might not
not stop
stop descending
descending due
due to
to a a failure
failure of
of Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, etc.
etc. and
and may
may damage
damage the
the receptacle.
receptacle.
The Lifter
The Lifter Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Switch
Switch detects
detects the
the lifter
lifter lower
lower limit
limit to
to prevent
prevent the
the lifter
lifter from
from descending
descending excessively.
excessively.
Foreign Matter
Foreign Matter Detection
Detection
If small
If small size
size paper
paper is is loaded
loaded in
in the
the receptacle
receptacle andand the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends with
with foreign
foreign matter
matter or
or surplus
surplus paper,
paper, etc.
etc. in
in the
the empty
empty space,
space,
the foreign
the foreign matter
matter may
may reach
reach the
the upper
upper limit
limit before
before the
the Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor detects
detects the
the paper.
paper. At
At this
this time,
time, the
the lifter
lifter attempts
attempts
to continue
to continue ascending
ascending and and damages
damages the the receptacle.
receptacle.
The Foreign
The Foreign Matter
Matter Sensor
Sensor detects
detects foreign
foreign matter
matter when
when thethe Foreign
Foreign Matter
Matter Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag comes
comes into
into contact
contact with
with foreign
foreign matter,
matter,
and stops
and stops the
the lifter
lifter from
from ascending.
ascending.
Foreign Particle Sensor

Lifter Upper Limit Sensor
Foreign Particle Sensor Flag Right Deck
2 Pickup
c
Driver PCB
(UN603)
Lifter Left Deck

Pickup
Driver PCB
(UN703)
Right Deck
Driver PCB
(UN602)
Left Deck
Driver PCB
(UN702)
● Open/Close Control
• Open/Close Control
When the
When the Open
Open button
button on
on the
the indicator
indicator of
of the
the Deck
Deck Front
Front Cover
Cover is is pressed,
pressed, the
the Lifter
Lifter Motor
Motor rotates
rotates and
and the
the Lifter
Lifter begins
begins to
to
descend.
descend.
1
1 sec
sec after
after this,
this, the
the Deck
Deck Open/Close
Open/Close Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns ON
ON and
and the the lock
lock of
of the
the deck
deck isis released.
released. The
The deck
deck where
where the
the lock
lock was
was
released pops
released pops out
out several
several centimeters
centimeters toward
toward thethe front
front due
due to
to thethe spring
spring force.
force.
The reason
The reason for
for the
the delay
delay until
until the
the lock
lock of
of the
the deck
deck isis released
released is
is to to prevent
prevent paper
paper from
from getting
getting caught
caught on
on the
the guides
guides oror other
other parts
parts
due
due to
to the
the deck
deck opening
opening after
after paper
paper that
that is
is in
in the
the middle
middle of
of being
being fed fed falls
falls onto
onto the
the lifer.
lifer.
The Deck
The Deck Open/Close
Open/Close Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns OFF
OFF 400400 mm/sec
mm/sec after
after itit turns
turns ON.
ON.
When the
When the deck
deck is
is open,
open, the
the LED
LED on
on the
the Open
Open button
button lights
lights up
up in
in green.
green. If
If the
the lifter
lifter is
is operated
operated at
at this
this time,
time, the
the LED
LED flashes.
flashes.
During pickup,
During pickup, the
the locked
locked LED
LED lights
lights up
up in
in orange
orange and
and the
the deck
deck does
does not
not open.
open.
Load the
Load the deck
deck by
by pushing
pushing itit into
into the
the machine
machine byby hand.
hand. When
When loaded,
loaded, the
the Deck
Deck Interlock
Interlock Switch
Switch and
and Deck
Deck Open/Close
Open/Close Sensor
Sensor
turn ON,
turn ON, and
and the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends up up to
to the
the pickup
pickup position.
position.
219
Deck Interlock Switch
Lifter Motor
Deck Open/
Close Sensor
Deck Open/Close Solenoid
Right Deck
Deck Driver
Driver PCB
PCB(UN602)
(UN602) Left
LeftDeck
DeckDriver
Driver PCB
PCB (UN702)
Right Deck Pickup

Pickup Driver
DriverPCB
PCB(UN603)
(UN603) Left
LeftDeck
DeckPickup
Pickup Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (UN703)
Lock LED
,
LTR r] Open button
81/2x11 LI
● Paper Surface
• Paper Surface Detection
Detection
In this
In this machine,
machine, the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends oror descends
descends to to keep
keep the
the paper
paper surface
surface at
at the
the designated
designated height
height in
in order
order toto feed
feed smoothly.
smoothly.
The up
The up and
and down
down motion
motion ofof the
the Lifter
Lifter is
is controlled
controlled based
based on
on the
the paper
paper surface
surface detection
detection result.
result.
The accuracy
The accuracy and
and speed
speed areare increased
increased by by performing paper surface
performing paper surface detection
detection at
at the
the leading
leading edge
edge and
and trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper.
paper.
Paper Surface
Paper Surface Detection
Detection at
at Paper
Paper Leading
Leading Edge
Edge
The paper
The paper surface
surface height
height at
at the
the leading
leading edge
edge is
is detected
detected by
by three
three paper
paper surface
surface sensors.
sensors.
Detection timing:
•• When the
When the Lifter
Lifter ascends
ascends when
when the
the power
power is
is turned
turned on
on or
or after
after the
the deck
deck is
is closed
closed
•• When preparing for pickup
•• During pickup
•• When pickup
When pickup completes
completes
Paper Surface
Detection at
at Paper
Paper Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge
The paper
The paper surface
surface height
height at
at the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge is
is detected
detected by
by two
two Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Sensors.
Sensors.
This is
This is supplementally
supplementally used
used when
when the
the paper
paper surface
surface height
height cannot
cannot be
be detected
detected at
at the
the leading
leading edge
edge such
such as
as when
when the
the paper
paper is
is
attracted to
attracted to the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt.
Belt.
220
2. Technical
Explanation
Detection timing:
•• When
When the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends after
after the
the deck
deck is
is closed
closed
•• During pickup
Paper Surface
Detection at
at Paper
Paper Leading
Leading Edge
Edge
The paper
The paper surface
surface of
of the
the leading
leading edge
edge is
is detected
detected by
by Upper
Upper Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor,
Sensor, and
and
Intermediate Paper
Intermediate Paper Surface
Surface Sensor.
Sensor.
The Paper
The Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag which
which operates
operates in
in conjunction
conjunction with
with the
the Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Link
Link rotates
rotates when
when the
the Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Link
Link
which touches
which touches the
the paper
paper moves
moves up
up and
and down,
down, turning
turning each
each sensor
sensor ONON and
and OFF.
OFF.
There is
There is a
a position
position displacement between each
displacement between each Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor and
and the
the Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag relative
relative to
to the
the direction
direction
of rotation.
of rotation. The
The height
height of
of the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge paper
paper surface
surface is
is identified
identified by
by using
using this
this displacement.
displacement.
Paper Surface Sensor 2
Right Deck I
Pickup Intermediate
Driver PCB Paper Purface
(UN603) Sensor
Paper Surface
Sensor 1
Left Deck I
Pickup Paper Surface
Driver PCB Sensor Flag
(UN703) Paper Surface
Link
Paper Presence Paper Presence
Sensor Flag Sensor
Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor

Middle Paper Surface Sensor
Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor
Paper Surface Link
Paper Surface Detection Arm
Paper Surface Sensor Flag
The status
The status of
of each
each sensor
sensor at
at each
each lifter
lifter position
position and
and the
the operation
operation of
of the
the lifter
lifter at
at these
these times
times are
are shown
shown below.
below.
Upper Limit Lower Limit Middle Lifter

Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Paper Surface Sensor moves down
Paper Surface
Pickup OFF
4OFF
Upper Threshold
ON Lifter stops
Pickup Available Area
,ON
Pickup ON
Lifter
Lower Threshold
moves up
(Standby position) OFF OFF
It OFF
OFF
Sensor
Sensor name
name Code
Code Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
(Left Deck/Right
Deck) ilk
Upper Limit
Upper Limit Paper
Paper PS703 // PS603
PS703 PS603 Lifter is
Lifter is ascending
ascending Paper surface
Paper surface is
is at the upper limit or
Surface Sensor higher
Lower Limit Paper PS704 / PS604 Paper surface
Paper surface is
is at the lower limit or high-
high- Paper surface is at the lower limit or low-
Surface Sensor er er
221
2. Technical
Explanation
Sensor
Sensor name
name Code
Code Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
(Left Deck/Right
Deck)
Intermediate Paper PS705 / PS605 Paper surface is in the intermediate po- Lifter ascending conditions
Surface Sensor sition
Note that
Note that Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor is
is also
also used
used by
by the
the paper
paper present
present detection
detection control.
control.
Paper Surface
Detection at
at Paper
Paper Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge
The paper
The paper surface
surface at
at the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge side
side is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor 1 1 and
and the
the Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor 22 on
on the
the
Trailing Edge Guide Plate.
The Paper
The Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag operates
operates in
in conjunction with the
conjunction with the Retainer Plate which
Retainer Plate which touches
touches the
the paper,
paper, and
and turns
turns each
each sensor
sensor
on and
on and off.
off.
The Trailing
The Trailing Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor andand Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag have
have different
different heights
heights at
at the
the front
front and
and rear.
rear. The
The height
height of
of the
the paper
paper
trailing edge
trailing edge paper
paper surface
surface isis identified
identified by
by using
using this
this displacement.
displacement.
Trailing Edge Sensor 2

2mm
1mm
Trail Edge Guide Plate

Retaining Plate
V
Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602)
Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702)
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603)

Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703)
During pickup,
During pickup, the
the detection
detection result
result of
of the
the Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor is is used
used to
to determine
determine when
when to
to stop
stop the
the lifter
lifter during
during operation.
operation.
The Lifter
The Lifter stops
stops inin the
the following
following cases:
cases:
•• When
When thethe Intermediate
Intermediate Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor is
is ON
ON and
and the
the height
height of
of the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge paper
paper surface
surface has
has reached
reached reference
reference
A or reference B. B.
Whether to
Whether to employ
employ reference
reference AA or
or reference
reference BB is
is determined
determined by by the
the paper
paper size,
size, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature,
nature, and
and environment.
environment.
•• When
When thethe Intermediate
Intermediate Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor isis ON
ON and
and the
the amount
amount ofof ascension
ascension ofof the
the lifter
lifter per
per sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper becomes
becomes
greater than
greater than a a designated
designated amount
amount
The designated
The designated amount
amount ofof ascension
ascension per
per sheet
sheet of
of paper
paper is
is determined
determined byby the
the paper
paper size,
size, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature,
nature, and
and
environment.
222
2. Technical
Explanation
Bottom surface of
the suction belt
Trailing Edge
Trailing Edge Sensor Trailing Edge
Sensor11 Trailing Edge Sensor
Sensor 2
14 mm
ON 17 mm
Reference A
ON
OFF
Reference B
OFF
●
• Paper Level Detection
The amount
The amount ofof paper
paper remaining
remaining inin the
the receptacle
receptacle is is detected
detected by
by the
the Deck
Deck Level
Level Sensor
Sensor (Right)
(Right) and
and Deck
Deck Level
Level Sensor
Sensor (Left).
(Left).
The encoders
The encoders that
that follow
follow each
each Lifter
Lifter Motor
Motor isis monitored
monitored by
by each
each sensor,
sensor, and
and count
count the
the pulses
pulses as
as the
the Lifter
Lifter Motors
Motors rotate.
rotate.
The height
The height of
of the
the paper
paper is is calculated based on
calculated based on the
the number
number of
of counted
counted pulses
pulses taking the case
taking the case where
where there
there are
are no
no sheets
sheets of
of paper
paper
as the
as the reference,
reference, and
and thethe number
number ofof sheets
sheets is is then
then calculated
calculated based
based onon the
the configured
configured media
media type.
type.
The counted
The counted number
number is is reset
reset when
when the
the lifter
lifter moves
moves down
down and
and the
the Lifter
Lifter Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Sensor
Sensor activates
activates when
when the
the power
power is
is turned
turned
ON.
ON.
During pickup,
During lifter control
pickup, lifter control is
is performed
performed to
to ensure
ensure that
that the
the paper
paper surface
surface is
is kept
kept at
at the
the appropriate
appropriate height.
height.
Since the
Since the amount
amount of
of paper
paper remaining
remaining cannot
cannot be
be determined
determined accurately
accurately ifif the
the lifter
lifter is
is lowered,
lowered, it
it is
is calculated
calculated by
by subtracting
subtracting the
the
number of
number of sheets
sheets actually
actually fed
fed from
from the
the number
number before
before feeding.
feeding.
The timing
The timing with
with which
which the
the encoders
encoders on
on the
the Deck
Deck Level
Level Sensor
Sensor (Right)
(Right) and
and Deck
Deck Level
Level Sensor
Sensor (Left)
(Left) turn
turn ON
ON and
and OFF
OFF is
is out
out of
of
sync. Whether
sync. Whether the
the lifter
lifter is
is ascending
ascending or
or descending
descending can
can be
be determined
determined from
from this
this gap.
gap.
The paper
The paper level
level is
is displayed
displayed by
by the
the level
level LED
LED on
on the
the indicator
indicator on
on the
the Deck
Deck Front
Front Cover.
Cover.
223
2. Technical
Explanation
Deck Level Deck Level

Sensor Right
Sensor Sensor Left
Right Sensor Left
Encoder
Lifter Lower
Limit Sensor
Lifter Motor
.1
Deck Level
Sensor Left
Lifter Motor
Deck Level
Sensor Right
Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602) Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702)
A
V
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603) Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703 )
●
• Paper detection
Whether or
Whether or not
not there
there is
is paper
paper in
in a
a receptacle
receptacle is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Paper
Paper Sensor.
Sensor.
When the
When the paper
paper runs
runs out,
out, the
the Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag passes
passes the
the Paper
Paper Sensor,
Sensor, and
and the
the Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor turns
turns OFF.
OFF.
Sensor: On
Paper Presence Sensor
Paper Presence Sensor Flag
224
2:
2. Technical
Explanation
Sensor: Off
Sensor: Off
Paper Presence Sensor
If the Lower
If the Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface
Surface Sensor
Sensor is
is ON
ON and
and the
the Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor isis OFF,
OFF, it
it is
is determined
determined that
that there
there is
is no
no paper.
paper.
When there
When there is
is no
no paper,
paper, the
the lifter
lifter descends
descends to
to the
the supply
supply position
position (the
(the position
position where
where the
the Deck
Deck Supply
Supply Position
Position Sensor
Sensor change
change
OFF =>
OFF => ON
ON =>
=> OFF).
OFF).
(Front face) Paper Presence Sensor

(Rear face) Lower
Lower Limit
Limit Paper
Paper Surface Sensor
Lifter Paper Surface Sensor Flag
Judging
Judging of
of whether
whether oror not
not there
there isis paper
paper is
is performed
performed atat the
the following
following times.
times.
•• Immediately
Immediately after
after the
the lifter
lifter ascends
ascends toto detect
detect the
the paper
paper surface
surface position
position when
when the
the power
power is
is turned
turned ON
ON or
or the
the deck
deck is
is closed
closed
•• During
During pickup
pickup operation
operation
When the
When the deck
deck is
is open,
open, the
the presence
presence ofof paper
paper isis judged
judged as
as "undetermined".
"undetermined".
NOTE:
The orange
The orange paper
paper supply
supply LED
LED onon the
the Indicator
Indicator on
on the
the Deck
Deck Front
Front Cover
Cover does
does notnot flash
flash when
when there
there isis simply
simply "no
"no paper".
paper".
If there
If there is
is no
no auto
auto cassette
cassette change
change destination
destination when
when "no"no paper" occurs, the
paper occurs, the paper
paper supply
supply LED
LED for
for the
the deck
deck that
that caused
caused the
the job
job to
to
halt flashes
halt flashes in in sync
sync with
with the
the red
red error
error lamp
lamp on
on the
the host
host machine's
machine's Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
The paper
The paper supply
supply LED
LED stops
stops flashing
flashing when
when the
the job
job is
is canceled
canceled or or paper
paper isis refilled.
refilled.
If there
If there is
is a
a POD
POD Deck
Deck and
and the
the mode
mode for
for leaving
leaving paper
paper inin the
the auto
auto cassette
cassette change
change is is configured,
configured, the
the status
status is
is judged
judged as
as "no
"no paper"
paper"
when there
when there isis approximately
approximately 100100 sheets
sheets (varies
(varies depending
depending on on the
the paper
paper weight,
weight, etc.)
etc.) ofof paper
paper remaining
remaining inin the
the deck.
deck.
LTR r]
81/2x11 LI
Paper supply LED
225
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Paper Size Switch-over Control
The paper
The paper size
size is
is configured
configured in
in Settings/Registration after the
Settings/Registration after the Side
Side Guide
Guide Plate
Plate and
and Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Guide
Guide Plate
Plate are
are moved
moved
to match
to match the
the paper
paper size.
size.
1. Select
1. Select Settings/Registration
> Preferences
Preferences >
> Paper
Paper Settings
Settings >
> Paper
Paper Settings.
Settings.
2. Select
2. Select the
the pickup
pickup location
location where
where the
the paper
paper is
is loaded
loaded and
and then
then click
click [Set].
[Set].
3. Select
3. Select the
the paper
paper size.
size.
(40 Settings/Registration INF

(Paper Settings: Paper Type>
Select the paper type.
LJ Standard Type v 3 Sort List by • Reg'd (Desc.) v
Name Weight Size

Thin 2 (60-63 g/m2) 60 g/m2 No Settings
❑ Thin 1 (64-79 g/m2) 70 g/m2 No Settings
❑ Plain (80-105 g/m2) 90 g/m2 No Settings
❑ Heavy 1 (106-128 g/m2) 120 g/m2 No Settings
Simple Details
Settings
X Cancel Next 10-
● Auto Cassette
• Auto Cassette Change
Change Function
Function
Auto Cassette
Auto Cassette Change
Change is is a
a function
function that
that reduces
reduces the
the down
down time
time during
during continuous
continuous printing.
printing.
When the
When the pickup
pickup slot
slot that
that is
is currently
currently supplying
supplying paper
paper runs
runs out
out of
of paper,
paper, paper
paper is
is automatically
automatically picked
picked up
up from
from another
another pickup
pickup
slot that
slot that is
is loaded
loaded with
with the
the same
same size
size paper.
paper.
This function
This function is
is configured
configured inin Settings/Registration.
Settings/Registration > Function
Function Settings
Settings >> Common
Common > > Paper
Paper Feed
Feed Settings
Settings >> Paper
Paper Drawer
Drawer Auto
Auto Selection
Selection On/Off
On/Off
Select the
Select the target
target pickup slot from
pickup slot from among
among all
all of
of the
the pickup
pickup slots
slots (Right
(Right Deck,
Deck, Left
Left Deck,
Deck, POD
POD Deck,
Deck, Secondary
Secondary POD
POD Deck)
Deck) including
including
the Pickup
the Pickup Option.
Option.
When [Optimal
When [Optimal Productivity]
Productivity] isis selected
selected in
in the
the [Paper
[Paper Drawer
Drawer Auto
Auto Selection
Selection On/Off]
On/Off] screen,
screen, paper
paper can
can be
be supplied
supplied without
without
stopping for
stopping for switching since the
switching since the pickup
pickup slot
slot switches
switches before
before the
the paper
paper is
is completely
completely used
used up
up (approximately
(approximately 100
100 sheets
sheets remaining:
remaining:
80 g/m2).
80 g/m2).
If [Optimal
If [Optimal Productivity]
Productivity] isis not
not selected,
selected, the
the paper
paper in
in the
the pickup
pickup slot
slot can
can be
be completely
completely used.
used. Note
Note that
that since
since the
the print
print operation
operation
stops temporarily
stops temporarily ifif the
the paper
paper runs
runs out,
out, a
a slight
slight down
down time
time occurs
occurs for
for cleaning
cleaning the
the preceding
preceding image
image that
that was
was printed.
printed.
When the paper runs out, print operation

is suspended and there will be downtime.
.1
Flow of Job
Main deck Main deck Main deck Main deck

Paper Drawer Auto Selection: OFF (Right, Left) Downtime
(Right, Left)
Downtime (Right, Left) Downtime
3owntime) (Right, Left)
.
Paper Drawer Auto Selection: ON Main deck POD deck POD deck POD deck Secondary POD Secondary POD
Productivity Priority: ON (Right, Left) Lower deck Upper deck Middle deck deck deck
Upper deck
Lower deck
The machine switches the pickup source -%

continuously, and there will be no downtime.
•.
Secondary Secondar
Paper Drawer Auto Selection: ON Main deck POD deck POD deck POD deck
Productivity Priority: OFF (Right, Left) Lower deck Upper deck Middle deck POD deck deck
Lower deck Upper dec
Upperdec
♦
For image cleaning there
will be slight downtime.
♦ i
The pickup order follows the predetermined priority.
226
2. Technical
Explanation
If the
If the same media is
same media is loaded in all
loaded in all of
of the
the pickup
pickup slots,
slots, itit is
is switched
switched in
in order
order from
from the
the Right
Right Deck
Deck (priority:
(priority: 1)
1) to
to the
the Middle
Middle Deck
Deck of
of
the Secondary POD Deck (priority: 8) .
-------
1
4 CIO
i
07 110
el
5 lio ®o0
8
00 ® 1,0 =0 =0
2 1 4
3 6
6
Example: If
Example: If you
you specify
specify the
the Middle
Middle Deck
Deck of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary POD
POD Deck
Deck asas the
the pickup
pickup slot
slot without
without selecting
selecting [Optimal
[Optimal Productivity]
Productivity]
When the
When the paper
paper in in the
the Middle
Middle Deck
Deck ofof the
the Secondary
Secondary PODPOD Deck
Deck runs
runs out,
out, the
the pickup
pickup slot
slot switches
switches to to the
the host
host machine's
machine's Right
Right
Deck, and
Deck, and then
then switches
switches inin order
order down
down toto the
the Upper
Upper Deck
Deck of
of the
the Secondary
Deck (priority:
(priority: 7).
7).
Finally, when
Finally, when the
the Upper
Upper Deck
Deck of of the
the Secondary
Secondary POD POD Deck
Deck runs
runs out
out of
of paper,
paper, the
the printing
printing operation
operation stops.
stops. Furthermore,
Furthermore, the
the Paper
Paper
Supply LED
Supply LED for
for that
that deck
deck flashes
flashes together
together with
with the
the red
red error
error lamp
lamp on
on the
the host
host machine's
machine's Touch
Touch Panel.
Panel.
q ---
_J---i
04 1,0. 7
@
5 -o 8 =
1,0 =0
2
1 1 @
3 o
6
Example: If
Example: If you
you specify
specify thethe Middle
Middle Deck
Deck of
of the
the Secondary
Deck asas the
the pickup
pickup slot
slot with
with [Optimal
Productivity] selected
selected
The pickup
The pickup slot
slot is
is switched
switched from from the
the Middle
Middle Deck
Deck to to the
the Lower
Lower Deck
Deck ofof the
the Secondary
Deck Middle
Middle Deck
Deck (priority:
(priority: 6)
6) when
when
the remaining
the remaining paper
paper in in each
each reaches
reaches approximately
approximately 100 100 sheets.
sheets.
Next, itit switches
Next, switches to to the
the Upper
Upper Deck
Deck of of the
the Secondary
Deck (priority:
(priority: 7);
7); however,
however, since
since the
the amount
amount ofof paper
paper remaining
remaining in in
the other
the other pickup
pickup slots
slots isis already
already insufficient,
insufficient, itit will
will not
not switch
switch to
to another
another pickup
pickup slot
slot even
even when
when the
the remaining
remaining paper
paper reaches
reaches
approximately 100
approximately 100 sheets,
sheets, but but will
will supply
supply until
until the
the paper
paper runs
runs out
out (solid
(solid line
line area).
area).
After this, it switches in order of highest priority (1 => >2 2 =>
>33 =>>44 =>>5 5 =>
>6 6 =>>8)8)asassoon
soonasasthe
thepaper
paperinin each
each runs
runs out
out (dotted
(dotted
line area).
line area).
Finally, when
Finally, when the
the Middle
Middle DeckDeck ofof the
the Secondary
Secondary POD POD DeckDeck runs
runs out
out of
of paper,
paper, the
the printing
printing operation
operation stops.
stops. Furthermore,
Furthermore, the
the Paper
Paper
Supply LED
Supply LED for
for that
that deck
deck flashes
flashes together
together with
with the
the red
red error
error lamp
lamp onon the
the host
host machine's
machine's Touch
Touch Panel.
Panel.
_ aim
'04 oo h 7 1=
161
5 8
=0
2 1 3
4 yQ
6
.
If there
If there are
are no
no other
other candidate
candidate pickup
pickup slots
slots to
to switch
switch to
to even
even when
when [Optimal
Productivity] is
is selected,
selected, pickup
pickup continues
continues until
until all
all of
of
the paper
the paper is
is used.
used. Therefore,
Therefore, itit is
is not
not necessary
necessary to
to change
change the
the mode
mode when
when printing
printing small
small quantities
quantities of
of less
less than
than 100
100 sheets.
sheets.
■
• Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Unit
Unit
This machine
This machine prevents
prevents double
double feeds
feeds and
and realizes
realizes stable
stable high-speed
high-speed pickup
pickup by
by using
using an
an air-operated
air-operated pickup
pickup system.
system.
In conventional
In conventional roller
roller pickup
pickup systems,
systems, the
the Pickup
Pickup Roller
Roller is
is replaced
replaced as
as a
a consumable
consumable part.
part.
In the
In the air-operated
air-operated pickup
pickup system,
system, there
there are
are no
no parts
parts to
to replace,
replace, which
which increases
increases the
the durability
durability of
of the
the equipment.
equipment.
Furthermore, thin
Furthermore, thin paper,
paper, heavy
heavy paper,
paper, and
and coated
coated paper
paper can
can also
also be
be supported
supported byby adjusting
adjusting the
the amount
amount ofof airflow
airflow depending
depending on
on
the conditions.
the conditions.
227
2. Technical
Explanation
After the
After the paper
paper has
has been
been separated
separated by
by the
the air
air blown
blown from
from the
the Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Nozzle,
Nozzle, the
the paper
paper is
is sucked
sucked to
to the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt.
Belt.
At this
At this time,
time, the
the paper
paper is
is separated
separated by
by air
air blown
blown from
from a
a Separation
Separation Nozzle
Nozzle so
so that
that only
only the
the topmost
topmost paper
paper is
is attracted
attracted to
to the
the
Attraction Belt.
Attraction Belt.
The attracted
The attracted paper
paper is
is transported
transported to
to the
the feed
feed path
path by
by the
the rotating
rotating Attraction
Attraction Belt.
Belt.
Paper Suction belt Separation nozzle

i
Ltttt _ ttfttt_ ttfttft
/
Floatation Separation Floatation
nozzle air duct air duct
● Air Pickup Control

The Pickup
The Pickup Assembly
Assembly blows
blows twotwo different
different types
types of of air
air onto
onto the
the paper
paper inin order
order to
to increase
increase the
the separation
separation performance.
performance.
•• Air
Air Floatation
Floatation
Generated
Generated by by three
three Air
Air Flotation Fans. This
Flotation Fans. This blows
blows onto
onto the
the paper
paper from
from Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Nozzles
Nozzles viavia Air
Air Ducts
Ducts to
to float
float the
the paper.
paper.
It can
It can also
also be
be made
made into
into warm
warm airair as
as necessary
necessary by by the
the Air-operated
Air-operated Pickup
Pickup Heater.
Heater.
•• Air Separation
Generated
Generated by by two
two Separation
Separation Fan. Fan. This
This blows
blows onto
onto thethe paper
paper from
from Separation
Separation Nozzles
Nozzles via
via Air
Air Ducts
Ducts to
to separate
separate only
only the
the
topmost single
topmost single sheet
sheet ofof paper.
paper.
In the
In the case
case ofof large
large size
size paper,
paper, itit is
is possible
possible that
that separation
separation may may not
not extend all the
extend all the way
way to
to the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge even
even when
when air
air is
is blown
blown
onto the
onto the leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper.
paper.
The air
The air flows
flows all
all the
the way
way to
to the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge ofof the
the paper
paper through
through improving
improving thethe floating
floating performance
performance usingusing two
two Side
Side Fans
Fans in in the
the
Deck Assembly,
Deck Assembly, and and through
through limiting
limiting floatation
floatation atat the
the left
left and
and right
right with
with four
four claws.
claws.
The Trailing
The Trailing Edge
Edge Guide
Guide Plate
Plate retains
retains the
the paper
paper trailing
trailing edge
edge from
from the
the horizontal
horizontal direction
direction and
and from
from the
the upper
upper direction
direction soso that
that
the paper
the paper doesdoes not
not become
become spread
spread around.
around.
When the
When the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns ON,
ON, the
the Suction
Suction Shutter
Shutter opens
opens and
and the
the paper
paper adheres
adheres toto the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt due
due to
to suction
suction
by
by the
the Attraction
Attraction Fan.
Fan.
Deck Pickup Solenoid

Paper Suction Fan
Air Floatation Fan
Suction Shutter
Suction Belt
Air Duct
Claw
Air Pickup Heater
Air Separation Fan
Side Air Floatation Fan
Claw
Paper
Side Air Floatation Fan
Trail Edge Guide Plate
228
228
NOTE:
NOTE:
The mechanism
The mechanism for for supplementing
supplementing the the air-operated
air-operated pickup
pickup in
in the
the Deck
Deck Assembly
Assembly is is used
used when
when paper
paper is is loaded
loaded by
by the
the user.
user.
•• Side
Side Guide
Guide Lock
Lock Mechanism
Mechanism
When the
When the Lock
Lock Lever
Lever is
is raised,
raised, the
the Side
Side Guide
Guide Plate
Plate can
can bebe moved.
moved. When
When the
the LockLock Lever
Lever isis tilted
tilted forwards,
forwards, the
the Side
Side Guide
Guide
Plate cannot
Plate cannot bebe moved.
moved.
This mechanism
This mechanism prevents
prevents thethe paper
paper from
from becoming
becoming displaced
displaced byby the
the recoil
recoil of
of pushing
pushing in in the
the deck.
deck.
Note that
Note that since
since the
the Lock
Lock Lever
Lever automatically
automatically tilts
tilts when
when the
the deck
deck is
is pushed
pushed in,
in, itit has
has no
no effect
effect on
on opening
opening and
and closing
closing the
the deck.
deck.
•• Paper
Paper Retainer
Retainer Mechanism
Mechanism
Floating of
Floating of the
the paper
paper can
can bebe limited
limited by
by the
the 4
4 claws
claws onon the
the Side
Side Guide
Guide Plate.
Plate.
•• Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Retainer
Retainer Mechanism
Mechanism
When the
When the Move
Move button
button is
is pressed,
pressed, the
the Trailing
Trailing Edge
Edge Guide
Guide Plate
Plate can
can be
be moved
moved to to align
align with
with the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper.
paper.
Retaining
plate Claw
Shift button
Trail edge guide plate Side guide plate (rear)
Claw
Lock lever
Claw
Side guide plate (front)
Steps of
Steps of Air
Air Pickup
Pickup Control
Control
1. When the
1. When the pickup
pickup preparation
preparation signal
signal from
from the
the host
host machine
machine is
is received,
received, the
the following
following fans
fans turn
turn on.
on.
Name
Name Code
Code Name
Name Code
Code
•
(Left Deck/Right
Deck) i
AL (Left Deck/Right
Deck)
Attraction Fan
Attraction Fan FM701 / FM601 Air Flotation Fan 2 FM705 // FM605
FM705 FM605
Separation Fan
Separation Fan 1
1 FM702 / FM602 Air Flotation
Air Flotation Fan
Fan 3
3 FM708 // FM608
FM708 FM608
Separation Fan
Separation Fan 2
2 FM703 // FM603
FM703 FM603 Right Side
Right Side Fan
Fan FM706 // FM606
FM706 FM606
Air Flotation Fan 1 FM704 / FM604 Left Side
Left Side Fan
Fan FM707 / FM607
Each of
Each of the
the fans
fans operates
operates under
under conditions
conditions according
according to
to the
the media
media type
type and
and environment.
environment.
229
229
2. Technical
Explanation
2. If
2. If the
the paper
paper is
is coated
coated paper
paper and
and the
the environment
environment sensor
sensor detection result is
detection result is in
in the
the following
following table,
table, the
the Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Air
Air Heater
Heater
turns ON.
turns ON.
The warm
The warm air
air reduces
reduces the
the humidity
humidity and
and increases
increases separation.
separation. However,
However, paper
paper isis not
not picked
picked up
up until
until the
the Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Air
Air
Heater reaches
Heater reaches the
the designated
designated temperature.
temperature.
Temperature (deg C) Relative humidity (%) Absolute moisture content (g/m3)

Less than 14 Greater than or equal to 60 5.6
Greater than or equal to 14 and less than Greater than or equal to 40 4.8
22
34
38
42
46
Greater than or equal to 48 Greater than or equal to 18 13.5
3. Floatation
3. Floatation air
air is
is blown
blown onto
onto the
the paper
paper from
from Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Nozzles
Nozzles in
in three
three locations
locations via
via the
the Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Ducts.
Ducts.
Multiple sheets of paper on the surface float up.
Multiple sheets of paper on the surface float up.
Floatation
Floatation nozzle
nozzle Floatation
Floatation air duct
air duct
4. When
4. When thethe pickup
pickup start
start signal
signal is
is received,
received, the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid activates
activates and
and the
the Suction
Suction Shutter
Shutter opens.
opens.
Paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt by the air near the Suction Duct sucked to the Attraction Fan.
Paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt by the air near the Suction Duct sucked to the Attraction Fan.
At this
At this time,
time, since
since the
the Separation
Separation Air
Air blows
blows from
from Separation
Separation Nozzles
Nozzles in
in six
six locations
locations via
via Separation
Separation Air
Air Ducts,
Ducts, only
only the
the topmost
topmost
paper is attracted.
paper is attracted.
Deck pickup solenoid
Suction belt Suction duct Separation

Suction duct Separation nozzle
nozzle
Separation air duct
230
230
2. Technical
Explanation
5. If
5. If paper
paper is
is attracted to the
attracted to the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt after
after 140
140 mm/sec
mm/sec has has elapsed
elapsed from
from when
when the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns ON,
ON, the
the
Attraction Belt
Attraction Belt Motor
Motor turns
turns on
on and
and the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt rotates.
rotates.
The Attraction
The Attraction Belt
Belt transports
transports only
only aa single
single sheet
sheet of
of attracted
attracted paper
paper to
to the
the Deck
Deck Pullout
Pullout Roller.
Roller.
Note that
Note that whether
whether or
or not
not paper
paper has
has been
been attracted
attracted is
is determined
determined byby whether
whether or
or not
not the
the Suction
Suction Completion
Completion Sensor
Sensor turns
turns on.
on.
Suction End Sensor

Suction End Sensor Deck Pull-out Roller
Roller
6. Once
6. Once the
the leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper has
has passed
passed through
through the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor,
Sensor, the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns OFF.
OFF.
Pull-out
Pull-out Sensor
Sensor
7. If
7. If the
the following
following conditions
conditions are
are satisfied,
satisfied, the
the pickup
pickup continues
continues from
from Step
Step 44 in
in the
the procedure.
procedure.
•• 140
140 mm/sec
mm/sec have
have elapsed
elapsed since
since the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge ofof the
the leading
leading paper
paper passes
passes the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor.
Sensor.
•• There
There is
is a
a sufficiently
sufficiently large
large interval
interval between
between thethe leading
leading paper
paper and
and the
the following
following paper
paper
•• The
The following
following paper
paper isis at
at the
the position
position where
where itit can
can be
be attracted
attracted
●
• Pickup Fan Control
This machine
This machine controls
controls each
each fan
fan related
related to
to air-operated pickup in
air-operated pickup in order
order to
to support
support a
a wide
wide variety
variety of
of paper
paper types
types and
and environments.
environments.
Attraction Fan
Attraction Fan
Flow rate
Flow rate adjustment
adjustment is
is not
not performed
performed on
on the
the Attraction
Attraction Fan
Fan after
after itit is
is turned
turned ON.
ON.
The operation
The operation of
of paper
paper attraction
attraction is
is switched
switched by
by opening
opening and
and closing
closing the the Suction
Suction Shutter.
Shutter.
The Suction
The Suction Shutter
Shutter opens
opens and
and closes
closes by
by the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turning
turning ON
ON and
and OFF.
OFF.
Separation Fan/Air Flotation Fan

•• Separation
Separation FanFan 11
•• Separation
Separation FanFan 2
2
•• Air Flotation Fan 1
The air
The air flows
flows of
of the
the Separation
Separation Fan
Fan and
and Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Fan
Fan are
are adjusted
adjusted in
in order
order to
to reduce
reduce individual
individual differences
differences in
in the
the equipment
equipment
and deck.
and deck.
When the
When the deck
deck is
is closed
closed and
and there
there is is no
no paper
paper when
when thethe power
power is
is turned
turned ON,
ON, the
the air
air flows
flows of
of the
the Separation
Separation Fan
Fan and
and the
the Air
Air
Floatation Fan
Floatation Fan are
are automatically
automatically adjusted
adjusted at at the
the same
same time.
time.
In automatic
In automatic air
air flow
flow adjustment,
adjustment, the
the number
number ofof fan
fan revolutions
revolutions isis adjusted
adjusted to
to reach
reach the
the target
target value
value and
and this
this is
is recorded
recorded in
in the
the
Main Controller
Main Controller PCB.
PCB. As As a
a result,
result, itit is
is updated
updated each
each time
time the
the automatic
automatic air
air flow
flow adjustment
adjustment isis performed.
performed.
When paper
When paper is
is picked
picked up,
up, the
the air
air flow
flow is
is adjusted
adjusted by
by changing
changing the
the number
number of
of fans
fans and
and the
the revolution
revolution according
according to
to the
the following
following
conditions.
conditions.
•• Automatic
Automatic Air
Air Flow
Flow Adjustment
Adjustment Results
Results
231
2. Technical
Explanation
•• The
The paper
paper information
information set
set in
Settings/Registration (paper
(paper length,
length, paper
paper width,
width, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature)
nature)
•• Temperature
Temperature and
and humidity
humidity detected
detected by
by the
the environment
environment sensors
sensors (absolute
(absolute moisture
moisture content)
content)
Note that
Note that ifif automatic air flow
automatic air flow adjustment cannot be
adjustment cannot be performed
performed such
such as
as when
when there
there is
is paper
paper in
in the
the deck
deck when
when thethe power
power is
is turned
turned
ON, the adjustment results stored in the Main Controller PCB are used to perform adjustment of the air
ON, the adjustment results stored in the Main Controller PCB are used to perform adjustment of the air flow. flow.
Side Fan
Side Fan
•• Right
Right Side
Side Fan
Fan
•• Left
Left Side
Side Fan
Fan
The air
The air flow
flow of
of the
the Side
Side Fan
Fan can
can be
be adjusted
adjusted by
by changing
changing the
the number
number of
of fans
fans and
and the
the revolution
revolution (switching
(switching the
the voltage)
voltage) according
according
to the
to the following
conditions.
•• The
The paper
paper information
information set
set in
Settings/Registration (paper
(paper length,
length, paper
paper width,
width, weight,
weight, surface
surface nature)
nature)
•• Temperature
Temperature and and humidity
humidity detected
detected by
by the
the environment
environment sensors
sensors (absolute
(absolute moisture
moisture content)
content)
● Pickup Operation
• Pickup Operation
When the
When the pickup
pickup start
start signal
signal is
is received
received from
from the
the host
host machine,
machine, pickup
pickup starts
starts if
if the
the following
conditions are
are satisfied.
satisfied.
•• No
No jam
jam has
has occurred
occurred
•• The
The Front
Front Cover
Cover is
is not
not open
open
•• There
There is
is paper
paper in
in the
the receptacle
receptacle
•• The
The Air
Air Floatation
Floatation Air
Air Heater
Heater has
has reached
reached the
the designated
designated temperature,
temperature, or
or temperature
temperature control
control is
is not
not needed
needed
The paper
The paper loaded
loaded in in the
the receptacle
receptacle is is lifted
lifted up
up to
to the
the designated
designated pickup
pickup position
position by
by the
the Lifter.
Lifter.
If the
If the paper
paper isis attracted
attracted toto the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt after
after 140
140 mm/sec
mm/sec after
after the
the pickup
pickup start
start signal
signal is
is received,
received, the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt Motor
Motor
and Pullout
and Pullout Roller
Roller Motor
Motor turn
turn ON.
ON.
Attraction Belt
Attraction Belt Motor
Motor rotates
rotates the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt and
and picks
picks up
up the
the paper.
paper. Refer
Refer to
to air
air pickup
pickup control
control for
for details
details on
on the
the mechanism
mechanism
by
by which
which paper
paper isis attracted
attracted to to the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt.
Belt. (Reference:
(Reference: “Air
"Air Pickup
Pickup Control”
Control" on
on page
page 228)
228)
Next, paper
Next, paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
the feeding
feeding path
path by
by the
the Deck
Deck Pullout
Pullout Roller.
Roller.
Once the
Once the Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor hashas detected
detected thethe leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper,
paper, the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns OFF.
OFF.
Immediately after
Immediately after the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns OFF,
OFF, the
the attraction
attraction force
force to
to the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt remains.
remains. If
If the
the attracted
attracted paper
paper
is fed
is fed by
by the
the Deck
Deck Pullout
Pullout Roller
Roller in
in this
this state,
state, wrinkles
wrinkles occur
occur due
due to
to the
the tensile
tensile force.
force. Therefore,
Therefore, the
the Attraction
Attraction Belt
Belt Motor
Motor turns
turns
OFF after
OFF after the
the paper
paper has
has advanced
advanced by by (paper
(paper length
length -- 182.0)
182.0) mm*
mm* from
from the
the Pullout
Pullout Sensor.
Sensor.
After this,
After this, the
the paper
paper isis fed
fed only
only by
by the
the drive
drive ofof the
the Pullout
Pullout Roller
Roller Motor.
Motor.
** In
In the
the case
case of
of transparencies,
transparencies, (paper
(paper length
length -- 152.0)
152.0) mm
mm
The pickup
The pickup operation
operation sequence
sequence isis performed
performed at at 1300
1300 mm/sec.
mm/sec.
Deck Pickup Solenoid Suction Belt Deck Pull-out Roller
Ci rtY)
tqW
Pull-out Sensor
I
•
/
Suction Belt Motor )1 Pull-out Roller Motor
%11.601
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603)

Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703)
232
2. Technical
Explanation
■ Lower Feed
• Lower Feed Unit
Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
the Left
Left Deck
Deck and
and Duplex
Duplex Path
Path Assembly
Assembly is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Vertical
Vertical Path
Path Unit.
Unit.
PS210 PS214
PS210 PS214
PS160 PS161 PS212
PS161 PS212 PS217
PS217 PS162
ri
y
ry
m
)
E r
Duplexing
Duplexing Left
Left Deck
Deck Vertical Path
Assembly Feeding Assembly
M702 M175 M173 M174
Lower Feeding
Assembly
Code
Code _ Name
M173 Lower Feed Motor 2
PS160 Left Deck Merging Sensor
PS161 Lower Feed Sensor 1
PS162 Lower Feed Sensor 2
PS210 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Rear)
PS212 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Front)
PS214 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Rear)
PS217 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Front)
●
• Paper Length Detection
The degree
The degree of
of shrinkage
shrinkage in
in the
the vertical
vertical scanning direction of
scanning direction of the
the 2nd
2nd side
side of
of the
the paper
paper from
from the
the time
time passing
passing between
between the
the Lower
Lower
Feed Sensors
Feed Sensors isis detected.
detected.
The detected
The detected degree
degree of shrinkage** is
of shrinkage is corrected
corrected by
by the
the leading
leading edge
edge registration
registration control. The leading
control. The edge margins
leading edge margins of
of the
the 1st
1st side
side
and 2nd
and 2nd side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print are
are made
made the
the same.
same.
*: This
*: This includes
includes correction
correction such
such as
as paper
paper skew
skew (θ)
(0) and
and roller
roller speed
speed differences.
differences.
NOTE:
Correction of the degree of shrinkage in the horizontal scanning direction is performed by the Polygon
Correction Polygon Motor speed change control.
Step of
Step of Paper
Paper Length
Length Detection
Detection
Step 1:
Step 1:
After the
After the Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Sensor
Sensor 1
1 (PS161)
(PS161) has
has detected
detected (ON)
(ON) the
the leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper,
paper, timers
timers are
are started
started on
on the
the four
four
Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensors (PS210/PS212/PS214/PS217).
Step 2:
Step 2:
The ON
The ON =>=> OFF
OFF timing
timing of
of the
the four
four Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensors
Sensors is
is measured,
measured, and
and the
the paper
paper length
length is
is calculated
calculated according
according to
to a
a
formula.
233
2. Technical
Explanation
•• Paper
Paper length
length == Amount
Amount ofof time
time required
required for
for the
the paper
paper to
to pass P1 (PS210,
pass P1 (PS210, PS212)
PS212)
•• Degree
Degree of
of skew
skew == Time
Time difference
difference between
between the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge reaching
reaching PS210
PS210 and
and PS212
PS212
•• Feed
Feed speed
speed = = Time
Time until
until the
the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge reaches
reaches P2
P2 (PS214,
(PS214, PS217)
PS217) from
from P1
P1 (PS210,
(PS210, PS212)
PS212)
Step 3:
Step 3:
The degree
The degree of
of shrinkage
shrinkage is
is calculated
calculated from
from the
the calculated
calculated paper
paper length
length and
and degree
degree of
of skew,
skew, and
and is
is applied
applied to
to the
the leading
leading
edge registration
edge registration control
control (adjusts
(adjusts the
the deceleration
deceleration timing).
timing).
<Top View> P1 P2
P2 Skewe
Skewθ
)41 -
PS210
PS210 PS214
V V
P$161
PS161
O
8-
Lower Feed
Feed Roller2
Roller2 Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Roller3
V
PS212
PS212 V
P3217
PS217
O Ax8
PS161
PS161 PS210
PS210 PS214
PS214
Lower Feed Roller2 Lower Feed Roller3 PS212
PS212 PS217
PS217
Code ..-
Name
Name
P1 Primary detection
Primary detection position
position
P2 Secondary detection
Secondary detection position
position
PS161 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 1
1
PS210 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Left
(Left Rear)
Rear)
PS212 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Left
(Left Front)
Front)
PS214 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Rear)
PS217 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Front)
NOTE:
This control
This control only
only matches
matches the
the leading
leading edge
edge margin
margin of
of image.
image. To
To change
change the
the image
image size
size based
based on
on the
the degree
degree of
of shrinkage,
shrinkage, itit must
must
be manually
be manually input
input from
from Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration or
or service
service mode.
mode.
NOTE:
If there
If there is
is a
a fault
fault (error)
(error) in
in the
the Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor,
Sensor, jam
jam code:
code: OD94
0D94 occurs
occurs while
while paper
paper is
is passing.
passing.
Related Service
Related Service Mode
Mode
If
If you
you have
have replaced the Paper
replaced the Paper Length
Length Detection
DetectionSensor,
Sensor,check
checkthat
thatthe
thesensor
sensorisismounted
mountedcorrectly
correctly by
by using
using the
the following
following service
service
mode.
mode.
•• Automatically
Automatically adjust
adjust the
the distance
distancebetween
between the
the Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Path
Path Paper Length Sensors
Paper Length Sensors
COPIER >
COPIER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION > > SENS-ADJ
SENS-ADJ > PL-D-EXE
> PL-D-EXE
•• Input
Input the
the length
length of
of the
the adjustment
adjustmentpaper
paper between
between the
the Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Path
Paper Length Sensors
COPIER >
COPIER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION >> SENS-ADJ
SENS-ADJ > > INPUT-L
INPUT-L
•• Display
Display the
the feed
feed speed
speed ofof the
the adjustment
adjustment between
between the
the Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Path Paper Length
Sensors
COPIER >
COPIER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION > > SENS-ADJ
SENS-ADJ > > PL-SNS-V
PL-SNS-V
■ Vertical Path
■Vertical Path Unit
Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
the Right
Right Deck
Deck and
and Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Unit
Unit is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Pre-registration
Pre-registration Unit.
Unit.
234
234
2. Technical
Explanation
Pre-registration
Pre-reg'stration
Unit PS162 PS163 PS164
PS162 PS163 PS220 M176
PS164 PS220
Right Deck Vertical Path

Lower Feed Unit Unit
M178 M172 M177
Code Name
PS162 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2
PS163
PS163 Right Deck Merging Sensor
PS164 Vertical Path
Sensor
PS220 POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Sensor
Sensor
M172 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Motor
Motor 4
4
M176 POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
M177 Right Deck
Right Deck Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
M178 Vertical Path
Vertical Path Feed
Feed Motor
Motor
■
■Pre-registration Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
the Vertical
Vertical Path
Path Unit
Unit is
is fed
fed up
up to
to the
the pre-registration
pre-registration stop
stop position
position and
and stops
stops (pre-registration
(pre-registration stop).
stop). Paper
Paper
that has
that has stopped
stopped atat the
stop position
position is
is fed
fed again
again to
to the
the Registration
Registration Unit.
Unit.
The Pre-registration
The Unit performs
Pre-registration Unit performs paper
paper thickness
thickness detection,
detection, double
double feed
feed detection,
detection, transparency
transparency detection,
detection, and
and pre-registration
pre-registration
stop control
stop control (Pre-registration
(Pre-registration Motor
Motor speed
speed change
change control/Pre-registration
control/Pre-registration Release
Release Motor
Motor control).
control).
235
2. Technical
Explanation
UN122 UN123
UN123 PS137/PS138
PS137/PS138 UN179
Registration Unit Pre-registration Unit

Uni
P1
Vertical Path Unit
Code
Code lir Name
PS137 Transparency Sensor (Rear)
PS138 Transparency Sensor (Front)
UN179 Paper Thickness Sensor
UN122 Double Feed Sensor PCB (Transmission)
UN123 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Reception)
P1 Pre-registration stop position
●
• Pre-registration Control
During the
During the pickup
pickup operation,
operation, the
the pickup
pickup time
time can
can vary
vary depending
depending onon the
the paper
paper type
type and
and paper
paper size
size in
in use
use as
as well
well as
as the
the
environment. Therefore,
environment. Therefore, the
the machine
machine executes
executes pre-registration
stop control
control to
to ease
ease such
such variation.
variation.
Pre-registration
A. Pre Stop Position
-registration Stop Position
The pre-registration
The stop position
pre-registration stop position is
is the
the position
position 57.5
57.5 mm
mm in
in the
the downstream
downstream direction
direction with
with reference
reference to
to Pre-feed
Pre-feed Sensor
Sensor 33 (PS141)
(PS141)
NOTE:
Since this machine performs image position alignment using pre-registration stop, the paper does not stop at the Registration
“Cross-feed Registration
Rollers. Cross-feed correction of paper is performed by the cross-feed registration control. (Reference: "Cross-feed
Control” on page 241)
Control"
B. Pre
B. Pre-registration
-registration Control
Control
1. When the
1. When the Pre-feed
Pre-feed Sensor
Sensor 3 3 (PS141)
(PS141) turns ON after
turns ON after the
the paper
paper isis fed,
fed, the
Pre-registration Motors
Motors 2/3/4
2/3/4 (M157/M158/M159)
(M157/M158/M159)
are operated
are operated forfor 57.5
57.5 mm
mm of of pulses
pulses and
and then
then stop.
stop.
The paper
The paper feed
feed speed
speed upup to
to the
stop position
position isis 1000
1000 mm/sec.
mm/sec.
Note: A
Note: A registration
registration arch
arch is
is not
not formed
formed because
because there
there isis a
a cross-feed
cross-feed mechanism.
mechanism.
2. After
2. After aa fixed
fixed time
time (Tprereg)
(Tprereg) has
has elapsed
elapsed based
based on
on the
the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor signal,
signal, the
Motors 2/3/4
2/3/4
(M157/M158/M159) are
(M157/M158/M159) are operated
operated to to feed
feed the
the paper
paper toto the
the (leading
(leading edge
edge registration
control) Cross-feed
Cross-feed Registration
Registration Unit.
Unit.
The feed
The feed speed
speed after
after the
pre-registration turns ON is
turns ON is 853.3
853.3 mm/sec
mm/sec (100
(100 ppm),
ppm), 652.4
652.4 mm/sec
mm/sec (80
(80 ppm)
ppm)
T prereg = T image - T paper
•• T
T image
image = = Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor Position
Position (A)
(A) -- Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Position
Position (C)
(C)
•• T
T paper
paper = = Pre-registration
Pre-registration Stop
Stop Position
Position (B) - Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Position
Position (C)
(C)
236
2. Technical
Explanation
M159 M158 M157
A
T image
C
B
T paper
B-1. Pre-registration
B-1. Pre-registration Motor
Motor Speed
Speed Change
Change Control
Control
Pre-registration Motors 11 to
to 4
4 perform
perform pre-registration
pre-registration speed
speed change
change control
control according
according to
to the
pre-registration control.
control.
Pre-registration Motors 11 to
to 4
4 perform
perform acceleration and stopping
acceleration and stopping based
based on
on the
the upstream
upstream sensors
sensors using
using the
speed
change control,
change control, and
and turn
turn ON
ON pre-registration
pre-registration based
based onon the
the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor.
Sensor.
The following
The following table
table summarizes
summarizes the the operation
operation standards
standards ofof the
speed change
change control.
control.
Motor
Motor Operation
Operation Operation standard
Operation standard
Pre-registration Motor 1 (M156) Startup
Startup 1st Exposure
1st Exposure Start
Start
Acceleration
Acceleration Vertical Path
Sensor (PS164)
(PS164)
Stopped
Stopped Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
(PS141)
Pre-registration ON
Pre-registration ON Leading Edge
Leading Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor
(PS110)
1st Exposure Start
Start
Acceleration
Acceleration Vertical Path
Sensor (PS164)
(PS164)
Stopped
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
(PS141)
Pre-registration ON
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor
(PS110)
Pre-registration Motor
3 (M158)
(M158) Startup
1st Exposure Start
Start
Acceleration
Acceleration Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 (PS139)
(PS139)
Stopped
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
(PS141)
Pre-registration ON
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor
(PS110)
1st Exposure Start
Start
Acceleration
Acceleration Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 (PS140)
(PS140)
237
2. Technical
Explanation
Motor
Motor Operation
Operation Operation standard
Operation standard
Pre-registration Motor 4 (M159) Stopped Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141)
Pre-registration ON Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
(PS110)
M162 M161 M160
PS141 PS140 PS139
B-2. Pre-registration
B-2. Pre-registration Release
Release Motor
Motor Control
Control
Pre-registration Motors 1
1 to
to 4
4 perform
perform pre-registration
pre-registration engagement/disengagement
control of
of Pre-registration
Motors 1
1 to
to 4
4
according to
according to the
pre-registration control.
control.
The Pre-registration
The Pre-registration Pressure
Pressure Release
Release Motors
Motors 11 to
to 3
3 apply
apply pressure
pressure on
on Feed
Feed Rollers
Rollers 2
2 to
to 4
4 based
based on
on the
the upstream
upstream sensors,
sensors, and
and
release itit when
release when the
Pre-registration Motor
Motor turns
turns on.
on.
The following
The following table
table summarizes
summarizes thethe operation
operation standards
standards of
of the
Pre-registration Release
Release Motor
Motor control.
control.
Motor
Motor Opera-
Opera- Operation standard
Operation standard Pressure release
Pressure release control
control
tion
tion
Pre-registration Pressure Re- Pressure Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139)
lease Motor 1 (M160) Release When pre-registration ON Performed with all paper sizes
lease Motor 2 (M161) Release When pre-registration on Not performed for paper sizes
less than 376 mm
lease Motor 3 (M162) Release When pre-registration ON Not performed for paper sizes
less than 228 mm
238
238
2. Technical
Explanation
M162 M161 M160
PS141 PS140 PS139
● Double Feed
• Double Feed Detection
Detection
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors (transmission/reception)
(transmission/reception) that that are
are located
located between
between Feed
Feed Roller
Roller 1
1 and
and Feed
Feed Roller
Roller 22 of
of the
the Feed
Feed Unit
Unit perform
perform
double
double feed
feed detection.
detection. Once
Once itit is
is judged
judged that
that double
double feed
feed has
has occurred,
occurred, the
the machine
machine stops
stops printing
printing due
due toto a
a jam.
jam.
Ultrasound has
Ultrasound has the
the following
following characteristics,
characteristics, andand is
is able
able to
to detect
detect double
double feeds
feeds regardless of the
regardless of the media
media (plain
(plain paper,
paper, heavy
heavy paper,
paper,
color paper,
color paper, transparency,
transparency, etc.).
etc.).
•• During
During propagation,
propagation, there
there is is a
a large
large attenuation
attenuation atat density
density boundaries
boundaries (air-paper).
(air-paper).
•• The
The amount
amount of
of attenuation
attenuation doesdoes not
not change
change depending
depending onon differences
differences in
in the
the color
color or
or thickness
thickness ofof the
the object
object being
being measured.
measured.
Detection timing
Between 80
Between 80 and
and 300
300 mm/sec
mm/sec before
before the
the paper
paper enters
enters the
the Sensor
Sensor Assembly
Assembly
Steps of Double Feed Detection

Step 1:
Step 1:
Double feed
Double feed detection
detection is
is started
started
Step 2:
Step 2:
"Double Feed"
"Double Feed" is
is judged
judged
Step 3:
Step 3:
The double-fed
The double-fed paper
paper is
is fed
fed up
up to
to the
stop position
position and
and stops
stops with
with a
a jam.
jam. (Jam
(Jam code:
code: 0300)
0300)
239
2. Technical
Explanation
1)
1)
UN122
Feed Roller
Roller 44 Feed
Feed Roller 3 Feed Roller 2 Feed Roller 1
O 0
UN123
2)
2)
0, 0 . 0 1. 1 0
O 0 0' 0
1 1-11
3)
O 0 0 0
Code
Code Name
UN122 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Transmission)
UN123 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Reception)
NOTE:
The cause of the case in which a double feed is detected (jam code: 0300) even though there is no double feed can be open circuit
of the cable of the Double Feed Sensor, disconnection of the connector, or a failure of the Double Feed Sensor.
NOTE:
The POD Deck (option) also has a double feed detection function in the same way as this machine. When a double feed occurs
in the POD Deck, only the double-fed paper is ejected to the Escape Tray of the POD Deck. At that time, the jam code is 2800.
●
• Paper Thickness Detection
Paper thickness
detection isis performed
performed in in order
order to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage to to the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller surface
surface and
and to
to prevent
prevent scratching
scratching of
of the
the
Secondary Transfer Roller due to feeding of paper thicker* than the specifications.
Secondary Transfer Roller due to feeding of paper thicker* than the specifications.
The paper
The paper thickness
thickness isis found
found by
by detecting
detecting the
the Feed
Feed Roller
Roller 11 height
height using
using the
the Paper
Paper Thickness
Thickness Sensor
Sensor (UN179) and calculating
(UN179) and calculating
from the displacement amount between when there is paper
from the displacement amount between when there is paper and no paper. and no paper.
If paper
If paper that
that exceeds
exceeds thethe specification
specification thickness
thickness is
is detected,
detected, aa jam
jam is
is judged
judged and
and the
the paper
paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
pre-registration position
position
and driving stops.
and driving stops.
*: Specification
*: Specification thickness:
thickness: Paper
Paper thicker
thicker than
than 420
420 μm
pm (weight
(weight 350
350 g)
g)
Steps of
Steps of Paper
Paper Thickness
Thickness Detection
Detection
Step 1:
The position
The position (height)
(height) of
of the
the Feed
Feed Roller 1 when
Roller 1 when there
there is
is no
no paper
paper during
during the
the initial
initial rotation
rotation is
is measured
measured by
by the
the Paper
Paper Thickness
Thickness
Sensor (UN179).
Sensor
Step 2:
Step 2:
The position
The position (height)
(height) of
of the
the Feed
Feed Roller
Roller 1
1 is
is measured
measured by
by the
the Paper
Paper Thickness
Thickness Sensor
Sensor (UN179)
(UN179) when
when the
the paper
paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
the
Feed Roller 1*.
240
2. Technical
Explanation
*: The
*: The detection
detection timing
timing is
is based
based on
on the
the Vertical
Vertical Path
Path Sensor,
Sensor, POD
POD Path
Path Feed
Feed Sensor,
Sensor, and
and POD
POD Deck
Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor
(optional)
(optional)
Step 3:
Step 3:
The paper
The paper thickness
thickness is
is identified
identified from
from the
the position
position (height)
(height) of
of the
the Feed
Feed Roller
Roller 1
1 when
when there
there is
is paper/no
paper/no paper
paper based
based on
on the
the
measured value.
measured value.
•• If the paper is within the defaults (thickness is within 420 μm) pm)
Paper feed
Paper feed continues.
continues.
•• If
If the
the paper
paper is
is thicker
thicker than
than the
the defaults
defaults (thickness
(thickness exceeds
exceeds 420
420 μm)
pm)
Paper is
Paper is stopped
stopped atat the
stop position.
position.
UN179 UN179
UN179
Feed Roller 11
Feed Roller 11

•• Paper
Paper Thickness
Thickness Sensor
Sensor Rank
Rank Setting
Setting
COPIER >
COPIER > ADJUST
ADJUST >> MISC
MISC >> DF-S-RK
DF-S-RK
■
• Registration
Registration Unit
Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
Unit is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Outer
Outer Belt
Belt Unit.
Unit.
The Registration
The Registration Unit
Unit performs
performs cross-feed
cross-feed registration
registration control,
control, leading
leading edge
edge registration
registration control,
control, and
and Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller
engagement and
engagement and disengagement
disengagement control.
control.
PS146
1,11 it/J <!‘

-• kt. •
• • •
•
•
• )450
oo
Secondary Transfer Registration Pre-registration Unit

Outer Belt Unit Unit
M164 M168
Code
Code Name
PS146 Registration Front Sensor
M164 Registration Motor
M168 Cross-feed Motor
● Cross-feed Registration
• Cross-feed Registration Control
Control
In order
In order to
to deliver
deliver higher
higher productivity,
productivity, cross-feed
cross-feed registration
control is
is performed
performed to
to continuously
continuously perform
perform cross-feed
cross-feed correction
correction
and horizontal
and horizontal registration
registration correction.
correction.
241
2. Technical
Explanation
Cross-feed correction
Cross-feed correction is
is performed
performed by by the
the Cross-feed Roller pushing
Cross-feed Roller pushing the
the fed
fed paper
paper into
into the
the Cross-feed Push-on Plate
Cross-feed Push-on Plateuntil
until itit stops.
stops.
The Cross-feed
The Cross-feed Push-on
Push-onPlatePlateisismoved
movedto to the
the position
position corresponding
corresponding to to the
the paper
paper size
size by
by the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate Jogging
Plate Jogging
Motor (M167).
Motor Furthermore,the
(M167). Furthermore, the position
position of
of the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate
Plate is
is detected
detected byby the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate
Plate HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
(PS149).
(PS149).
Horizontal registration correction
Horizontal registration correction isis performed
performed by by the
the Registration
Registration Roller
Roller shifting
shifting the
the cross-feed
cross-feed corrected
corrected paper
paper to
to the
the center.
center.
Shifting of
Shifting of the
the Registration
Registration Roller
Roller isis performed
performed by by the
the Registration
Registration Swing
Swing Motor
Motor (M166). Furthermore, the
(M166). Furthermore, the position
position of
of the
the
Registration Roller
Registration Roller is
is detected
detected byby the
the Registration
Registration Roller
Roller Slide
Slide HP Sensor (PS150).
HP Sensor (PS150).During
Duringhorizontal
horizontalregistration
registration correction,
correction, the the
Cross-feed Roller
Cross-feed Roller is
is moved
moved upup and
and down
down by by the
theCross-feed
Cross-feedRelease
Release Right
Right Motor
Motor(M169),
(M169), Cross-feed
Cross-feed Release Middle Motor
Release Middle Motor
(M170), and Cross-feed
(M170), and Cross-feed Release
Release Left
Left Motor
Motor (M171)
(M171)because
becausethetheCross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller needs
needs toto disengage
disengage from
from the
the paper.
paper. The The upup
and down motion
and down motion of
of the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Rollerisisdetected
detectedby bythe
theCross-feed
Cross-feedRoller
RollerPressure
PressureRelease
ReleaseHPHP Sensors
Sensors11 toto33 (PS152,
(PS152,
PS153, and
PS153, and PS154).
PS154).
410
M166
Flowofofpaper
im Flow paper
Sliding operation
A,40.41.e% PS150
."":„: < Operationto
Operation to be
be
engaged/disengaged
Registration Roller
PS154 ...1111P
t ti PS153
• 111
• PS15
PS152
PS149-
PS149 •
• • 4to
• •
11114i
• •
• •
• •
M171 •
•
4111
1.. •
M170
M169
Cross Feed Paper
Sub Roller M167
Cross-feed
Roller
Cross-feed Push-on Plate
PS150 <TOP VIEW>
PS149
11
Cross-feed Push-on Plate Cross

/across-feed FeedSub
Cross Feed SubRoller
Roller Paper
Registration Roller
135154
PS154 PS153
PS153 PS152
PS152
Cross-feed Roller<Side
Cross-feed Roller <Side View>
View>
Code
Code Name
Name
M166
M166 Registration Swing
Registration Swing Motor
Motor
M167 Cross-feed Push-on
Plate Jogging
Jogging Motor
Motor
M169
M169 Cross-feed Release
Cross-feed Right Motor
Release Right Motor
M170
Cross-feed Middle Motor
Release Middle Motor
Cross-feed Left Motor
Release Left Motor
PS149 Cross-feed Push-on
Plate HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
PS150
PS150 Registration Roller
Registration Roller Slide
Slide HP
HP Sensor
Sensor
242
242
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name
PS152 Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 1
Steps of
Steps of Cross-feed
Cross-feed Registration
Registration Control
Control
Step 1:
Step 1:
When printing
When printing starts,
starts, the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate
Plate moves
moves to
to the
the position
position according
according to
to the
the size
size of
of the
the fed
fed paper.
paper.
—.F <Top View>
V H
C'
<Side View>
Step 2:
Step 2:
When the
When the paper
paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Registration
Registration Unit,
Unit, the
the paper
paper is
is fed
fed diagonally
diagonally towards
towards the
the front*
front* by
by the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Rollers
Rollers 1
1 to
to
3.
3.
*: Since
*: Since the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Rollers
Rollers are
are oriented
oriented diagonally
diagonally towards
towards the
the front
front
243
2. Technical
Explanation
<Top View>
H
o
<Side View>
<Side
0
0
NOTE:
NOTE:
Since the
Since the paper
paper is
is fed
fed diagonally,
diagonally, the
the nip
nip pressure
pressure of
of the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Rollers
Rollersisisset
set weak.
weak. Therefore,
Therefore,the
thepaper
paper feed
feed speed
speed can
can
vary depending
vary depending onon conditions
conditionssuch
such as as the
the paper
paper type,
type, size,
size, and 1-sided/2-sided. Therefore,
and 1-sided/2-sided. Therefore, the
the machine
machine executes
executes leading
leading edge
edge
registration
control to
to ease such variation.
ease such variation.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Since the
Since the paper
paper is
is fed
fed diagonally,
diagonally, the
thePre-registration
UnitFeed
FeedRollers
Rollers22toto4 4are
arereleased
releasedby
bythe
thePre-registration
Pre-registrationPressure
PressureRelease
Release
Motor
Motor control
controlwhen
whenthe the paper
paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Cross-feed Roller.
Cross-feed Roller.
Step 3:
Step 3:
Paper that is
Paper that is fed
fed diagonally
diagonally is
is corrected for cross-feed
corrected for by coming
cross-feed by coming into
into contact
contact with
withthe
theCross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate.
Plate.
<Top View>
<Side View>
<Side
244
2. Technical
Explanation
Step 4:
Step 4:
When the
When the leading
leading edge
edge ofof the
the paper passesthe
paper passes theRegistration
Registration Roller,
Roller, the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller is
is disengaged from the
disengaged from the Cross-
Cross-
feed Roller. After this, the Registration Roller is shifted towards the rear to correct the side registration. (Center reference)
feed Roller. After this, the Registration Roller is shifted towards the rear to correct the side registration. (Center reference)
<Top View>
<Side View>
0 U
O
Step 5:
Step 5:
The Cross-feed
The Cross-feed Roller
Roller engages with the
engages with the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Roller
Roller along
along with
with the
the passing
passing of
of the
the paper,
paper, and cross-feed correction
and cross-feed correction for
for
the following
the following paper
paper is
is performed.
performed.
<Top View>
<Side View>
<Side
U
U
Step 6:
Step 6:
When the
When trailing edge
the trailing edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes theRegistration
passes the RegistrationRoller,
Roller, the
the Registration
Registration Roller
Roller moves
moves towards the front,
towards the front, and
and the
the
side registration
side registration correction
correction for
for the
the following
following paper
paper is
is performed.
performed.
245
245
2. Technical
Explanation
<Top View>
<Side View>
Step 7:
Step 7:
When printing
When printing finishes,
finishes, the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate
Plate and
and Registration
Registration Roller
Roller are
are moved
moved to
to the
the home
home position.
position.
<Top View>
0 0 0
<Side View>
CD
Skew Correction
Skew Correction Adjustment
Adjustment
Displacement correction
Displacement correction of
of the
the leading
leading edge,
edge, trailing
trailing edge,
edge, and
and margin
margin in
in the
the image
image area
area in
in the
the vertical
vertical scanning
scanning direction
direction can
can
be
be adjusted
adjusted by
by entering
entering the
the skew
skew correction
correction amount
amount in in Settings/Registration.
•• Control
Control Operation
Operation
At power-on
At power-on or or at
at recovery
recovery from
from jam,
jam, when
when the
the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Angle
Angle Adjustment
Adjustment Motor
Motor (M400)
(M400) makes
makes a a full
full turn
turn
counterclockwise, the
counterclockwise, the Cross-feed
Cross-feed AngleAngle HP Sensor (PS400)
HP Sensor (PS400) detects
detects the
the home
home position
position utilizing
utilizing the
the Sensor
Sensor Flag
Flag on
on the
the dial
dial
attached to
attached to the
the motor.
motor.
After that,
After that, when
when the
the dial
dial stops
stops atat the
the position
position (default)
(default) memorized
memorized by by the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller or
or the
the position
position set
set by
by skew
skew correction
correction
in Settings/Registration,
in Settings/Registration, the the Cross-feed
Cross-feed Push-on
Push-on Plate
Plate stops
stops at
at the
the skew
skew adjustment
adjustment position.
position.
246
246
2. Technical
Explanation
M400 PS400
<Related Error
<Related Error Codes>
Codes>
IfIfthe
theCross-feed
Cross-feed Angle
Angle Adjustment
Adjustment Motor
Motorhashas been
been rotating
rotating for
foraa specified
specified period
period of
oftime
timebut
butthe
theCross-feed
Cross-feed Angle
AngleHP
HPSensor
Sensor
cannot detectit,
cannot detect it, the
thefollowing
following error
error code is notified.
code is notified.
E015-0060:
E015-0060: Feed system error
Feed system error (cross-feed
(cross-feed adjustment
adjustmentdialdial control
control error)
error)
Cross-feed Correction Method

Cross-feed Correction Method in
NOTE:
NOTE:
Cross-feed correction
Cross-feed correction requires
requires adjustment
adjustment for
for all
allpaper
paper types
types used
used by
by the
the user.
user.
1. Press
1. PressSettings/Registration
Settings/Registration>>Preferences
Preferences>>Paper
PaperSettings
Settings>>Paper
Paper Type
Type Management
Management Settings.
Settings.
2. Select
2. Selectthe
thepaper
papertype
typeto
toedit
editfrom
from the
the list
list and
and press
press[Details/Edit].
[Details/Edit].
3. Press[Change]
3. Press [Change]inin"Adjust
"Adjust Image
Image Position"
Position" in
in the
the <Details/Edit>
<Details/Edit> screen.
screen.
4. Press
4. Press[Do
[DoNot
NotUse
UseScanner]
Scanner]in
inthe
the<Adjust
<Adjust Image
Image Position:
Position: Select Method> screen.
Select Method> screen.
5. Press[Set
5. Press [SetDetails]
Details]in
in the
the <Adjust
<Adjust Image
Image Position>
Position> screen.
screen.
6. Press
6. Press[Corr.
[Corr. Image
Image Misalignment]
Misalignment] in
in the
the <Set
<Set Details>
Details> screen.
screen.
4 0
- Settings/Registration
<Correct Image Misalignment>
Measure and enter the length of the test page or output page.
Front Side Back Side
h ff611 0 mm h 360. 0 mm
(50.0-999.9) (50.0-999.9)
iI 20.0 mm i 20.0 mm Restore Initial

Settings
141. (0.0-330.2) (0.0-330.2)
Output Orientation
11 20.0 mm i 20.0 mm
(0.0-330.2) (0.0-330.2) Output Test Page
X Cancel
E3 System Management Mode Log 0
7. Perform correction
7. Perform correction based
based on
on the
the test
testpage
pagemeasurement
measurementvalues
valuesororarbitrarily-output
arbitrarily-output image.
image.
•• If
If correction
correctionisisperformed
performedusing
usingthe
thetest
testpage
pagemeasurement
measurement values
values
1. Press
1. [Output Test
Press [Output Test Page]
Page] in
in the
the <Corr.
<Corr. Image
Image Misalignment>
Misalignment> screen.
screen.
2. Set
2. Set the
the number
number ofof copies
copies of
of the
the test page to
test page to output
output and
and then
then press
press[Next].
[Next].
247
2. Technical
Explanation
3. Select
3. Selectthe
thepickup
pickup location
location where
where the
the custom
custom type
type is
is configured
configured and
and press
press [Start
[Start Printing].
Printing].
=> The
=> The test
test page
page is
is output.
output.
248
248
4. Measure
4. the length
Measure the "i" and
of "i"
length of "j" of
and "j" the output
of the page.
test page.
output test
•
• 0
.0stment Order
0
0
11* 3# 4#1
TE) -Mr*
04
(20mm)
. ,,
I
. ..„,.e.--
Jrnm)
249
2. Technical
Explanation
NOTE:
Measure the length of "i" and "r
"j" as follows:
5. Return
5. Returnto
tothe
the<Corr.
<Corr. Image
Image Misalignment>
Misalignment> screen
screen and
and enter
enter the
the measured
measured values
values of
of "i"
"i" and
and "j"
"j" for
for both
both the
the front
front side
side
and back
and back side.
side.
NOTE:
This machine performs the calculation such that the print area and paper become parallel using the entered values and h = 360.0.
•• When
When performing
performing correction
correction based
based on
on an
an arbitrarily-output
arbitrarily-output image
image
250
250
2. Technical
Explanation
1. Measure "I"
1. Measure "I" and
and "J"
"J" in
in the
the front
front and
and rear
rear margins
margins on
on the
the left
left leading
leading edge and "h"
edge and "h" in
in the
the left
left edge
edge length
length of
of the
the image
image
area.
area.
NOTE:
Be sure
Be sure to
to measure
measure "i"
"i" and
and "j"
"j" perpendicularly
perpendicularly to
to the
the paper
paper edge.
edge.
h
i j
If
If the values are
the values are measured
measured perpendicularly
perpendicularly to
to the
the image,
image, the
the skew
skew correction
correction cannot
cannot be
be executed
executed correctly.
correctly.
h
i j
2. Return
2. Return to
to the
the <Corr.
<Corr. Image
ImageMisalignment>
Misalignment>screen
screenand
andenter
enterthe
themeasured
measuredvalues
valuesofof"i",
"i","j",
"j", and
and "h".
"h".
NOTE:
This machine
performs the
the calculation
calculation such
such that
that the
the print
printarea
area and
and paper
paper become parallel using
become parallel using the
the entered
entered values
values
8. Press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
Output the
Output the test
test page
page again as necessary
again as necessary and
and check
check that
that it
it has
has been
been corrected.
corrected. If
If any
any further
further adjustments
adjustments are
are required,
required, repeat
repeat
the above
the above procedure.
procedure.
●
• Leading Edge Registration Control
This is
This is performed
performed in in order
order to
to ensure that the
ensure that the image
image position
position and
and paper
paper position
position are correctly aligned.
are correctly aligned.
When the
When the leading
leading edge
edge ofof the
the paper
paper passes
passes the
the Registration
Registration Sensor
Sensor (PS151), the paper
(PS151), the paper leading
leading edge
edge precedes the image
precedes the image leading
leading
edge.
edge.
Because of
Because of this,
this, the
the paper
paper feed
feed speed
speed is
is decelerated
decelerated to
to align
align the
the positions.
positions.
251
2. Technical
Explanation
PS151 M165 M159 M158 M157
PS110
M164
Code
Code Name
PS151 Registration Sensor
PS110 Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
Steps of
Steps of Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Control
Control
Step 1:
Step 1:
Leading edge
Leading edge patch
patch Bk
Bk is
is printed
printed on
on the
the ITB.
Step 2:
Step 2:
The leading
The leading edge
edge of
of the
the feed
feed paper
paper stops
stops aligned
aligned at
at the
stop position
position [A].
[A].
Leading Edge Patch Bk
PS110
PS151
A
PS141
Q 0
Code
Code Name
PS141 Pre-feed Sensor 3
Step 3:
Step 3:
The leading
The leading edge
edge patch
patch on
on the
the ITB is detected
ITB is detected by
by the
the Leading
Leading Edge
Edge Registration
Registration Patch
Patch Sensor
Sensor (PS110),
(PS110), and
and after
after the
the
designated time has elapsed, the Pre-registration Motor is driven and the paper is fed.
designated time has elapsed, the Pre-registration Motor is driven and the paper is fed.
252
2. Technical
Explanation
PS151 PS110
PS141
Step 4:
Step 4:
The leading
The leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Registration
Registration Sensor
Sensor (PS151).
(PS151).
At this
At this time,
time, the
the Registration
Registration Motor
Motor (M164)
(M164) deceleration
deceleration timing
timing is
is calculated
calculated from
from positions
positions of
of the
the image
image leading
leading edge
edge and
and
the paper
the paper leading
leading edge.
edge.
NOTE:
In the case of 2nd side of 2-sided print, the Registration Motor deceleration timing is calculated by considering the degree of
shrinkage determined by paper length detection.
Step 5:
Step 5:
The Registration
The Registration Motor
Motor (M164)
(M164) is
is decelerated.
decelerated. (928
(928 mm/sec
mm/sec =>
=> 464
464 mm/sec
mm/sec (100
(100 ppm),
ppm), 696
696 mm/sec
mm/sec =>
=> 348
348 mm/sec
mm/sec (80
(80
ppm))
PPrn))
•
•
•
PS151
PS151 PS110
•
,•-sts,•0
PS141
PS141
0 00
M164
Step 6:
Step 6:
The Registration
The Release Motor
Registration Release Motor (M165)
(M165) is
is driven
driven when
when the
the paper
paper reaches
reaches the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Roller,
Roller, and
and the
the Registration
Registration
Roller is
Roller is released.
released.
253
2. Technical
Explanation
M165
PS110
PS151
PS141
M164
NOTE:
Since the Registration Sensor (PS151) cannot detect transparent sheets such as transparencies, the paper leading edge is
detected by the Front Registration Sensor (PS146) to decelerate the Registration Roller.
■ Duplex Feed
■Duplex Feed Unit
Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
the Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Unit
Unit is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Lower
Lower Feed
Feed Unit.
Unit.
The Duplex
The Duplex Unit
Unit performs
performs decurler
decurler control
control (ref:
(ref: "Duplex
“Duplex Decurler
Decurler Control”
Control" on
on page
page 264)
264) and
and standby
standby control.
control.
254
2. Technical
Explanation
Main Station:
Pre-fixing Feed Main Station

Stalon Duplex
Left Unit Feed Middle Unit
Main Station Duplex

Feed Right Unit
255
255
2. Technical
Explanation
Sub Station:
Sub Station:
Duplex Decurler Unit Sub Station Duplex Sub Station Duplex

●
• Duplex standby control
Steps of
Steps of Duplex
Duplex Standby
Standby Control
Control
Step 1:
Step 1:
The paper
The paper is
is fed
fed to
to p2
p2 (standby
(standby position
position 6)
6) by
by the
the duplex
duplex reverse
reverse control.
control.
Step 2:
Step 2:
If
If there
there is
is no
no paper
paper at
at the
the downstream
downstream standby
standby position
position(the
(theDownstream
Downstream Duplex
Duplex Standby
Standby Sensor
Sensor is
is OFF), the paper
OFF), the paper is
is fed.
fed.
Step 3:
Step 3:
If
If there is paper
there is downstream, the
paper downstream, the paper
paper stops
stops at
at the
the standby
standby position.
position.
When the
When the trailing
trailing edge of the
edge of the paper
paper at
at the
the downstream
downstream standby
standby position
position passes
passes the
the Standby
Standby Position
Position Sensor,
Sensor, the
the Duplex
Duplex
Feed Motor is
Feed Motor is driven
driven again
again and
and feeds
feeds the
the paper.
paper.
256
256
2. Technical
Explanation
PS346
PS344
PS345
PS341
PS350
PS340
p1 p2 p3 p4
PS347
M321 M322 M331 M329 M327 M330 M328
Code
Code Name IP Code
Code Name IF
p1 Duplex reverse position p2 Duplex standby position 6
p3 Duplex standby position 5 p4 Duplex standby position 4
PS340 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS341 Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor
PS344 Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS347 Duplex Standby Sensor 6
PS346 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 PS345 Duplex Standby Sensor 4
PS350 Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor M321 Duplex Reverse Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse Motor M331 Duplex Feed Motor 8
M329 Duplex Feed Motor 7 M327 Duplex Feed Motor 6
M330 Duplex Feed Motor 5 M328 Duplex Feed Motor 4
●
• Page Passing Control
In a
In a job
job including
including 1-sided
1-sided printing
printing and
and 2-sided
2-sided printing,
printing, page
page order
order switching
switching control
control (2-sided
(2-sided pages
pages are
are printed
printed before
before 1-sided
1-sided
pages.)
pages.) is
is performed
performed toto shorten
shorten thethe paper
paper interval
interval between
between 1-sided
1-sided printing
printing and
and 2-sided
2-sided printing.
printing.
In this
In this case,
case, in
in order
order to
to secure
secure thethe reverse
reverse delivery
delivery path
path of
of 1-sided
1-sided printing,
printing, the
the duplex
duplex path
path of
of 15-sheet
15-sheet circulation
circulation for
for small
small size
size
is changed
is changed toto 13-sheet
13-sheet circulation.
circulation. This
This decreases
decreases thethe productivity
productivity to
to a
a level
level lower
lower than
than usual
usual but
but decreases
decreases the
the time
time required
required
for switching
for switching from
from 1-sided
1-sided to
to 2-sided.
2-sided. Thus
Thus the
the productivity
productivity can
can be
be improved
improved in in total
total depending
depending on on the
the combination
combination ofof 1-sided
1-sided
pages
pages and
and 2-sided
2-sided pages
pages of
of the
the job.
job.
257
2. Technical
Explanation
Normal
Normal control
control and
and page
page passing
passing control
control of
of a
a job
job including
including 1-sided
1-sided printing
printing and
and 2-sided
2-sided printing
printing
Printed in order of page numbers (conventional)
1 2-1 2-2 3 4-1 4-2 5
c De ivery interval
(large)
Printed with the order of page numbers switched (page passing control)
1 2-1 4-1 2-2 3 4-2 5
Delivery
interval
(small)
Cases
Cases where
where page
page passing
passing control
control is
is stopped
stopped
The cassette
The cassette is
is automatically
automatically changed
changed when
when the
the paper
paper in
in the
the deck
deck runs
runs low
low because
because the
the page
page numbers
numbers become
become out out of
of order
order ifif
the paper
the paper runs
runs out.
out.
When an
When an empty
empty paper
paper warning
warning (remaining
(remaining paper:
paper: approx.
approx. 50
50 sheets)
sheets) is
is generated,
generated, the
the page
page passing
passing control
control is
is stopped,
stopped, and
and the
the
control is
control is switched
switched toto normal
normal control.
control.
Related Service
Mode
•• On/Off
On/Off of
of page
page passing
passing control
control In
In a
a job
job where
where 1-sided
1-sided printing
printing and
and 2-sided
2-sided printing
printing are
are mixed
mixed
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >> FEED-SW
FEED-SW > > D-EXPRS
D-EXPRS
■
■ Delivery/Reverse
Unit
The paper
The paper fed
fed from
from the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly and
and Bypass
Bypass Feed
Feed Unit
Unit is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Duplex
Duplex Decurler
Decurler Unit
Unit or
or ejected.
ejected.
The Reverse/Delivery
The Reverse/Delivery Unit
Unit performs
performs delivery
delivery control,
control, delivery
delivery decurler
decurler control
control (ref:
(ref: "Delivery
“Delivery Decurler
Decurler Control"
Control” on
on page
page 264),
264),
reverse control,
reverse control, duplex
duplex reverse
reverse control,
control, and
and jam
jam residual
residual paper
paper delivery
delivery control.
control.
258
258
2. Technical
Explanation
Reverse control
Delivery De-curler
control
0 0
Duplexing reverse
control
●
• Delivery Control
The available
The available delivery
delivery methods
methods are
are face-up
face-up delivery
delivery and
and face-down
face-down delivery.
delivery.
Switching between
Switching between the
the paths
paths for
for face-up
face-up delivery
delivery and
and face-down
face-down delivery
delivery is
is performed
performed by
by switching
switching the
the Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Flapper
Flapper
after the
after the paper
paper has
has passed
passed through
through the
the Merging
Merging Path
Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS325).
(PS325).
259
259
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB(UN310)
(UN311)
M318 M324 M323

M
_/- -/-
PS314
/ ,-
PS337 PS325
PS338
PS339 'PS338
7r
LI // M319
●
• Reverse Control
In the
In the case
case ofof face-down
face-down delivery,
delivery, delivery
delivery is
is performed
performed by
by performing
performing the
the reversal
reversal operation
operation at
at reverse
reverse point
point [A].
[A].
When the
When the leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper reaches
reaches thethe Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Sensor
Sensor 11 (PS335),
(PS335), the
the paper
paper is
is fed
fed by
by the
the designated
designated distance
distance
and stops
and stops (the
(the trailing
trailing edge
edge of of the
the paper
paper is
is at
at the
the position
position of
of the
the reverse
reverse point)
point)
When the
When the reverse
reverse point
point is
is reached,
reached, the
the Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Motor
Motor (M320)
(M320) rotates
rotates in
in reverse
reverse and
and delivers
delivers the
the paper.
paper.
260
260
2. Technical
Explanation
Fixing Duplex Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB

Feed Driver PCB (UN310)
(UN311)
M318 M324 M323 M312
PS339 -PS338
PS338
PS342 PS325
A
PS335 _
M320
• —•• •••
Code i Name
M312 Merging Path Feed Motor
M318
M318 Delivery Motor
M320
M320 Delivery Reverse
Delivery Reverse Motor
Motor
M323
M323 Pre-delivery Feed
Motor 1
1
M324 Pre-delivery Feed
Motor 2
2
PS325
PS325 Merging Path Upper Sensor
PS335
PS335 Delivery Reverse
Sensor 11
PS338
PS338 Delivery Sensor 2
PS339
PS339 Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 3
3
PS342 Delivery/Reverse Front
Sensor
UN310
UN310 Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
UN311 Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
●
• Duplex Reverse Control
When paper
When paper is
is fed
fed to
to the
the Duplex
Duplex Feed
Feed Assembly,
Assembly, the
the paper
paper is is reversed
reversed at
at the
the duplex
duplex reverse
reverse point
point [A].
[A].
When the
When the leading
leading edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper reaches
reaches the
the Duplex
Duplex Reverse
Reverse Sensor
Sensor (PS340),
(PS340), thethe paper
paper is
is fed
fed by
by the
the designated
designated distance
distance
and the
and the Delivery
Delivery Reverse
Reverse Motor
Motor (M320)
(M320) is
is stopped
stopped (the
(the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of paper
paper is
is at
at the
the reverse
reverse point).
point).
When the
When the paper
paper has
has reached
reached the
the reverse
reverse point
point and
and there
there is
is no
no paper
paper at
at duplex
duplex standby
standby position
position 66 (Duplex
(Duplex Standby
Standby Sensor
Sensor 6
6
(PS347) is
(PS347) is OFF),
OFF), the
the Duplex
Duplex Reverse
Reverse Motor
Motor (M321)
(M321) rotates
rotates inin reverse
reverse and
and feeds
feeds the
the paper
paper to
to the
the Duplex
Duplex Feed
Feed Assembly.
Assembly.
261
2. Technical
Explanation
M320
A
PS340
PS340
M321 M322
Code it Name
M320 Delivery Reverse Motor
M321 Duplex Reverse Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse Motor
PS340 Duplex Reverse Sensor
●
• Jam residual paper ejection control
Residual paper
Residual paper in
in the
the host
host machine
machine isis ejected
ejected to
to the
the jam
jam residual
residual paper
paper ejection
ejection area
area to
to improve
improve jam
jam removal
removal when
when a
a jam
jam occurs
occurs
during
during a
a page
page passing
passing control
control job
job or
or in
in the
the delivery
delivery option.
option.
Jam residual paper

ejection area
•• When
When a a jam
jam occurs
occurs in
in the
the host
host machine
machine during
during a
a paper
paper passing
passing control
control job,
job, paper
paper in
in the
the downstream
downstream of
of the
the jammed
jammed paper
paper
is ejected
is ejected to
to the
the jam
jam residual
residual paper
paper ejection
ejection area
area and
and the
the delivery
delivery option.
option. Paper
Paper in
in the
the upstream
upstream stops
stops due
due to
to jam.
jam.
262
2. Technical
Explanation
•• When
When a
a jam
jam occurs
occurs in
in the
the delivery
delivery option,
option, paper
paper in
in the
the host
host machine
machine is
is ejected
ejected to
to the
the jam
jam residual
residual paper
paper ejection
ejection area.
area.
<Related service
<Related service modes>
modes>
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JAMEXIT
:: Jam
Jam Paper
Paper Auto
Auto Ejection
Ejection On/Off
On/Off
■
■Decurler control
This machine
This machine has
has three
three decurlers.
decurlers. Each
Each decurler
decurler is
is controlled
controlled depending
depending on
on the
the media
media settings
settings information
information (paper
(paper type,
type, paper
paper
size) and video signal (image density), and removes curls from the paper.
size) and video signal (image density), and removes curls from the paper.
Bypass Decurler
Delivery Decurler
Duplexing Deculer
● Bypass Decurler
• Bypass Decurler Control
Control
The degree
The degree of
of curl
curl during
during single
single fixing
fixing is
is made
made the
the same
same as as tandem
tandem fixing.
fixing.
The position
The position of
of the
the Bypass
Bypass Decurler
Decurler hashas two
two stages:
stages: the
the disengaged
disengaged position (HP) and
position (HP) and engaged
engaged position.
position. It
It is
is determined
determined by
by the
the
the Bypass
the Bypass Decurler
Decurler Engagement/Disengagement
Engagement/Disengagement Motor Motor (M333),
(M333), and
and can
can be
be changed
changed depending
depending on
on the
the paper
paper type,
type, image
image
density,
density, and
and size.
size.
The decurler
The decurler switching
switching operation
operation isis performed
performed 2020 mm
mm inin front
front of
of the
the decurler.
decurler.
263
2. Technical
Explanation
M333 M333
Cam
PS353 PS353
Bypass Decurler
4—) Upper Roller
Bypass Decurler 0
Drive Roller
<Disengaged> <Engaged>
Code
Code Name
M333 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor
PS353 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor HP Sensor
●
• Duplex Decurler Control
Curls in
Curls in the
the paper
paper are
are removed
removed in
in order
order to
to keep
keep the
the compression
compression distance
distance to
to the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly of of the
the 2nd
2nd side
side of
of 2-
2-
sided printing uniform.
The position
The position of
of Duplex
Duplex Decurler
Decurler has
has two
two stages:
stages: the
the disengaged
disengaged position
position (HP)
(HP) and
and engaged
engaged position.
position. It
It is
is determined
determined byby the
the
Duplex Decurler
Duplex Decurler Compression
Compression Distance
Distance Adjustment
Adjustment Motor
Motor (M325),
(M325), and
and can
can be
be changed
changed depending
depending on
on the
the paper
paper type,
type, image
image
density,
density, and
and size.
size.
The operation
The operation toto switch
switch the
the decurler
decurler is
is performed
performed 20
20 mm
mm in
in front
front of
of the
the decurler
decurler based
based on
on the
the Duplex
Duplex Reverse
Reverse Start.
Start.
Cam M325 M325
PS343 PS343
Duplex Decurler
Upper Roller
Duplex Decurler
Drive Roller
<Disengaged> <Engaged>
Code
Code Name
M325 Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor
PS343 Duplex Decurler HP Sensor
●
• Delivery Decurler Control
This control
This control is
is performed
performed in
in order
order to
to reduce
reduce the
the stack
stack height
height of
of delivered
delivered paper.
paper.
The Delivery
The Decurler has
Delivery Decurler has aa decurler
decurler for
for Face-up
Face-up Delivery
Delivery and
and aa decurler
decurler for
for Face-down
Face-down Delivery,
Delivery, and
and the
the Upper
Upper Decurler
Decurler operates
operates
during
during Face-up
Face-up Delivery
Delivery and
and the
the Lower
Lower Decurler
Decurler operates
operates during
during Face-down
Face-down Delivery.
Delivery.
The decurler
The decurler pressure
pressure has
has aa total
total of
of 8
8 levels
levels available
available and
and switches
switches depending
depending onon the
the image
image density
density and
and paper
paper type.
type.
264
2. Technical
Explanation
PS333 Upper Decurler Adjustment Cam 2
Pressure Plate
M316
Upper Decurler Lower Decurler

Upper Decurler
Lower Decurler
Adjustment
Drive Roller
Roller 2
Upper Decurler
Drive Roller I, Lower Decurler
Adjustment
Roller 1
M315 Pressure Plate

7:1
PS332
Lower Decurler Adjustment Cam 1
Code r
0= dm Name
M315
M315 Delivery Decurler
Delivery Decurler Compression
Distance Adjustment
Adjustment Motor
Motor 1
1
M316
M316 Delivery Decurler
Delivery Decurler Compression
Distance Adjustment
Adjustment Motor
Motor 2
2
PS332
PS332 Delivery Decurler
Delivery Decurler HP
HP Sensor
Sensor 1
1
PS333
PS333 Delivery Decurler
Delivery Decurler HP
HP Sensor
Sensor 2
2
Related Setting/Registration
Related Setting/Registration modes
modes
The Decurler Pressure can be changed from Settings/Registration.
•• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer
265
265
2. Technical
Explanation
■ Jam Detection
• Jam Detection
● Jam code
• Jam code list
list
Main Station
Main Station
PS141
PS146
PS140
PS151
PS139
PS139
PS166
PS166
PS220
PS172
PS200
PS200
PS164
PS164
PS171
(',-,' v,
tom Q?) t --- qD PS162
A
PS170
E- CJ
PS163
PS163
PS169
PS169
PS601
PS601
PS701
PS160
PS160 PS161
PS161
r
266
266
2. Technical
Explanation
Sub Station
Sub Station
PS337
PS337 PS325
PS325 PS321 PS317 PS313
PS321 PS317 PS313 PS312
PS312 PS323
PS323 PS327
PS326
PS338
PS338
PS322
PS339
PS339 PS307
PS342
PS342 PS305
PS335
PS335
PS304
PS336
PS336 PS350
PS341
PS341 PS345
PS340
PS340
PS346
PS344
PS344 PS347
PS919
PS919 PS918
PS918
Jam code
Jam code Sensor
Sensor XX
)0(
Name
Name Code
Code 01: Delay
01: Delay Jam
Jam 02:
02: Stationary
Stationary 0A: Residual
OA: Residual
Ill
Jam
Jam Jam
Jam
XX01
)0(01 Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor PS601
PS601 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX02
)0(02 Right Deck Merging Sensor PS163
PS163 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX03
)0(03 Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor PS701 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX04
)0(04 Left Deck
Left Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor PS160
PS160 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX05
)0(05 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 11 PS161 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX06
)0(06 Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 PS162 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX07
)0(07 Vertical Path
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX08
)0(08 Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 PS139
PS139 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX09
)0(09 Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 PS140 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX0A
)0(0A Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 PS141 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX0E
)0(0E Registration Front
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX0F
XXOF Registration Sensor
Registration Sensor PS151 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX10
)0(10 Secondary Transfer
Outlet Sensor
Sensor PS166
PS166 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX11
)0(11 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 PS172 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX12
)0(12 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 PS200
PS200 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX13
)0(13 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS304
PS304 Not detected
Not detected Not detected
Not detected Detected
Detected
XX14
)0(14 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS305
PS305 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
1
1
XX15
)0(15 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS307
PS307 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
2
XX16
)0(16 Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 1
1 PS326
PS326 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX17
)0(17 Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 2
2 PS327 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX18
)0(18 Secondary Fixing
Inlet Sensor
Sensor PS312 Not detected
Detected
267
267
2. Technical
Explanation
Jam code
Jam code Sensor
Sensor XX
)0(
Name
Name Code
Code 01: Delay
01: Delay Jam
Jam 02:
02: Stationary
Stationary 0A: Residual
OA: Residual
Jam
Jam Jam
Jam
XX19
)009 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sen- PS313 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
sor 1
XX1A
)0(1A Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sen- PS317 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
sor 2
XX1B
)0(1B Merging Path Upper Sensor PS325 Detected Detected Detected
XX1C
)0(1C Delivery/Reverse Front
Sensor PS342
PS342 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX1D
)0(1D Delivery Reverse
Sensor 1
1 PS335
PS335 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX1E
)0(1E Delivery Reverse
Sensor 2
2 PS336
PS336 Not detected
Detected
XX1F
)0(1F Duplex Reverse Sensor PS340 Detected Not detected Detected
XX20
)0(20 Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Rear
Rear Sensor
Sensor PS341
PS341 Detected
Detected Not detected
Detected
XX21
)0(21 Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS344
PS344 Detected
Detected
XX22
)0(22 Duplex Standby
Sensor 6
6 PS347
PS347 Detected
Detected
XX23
)0(23 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 PS346 Detected Not detected Detected
XX24
Sensor 4
4 PS345
PS345 Detected
Detected
XX25
Sensor 3
3 PS171 Detected
Detected
XX26
Sensor 2
2 PS170 Detected
Detected
XX27
)0(27 Duplex Standby Sensor 1 PS169 Detected Not detected Detected
XX28
)0(28 Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 1
1 PS322 Detected
Detected
XX29
)0(29 Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 2
2 PS323
PS323 Detected
Detected
XX2A
)0(2A Merging Path Lower Sensor PS321 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX2B
)0(2B Delivery Sensor 1 PS337 Detected Detected Detected
XX2C
)0(2C Delivery Sensor 2 PS338
PS338 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX2D
)0(2D Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 3
3 PS339
PS339 Detected
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX2E
)0(2E POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Sensor
Detected Detected
Detected Detected
Detected
XX2F
)0(2F Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sen- PS350 Not detected Not detected Detected
sor
sor
XX31
)0(31 Reverse Remaining Paper Detection PS918
PS918 Not detected
Detected
Left Sensor
Left Sensor
XX32
)0(32 Reverse Remaining Paper Detection PS919
PS919 Not detected
Detected
Right Sensor
● Remedy When
• Remedy When a
a Jam
Jam Occurs
Occurs
Operation When Delay/Stationary Jam Detected
•• Although
Although thethe upstream
upstream drive
drive of
of the
the sensor
sensor that
that detected
detected the
the jam
jam is
is stopped,
stopped, thethe downstream
downstream drivedrive is
is not
not stopped,
stopped, and
and the
the
paper
paper isis delivered before the
delivered before the drive
drive stops.
stops. InIn the
the case
case of
of a
a door
door open
open jam,
jam, the
the paper
paper feed
feed is
is stopped
stopped atat the
the same
same time
time as
as when
when
the door
the door open
open is
is detected.
detected.
•• If
If the
the paper
paper has
has not
not reached
reached the
pre-registration standby
standby position,
position, the
the paper
paper is is fed
fed to
to the
pre-registration standby
standby position.
position.
(Forced feed
(Forced feed control:
control: Improves
Improves jam
jam removability
removability when
when a a jam
jam occurs
occurs inin the
the Registration
Registration Assembly)
Assembly)
•• In
In order
order to
to improve jam removability,
improve jam removability, ifif the
the paper
paper stops
stops at
at a
a position
position where
where itit is
is difficult
difficult to
to clear
clear the
the jam,
jam, the
the paper
paper is
is fed
fed to
to a
a
position
position where
where jam
jam removal
removal isis easy.
easy. (Forced
(Forced feed
feed control)
control)
Method
Method for
for Clearing
Clearing Jams
Jams
Remove the
Remove the paper
paper by
by following
following the
the Touch
Touch Panel.
Panel.
Jam Recovery
Jam Recovery
After the
After the jammed
jammed paper
paper has
has been
been cleared,
cleared, remaining
remaining pages
pages are
are printed.
printed. When
When aa jam
jam ocurs,
ocurs, the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller notifies
notifies the
the Main
Main
Controller of
Controller of the
the page
page ID where the
ID where the jam
jam occurred,
occurred, and
and the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller executes
executes page
page reordering
reordering of
of the
the job
job from
from that
that page
page
ID. The DC
ID. The DC Controller
Controller (engine)
(engine) resumes
resumes printing
printing according
according to
to each
each page
page information
information in
in the
the reordered
reordered job.
job.
●
• Delay Jam
Deck Pickup Assembly (Right Deck, Left Deck)
If the
If the paper
paper leading
leading edge
edge does
does not
not reach
reach the
the sensor
sensor position
position within
within the
the specified
specified feed
feed time
time after
after the
the Deck
Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid turns
turns
ON
ON
268
268
2. Technical
Explanation
START
7
INTR / PRINT
[T] [T]
Pick-up Solenoid
Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Pull-out Sensor
T: Specified
T: Specified feed
feed time
time
Pickup Assembly
Pickup Assembly Solenoid
Solenoid Delay Jam
Delay Jam Sensor
Sensor N
N
Right Deck Right Deck
Right Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid (SL601)
(SL601) Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS601)
(PS601)
Left Deck
Left Deck Left Deck
Left Deck Pickup
Pickup Solenoid
Solenoid(51_701)
(SL701) Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS701)
(PS701)
Other Delay Jams

With the
With the exception
exception of
of the
the Pickup
Pickup Sensor
Sensor delay
delay jam,
jam, the
the idea
idea of
of the
the delay
delay jam
jam detection
detection timing
timing for
for the
the other
other sensors
sensors is
is basically
basically
the same.
the same.
Jam check
,Jam check is
is performed
performed in
in aa certain
certain period of time after
Turn on the copy start key, or
the sensor N-1 detects the lead edge of paper.
settle the print settings.
INTR / PRINT
I I
Sensor N-1
0.04 to 0.2 seconds 0.04 to 0.2 seconds
Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Sensor N
Arrival of paper to the sensor N is

If the paper does not reach the sensor N
monitored for approximately 0.13 seconds.
during this period, it is considered as a delay jam.
Delay Jam
Delay Jam Recovery
Recovery Sensor
Sensor N
N IIP Sensor
Sensor N-1
N-1
Right Deck
Right Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor (PS163)
(PS163) Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS601)
(PS601)
Left Deck
Left Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor (PS160)
(PS160) Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS701)
(PS701)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 1
1 (PS161)
(PS161) Duplex Standby
Sensor 1
1 (PS169)
(PS169)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 (PS162)
(PS162) Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Right
(Right Rear)
Rear) (PS214)
(PS214)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Path
Path Paper
Paper Length
Length Sensor
Sensor (Right
(Right Front)
Front) (PS217)
(PS217)
Vertical Path
Sensor (PS164)
(PS164) Right Deck
Right Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor (PS163)
(PS163)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 (PS162)
(PS162)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 (PS139)
(PS139) Vertical Path
Sensor (PS164)
(PS164)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 (PS140)
(PS140) Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 (PS139)
(PS139)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 (PS140)
(PS140)
Registration Front
Sensor (PS146)
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
(PS141)
Registration Sensor
Registration Sensor (PS151)
(PS151) Registration Front
Sensor (PS146)
(PS146)
Secondary Transfer
Outlet Sensor
Sensor (PS166)
(PS166) Registration Sensor
(PS151)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) Secondary Transfer
Outlet Sensor
Sensor (PS166)
(PS166)
Pre-fixing Feed
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 (PS200)
(PS200) Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172)
Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS305) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS304)
Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS305)
Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 1
1 (PS326)
(PS326) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307)
Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327) Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 1
1 (PS326)
(PS326)
Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS313) Secondary Fixing
Inlet Sensor
Sensor (PS312)
(PS312)
Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS317) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS313)
269
269
2. Technical
Explanation
Delay Jam
Delay Jam Recovery
Recovery Sensor
Sensor N
N Sensor
Sensor N-1
N-1
Merging Path
Merging Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS325)
(PS325) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Delivery/Reverse Front
Sensor (PS342)
(PS342) Merging Path
Merging Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS325)
(PS325)
Delivery Reverse
Sensor 1
1 (PS335)
(PS335) Delivery/Reverse Front
Sensor (PS342)
(PS342)
Duplex Reverse
Sensor (PS340)
(PS340) Delivery Reverse
Sensor 2
2 (PS336)
(PS336)
Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Rear
Rear Sensor
Sensor (PS341)
(PS341) Duplex Reverse
Sensor (PS340)
(PS340)
Duplex Path
Duplex Path Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor (PS344)
(PS344) Duplex Reverse
Duplex Reverse Rear
Rear Sensor
Sensor (PS341)
(PS341)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 6
6 (PS347)
(PS347) Duplex Path Inlet Sensor (PS344)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 5
5 (PS346)
Sensor 6
6 (PS347)
(PS347)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 4
4 (PS345)
Sensor 5
5 (PS346)
(PS346)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 3
3 (PS171)
Sensor 4
4 (PS345)
(PS345)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 2
2 (PS170)
Sensor 3
3 (PS171)
(PS171)
Duplex Standby
Sensor 1
1 (PS169)
Sensor 2
2 (PS170)
(PS170)
Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 1
1 (PS322)
(PS322) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307)
Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 2
2 (PS323)
(PS323) Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 1
1 (PS322)
(PS322)
Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321) Bypass Sensor
Bypass Sensor 2
2 (PS323)
(PS323)
Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 1
1 (PS337)
Merging Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS325)
(PS325)
Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 2
2 (PS338)
(PS338) Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 1
1 (PS337)
(PS337)
Delivery Sensor
Delivery Sensor 3
3 (PS339)
Delivery Sensor 2
2 (PS338)
(PS338)
● Stationary Jam
• Stationary Jam
Normal At normal operation
Jam check is performed in a specified period after

Turn on the copy start key, or the sensor N-1 detects the trail edge of paper.
settle the print settings.
INTR
INTR // PRINT
PRINT
Specified period -41—Specified

Specifiedperiod
period-0-
Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Sensor N
(L = Paper Length)
When paper is detected in this timing,

it is considered as an accumulation jam.
Sensor N
Sensor N Sensor N
Sensor N
Right Deck
Right Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS601)
Right Deck
Right Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor (PS163)
Left Deck
Left Deck Pullout
Pullout Sensor
Sensor (PS701)
(PS701) Tandem Sensor
Tandem Sensor 1
1 (PS326)
(PS326)
Left Deck
Left Deck Merging
Merging Sensor
Sensor (PS160)
(PS160) Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 1
1 (PS161)
Lower Feed
Lower Feed Sensor
Sensor 2
2 (PS162)
Vertical Path
Sensor (PS164)
Merging Path Upper
Upper Sensor
Sensor (PS325)
(PS325)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 1
1 (PS139)
(PS139) Delivery/Reverse Front
Sensor (PS342)
(PS342)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 2
2 (PS140)
(PS140) Delivery Reverse
Sensor 1
1 (PS335)
(PS335)
Pre-feed Sensor
Pre-feed Sensor 3
3 (PS141)
(PS141) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Registration Front
Sensor (PS146)
Delivery Sensor 1
1 (PS337)
(PS337)
Registration Sensor
Delivery Sensor 2
2 (PS338)
(PS338)
Secondary Transfer
Outlet Sensor
Sensor (PS166)
Delivery Sensor 3
3 (PS339)
(PS339)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) POD Deck
POD Deck Path
Path Sensor
Sensor (PS220)
(PS220)
270
Sensor N
Sensor N Sensor N
Sensor N
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 (PS200)
At Power-ON
At Power-ON
The DC
The DC Controller
Controller checks
checks for
for the
the presence
presence of
of paper
paper in
in this
this machine
machine (above
(above thethe corresponding
corresponding sensors)
sensors) immediately
immediately after
after power-
power-
on, immediately
on, immediately after
after the
the covers
covers are
are opened
opened and
and closed,
closed, and
and immediately
immediately after
after the
the covers
covers are
are opened
opened and
and closed
closed after
after jam
jam
processing.
processing.
The engine
The engine internal
internal drive
drive system
system andand high
high voltage
voltage system
system all
all stop
stop until
until the
the remaining
remaining paper
paper check
check finishes.
finishes.
Sensor N
Sensor N Sensor N
Sensor N Sensor
Sensor N
N
Right Deck Pullout Sensor (PS601) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS304) Duplex Standby Sensor 6 (PS347)
Right Deck Merging Sensor (PS163) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 (PS346)
(PS305)
Left Deck Pullout Sensor (PS701) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 Duplex Standby Sensor 4 (PS345)
(PS307)
Left Deck Merging Sensor (PS160) Tandem Sensor 1 (PS326) Duplex Standby Sensor 3 (PS171)
Lower Feed Sensor 1 (PS161) Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327) Duplex Standby Sensor 2 (PS170)
Lower Feed Sensor 2 (PS162) Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS312) Duplex Standby Sensor 1 (PS169)
Vertical Path Sensor (PS164) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 Bypass Sensor 1 (PS322)
(PS313)
Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 Bypass Sensor 2 (PS323)
(PS317)
Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140) Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141) Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor (PS342) Delivery Sensor 1 (PS337)
Registration Front Sensor (PS146) Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 (PS335) Delivery Sensor 2 (PS338)
Registration Sensor (PS151) Delivery Reverse Sensor 2 (PS336) Delivery Sensor 3 (PS339)
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166) Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS340) POD Deck Path Sensor (PS220)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor (PS341) Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor
(PS350)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 (PS200) Duplex Path Inlet Sensor (PS344)
●
• Other Jams
Paper Thickness
Paper Thickness Detection
Detection Jam
Jam
Paper thickness
detection is
is performed
performed in
in order
order to
to prevent
prevent tearing
tearing the
the Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller surface
surface and
and to
to prevent
prevent damaging
damaging the
the
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Roller
Roller due
due to
to paper
paper of
of thickness
thickness exceeding
exceeding the
the standards.
standards. When
When paper
paper that
that exceeds
exceeds the
the specified
specified thickness
thickness
is detected,
is detected, a
a paper
paper thickness
thickness detection
detection jam
jam occurs.
occurs. (Reference:
(Reference: “Paper
"Paper Thickness
Thickness Detection”
Detection" on
on page
page 240)
240)
[Paper Thickness
[Paper Thickness Detection
Detection Jam]
Jam]
0D00
ODOO
Double Feed Jam

When double
When double paper
paper feed
feed is
is detected,
detected, a
a double
double feed
feed jam
jam occurs.
occurs. (Reference:
(Reference: “Double
"Double Feed
Feed Detection”
Detection" on
on page
page 239)
239)
[Double Feed
[Double Feed Jam]
Jam]
0300
0300
Transparency Jam
Transparency Jam
When the
When the following
conditions are
are satisfied,
satisfied, a
a transparency
transparency jam
jam occurs.
occurs.
Transparency jams
Transparency jams are
are detected
detected byby the
the Transparency
Transparency Sensor
Sensor (Front):
(Front): PS138
PS138 and
and Transparency
Transparency Sensor
Sensor (Rear):
(Rear): PS137.
PS137.
[Transparency Jam]
[Transparency Jam]
0D90: IfIf transparency
OD90: transparency that
that cannot
cannot bebe fed
fed is
is fed
fed
0D92: If
OD92: If non-transparency
non-transparency is is fed
fed with
with transparency
transparency set
set
0D93: If
OD93: If transparency
transparency isis fed
fed with
with non-transparency
non-transparency setset
271
2. Technical
Explanation
Paper
Paper Size
Size Mismatch
Mismatch Jam
Jam
The paper size is confirmed in this machine by the Control Panel setting.
The size
The size of
of paper
paper actually
actually fed
fed is
is detected
detected by
by the
the Vertical
Vertical Path
Path Sensor:
Sensor: PS164
PS164 (when
(when feeding
feeding from
from host
host machine
machine deck)
deck) and
and the
the
POD Deck Path Sensor: PS220 (when feeding from POD Deck, Paper Deck, or Long Sheet Tray).
If the
If the paper
paper size
size detected
detected by
by this
this machine
machine differs
differs greatly
greatly from
from the
the paper
paper size
size that
that is
is actually
actually fed,
fed, aa paper
paper size
size mismatch
mismatch jam
jam occurs.
occurs.
[Paper Size
[Paper Size Mismatch
Mismatch Jam]
Jam]
0D91
OD91
Sequence jam
Sequence jam
If the
If the following
following symptoms
symptoms occur,
occur, a
a sequence
sequence jam
jam occurs.
occurs. (no
(no detection
detection sensor)
sensor)
[Sequence Jam]
[Sequence Jam]
0CA2: IfIf aa jam
OCA2: jam caused
caused by
by an
an accessory
accessory occurs
occurs and
and the
the paper
paper cannot
cannot be
be ejected
ejected
272
2. Technical
Explanation
External Auxiliary System
O Counter Control
■
■ Overview
Overview
This machine
This machine has
has software
software counters
counters which
which count
count the
the number
number of
of prints/copies
prints/copies according
according to
to the
the job
job type.
type. Counters
Counters are
are displayed
displayed
by
by pressing
pressing the
the Check
Check Counter
Counter key
key on
on the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
Target
Target Number displayed
Number displayed for
for each
each counter
counter (in
(in service
service mode)/Item
mode)/Item Country
Country
Counter 1
Counter Counter 2
1 Counter Counter 3
2 Counter Counter 4
3 Counter Counter 5
4 Counter Counter 6
5 Counter Counter 7
6 Counter 7 Counter
Counter 8
8 Code
Code
Japan*2
Japan*2 Total 1 Total (Black Total (Full *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
&& White
White 1)
1) Color + Sin-
gle Color 1)
101 108
108 125 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000
Japan*3
Japan*3 Total 2 Copy (Full Total A (Full Copy (Black Total A *1 *1 *1 JP
Color +
Color + Sin-
Sin- Color +
Color + Sin-
Sin- & & White
White 2)
2) (Black &
gle Color/2)
gle Color/2) gle Color/2)
gle Color/2) White 2)
102 231 148 222 133
133 000
000 000
000 000
000
Japan*4
Japan*4 Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Total A (Full Total (Sin- *1 *1 *1 JP
&& White
White 1) Color +
1) Color + Sin-
Sin- Color + Sin- gle Color 1)
gle Color/1)
gle Color/1) gle
gle Color
Color 1)
1)
101
101 108
108 232
232 149
149 118
118 000
000 000
000 000
000
Japan*5
Japan*5 Total 1 Total (Full Total (Full Total
Total (Black Total (Black
(Black Total (Black Scan
Scan (Total
(Total *1 *1 JP
Color +
Color + Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- && White/
White/ & White/
& White/ 1)
gle Color/
gle Color/ gle Color/
gle Color/ Small)
Small) Large)
Large)
Small) Large)
Large)
101
101 123
123 122
122 113
113 112
112 501
501 000
000 000
000
Japan*6
Japan*6 Total 1 Total (Full Total (Full Total
Total (Black Total (Black
(Black Total (Black Total
Total (Sin-
(Sin- Total (Sin-
Total (Sin- Scan (Total
Scan (Total JP
JP
Color +
Color + Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- && White/
White/ & White/
& White/ gle
gle Color/
Color/ gle
gle Color/
Color/ 1)
gle Color/
gle Color/ Small)
Small) Large)
Large) Small) Large)
Large)
Small) Large)
Large)
101
101 123
123 122
122 113
113 112
112 111
111 110
110 501
501
Taiwan Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- *1 *1 *1 TW
& White 1) (Full Color/ (Full
(Full Color/
Color/ gle
gle Color
Color 1)
1)
Large)
Large) Small)
101 108
108 401 402 118 000
000 000
000 000
000
UL *2 Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print *1 *1 US
US
& White 1) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black
(Black &
& (Black &
(Black &
Single Col-
Single Col- Single Col- White/ White/
White/
or/Large)
or/Large) or/Small)
or/Small) Large) Small)
101 108
108 407 408
408 403
403 404 000
000 000
000
UL *3
UL *3 Total 2 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print *1 *1 US
US
2) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black
(Black &
& (Black &
(Black &
Single Col-
Single Col- Single Col- White/ White/
White/
or/Large)
or/Large) or/Small)
or/Small) Large) Small)
102 109
109 407 408
408 403
403 404 000
000 000
000
General
General Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- Total 1 (2- *1 *1 SG/KR/CN
SG/KR/CN
& White 1) (Full Color/ (Full
(Full Color/
Color/ gle
gle Color
Color 1)
1) sided)
sided)
Large)
Large) Small)
101 108
108 401 402 118 114 000
000 000
000
UK *2 Total (Full
Total (Black Total (Black Total Total (Full
(Full Total Scan (Total
(Full Scan Print (Total
(Total Print (Total *1 *1 GB
GB
& White/
& White/ & White/
& White/ Color
Color +
+ Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- 1) 1)
Large)
Large) Small)
Small) gle Color/
gle Color/
Large)
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501
501 301
301 000
000 000
000
240V UK *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
GB
101 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000
273
2. Technical
Explanation
Target
Target Number displayed
Number displayed for
for each
each counter
counter (in
(in service
service mode)/Item
mode)/Item Country
Country
Counter 1
Counter Counter 2
1 Counter Counter 3
2 Counter Counter 4
3 Counter Counter 5
4 Counter Counter 6
5 Counter Counter 7
6 Counter 7 Counter
Counter 8
8 Code
Code
CA
CA Total 1
Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 AU
&& White
White 1) Color +
1) Color + Sin-
Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
gle Color/
gle Color/ gle
gle Color/
Color/
Large)
Large) Small) Large)
Large) Small)
101 108
108 229 230
230 321 322 000
000 000
000
FRN *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total
Total (Full Scan (Total
(Total Print (Total *1 *1 FR
& White/
& White/ & White/
& White/ Color
Color +
+ Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- 1) 1)
Large)
Large) Small)
Small) gle Color/
gle Color/
Large)
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501
501 301
301 000
000 000
000
FRN *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
101 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000
GER *2 Total (Full
(Total Print (Total *1 *1 DE
& White/
& White/ & White/
& White/ Color
Color +
+ Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- 1) 1)
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/
Large)
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501
501 301
301 000
000 000
000
GER *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
101 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000
AMS *2 Total (Full
(Total Print (Total *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
ES/SE/PT/
& White/
& White/ & White/
& White/ Color
Color +
+ Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- 1) 1) NO/DK/FI/P
Large)
Large) Small)
Small) gle Color/
gle Color/ L/HU/CZ/SI/
L/HU/CZ/SI/
Large)
Large) Small) GR/EE/RU/
GR/EE/RU/
112 113 122 123 501
501 301
301 000
000 000
000 NL/SK/RO/
NUSK/R0/
HR/BG/TR
AMS *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
ES/SE/PT/
101 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 NO/DK/FI/P
L/HU/CZ/SI/
L/HU/CZ/SI/
GR/EE/RU/
GR/EE/RU/
NL/SK/RO/
NUSK/R0/
HR/BG/TR
HR/BG/TR
ITA *2 Total (Full
(Total Print (Total *1 *1 IT
& White/
& White/ & White/
& White/ Color
Color +
+ Sin- Color +
Sin- Color + Sin-
Sin- 1) 1)
Large)
Large) Small)
Small) gle Color/
gle Color/
Large)
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501
501 301
301 000
000 000
000
ITA *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
101 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000 000
000
*1: Hidden
*1: Hidden by
by default.
default. Can
Can be
be changed
changed in in service
service mode.
mode.
*2: Counter
*2: Counter display
display type:
type: type
type 1
1 (the
(the following
following service
service mode
mode set
set to
to "0")
"0")
*3: Counter
*3: Counter display
display type:
type: type
type 2
2 (the
(the following
following service
service mode
mode set
set to
to "1")
"1")
*4: Counter
*4: Counter display
display type:
type: type
type 3
3 (the
(the following
following service
service mode
mode set
set to
to "2")
"2")
*5: Counter
*5: Counter display
display type:
type: type
type 4
4 (the
(the following
following service
service mode
mode set
set to
to "3")
"3")
*6: Counter
*6: Counter display
display type:
type: type
type 5
5 (the
(the following
following service
service mode
mode set
set to
to "4")
"4")
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER > > CNT-SW
CNT-SW
274
2. Technical
Explanation
<Terminology>
<Terminology>
•• Large: Large-size
Large: Large-size paper
paper (paper
(paper length
length exceeds
exceeds 364
364 mm
mm in in paper
paper feed
feed direction)
direction)
•• Small: Small-size
Small: Small-size paper
paper (paper
(paper length
length isis 364
364 mm
mm or
or less
less in
in paper
paper feed
feed direction)
direction)
•• Total: When
Total: When a
a piece
piece of
of paper
paper is
is delivered,
delivered, thethe counter
counter is
is advanced
advanced by by 1
1
•• 2-Sided: The
2-Sided: The counter
counter is
is advanced
advanced by by 11 for
for paper
paper delivered
delivered in in 2-sided
2-sided mode
mode
•• Country code:
Country code: Can
Can be
be changed
changed in in the
the following
following service
service mode:
mode:
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > FNC-SW
FNC-SW > > CONFIG
CONFIG
Coun-
Coun- Country/Region
Country/Region Coun-
Country/Region
try
try try
try try
try try
try
Code
Code Code
Code
i
Code
Code Code
Code
JP
JP Japan
Japan DK Denmark BG Bulgaria
Bulgaria MY Malaysia
Malaysia
US
US USA
USA FI
Fl Finland BO Bolivia NZ New Zealand
New Zealand
GB
GB Great Britain
Great Britain PL Poland
Poland BR Brazil PE Peru
Peru
FR France
France HU Hungary
Hungary CA
CA Canada
Canada PH Philippines
DE Germany CZ
CZ Czechoslovakia
Czechoslovakia CH
CH Switzerland
Switzerland PY Paraguay
Paraguay
IT Italy
Italy SI
SI Slovenia CL
CL Chile RO Romania
AU
AU Australia
Australia GR
GR Greece
Greece CY
CY Cyprus
Cyprus SK
SK Slovakia
Slovakia
SG
SG Singapore
Singapore EE Estonia
Estonia HR Croatia
Croatia TH Thailand
NL Netherlands
Netherlands RU Russia
Russia ID Indonesia
Indonesia TR Turkey
Turkey
KR Korea
Korea AD Andorra
Andorra IE Ireland
Ireland UA
UA Ukraine
Ukraine
CN
CN China AL Albania
Albania IL Israel UY
UY Uruguay
Uruguay
TW Taiwan AM Armenia IN India
India VE Venezuela
Venezuela
ES Spain AR Argentina
Argentina IS Iceland
Iceland VN Vietnam
Vietnam
SE
SE Sweden
Sweden AT Austria
Austria LU Luxembourg
Luxembourg
PT Portugal
Portugal BA Bosnia-Herzegovina LV Latvia
Latvia
NO Norway
Norway BE Belgium MX Mexico
Mexico
•• Three-digit
Three-digit number
number in
in the
the counter
counter column:
column: Setting
Setting value
value of
of the
the following
following service
service mode
mode items
items (COUNTER2
(COUNTER2 to
to 8
8 can
can be
be
changed).
changed).
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER1
COUNTER1
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER2
COUNTER2
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER3
COUNTER3
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER4
COUNTER4
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER5
COUNTER5
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER6
COUNTER6
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER7
COUNTER7
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > USER
USER >> COUNTER8
COUNTER8
■
■Count-up timing
Count-up timing
Count-up timing differs
differs according
according to
to the
the following:
following:
•• Print
Print mode
mode (1-sided/2nd
(1-sided/2nd side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print,
print, 1st
1st side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print)
print)
•• Delivery
Delivery Position
Position (Finisher,
(Finisher, Stacker,
Stacker, Perfect
Perfect Binder)
Binder)
Delivery position
Delivery position Print mode
Print mode
1-sided print/2nd
1-sided print/2nd side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print 1st side
1st side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print
Count-up timing
Count-up timing
1 When
When the
the machine
machine configuration
configuration consists
consists of When the
of When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through When the
through When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the
the Host
the Host Machine
Machine only
only Delivery Roller 3 paper passes
paper passes through
through Duplex
Duplex
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor 33 (PS339)
(PS339) Feed Roller 1-1
2 Finisher-AN1 Tray A (Upper Tray) When
When the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of the paper passes through Reference sensor:
of the paper passes through Reference sensor: Duplex
Duplex
Saddle Finisher-AN2 the Delivery Roller Standby Sensor
Standby Sensor 1 1 (PS169)
(PS169)
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Upper
Upper Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor (PS5)
(PS5)
Tray B (Lower Tray) When
When the
the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through
through
the Sort
the Sort Delivery
Delivery Roller
Roller
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Lower
Lower Delivery
Delivery Sensor
Sensor (PS6)
(PS6)
Saddle area
Saddle area When the
When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through
through
the Saddle
the Saddle Inlet
Inlet Delivery
Delivery Roller
Roller
Reference Sensor:
Reference Sensor: Saddle
Saddle Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor (PS101)
(PS101)
275
2. Technical
Explanation
Delivery position
Delivery position Print mode
Print mode
1-sided print/2nd
1-sided print/2nd side
side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print 1st side
1st side of
of 2-sided
2-sided print
print
Count-up timing
Count-up timing
3 Trimmer-D1
3 When the
When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through When the
through When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the
the Saddle
the Saddle Inlet
Inlet Delivery
Delivery Roller
Roller paper passes
paper passes through
through Duplex
Duplex
Reference Sensor:
Reference Sensor: Saddle
Saddle Inlet
Inlet Sensor
Sensor (PS101)
(PS101) Feed Roller 1-1
High Capacity
4 High Capacity Stack- Delivery Tray
Stack- Delivery Tray When the
When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes through Reference sensor:
passes through Reference sensor: Duplex
Duplex
er-H1 the Delivery Tray Outlet Roller Standby
Standby Sensor
Sensor 1
1 (PS169)
(PS169)
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Delivery
Delivery Tray
Tray Outlet
Outlet Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor
(21B6)
Stack Assembly
Stack Assembly When the
When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through
through
the Stacker
the Stacker Outlet
Outlet Roller
Roller
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Stacker
Stacker Outlet
Outlet Paper
Paper Sensor
Sensor
(Center) (21B27)
(Center) (21B27)
5 Perfect Binder-E1
5 Binder-El When the
When the trailing
trailing edge
edge of
of the
the paper
paper passes
passes through
through
the Signature Delivery Roller
Reference sensor:
Reference sensor: Timing
Timing Sensor
Sensor (S5)
(S5)
<Related service
<Related service mode>
mode>
The following
service mode
mode setting
setting can
can be
be used
used toto change
change thethe count-up
count-up timing
timing when
when connecting
connecting aa delivery
delivery system
system option.
option.
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION > > FNC-SW
FNC-SW > > CNT-TMG
CNT-TMG
0: The
0: The counter
counter isis advanced
advanced when
when paper
paper is
is delivered
delivered from
from aa delivery
delivery system
system option
option (default
(default value)
value)
1: The
1: The counter
counter isis advanced
advanced when
when paper
paper is
is delivered
delivered from
from the
the host
host machine
machine
When set
When set to
to "1",
"1", count-up
count-up timing
timing corresponds
corresponds toto 1
1 in
in the
the above
above table.
table.
Main Station
Main Station
PS169
PS169
276
276
2. Technical
Explanation
Sub Station
Sub Station
PS339
PS339
Finisher-AN1
Saddle Finisher-AN2
PS5
PS5
PS6
PS6
PS101
277
277
2. Technical
Explanation
High Capacity
Stacker-H1
21B6
21B27
211327
Perfect Binder-E1
S5
●
• Long Original Counter
This machine
This machine supports
supports long
long length
length paper
paper and
and has
has a
a Long
Long Original
Original counter.
counter.
Long length
Long length paper
paper can
can be
be used
used from
from the
the Multi-purpose
Multi-purpose Tray
Tray by
by setting
setting the
the following
following service
service mode
mode (Lv.2)
(Lv.2) to
to "1".
"1".
278
2. Technical
Explanation
COPIER >
COPIER > OPTION
OPTION >
> USER
USER >
> MF-LG-ST
MF-LG-ST
Parts Counter
Parts Counter Specifications
Specifications
When counting
When counting the
the number
number ofof sheets,
sheets, the
the count
count value
value depends
depends on
on the
the paper
paper length.
length.
•• Small
Small (324
(324 mm
mm oror less):
less): 1
1 count
count
•• Large
Large (487.7
(487.7 mm(19.2
mm(19.2 in.)
in.) or
or less):
less): 2
2 counts
counts
•• Long
Long length
length paper
paper (487.7
(487.7 mm(19.2
mm(19.2 in.)
in.) to
to 648
648 mm):
mm): 33 counts
counts
•• Long
Long length
length paper
paper (648
(648 mm
mm toto 864
864 mm):
mm): 4 4 counts
counts
Fan
Fan Control
Control
■
• Fan
Fan Locations
Locations
●
• Main
Main Station
Station
FM110 FM401
FM108
FM108 FM400
FM400
FM112
FM140
FM114
►
►
FM143
FM143
•
FM407 FM113 6 FM109
FM109
T FM115
FM115
FM406
FM1•05.
FM405 FM107
q1D/i
FM111 FM130
FM130
FM163
FM424
FM424
FM402
FM404
FM404
10" FM120
FM120
FM403
FM403 1 >;,,,,--„,„ 0 ,,
411 ,49
FM425
FM425
41i1FM13T'
FM137
FM121
Soillib.ii
FM134 FM135
FM135
FM428
FM428
4'
Code
Code Name
Name Function
Function Error codes
Error codes
Process Unit
FM107 Process Unit Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan (C)
(C) To cool
To cool the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0103, E820-1103
E820-0103, E820-1103
Process Unit
FM108 Process Unit Exhaust
Exhaust Fan
Fan (C)
(C) To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0203, E820-1203
E820-0203, E820-1203
FM109 Process
FM109 Process Unit
Unit Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan (Bk)
(Bk) To cool
To cool the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0104, E820-1104
Process Unit
Exhaust Fan
Fan (Bk)
(Bk) To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0204, E820-1204
Process Unit
FM111 Process Unit Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan (M)
(M) To cool
To cool the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0102, E820-1102
Process Unit
Exhaust Fan
Fan (M)
(M) To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0202, E820-1202
FM113 Process Unit Cooling Fan (Y) To cool
To cool the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0101, E820-1101
Process Unit
Exhaust Fan
Fan (Y)
(Y) To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit E820-0201, E820-1201
FM115 Pre-Transfer Exhaust Fan To exhaust air from the Pre-Transfer Charging As- E823-0001
sembly
279
279
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name
ame Function
Function Error
rror codes
cod
FM120 Pre-fixing Feed Right Rear Fan To attract
To attract paper
paper to
to the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed
Feed Belt
Belt E805-0402, E805-1402
E805-0402, E805-1402
FM121 Pre-fixing Feed Right Front Fan To attract
To attract paper
paper to
to the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed
Feed Belt
Belt E805-0401, E805-1401
E805-0401, E805-1401
FM130 Registration
FM130 Registration Feed
Feed Driver
Driver PCB
PCB Right
Right Cooling To cool
Cooling To cool the
the Registration
Registration Feed
Feed Driver
Driver PCB
PCB Right
Right E822-0501, E822-1501
Fan
FM134 Pre-fixing Feed Left Front Fan To attract paper to the Pre-fixing Feed Belt E805-0403, E805-1403
FM135 Secondary
FM135 Secondary Transfer/Duplex
Driver PCB
PCB To cool
To cool the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer/Duplex
Driver PCB
PCB E822-0502, E822-1502
Cooling Fan
FM137 Pre-fixing Feed Left Rear Fan To attract
To attract paper
paper to
to the
the Pre-fixing
Pre-fixing Feed
Feed Belt
Belt E805-0404, E805-1404
E805-0404, E805-1404
Main Station
FM140 Main Station Right
Right Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0301, E822-1301
Main Station
FM143 Main Station Power
Power Unit
Unit Right
Right Cooling
Cooling Fan To cool
Fan To cool the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0304, E822-1304
FM163 Main
FM163 Main Station
Station Power
Power Unit
Unit Left
Left Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0305, E822-1305
E822-0305, E822-1305
Main Station
Right Middle
Middle Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0302, E822-1302
Main Station
Right Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0303, E822-1303
E822-0303, E822-1303
FM402 Developing Assembly Left Front Cooling To cool
To cool the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly E820-0301, E820-1301
E820-0301, E820-1301
Fan (Y)
Main Station
FM403 Main Station Exhaust
Exhaust Assist
Assist Fan
Fan To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Main
Main Station
Station E820-0302, E820-1302
E820-0302, E820-1302
FM404 Developing Assembly Cooling Fan (Y) To cool
To cool the
the Developing
Developing Assembly
Assembly E820-0303, E820-1303
E820-0303, E820-1303
FM405 Main
FM405 Main Station
Station Upper
Upper Cover
Cover Front
Front Suction
Suction Fan To perform
Fan To perform intake
intake of
of air
air to
to the
the Main
Main Station
Station E807-0101, E807-1101
FM406 Main
FM406 Main Station
Station Upper
Upper Cover
Cover Middle
Middle Suction
Suction To perform
To perform intake
intake of
of air
air to
to the
the Main
Main Station
Station E807-0102, E807-1102
Fan
FM407 Main Station Upper Cover Rear Suction Fan To
To perform
perform intake
intake of
of air
air to
to the
the Main
Main Station
Station E807-0103, E807-1103
E807-0103, E807-1103
FM424 Registration Motor Cooling Fan To cool the Registration E822-0A01, E822-1A01
FM425 Cross-Feed
FM425 Cross-Feed Motor
Motor Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Cross-Feed
Cross-Feed Motor
Motor E822-0B01, E822-1B01
FM428 Secondary
FM428 Secondary Transfer
Transfer Motor
Motor Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Secondary
Secondary Transfer
Transfer Motor
Motor E822-1E01,E822-0E01
280
280
2. Technical
Explanation
● Sub Station
• Sub Station
FM357
FM357 )
FM358
FM358
FM334
FM334
FM333
FM333
;7,- FM332
FM331
FM331
FM421
FM427
FM420
FM336
FM336 FM360
FM360
FM350
FM350
FM359
FM359
FM327
FM328
FM328
FM326
FM326
FM409
FM408 - '`1e.'N'
FM408
FM354 FM310 FM314

FM310 FM314
FM354
FM355
FM355
isl
FM312
(
FM312
FM362
FM362
FM381
FM381
FM319
FM319
lt41 geh
OF
FM338 FM313
FM338' FM313 Fm337 FM320
FM337
FM315
FM315
FM318 1
FM423
fit I 1
FM415
FM415
FM414
FM414
281
281
2. Technical
Explanation
No.
No. Name
Name Function
Error c
FM310 Primary Fixing Power Unit Cooling Fan To cool
To cool the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Heater
Heater Driver
Driver PCB
PCB E805-0901, E805-1901
E805-0901, E805-1901
FM312 Primary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan To exhaust heat from the Fixing Assembly E805-0201, E805-1201
FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan To cool the fixing inner delivery area and paper E822-0201, E822-1201
E822-0201, E822-1201
Secondary Fixing
FM314 Secondary Fixing Heat
Heat Exhaust
Exhaust Fan
Fan To exhaust
To exhaust heat
heat from
from the
the Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly E805-0202, E805-1202
E805-0202, E805-1202
FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling To cool the fixing inner delivery area and paper E822-0202, E822-1202
Fan
Delivery Lower
FM318 Delivery Lower Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the paper
paper passing
passing through
through the
the delivery
delivery area
area E822-0102, E822-1102
FM319 Delivery Upper Cooling Fan To cool
To cool the
the paper
paper passing
passing through
through the
the delivery
delivery area
area E822-0101, E822-1101
FM320 Duplex Decurler Fan To cool
To cool the
the paper
paper passing
passing through
through the
the Duplex
Duplex Decur-
Decur- E822-0401, E822-1401
ler
FM326 Station
FM326 Station Interval
Interval Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan 6
6 To cool
To cool the
the joint
joint between
between the
the Main
Main Station
Station and
and Sub
Sub E822-0606, E822-1606
E822-0606, E822-1606
Station
Station
FM327 Station Interval Cooling Fan 7 To cool
To cool the
the joint
joint between
between the
the Main
Main Station
Station and
and Sub
Sub E822-0607, E822-1607
E822-0607, E822-1607
Station
Station
FM328 Station
Interval Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan 8
8 To cool
To cool the
the joint
joint between
between the
the Main
Main Station
Station and
and Sub
Sub E822-0608, E822-1608
E822-0608, E822-1608
Station
Station
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1 To cool
To cool the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (separation
(separation part)
part) E805-0701, E805-1701
E805-0701, E805-1701
To cool the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (separation
(separation area)
area) E805-0702, E805-1702
E805-0702, E805-1702
To cool the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (separation
(separation area)
area) E805-0703, E805-1703
E805-0703, E805-1703
To cool the
the Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt (separation
(separation area)
area) E805-0704, E805-1704
E805-0704, E805-1704
FM336 Reverse
FM336 Reverse Outer
Outer Delivery
Delivery Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Reverse/Outer
Delivery Driver
Driver PCB
PCB E822-0503, E822-1503
E822-0503, E822-1503
FM337 Secondary
FM337 Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller Cooling
Cooling To cool
To cool the
the Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller E805-0305, E805-1305
E805-0305, E805-1305
Fan 5
FM338 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Fan 5 To cool the Pressure Belt E805-0105, E805-1105
FM350 Delivery Decurler Cooling Fan
FM350 To cool
To cool the
the paper
paper passing
passing through
through the
the delivery
delivery area
area E822-0402, E822-1402
FM354 Main
FM354 Main Station
Station Upper
Upper Exhaust
Exhaust Fan
Fan To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0801, E822-1801
FM355 Main
FM355 Main Station
Station Lower
Lower Exhaust
Exhaust Fan
Fan To exhaust
To exhaust air
air from
from the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0802, E822-1802
FM357 Tandem Guide Upper Cooling Fan To cool the tandem feed area and paper E822-0902, E822-1902
FM358 Tandem
FM358 Tandem Guide
Guide Lower
Lower Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the tandem
tandem feed
feed area
area and
and paper
paper E822-0903, E822-1903
E822-0903, E822-1903
FM359 Bypass
FM359 Bypass Guide
Guide Front
Front Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the bypass
bypass feed
feed area
area and
and paper
paper E822-0904, E822-1904
FM360 Bypass
FM360 Bypass Guide
Guide Rear
Rear Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the bypass
bypass feed
feed area
area and
and paper
paper E822-0905, E822-1905
E822-0905, E822-1905
FM362 Merging Guide Rear Fan To cool the merging area and paper E822-0901, E822-1901
FM381 Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan To cool
To cool paper
paper to
to prevent
prevent uneven
uneven gloss
gloss E822-0703, E822-1703
FM408 Station
Interval Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan 1
1 To cool
To cool the
the joint
joint between
between the
the Main
Main Station
Station and
and Sub
Sub E822-0601, E822-1601
E822-0601, E822-1601
Station
Station
FM409 Station
Interval Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan 2
2 To cool
To cool the
the joint
joint between
between the
the Main
Main Station
Station and
and Sub
Sub E822-0602, E822-1602
E822-0602, E822-1602
Station
Station
FM414 Sub
FM414 Sub Station
Station Lower
Lower 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply Cool- To cool
Cool- To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB E804-0104, E804-1104
ing Fan
FM415 Sub
FM415 Sub Station
Station Upper
Upper 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply Cool- To cool
Cool- To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB E804-0105, E804-1105
E804-0105, E804-1105
ing Fan
FM420 Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling To cool the Main Thermistor E805-0502, E805-1502
E805-0502, E805-1502
Fan
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan To cool the Main Thermistor E805-0501, E805-1501
E805-0501, E805-1501
FM423 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply B/C
B/C Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB E804-0202, E804-1202
Delivery Feed
FM427 Delivery Feed Motor
Motor 2
2 Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Delivery
Delivery Feed
Feed Motor
Motor E822-0C01, E822-1C01
E822-0001,
282
2. Technical
Explanation
●
FM412
FM411
FM422
FM417
FM410 FM418
FM416 FM419
No. Name Function Error codes'''.

codes
FM410 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply Lower
Lower Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly E804-0101, E804-1101
FM411 24V Power Supply Middle Cooling Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly E804-0102, E804-1102
FM412 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply Upper
Upper Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly E804-0103, E804-1103
E804-0103, E804-1103
13V Power
FM416 13V Power Supply
Supply Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly E804-0000
E804-0000
FM417 Main Station Rear Upper Cooling Fan To perform
To perform intake
intake of
of air
air to
to the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0D01, E822-1D01
FM418 Main Station Rear Lower Cooling Fan To perform
To perform intake
intake of
of air
air to
to the
the Main
Main Station
Station E822-0D02, E822-1D02
FM419 Compressor Cooling Fan To cool
To cool the
the Compressor
Compressor E805-0601, E805-1601
E805-0601, E805-1601
FM422 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply A
A Cooling
Cooling Fan
Fan To cool
To cool the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply Assembly
Assembly E804-0201, E804-1201
283
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Pickup Deck
41° FM694,.
FM604
FM605
FM605
FM608
FM608
FM601
FM601
FM602
(F;;
FM704
9 ,, FM603
FM603
FM705F414
74, r i ti
--) 0 • FM606
FM606
FM708'
FM708 i.. .c-11 FM701
FM701
'7 1!;:
,
°b7 FM702
FM702 FM607
FM703
FM703
el
FM707
FM707
FM706
FM706
No.
No. Name
Name Function
Error codes
Right Deck
FM601 Right Attraction Fan
Deck Attraction Fan Pickup --
Right Deck
FM602 Right Deck Separation
Separation Fan
Fan 1
1 To separate
To separate paper
paper -
FM603 Right
FM603 Right Deck
Deck Separation
Separation Fan
Fan 2
2 To separate
To separate paper
paper --
FM604 Right Deck Air Flotation
Flotation Fan
Fan 1 To float
To float paper
paper --
FM605 Right Deck Air Flotation
Flotation Fan 2 To float
To float paper
paper --
FM606 Right Deck Side Right Fan To separate
To separate (large
(large size)
size) paper
paper -
Right Deck
FM607 Right Deck Side
Side Left
Left Fan
Fan To separate
To separate (large
(large size)
size) paper
paper --
Right Deck
FM608 Right Air Flotation
Deck Air Flotation Fan
Fan 3
3 To float
To float paper
paper --
Left Deck
FM701 Left Attraction Fan
Deck Attraction Fan To pick
To pick up
up paper
paper --
Left Deck
FM702 Left Deck Separation
Separation Fan
Fan 1
1 To separate
To separate paper
paper -
FM703 Left
FM703 Left Deck
Deck Separation
Separation Fan
Fan 2
2 To separate
To separate paper
paper --
FM704 Left Deck Air Flotation
Flotation Fan
Fan 1 To float
To float paper
paper --
FM705 Left Deck Air Flotation
Flotation Fan
Fan 2 To float
To float paper
paper --
FM706 Left Deck Side Right Fan To separate
To separate (large
(large size)
size) paper
paper -
Left Deck
FM707 Left Deck Side Left Fan
Side Left Fan To separate
To separate (large
(large size)
size) paper
paper --
Left Deck
FM708 Left Air Flotation
Deck Air Flotation Fan
Fan 33 To float
To float paper
paper --
284
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Controller
FM502
FM500
FM501
No.
No. Name
Name Function
Error codes
FM500 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1 To cool
To cool the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller E880-0001
E880-0001
FM501 HDD Cooling Fan To cool
To cool the
the hard
hard disk
disk drive
drive E880-0005
E880-0005
FM502 Controller Cooling Fan 2 To cool
To cool the
the Controller
Controller BOX
BOX E880-0004
E880-0004
285
285
2. Technical
2. Explanation
Technical Explanation
■ Drive Sequence
• Drive Sequence
• Main Station (Except Deck Unit)
● Unit)
switch ON
Main power switch ON switch OFFࠉ
Control panel power switch
Control OFF switch OFF
Main power switch OFF
Warm-up Warm-up Standby Print At printing

printing In In Sleep JAM When paper Error When cover When fixing
rotation
rotation Finished lowvoltage powersaving
lowvotiage absence open assembly
mode
mods /low-voltage
ftoweekallie release
No. Parts Name
Parts mode lever open
FM107 Process Unit Blowing Fan (C)

Blowing Fan (C)
FM108 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (C)

Exhaust Fan (C)
FM109 Process Unit Blowing Fan (Bk)

Blowing Fan (Bk)
FM110 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Bk)

Exhaust Fan
FM111 Process Unit Blowing Fan (M)

Blowing Fan (M)
FM112 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (M)

Exhaust Fan (M)
FM113 Process Unit Blowing

Process Unit Fan (Y)
Bbwing Fan (Y) V
FM114 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Y)

Exhaust Fan (Y)
FM115 Exhaust Fan
FM120 Fixing Feed Right Rear Fan
FM121 Fixing Feed

Ruing Right Front Fan
Feed Right
FM130 Registration Feed

Registration Cooling Fan
Feed Driver Right Cooling
FM134 Fixing Feed Left Front Fan

Fixing
FM135 Secondary Transfer

Transfer
/Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
FM137 Fixing Feed Left Rear Fan

Fixing
r
FM140 Station Right
Main Station Cooing Fan
Right Cooling
FM143 Main Station Power Unit Cooling Fan

Right C001b1)
Unit Right Fan
FM163 Cooling Fan

Main Station Power Unit Left Cooling Fan
FM400 Cooling Fan

Middle Cooling
Main Station Right Middle —1
FM401 Main Station Right Rear Cooling Fan
FM402
F14402 Developing Assembly I
Cooing Fan (Y)
Front Cooling
Left Front
FM403 Maki Station Exhaust Assist Fan

Main Station
FM404 Developing Assembly Fan (Y)

CoolingFan
Assembly Cooling (Y)
FM405 Main Station Suction Fan

Station Upper Cover Front Suction
FM406 Main Station Upper Cover Middle Suction Fan

Middle Suction
FM407 Suction Fan

Station Upper Cover Rear Suction
Main Station ti—
FM424 Registration Cooling Fan
Registration Motor Cooling
F14425
FM425 Cooling Fan
Cross-feed Motor Cooling
FM428
F14428 Secondary Transfer Coding Fan
Motor Cooling
Transfer Motor Fan
:Full speed
tin :Half speed
• :85%
• Main Station (Paper Deck)

●
Main power switch ON switch OFFࠉ
Control panel power switch OFF switch OFF
Main power switch OFF
Warm-up Warm-up
Wann-up Standby Print At printing In In Sleep JAM When paper Error
Error When cover fixing
cover When fixing
rotation Finished
Fleshed lowvoltage powersaving absence open assembly
mode /low-voltage release
No. Parts Name
Parts mode lever open
.111
FM601 Right Deck Suction Fan
FM602 Right Deck Separation Fan 1
FM603 Right Deck Separation Fan 2
FM604 Right Deck Air Flotation Fan 1

Flotation Fan

Flotation Fan
FM606 Side Fan

Right Deck Right Side
FM607 Right Deck Left Side Fan

Flotation Fan
FM701 Left Deck Suction Fan
FM702 Left Deck Separation Fan 1
FM703 Left Deck Separation Fan 2

....—
FM704 Left Deck Air Flotation Fan 1
Flotation Fan
FM705 Left Deck Air Flotation Fan 2

Flotation Fan 2
FM706 Left Deck Right Side Fan
FM707 Left Deck Left Side Fan
FM708 Air Flotation

Left Deck Alr Fan 3
Flotation Fan
:Full speed
:Pre air
:Pre flotation
air flotation
:Air flotation
:Ak
:Attraction
286
286
2. Technical
Explanation
● Sub Station
• Sub Station
Main power switch ON Control panel power switch OFF
OFFࠉ Main power switch OFF
Warm-up Warm-up Standby Print At printing In In Sleep JAM When paper Error When cover When fixing
rotation Finished lowvoltage powersaving absence open assembly
No. Parts Name mode lever open
I
FM310 Primary Fixing Power Unit Cooling Fan
FM312 Primary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan ,..—
FM313 Primary Fixing

Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM314 Secondary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan
FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM318 Delivery Lower Cooling Fan
FM319 Delivery Upper Cooling Fan
FM320 Duplex Decurler Fan
FM326 Station Interval Cooling Fan 6
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation

Separation Cooling Fan 1
I 1 1
1 1 1

FM336 Reverse Outer Delivery Driver Cooling Fan

Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5
FM350 Delivery Decurler Cooling Fan
FM354 Main Station Upper Exhaust Fan
FM355 Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan
FM357 Tandem Guide Upper Cooling Fan
FM358 Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan
FM359 Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan
FM360 Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan
FM362 Merging Guide Fan
FM381 Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan
FM414 Sub Station Lower

24V Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM415 Sub Station Upper

24V Power Supply Cooling Fan

Thermistor Cooling Fan
Main Themristor
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor

Themristor Cooling Fan
FM423 38V Power Supply B/C Cooling Fan
FM427 Delivery Feed Motor 2 Cooling Fan
:Full speed
:Half speed
:Full speed or half speed depending on the mechanical and process conditions
:50%
:25%
●
Power Unit Station
Main power switch ON Control panel power switch OFFࠉ
OFF Main power switch OFF
rotation Finished lowvoltage powersaving absence open assembly
FM410 24V Power Supply Lower Cooling Fan 7 /47

/ /47
/ /47
/ 7
FM411 Power Supply

24V Power Supply Middle Cooling Fan 7 7
FM412 24V Power Supply Upper Cooling Fan 7 //,✓

7 //,✓
7 //,✓
7 7
FM416 13V Power Supply Cooling Fan 7 47% 47// 47// 7
FM417 Main Station Rear Upper Cooling Fan
FM418 Main Station Rear Lower Cooling Fan
FM419 Compressor Cooling Fan 7

FM422 Supply A Cooling Fan
38V Power Supply 7 //,✓
7 7
V :Mixed speeds (full and half)

:Full speed
:Half speeda
:Only when the compressor is driven
:Driven for 30 minutes after a job at half speed
287
287
2. Technical
Explanation
●
• Controller
Main power switch ON Control panel power switch OFFࠉ
OFF Main power switch OFF
rotation Finished powersaving
lowvoltage poweisaving absence open assembly
FM500 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1 IN /// /

%//////// &
FM501 HDD Cooling Fan

HOD %/////////// / M
FM502 Controller Cooling Fan 2 U/////////// /
:Mixed speeds (full and half)

:Full speed
:Half speed
288
288
Power supply
Power supply
■
• AC Power Supply Configuration
Supply Configuration
AC inlet Main Power Switch
(SW108)
Breaker
㸦ELB500㸧
(ELB500)
H
3.3V All-night
3.3V All-night Main Controller
Filter Unit
AC Filter Terminal
Terrrinal Power Supply PCB
N 㸦UN504㸧
(UN504) Mount
(UN503)
Environment Switch
(SW107) 12V Power Supply A (UN530)
PCB A
Supply PCB (UN530)
Supply PCB
12V Power Supply B (UN531)
PCB B (UN531)
I -cree-1
Power Supply
24V Power A (UN520)
Supply PCB A (UN520)
Supply PCB
24V Power Supply B (UN521)
PCB B (UN521)
Supply PCB
24V Power Supply C (UN522)
PCB C (UN522)
Drum Heater system
24V Power Supply D (UN523)

PCB D
Supply PCB (UN523) Main Station
Supply PCB
24V Power Supply E (UN524)
PCB E (UN524) Power Supply Relay
I PCB
24V Power Supply PCB FF (UN525)
Supply PCB (UN525)
All-night (UN102)
drive
3.3V drive A (UN532)
Supply PCB A
38V Power Supply (UN532)
Switch
Deck Heater Switch
(SW106) Power Unit Relay PCB Power
Polr Unit Limiter PCB
UnitLimiter
㸦UN401㸧
(UN401)
(UN400)
Non-all-night
12V drive
Air Heater
Right Air Heater
(H601)
All-night
12V drive Right Deck Heater
(H602)
(H602)
Air Heater
Left Air Heater
(H701)
(H701)
Deck Heater
Unit
Relay PCB Unit Left Deck Heater
Lelt
(UN801)
(UNI301) (H702)
(H702)
Power Unit Station
Drum Heater Thermopile
Interlock Switch All-night Power Supply
(SW120)
Drum Heater (Y)

(V)
Temperature
Tempe control
ature control (H103)
(H103)
Drum Heater (M)

Temperature control (H102)
(H102)
Drum Heater (C)

Temperature
Tempe control
(H100)
Drum Heater (Bk)

Temperature
Tempe control
(H101)
Environment Heater
Environment Driver PCB
Heater Driver PCB
Main Controller (UN101)
ego-
Supply PCB
24V Power Supply H (UN527)
PCB H
Power Supply
24V Power PCB II (UN528)
Supply PCB
Fixing Roller
Primary Fixing Heater (H306)
RollerHeater (H306)
24V Power
24V PCB JJ (UN529)
Supply PCB
Power Supply (UN529)
do-
Fixing External
Primary Fixing Roller Heater
Heat Upper Roller
External Heat Heater
38V Power Supply B (UN533㸧
PCB B
Supply PCB (UN533) (H308)
Fixing Relay PCB
FlAng
38V Power Supply
38V Power C (UN534㸧
PCB C
Supply PCB (UN534) Primary Fbcing ExternalHeat
Fixing External Roller Heater
Lower Roller
Heat Lower Heater
㸦UN402㸧
(UN4O2)
(H307)
1111111111111 Primary Fricing PressureBelt

Fixing Pressure Heater(H305)
BeltHeater (H305)
Primary Fixing Heater Driver

Fixing Heater PCB (UN306)
DriverPCB (UN306) Secondary Fixing Heater (H300)
Roller Heater
Fixing Roller (H300)
External Heat
Fixing External
Secondary Fixing Roller Heater
Heat Upper Roller
(H302)
External Heat
Fixing External
Secondary Fixing Roller Heater
Heat Lower Roller
Fixing Heater
Secondary Fixing PCB (UN307)
Driver PCB
Heater Driver (UN307) (H301)
Sub Station Fixing Pressure

Secondary Fixing Heater (H303)
RollerHeater
Pressure Roller (H303)
Reader Heater
289 (Option)
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code
_a Name
Name Function
Function
Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station
ELB500 Leakage Breaker To cut off voltage in case of voltage abnormality
SW108
SW108 Main Power Supply Switch To input
To input AC
AC
SW107 Environment Switch
Environment Switch To turn
To turn ON/OFF
ON/OFF the
the power
power to
to the
the Drum
Drum Heater
Heater and
and Reader
Reader Heater
Heater (op-
(op-
tion)
tion)
SW106
SW106 Deck Heater
Deck Heater Switch
Switch To turn
To turn ON/OFF
ON/OFF the
the power
power to
to the
the Right
Right Deck
Deck Heater
Heater and
and Left
Left Deck
Deck
Heater
Heater
UN503
UN503 3.3V All-Night Power Supply PCB To supply
To supply 3.3
3.3 V
V (all-night)
(all-night) to
to the
the Main
Main Controller
Controller Unit
Unit
UN504
UN504 AC Filter
AC Filter Unit
Unit To remove switching noise
UN400
UN400 Power Unit
Power Unit Relay
Relay PCB
PCB To act
To act as
as an
an AC
AC filter
filter for
for Main
Main Station's
Station's secondary
secondary power
power supply,
supply, to
to
relay for ON/OFF switching, and to distribute power to each standard
power
power supply
supply
UN520
UN520 24V Power Supply PCB A To supply
To supply 24
24 V
V to
to electrical
electrical components
components inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station (various
(various
UN521 24V Power Supply PCB B Driver PCBs,
Driver PCBs, Process
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs,
PCBs, Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units,
Units, etc.)
etc.)
UN522 24V Power Supply PCB C
UN523
UN523 24V Power Supply PCB D
UN524 24V Power Supply PCB E
UN525
UN525 24V Power Supply PCB F
UN530
To supply 12
12 V
V to
to electrical
components inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station (various
(various
UN531
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs,
PCBs, Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units,
Units, etc.)
etc.)
UN532
To supply 38
38 V
V for
for electrical
components (Registration
(Registration Feed
Feed Driver
Driver PCB
PCB
(Left), Secondary
(Left), Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB,
Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB, and
and Vertical
Vertical Path/Lower
Path/Lower
Feed Driver
Feed Driver PCB)
PCB) inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station
UN801 Deck Heater Relay PCB To distribute AC power supply to Deck Heaters and Air Heaters, and
protect
protect PCBs
PCBs atat the
the time
time of
of error
error due
due to
to FUSE
FUSE
Main Station
Main Station
H100
H100 Drum Heater
Drum Heater (C)
(C) To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of Drum
Drum (C)I
(C)l
H101 Drum Heater (Bk) To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of Drum
Drum (Bk)
(Bk)
H102 Drum Heater
Drum Heater (M)
(M) To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of Drum
Drum (M)
(M)
H103
H103 Drum Heater
Drum Heater (Y)
(Y) To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of Drum
Drum (Y)
(Y)
H601
H601 Right Air Heater To improve
To improve paper
paper separation
separation performance when used
performance when used under
under highly
highly hu-
hu-
mid environment
mid environment or
or when
when coated
coated paper
paper is
is used
used (Right
(Right Deck)
Deck)
H602
H602 Right Deck
Right Deck Heater
Heater To prevent
To prevent paper
paper from
from absorbing
absorbing moisture
moisture (Right
(Right Deck)
Deck)
H701 Left Air
Left Air Heater
Heater To improve
To improve paper
paper separation
separation performance when used
performance when used under
under highly
highly hu-
hu-
mid environment
mid environment or
or when
when coated
coated paper
paper is
is used
used (Left
(Left Deck)
Deck)
H702 Left Deck
Left Deck Heater
Heater To prevent
To prevent paper
paper from
from absorbing
absorbing moisture
moisture (Left
(Left Deck)
Deck)
UN101 Environment Heater Driver PCB To drive the Drum Heater, Reader Heater (option), Right Deck Heater
and Left
and Left Deck
Deck Heater
Heater
UN102
UN102 Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB To supply
To supply 5,
5, 12
12 and
and 24
24 V
V to
to DC-DC
DC-DC Converter
Converter and
and electrical
electrical compo-
compo-
nents in
nents in the
the Main
Main Station
Station
UN401 Power Unit
Power Unit Limiter
Limiter PCB
PCB To distribute
To distribute secondary
secondary power
power supplies
supplies (12VA/12VB/24VA
(12VA/12VB/24VA to
to 24VF/
24VF/
38VA) and protect from overcurrent
Compressor Cooling Fan Drive PCB, Air Relief Valve Drive PCB and
connection PCB
connection PCB
To act
To act as
as aa Drive
Drive PCB
PCB of
of FM417/418
FM417/418
Sub Station
Sub Station
H306 Primary Fixing Roller Heater To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing Roller
H308
H308 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper
Heater
Heater Roller
H307
H307 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
Heater
Heater Roller
H305
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of the
the Primary
Primary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Belt
Belt
H300
Secondary Fixing Roller
Roller Heater
Heater To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Roller
Roller
H302
External Heat
Heat Upper
Upper Roller To control
Roller To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing External
External Heat
Heat Up-
Up-
Heater
Heater per Roller
H301 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller To control the temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Low-
Heater
Heater er Roller
290
290
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name Function
Function
=11 11— 11
H303
Pressure Roller
Roller Heater
Heater To control
To control the
the temperature
temperature of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Pressure
Pressure Roller
Roller
UN306
UN306 Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB To drive the heater in the Primary Fixing Assembly
UN307
UN307 Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB To drive
To drive the
the heater
heater of
of the
the Secondary
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly
UN402 Fixing Relay PCB To act
To act as
as an
an AC
AC filter
filter for
for Sub
Sub Station's
Station's secondary
secondary power
power supply,
supply, to
to relay
relay
for ON/OFF switching, and to distribute power to each standard power
supply
supply
UN527 24V Power Supply PCB H To supply
To supply 24
24 V
V for
for electrical
components (various
(various driver
driver PCBs,
PCBs, etc.)
etc.) in
in
UN528
UN528 24V Power Supply PCB I the Sub
the Sub Station
Station and
and Reader
Reader (option)
(option)
UN529 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB JJ
UN533
UN533 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB B
B To supply
To supply 38
38 V
V for
for electrical
components (various
(various driver
driver PCBs,
PCBs, etc.)
etc.) in
in
UN534
UN534 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB C
C the Sub
the Sub Station
Station
291
2. Technical
Explanation
■
• DC
DC Power
Power Supply
Supply Configuration
Configuration
Reader(Heater)
Reader (Heater)
24V
12V-B-1
3.3V
5V
12V Driver PCBs
24V
24VH 24
24V
24V Power
Supply PCB H RMT
(UN527) Fixing Duplex
12V-SEESAW is a power supply which is generated from Feed Driver PCB
㸦UN311㸧
(UN311)
12V B-4 and turned OFF in synchronization with OFF of 24V Power
24VI
3.3V
3.
Supply PCB I
the main switch. (UN528)
-
RUT- IL-DOOR
RMT- IL-DOOR 5V
12V Driver PCBs
24VJ 24V-IL
24V Power
Supply PCB J RUT-
RMT- IL-LEVER
(UN529)
38VB
38VPower
38VPower
Supply PCB B -
RUT- IL-DOOR
RMT- IL-DOOR
(UN533)
38VC 12V-SEESAW
38VPower
38VPower
Supply PCB C
(UN534)
RUT-
RMT- IL-LEVER
(UN534)
Sub Station
El Front Door
Left Front Door SvAtch
(SW301)
(SW301)
Switch
AC Sub Station
Right Front Door Switch
IL-DOOR (SW302)
(SW302)
Primary Fixing
12V Power Supply A

12V-SEESAW
12V B-1
12VࠉB-1
El Lever Switch
(SW303)
(SW303)
(UN530) V
12VࠉA Fixing Relay
Faing Relay PCB Secondary Fixing
12VࠉB-3
B-3 (UN402)
IL-LEVER
El Lever Switch
(SW304)
(SW304)
12V A-1,B-2,B-4
12V A-1,B-2,B-4
12V Power Supply B Sub Station
(UN531) 12V
12VࠉB
3.3V
3.
Power Unit Station

DC Controller
Controller 5V
Power Supply PCB
(UN103)
(UN103) DC Controller
12VA-1
12V A-1 12V
12VࠉB-2
Power Unit
Limiter PCB 24V
(UN401)
(UN401)
24VA
24V Power Supply PCB A
(UN520) RMT
T
RMT$
RMTs
24VB
24V Power Supply PCB B 24B 19. 24VB
5V(All-night)
(UN521) Riff
RMT
24VC 12V B-4
12V B-4 5V(All-night)
24V Power Supply PCB C
(UN522) RMT 12V-IL ► Laser
Scanner Unit
24V
24V Power Supply PCB D 24V0
24VD ►
(UN523) RMT-IL
1 24VE
24VE r Main Station
24V Power Supply PCB E 5V
(UN524)
(UN524) RMT-IL
.4 12V B-2
12V B-2
Driver PCBs
24V Power Supply PCB F ►24VF 24V
(UN525) RMT-IL
38VA
38V Power Supply PCB A Main Station
Main Statbn
(UN532) 12V A-2
12VࠉA-2 Power Supply Relay PCB 5V
RMT-IL 5V(All-night) Drum Surface
(UN102) Process Unit Temperature Sensor
Sensor
AC
C 12V A-3 12V B-2
12V B-2
12VࠉA-3 Driver PCB (UN183~UN186)
(UN183-UN186)
Main Controller 24V (UN161—UN164)
(UN161~UN164)
RELAY-ON RICT
RMTs
AC 5V(All-n ght)
5V(All-night)
Unit Relay PCB 3.3V(All-night)
3.3V(Al-nig t)
(UN400)
(UN400) 3.3V All-night
IL-RELAY-ON 3.3V(All-night) Environment Heater
Power Supply PCB 12V B-2
12V
(UN503) Driver PCB
(UN503) Drum Heater
Heater
12V-IL (UN101)
(UN101)
Interlock Switch
(SW120)
Main Station 5V
Front Right Cover Switch
(SW111)
(SW111) 12V SEESAW
12V SEESAW
12V B-2
12V B-2
Driver PCBs
Main Station
1 24V-IL
Front Left Cover Switch ►
(SW112)
(SW112)
Vertical Path Cover
Open/Close Switch
(SW1113)
(SW116)
Multi-purpose Tray
Muittpurpose Cover
Tra Cover
Open/Close Switch
(SW113)
(SW113)
292
2. Technical
Explanation
Code
Code Name
Name
Ili Function
Function
Power Unit
Power Unit Station
Station
UN503 3.3V All-Night Power Supply PCB To supply 3.3 V (All-Night) to the Main Controller PCB
UN520
To supply 24
24 V
V to
to electrical
components inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station (various
(various
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs,
PCBs, Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units,
Units, etc.)
etc.)
UN522 24V Power Supply PCB C
UN523 24V Power Supply PCB D
UN524 24V Power Supply PCB E
UN525
UN525 24V Power Supply PCB F
UN530
To supply 12
12 V
V to
to electrical
components inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station (various
(various
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs,
PCBs, Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units,
Units, etc.)
etc.)
UN532
To supply 38
38 V
V to
to electrical
components inin the
the Main
Main Station
Station (various
(various
Driver PCBs,
Process Unit
Unit Driver
Driver PCBs,
PCBs, Laser
Laser Scanner
Scanner Units,
Units, etc.)
etc.)
UN401 Power Unit Limiter PCB To distribute
To distribute secondary
secondary power
power supplies
supplies (12VA/12VB/24VA
(12VA/12VB/24VA to
to 24VF/
24VF/
38VA)
38VA) and
and protect
protect from
from overcurrent
overcurrent
Compressor Cooling Fan Drive PCB, Air Relief Valve Drive PCB and
connection PCB
connection PCB
To act
To act as
as aa drive
drive circuit
circuit for
for FM417/418
FM417/418
Main Station
Main Station
UN101 Environment Heater Driver PCB To drive
To drive the
the Drum
Drum Heaters,
Heaters, Reader
Reader Heater
Heater (option),
(option), Right
Right Deck
Deck Heater,
Heater,
and Left Deck Heater
UN102
UN102 Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB To supply
To 5, 12,
supply 5, 12, 24
24 and
and 38
38 VV for
for DC-DC
DC-DC converters
converters and
and electrical
electrical com-
com-
ponents
ponents in
in the
the Main
Main Station
Station
UN103
UN103 DC Controller
DC Controller Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB To supply
To supply 3.3
3.3 and
and 5
5VV for
for DC-DC
DC-DC converters
converters and
and DC
DC Controller
Controller PCB
PCB
UN161
UN161 Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) To drive
To drive various
various electrical
components in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit (Y)
(Y)
UN162
UN162 Process Unit Driver PCB (M) To drive
To drive various
various electrical
components in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit (M)
(M)
UN163
UN163 Process Unit
Process Unit Driver
Driver PCB
PCB (C)
(C) To drive
To drive various
various electrical
components in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit (C)
(C)
UN164
UN164 Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) To drive
To drive various
various electrical
components in
in the
the Process
Process Unit
Unit (Bk)
(Bk)
UN183
UN183 Drum Surface
Drum Surface Temperature
Temperature Sensor
Sensor (Y)
(Y) To measure
To measure the
the surface
surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the drum
drum (Y)
(Y)
UN184 Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor
Sensor (M)
(M) To measure
To measure the
the surface
surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the drum
drum (M)
(M)
UN185 Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor
Sensor (C)
(C) To measure
To measure the
the surface
surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the drum
drum (C)
(C)
UN186
UN186 Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor
Sensor (Bk)
(Bk) To measure
To measure the
the surface
surface temperature
temperature of
of the
the drum
drum (Bk)
(Bk)
None
None Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Units
Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) To irradiate
To irradiate laser
laser beam
beam
Sub Station
Sub Station
UN311 Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB To supply
To supply 3.3,
3.3, 5,
5, 12,
12, 24
24 and
and 38
38 V
V for
for DC-DC
DC-DC converters
converters and
and electrical
electrical
components
components inin the
the Sub
Sub Station
Station
UN527 24V Power Supply PCB H To supply
To supply 24
24 V
V for
for electrical
components (various
(various driver
driver PCBs,
PCBs, etc.)
etc.) in
in
UN528
UN528 24V Power Supply PCB I the Sub Station and Reader (option)
UN529 24V
24V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB JJ
UN533
UN533 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB B
B To supply
To supply 38
38 V
V for
for electrical
components (various
(various driver
driver PCBs,
PCBs, etc.)
etc.) in
in
UN534
UN534 38V
38V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB C
C the Sub
the Sub Station
Station
Protectionfunction
0 Protection function
■ AC/DC Internal
■AC/DC Internal Protection
Protection Circuits
Circuits
•• 3.3V All-Night
3.3V All-Night Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB (UN503)
(UN503)
•• 12V
12V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB AA (UN530)
(UN530)
•• 12V
12V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB BB (UN531)
(UN531)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB AA (UN520)
(UN520)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB BB (UN521)
(UN521)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB CC (UN522)
(UN522)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB DD (UN523)
(UN523)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB EE (UN524)
(UN524)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB FF (UN525)
(UN525)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB HH (UN527)
(UN527)
•• 24V Power
24V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB II (UN528)
(UN528)
293
2. Technical
Explanation
•• 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529)

•• 38V Power Supply PCB A (UN532)
•• 38V Power
38V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB B
B (UN533)
(UN533)
•• 38V Power
38V Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB C
C (UN534)
(UN534)
If overcurrent
If overcurrent or
or abnormal
abnormal voltage
voltage occurs
occurs due
due to
to trouble
trouble such
such asas a
a short
short circuit
circuit at
at a
a power
power output,
output, there
there are
are functions
functions to
to protect
protect
against overcurrent
against overcurrent and
and over
overvoltage
voltage to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage toto the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply PCBs
PCBs byby automatically
automatically cutting
cutting off
off output
output voltage.
voltage.
Actions to
Actions to take
take when
when an
an abnormality
abnormality occurs:
occurs:
1.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch
2. Remove
2. Remove the
the cause
cause that
that activated
activated the
the protection
protection circuit
circuit
3. Restart the machine
3. Restart the machine
Note that
Note that abnormalities
abnormalities caused
caused by
by ground
ground faults
faults do
do not
not require
require Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB replacement.
replacement.
If an
If an abnormality
abnormality is
is found
found in
in power
power supply
supply operation
operation after
after restart
restart of
of the
the machine
machine under
under other
other abnormal
abnormal conditions,
conditions, replace
replace the
the
Power Supply PCB.
■
■Protection Circuit Built
Protection Circuit Built in
in the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB (UN103)
(UN103)
Main Station
Main Station
•• DC
DC Controller
Controller Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB (UN103)
(UN103)
•• Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102)
Sub Station
Sub Station
•• Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311)
If overcurrent
If overcurrent or
or abnormal
abnormal voltage
voltage occurs
occurs due
due to
to trouble
trouble such
such as
as a
a short
short circuit
circuit at
at a
a power
power output,
output, there
there are
are functions
functions to
to protect
protect
against overcurrent
against overcurrent and
and overvoltage/low
overvoltage/low voltage
voltage to
to prevent
prevent damage
damage to
to the
the Power
Power Supply
Supply PCBs
PCBs by
by automatically
automatically cutting
cutting off
off output
output
voltage.
voltage.
Actions to
Actions to take
take when
when an
an abnormality
abnormality occurs:
occurs:
1.
2. Remove
2. Remove the
the cause
cause that
that activated
activated the
the protection
protection circuit
circuit
3. Replace
3. Replace the
the DC
DC Controller
Controller Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB (UN103)
(UN103)
4. Restart
4. Restart the
the machine
machine
■ DC Power
■DC Power Supply
Supply External
External Protection
Protection Circuits
Circuits
12V Power Supply PCB A (UN530)
•• Controller
•• DCON
DCON
•• UI
UI Power
Power Supply
Supply
The output
The output branches
branches off
off to
to the
the above
above 3
3 systems
systems and
and each
each system
system has
has a
a function
function to
to protect
protect against
against overcurrent
overcurrent
If a
If a fault
fault such
such as
as a
a short
short circuit
circuit occurs
occurs to
to the
the output
output of
of each
each power
power supply
supply which
which causes
causes overcurrent,
overcurrent, output
output voltage
voltage from
from the
the AC/
AC/
DC Power
DC Power Supply
Supply of
of 12V
12V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB
PCB AA (UN530)
(UN530) isis automatically
automatically cut
cut off.
off.
Actions to
Actions to take
take when
when an
an abnormality
abnormality occurs:
occurs:
1.
2. Remove
2. Remove the
the cause
cause that
that activated
activated the
the protection
protection circuit
circuit
3. Restart
3. Restart the
the machine
machine
12V Power Supply PCB B (UN531)

•• Sub
Sub Station
Station
•• For
For Main
Main Station
Station load
load drive,
drive, Driver
Driver PCBs
PCBs
•• Reader
Reader power
power supply
supply
•• Around
Around the
the laser
laser scanner
scanner
The output
The output branches
branches off
off to
to the
the above
above 4 4 systems
systems and
and each
each system
system has
has a
a function
function to
to protect
protect against
against overcurrent
overcurrent
294
2. Technical
Explanation
If a
If a fault
fault such
such as
as aashort
shortcircuit
circuitoccurs
occurs totothe
theoutput
outputof
ofeach
eachpower
powersupply
supplywhich
whichcauses
causesovercurrent,
overcurrent, output
output voltage
voltage is
is automatically
automatically
cut off
cut off for
for each
each system,
system, which
which isis displayed
displayed as
as an
an error.
error.
Actions to
Actions to take
take when
when an
an abnormality
abnormality occurs:
occurs:
1.
2. Remove
2. Remove the
the cause
cause that
that activated
activated the
the protection
protection circuit
circuit
3. Restart
3. Restart the
the machine
machine
24 V DC Power Supply PCBs

24 V Power Supply PCBs A, B, C, D, E, F, H, I, J
•• 24V Power Supply PCB A (UN520)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB B (UN521)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB C (UN522)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528)
•• 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529)
The output
The output branches
branches off
off to
to the
the 3
3 systems
systems for
for each
each 24
24 V
V Power
Power Supply
Supply PCB,
PCB, and
and each
each system
system has
has a
a function
function to
to protect
protect against
against
overcurrent
overcurrent
If a
If a fault
fault such
such as
as a
a short
short circuit
circuit occurs
occurs to
to the
the output
output of
of each
each power
power supply
supply which
which causes
causes overcurrent,
overcurrent, output
output voltage
voltage from
from the
the AC/
AC/
DC Power
DC Power Supply
Supply isis automatically
automatically cut
cut off.
off.
Note that
Note that the
the fault
fault location
location is
is specified
specified for
for each
each system,
system, which
which is
is displayed
displayed as
as an
an error.
error.
Actions to
Actions to take
take when
when an
an abnormality
abnormality occurs:
occurs:
1.
2. Remove
2. Remove the
the cause
cause that
that activated
activated the
the protection
protection circuit
circuit
3. Restart
3. Restart the
the machine
machine
Power-savingFunction
0 Power-saving Function
This machine
This machine provides
provides "Standby",
"Standby", "Energy
"Energy Saver",
Saver", "Low
"Low Power
Power and
and "Sleep"
"Sleep" modes.
modes.
Furthermore, the
Furthermore, the "Sleep"
"Sleep" mode
mode is
is subdivided
subdivided into
into the
the following:
following: "Sleep
"Sleep Standby",
Standby", "Sleep
"Sleep 1"
1" and
and "Deep
"Deep Sleep".
Sleep".
295
295
2. Technical
Explanation
Control panel
Reader
State of power
\ 0 supply
supply ON
0 Energy
Energy Saving
Saving
0 State of power
Enginesupply OFF
Main Controler
Auto Low Power Timer
Press Energy Saver key

I
Standby
T Press
Energy Saving
Auto
Low Power Timer
I
Low Power
Energy Saver key *2
i.-
Press
Energy Saver key
Press Energy
EnergySaver
Saverkey
Auto Sleep Timer
key*1*11
1
Press Energy Saver key
Energy Use
Job submission
Auto Sleep Timer
Sleep Mode
Sleep Standby
Job end *3
Job submission
Auto Sleep
Auto SleepTimer
Energy Use
Timer 47 I Job end *4
“Low”
- - "Low" “High” - - - - ...,
"High"
Job end
Job
ob submission
J
Job end
Job
ob submission
Deep Sleep Sleep 1
Hard disk drive

protection timer
*1. If
*1. If the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is set
set to
to "Sleep
"Sleep Mode"
Mode"
*2. If
*2. If the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is set
set to
to "Energy
"Energy Saver
Saver Mode"
Mode"
*3. When the auto low power timer is not
*3. When the auto low power timer is not up up
*4. When
*4. When thethe auto
auto low
low power
power timer
timer is
is <
< Auto
Auto Sleep
Sleep Timer>
Timer>
<
< Related
Related Settings/Registration
>
Preferences > > Timer/Energy
Timer/Energy Settings
Settings > > Mode
Mode After
After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed
Pressed
Specifies the
Specifies the mode
mode toto transition
transition to
to when
when the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is pressed
pressed
Setting values:
Setting values: Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Mode,
Mode, Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode
Settings > > Auto
Auto Sleep
Sleep Time
Time
Specifies the
Specifies the time
time (auto
(auto sleep
sleep timer)
timer) until
until migrating
migrating to
to the
the Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode
Setting values:
Setting values: 10,
10, 15,
15, 20,
20, 30,
30, 40,
40, 50
50 minutes;
minutes; 1 1 hour;
hour; 90
90 minutes;
minutes; oror 2,
2, 3,
3, or
or 4
4 hours
hours
Settings > > Low
Low Power
Power Mode
Mode Time
Time
Specifies the
Specifies the time
time (auto
(auto low
low power
power timer)
timer) until
until migrating
migrating to
to the
the Low
Low Power
Power Mode
Mode
Setting values:
Setting values: 10,
10, 15,
15, 20,
20, 30,
30, 40,
40, 50
50 minutes;
minutes; 1 1 hour;
hour; 90
90 minutes;
minutes; oror 2,
2, 3,
3, or
or 4
4 hours
hours
■
• Standby
Standby Mode
Mode
The mode
The mode that
that the
the machine
machine is
is running
running or
or can
can start
start operation
operation immediately
immediately and
and all
all power
power is
is supplied
supplied in
in this
this mode.
mode.
296
2. Technical
Explanation
<
< Conditions
Conditions of
of transfer
transfer from Standby Mode
from Standby Mode to
to other
other modes
modes > >
•• To
To Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Mode
Mode (Standby
(Standby -> -> Energy
Energy Saver)
Saver)
When the
When the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is pressed
pressed (if(if "Mode
"Mode After
After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed"
Pressed" is
is set
set to
to "Energy
"Energy Saver
Saver Mode")
Mode")
•• To
To Low
Low Power
Power Mode
Mode (Standby
(Standby ->-> Low
Low Power)
Power)
When the
When the auto
auto low
low power
power timer
timer isis up
up
•• To
To Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode (Standby
(Standby ->
-> Sleep)
Sleep)
•• When
When the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key isis pressed
pressed (if
(if "Mode
"Mode After
After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed"
Pressed" is
is set
set to
to "Sleep
"Sleep Mode")
Mode")
•• When
When the
the auto
auto sleep
sleep timer
timer isis up
up
<
< Conditions
Conditions of of transfer
transfer from
from other
other modes
modes to
to Standby
Standby Mode (Energy Saver/Low-Power/Sleep
Mode (Energy Saver/Low-Power/Sleep ->
-> Standby)
Standby) >
>
•• When
When the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is pressed
pressed
•• At
At occurrence
occurrence of of an
an error
error
•• When
When itit is
is the
the time
time set
set in
in Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Exit
Exit Time
Time Settings
Settings
■ Energy Saver
■Energy Saver Mode
Mode
Power consumption
Power consumption is is reduced
reduced byby lowering
lowering thethe temperature
temperature of
of the
the Fixing
Fixing Assembly
Assembly according
according to to the
the energy
energy saving
saving rate
rate setting
setting
(changeable by
(changeable by Settings/Registration).
Settings/Registration). In In this
this state,
state, the
the engine
engine can
can start
start more
more quickly
quickly than
than itit can
can from
from Sleep.
Sleep.
Settings/Registration > > Preferences
Settings >
> Change
Change Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Mode
Mode
Setting value:
Setting value: -10%
-10% (default),
(default), -25%,
-25%, -50%,
-50%, Zero
Zero Restore
Restore Time
Time
•• When
When "Zero
"Zero Restore
Restore Time"
Time" is is selected,
selected, DCON/RCON
DCON/RCON does does no
no special
special processing.
processing.
•• When
When "-10°/0",
"-10%", "-25%"
"-25%"oror"-50%"
"-50%" isis selected,
selected, standby
standby power
power is
is reduced
reduced by
by the
the lowered
lowered DCON
DCON fixing
fixing temperature.
temperature. The
The
target temperature
target temperature is is different
different for
for each
each engine.
engine.
Transition to
Transition to this
this mode
mode occurs
occurs only
only when
when the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is pressed
pressed while
while "Mode
"Mode After
After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed"
Pressed" is
is set
set
to "Energy Saver Mode" in Settings/Registration.
to "Energy Saver Mode" in Settings/Registration.
The Energy Saver key LED lights during energy saving.
<
< Conditions
Conditions of
of transfer
transfer from
from Energy
Energy Saver Mode to
Saver Mode to other
other modes
modes >>
•• To
To Standby
Standby Mode
Mode (Energy
(Energy Saver
Saver -> -> Standby)
Standby)
•• When
When the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key isis pressed
pressed
•• At
At occurrence
occurrence of of an
an error
error
•• When
When itit is
is the
the time
time set
set in
in Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Exit
Exit Time
Time Settings
Settings
•• To Low Power Mode (Energy Saver -> Low Power)
When the
When the auto
auto low
low power
power timer
timer is is up
up
•• To
To Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode (Energy
(Energy Saver
Saver ->-> Sleep)
Sleep)
•• When
When a a job
job occurs
occurs
•• When
When the
the auto
auto sleep
sleep timer
timer isis up
up
<
< Conditions
Conditions ofof transfer
transfer from
from other
other modes
modes to Energy Saver
to Energy Saver Mode
Mode >
>
•• From
From Standby Mode (Standby -> Energy
Standby Mode (Standby -> Energy Saver) Saver)
When the
When the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key is
is pressed
pressed (if
(if "Mode
"Mode After
After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed"
Pressed" is
is set
set to
to "Energy
"Energy Saver
Saver Mode")
Mode")
•• From
From Sleep Mode (Sleep -> Energy
Sleep Mode (Sleep -> Energy Saver)Saver)
At job
At job completion
completion (the
(the auto
auto low
low power
power timer
timer isis not
not up)
up)
■ Low Power
■Low Power Mode
Mode
This mode
This mode decreases
decreases powerpower consumption
consumption byby using
using aa lower
lower temperature
temperature in
in the
the Fixing
Fixing Assembly. In this
Assembly. In this state,
state, the
the engine
engine can
can start
start
more quickly
more quickly than
than itit can
can from
from Sleep.
Sleep. Power
Power isis reduced
reduced more
more than
than Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Mode
Mode (at
(at -10%
-10% and
and -25%
-25% energy
energy saver
saver rates).
rates).
Printing is
Printing is available
available within
within 30
30 seconds
seconds after
after returning
returning to
to Standby
Standby Mode,
Mode, (Energy
(Energy Star
Star compliant).
compliant).
Transition to
Transition to this
this mode
mode occurs
occurs only
only when
when the
the auto
auto low
low power
power timer
timer is
is up.
up.
Users cannot check transition from Energy Saving Mode to Low Power Mode.
Users cannot check transition from Energy Saving Mode to Low Power Mode.
During Low Power Mode, the Energy Saver key LED is lit.
<
< Transfer
Transfer conditions
conditions from
from Low
Low Power
Power Mode
Mode to
to other
other modes
modes >
>
297
297
2. Technical
Explanation
•• To
To Standby
Standby Mode
Mode (Low
(Low Power
Power -> -> Standby)
Standby)
•• When
When Energy
Energy Saver
Saver key
key isis pressed
pressed
•• At
At occurrence
occurrence of of an
an error
error
•• When
When itit is
is the
the time
time set
set in
in Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Exit
Exit Time
Time Settings
Settings
•• To
To Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode (Low(Low Power
Power ->-> Sleep)
Sleep)
•• When
When aa job
job occurs
occurs
•• When
When the
the auto
auto sleep
sleep timer
timer isis up
up
<
< Transfer
Transfer conditions
conditions from
from other
other modes
modes toto Low
Low Power
Power Mode
Mode > >
•• From
From Standby/Energy
Standby/Energy Saver
Saver Mode (Standby/Energy Saver
Mode (Standby/Energy Saver ->
-> Low
Low Power)
Power)
When the auto low power timer
When the auto low power timer is upis up
•• From
From Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode (Sleep
(Sleep ->
-> Low
Low Power)
Power)
When a job is completed (auto low
When a job is completed (auto low power
power timer
timer <
< auto
auto sleep
sleep timer)
timer)
NOTE:
When "auto low power timer" and "auto sleep timer" have the same setting values and the set time from
from Standby
Standby state has elapsed,
elapsed,
transition to the Sleep Mode (instead of the Low Power Mode) occurs.
■
■Sleep
Sleep Standby
Standby Mode
Mod(
The state
The state that
that only
only the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel is
is off
off while
while the
the power
power is
is supplied
supplied to
to all
all other
other parts.
parts.
Presence of
Presence of a
a job
job is
is determined
determined and
and ifif there
there is
is no
no job,
job, the
the mode
mode is
is shifted
shifted to
to Deep
Deep Sleep/Sleep
Sleep/Sleep 1 1 mode.
mode.
When a
When a job
job is
is submitted
submitted during
during sleep
sleep (Deep
(Deep Sleep/Sleep
Sleep/Sleep 1 1 mode),
mode), the
the mode
mode shifts
shifts back
back to
to this
this mode.
mode.
■
■Sleep 1 Mode
Sleep 1 Mode
In this
In this state,
state, the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel is
is off
off and
and therefore
therefore power
power is
is not
not supplied
supplied to
to the
the printer
printer or
or scanner,
scanner, but
but all-night
all-night and
and non-all-night
non-all-night
power
power isis supplied.
supplied.
If the
If the following
following setting
setting value
value is
is set
set to
to "High"
"High" in
Settings/Registration, the
the mode
mode shifts
shifts from
from Sleep
Sleep Standby
Standby mode
mode to
to this
this mode.
mode.
Settings >
> Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Energy
Energy Use
Use
The mode
The mode migrates
migrates toto Sleep
Sleep Standby
Standby mode
mode when
when aa job
job is
is submitted
submitted during
during this
this mode,
mode, and
and to
to Standby
Standby mode
mode when
when the
the Energy
Energy
Saver key
Saver key is
is pressed.
pressed.
■ Deep Sleep
■Deep Sleep Mode
Mode
In this state, the Control Panel is off while only all-night power (3.3 V) is supplied.
If the
If the following
following setting
setting value
value is
is set
set to
to "Low"
"Low" in
Settings/Registration, the
the mode
mode shifts
shifts from
from Sleep
Sleep Standby
Standby mode
mode to
to this
this mode.
mode.
Settings >
> Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Energy
Energy Use
Use
When any
When any of
of the
the "Conditions
"Conditions for
for Not
Not Entering
Entering Deep
Deep Sleep"
Sleep" applies,
applies, transition
transition to
to this
this mode
mode does
does not
not occur.
occur.
The mode
The mode shifts
shifts to
to Sleep
Sleep Standby mode when
Standby mode when a a job
job is
is submitted
submitted during
during this
this mode,
mode, and
and to
to Standby
Standby mode
mode when
when the
the Energy
Energy Saver
Saver
key is
key is pressed.
pressed.
● Conditions for
• Conditions for Not
Not Entering
Entering Deep
Deep Sleep
Sleep
Software Setting
Software Setting
> Preferences
Preferences >
> Timer/Energy
Settings >
> Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Energy
Energy Use
Use
Setting value: High
Hardware
Hardware status
status
•• The
The Serial
Serial Coin
Coin Vendor
Vendor is
is connected
connected
•• An
An iSlot
iSlot Extension
Extension Card
Card is
is connected
connected
•• A
A USB
USB device
device is
is connected
connected toto the
the host
host machine
machine
System performance
System performance status
status
•• An
An application
application is
is communicating
communicating via
via network
network (CPCA)
(CPCA) (when
(when a
a CPCA-dedicated
CPCA-dedicated port
port has
has a
a TCP
TCP connection,
connection, or
or within
within 15
15
seconds after
seconds after reception
reception of
of UDP)
UDP)
298
298
2. Technical
Explanation
•• A print
A print job
job or
or scan
scan jobjob is
is processing/waiting
processing/waiting
•• During report
During report job
job processing
processing
•• During a
During a forward
forward sendsend job/receive
job/receive job job
•• During SEND
During SEND job job processing
processing
•• During distribution
During distribution of of device information
device information
•• During export/import
During export/import by by remote
remote UI UI
•• VNC connection
VNC connection in in progress
progress
•• The Resource
The Resource Downloader
Downloader is is executing
executing aa task
task (such
(such as
as downloading
downloading font
font data
data and creating a
and creating backup).
a backup).
•• During backup
During backup of of Mail Box documents
Mail Box documents
•• While an Advanced Box file is open (reading/writing).
(reading/writing). InIn common
commonwithwithSMR/WebDAV
SMR/WebDAV
Settings/Registration >> Access Access Stored
Stored Files
Files >
> Network
Network
•• Printer/scanner functions
Printer/scanner functions are stopped
are stopped
•• During save
During save job
job processing
processing (including
(including processing
processing to to save
save in
in the
the Advanced
Advanced Box
Box or
or other
other storage
storage after
after scanning
scanning is
is completed,
completed,
just like
just like SEND)
SEND)
•• When storing
When storing aa print
print job
job (or
(or other
other job)
job) using
using memory
memory media
media
•• Weekly shutdown
Weekly shutdown timeout
timeout in in UI has occurred
UI has occurred
•• Service has
An Alarm Service has been
beenset setwithin
within 1010minutes
minuteswith
withthe
thefollowing
following functions
functions
•• Memory
Memory receiving
receiving start/end
start/end timetime
•• Report
Report specified
specified print
print time
time
•• Setting
Setting toto send
send atat aa specified
specified time time (SEND)
(SEND)
•• POP
POP interval
interval
•• DHCP
DHCP setting
setting (server-specified
(server-specified interval)
interval)
•• eRDS setting (server-specified
eRDS setting (server-specified interval)
interval)
•• SNTP
SNTP setting
setting (server-specified
(server-specified interval)
interval)
•• Auto
Auto delivery
delivery of of device
device information
information
•• Backup
Backup of of Mail
Mail Box
Box documents
documents at a specified
at a specified time
time
•• Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Exit Exit Time
Time setting
setting
•• Auto
Auto Shutdown
Shutdown Time (auto shutdown
Time (auto shutdown timer)
timer)
•• Auto
Auto Shutdown
Shutdown WeeklyWeekly Timer Timer setting
setting (weekly
(weekly shutdown)
shutdown)
When the timer is running

•• The
The sleep
sleep mode
mode exitexit timer
timer is
is running
running (for(for 15
15 seconds
seconds when
when recovering
recovering from
fromDeep
Deep Sleep)
Sleep)
•• The
The hard
hard disk
disk drive
drive protection
protection timer
timer is
is running
running(when
(when recovering
recovering from
from Deep
Deep Sleep, for 55
Sleep, for 55 minutes
minutes after
after hard
hard disk
disk drive
drive startup.
startup.
However, after aa print,
However, after print, scan,
scan, oror fax
fax job
job is
is completed,
completed, this
this timer
timer is
is disabled.)
disabled.)
•• The
The network
network timer
timer isis running
running (within
(within several
several seconds
seconds set
set by
by the
the following
followingservice
servicemode
mode (Lv.
(Lv. 2);
2); default
default value
value is
is 15
15 seconds)
seconds)
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > WUEN-LIV
•• The
The wake
wake upup packet
packet timer
timer is
is running
running (for(for 10 minutes after
10 minutes after receiving
receiving aa wake
wake upup packet)
packet)
•• Timer is running after link-up (for 1 minute after network communication
communication startsstarts since
since machine
machine power-on)
•• The
The Send
Send job
job completion
completion timer
timer is is running
running (for
(for 127 seconds after
127 seconds after image-only
image-only job
job completion)
completion)
Effect of
Effect of the
the Hub
Hub Which
Which Supports
Supports Spanning
Spanning Tree
Tree
If
If the network has
the network has been set as
been set as aa loop,
loop, data
data keeps
keepsstaying
staying in
in this
this loop,
loop, causing
causing the
the data
data transfer
transfer efficiency
efficiency to
to be
be lowered.
lowered.
To avoid
To avoid this,
this, a feature called
a feature called spanning
spanning tree
tree is
is provided
provided in
in some
some hubs.
hubs. When this feature
When this feature is
is enabled, devices newly
enabled, devices newly connected
connected
to the
to hub can
the hub can perform
perform data
data communication
communication with with the
the network
network after
after about
about 10 to 50
10 to 50 seconds
seconds (depending
(depending on
on conditions).
conditions).
When entering
When entering and
and exiting
exiting Deep
Deep Sleep,
Sleep,this
this machine
machineisiselectrically
electrically disconnected
disconnected from
from the
the network.
network.
Therefore, when
Therefore, whenconnected
connectedto toaahub
hub with
with the
the spanning
spanning tree
tree feature,
feature,network
networkcommunication
communicationis is disabled
disabled for
for up
up to
to about
about one
one minute
minute
recovering from
when recovering from Deep
Deep Sleep.
Therefore, immediately
Therefore, immediately after
after recovering
recovering from
from Deep Sleep, the
Deep Sleep, the following
following phenomena
phenomena maymay occur.
occur.
•• Device
Device status
status cannot
cannot be retrieved
be retrieved
•• Printing disabled
•• Cannot log
log in with log-in application
If
If these symptoms cause
these symptoms problems, take
cause problems, take one
one of
of the
the following
following measures:
measures:
•• Try
Try avoiding
avoiding Deep Sleep (set
Deep Sleep (setthe
thefollowing
following Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration value
value to
to "High").
"High").
Preferences >> Timer/Energy
Settings >> Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Energy
Energy UseUse
•• Turn
Turn OFF
OFF the
the spanning
spanning tree
tree feature
feature in
in the
the hub.
hub.
•• Request
Request users
users to
to use
use the
the hub
hub which
which supports
supports Rapid
Rapid Spanning-Tree Protocol (RSTP)
Spanning-Tree Protocol that resolved
(RSTP) that resolved this
this problem.
problem.
299
299
2. Technical
Explanation
Embedded RDS
ProductOverview
0 Product Overview
■
■Overview
Embedded RDS
Embedded RDS (hereinafter
(hereinafter referred
referred to
to as
as E-RDS)
E-RDS) isis a
a monitoring program that
monitoring program that runs
runs onon the
the host
host machine.
machine. When
When the
the monitoring
monitoring
option is
option is enabled
enabled by
by making
making the
the setting
setting on
on this
this machine,
machine, information
information such
such as
as the
the status
status change
change of
of the
the machine,
machine, counter
counter
information, and
information, and failure
failure information
information are
are collected.
collected. The
The collected
collected device
device information
information isis sent
sent to
to a
a remote
remote maintenance
maintenance server
server called
called
UGW (Universal
UGW (Universal Gateway
Gateway Server)
Server) via
via Internet,
Internet, thus
thus allowing
allowing for
for e-Maintenance/
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE
imageWARE RemoteRemote (Remote
(Remote Diagnosis
Diagnosis
System).
System).
The following
The following device
device information/
information/ status
status can
can be
be monitored.
monitored.
•• Billing counts
•• Parts
Parts counter
counter
•• Firmware info
•• Service
Service call
call error
error log
log
•• Jam
Jam log
log
•• Alarm log
•• Status
Status changes
changes (Toner
(Toner low/
low/ out,
out, etc.)
etc.)
Since high
Since high confidentiality
confidentiality is
is required
required for
for the
the information
information shown
shown above,
above, itit performs
performs communication
communication between
between this
this machine
machine and
and the
the
UGW using
UGW using HTTPS/
HTTPS/ SOAP
SOAP protocol.
protocol.
Customer
Environment UGW
This machine
Firewall Internet
Sales Company
DNS Server
DNS Proxy Server
Server Proxy Administrator
Server Administrator
■
■Features
Features and
and benefits
benefits
E-RDS embedded
E-RDS embedded with
with a
a network
network module
module in
in advance
advance can
can realize
realize aa front-end
front-end processing
processing of
of e-Maintenance/
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE
imageWARE Remote
Remote
system without
system without attaching
attaching any
any extra
extra hardware
hardware equipment.
equipment.
■
■Major
Major Functions
Functions
● Service Browser
• Service Browser
Service browser
Service browser is
is a
a web
web browsing
browsing functionality only for
functionality only for service technicians in
service technicians in charge,
charge, and
and is
is used
used for
for referring
referring to
to the
the FAQ
FAQ contents
contents
which is
which is connected
connected to to UGW.
UGW.
In order
In order to
to grasp
grasp on
on which
which devices
devices the
the service
service browser
browser isis enabled,
enabled, when
when the
the status
status of
of the
the service
service browser
browser isis changed
changed from
from disabled
disabled
(0: OFF)
(0: OFF) to
to enabled,
enabled, E-RDS
E-RDS sends
sends the
the browser
browser information
information toto the
the UGW.
UGW.
300
2. Technical
Explanation
● Service mode
• Service mode menu
menu Transmission
Transmission
E-RDS sends
E-RDS sends the
the target
target service
service mode
mode menu
menu data
data to
to UGW
UGW in
in the
the following
following cases:
cases:
•• When
When a
a specific
specific alarm
alarm and
and service
service call
call error
error are
are detected
detected
•• When
When the
the setting
setting is
is changed
changed in
in service
service mode
mode
The following
The following shows
shows the
the transmission
transmission timing
timing and
and the
the target
target data
data for
for transmission
transmission in
in service
service mode
mode menu:
menu:
Transmission timing
Transmission timing Transmitting data
Transmitting data Error retry
Error retry
When the
When the following
following alarm
alarm is
is detected.
detected. COPIER
COPIER Display
Display ANALOG
ANALOG No
No
HV-STS
Alarm codes
Alarm codes for
for transmission:
transmission: CCD
CCD
0x060002, //
0x060002, II Fixing
Fixing DPOT
0x060004 to
0x060004 to 0x069999,
0x069999, //II Fixing
Fixing DENS
DENS
0x090005 to
0x090005 to 0x099999,
0x099999, //II Dram
Dram
FIXING
0x100006 to
0x100006 to 0016,
0016, 0x100022
0x100022 to to 0099,
0099, 0x100101
0x100101 to
to 9900,
9900, //
II Development
Development
0x300001 to
0x300001 to 0x309999
0x309999 II// High
High voltage
voltage SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
When the
When the following
following service
service call
call error
error is
is detected.
detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
HV-STS
HV-STS
Error codes
Error codes for
for transmission:
transmission: CCD
CCD
E000 to
E000 to E00F,
E00F, //
II Fixing
Fixing DPOT
E020, II
E020, // Development
Development ATRATR DENS
E060 to
E060 to E06F
E06F II
// High
High voltage
voltage
FIXING
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
When a
When a value
value is
is set
set to
to [COPIER
[COPIER -- Adjust]
Adjust] subordinate's
subordinate's Service
Service mode
mode menu.
menu. COPIER
COPIER Adjust
Adjust Yes
Yes
(Transmission will
(Transmission will be
be done
done at
at 60
60 min,
min, later
later of
of setting)
setting)
When the
When the first
first communication
communication test
test is
is done.
done. COPIER Display ANALOG Yes
Yes
(For transmission
(For transmission process,
process, 5
5 minutes
minutes after
after the
the execution)
execution) HV-STS
CCD
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Adjust
Adjust
NOTE:
Target transmission
Target transmission data
data are
are only
only the
the items
items under
under LEVEL1 and 22 in
LEVELI and in the
the service
service mode.
mode.
301
2. Technical
Explanation
O Limitations
■
■ Service
Service Mode
Mode Menu
Menu Transmission
Transmission Function
Function
1. In the
1. In the following
following cases,
cases, service
service mode
mode menumenu data
data is is not
not transmitted.
transmitted.
•• When
When an an unsent
unsent alarm
alarm log
log oror service
service call
call log
log has
has been
been detected
detected by by E-RDS
E-RDS at at power-on
power-on
•• When
When an an alarm
alarm loglog oror service
service call
call log
log to
to be
be resent
resent due due to
to a a transmission
transmission failure
failure isis detected
detected
•• When
When transmission
transmission of of service
service mode
mode menu
menu executed
executed at at the
the time
time ofof detection
detection ofof an
an alarm
alarm oror a
a service
service call
call error
error ended
ended inin
failure
•• If
If a
a new
new alarm
alarm oror service
service call
call error
error occurs
occurs while
while service
service mode
mode menu menu data
data is
is being
being obtained
obtained after
after detection
detection ofof an
an alarm
alarm
or a
or a service
service call
call error,
error, the
the data
data being
being obtained
obtained is is not
not sent.
sent.
2. If
2. If alarms/service
alarms/service call call errors
errors successively
successively occur,
occur, andand ifif the
the time
time of of the
the host
host machine
machine is is corrected
corrected or or changed
changed while
while the
the log
log is
is
being
being sent, sent, service
service mode
mode menumenu data
data may
may not
not be
be properly
properly sent.
sent. ItIt is
is because
because a a Link
Link No.*
No.* maymay be
be applied
applied toto the
the old
old log
log although
although
itit should
should be be applied
applied toto the
the new
new log.
log.
* Link No.:
A common
A common numbernumber for for linking
linking the
the service
service mode
mode menumenu data data with
with thethe alarm
alarm log/service
log/service call call log
log data
data to
to be
be sent
sent
After completion
After completion of of log
log transmission,
transmission, the the service
service mode
mode menu menu data data is
is obtained,
obtained, andand isis sent
sent with
with this
this number
number attached.
attached.
3. Transmission
3. Transmission of of the
the data
data of of changes
changes made made in in service
service modemode menu
menu settings is not
settings is not performed
performed instantly, but performed
instantly, but performed whenwhen a a
specified period
specified period ofof 60
60 minutes
minutes elapse
elapse after
after the
the change
change of of service
service mode mode menu
menu settings
settings is is detected
detected oror when
when aa communication
communication
test is
test is performed
performed at at the
the time
time ofof power-on.
power-on. (There
(There is is aa time
time lag.)
lag.)
4. When
4. When service service mode
mode menumenu settings
settings (COPIER
(COPIER > > Adjust)
Adjust) are are made,
made, transmission
transmission is is performed
performed even even when
when no no change
change is is made
made
in the
in the target
target data
data toto be
be transmitted.
transmitted.
Transmission of
Transmission of service
service modemode data
data isis also
also performed
performed when when changes
changes are are made
made in in the
the service
service mode
mode setting
setting value
value notnot subject
subject
to transmission
to transmission (items
(items other
other than
than Level
Level 1,1, 2)
2) or
or when
when settlement
settlement of of a
a value
value is
is performed
performed without
without changing
changing thethe setting
setting value.
value.
Service cautions
Q Service cautions
1.
1. After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test
(COM-TEST) need
(COM-TEST) need toto be
be performed.
performed. Failure
Failure to
to do
do so
so will
will result
result that
that the
the counter
counter transmitting
transmitting value
value to
to the
the UGW
UGW maymay become
become
unusual.
unusual.
Also, after
Also, after replacing
replacing the
the main
main controller
controller board,
board, all
all settings
settings must
must be
be reprogrammed.
reprogrammed.
2. The
2. The following
following settings
settings in
in service
service mode
mode must
must not
not be
be change
change unless
unless there
there are
are specific
specific instructions
instructions to
to do
do so.
so.
Changing these
Changing these values
values will
will cause
cause error
error in
in communication
communication withwith UGW.
UGW.
•• Set
Set port
port number
number of of UGW
UGW
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
Default : 443
•• URL
URL setting
setting of
of UGW
UGW
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
Default :: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Default https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3. IfIfthe
3. thee-Maintenance/
e-Maintenance/imageWARE
imageWARERemoteRemotecontract
contractofofthe
thedevice
deviceisis invalid,
invalid, be
be sure
sure to
to turn
turn OFF
OFF the
the E-RDS
E-RDS setting
setting (E-RDS
(E-RDS ::
0).
0).
302
2. Technical
Explanation
4. With
4. Withthis
thismachine,
machine,aacommunication
communicationtest testcan
can bebe conducted
conducted from
from the
the [Counter
[Counter Check] on the
Check] on the Control
Control Panel.*
Panel.* When conducting
When conducting
a communication test
a communication test from
from the
the [Counter Check] on
[Counter Check] on the
the Control
Control Panel,
Panel, pay
payattention
attention onon the
thefollowing
following points:
points:
•• During
During a
a communication
communication test,
test, do
do not
not take any actions
take any actions such
such as pressing a
as pressing key. Actions
a key. Actions are not accepted
are not accepted until
until the
the
communication test
communication test is
is completed
completed (actions
(actions are ignored).
are ignored).
•• When
When aa communication
communication testtest is
is being
being conducted
conducted fromfrom service
service mode
mode oror from
from the
the [Counter
[Counter Check]
Check] on
on the
the Control
Control Panel,
Panel,
do not
do not conduct
conduct aa communication
communication test test from
from the
the other.
other. These
These operations
operations are
are not
not guaranteed.
guaranteed.
NOTE:
*The user
*The user can
can conduct
conduct aa communication
communication test and seen seen the
the communication
communication test result.
If the communication results
results in
in failure,
failure, an
an error
error code
code (a
(a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) appears on the touch panel display.
<Communication Test)
Test communication with the remote maintenance server.
Communication failed.
Error Code: 810f20013
Start Test
El System Management Mode
E-RDS Setup
E-RDS Setup
■ Confirmation and
• Confirmation and preparation
preparation in
in advance
advance
To monitor this
this machine
machine with
with e-Maintenance/
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote,the
imageWARE Remote, thefollowing
following settings
settings are required.
● Advance preparations
• Advance preparations
The following
The following network-related information needs
network-related information needs to
to be obtained from
be obtained from the
the user's
user's system
system administrator
administrator in
in advance.
advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
IP address settings
•• Automatic setting
setting :: DHCP
DHCP
•• Manual
Manual setting
setting :: IP address, subnet
IP address, subnet mask
mask and
and gateway address to
gateway address to be
be set
set
Information item 2
Is
Is there
there a DNS server
a DNS server in
in use?
use?
If there is a DNS
DNS server
server in
in use,
use,find
find out
out the
the following.
following.
•• Primary
Primary DNS server address
DNS server address
•• Secondary
Secondary DNS server address
DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there aa proxy
Is there proxy server?
server?
If
If there is aa proxy
there is proxy server
server in
in use,
use, find
find out
out the
the following.
following.
•• Proxy
Proxy server
server address
address
•• Port
Port No.
No. for
for proxy
proxy server
server
Information item 4
Is proxy server
Is proxy authentication required?
server authentication required?
If proxy server
If proxy authentication is
server authentication is required,
required, find
find out
out the
the following.
following.
•• User
User name
name and
and password
password required
required for
for proxy
proxy authentication
authentication
●
• Network settings
Based on
Based on the
the results
results of
of the
the information
information obtained
obtained in
in "Advance
"Advance preparations",
preparations", make this machine
make this network related
machine network related settings.
settings.
See Users'
See Users' Guide
Guide for
for detailed
detailed procedures.
procedures.
303
2. Technical
Explanation
CAUTION:
When changes
When changes are
are made
made to
to the
the above-mentioned
above-mentioned network
network settings,
settings, be
be sure
sure to
to turn
turn OFF
OFF and
and then
then ON
ON the
the main
main power
power of
of
this machine.
●
• Installation of the CA certificate (Arbitrary)
Perform installation
Perform installation oror deletion
deletion of
of the
the CA
CA certificate
certificate ifif necessary,
necessary, and
and turn
turn OFF
OFF and
and then
then ON
ON the
the main
main power
power of
of this
this machine.
machine.
•• Installation
Installation of
of the
the CA
CA certificate:
certificate: Perform
Perform installation
installation from
from SST
SST oror Remote
Remote UI.
UI.
•• Deletion
Deletion ofof the
the CA
CA certificate:
certificate: When
When the
the following
following operation
operation is
is performed,
performed, the
the CA
CA certificate
certificate in
in the
the factory
factory setting
setting is
is
automatically installed.
automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following
After following procedure,
procedure, thethe registered
registered key
key and
and CA
CA certificate
certificate are
are deleted,
deleted, and
and only
only the
the CA
CA certificate
certificate installed
installed at
at the
the
time of
time of shipment
shipment is
is registered.
registered.
It is
It is therefore
therefore necessary
necessary to to check
check with
with the
the user
user in
in advance.
advance.
1. Select
1. Select (LEVEL2)
(LEVEL2) COPIER
COPIER >
> Function
Function >
> CLEAR
CLEAR >
> CA-KEY
CA-KEY and
and touch
touch the
the [OK]
[OK] button.
button.
"OK!" is
"OK!" is displayed
displayed ifif the
the CA
CA certificate
certificate isis initialized.
initialized.
When "NG!"
When "NG!" is
is displayed,
displayed, see
see the
the section
section of of "Troubleshooting"
"Troubleshooting" to to execute
execute the
the remedy,
remedy, and
and then
then perform
perform initialization
initialization of
of the
the
CA certificate
CA certificate again
again and
and check
check to
to see
see ifif the
the CA
CA certificate
certificate is
is initialized.
initialized.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
CAUTION:
If a
If a key
key and
and a
a CA
CA certificate
certificate have
have been
been registered
registered in
in order
order to
to use
use a
a function
function other
other thanE-RDS,
thanE-RDS, itit is
is necessary
necessary to
to register
register
again from
again from SST
SST or
or Remote
Remote UI.UI.
■
■Steps to E-RDS settings
Inthe
1. In thefollowing
following service
service modes,
modes, initialize
initialize a set value of E-RDS.
Select COPIER
Select COPIER >
> Function
Function >
> CLEAR
CLEAR >
> ERDS-DAT
ERDS-DAT and
and touch
touch the
the [OK]
[OK] button.
button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
“Initializing E-RDS settings"
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing settings” on page 306.
304
2. Technical
Explanation
2. Enable
2. EnableE-RDS
E-RDS function
function and
and execute
execute communication
communication test.
test.
(a) Select
(a) Select COPIER
COPIER > > Function
Function >> INSTALL
INSTALL > > E-RDS.
E-RDS.
(b) Press
(b) Press the
the numeric
numeric key
key [1]
[1] on
on the
the control
control panel
panel (the
(the setting
setting value
value is
is changed
changed to
to 1)
1) and
and touch
touch the
the [OK]
[OK] button.
button. (The
(The data
data
is reflected to the setting value field.)
is reflected to the setting value field.)
<INSTALL > < 1/ 3 > < READY > < LEVEL 1 >- <INSTALL > < 1/ 3 > < READY > < LEVEL 1 >
RECV 4
STRD-PO STRD POS
CARD 0 - 2001
0- 1} AINR-OFF
E-RDS 0- 1 E-RDS
RG1111-PORT 443 1- 65535 RGW-PORT
COM-TEST
(®)1 Hlima 0
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The following
The following settings
settings i.e.
i.e. RGW-PORT
RGW-PORT and and RGW-ADR
RGW-ADR in in Service
Service mode
mode must
must not
not be
be change
change unless
unless there
there are
are specific
specific
instructions to
instructions to do
do so.
so.
Changing these
Changing these values
values will
will cause
cause error
error in
in communication
communication with
with UGW.
UGW.
NOTE:
This initiates
This initiates the
the communication
communication test
test between
between the
the device
device and
and the
the UGW.
UGW.
(c) Select
(c) Select [COM-TEST]
[COM-TEST] and and then
then touch
touch [OK].
[OK].
The communication
The communication test
test with
with UGW
UGW will
will be
be executed.
executed.
If the
If the communication
communication is is successful,
successful, "OK!"
"OK!" isis displayed.
displayed.
If "NG!"
If "NG!" (failed)
(failed) appears,
appears, refer
refer to
to the
the "Troubleshooting"
"Troubleshooting" andand repeat
repeat until
until "OK!"
"OK!" is
is displayed.
displayed.
NOTE:
The communication
The communication results
results with
with UGW
UGW can
can be
be distinguished
distinguished by
by referring
referring to
to the
the COM-LOG.
COM-LOG. ByBy performing
performing the
the communication
communication test
test
with UGW,
with UGW, E-RDS
E-RDS acquires
acquires schedule
schedule information
information and
and starts
starts monitoring
monitoring and
and meter
meter reads
reads operation.
operation.
■
• Steps
Steps to
to Service
Service Browser
Browser settings
settings
1. In
1. Inthe
the following
following service
service modes,
modes, enable
enable aa service
service browser.
browser.
Select COPIER
Select COPIER >
> Function
Function >
> INSTALL
INSTALL >
> BRWS-ACT
BRWS-ACT and
and then
then touch
touch [OK].
[OK].
NOTE:
NOTE:
When the
When the status
status of
of the
the service
service browser
browser is
is changed
changed to
to enabled,
enabled, E-RDS
E-RDS sends
sends the
the browser
browser information
information to
to the
the UGW
UGW at
at this
this timing.
timing.
If the
If the connection
connection is
is established
established with
with UGW
UGW successfully,
successfully, "OK!"
"OK!" is
is displayed.
displayed.
When "NG!" is displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until
When "NG!" is displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection
connection is
is established
established with
with UGW.
UGW.
2. Turn
2. Turn OFF
OFF and
and then
then ON
ON the
the main
main power
power of
of this
this machine.
machine.
3. Make sure
3. Make sure that
that "1
"1 (:
(: ACTIVE)"
ACTIVE)" is
is set
set under
under COPIER
COPIER >
> Display
Display >
> USER
USER >
> BRWS-STS.
BRWS-STS.
4. When
4. When the
the above-shown
above-shown setting
setting values
values are
are enabled,
enabled, [Service
[Service Browser]
Browser] is
is displayed
displayed in
in the
the Service
Service Mode
Mode screen.
screen.
305
2. Technical
Explanation
Please Select Service Mode Menu.
Mode List BACKUP
Mode List Classic RESTORE
SITUATION ASSIST TOOL
Updater 4,0
00
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled, to stop the service browsing, execute BRWS-ACT again, turn OFF and then ON the
main power of this machine.
■
■Initializing E-RDS settings
It is
It is possible
possible to
to clear
clear the
the FLASH
FLASH data
data of
of E-RDS
E-RDS and
and change
change the
the E-RDS
E-RDS setting
setting back
back to
to the
the default
default value.
value.
●
• Initialization procedure
Execute the
Execute the following
following service
service mode.
mode.
Select COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT and then touch [OK].
● Setting values
• Setting values and
and data
data to
to be
be initialized
initializes
The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
•• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS
•• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
•• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
•• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
CAUTION:
In case
In case of
of replacing the CA
replacing the CA certificate file, even
certificate file, even ifif initialization of E-RDS
initialization of E-RDS isis executed, the status
executed, the status is
is not
not returned
returned to
to the
the factory
factory
default. When
default. When installing
installing the
the certificate
certificate file
file other
other than
than thethe factory default CA
factory default CA certificate file, itit is
certificate file, is required
required to
to delete
delete the
the certificate
certificate
file after
file after E-RDS
E-RDS initialization
initialization and
and install
install the
the factory
factory default
default CACA certificate
certificate file.
file.
For detailed
For detailed procedures,
procedures, seesee "Steps
“Steps toto E-RDS
E-RDS settings"
settings” on on page
page 304.
304.
Error code
Error code and
and strings
strings
The following
The following error
error information
information is
is displayed
displayed on
on the
the communication
communication error
error log
log details
details screen.
screen.
(Here, "server"
(Here, "server" means
means UGW.)
UGW.)
•• The error information are displayed in the following form.
[*] [Character
[*] [Character strings]
strings] [Functional
[Functional classification
classification (Method
(Method name)]
name)] [Error
[Error details
details provided
provided by
by UGW]
UGW]
NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method name: getConfiguration or
communicationTest) only.
No.
No. Code
Code Character strings
Character strings Cause
Cause Remedy
Remedy
1
1 0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode changed. Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT).
2 0500 0003 SUSPEND: Communication Turning OFF and then ON the Perform a communication test (COM-TEST).
test is not performed. main power of this machine while
the communication test had not
been performed although E-RDS
is enabled.
306
3(
2. Technical
Explanation
No.
No. Code
Cause Remedy
Remedy
3
3 0xxx 0003
0xxx 0003 Server schedule
Server schedule is
is not
not exist
exist Blank schedule
Blank schedule data
data have
have been Perform and
been Perform and complete
complete a
a communication
communication test
test
received from
received from UGW.
UGW. (COM-TEST).
4
4 0xxx 0003
0xxx 0003 Communication test
Communication test is
is not
not per- Communication test
per- Communication test has
has not
not Perform and
Perform and complete
complete a
a communication
communication test
test
formed completed.
completed. (COM-TEST).
5
5 84xx 0003
84xx E-RDS switch
0003 E-RDS switch is
is setted
setted OFF
OFF A communication
A communication test
test has
has been Set E-RDS
been Set E-RDS switch
switch (E-RDS)
(E-RDS) toto 1,
1, and
and then
then per-
per-
attempted with the
attempted with the E-RDS
E-RDS switch form a
switch form a communication
communication test
test (COM-TEST).
(COM-TEST).
being
being OFF.
OFF.
6
6 8600 0002
8600 Event Registration
0002 Event Registration is
is Failed
Failed Processing (event
Processing (event processing)
processing) Turn the
Turn the device
device OFF/
OFF/ ON.
ON.
8600 0003
8600 0003 within
within the
the device
device has
has failed.
failed. If the
If the error
error persists,
persists, replace
replace the
the device
device system
system
8600 0101
8600 0101 software.
software. (Upgrade)
(Upgrade)
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0414
8600 0415
7
7 8700 0306
8700 SRAM version
0306 SRAM version unmatch!
unmatch! Improper value is written in at the Turn
Turn the
the device
device OFF/
OFF/ ON.
ON.
head of
head of the
the NVMEM
NVMEM domain
domain
(nonvolatile memory domain) of
E-RDS.
8 8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS version un- Improper value is written in at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
match!
match! head of
head of the
the NVMEM
NVMEM domain
domain
(nonvolatile memory domain) of
Ae-RDS.
9
9 8xxx 0004
8xxx 0004 Operation is
Operation is not
not supported
supported Method which
Method which E-RDS
E-RDS is
is not
not sup- Contact help
sup- Contact help desk.
desk.
porting
porting attempted.
attempted.
10 8xxx 0101 Server response error (NULL) Communication
Communication with with UGW
UGW has Perform and
has Perform and complete
complete a
a communication
communication test
test
been
been successful,
successful, butbut an
an error
error of
of (COM-TEST).
some
some sort
sort has
has prevented UGW
prevented UGW
from responding.
When (Null)
When (Null) is
is displayed
displayed at
at the
the
end of the message, this indi-
cates
cates that
that there
there has
has been
been an
an er-
er-
ror in the HTTPS communication
method.
method.
11 8xxx 0201 Server
Server schedule
schedule is
is invalid
invalid During the
During the communication
communication test,
test, When the
When the error
error occurs,
occurs, report
report the
the details
details to
to the
the
8xxx 0202 there
there has
has been
been some
some kind
kind of
of error
error support
support section.
section.
8xxx 0203
8xxx 0203 in
in the
the schedule
schedule values
values passed
passed After the
After the UGW
UGW side
side has
has responded,
responded, try
try the
the
8xxx 0204 from UGW. communication
communication test again.
test again.
8xxx 0206
8xxx 0206
12 8xxx 0207
Eimoc 0207 Internal Schedule is broken The schedule
The data in
schedule data in the
the inside
inside of Perform a
of Perform a communication
communication test
test (COM-TEST).
(COM-TEST).
8xxx 0208
8xxx 0208 E-RDS is
E-RDS is not
not right.
right.
13
13 8xxx 0221
8xxx Server specified
0221 Server specified list
list is
is too
too big Alarm/Alert filtering
big Alarm/Alert filtering error:
error: The
The Alert filtering
Alert filtering is
is not
not supported
supported by
by UGW.
UGW.
number of
number of elements
elements of of the
the list
list
specified by the
specified by the server
server is
is over
over re-
re-
striction
striction value.
value.
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list is wrong Alarm filtering
Alarm filtering error:
error: Unjust
Unjust value Alert filtering
value Alert filtering is
is not
not supported
supported by
by UGW.
UGW.
is included in the element of the
list specified
list specified by
by the
the server.
server.
15
15 8xxx 0304
8xxx 0304 Device is
Device is busy,
busy, try
try later
later The semaphore
The semaphore consumption
consumption er- Try again
er- Try again a
a communication
communication test
test after
after a
a period
period
ror at
ror at the
the time
time of
of aa communica-
communica- of time.
tion
tion test.
test.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is notmatch When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact the support de-
TrackingID notified
TrackinglD notified by
by Updater
Updater partment
partment of
of the
the sales
sales company.
company.
differs
differs from
from the
the thing
thing of
of UGW
UGW
designates.
designates.
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Some other
Some other kind
kind of
of communica- Perform and
communica- Perform and complete
complete a
a communication
communication test
test
tion
tion error
error has
has occurred.
occurred. (COM-TEST).
18
18 8xxx 2001
8xxx URL Scheme
2001 URL Scheme error(not
error(not https)
https) The header
The of the
header of the URL
URL ofof the
the reg- Check that
reg- Check that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW (RGW-
(RGW-
istered
istered UGW
UGW is is not
not in
in https
https for- ADR) is
for- ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
mat.
mat. tif010.
307
307
2. Technical
Explanation
No.
No. Code
Cause Remedy
Remedy
19
19 8xxx 2002
8xxx 2002 URL server
URL server specified
specified is
is illegal A URL
illegal A URL different
different to
to that
that specified Check that
specified Check that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW (RGW-
(RGW-
by
by the
the UGW
UGW hashas been
been set.
set. ADR) is
ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
tif010.
20
20 8xxx 2003
Eimor 2003 Network is
Network is not
not ready,
ready, try
try later Communication attempted
later Communication attempted with-
with- Check the
Check the network
network connection,
connection, as as per
per the
the initial
initial
out
out confirming
confirming network
network connec-
connec- procedures
procedures described
described in
in the
the troubleshooting.
troubleshooting.
tion, just after turning OFF and Perform a communication test (COM-TEST)
then
then ON
ON the
the main
main power
power of
of this
this about 60
about 60 seconds later, after
seconds later, after turn
turn on
on the
the device.
device.
machine in which the network
preparations
preparations areare not
not ready.
ready.
21 8xxx 2004
Eimoc 2004 Server response error ([Hexa- Communication
Communication with
with UGW
UGW has
has Try again
Try again after
after aa period
period of
of time.
time.
decimal])
decimal]) [Error
[Error detailed
detailed in
in been
been successful,
successful, but
but an
an error
error of
of Check detailed
Check detailed error
error code
code (Hexadecimal)
(Hexadecimal) and
and
UGW]*1 some
some sort
sort has
has prevented UGW
prevented UGW [Error details
[Error details in
in UGW]
UGW] from
from UGW
UGW displayed
displayed af-
af-
from responding. ter the
ter the message.
message.
22 8xxx 200A
Eimoc Server connection
200A Server connection error
error •• TCP/IP
TCP/IP communication
communication fault
fault •• Check
Check thethe network
network connection,
connection, asas per
per the
the
•• The
The IP
IP address
address of
of device
device is
is initial procedures
initial procedures described
described in
in the
the trouble-
trouble-
not set.
not set. shooting.
• When proxy is used, make the settings for
proxy,
proxy, and
and check
check the
the status
status of
of the
the proxy
proxy
server.
server.
23
23 8xxx 200B
Eimor Server address
200B Server address resolution
resolution er-
er- Server address
Server address name
name resolution
resolution •• Check
Check that
that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW
ror has failed.
has failed. (RGW-ADR) is
(RGW-ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
ugw/agentif010.
ugw/agentif010.
•• Check
Check that
that Internet
Internet connection
connection is
is available
available
in the environment.
24 8xxx 2014
Eimoc 2014 Proxy connection error Could not
Could not connect
connect to
to proxy
proxy serv- Check proxy
serv- Check proxy server
server address
address // port
port and
and re-enter
re-enter
er
er due
due to
to improper
improper address.
address. as needed.
as needed.
25
25 8xxx 2015
Eimor 2015 Proxy address
Proxy address resolution
resolution error Could not
error Could not connect
connect to
to proxy
proxy serv-
serv- •• Check
Check that
that the
the proxy
proxy server
server name
name is is cor-
cor-
er
er due
due to
to name
name resolution
resolution error
error of
of rect.
rect.
proxy
proxy address.
address. If the
If the proxy
proxy server
server name
name isis correct,
correct, check
check
the DNS
the DNS connection,
connection, asas per
per the
the initial
initial pro-
pro-
cedures
cedures described
described in
in the
the troubleshooting.
troubleshooting.
•• Specify
Specify the
the IP
IP address
address asas the
the proxy
proxy server
server
name.
name.
26 8xxx 201E
Eimoc 201E Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication
Proxy authentication is
is failed.
failed. Check the
Check the user
user name
name and
and password
password required
required in
in
order to login
order to login to
to the
the proxy,
proxy, and
and re-enter
re-enter as
as nee-
nee-
ded.
ded.
27 8xxx 2028
Eimoc 2028 Server certificate
Server certificate error
error •• No
No route
route certificate
certificate installed
installed •• Install
Install the
the latest
latest device
device system
system software.
software.
in
in device.
device. (Upgrade)
(Upgrade)
•• Certificate
Certificate other
other than
than that
that in-
in- •• Correctly
Correctly set
set the
the date
date and
and time
time of
of the
the de-
de-
itially
itially registered in the
registered in the user's
user's vice.
vice.
operating environment is •• Execute
Execute CLEAR
CLEAR > > CA-KEY,
CA-KEY, and
and turn
turn OFF
OFF
being used,
being used, but
but has
has not
not and then
and then ON
ON thethe device.
device. (The
(The CA
CA certifi-
certifi-
been registered
been registered with
with the
the de-
de- cate
cate at
at the
the time
time of
of shipment
shipment is
is automati-
automati-
vice.
vice. cally
cally installed.)
installed.)
•• The
The date
date and
and time
time of
of the
the de-
de-
vice
vice isis not
not correct.
correct.
28
28 8xxx 2029
Eimor 2029 Server certificate
Server certificate verify
verify error
error The server
The server certificate
certificate verification Check that
verification Check that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW (RGW-
(RGW-
error
error occurred.
occurred. ADR) is
tif010.
29 8xxx 2046
Eimoc 2046 Server certificate
Server certificate expired
expired •• The
The route
route certificate
certificate regis-
regis- Check that
Check that the
the device
device time
time and
and date
date are
are cor-
cor-
tered
tered with
with the
the device
device has
has ex-
ex- rectly set.
rectly set.
pired. If the
If the device
device time
time and
and date
date are
are correct,
correct, upgrade
upgrade
•• Certificate
Certificate other
other than
than that
that in-
in- to the
to the latest
latest system
system software.
software.
itially
itially registered in the
registered in the user's
user's
operating environment is
being used,
being used, but
but has
has not
not
been registered
been registered with
with the
the de-
de-
vice.
vice.
•• The
The device
device time
time and
and date
date isis
outside
outside ofof the
the certificated
certificated
period.
period.
308
2. Technical
Explanation
No.
No. Code
Cause Remedy
Remedy
30 8xxx 2047 Server response
Server response time
time out
out Due to
Due to network
network congestion,
congestion, etc., If this
etc., If this error
error occurs
occurs when
when the
the communication
communication
the
the response
response from
from UGW
UGW does
does not test is
not test is being
being run
run or
or Service
Service Browser
Browser is
is being
being set,
set,
come
come within
within the
the specified
specified time.
time. trytry again
again after
after a
a period
period of
of time.
time.
(HTTPS level
(HTTPS level time
time out)
out)
31 8xxx 2048
8>oc Service not
Service not found
found There is
There is a
a mistake
mistake in
in the
the UGW
UGW Check that
Check that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW (RGW-
(RGW-
URL, and UGW cannot be ac- ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
cessed.
cessed. (Path
(Path is
is wrong)
wrong) tif010.
32
32 8xxx 2052
8moc 2052 URL error The data
The data which
which is
is not
not URL
URL is
is in- Check that
in- Check that the
the value
value of
of URL
URL of
of UGW
UGW (RGW-
(RGW-
putted
putted into
into URL field.
URL field. ADR) is
tif010.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client fails to obtain SOAP Perform and complete a communication test
Response.
Response. (COM-TEST).
Possibility of a problem in UGW
or
or of
of a
a temporary
temporary problem
problem in
in the
the
network load.
network load.
34
34 8xxx 2063
8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault
SOAP Fault SOAP communication
SOAP communication error
error has Check that
has Check that the
the value
value of
of port
port number
number of
of UGW
UGW
occurred.
occurred. (RGW-PORT) is 443.
35 xxxx xxxx Device internal error An internal error, such as memo- Turn
Turn the
the device
device OFF/
OFF/ ON.
ON.
ry unavailable,
ry unavailable, etc.,
etc., has
has occurred Or replace
occurred Or replace the
the device
device system
system software.
software. (Up-
(Up-
during
during a
a device
device internal
internal error
error grade)
grade)
phase.
phase.
36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure! Internal error occurred at the ini- Turn
Turn the
the device
device OFF/
OFF/ ON.
ON.
tiating E-RDS.
*1: [Hexadecimal]:
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates
indicates an
an error
error code
code returned
returned from
from UGW.
UGW.
[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from
[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
UGW.
309
309
2. Technical
Explanation
Updater
FunctionalOverview
0 Functional Overview
■
■Overview
Updater provides
Updater provides functions
functions that
that enable
enable network
network communication
communication with
with Content
Content Delivery
Delivery System
System (hereinafter
(hereinafter CDS)
CDS) or
or Local
Local CDS
CDS
to install
to install firmware
firmware and
and system
system options.
options.
Firmware Installation
Updater function
Updater function enables
enables users
users to
to distribute
distribute firmware
firmware through
through networks.
networks. Particularly
Particularly on
on e-Maintenance/UGW
e-Maintenance/UGW (called
(called NETEYE
in Japan)-enabled
in Japan)-enabled devices,
devices, firmware
firmware can
can be
be updated
updated remotely,
remotely, which
which effectively
effectively slashes
slashes costs
costs incurred
incurred in
in field
field services.
services.
System Option
System Option Installation
Installation
By linking
By linking devices
devices to
to CDS
CDS andand License
License Management
Management System
System (providing
(providing the
the function
function to
to manage
manage licenses;
licenses; hereinafter
hereinafter LMS),
LMS),
applications can
applications can be
be installed
installed in
in devices
devices via
via Updater,
Updater, regardless
regardless of
of those
those embedded
embedded (system
(system options)
options) in
in devices.
devices.
■
■Firmware Installation
The service technician is involved in the following 5 firmware installation methods by introducing CDS:
Delivery method Download instruc-

Download instruc- Update timing
Update timing Versions which
Versions which can
can be
be delivered
delivered
tions given by Older
Older than
than the
the cur-
cur- Same
Same as
as the
the cur-
cur- Newer than
Newer than the
the
rent
rent rent
rent current
current
a. CDS Remote Up-
a. UGW Automatic No Yes*1 Yes*2
date
(Download and up-
date in conjunction
with UGW)
b. CDS Remote
b. UGW Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes
Download
(download in con-
junction with UGW)
c. CDS On-site
c. Local UI Automatic No Yes*1 Yes*2
Download Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes
(manual download
and update)
d. CDS Scheduled
d. UGW Scheduled No No Yes*2
Update Method
(UGW-linked Period-
ical Download and
Periodical Update)
e. Update using SST
e. SST - Yes Yes Yes
(Service Support
Tool)
*1: Do
*1: Do not
not execute
execute Updated
Updated Module.
Module.
*2: Versions
*2: Versions for
for which
which remote
remote update
update is
is enabled
enabled can
can only
only be
be selected.
selected.
a. CDS
a. CDS Remote
Remote Update
Update (download
(download and
and update
update in
in conjunction
conjunction with
with UGW)
UGW)
By registering
By registering delivery
delivery schedule
schedule and
and update
update settings
settings on
on aa device
device which
which is
is an
an imagePRESS
imagePRESS Series
Series device
device and
and uses
uses UGW
UGW in
in
advance, full
advance, full remote
remote firmware
firmware updates
updates will
will be
be achieved.
achieved. The
The device
device downloads
downloads firmware
firmware updates
updates from
from CDS
CDS and
and then
then updates
updates
the firmware
the firmware with
with the
the acquired
acquired firmware
firmware updates.
updates.
The management
The management department
department will
will announce
announce when
when the
the implementation
implementation of
of this
this method
method starts.
starts.
310
2. Technical
Explanation
1) Set up customers,
dev
device types, distribution
on
sch
schedule and the
3) Give a firmware distribution UGW com
command ad
for download Sales Company
command to e-RDS. / Partner
UGW Operator
Notify di
2) Notify distribution
e-RDS inform
inf ormati
ation to CDS.
information
4) Download
firmware
CDS [ Canon Inc.
Firmware Upload
Updater Firmware
;•mw;
Writin process is
5) Writing
ted upon
automatically started
download completed.
b. CDS
b. CDS Remote
Remote Download
Download (download
(download in
in conjunction
conjunction with
with UGW)
UGW)
By registering
By registering delivery
delivery schedule
schedule and
and update
update settings
settings on
on a
a device
device which
which is
is an
an imagePRESS
imagePRESS Series
Series device
device and
and uses
uses UGW
UGW in in
advance, firmware
advance, firmware updates
updates can
can be
be delivered
delivered before
before the
the service
service technician
technician visits
visits the
the customer.
customer. This
This makes
makes itit possible
possible for
for the
the
service technician
service technician to
to check
check the
the status
status of
of the
the device
device and
and then
then manually
manually update
update firmware
firmware when
when he/she
he/she visits
visits the
the customer.
customer.
1) Set up customers, re—

3) Give a firmware distribution UGW device types, distribution Sales Company
command to e-ROS. schedule and the / Partner
command for download
2) Notify distribution UGW Operator

㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿
4) Download -
-or information to CDS.
firmware
-*? firmware CDS Canon Inc.
Firmware Upload
㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑㼞
Updater Firmware
Service 5) Writing process is started by

Technician manually executing Updater.
c. CDS
c. CDS On-site
On-site Download
Download (manual
(manual download
download and
and update)
update)
For a
For a device
device which
which is
is an
an imagePRESS
imagePRESS Series
Series device
device and
and is
is connected
connected to
to an
an external
external network,
network, the
the service
service technician
technician can
can download
download
firmware updates
firmware updates and
and update
update firmware
firmware using
using service
service mode.
mode. This
This makes
makes itit possible
possible for
for the
the service
service technician
technician to
to update
update firmware
firmware
without using
without using a
a PC
PC when
when itit is
is necessary
necessary to
to update
update firmware
firmware when
when he/she
he/she visits
visits the
the customer.
customer.
1) Manually execute
Updater. Canon Inc.
CDS Firmware Upload
Fir
Updater <
Updater
Firmware
2) Firmware
distribution
Service
Technician
NOTE:
An external network refers to a network which connects this machine and CDS via the Internet.
d. CDS
d. CDS Scheduled
Scheduled Update
Update Method
Method (UGW-linked
(UGW-linked Periodical
Periodical Download
Download and
and Periodical
Periodical Update)
Update)
For devices
For devices with
with an
an update
update function
function using
using UGW,
UGW, scheduled
scheduled update
update settings can be
settings can be made
made from
from UGW.
UGW. IfIf scheduled
scheduled update
update settings
settings
are registered
are registered on
on UGW
UGW in
in advance,
advance, Updater
Updater of
of the
the device
device will
will periodically
periodically and
and automatically
automatically update
update firmware.
firmware.
311
2. Technical
Explanation
㼁㻳㼃
G 6DOHV&RPSDQ\
㻠㻕㻌㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼠㼞㼡㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
4) e-RDS checks the instruction 㻞㻕㻌㻿㼏㼔㼑㼐㼡㼘㼑㼐㻌㼡㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
2) Scheduled update 3DUWQHU
㼠㼛㻌㼐㼕㼟㼠㼞㼕㼎㼡㼠㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚
to distribute the firmware. 㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟㻌
< settings
㼁㻳㼃㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻟㻕㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼒㼥㻌㼐㼕㼟㼠㼞㼕㼎㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
3) Notify distribution
㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿
㼕㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼠㼛㻌㻯㻰㻿㻚
information to CDS.
㻡㻕㻌㻼㼑㼞㼕㼛㼐㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㼒㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌
5) Periodical firmware
㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐
download 㻯㻰㻿'
Oar 11/
&DQRQ,QF
Devices
Devices with
with 㻝㻕㻌㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼘㼛㼍㼐
1) Firmware Upload
update
update function 㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑㼞
th,tratar jo
㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑
㻢㻕㻌㼃㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼟㼟㻌㼕㼟
6) Writing process is
㼍㼡㼠㼛㼙㼍㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㼘㼥㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼡㼜㼛㼚
automatically started upon
㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚
download completed.
e.
e. Update
Update using
using SST
SST (Service
(Service Support
Support Tool)
Tool)
For a
For a device
device which
which is
is an
an imagePRESS
imagePRESS Series
Series device
device and
and is
is not
not connected
connected to to an
an external
external network,
network, firmware
firmware updates
updates cannot
cannot be
be
delivered using any
delivered using any of
of the
the 44 methods
methods explained
explained above.
above. Firmware updates to
Firmware updates to be
be released from now
released from now on
on is
is scheduled
scheduled to
to be
be delivered
delivered
via CDS,
via CDS, instead
instead of
of distributing master CD
distributing master CD as
as before.
before. In
In the
the field,
field, itit is
is possible
possible to
to download
download firmware
firmware updates
updates from
from CDS
CDS with
with the
the
Web browser
Web browser on
on a
a PC
PC and
and soso on.
on.
CDS Canon Inc.

Firmware Upload
Firmware
...1
O ,1)
1) Download
Sales Company
... Sales Company
Download firmware
Downlo firmware to PC.
2) Update via SST.

S / Partner
Service technicians download

firmware firstly from CDS to
update it via SST. 1° Service Technician
."
NOTE:
By introducing CDS, firmware updates can be delivered using the following 4 methods.
For details, refer to the e-Manual.
Delivery meth- Download

Download Update
Update Versions which
Versions which can
can be
be delivered
delivered
od
od instructed from
instructed from timing Older than
Older than Same as
Same as Newer than
the current
the current the current
the current the current
the current
CDS on-site Local UI/Remote Automatic No No Yes*1
download UI Manual No No Yes*1
Periodical down- Local UI/Remote Scheduled No No Yes*1
load UI
(Periodical down-
load and update
set up on site)
Special download Remote UI - Limited versions only
and update (separately acquired)
using remote UI
Local CDS on-site DFU*2 Automatic ×
x ×
x Yes*1
download
*1: Latest versions for which remote update is enabled can only be selected.
*1:
*2: iW EMC/iW MC Device Firmware Update Plug-in
*2:
■ Installing System
• Installing System Option
Option
The following
The following is
is the
the installation
installation method
method of
of system
system option
option which
which is
is enabled
enabled by
by applying
applying CDS.
CDS.
312
2. Technical
Explanation
a. LMS-linked
LMS-linked System
System Option
Option Installation
Installation
If an imagePRESS-series
If an device is
imagePRESS-series device is connected
connected to
to the
the external
external network,
network, user
user can
can gain
gain access
access to
to CDS
CDS from
from [Settings/Registration]
[Settings/Registration]
to install
to install a
a system
system option.
option.
Sales Company
tJ LMS
LAN LAN
5) Manuals, etc. 2) License

User Authentication
LAN
Manual
CDS 3) Create LF
Upload
1) Enter LAN
1- Canon
CanonInc.
Inc.
4) Transmit LF
Application
LAN: License Access Number

If a customer enters LAN
LF: License File
purchased from the sales company
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
to the device, a LF can be installed.
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
■
• System
System Configuration
Configuration
The system
The system configuration
configuration when
when using
using CDS
CDS is
is shown
shown below.
below.
MEAP application
MEAP
ti
User .44. • • • Dealer
Dealer • LMS Manual
Sales
Internet
Company
License 1116***4 Manual
Manual
Access No. Readme
CDS
Application/License
Updater Business
Firmware Application Group
eRDS Firmware
UGW
QA
Service Command for Firmware Distribution
Technician
Canon Inc.
■ List of
• List of Functions
Functions
The matrix
The matrix below
below shows
shows the
the list
list of
of functions
functions provided
provided by
by Updater.
Updater.
Category
Category Function
Function Service Mode
Service Mode [Settings/
[Settings/ Remote UI
Remote UI UGW-
UGW-
Registra-
Registra- linked
linked
tion]
tion]
Firmware Checking firmware compatibility Yes
Yes -- -- --
Checking special firmware Yes
Yes -- -- --
Checking latest firmware version -- Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
Registering/deleting firmware
Registering/deleting firmware distribution
distribution Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
schedule
schedule
Confirming and downloading firmware Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Updating downloaded
Updating downloaded firmware
firmware Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
Cancelling downloaded firmware Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
Acquiring firmware distribution information reg- -- -- -- Yes
Yes
istered from
istered from UGW
UGW
Notifying firmware version information - -- -- Yes
Yes
System option
System option Inquiring license for system option -- Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
Installing system
Installing system option
option -- Yes
Yes Yes
Yes -
System Management
System Management Settings
Settings Yes
Yes -- -- --
Testing communications
Testing communications Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes --
313
2. Technical
Explanation
Category
Category Function
Function Service Mode
Service Mode [Settings/ Remote
[Settings/ Remote UI
UI UGW-
UGW-
Registra-
Registra- linked
tion]
tion]
System Management Displaying update logs Yes Yes Yes -
Displaying system logs Yes Yes Yes -
Internal system error noti- Notifying internal system error occurrence to Yes Yes Yes Yes
fication distribution server
■
• Distribution Flow
●
• Firmware Installation Flow
Service technicians
Service technicians provide
provide firmware
firmware install
install services
services in
in the
the following
following 5
5 methods.
methods.
a: UGW-linked
a: UGW-linked download
download and
and update
update
b: UGW-linked download
b: UGW-linked download
c: Manual
c: Manual download
download and
and update
update
d: UGW-linked periodical
d: UGW-linked periodical download
download and
and periodical
periodical update
update
e: Update
e: Update using
using SST
SST
r
: Operator of each company ■ : User operation
Firmware
Market Release
㼐
a 㼑
b
c 1 L
UGW setting 1
or distribution
for dstribution Firmware acquisition Register the firmware 1
(UGW-linked}"?
(UGW-linked)*1 I in the Local CDS I
1
V •
Distribution setting & Distribution setting & I Distribution setting & I Executing the task I
Download I Download I Download I from
Scheduled downbad
Scheduled download Automatic download Download via SST from Device Firmware!
Firmware
Via Service mode Via Via
Update Plug-in I
(Local UI) Settings/Registration Settings/Registration I
(Local UI) (Remote UI) ..
L
—— ,
Apply (Update)
(Update) Apply (Update) I I Apply
Apply (Update) (Update) I
Apply (Update)
Automa c update
Automatic update Via Service mode Via 1 Via I Update via SST
Scheduled update Automatic update
(Local UI) !Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration I ISettings/Registration I
(Local UI) I IL (Remote UI) I
L -
*1: Schedules
*1: Schedules for
for UGW-linked
UGW-linked distribution
distribution are
are maintained
maintained on
on CDS.
CDS.
● System Option
• System Option Installation
Installation Flow
Flow
System option
System option installation
installation method
method using
using service
service mode
mode is
is not
not provided.
provided. Be
Be sure
sure to
to use
use the
the [Settings/Registration]
[Settings/Registration] to
to install.
install.
314
2. Technical
Explanation
: Operator of each company : User operation
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Device Serial No.

Acquisition
(from the device)
License Key License File

Acquisition Acquisition
(from LMS) (from LMS)
Install Install distributed System Option System Option

application Install Manual Install
Via
Via Via Via
(Local UI) Settings/Registration Settings/Registration Settings/Registration
(Remote UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)
Limitationsand
0 Limitations andCautions
Cautions
■ Limitations
• Limitations
Changing Date/Time on
Changing DatelTime on Device
Device
When a
When a user
user changes
changes the
the date/time
date/time setting
setting on
on the
the device
device (including
(including change of the
change of the setting
setting according
according to
to daylight
daylight saving
saving time),
time), the
the
firmware distribution
firmware distribution may
may not
not bebe performed
performed asas scheduled.
scheduled.
But there
But there is
is not
not the
the problem
problem ifif itit is
is time
time adjustment
adjustment ofof several
several minutes
minutes with NTP servers.
with NTP servers.
Change
Change of
of Setting
Setting from Service mode
from Service mode
Any settings
Any settings from
from Service
Service mode
mode will
will be
be enabled
enabled after
after restarting
restarting the
the device.
device.
■
• Cautions
Cautions
Concurrent
Concurrent use
use of
of Updater
Updater functions
functions
Multiple users
Multiple users cannot
cannot use
use Updater
Updater functions
functions on
on a
a device
device concurrently
concurrently by
by using
using itit together
together with
with Remote
Remote UI.
UI.
Coexistence
Coexistence of
of Remote
Remote UI
UI and
and other
other tools
tools
Users logged
Users logged in
in SMS
SMS (Service
(Service Management
Management Service)
Service) are
are unable
unable to
to use
use Update
Update functions
functions from
from Remote
Remote UI.
UI.
Using Updater
Using Updater function
function from
from Remote
Remote UI
UI
Upon the
Upon the following
following operations
operations done,
done, Updater
Updater functions
functions are
are suspended
suspended fromfrom Remote
Remote UI UI for
for certain
certain duration.
duration.
•• When
When a a user
user exits
exits Web
Web browser
browser without
without clicking
clicking [Portal]
[Portal] or
or [Log
[Log Out]
Out] button
button in
in the
the setting
setting of
of Remote
Remote Login
Login Service
Service via
via SMS
SMS
•• When
When a a user
user exits
exits Web
Web browser
browser without
without clicking
clicking [Portal]
[Portal] button
button in
in the
the setting
setting of
of not
not to
to use
use Remote
Remote Login
Login Service
Service via
via SMS.
SMS.
•• When
When a a user
user exits
exits Web
Web browser
browser without
without clicking
clicking [Log
[Log out
out from
from SMS]
SMS] oror [To
[To Remote
Remote UI]UI] button.
button.
Wait for
Wait for EOJ
EOJ (end
(end of
of job)
job) Function
Function
Firmware update
Firmware update will
will be
be triggered
triggered only
only after
after the
the following
following jobs
jobs are
are completed.
completed.
This is
This is the
the Updater-specific
Updater-specific specification.
specification.
Job/Function type
Job/Function type Receiving Printing Queued print
Queued print jobs
jobs Sending Queued send
Queued send jobs
jobs
COPY - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
PRINT Wait for EOJ (end of Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
job)
I-FAX Receipt Cancel processing to Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
trigger update *
Report Print - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
SEND - - - Cancel processing to Cancel processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
315
2. Technical
Explanation
*The data
*The data are
are guaranteed
guaranteed even
even ifif cut
cut off
off in
in the
the middle
middle ofof a
a job.It becomes the
job.lt becomes the recovery
recovery object
object after
after the
the device
device reboot
reboot and
and carry
carry
out send
out send // reception
reception again.
again.
Even during
Even during transfer,
transfer, Pull
Pull SCAN
SCAN job job processing
processing is is cancelled
cancelled soon
soon after
after scanning
scanning is is completed.
completed.
Firmware update
Firmware update isis cancelled
cancelled ifif the
the jobs
jobs are
are not
not completed
completed within
within 10
10 minutes.
minutes. IfIf this
this occurs,
occurs, the
the error
error code,
code, 8x001106,
8x001106, will
will be
be
returned (different
returned (different numbers
numbers will
will bebe shown
shown forfor xx depending
depending on on the
the execution
execution modes).
modes).
Firmware update
Firmware update isis executed
executed ifif the
the jobs
jobs stated
stated above
above are
are not
not in
in the
the queue.
queue.
Follow the
Follow the shutdown
shutdown sequence
sequence to to reboot
reboot the
the device
device after
after the
the firmware
firmware is is updated.
updated.
Preparation
Preparation
■
• Preparation
Preparation
The following
The following preparations
preparations are
are required
required to
to upgrade
upgrade the
the firmware
firmware using
using the
the Updater.
Updater.
Distribution
Distribution Settings
Settings of
of Network set- Enabling Enabling the Enabling the Enabling enabling the
name Vice-Com-
Vice-Com- tings
tings linkage with [Update Firm- [Manual Up-
[Manual Up- scheduled
scheduled Local CDS
Local CDS
pany of
pany of UGW
UGW ware] button
ware] button in
in date]
date] button
button update (*1)
update (*1) button
button
Sales
Sales the
the [Settings/
[Settings/ on the
on the remote
remote
Registration]
Registration] UI
UI
menu
menu
CDS remote update 1 1 1 - - - -
method
CDS remote down- 1 1 1 - - - -
load method
CDS on-site down- 1 1 - - - - -
load method
CDS scheduled up- 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
date method
CDS on-site down- 1 1 - 1 - - -
load method by lo-
cal UI
CDS on-site down- 1 1 - 1 - - -
load method by re-
mote UI
Special download 1 - - -- ✓
1 - --
and update using
remote UI
Local CDS update - - - / - - 1
method
*1: It
*1: It is
is required
required when
when configuring
configuring the
the schedule
schedule update
update setting
setting from
from the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
■
• Settings
Settings of
of Vice-Company
Vice-Company of
of Sales
Sales
With devices
With devices sold
sold in
in the
the following
following countries/regions,
countries/regions, itit is
is necessary
necessary to
to change
change thethe settings
settings ofof vice-company
vice-company of
of sales
sales from
from the
the
default setting in
default setting in order
order to
to use
use the
the CDS
CDS firmware
firmware distribution.
distribution. Be
Be sure
sure to
to do
do this
this because
because ifif the
the necessary
necessary changes
changes are
are not
not made,
made,
itit may
may not
not be
be possible
possible to
to select
select the
the target
target firmware.
firmware.
Country/region of
Country/region of sale
sale Default setting
Default setting of
of the
the sales
sales company
company Change the
Change the setting
setting of
of the
the sales
sales company
company to:
to:
Canada US CA
Latin America US/SG LA
Hong Kong SG HK
Change the
Change the settings
settings of
of the
the vice-company
vice-company of
of sales
sales in
in the
the following
following service
service mode.
mode.
FUNCTION >> INSTALL
COPIER > FUNCTION INSTALL > CDS-CTL
316
2. Technical
Explanation
NOTE:
NOTE:
The settings
The settings of
of the
the vice-company
vice-company of
of sales
sales in
in CDS-CTL
CDS-CTL for
for each
each country/region
country/region is
is shown
shown below.
below. If
If the
the setting
setting is
is different,
different, change
change
itit to
to the
the following
following setting.
setting.
List of
List of CDS-CTL
CDS-CTL setting
setting values
values and
and the
the target
target vice-company
vice-company of
of sales
sales
Japan:
Japan: JP
JP China: CN
China: CN Canada: CA
Canada: CA Singapore: SG
Singapore: SG Latin America: LA
USA: US
USA: US Hong Kong: HK Korea: KR Europe: NL Australia: AU
■
■Network
Network Settings
Settings
● Connecting to
• Connecting to External
External Network
Network
The method
The method ofof connecting
connecting to
to external
external network
network is
is similar
similar to
to a
a normal
normal network
network connection
connection method.
method. Refer
Refer to
to user
user manual
manual of
of the
the
device
device for
for details.
details.
NOTE:
NOTE:
"External Network"
"External Network" here
here means
means the
the network
network connecting
connecting the
the device
device to
to CDS
CDS via
via Internet.
Internet.
●
• Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section
This section describes
describes how
how to
to confirm
confirm the URL setting
the URL setting of
of the
the distribution
distribution server.
server.
1. Start
1. Start [Service
[Service Mode].
Mode].
2. Press
2. Press [Updater]
[Updater] button.
button.
Service Mode
Ilease Select Service Mode Menu.

It ii
Mode List BACKUP
117119
` Updater
.
111°I
IT
AT
1
3. Press [Software
3. Press [Software Management
Management Settings]
Settings] button.
button.
<Register/Update Software Menu>
Update Firmware
Software Management Settings
End
M Remote Operation is being used...
317
2. Technical
Explanation
4. Press
4. [Settings] button.
Press [Settings] button.
<Software Management Settings>
Settings
Select Log Display
Test Communication
sl Back to Menu
_ System Management Mode
5.
5. Ensure
Ensure to
to enter
enter "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"
"https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif" in
in the
the field
field beside the[Delivery
beside the [Delivery Server
ServerURL]
URL]
button.
button.
IfIfthe
the URL
URLisisnot
notentered
entered or
or a wrong URL
a wrong URL isis entered in the
entered in the field,
field, click
click [Delivery
[DeliveryServer
Server URL]
URL]button
buttonto
toshow
show the
the virtual
virtual keypad.
keypad.
Check the
Check URL and
the URL and enter
enter the
the correct
correct one.
one.
■
<Software Management Settings: Set>
Delivery
https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_sc
Server URL
T og Level 0
X Cancel OK
al System Management Mode
6. Press
6. Press[OK]
[OK] to
to set the entered
set the entered items.
items.
Now
Now the
the URL
URL of
ofthe
the distribution
distributionserver
serveris
is successfully
successfully set.
set.
● Communication Test
• Communication Test
This section
This describeshow
section describes how to
to check
checkifif the
the communication
communication is
is normally
normally done to the
done to distribution server
the distribution server and/or
and/or the file server.
the file server.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Since CDS
Since CDS and Embedded RDS
and Embedded RDS are
are different
different servers,
servers, even if an
even if an Embedded
Embedded RDS
RDS communication
communicationtest
testsucceeds,
succeeds, a CDS
a CDS
communication test
communication test needs to be
needs to be performed.
performed.
1. Start
1. Start [Service
[Service Mode].
Mode].
318
2. Technical
Explanation
2. Press
2. [Updater] button.
Press [Updater] button.
II'
Service Mode
Mode List I BACKUP I
Updater
3.
Press [Software Management Settings] button.
Settings] button.
Register/Update Software Menu>
Update Firmware
End
Remote Operation is being used...
4. Press
4. [Test Communication]
Press [Test Communication] button.
button.
Settings
Select Log Display I
Test Communication
Back to Menu
System Management Mode
319
319
2. Technical
Explanation
5. Press [Yes]
5. Press [Yes] button.
button.
fh RA *
<Test Communication>
Do you want to test communication?
E Yes No
1_.„1 System Management Mode Log Out
Obtain the
Obtain the download
download file
file information
information for
for communication
communication test
test from
from the
the distribution
distribution server
server (to
(to execute
execute the
the communication
communication test test
to the
to the distribution
distribution server).
server).
Using the
Using the download
download file
file information
information for
for communication
communication test,
test, the
the contents
contents for
for test
test are
are downloaded from the
downloaded from the file
file server
server (for
(for the
the
communication test
communication test to
to the
the file
file server).
server).
6. Upon
6. Upon the
the communication
communication test
test completed,
completed, the
the communication
communication test
test result
result screen
screen is
is shown.
shown.
Press [OK]
Press [OK] button
button to
to exit
exit this
this operation.
operation.
Delivery Server ▪ Connect OK

File Server ▪ Retrieve OK
Communication Speed 881 KB/sec
Retry Times 0 Times
OK 4.1
_ j System Management Mode Log Out
■
■Enabling UGW Link
To execute
To execute [UGW-linked
[UGW-linked Download
Download and
and Update]
Update] or
or [UGW-linked
[UGW-linked Download]
Download] when
when installing
installing the
the firmware,
firmware, the
the service
service technician
technician
must specify
must specify the
the following
following settings
settings to
to link
link with
with UGW
UGW inin advance.
advance.
1.
1. Set "1" in the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
2. Specify
2. Specify "Set"
"Set" for
for the
the following
following settings.
settings.
[Firmware Distribution]
[Firmware Distribution] on
on the
the [Customer
[Customer Management]
Management] screen
screen of
of the
the UGW
UGW WebPortal
WebPortal settings
settings
NOTE:
•• See "imageWARE Remote Operator's
Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation Manual" for how to operate UGW
WebPortal.
•• [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge of setting for [Enter customer
information] or [Command
information] [Command forfirmware
for firmwaredistribution]
distribution]ininorder
orderto
to allow
allow them
them to select the desired device on [Firmware
[Firmware Distribution
Distribution
Information] screen.
•• If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not
be set to each account in Firmware Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
■ Enabling the
■Enabling the [Update
[Update Firmware]
Firmware] Button
Button in
in the
[Settings/Registration] Menu
Menu
Setting this
Setting this service
service mode
mode enables/disables
enables/disables the
the [Update
[Update Firmware]
Firmware] button
button in
in the
[Settings/Registration] menu
menu so
so that
that whether
whether or
or
not to
not to permit
permit firmware
firmware installation
installation by
by users
users using
using Updater
Updater can
can be
be set.
set.
Set "1"
Set "1" when
when enabling
enabling the
the [Update
[Update Firmware]
Firmware] button
button and
and set
set "0"
"0" when
when disabling
disabling it.
it.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
320
320
2. Technical
Explanation
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the [Update
[Update Firmware]
Firmware] button
button is
is enabled
enabled (setting
(setting value:
value: "1")
"1")
rD eLinn
Update Firmware
Software Management rigs
End
• System Management mode. ,'T-

e1 ) Lag out
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the [Update
[Update Firmware]
Firmware] button
button is
is disabled
disabled (setting
(setting value:
value: "0")
"0")
ID a.11THn
■ System Management mode. IV. Log Out
■
■Enabling the [Application/Option Installation] Button
By changing
By changing the the following
following service
service mode,
mode, whether
whether or
or not
not to
to display
display the
the button
button for
for installing
installing applications
applications for
for users
users (system
(system option,
option,
etc.) in
etc.) in the
menu can
can be
be set.
set. When
When the
the setting
setting value
value is
is "0",
"0", the
the button
button is
is hidden
hidden whereas
whereas when
when the
the value
value
is "1",
is "1", it
it is
is displayed.
displayed.
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP
•• Example
Example of of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the setting
setting is
is "1"
"1" (enabled)
(enabled)
Fp admen
W /Update Software Menu>
Install Applications/Options
Update Firmware
Scheduled Update
.,-, On
End
In System Management mode (ff) t . Log Out
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the setting
setting is
is "0"
"0" (disabled)
(disabled)
Update Firmware
Scheduled Update
Q On
End
• System Management mode. tt, Len Out
■
■Enabling the [Manual Update] Menu on Remote UI
By changing
By changing the
the following
following service
service mode,
mode, whether
whether or
or not
not to
to permit
permit firmware
firmware installation
installation by
by users
users can
can be
be set.
set.
321
2. Technical
Explanation
Set "1"
Set "1" for
for permitting
permitting the
the firmware
firmwareinstallation
installationbybyusers
users by
by enabling
enabling [Manual
[ManualUpdate]
Update] menu
menu onon the
the remote UI, and
remote UI, set "0"
and set "0" for
for not
not
permitting it.
permitting it.
When it
When it is
is enabled, [Manual Update]
enabled, [Manual Update] menu
menu isis displayed
displayed in
in [Settings/Registration]
[Settings/Registration] menu of the
menu of remote UI.
the remote UI.
COPIER >> OPTION
COPIER OPTION >> FNC-SW
FNC-SW>>LOCLFIRM
LOCLFIRM
•• Example
Example of of the
the Remote
Remote UI UI of
of Updater
Updater when [Manual Update]
when [Manual Update] menu is displayed
menu is displayed by
by enabling
enabling itit
To Portal Login User: Administrator Log Out
(if) Register/Update Software
Device Serial Number: ZZZ99999
It License/Other
Imtall Application/Option
Manual Update
Distributed Installation
Next >
Manual Installation
Option File Name:
MEAP Application
Update firmware
Distributed Update
Manual Update
Software Management ngs
Display Logs/Communication Test
Application Settings
Scheduled Update Settings
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
•• Example
Example of
of the Remote UI
the Remote UI of
of Updater when [Manual
Updater when [Manual Update]
Update] menu is hidden
menu is hidden by
by disabling
disabling it
it
To Portal Login User: Administrator Log Out
CX-) Register/Update Software
Device Serial Number: ZZZ99999
I-License/Other Update Firmware', Distributed Update
Install Application/Option Distributed Update Updated:04/21/2016 7:13:45AM ft4
Distributed Installation
Confirm New firmware
Manual Installation
Update Information
IR Option
Update Status: No Distributed Apply Frame,
Information
MEAP Application
Delete Frrrmare
Update Hrrmanre
Distributed Update I
software Management SeUesgs
Display Logs/Communication Test
Application Settings
Scheduled Update Settings
Copyright CANON 91(.2015
NOTE:
NOTE:
In
In order
order to
to use manual update
use manual update of
of the
the remote
remoteUI,
UI, firmware
firmware for
for manual
manual update
update is
is required.
required.
For
For regions
regions where firmware update
where firmware update by by users is not
users is not supported,
supported, manual
manual firmware
firmware update
update function
function cannot be used
cannot be usedeven
evenifif [Manual
[Manual
Update]
Update] menu
menu onon the remote UI
the remote UI isis enabled.
enabled.
■
• Enabling
Enabling the
the [Scheduled Update] button
[Scheduled Update] button in
in the
the [Settings/Registration] menu
Setting this
Setting this service
service mode
mode enables to change
enables to change whether
whether to
to display
display or
or hide
hide the
the scheduled update setting
scheduled update setting button
button for
for users.
users.
Set "1"
Set "1" to
to display
display itit on
on the
the Updater
Updater in
in service
service mode and [Settings/Registration]
mode and [Settings/Registration] menu.
menu. Set
Set"0"
"0" not
not to
to display
display it
it on
on neither
neither of
of them.
them.
When this
When this setting
setting isis enabled,
enabled, the
the button
button for
for setting
settingscheduled
scheduled update
update is
is displayed
displayed and
and ON/OFF
ON/OFFof ofscheduled
scheduled update
update and
and update
update
schedule can
schedule can be
be set.
set.
COPIER >> OPTION
COPIER OPTION > > FNC-SW
FNC-SW >> CDS-LVUP
CDS-LVUP
322
2. Technical
Explanation
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the setting
setting value
value is
is "1"
"1"
RI admire
<Scheduled Update>
On Off MA° Prelate er to tuned Off

▪ = Update
dn. all scheduled del series
Settings are sert.
• Update Schedule It may akc up to 3 hours to fnish eteeklre for updatGa
Confirm Biweekly Mon 6 .00 [k

II I
(0 20)
Update Firmware
Scheduled Update undated are annn=d arer-.rrrlm~rinn Fred
Apply at 00 [fik
0 On (0-23
Software Management Settings 1

Comments
If you consent that your email address is transferred

to Canon Inc In Japan to receive notices. please register
Cancel OK
II System Management mode. [ CP Log Out II System Management mode. r, tog Ott
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the setting
setting value
value is
is "0"
"0"
Update Firmware
■ Enabling the
• Enabling the Firmware
Firmware Update
Update Using
Using Local
Local CDS
CDS
By changing
By changing the
the following
following service
service mode
mode setting,
setting, firmware
firmware update
update function
function using
using the
the local
local CDS
CDS cancan be
be enabled.
enabled.
Set "1
Set "1 when
when enabling
enabling thethe firmware
firmware update
update function
function using
using the
the local
local CDS,
CDS, and
and set
set "0"
"0" when
when disabling
disabling the
the function.
function.
When the
When the function
function isis enabled,
enabled, the
the local
local CDS
CDS setting
setting button
button [Connected Server Setting]
[Connected Server Setting] is
is displayed
displayed so
so ON/OFF
ON/OFF of of the
the local
local CDS
CDS
connection or
connection or setting
setting of
of connection
connection destination
destination server
server can
can be
be configured.
configured.
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LCDSFLG
•• Example
Example of of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the firmware
firmware update
update function
function using
using the
the local
local CDS
CDS isis enabled
enabled (setting
(setting value:
value: "1")
"1")
■ admen ■ Amin
<Software Management Settings> <Software Mngt. Settings Connection Server Sett ngs>
Connection Server
Settings
cos Local COS

Select Log Display
• Server Inn
Local CDS
Test Communication
Server UHL
el
II Back to Menu Cancel OK
II System Management mode. ( P) Log Out le System Management mode . cP Log Out
•• Example
Example of
of the
the Updater
Updater screen
screen when
when the
the firmware
firmware update
update function
function using
using the
the local
local CDS
CDS is
is disabled
disabled (setting
(setting value:
value: "0")
"0")
Bb admm 4`•
Select Lug Display
Test Communication
Apple cation Settings
Al Back to Menu
gem III (gl) Log Out
323
323
2. Technical
Explanation
0 System Management Operations

System Management Operations
■ Various Setting
■ Various Setting
● Setting URL
• Setting URL of
of Distribution
Distribution Server
Server
This section
This describes how
to set
setURL
URL of
of the
the distribution
distribution server.
server.
1. Start
1. Start [Service Mode].
[Service Mode].
2. Press
3.
Settings] button.
Update Firmware
End
Remote Operation is being used...
4. Press
4. [Settings] button.
Press [Settings] button.
Settings
Select Log Display
Test Communication
Back to Menu
System Management Mode Log Out
5.
5. Press [Delivery Server
Press [Delivery Server URL]
URL] to show the
to show thevirtual
virtual keypad.
keypad.Enter
Enter the
theURL.
URL.
•• [Delivery
[Delivery Server
Server URL]:
URL]:Enter
Enterthe
the"https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif".
"https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif".
<Software Management Settings: Set> Delivery Server URL (Max 512 characters)
ht tps: //device. c- cdsknn. net /cds_soap/updat erit
Backspace Alphanum. I
4.VI t
Delivery
https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_sc
Server URL rl
I
y ,±]
• s d f g
• Log Level 0
@ z
Shift I Space
X Cancel OK X Cancel OK
System Management Mode Log Ou I al Remote Operation is being used...
6. Press[OK]
6. Press [OK] to
to set the entered
set the entered items.
items.
Now
Now the
the URL
URL of
ofthe
the distribution
distributionserver
serveris
is successfully
successfully set.
set.
● Setting Log
• Setting Log Level
Level
This section
This section describes how to
describes how to set system log
set system log levels.
levels.
1. Start
1. Start [Service
[Service Mode].
Mode].
324
2. Technical
Explanation
Press [Updater]
2. Press [Updater] button.
button.
3. Press
3. Press [Software
[Software Management
Settings] button.
button.
Update Firmware
End
MI Remote Operation is being used...
Press [Settings]
4. Press [Settings] button.
button.
Settings
rl
Select Log Display
Test Communication
Back to Menu
5. Select aa log
5. Select log level
level from
from [Log
[Log Level]
Level] dropdown
dropdown list.
list.
<Software Management Settings: Set> <Software Management Settings: Set>
Delivery Delivery
https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_sc cds_sc
Server URL Server URL
• Log Level
X Cancel OK
a System Management Mode B System Management Mode
[Log Level]:
Select one
Select one of
of 5
5 levels
levels ranging
ranging from
from [0]
[0] to
to [4].
[4].
See the
See the table
table below
below for
for logs
logs output
output in
in each
each level.
level.
Log Level Log Output

Log Output
Trace
Trace Information Important Mes-
Important Mes- Ordinary Error System
System Error
Error
sage
sage
0 - - - - Yes
1
1 - - - Yes Yes
2 - - Yes Yes Yes
3 - Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
325
325
2. Technical
Explanation
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output Description

AIL Description
Trace Detailed logs for debug
Information Logs related to operations done on the system
Important Message Update logs output by firmware type
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors
System Error Logs for internal system errors
6. Press
6. Press [OK]
[OK] button
button to
to set
set the
the selected
selected log
log level.
level.
Now the
Now the log
log level
level is
is successfully
successfully set.
set.
■
■ Displaying
Displaying Logs
Logs
●
• Update Logs
This section
This section describes
describes how
how to
to confirm
confirm System
System Option
Option Installation
Installation Logs
Logs and
and Firmware
Firmware Update
Update Logs.
Logs.
1. Start
1. Start [Service
[Service Mode].
Mode].
Press [Updater]
2. Press [Updater] button.
button.
3. Press
3. Press [Software
[Software Management
Settings] button.
button.
Update Firmware
End
161
A CZ' Remote Operation is being used...
Press [Select
4. Press [Select Log
Log Display]
Display] button.
button.
Settings
rl
Select Log Display
Test Communication
Back to Menu
326
2. Technical
Explanation
5.
5. Press [Display Update
Press [Display Update Logs]
Logs] button.
button.
<Select Log Display>
Display Update Logs
Display System Logs
Back
Ilia System Management Mode Log Out
6. System Option
6. System Option Installation
Installation Logs and Firmware
Logs and Firmware Update
Update Logs
Logs are
are shown.
shown.
Press [OK] button
Press [OK] button to
to exit
exit this
this operation.
operation.
<Display Update Logs: Confirm>
[2010/04/28 17:06:25] firm update start [ERR] 0014000

[2010/04/30 09:26:49] firm download start [OK] 001400
[2010/04/30 09:29:22] firm download end [OK] 001400
[2010/04/30 09:29:35] firm update start [OK] 00140009
[2010/04/30 09:56:02] firm update end [OK] 00140009
lk•
OK ,J
a Tj Remote Operation is being used...
● System Logs
• System Logs
This section
This describes how
to confirm
confirm System Logs.
System Logs.
1. Start
[Service Mode].
2. Press
3.
Settings] button.
Update Firmware
End
a al Remote Operation is being used...
327
327
2. Technical
Explanation
4. Press
4. [Select Log
Press [Select Log Display]
Display] button.
button.
Settings
Select Log Display I
Test Communication
A Back to Menu
5.
5. Press [Display System
Press [Display Logs] button.
System Logs] button.
<Select Log Display>
II
Display Update Logs
I Display System Logs
Back
System Management Mode rn

ig .rt
6.
6. Updater
Updater internal
internallogs
logs are
are displayed.
displayed.
Press [OK] button
Press [OK] button to
to exit
exit this
this operation.
operation.
<Display System Logs: Confirm>
[2010/05/06 16:417:25] 4 030005 #1111 Session renew #1111

[2010/05/06 16:417:25] 3 032302 *** [action] SystemLoc
[2010/05/06 16:47:25] 4 030205 [start]2010/05/06 16:4
[2010/05/06 16:47:25] 4 030205 read logfile:0201004300
[2010/05/06 16:47:26] 4 030205 read logfile:0201004300
[2010/05/06 16:47:26] 4 030205 read logfile:5201004300 a.
[2010/05/06 16:47:26] 4 030205 read logfile:5201005061
OK
ifi al Remote Operation is being used... 1=
NOTE:
NOTE:
See the
See thesection
sectionofof"Debug
"DebugLogs"
Logs"under
under"Version
"Version Upgrade
Upgradevia
viaCDS",
CDS", "Version
"Version Upgrade"
Upgrade" of
of Chapter
Chapter 66 "Troubleshooting"
"Troubleshooting" for
for more
more
detailed information.
■
■ Communication
Communication Test
Test
This section
This describeshow
to check
checkifif the
the communication
communication is
is normally
normally done to the
done to distribution server
the distribution server and/or
and/or the file server.
the file server.
1. Start
[Service Mode].
2. Press
328
328
2. Technical
Explanation
3.
Settings] button.
CDSUpdater
Update Firmware
End
4. Press
4. [Test Communication]
Press [Test Communication] button.
button.
Settings
Select Log Display
•
Test Communication
Back to Menu
5. Press[Yes]
5. Press [Yes] button.
button.
Do you want to test communication?
Yes No
Obtain the
Obtain the download
download file
file information
informationforforcommunication
communicationtest
testfrom
fromthe
thedistribution
distributionserver
server(to
(toexecute
execute the
the communication
communication test test
to the
to the distribution
distribution server).
server).
Using
Using the
the download file information
download file informationforforcommunication
communicationtest,
test,the
thecontents
contents for
for test
test are downloaded from
are downloaded from the
the file
file server (for the
server (for the
communication
communication test to the
test to the file
file server).
server).
329
329
2. Technical
Explanation
6. Upon
6. Uponthe
the communication
communication test
test completed,
completed, the
the communication
communication test
test result
result screen
screen is
is shown.
shown.
Press [OK]
Press [OK] button
button to
to exit
exit this
this operation.
operation.
Delivery Server I. Connect OK

File Server I. Retrieve OK
▪ Communication Speed 881 KB/sec
▪ Retry Times 0 Times
i OK ai
_ _j System Management Mode Log Out
NOTE:
Since CDS and Embedded RDS are different servers, even if an Embedded RDS communication test succeeds, a CDS
communication test needs to be performed.
Maintenance
0 Maintenance
■
■Upgrading Updater
The firmware
The firmware installed
installed in
in the
the device
device should
should be
be also
also upgraded
upgraded when
when upgrading
upgrading Updater.
Updater. See
See the
the section
section of
of “Version
"Version upgrade”
upgrade" on
on
page
page 1007
1007 for
for more
more detailed
information.
Setting information
Setting information and
and logs
logs (update
(update logs/system
logs/system logs)
logs) are
are carried
carried over.
over.
■
■Formatting Hard Disk
When formatting
When formatting the
the HDD
HDD or
or replacing
replacing the
the HDD,
HDD, the
the settings
settings initialized
initialized in
in format
format or
or replacement
replacement should
should be
be restored.
restored. See
See the
the
section of “Preparation” on page 316 for more detailed information.
section of "Preparation" on page 316 for more detailed information.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not updated yet) and logs (update/system logs)
will be deleted.
■
■How
How to
to Replace
Replace Controller Boards
Controller Boards
•• Main Controller Board PCB
The network
The network and
and service
service mode
mode setting
setting should
should be
be set
set again
again after
after initialization.
initialization. See
See the
the section
section of
of "Preparation"
“Preparation” on
on page
page 316
316
for more
for more detailed
information.
■
■How
How to
to Replace Devices
Replace Devices
All settings
All settings should
should be
be set
set again
again because
because no
no data
data are
are inherited.
inherited. See
See the
the section
section of
of "Preparation"
“Preparation” on
on page
page 316
316 for
for more
more detailed
detailed
information.
330
2. Technical
Explanation
FAQ
0 FAQ
■
■FAQ on Installing Firmware
Q: Is
Q: Is it
it also
also possible
possible to
to downgrade
downgrade firmware
firmware with
with using
using CDS?
CDS?
A: Firmware
A: can be
Firmware can be downgraded in some
downgraded in some methods
methods shown
shown in
in the
the table
table below.
below. IfIf download
download and
and update
update are
are performed
performed consecutively,
consecutively,
firmware can’t be downgraded.
firmware can't be downgraded.
Distribution Method
Distribution Method Downgrade Possibility
Downgrade Possibility
UGW-linked Download and Update No
UGW-linked Download Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual) Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic) No
UGW-linked Periodical Download and Periodical Update No
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in "manual download and update" compared to
"update via
"update via SST"?
SST"?
A: It
A: It depends
depends onon the
the number
number of of devices
devices to
to update
update firmware.
firmware.
When updating
When updating the
the firmware
firmware onon aa device,
device, itit takes
takes more
more time
time in
in "manual
"manual download
download and
and update"
update" compared
compared to
to "update
"update via
via SST".(It
SST".(lt
depend on network environment)
As for
As for the
the time
time to
to update
update firmware
firmware to to multiple
multiple devices,
devices, "manual
"manual download
download and
and update"
update" takes
takes less
less time
time compared
compared to
to "update
"update via
via
SST" because
SST" because updating
updating the
the firmware
firmware toto multiple
multiple devices
devices can
can be
be executed
executed simultaneously.
simultaneously.
Q: How
Q: How can
can we
we confirm
confirm that
that the
the firmware
firmware is
is properly
properly updated
updated after
after "UGW-linked
"UGW-linked download
download and
and update"
update"
done?
done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to
E-mail to notify
notify firmware
firmware update
update will
will be
be sent
sent from
from CDS
CDS server
server to
to the
the addresses
addresses set
set as
as destinations
destinations at
at the
the time
time of
of distribution
distribution setting
setting
to notify
to notify update
update completion.
completion.
On UGW-linked
On UGW-linked screen,
screen, search
search the
the device
device of
of your
your interest
interest on
on [Select
[Select Device]
Device] screen
screen to
to find
find the
the distribution
distribution status
status per
per device
device as
as
shown in
shown in the
the search
search result.
result.
Q: In
Q: In the
the course
course of
of "UGW-linked
"UGW-linked download",
download", what
what will
will happen
happen if
if the
the user
user downloads
downloads the
the firmware
firmware before
before
the service
the service technician
technician update
update the
the firmware
firmware downloaded
downloaded with
with "UGW-linked
"UGW-linked download"
download" before?
before?
A: The
A: The previously
previously downloaded
downloaded firmware
firmware in
in the
the method
method of
of "UGW-linked
"UGW-linked download"
download" will
will be
be overridden
overridden by
by the
the subsequently
subsequently
downloaded
downloaded one.one.
This is
This is because
because only
only one
one downloaded
downloaded firmware
firmware can
can be
be held
held on
on the
the device.
device.
The firmware downloaded in the method of "Service mode-linked download"
The firmware downloaded in the method of "Service mode-linked download" and
and "UGWlinked
"UGWlinked download"
download" can
can be
be checked/deleted
checked/deleted
from [Settings/Registration] screen, but cannot be updated, so it cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the
from [Settings/Registration] screen, but cannot be updated, so it cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service
service
technician.
Q: What
Q: What happens
happens ifif the
the user
user registers
registers another
another distribution
distribution schedule
schedule when
when the
the distribution
schedule
has
has been
been set
set in
in "manual
"manual download
download and
and update"?
update"?
A: The
A: The distribution
schedule subsequently
subsequently registered
registered by
by the
the user
user will
will override
override the
the existing
existing schedule.
schedule. This
This is
is because
because only
only one
one
distribution
schedule can
can be
be held.
held. Any
Any existing
existing distribution
schedule is is deleted
deleted and
and the
the newly
newly registered
registered distribution
schedule is
is
made valid.
made valid.
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?

A: Any
A: Any individual response edition
individual response edition of
of firmware can be
firmware can be installed
installed in
in all
all the
the methods
methods provided
provided by
by service
technicians. Before
Before installing
installing
the individual
the individual response
response edition,
edition, ensure
ensure toto obtain
obtain the
the ID
ID and
and password
password separately.
separately.
Q: If
Q: If the
the device
device is
is down
down during
during firmware
firmware update,
update, can
can the
the device
device be
be started
started using
using the
the older
older firmware
firmware
version?
A: No,
A: No, itit is
is impossible
impossible to
to start
start the
the device
device using
using older
older versions.
versions. If
If this
this occurs,
occurs, the
the service
service technician
technician in
in charge
charge should
should reinstall
reinstall the
the
firmware via
firmware via SST.
SST. See
See the
the section
section of
of "Troubleshooting
"Troubleshooting on
on Firmware
Firmware Installation"
Installation" under
under "Version
"Version Upgrade
Upgrade via
via CDS",
CDS", "Version
"Version
Upgrade" of
Upgrade" of Chapter
Chapter 6
6 "Troubleshooting"
"Troubleshooting" ofof this
this manual
manual for
for more
more detailed
information.
Q: If
Q: If the
the device
device is
is down
down during
during firmware
firmware download,
download, is
is it
it possible
possible to
to download
download the
the firmware
firmware again?
again?
A: Firmware
A: Firmware cannot
cannot bebe downloaded
downloaded again
again automatically.
automatically. Instead,
Instead, the
the error
error is
is notified
notified in
in E-mail.
E-mail. The
The user
user should
should register
register the
the
firmware distribution
firmware distribution schedule
schedule again
again accordingly.
accordingly.
331
2. Technical
Explanation
Q: Can
Q: Can we
we cancel
cancel the
the operation
operation during
during firmware
firmware download?
download?
A: Yes.
A: Yes. [Cancel]
[Cancel] button
button is
is shown.
shown.
Wait a moment.
DO NOT TURN OFF THE POWER.
Updating firmware.
Delivering...
X Cancel
r3 System Management Mode of
Q: E-mail
Q: E-mail is
is sent
sent to
to users
users to
to notify
notify update
update completion.
completion. Can
Can service
service technicians
technicians also
also receive
receive such
such a
a
notification?
A: Yes.
A: Yes. The
The notification
notification E-mail
E-mail is
is also
also set
set for
for the
the service
service technician
technician in
in charge
charge ifif the
the user
user enters
enters his/her
his/her E-mail
E-mail address
address at
at the
the time
time
of firmware
of firmware distribution
distribution setting.
setting.
Multiple E-mail
Multiple addresses can
E-mail addresses can bebe entered
entered inin the
the field.Delimit
field.Delimit each
each E-mail
E-mailaddress
addresswith with ","
"," (comma)
(comma) or
or ";"
";" (semicolon)
(semicolon) when
when youyou
enter multiple E-mail
enter multiple addresses in
E-mail addresses in the
the field.
field.
Q: How
Q: How long
long does
does the
the firmware
firmware update
update take?
take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However,
However, this
this does
does not
not include
include the download time. Download time
time relies
relies on the network
network environment.
332
2. Technical
Explanation
■
• FAQ
FAQ on
on General
General Matters
Matters of
of Updater
Updater
Q: What
Q: What preparation
preparation is
is needed
needed in
in each
each installation
installation method?
method?
A: See
A: See the
the table
table below
below for
for preparation
preparation required
required in
in each
each installation
installation method.
method.
•• For updating firmware
Distribution
Distribution Settings Network Enabling Enabling the Enabling the Enabling enabling the
name of Vice- settings linkage with
linkage [Update Firm-
with [Update [Manual Up-
Firm- [Manual Up- scheduled
scheduled Local CDS
Local CDS
Company
Company UGW
UGW ware] button
ware] button date]
date] button
button update (*1)
update (*1) button
button
of Sales
of Sales in the
in the [Set-
[Set- on the
on the re-
re-
tings/Regis-
tings/Regis- mote UI
mote UI
tration] menu
tration] menu
CDS remote up- i .1 i - - - -
date method
CDS remote down- i .1 i - - - -
load method
CDS on-site down- i i - - - - -
load method
CDS scheduled i i - i - i --
update method
CDS on-site down- i i - i - - -
load method by lo-
cal UI
CDS on-site down- i i - i - - -
load method by re-
mote UI
Special download i - - - i - --
and update using
remote UI
Local CDS update - - - ✓
i - - i
method
*1: It
*1: It is
is required
required when
when configuring
configuring the
the schedule
schedule update
update setting
setting from
from the
the Control
Control Panel.
Panel.
•• For
For install
install system
system option
option
Installation Method
Installation Method Network settings
Network settings Enabling [Install Application/
Options] Button
Options] Button
LMS-linked Installation V -
LMA-linked installation via Local UI V V
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI V V
Q: How
Q: How can
can operations
operations using
using Updater
Updater be
be masked
masked on
on the
the users'
users' side?
side?
A: Be
A: Be sure
sure to
to perform
perform the
the following
following from
from the
the service
service mode.
mode.
•• Masking Firmware Installation: Change the setting of the service mode (CDS-FIRM / LOCLFIRM) to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
•• Masking
Masking System
System Option
Option Installation:
Installation: Change
Change the
the setting
setting of
of the
the service
service mode
mode (CDS-MEAP)
(CDS-MEAP) to
to "0".
"0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
Q: Can
Q: Can the
the communication
communication be
be cancelled
cancelled during
during the
the communication
communication test?
test?
A: Yes.
A: Yes. During
During the
the communication
communication test,
test, "Cancel"
"Cancel" button
button is
is displayed.
displayed.
333
2. Technical
Explanation
DCM
FunctionOverview
0 Function Overview
■
■Overview
DCM (Device
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is
Configuration Management) is a
a function
function toto migrate
migrate the
the device
device settings
settings infomation
infomation (e.g.:
(e.g.: Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration Basic
Basic
Information and
Information and Service
Service Mode
Mode Settings).
Settings). In
In terms
terms ofof the
the description
description in
in the
the User’s
User's Guide,
Guide, itit is
is synonymous
synonymous with
with "Import/Export
"Import/Export All".
All".
Service mode
Service mode setting
setting values
values can
can be
be exported
exported from
from the
the screen
screen of
of service
service mode.
mode.
While the
While the existing
existing method
method supported
supported only
only the
the case
case ofof backing
backing upup setting
setting values
values for
for the
the same
same machine,
machine, DCM
DCM nownow supports
supports the
the
following 3
following 3 cases:
cases:
•• The
The same
same machine
machine (backup
(backup for
for the
the purpose
purpose of of providing
providing against
against emergency)
emergency)
•• A
A different
different machine
machine ofof the
the same
same model
model (setting
(setting values
values are
are migrated
migrated collectively
collectively to
to multiple
multiple machines
machines when
when replacing
replacing a
a host
host
machine)
•• A
A different
different model
model (e.g.:
(e.g.: the
the setting
setting values
values areare copied
copied from
from an
an old
old model
model toto a
a new
new model)
model)
■ Items to
■Items to be
be Exported
Exported
The following
The following shows
shows the
the items
items to
to be
be exported.
exported.
Only setting
Only setting values
values are
are exported.
exported. Image
Image data
data such
such as
as scanned
scanned image
image cannot
cannot be
be exported.
exported.
Export by
Export by remote
remote UI
UI Export by
Export by service
service mode
mode
Settings/Registration Basic Information Yes -
Paper Type Management Settings Yes -
Forwarding Settings Yes -
Box Settings Yes -
Department ID Management Settings Yes -
Main Menu Settings Yes -
Favorite Settings Yes -
Address Book Yes -
Quick Menu Settings Yes -
User Setting Information Yes -
Web Access Settings Yes -
Service Mode Settings Yes* Yes
** Not
Not exported
exported by
by default
default in
in the
the case
case of
of export
export by
by remote
remote UI
UI
For items
For items to
to be
be imported,
imported, refer
refer to
to "List
"List of
of items
items which
which can
can be
be imported".
imported".
■
■Method of Import/Export
The following
The following shows
shows the
the methods
methods to
to import/export
import/export DCM
DCM files.
files.
•• Import/Export
Import/Export by
by remote
remote UI
UI
•• Import/Export
Import/Export by
by service
service mode
mode
•• Import/Export using iW Management Console DCM Plug-in
Store the
Store the backup
backup data
data in
in the
the following
following location.
location.
•• Export
Export by
by remote
remote UI
UI >
> PC
PC
•• Export
Export by
by service
service mode
mode > > USB
USB flash
flash drive/internal
drive/internal HDD
HDD
Even ifif data

Even data has
has been
been exported
exported by
by one
one method,
method, itit can
can be
be exported
exported byby another
another one.
one. (E.g.:
(E.g.: Data
Data which
which was
was exported
exported by
by remote
remote UI
UI
can be
can be imported
imported by
by service
service mode)
mode)
For details
For details ofof iW
iW Management
Management Console
Console DCM
DCM Plug-in,
Plug-in, refer
refer to
to the
the e-Manual
e-Manual of
of iW
iW Management
Management Console
Console DCM
DCM Plug-in.
Plug-in.
■
■Limitations on DCM General
•• With
With DCM,
DCM, stored
stored data
data in
in Box,
Box, MEAP
MEAP application,
application, and
and system
system option
option license
license cannot
cannot be
be migrated.
migrated.
•• A
A DCM
DCM file
file exported
exported to
to the
the internal
internal HDD
HDD is
is not
not deleted
deleted even
even when
when thethe machine
machine is
is restarted.
restarted. Only
Only 2
2 files
files at
at a
a maximum
maximum are
are
stored in
stored in HDD.
HDD. When
When there
there are
are more
more than
than 22 files,
files, the
the oldest
oldest file
file are
are deleted.
deleted.
334
2. Technical
Explanation
•• After
After importing
importing a a file,
file, the
the machine
machine must
must be be restarted.
restarted. If If executing
executing import
import without
without restart,
restart, NG
NG isis displayed
displayed andand a a file
file is
is not
not
imported. This
imported. This operation
operation is is not
not guaranteed.
guaranteed.
•• When
When importing
importing DCM DCM file file including
including "Service
"Service Mode Mode Settings"
Settings" and and "Settings/Registration
"Settings/Registration Basic Basic Information"
Information" separately,
separately,
perform it in the following procedures.
1.
1. Perform the import of the DCM file including "Service Mode Settings" earlier
2. Restart
2. Restart thethe host
host machine
machine
3. Import
3. Import thethe DCM
DCM filefile including
including "Settings/Registration
"Settings/Registration Basic Basic Information"
Information"
•• As
As include
include "Service
"Service ModeMode Settings",
Settings", ifif the
the process
process is is not
not completed
completed within
within 5 5 minutes
minutes in
in the
the case
case ofof export and 15
export and 15 minutes
minutes inin
the case
the case ofof import,
import, thethe item
item performed
performed at at that
that time
time isis continued
continued untiluntil itit ends,
ends, but
but the
the final
final result
result becomes
becomes ERROR.
ERROR.
•• DCM
DCM files
files to
to which
which no no password
password is is set
set when
when exporting
exporting by by service
service mode
mode cannotcannot be
be loaded
loaded from
from collective
collective import
import byby remote
remote
UI. When
UI. When assuming
assuming to to perform
perform collective
collective import
import by by remote
remote UI, UI, password
password must must be
be set
set to
to data
data to
to be
be exported.
exported.
•• Following
Following limitations
limitations are are applied
applied toto password
password for for DCM
DCM file.file.
•• Character
Character string
string ofof software
software keyboard:
keyboard: 0 0 to
to 32
32 characters
characters
•• No
No password
password is is set
set when
when 0 0 character
character is is entered
entered (The(The setting in which
setting in which no no password
password isis set
set is
is allowed
allowed only
only export
export by
by service
service
mode)
mode)
•• No
No space
space is is allowed
allowed in in the
the middle
middle of of a
a password
password
•• Password
Password is is case
case sensitive
sensitive
•• At
At the
the time
time of of following
following setting,
setting, host
host matchine
matchine does does not not recognize
recognize USB USB flashflash drive.
drive. The
The DCM
DCM function
function isis not
not usable,
usable, too.
too.
[Settings/Registration] >
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences]
[Preferences] > > [External
[External Interface]
Interface] > > [USB
[USB Settings]
Settings] > > [Use
[Use MEAP
MEAP Driver
Driver for
for External
External USB
USB Device]
Device]
=
= "On"
"On"
ExportAll
0 Export Allby
byRemote
Remote UI
Changing the
Changing the value
value of
of a
a related service mode
related service mode item
item can
can include
include items
items of
of "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" in
in aa DCM
DCM file
file that
that is
is to
to be
be exported
exported
by
by remote
remote UI.
UI.
A DCM
A DCM file
file exported
exported by
by remote
remote UI UI can
can also
also be
be imported
imported byby service
service mode
mode without
without using
using remote
remote UI.
UI.
For details
For details of
of import/export
import/export by
by remote
remote UI,
UI, refer
refer to
to the
the this
this machine's
machine's e-Manual.
e-Manual.
■ Limitations about
■Limitations about Import/Export
Import/Export by
by Remote
Remote UI
UI
•• An
An import/export
import/export process
process ends
ends with
with error
error while
while the
the following
following specific
specific job
job is
is executed.
executed.
•• Executing/waiting
Executing/waiting any any jobs
jobs (sending,
(sending, forwarding,
forwarding, receiving
receiving i-fax,
i-fax, printing
printing reports,
reports, functions
functions specified
specified by
by the
the Delayed
Delayed
Send mode)
Send mode)
•• During
During anan Import/Export
Import/Export Individually
Individually operation
operation
•• Viewing
Viewing thethe address
address book
book using
using the
the Remote
Remote UI UI from
from another
another imagePRESS
imagePRESS seriesseries
•• Delivering
Delivering thethe device
device information
information
•• While
While error
error isis occurring
occurring
•• Backing
Backing up up inbox
inbox data
data
•• If
If this
this function
function isis executed with a
executed with a print
print job
job simultaneously,
simultaneously, itit affects
affects the
the operation
operation such
such as;
as; UI
UI isis locked,
locked, or
or a
a print
print job
job is
is cleared
cleared
by
by restart
restart after
after import.
import. SoSo itit requires
requires careful
careful operation.
operation.
•• A
A device
device rejects
rejects an an import/
import/ export
export request
request during
during shutdown.
shutdown.
•• If
If this
this function
function isis executed
executed withwith device
device information
information distribution
distribution or
or remote
remote UI UI import/
import/ export
export (Individually)
(Individually) simultaneously,
simultaneously, thethe
first coming
first coming job
job takes
takes priority
priority and
and they
they are
are controlled
controlled exclusively.
exclusively.
•• If
If this
this function
function isis executed
executed withwith aa firmware
firmware update
update byby aa CDS
CDS (Updater)
(Updater) simultaneously,
simultaneously, a a firmware
firmware update
update process
process takes
takes
priority,
priority, and
and this
this function
function is
is stopped
stopped temporarily
temporarily by by restart.
restart.
•• When
When errorerror code
code is is issued,
issued, this
this function
function ends
ends with
with error.
error.
•• If
If the
the display
display language
language before
before import
import differs
differs from
from that
that after
after import,,
import„ aa setting
setting value
value of
of a
a text
text corrupts
corrupts in
in some
some cases.
cases. The
The
character corruption
character corruption can can be
be solved
solved byby changing
changing thethe display
display language
language to to the
the appropriate
appropriate one.
one.
■ Batch export
■Batch export procedure
procedure
Preparation
Preparation
•• PC
PC and
and web
web browser
browser
•• USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive to
to store
store the
the data
data of
of reference
reference machine
machine
1. Complete
1. Complete the
the device
device setting
setting as
as a
a reference
reference machine.
machine.
2. Connect
2. Connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive to
to the
the copy
copy destination
destination machine.
machine.
335
2. Technical
Explanation
3. Change
3. Change the
the setting
setting value
value of
of the
the following
following service
service mode
mode to
to [1]
[1] to
to display
display "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" on
on remote
remote UI.
UI.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide
[0]: Hide the
the "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" (Def.)
(Def.)
[1]: Display the "Service Mode Settings"
[1]: Display the "Service Mode Settings"
Export including
4. Export including "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" from
from remote
remote UI.
UI.
Settings/Registration Mail to System Manage
Sattingsfigegistratbn Ma na gerneot Settings: Data Management >Export

Restart Device
Export 122 Updated : 211 5 117,1-5 1,41:0

Preferences
Paper Settings Select the terns to export, then click [Start Exporting]
Import/Export All and ImporbExport Indsodu ally data ts not compatible.
O Timer/Energy Settings Download the exported date from the Import./Export Results screen.
▪ Network Settings
Start Exporting
rt External Interface
Volume Settings
Export Settings
Adjustment/Maintenance
t4,1 fn F•nn.
•
Adjust Image lau a !By
1:1 Select All
Function Settings
El Settings/Registration Basic Information
Common Settings
Copy
E Paper Type Management Settings
Printer El Forwarding Settings
Store/Access Files
Ei Moe Settings
Management Settings
• Department ID Management Settings
User Management
Device Management Ei Main Menu Settings
License/Other • Web Access Settings

0 Data Management
Favorite Settings
] Cluick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
User Setting Information
5. Copy the
5. Copy the DCM
DCM file
file to
to the
the root
root folder
folder of
of the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive using
using a
a PC.
PC.
6. Connect
6. Connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive to
to the
the copy
copy destination
machine.
7. In
7. In the
the following
following service
service mode,
mode, change
change the
the setting
setting value
value to
to "0"
"0" to
to hide
hide "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" on
on the
the remote
remote UI.
UI.
■ Batch import
• Batch import procedure
procedure
Preparation
Preparation
•• PC
PC and
and web
web browser
browser
•• USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive to
to store
store the
the data
data of
of reference
reference machine
machine
NOTE:
•• If necessary, copy the DCM files to be imported using a PC in advance. Be sure to store the DCM files in the root folder of
the USB memory.
•• Do not change the extension from ".dcm" (only ".dcm" files can be recognized)
1. Complete
1. Complete the
the device
device setting
setting as
as a
a reference
reference machine.
machine.
2. Copy
2. Copy the
the DCM
DCM files
files to
to be
be imported
imported using
using a
a PC
PC in
in advance.
advance.
3. Connect
3. Connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive to
to the
the copy
copy destination
machine.
4. Change
4. Change the
the setting
setting value
value of
of the
the following
following service
service mode
mode to
to [1]
[1] to
to display
display "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" on
on remote
remote UI.
UI.
[0]: Hide
[0]: Hide the
the "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" (Def.)
(Def.)
[1]: Display
[1]: Display the
the "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings"
336
2. Technical
Explanation
5. Import including
5. Import including "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" from
from remote
remote UI.
UI.
40 Settings/Registration Mall to System Manage
Settings/Registration : Management SeHings : Data Management> Export

Restart Device
Lest uo.,,,,ted 2515 07715 11 41 0

Preferences
0 Paper Settings Select the lens to export, then click [Start Exportmg]
importlExport All and Impor2Export Individually data is not compatible.
DrnerfEnergy Settings Download the exported data from the Import/Export Results screen.
0 Network Settings
Start Exporting
O External Interface
O Volume Settings
Export Settings
Adjustment/Maintenance
Select Item to Export
Adjust Image Duality
n Select All
Function Settings
E SetIngsfRegutration Basic In formatIon
Common Settings
0 Copy
E Paper Type Management Settings
0 Printer El Forwarding Settings
O Store/A.00.s Flies
E Box Settings
Fdana gement Servings
M Department El Management Settings
User Management
Device Management E Main Menu Settings

License/Other M Web Access Settings
0 Data Management
El Favorite Settings
M Quick Menu Settings
MEAPApplIcaton Seting Information
M User Setting Information
6. In
6. Inthe
thefollowing
following service
service mode,
mode, change
change the
the setting
setting value
value to
to "0"
"0" to
to hide
hide "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings" on
on the
the remote
remote UI.
UI.
Import/Exportby
0 Import/Export byService
ServiceMode
Mode (External)
(External)
Import/export by
Import/export by service
service mode
mode allows
allows the
the selection
selection between
between USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive and
and internal
internal HDD
HDD for
for the
the save
save destination
destination of
of DCM
DCM
files.
files.
The procedure
The procedure ofof import/export
import/export when
when USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive is
is selected
selected is
is shown
shown below.
below.
The DCM
The DCM files
files to
to be
be exported
exported contain
contain only
only the
the items
items of
of "Service
"Service Mode
Mode Settings"
Settings"
The DCM
The DCM files
files to
to be
be imported
imported can
can have
have been
been exported
exported either
either by
by service
service mode
mode or
or by
by remote
remote UI.
UI.
■ Export Procedure
• Export Procedure
Preparation
Preparation
•• USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive
Required when
Required when exporting
exporting to
to USB
USB flash
flash drive.
drive.
It needs
It needs to
to have
have been
been formatted
formatted to
to be
be recognized
recognized by
by the
the device.
device. No
No firmware
firmware registration
registration is
is necessary.
necessary.
1. Connect
1. Connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive and
and check
check that
that it
it has
has been
been mounted.
mounted.
337
337
2. Technical
Explanation
2. Log
2. Log in
in to
to service
service mode
mode and
and press
press [BACKUP].
[BACKUP].
BACKUP > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

Service Mode ST 0 -( 0) ( 0 --
lease Select Service Mode Menu.
Mode List
Mode List Classic I RESTORE I
SITUATION ASSIST TOOL
Updater
A.
;
3. Select
3. Select [LIST]
[LIST] after
after the
the screen
screen moves
moves to
to <BACKUP>.
<BACKUP>.
When saving
4. When saving to
to USB
USB flash
flash drive,
drive, enter
enter "1"
"1" and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
5. The names
5. The names of
of DCM
DCM files
files saved
saved in
in USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive are
are displayed.
displayed. Press
Press [->].
[->].
-Z(:0000720107_0003_2012_01261316197dern (USB)
030003V0102_0066_2012_0125214709Mainme(USB)
400003__00102_0063_2012_0125211207_601_SE(006)
,100003_40102_0062_2012_0125_210719_Userfu(USB)
,,C0005_Y0102_0067_2012_0125_732340.clern (USB)
_:(10002520102_0001_2012_0125_154125_0therS(006)
r1000003 40102 0054 2012 0125 153343-01.dcm(166)
338
2. Technical
Explanation
6. Select
6. Select[PASSWD],
[PASSWD], enter
enter aa password
password from
from the
the software
software keyboard,
keyboard, and
and then
then press
press [OK].
[OK].
< BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY >

You can also use the numeric keys.
PASSWD
—BACKUP
4 I. Backspace J elphama. 1
112 3 4I JJ 7 9 9 011 J \I
qwert'yu l 0 0 1[111
ad f g hi
Shift Caps SP.,
)( Cancel
LEI Remote Operation is being used...
NOTE:
Limitations regarding
Limitations regarding thethe password
password
•• Character
Character string
string of
of software
software keyboard:
keyboard: 00 to
to 32 characters
32 characters
•• No
No password
password is is set
set when
when 0 character is
0 character is entered
entered
•• No
No space
space isis allowed
allowed in in the
the middle
middle of
of a
a password
password
•• Password
Password is is case
case sensitive
sensitive
Limitations regarding thethe DCM file no
DCM file no password
password
•• DCM
DCM files
files exported
exported without
without password
password cancan only
only be
be imported
imported by
by service
service mode.
mode.
•• They
They cannot
cannot be be imported
imported by by remote
remote UI.
UI.
7. Afterentering
7. After entering the
the password,
password, select
select [BACKUP].
[BACKUP]. Press
Press [OK]
[OK] to
to execute
execute export.
export.
< BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY > BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY >
PASSAC ******$t*F*****m PASSAT Mg****g,*$*$***;**P;**K*K*
PC BACKUP RUNK IMG
CR J
8. "OK!"is
8. "OKI" isdisplayed
displayedin
inthe
the status
status column
column when
when the
the processing
processing is
is successfully
successfully completed.
completed. Press
Press [<-].
[<-].
< BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY >

PASSD
BACKUP UK!
1/1
4- 1 ON
339
339
2. Technical
Explanation
9. Select [LIST],
9. Select [LIST], enter
enter "0"
"0" and
and press
press [OK].
[OK]. Unmount
Unmount the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive.
drive.
It can
It can also
also be
be removed
removed by
by pressing
pressing the
the Remove
Remove button
button on
on the
the main
main menu.
menu.
<RFSTORF > < 1/ 2 > < ROAN >

1 { 0 -- 2) 0) ( 0 -- 2)
( 0) ( o-- 0
_ _ 32,10.5012B
LAC5255 1122010:17 dm (.M)
,03X03_20102:003.2012:0125:211207:RUI SUMS)
003 V0102_0162 2012 0125 210719_Useitu(USB)
03, 73012:0135:2320en don, (0310
_ '`.8)
Reference:
Reference: The
The specification
specification of
of the
the name
name of
of the
the exported
exported file
file
iPRC10000VP_WEK00008_V0107_0001_2015_0519_154943.dcm
Model I
Model S/N Export
L YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
Main controller DCM File format

L firm ware version
1::CM Job
DCM Job
1 management number
■
• Import
Import Procedure
Procedure
Preparation
Preparation
USB flash
USB flash drive
drive
1. Connect
1. Connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive.
drive.
2. Log
2. Login
in to
to service
service mode
mode and
and press
press [RESTORE].
[RESTORE].
1/ 2 > < READY >

Service Mode 0 -( 0) { 0- 2}
M e7Select Service Mode Menu. 0 -( 0) - 0}
Mode List BACKUP
SITUATION I ASSIST TOOL
0— ger
3. Select
3. Select [LIST]
[LIST] after
after the
the screen
screen moves
moves to
to <RESTORE>.
<RESTORE>.
RESTORE > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

0 1) { o-
CI <-( 0) { 0-
1/ 1 —;
340
340
2. Technical
Explanation
4. When
4. Whenreferring
referring to
to USB
USB flash
flash drive,
drive, enter
enter "1"
"1" and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
RESTORE ) < 1/ 2 ) < READY >

LIST
MUM
5. Thenames
5. The names of
of DCM
DCM files
files saved
saved in
in USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive are
are displayed.
displayed.
<RESTORE > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

1 <-( 1)
SELECT <-( 0)
TIIIMITHLj000{ VOW{ 0004_2012 0126_181704, dcm (USB)

2 iM6266_HZZ00007:V0107:0003_2012:0126_131619,dcm (USB)
8 iAC6255_JAH00008_V0102_0066_2012_0125_214709_Meinme(USB)
4 iAC6255_J000008_V0102_0068_2012_0125_211207_RUI_SE(USB)
6 iM6255_JAH00003_V0102_0062_2012_0125_210719, dm (USB)
6 ig6265_JAHOOOOLV01020067_2012_0125_232340,dcm (USB)
7 1062200 LXZ00025 50102 0001 2012 0125 154125, dm (USB)
A WAAAA- mHonnol-worommu9n19(11.m 1F'n41-01 Hrm(HAR1
6. Select
6. Select [SELECT].
[SELECT].
-4=E-
MIK
1 -( 1) { 0 --
0 -( 0) { 1-
s 7 "r solo V 67 0004 _ 2012

_ 0125
_ _ 131704. clus (u40)
02 1A05265_W/20000/20107_0000_2012_0126_181610 OM (888)
03 1,4185256AH00003 V0102 0065 2012 0126 214/0 Mainme(USB)
04 1061256_/6100003 V01020063:2012:0125:211207 RUT_85(115B)
05 L5C5255_,H00003V0102:0062_2012_0125_2107197dcn (000)
06 30186265_J0000003 V0102_0067_2012_0126232346 don (068)
07 1802200 10200025 V0102_0001 2012_0125__ 1541266cm (056)
08 1.566255:J0600000 V0102_0054_2012_0126_150543 -01.dcm(U$6)
341
2. Technical
Explanation
7. Enterthe
7. Enter the selection
selection number
number displayed
displayed on
on the
the left
left side
side of
of the
the file
file to
to be
be selected
selected and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
"*" is
"*" is displayed
displayed on
on the
the right
right side
side of
of the
the file
file to
to indicate
indicate that
that the
the file
file has
has been
been selected.
selected.
< 1/ 2 > < READY >

•-( 1) ( 0
3 -( 3) 1
H.?00007 V0107 0004 20120126 137704.(147

112200007:00107:0003:2012__0126:101619.dsm
11100003_1,0102_0085_2012_0125 214701 Maim
1A,6e65- 4*100003_V010,20063 2012_0125_211207 RUI
t4C5255-J4H00008_10102__0082-2012 0125 21071417 dcm- (USB)
1.W5255:4111100003_V0102_0067_2012:0125:2$2340.0on (USB)
1AC2230_0000025_10102_0001_2012 0125 154125.dcw (USA)
1AC5255 J111100003 V0102_0054 2012:0125:15324S -01.dcm(US8)
♦ I
NOTE:
NOTE:
Up to
Up to 8
8 DCM
DCM files
files are
are displayed
displayed in
in one
one screen.
screen. It
It is
is necessary
necessary to
to switch
switch screens
screens when
when there
there are
are more
more than
than 8
8 files.
files.
8. When the
8. When the correct
correct file
file is
is displayed,
displayed, press
press [->].
[->].
▪RESTORE > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

1ST 1 1) { 0
7-( 3) { 1
1 1836265:11ZZ00007_55 -107_0004_2012_0120_171704. dcm (1

2 LA66266_HZZ00007201070003_20120126131619. dcm
3 1A36266J00000035 - 5 -1020065_2012012521.1709Mainmel
4 LA66266_,M00003_20102_0068_2012_0125_211207_RUI_SEI UU
5 1A36266„.1880000355 -1020062201201252107 -19. dcm
6 LAC6266,13H00003 V01020067_20120125232340. dcm
7 1.802230LHZ000265- 5 -1020001_2012012516.1-125. dcm
8 LA06266 JWHO000$2.01020V420120125163343-01. dam UU
9. Select [PASSWD],
9. Select [PASSWD], enter
enter aa password
password from
from the
the software
software keyboard,
keyboard, and
and then
then press
press [OK].
[OK].
I H
WWW 4 5 6I 7 8 9 9
c± r t Y u °
h ;
n
93F
X in 7t1L
GiCiiii011
342
2. Technical
Explanation

A.;Ein,1) ********************************
ESTORE
3_Vo102_0065_2012_0125_214709_Mai., ILL
1/ 1
NOTE:
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
10. After
10. After entering
entering the
the password,
password, select
select [RESTORE].
[RESTORE]. Press
Press [OK]
[OK] to
to execute
execute import.
import.
<RESTORE > < 2/ 2 > < READY > <RESTORE > < 2/ 2 > < READY >
M********$t****************0t
RESTORE RUNNING
..,0065201201252147091,
11. "OK!"
11. is displayed
"OKI" is displayed in
in the
the status
status column
column when
when the
the processing
processing is
is successfully
completed. Press
Press [<-].
[<-].
RESTORE > < 2/ 2 > < READY >

PASSIM ********************************
RESTORE 2.
_AIIH00003 V0102 0066 2012 0125 211709 1,1a1 LI F.
12. Select [LIST], enter "0" and press [OK]. Unmount the USB flash drive.
12.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
RESTORE > 1/ 2 > < READY >

( 0) 0 -- 2) ST 0 -( 0) ( 0- 2)
1- 261 ELECT 0 -( 0) ( 0- 01
volc, L:s0)
5255 , HZ200007V0107 0003 2012 0126131619. dan (.1513)
JIVHO00O3-V010233066:20120125_214709 mairee(us0)
'255 oe000003_100102 0063 2012 0125 2112)7 RUI_SE(USB)
•,5255 J161000032,0102 0062_2012 0125 210719-Userfu(LIS8)
lix.-255JIM00003 V0102 00672012 0125_232340:0u (USB)
7 1.602230U(Z00025y010200012012012515, 1125.0therS(USB)
1.605255 J1,11:0003 V0102_0054
2012 0125_153343-01.0®(USB)
343
343
2. Technical
Explanation
r)Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal)

Import/export by
Import/export by service
service mode
mode allows
allows the
the selection
selection between
between USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive and
and internal
internal HDD
HDD for
for the
the save
save destination
destination of
of DCM
DCM
files
The procedure
The procedure of
of import/export
import/export when
when internal
internal HDD
HDD isis selected
selected is
is shown
shown below.
below.
It can
It can be
be used
used when
when recovering
recovering the
the initial
initial status
status after
after having
having tried
tried multiple
multiple setting
setting changes
changes temporarily
temporarily for
for troubleshooting,
troubleshooting, etc.
etc.
CAUTION:
DCM must
DCM must not
not be
be used
used when
when replacing
replacing PCBs.
PCBs. Be
Be sure
sure to
to perform
perform backup
backup of
of DCON/RCON
DCON/RCON in
in service
service mode
mode
Maximum of 2 files can be saved in the host machine's HDD
■
■Export Procedure
Preparation
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving to internal HDD.
1. Log
1. Log in
in to
to service
service mode
mode and
and press
press [BACKUP].
[BACKUP].
Service Mode
Mode List BACKUP
Motle List Classic R ORE

EST
Select [LIST]
2. Select [LIST] after
after the
the screen
screen moves
moves to
to <BACKUP>.
<BACKUP>.
3. When
3. When saving
saving to
to the
the internal
internal HDD,
HDD, enter
enter "2"
"2" and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
344
2. Technical
Explanation
The names
4. The names of
of DCM
DCM files
files saved
saved in
in internal
internal HDD
HDD are
are displayed.
displayed. Press
Press [->].
[->].
< BACKUP > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

2) { 0- 2}
32;/0102_0058_2012_0125_154504. dcm (HDD)

2 1A05255:AH00003 Y0102 0057 2012 0125 154402.dcm (HOD)
5. Select [PASSWD],
enter a
a password
password from
from the
the software
software keyboard,
keyboard, and
and then
then press
press [OK].
[OK].
< BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY >

You can also use the meserio keys.
BACKUP
I.. Backspace Mahar.,
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 -
q ti e r 0 P 1 1
h •
z 1 2. b n n /
Shift Cos Specs
% Cancel
Remote 00eretion is being used...
CAUTION:
Limitations regarding the
the password
password
•• Character
Character string
string of
of software
software keyboard:
keyboard: 00 to
to 32
32 characters
characters
•• No
No password
password isis set
set when
when 0 0 character
character is
is entered
entered
•• No
No space
space is
is allowed
allowed inin the
the middle
middle of
of a
a password
password
•• Password
Password isis case
case sensitive
sensitive
6. After
6. Afterentering
entering the
the password,
password, select
select [BACKUP].
[BACKUP]. Press
Press [OK]
[OK] to
to execute
execute export.
export.
BACKUP > < 2/ 2 > < READY > I

IMEM
********************04 *S*70488 40***486***************343
345
345
2. Technical
Explanation
7. "OKI"
7. "OK!"is
isdisplayed
displayedin
inthe
the status
status column
column when
when the
the processing
processing is
is successfully
completed. Press
Press [<-].
[<-].
BACKUP < 2/ 2 > < READY >

ASSIND
BACKUP OK!
1/ 1
OK J I
LI
■
• Import
Import Procedure
Procedure
Preparation
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving to internal HDD.
1. Log
1. Login
in to
to service
service mode
mode and
and press
press [RESTORE].
[RESTORE].
(RESTORE > < 1/ 2 > < READY >

Service Mode LIST 0 -( 0) { 0- 2}
B leace Select Service Bode Menu . IISELEGT 0 0) { 0- 0}
Mode List
SITUATION ASSIST TOOL jl
2. Select
2. Select[LIST]
[LIST] after
after the
the screen
screen moves
moves to
to <RESTORE>.
<RESTORE>.
<RESTORE > < 1/ 2 ) < READY >

0 1) { 0-
SELECT CI -( 0) { 0-
346
2. Technical
Explanation
3. When
3. When referring
referring to
to internal
internal HDD,
HDD, enter
enter "2"
"2" and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
4. The
4. The names
names of
of DCM
DCM files
files referred
referred to
to in
in internal
internal HDD
HDD are
are displayed.
displayed.

LIST 2 <-( 2) { 0
SELECT 0 -( 0) { 1
AJ0003_20102_0058_2012_0125_154504.5cm (HOD)
ii).)) _AH00003 80102 0057 2012 0125 154402, dcm (HOD)
5. Select [SELECT].
5. Select [SELECT].
RESTORE >;... < 1/ 2 > < READY >

NE= 2 2) { 0
SELECT -( 0) 1
1AC5255 JIHO 3 V0102_0(153_2C; 1135_154504. km (HOD

2 ig5255—_J1140000S—V0102_0057_201, J125_154402 km (HOD;
6. Enter
6. Enter the
the selection
selection number
number displayed
displayed on
on the
the left
left side
side of
of the
the file
file to
to be
be selected
selected and
and press
press [OK].
[OK].
"" *"
*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected.
,mff.,
RESTORE X < V 2 > < READY >
2 2) {
1 -(
1AC5255_4li00001 j10102_0058_2012_0125_154504 dun

945255 _J41400003_01020057_2012_0125_154402 dun
ODD)
ODD)
EMI
347
2. Technical
Explanation
7. When
7. When the
the correct
correct file
file is
is displayed,
displayed, press
press [->].
[->].

2 2) {
SELECT 2) {
1 10,55255_AH06003_20102_0068_2012_0126_154504.0cm (HOD)
02 0A05255_AH90003 V0192 0057 2012 0125 154402.dcm (HOD)
8. Select [PASSWD],
enter aa password
password from
from the
the software
software keyboard,
keyboard, and
and then
then press
press [OK].
[OK].
T-:,#—TtAh-Cerf.
I anal
I ay, -1
\1±
1
X #tr3t)I.
i',AY-442S/E—FTV. ttaCiemg
-i -Th
---
<RESTORE < 2/ 2 > < READY >

PASSD ********************************
RESTORE
_V0102_0065_2012_0125_214709_Meinme(USB) **
NOTE:
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After
9. Afterentering
entering the
the password,
password, select
select [RESTORE].
[RESTORE]. Press
Press [OK]
[OK] to
to execute
execute import.
import.
RESTORE > < 2/ 2 > < READY > RESTORE > < 2/ 2 > < READY >
PASSWD 080*****************0$***0* 00****$08#*##$##M****I*0
RESTORE RUM
00A3_'e 017E 0045 21 0125 1 Ido Inn, fil 35 2012 0125 214709 klainme0.1
348
348
2. Technical
Explanation
10. "OKI"
10. "OK!"is
isdisplayed
displayedin
inthe
thestatus
status column
column when
when the
the processing
processing is
is successfully
completed. Press
Press [<-].
[<-].
> < 2/ 2 > < READY >

*******M**********************
2.
H00003 V0102 0065 2012 0125 214709 mainmo1UsB)
CK
Listofofitems
0 List itemswhich
whichcan
can be
be imported
imported
The following
The following shows
shows the
the items
items to
to be
be imported
imported for
for this
this model.
model.
Note that
Note that the
the setting
setting values
values are
are not
not imported
imported inin cases
cases such
such as
as below:
below:
•• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (E.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
by
by service
service mode)
mode)
•• Items
Items not
not defined
defined in
in the
the target
target import
import range
range (below
(below cases
cases A
A through
through C)
C)
•• The
The options
options and
and functions
functions related
related to
to the
the setting
setting values
values do
do not
not exist
exist
The following
The following cases
cases may
may bebe possible
possible for
for the
the Import
Import function.
function.
Case Target import range Description

Case A The same machine Import to the same machine (on the assumption of backup and restoration)
Case B The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series)
Case C Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)
■
■Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration Basic
Basic Information
Information
Setting Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Preferences
Paper Settings Paper Settings
Post Card Yes Yes No
Long Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults Yes Yes No
Register Custom Size Yes Yes No
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/ Restoration Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/ Cancel) Yes Yes Yes
Copy Screen Display Settings Yes Yes Yes
Store Location Display Settings Yes Yes Yes
Switch Language/ Keyboard On/Off Yes Yes Yes
Switch Language/ Keyboard Yes Yes Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message Yes Yes Yes
No. of Copies/ Job Duration Status Yes Yes Yes
Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area Yes Yes Yes
Change Display of Paper List Screen Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority Yes Yes Yes
Change Default Display for Paper Type List Yes Yes Yes
Switch Millimeter/ Inch Entry Yes Yes Yes
ID/ User Name Display On/ Off Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Toner Error Message Yes Yes Yes
349
2. Technical
Explanation
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C

Preferences
Preferences
Timer/ Energy Settings Date/ Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Time Format Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Quick Startup
Quick Startup Settings
Settings for
for Main
Main Power
Power Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Reset
Auto Reset Time
Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
Function After
Function After Auto
Auto Reset
Reset Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep Time
Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode Energy
Energy Use
Use Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes
Time Settings
Time Settings for
for Auto
Auto Adjust
Adjust Gradation
Gradation Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Energy Saver/
Energy Saver/ Sleep
Sleep Mode
Mode Exit
Exit Time
Time Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Mode After
Mode After Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Key
Key Pressed
Pressed Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Change Energy Saver Mode Yes Yes Yes
Low Power Mode Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Perfect Binder Energy Saver Mode Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
End the
End the Perfect
Perfect Binder
Binder Energy
Energy Saver
Saver Mode
Mode Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
I
Setting Information "I. Case A Case B Case C
Preferences
Preferences
Network
Network Use FTP PASV Mode Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Use HTTP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Proxy Settings
Proxy Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Setting Information Case A Case B Case C

Preferences
Preferences
Accessibility Key Repetition
Key Repetition Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Reversed Display
Reversed Display (Color)
(Color) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Adjustment/ Maintenance
Adjustment/ Maintenance
Adjust Image
Adjust Image Quality
Quality Correct Density
Correct Density Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Full Color
Full Color Printing
Printing Vividness
Vividness Settings
Settings Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Fine Adjust
Fine Adjust Zoom
Zoom Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Color Balance
Color Balance Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Low Temperature Environment Mode Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Correct Uneven
Correct Uneven Gloss
Gloss Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Adjust Drum
Adjust Drum Temperature
Temperature Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Special Smoothing
Special Smoothing Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Adjust Action
Adjust Action Speed/Precision Priority
Speed/Precision Priority for
for Double
Double Staple
Staple Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Fine Adjust Perfect Binding Finishing Size Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Adjust Perfect
Adjust Perfect Binding
Binding Glue
Glue Application
Application Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Alignment Adjustment When Stapling Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Finisher Tray A Alignment Adjustment Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Finisher Tray B Alignment Adjustment Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Maintenance
Maintenance Fixing Belt Auto Refresh Level Yes
Yes No
No No
No
■ Setting Information Case A Case B Case C

Function Settings
Function Settings
Common Paper Feed
Paper Feed Settings
Settings
Paper Drawer
Paper Drawer Auto
Auto Selection
Selection On/Off
On/Off Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
Suspended Job
Suspended Job Timeout
Timeout Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Paper Output
Paper Output Settings
Settings
Output Tray
Output Tray Settings
Settings Yes
Yes No No
No
Specify Max
Specify Max No.
No. of
of Sheets
Sheets to
to Load
Load in
in Stacker
Stacker Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Auto Eject
Auto Eject Paper
Paper on
on Stacker
Stacker Tray
Tray at
at Job
Job End
End Yes
Yes No No
No
350
350
2. Technical
Explanation
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Common High Volume
High Volume Stack
Stack Mode
Mode Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Offset Jobs
Offset Jobs Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Job
Job Separator
Separator Between
Between Jobs
Jobs Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Job
Job Separator
Separator Between
Between Copies
Copies Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Job
Job Separator
Separator After
After Remov.
Remov. Stacker
Stacker Ppr.
Ppr. Jam
Jam Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Different Paper
Different Paper Sizes
Sizes for
for Output
Output Tray
Tray Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Align Output Paper of Diff. Sizes (Diff. Width) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Unprocessed Tab
Unprocessed Tab Paper
Paper Forced
Forced Output
Output Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Print Settings
Print Settings
Print Priority Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Output Report
Output Report Default
Default Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Superimpose Image Quality Priority Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Register Characters
Register Characters for
for Page
Page No./Watermark
No./Watermark Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Copy Set
Copy Set Numbering
Numbering Option
Option Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Feeder Jam
Feeder Jam Recovery
Recovery Method
Method Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Scanner Noise
Scanner Noise Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Streak Prevention
Streak Prevention Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
B&W Scan
B&W Scan Speed/Image
Speed/Image Quality
Quality Priority
Priority Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
LTRR/STMT Original Selection Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Remote Scan
Remote Scan Gamma
Gamma Value
Value Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Auto Online
Auto Online Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Offline
Auto Offline Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Generate File
Generate File
Image Quality
Image Quality Level
Level for
for Ltd.
Ltd. Color/Compact
Color/Compact Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
PDF (Limited
PDF (Limited Color)
Color) Resolution
Resolution Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
OCR (Text
OCR (Text Searchable)
Searchable) Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Trace &
Trace & Smooth
Smooth Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
OOXML Settings
OOXML Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Include Background
Include Background Images
Images in
in Word
Word File
File Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Optimize PDF for Web Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
256-bit AES
256-bit AES Settings
Settings for
for Encrypted
Encrypted PDF
PDF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Rights Management
Rights Management Server
Server Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Register Finishing Size Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Set Authentication
Set Authentication Method
Method Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Function Settings
Function Settings
Copy
Copy Auto Collate
Auto Collate Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Image Orientation Priority Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Auto Recognize
Auto Recognize Original
Original Orientation
Orientation Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Select Color
Select Color Settings
Settings for
for Copy
Copy Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Send
Send Common Settings
Common Settings
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Default Screen
Default Screen Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
TX Report
TX Report Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Communication Management
Communication Management Report
Report Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
TX Terminal ID Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Delete Failed
Delete Failed TX
TX Jobs
Jobs Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Retry Times Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Data Compression
Data Compression Ratio
Ratio Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
351
351
2. Technical
Explanation
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Send
Send YCbCr TX
YCbCr TX Gamma
Gamma Value
Value Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Allow Non-ASCII
Allow Non-ASCII Characters
Characters for
for FTP
FTP Sending
Sending Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Use Divided
Use Divided Chunk
Chunk Send
Send for
for WebDAV
WebDAV TX
TX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL
Confirm SSL Certificate
Certificate for
for WebDAV
WebDAV TX
TX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Limit New
Limit New Destination
Destination Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Always Add
Always Add Device
Device Signature
Signature to
to Send
Send Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
E-Mail/ I-Fax
E-Mail/ I-Fax Settings
Settings
Register Unit
Register Unit Name
Name Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Communication Settings
Communication Settings SMTP RX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
POP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SMTP Server
SMTP Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
E-Mail Address Yes
Yes No
No No
No
POP Server
POP Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
POP Login Name Yes
Yes No
No No
No
POP Password
POP Password Yes
Yes No
No No
No
POP Interval
POP Interval Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Authent./ Encryption
Authent./ Encryption Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL
Certificate for
for SMTP
SMTP TX
TX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL
Certificate for
for POP
POP RX
RX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Maximum Data Size for Sending Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Default Subject
Default Subject Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Allow Unregistered
Allow Unregistered Users
Users to
to Send
Send E-Mail
E-Mail Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Full Mode TX Timeout Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Use Send
Use Send via
via Server
Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Allow MDN
Allow MDN Not
Not via
via Server
Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Complete
Auto Complete for
for Entering
Entering E-Mail
E-Mail Addresses
Addresses Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Receive/ Forward
Receive/ Forward Common Settings
Common Settings
Print on
Print on Both
Both Sides
Sides Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Select Drawer
Select Drawer Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Reduce Fax
Reduce Fax RX
RX Size
Size Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
2 on 1 Log Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Print RX
Print RX Page
Page Footer
Footer Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
YCbCr RX
YCbCr RX Gamma
Gamma Value
Value Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Interrupt and
Interrupt and Print
Print RX
RX Jobs
Jobs Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Set Fax/
Set Fax/ I-Fax
I-Fax Inbox
Inbox
Use I-Fax
Use I-Fax Memory
Memory Lock
Lock Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start
Start Time
Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Memory Lock End Time Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Divided Data
Divided Data RX
RX Timeout
Timeout Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Always Send Notice for RX Errors Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Store/ Access
Store/ Access Files
Files Common Settings
Common Settings
Limit Box
Limit Box PIN
PIN to
to 7
7 Digits/
Digits/ Restrict
Restrict Access
Access Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Mail Box
Mail Box Settings
Settings
Box Security
Box Security Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Set Destination
Set Destination
Change Default
Change Default Display
Display of
of Address
Address Book
Book Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Address Book
Address Book PIN
PIN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Manage Address
Manage Address Book
Book Access
Access Numbers
Numbers Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Include Pswd.
Include Pswd. When
When Exporting
Exporting Address
Address Book
Book Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
352
352
2. Technical
Explanation
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Register LDAP Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Register/ Edit
Register/ Edit LDAP
LDAP Search
Search Conditions
Conditions Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
Change Default
Change Default LDAP
LDAP Search
Search Conditions
Conditions Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Acquire Remote
Acquire Remote Address
Address Book
Book Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Make Remote
Make Remote Add.
Add. Book
Book Open
Open Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Management Settings
Management Settings
Device Management
Device Management Device Information
Device Information Settings
Settings Yes
Yes No
No No
No
Device Information
Device Information Distribution
Distribution Settings
Settings
Register Destinations
Register Destinations Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Set Auto
Set Auto Distribution
Distribution Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Restrict Receiving Device Information Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Restrict Receiving for Each Function Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Set Paper
Set Paper Information
Information Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Communication Log
Communication Log
Report Settings
Report Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Display Job
Display Job Status
Status Before
Before Authentication
Authentication Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Display Job
Display Job Log
Log Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Save Audit
Save Audit Log
Log Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Store Key
Store Key Operation
Operation Log
Log Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
License/Other
License/Other Remote UI
Remote UI Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Access by
Access by General
General User
User Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Access PIN
Access PIN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Message Board/Support
Message Board/Support Link
Link Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Remote Operation
Remote Operation Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Data Management
Data Management Back Up/
Back Up/ Restore
Restore Settings
Settings
Backup Location
Backup Location Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Auto Backup
Auto Backup Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
HDD Data
HDD Data Complete
Complete Deletion
Deletion Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Settings/Reg.Shortcut
Settings/Reg.Shortcut Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
■ Box Settings
■Box Settings
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Function Settings
Function Settings
Receive/ Forward
Receive/ Forward Common Settings
Common Settings
Set Fax/ I-Fax Inbox Set/ Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Yes Yes Yes
Memory RX Inbox PIN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Store/ Access
Store/ Access Files
Files Mail Box Settings
Set/ Register
Set/ Register Mail
Mail Boxes
Boxes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
■ Department ID
■Department ID Management
Management Settings
Settings
Setting Informatio
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Management Settings
Management Settings
User Management
User Management System Manager
System Manager Information
Information Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Department ID
Department ID Management
Management
Register PIN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
353
353
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Main Menu Settings
--
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Main Menu
Main Menu Settings
Settings
Setting File
Setting File Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
■
■Favorite
Favorite Settings
Settings
[Previous Settings]
[Previous Settings] is
is not
not imported.
imported.
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Function Settings
Function Settings
Copy
Copy Register/ Edit
Register/ Edit Favorite
Favorite Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Change Default
Change Default Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Register Options
Register Options Shortcuts
Shortcuts (Regular
(Regular Copy)
Copy) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Register Options
Shortcuts (Express
(Express Copy)
Copy) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Send
Send Common Settings
Common Settings
Register Favorite
Register Favorite Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Edit Favorite
Edit Favorite Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Change Default
Change Default Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Register Options
Shortcuts Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Store/ Access
Store/ Access Files
Files Common Settings
Common Settings
Scan and
Scan and Store
Store Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Access Stored
Access Stored Files
Files Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Copy Basic
Copy Basic Features
Features Screen
Screen
Color Balance
Color Balance (Options)
(Options) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
Access Stored
Access Stored Files
Files
Mail Box (Print) Color Balance
Color Balance (Options)
(Options) Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
■ Address Book
■Address Book
Setting Information
Setting Information
I—
Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Set Destination
Set Destination
Register Destinations
Register Destinations Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Rename Address
Rename Address List
List Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Register One-Touch
Register One-Touch Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
■
■Forwarding Settings
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Function Settings
Function Settings
Receive/Forward
Receive/Forward Common Settings
Common Settings
Forwarding Settings Yes
Yes Yes **
Yes Yes **
Yes
** If
If you
you specify
specify the
the address
address in
in the
the Remote
Remote Address
Address Book
Book as
as the
theforwarding
forwarding destination,
destination, the
the forwarding
forwarding settings
settings will
will not
not be
be imported.
imported.
However,
However, if if the
the machine,
machine, which
which exports
exports setting
setting information,
information, and
and the
the target
target machine
machine for
for importing
importing use
use the
the same
same Remote
Remote Address
Address
Book, the
Book, the forwarding
forwarding settings
settings can
can be
be used
used in
in the
the target
target machine
machine forfor importing.
importing.
■
■Quick
Quick Menu
Menu Settings
Settings
Setting
Setting Information
Information Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Quick Menu
Quick Menu Settings
Settings
Button File
Button File Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
354
2. Technical
Explanation
■
■Paper
Paper Type
Type Management
Management Settings
Settings
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Preferences
Preferences
Paper Settings
Paper Settings Paper Type
Paper Type Management
Management Settings
Settings Custom
Custom Type
Type *1
*1 Yes
Yes Yes *2
Yes *2 Yes *2
Yes *2
*1 :: When
*1 When receiving
receiving paper
paper information,
information, you
you can
can specify
specify whether
whether to
to register
register all
all received
received paper
paper information
information or
or only
only the
the basic
basic
information of
information of each
each paper
paper type.
type.
*2 :: In
*2 In case
case B
B or
or C,
C, only
only <Name>,
<Name>, <Category>,
<Category>, <Weight>,
<Weight>, <Size>,
<Size>, <Finish>,
<Finish>, <Type>,
<Type>, <Color>,
<Color>, <2nd
<2nd Side
Side of
of 2-Sided
2-Sided Page>,
Page>,
and <Adjust
and <Adjust Creep
Creep Correction>
Correction> are
are imported
imported when
when importing
importing paper
paper information.
information. In
In case
case A,
A, all
all paper
paper information
information is
is imported.
imported.
■
■Web Access Settings
Setting Information
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
Web Access
Web Access Settings*
Settings*
Favorites
Favorites Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Settings
Settings Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
** If
If favorites
favorites are
are registered
registered as
as the
the shortcut
shortcut buttons
buttons or
or [Default
[Default Screen
Screen after
after Startup/Restoration]
Startup/Restoration] settings
settings in
in the
the target
target machine
machine for
for
importing, the
importing, the registered
registered information
information is
is changed
changed when
when importing
importing the
the setting
setting information
information of
of Web
Web Access
Access settings.
settings.
■
■Service
Service Mode
Mode
NOTE:
•• It
It needs
needs to to have
have been
been formatted
formatted to
to be
be recognized
recognized byby the
the device.
device. No
No firmware
firmware registration
registration is
is necessary
necessary
•• When
When necessary,
necessary, copy
copy the
the files
files which
which you
you want
want to
to import
import using
using a
a PC
PC inin advance.
advance. Be
Be sure
sure to
to store
store them
them in
in the
the root
root folder
folder of
of
the USB
the USB flash
flash drive
drive
•• Do
Do notnot change
change thethe extension
extension from
from ".dcm"
".dcm" (only
(only ".dcm"
".dcm" files
files can
can be
be recognized)
recognized)
•• It
It is
is desirable
desirable to
to connect
connect the
the USB
USB flash
flash drive
drive before
before entering
entering service
service mode
mode
●
• COPIER
ADJUST
ADJUST
Initial
Initial screen
screen ■ Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY STRD-POS Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-MG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD W-PLT-X Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD W-PLT-Y Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD W-PLT-Z Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD SH-TRGT Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD 100-RG
100-RG Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD 100-GB
100-GB Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTAR-R Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTAR-G Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M2 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M3 Yes
Yes No No
355
355
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initial screen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M4 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M5 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M6 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M7 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M8 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M9 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S1 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S2 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S3
MTF2-S3 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S4 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S5
MTF2-S5 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S6
MTF2-S6 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S7 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S8
MTF2-S8 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S9
MTF2-S9 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD 100DF2GB Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD 100DF2RG Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2R2 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2R10 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2B2 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2B10 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2G2 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2G10 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M1 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M2 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M3 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M4 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M5 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M6 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M7 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M8 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M9 Yes
Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S3 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S9 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-R2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-R10
DFCH-R1 0 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-B2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-B10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-G2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-G10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M11 Yes
Yes No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-M12 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S11 Yes
Yes No
No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF2-S12 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
356
356
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M11
MTF-M11 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-M12
MTF-M12 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S10
MTF-S10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S11
MTF-S11 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD MTF-S12
MTF-S12 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2K2
DFCH2K2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH2K10
DFCH2K10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-K2
DFCH-K2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFCH-K10
DFCH-K10 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTAR-BW
DFTAR-BW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTBK-G
DFTBK-G Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTBK-B
DFTBK-B Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTBK-R
DFTBK-R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CCD
CCD DFTBK-BW
DFTBK-BW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR ADJ-Y
ADJ-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR ADJ-M
ADJ-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR ADJ-C
ADJ-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR ADJ-K
ADJ-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR OFST-Y
OFST-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR OFST-M
OFST-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR OFST-C
OFST-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR OFST-K
OFST-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR LD-OFS-Y
LD-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR LD-OFS-M
LD-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR LD-OFS-C
LD-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR LD-OFS-K
LD-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR MD-OFS-Y
MD-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR MD-OFS-M
MD-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR MD-OFS-C
MD-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR MD-OFS-K
MD-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR HD-OFS-Y
HD-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR HD-OFS-M
HD-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR HD-OFS-C
HD-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR HD-OFS-K
HD-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PL-OFS-Y
PL-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PL-OFS-M
PL-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PL-OFS-C
PL-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PL-OFS-K
PL-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PM-OFS-Y
PM-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PM-OFS-M
PM-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PM-OFS-C
PM-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PM-OFS-K
PM-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PH-OFS-Y
PH-OFS-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PH-OFS-M
PH-OFS-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PH-OFS-C
PH-OFS-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST COLOR
COLOR PH-OFS-K
PH-OFS-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MF-A4R
MF-A4R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MF-A6R
MF-A6R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MF-A4
MF-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK1-A4
MDK1-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK1-A5R
MDK1-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK2-A4
MDK2-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK2-A5R
MDK2-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK3-A4
MDK3-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
357
357
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ MDK3-A5R
MDK3-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ PDK-A4
PDK-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ PDK-A5R
PDK-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS REF-Y
REF-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS REF-M
REF-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS REF-C
REF-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS SIGG-Y
SIGG-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS SIGG-M
SIGG-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS SIGG-C
SIGG-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS SIGG-K
SIGG-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS HLMT-PTY
HLMT-PTY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS HLMT-PTM
HLMT-PTM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS HLMT-PTC
HLMT-PTC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS LLMT-PTY
LLMT-PTY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS LLMT-PTM
LLMT-PTM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS LLMT-PTC
LLMT-PTC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS ALF-C
ALF-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-K-K
P-K-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS HLMT-PTK
HLMT-PTK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS LLMT-PTK
LLMT-PTK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS REF-K
REF-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-HY
DMLMT-HY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-HM
DMLMT-HM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-HC
DMLMT-HC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-LY
DMLMT-LY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-LM
DMLMT-LM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS DMLMT-LC
DMLMT-LC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS CONT-Y
CONT-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS CONT-M
CONT-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS CONT-C
CONT-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS CONT-K
CONT-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-Y1
P-TG-Y1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-M1
P-TG-M1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-C1
P-TG-C1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-K1
P-TG-K1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-Y2
P-TG-Y2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-M2
P-TG-M2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-C2
P-TG-C2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-K2
P-TG-K2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-Y3
P-TG-Y3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-M3
P-TG-M3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-C3
P-TG-C3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST DENS
DENS P-TG-K3
P-TG-K3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXP-Y
PR-EXP-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXP-M
PR-EXP-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXP-C
PR-EXP-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXP-K
PR-EXP-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED AF-EXP-K
AF-EXP-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED AF-EXPK2
AF-EXPK2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED AF-EXPK3
AF-EXPK3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPY2
PR-EXPY2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPM2
PR-EXPM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPC2
PR-EXPC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPY3
PR-EXPY3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
358
358
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPM3
PR-EXPM3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST EXP-LED
EXP-LED PR-EXPC3
PR-EXPC3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REGIST
REGIST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1
ADJ-C1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2
ADJ-C2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-C3
ADJ-C3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF
ADJ-MF Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK
ADJ-DK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE
ADJ-REFE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1
REG-DUP1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-DUP2
REG-DUP2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ PFIX-FAN
PFIX-FAN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK1
ADJ-MDK1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK2
ADJ-MDK2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK3
ADJ-MDK3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ PFIX-SPD
PFIX-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD
EXT-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-DUP3
REG-DUP3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ DCR1-SPD
DCR1-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ DCR2-SPD
DCR2-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ LP-CST
LP-CST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ LP-DK
LP-DK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ LP-DUP
LP-DUP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ LP-MDK
LP-MDK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ LP-MF
LP-MF Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-1
REG-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-2
REG-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-3
REG-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-MF-1
REG-MF-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-MF-2
REG-MF-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-MF-3
REG-MF-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REV-SPD
REV-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ PREG-SPD
PREG-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-REV1
REG-REV1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-REV2
REG-REV2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-REV3
REG-REV3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-SPD1
REG-SPD1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-SPD2
REG-SPD2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-SPD3
REG-SPD3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ CT1-PKLV
CT1-PKLV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ CT2-PKLV
CT2-PKLV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ CT3-PKLV
CT3-PKLV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ DK1-PKLV
DK1-PKLV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-STOP
REG-STOP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ CIS-INIT
CIS-INIT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ L-INIT
L-INIT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ REG-L
REG-L Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGY
DIS-TGY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGM
DIS-TGM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGC
DIS-TGC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGY2
DIS-TGY2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGM2
DIS-TGM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DIS-TGC2
DIS-TGC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTAC-Y
OFSTAC-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
359
359
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTAC-M
OFSTAC-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTAC-C
OFSTAC-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACY2
OFSTACY2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACM2
OFSTACM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACC2
OFSTACC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACY3
OFSTACY3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACM3
OFSTACM3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI OFSTACC3
OFSTACC3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI PRI-FREQ
PRI-FREQ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI DHT-ON
DHT-ON Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-PRI
HV-PRI CHG-TBL
CHG-TBL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR PRE-TR
PRE-TR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT1
2TR-TGT1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT2
2TR-TGT2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT3
2TR-TGT3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT4
2TR-TGT4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT5
2TR-TGT5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT6
2TR-TGT6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT7
2TR-TGT7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-TGT8
2TR-TGT8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR1
2TR-SHR1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR2
2TR-SHR2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR3
2TR-SHR3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR4
2TR-SHR4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR5
2TR-SHR5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR6
2TR-SHR6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR7
2TR-SHR7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2TR-SHR8
2TR-SHR8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR1
TR-PPR1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR2
TR-PPR2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR3
TR-PPR3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR4
TR-PPR4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR5
TR-PPR5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR6
TR-PPR6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR7
TR-PPR7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-PPR8
TR-PPR8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV1
TR-ENV1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV2
TR-ENV2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV3
TR-ENV3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV4
TR-ENV4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV5
TR-ENV5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV6
TR-ENV6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV7
TR-ENV7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-ENV8
TR-ENV8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR1
TR-CLR1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR2
TR-CLR2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR3
TR-CLR3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR4
TR-CLR4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR5
TR-CLR5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR6
TR-CLR6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR7
TR-CLR7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-CLR8
TR-CLR8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP1
TR-DUP1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP2
TR-DUP2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
360
360
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP3
TR-DUP3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP4
TR-DUP4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP5
TR-DUP5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP6
TR-DUP6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP7
TR-DUP7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR TR-DUP8
TR-DUP8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGY
1TR-TGY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGM
1TR-TGM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGC
1TR-TGC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGK1
1TR-TGK1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGK4
1TR-TGK4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2EL
2EL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR POSTSW-K
POSTSW-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 2ELSW
2ELSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGY2
1TR-TGY2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGM2
1TR-TGM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGC2
1TR-TGC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TK12
1TR-TK12 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGY3
1TR-TGY3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGM3
1TR-TGM3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TGC3
1TR-TGC3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TK13
1TR-TK13 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TK42
1TR-TK42 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR 1TR-TK43
1TR-TK43 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-I1
CLN1-I1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-I2
CLN1-I2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-I3
CLN1-I3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-PI1
CLN1-PI1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-PI2
CLN1-PI2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN1-PI3
CLN1-PI3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-I1
CLN2-I1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-I2
CLN2-I2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-I3
CLN2-I3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-PI1
CLN2-PI1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-PI2
CLN2-PI2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST HV-TR
HV-TR CLN2-PI3
CLN2-PI3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-H-Y
REG-H-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-H-C
REG-H-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-H-K
REG-H-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-V-Y
REG-V-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-V-C
REG-V-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-V-K
REG-V-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-H-M
REG-H-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG REG-V-M
REG-V-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG MAG-H
MAG-H Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG MAG-V
MAG-V Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG ANGLE-1
ANGLE-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG MAG-V-K
MAG-V-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG SLP-1
SLP-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG TRPZ-1
TRPZ-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG DRM-SPD1
DRM-SPD1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG DRM-SPD2
DRM-SPD2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST IMG-REG
IMG-REG DRM-SPD3
DRM-SPD3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ1-Y
LSADJI-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
361
361
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ1-M
LSADJ1-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ1-C
LSADJI-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ1-K
LSADJI-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ2-Y
LSADJ2-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ2-M
LSADJ2-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ2-C
LSADJ2-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER LSADJ2-K
LSADJ2-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ-Y
M-ADJ-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ-M
M-ADJ-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ-C
M-ADJ-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ-K
M-ADJ-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ2-Y
M-ADJ2-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ2-M
M-ADJ2-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ2-C
M-ADJ2-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST LASER
LASER M-ADJ2-K
M-ADJ2-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC SEG-ADJ
SEG-ADJ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC K-ADJ
K-ADJ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-ADJ
ACS-ADJ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-EN
ACS-EN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-CNT
ACS-CNT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-EN2
ACS-EN2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-CNT2
ACS-CNT2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC WT-ER-LV
WT-ER-LV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC REOS-PG
REOS-PG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC SEG-ADJ3
SEG-ADJ3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC K-ADJ3
K-ADJ3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-ADJ3
ACS-ADJ3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-EN3
ACS-EN3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC ACS-CNT3
ACS-CNT3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC SH-ADJ
SH-ADJ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC SH-ADJ2
SH-ADJ2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC FAN-HIGH
FAN-HIGH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST MISC
MISC FAN-STBY
FAN-STBY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST PASCAL
PASCAL OFST-P-Y
OFST-P-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST PASCAL
PASCAL OFST-P-M
OFST-P-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST PASCAL
PASCAL OFST-P-C
OFST-P-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST PASCAL
PASCAL OFST-P-K
OFST-P-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST SENS-ADJ
SENS-ADJ UP-ED-OF
UP-ED-OF Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT-K
VCONT-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK-Y
VBACK-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK-M
VBACK-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK-C
VBACK-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK-K
VBACK-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT PT-VCT-Y
PT-VCT-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT PT-VCT-M
PT-VCT-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT PT-VCT-C
PT-VCT-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VDGAIN-Y
VDGAIN-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VDGAIN-M
VDGAIN-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VDGAIN-C
VDGAIN-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPGAIN-Y
LPGAIN-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPGAIN-M
LPGAIN-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPGAIN-C
LPGAIN-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK2-Y
VBACK2-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
362
362
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK2-M
VBACK2-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK2-C
VBACK2-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK2-K
VBACK2-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK3-Y
VBACK3-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK3-M
VBACK3-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK3-C
VBACK3-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VBACK3-K
VBACK3-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPW-C
LPW-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPW-K
LPW-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPW-M
LPW-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT LPW-Y
LPW-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT2-Y
VCONT2-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT2-M
VCONT2-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT2-C
VCONT2-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT2-K
VCONT2-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT3-Y
VCONT3-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT3-M
VCONT3-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT3-C
VCONT3-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER ADJUST
ADJUST V-CONT
V-CONT VCONT3-K
VCONT3-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER DISPLAY
DISPLAY DENS
DENS DVS-CLNK
DVS-CLNK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CLEANING
CLEANING FX-CL-FQ
FX-CL-FQ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CLEANING
CLEANING FX-CLN
FX-CLN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK1-A4
MDK1-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK1-A5R
MDK1-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK2-A4
MDK2-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK2-A5R
MDK2-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK3-A4
MDK3-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST MDK3-A5R
MDK3-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST PDK-A4
PDK-A4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION CST
CST PDK-A5R
PDK-A5R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION INSTALL
INSTALL E-RDS
E-RDS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION INSTALL
INSTALL RGW-PORT
RGW-PORT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION INSTALL
INSTALL RGW-ADR
RGW-ADR Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION INSTALL
INSTALL CDS-CTL
CDS-CTL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION INSTALL
INSTALL BIT-SVC
BIT-SVC Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION MISC-R
MISC-R 1PCLBUDR
1 PCLBUDR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION MISC-R
MISC-R 1PCLBOVR
1 PCLBOVR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER FUNCTION
FUNCTION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DEBUG-1
DEBUG-1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
OPTION
OPTION
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC COIN
COIN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC DK-P
DK-P Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC CARD-SW
CARD-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC STPL-LMT
STPL-LMT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC SC-TYPE
SC-TYPE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC CC-SPSW
CC-SPSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
363
363
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initial screen Large
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC USB-MSK
USB-MSK Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC UNIT-PRC
UNIT-PRC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC DA-PUCT
DA-PUCT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC MIN-PRC
MIN-PRC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC MAX-PRC
MAX-PRC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC MIC-TUN
M IC-TUN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC SRL-SPSW
SRL-SPSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC PDL-THR
PDL-THR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION ACC
ACC CR-TYPE
CR-TYPE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY W-CLN-T
W-CLN-T Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PRI-FAN
PRI-FAN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MODEL-SZ
MODEL-SZ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCANSLCT
SCANSLCT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PASCAL
PASCAL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SENS-CNF
SENS-CNF Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CONFIG
CONFIG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RAW-DATA
RAW-DATA Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IFAX-LIM
IFAX-LIM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY W/SCNR
W/SCNR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX1BC-SW
FX1BC-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SMTPTXPN
SMTPTXPN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SMTPRXPN
SMTPRXPN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY POP3PN
POP3PN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ORG-LGL
ORG-LGL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ORG-LTR
ORG-LTR Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ORG-B5
ORG-B5 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-COPY
UI-COPY Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-BOX
UI-BOX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-SEND
LA-SEND Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-FAX
UI-FAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY D-CLN-TM
D-CLN-TM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FTPTXPN
FTPTXPN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INTPPR-1
INTPPR-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PRN-FLG
PRN-FLG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCN-FLG
SCN-FLG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INTROT-1
INTROT-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INTROT-2
INTROT-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NWERR-SW
NWERR-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVL-PTH
DEVL-PTH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY STS-PORT
STS-PORT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CMD-PORT
CMD-PORT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MODELSZ2
MODELSZ2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY OHP-PTH
OHP-PTH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DFDST-L1
DFDST-L1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DFDST-L2
DFDST-L2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-CMD5
NS-CMD5 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-GSAPI
NS-GSAPI Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-NTLM
NS-NTLM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-PLNWS
NS-PLNWS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-PLN
NS-PLN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NS-LGN
NS-LGN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY T-CRG-SW
T-CRG-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MEAP-PN
MEAP-PN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMIC-BK
TMIC-BK Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
364
364
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SVMD-ENT
SVMD-ENT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DH-MODE
DH-MODE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ENVP-INT
ENVP-INT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY W-CLN-PH
W-CLN-PH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CDEV-IDL
CDEV-IDL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PCHINT-1
PCHINT-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PCHINT-2
PCHINT-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PCHINT-V
PCHINT-V Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FXWRNLVL
FXWRNLVL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FXMSG-SW
FXMSG-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CHNG-STS
CHNG-STS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CHNG-CMD
CHNG-CMD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ANIM-SW
ANIM-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MEAP-SSL
MEAP-SSL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SC-L-CNT
SC-L-CNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MIX-FLG
MIX-FLG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY REPORT-Z
REPORT-Z Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IFXEML-Z
IFXEML-Z Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BMLNKS-Z
BMLNKS-Z Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY KSIZE-SW
KSIZE-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LPD-PORT
LPD-PORT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ORG-A4R
ORG-A4R Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDF-RDCT
PDF-RDCT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY REDU-CNT
REDU-CNT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY REBOOTSW
REBOOTSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VP-ART
VP-ART Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VP-TXT
VP-TXT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-PRINT
UI-PRINT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WUEV-SW
WUEV-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WUEV-INT
WUEV-INT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WUEV-POT
WUEV-POT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WUEV-RTR
WUEV-RTR Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SJB-UNW
SJB-UNW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IMGC-ADJ
IMGC-ADJ Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-RSCAN
UI-RSCAN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-EPRNT
UI-EPRNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-WEB
LA-WEB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-HOLD
UI-HOLD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WEBV-SW
WEBV-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PASCL-TY
PASCL-TY Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CARD-RNG
CARD-RNG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WUEN-LIV
WUEN-LIV Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY COMP-PRT
COMP-PRT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ARCDT-SW
ARCDT-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AST-SEL
AST-SEL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY REGM-SEL
REGM-SEL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY 2TR-RVON
2TR-RVON Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SJOB-CL
SJOB-CL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DHCP-12
DHCP-12 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DHCP-81
DHCP-81 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PT3-INEX
PT3-INEX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IFX-CHIG
IFX-CHIG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY USB-RCNT
USB-RCNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UNLMTBND
UNLMTBND Yes
Yes No
No No
No
365
365
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DNSTRANS
DNSTRANS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MIBCOUNT
MIBCOUNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-MODE
FX-MODE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRY-CISU
DRY-CISU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RMT-CNSL
RMT-CNSL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EVLP-SPD
EVLP-SPD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PROXYRES
PROXYRES Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WOLTRANS
WOLTRANS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DF2DSTL1
DF2DSTL1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DF2DSTL2
DF2DSTL2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY 802XTOUT
802XTOUT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IKERETRY
IKERETRY Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SPDALDEL
SPDALDEL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NCONF-SW
NCONF-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ABK-TOOL
ABK-TOOL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DMX-OF-Y
DMX-OF-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DMX-OF-M
DMX-OF-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DMX-OF-C
DMX-OF-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DMX-OF-K
DMX-OF-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IKEINTVL
IKEINTVL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK5-REST
DK5-REST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK6-REST
DK6-REST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK7-REST
DK7-REST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INSRT-SW
INSRT-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PINT-REG
PINT-REG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SP-LINK
SP-LINK Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY W/RAID
W/RAID Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSWD-SW
PSWD-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SM-PSWD
SM-PSWD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-1
FX-SPD-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-2
FX-SPD-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-3
FX-SPD-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP1
DEV-SP1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP2
DEV-SP2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RPT2SIDE
RPT2SIDE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AFS-JOB
AFS-JOB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AFC-JOB
AFC-JOB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-SBOX
UI-SBOX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-MEM
Ul-MEM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ILOGMODE
ILOGMODE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ILOGKEEP
ILOGKEEP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCL-MS
PSCL-MS Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DMX-DISP
DMX-DISP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-NAVI
Ul-NAVI Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INVALPDL
INVALPDL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IMGCNTPR
IMGCNTPR Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CDS-FIRM
CDS-FIRM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CDS-MEAP
CDS-MEAP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CDS-UGW
CDS-UGW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LOCLFIRM
LOCLFIRM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RSHDW-SW
RSHDW-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TR-BND1
TR-BND1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TR-BND2
TR-BND2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
366
366
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TRCLN1-P
TRCLNI-P Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-WUT
FX-WUT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-ST1
TMP-ST1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-ST2
TMP-ST2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-ST1L
TMP-ST1 L Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-ST2L
TMP-ST2L Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-OHT
TMP-OHT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-L
TMP-L Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DWN-TMP
DWN-TMP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EDG-WAIT
EDG-WAIT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TRCLN2-P
TRCLN2-P Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CHG-INT
CHG-INT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY L-PWR-SW
L-PWR-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCR-SW
SCR-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP3
DEV-SP3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP4
DEV-SP4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP5
DEV-SP5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP6
DEV-SP6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP7
DEV-SP7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-SP8
DEV-SP8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IPTBROAD
IPTBROAD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY T1HP-POS
T1 HP-POS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK4-TURN
DK4-TURN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-TURN
DK1-TURN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK5-TURN
DK5-TURN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK6-TURN
DK6-TURN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK7-TURN
DK7-TURN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-ERRSW
FX-ERRSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-U-ERR
FX-U-ERR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY D-EXPRS
D-EXPRS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FCOT-DSP
FCOT-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MC-FANSW
MC-FANSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PFWFTPRT
PFWFTPRT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FXMSGSW2
FXMSGSW2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-AIR
DK1-AIR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK2-AIR
DK2-AIR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK3-AIR
DK3-AIR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK4-AIR
DK4-AIR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BXNUPLOG
BXNUPLOG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TFL-RTC
TFL-RTC Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY D-MXDSZ
D-MXDSZ Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UI-CUSTM
U I-CUSTM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BUSI-SW
BUSI-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SDLMTWRN
SDLMTWRN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY USZ-FEED
USZ-FEED Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IPMTU
IPMTU Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DDNSINTV
DDNSINTV Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ITB-TYPE
ITB-TYPE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FAX-INT
FAX-INT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDL-Z-LG
PDL-Z-LG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CDS-LVUP
CDS-LVUP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PRI-SHUT
PRI-SHUT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AMSOFFSW
AMSOFFSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY USEUPTNR
USEUPTNR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
367
367
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY UA-OFFSW
UA-OFFSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MIB-NVTA
MIB-NVTA Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TAB-SW
TAB-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCT-BTN
SCT-BTN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DFEJCLED
DFEJCLED Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SVC-RUI
SVC-RUI Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCL-TBL
PSCL-TBL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BGE-OFS
BGE-OFS Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY USER-DSP
USER-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LCDSFLG
LCDSFLG Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BKDH
BKDH Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY STNDBY-A
STNDBY-A Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SDTM-DSP
SDTM-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NWLOGINT
NWLOGINT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MEDIASP1
MEDIASPI Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY MEDIASP2
MEDIASP2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BXSHIFT
BXSHIFT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ENV-SEQ
ENV-SEQ Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY HOME-SW
HOME-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY NO-LGOUT
NO-LGOUT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY T-DLV-BK
T-DLV-BK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY WT-WARN
WT-WARN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY JM-ERR-D
JM-ERR-D Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY JM-ERR-R
JM-ERR-R Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-MODE1
FX-MODE1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-MODE2
FX-MODE2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TR-BND3
TR-BND3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TRCLN3-P
TRCLN3-P Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PRCLNSW
PRCLNSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PR-CLN
PR-CLN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VLAN-SW
VLAN-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VLAN-PKT
VLAN-PKT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TGT-3
TGT-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-1
ADJVPP-1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-2
ADJVPP-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-3
ADJVPP-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY AFTR-FB
AFTR-FB Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY BK-4C-SW
BK-4C-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DITH-FB
DITH-FB Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EXPFL-C
EXPFL-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EXPFL-K
EXPFL-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EXPFL-M
EXPFL-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY EXPFL-Y
EXPFL-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY F/B-2
F/B-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY F/B-3
F/B-3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FL-FB
FL-FB Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-FAN3
FX-FAN3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-FAN4
FX-FAN4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-4
FX-SPD-4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-5
FX-SPD-5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-6
FX-SPD-6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-7
FX-SPD-7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY FX-SPD-8
FX-SPD-8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY HIGH-C
HIGH-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
368
368
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY HIGH-Y
HIGH-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY HIGH-M
HIGH-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY INT-FB
INT-FB Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LOW-C
LOW-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LOW-Y
LOW-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LOW-M
LOW-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LPMAX-K
LPMAX-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LPMIN-K
LPMIN-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LUT-C
LUT-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LUT-K
LUT-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LUT-M
LUT-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY LUT-Y
LUT-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCL-TG1
PSCL-TG1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCL-TG2
PSCL-TG2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCL-TG3
PSCL-TG3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PTN-AFTR
PTN-AFTR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PTN-INT
PTN-INT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PTN-MNG
PTN-MNG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY R-FREQ-L
R-FREQ-L Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY R-FREQ-S
R-FREQ-S Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY S-DITH
S-DITH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TGT-2
TGT-2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM1
TMP-EM1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM2
TMP-EM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM3
TMP-EM3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM4
TMP-EM4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM5
TMP-EM5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM6
TMP-EM6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM7
TMP-EM7 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EM8
TMP-EM8 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-EVLP
TMP-EVLP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC1
TMP-GC1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC2
TMP-GC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC3
TMP-GC3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC4
TMP-GC4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC5
TMP-GC5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-GC6
TMP-GC6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H1
TMP-H1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H2
TMP-H2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H3
TMP-H3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H4
TMP-H4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H5
TMP-H5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-H6
TMP-H6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-L2
TMP-L2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-L3
TMP-L3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC1
TMP-MC1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC2
TMP-MC2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC3
TMP-MC3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC4
TMP-MC4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC5
TMP-MC5 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-MC6
TMP-MC6 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-P1
TMP-P1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-P2
TMP-P2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-POST
TMP-POST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
369
369
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-R1
TMP-R1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-R2
TMP-R2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-R3
TMP-R3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-TH1
TMP-TH1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TMP-TH2
TMP-TH2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY TR-BNDSW
TR-BNDSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DLV-FAN
DLV-FAN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RFREQ-TM
RFREQ-TM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CIS-LED
CIS-LED Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CIS-LV
CIS-LV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CIS-SW
CIS-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CIS-TH
CIS-TH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CST1-PSP
CST1 -PSP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CST2-PSP
CST2-PSP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CST3-PSP
CST3-PSP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-ALVD
DK1-ALVD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-ALVU
DK1-ALVU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-LDWN
DK1-LDWN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK1-PSP
DK1-PSP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRBNDSW1
DRBNDSWI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRBNDSW2
DRBNDSW2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRBNDTM1
DRBNDTMI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRBNDTM2
DRBNDTM2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDK-REST
PDK-REST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PSCHG-SW
PSCHG-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CLN-RT
CLN-RT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK2-ALVU
DK2-ALVU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK2-ALVD
DK2-ALVD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK3-ALVU
DK3-ALVU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DK3-ALVD
DK3-ALVD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVREFLV
DEVREFLV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PBJ-ORD
PBJ-ORD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY IMGWIDTH
IMGWIDTH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY R-V-MULT
R-V-MULT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY R-ACT-TM
R-ACT-TM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY R-LTMP
R-LTMP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY RFREQ-SW
RFREQ-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-Y
ADJVPP-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-M
ADJVPP-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-C
ADJVPP-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ADJVPP-K
ADJVPP-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHOF-Y
VTHOF-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHOF-M
VTHOF-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHOF-C
VTHOF-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHOF-K
VTHOF-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHLOF-Y
VTHLOF-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHLOF-M
VTHLOF-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHLOF-C
VTHLOF-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY VTHLOF-K
VTHLOF-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVLVTHY
DEVLVTHY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVLVTHM
DEVLVTHM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVLVTHC
DEVLVTHC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEVLVTHK
DEVLVTHK Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-STOP
DEV-STOP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
370
370
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-Y1
SCWSP-Y1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-M1
SCWSP-M1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-C1
SCWSP-C1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-K1
SCWSP-K1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-Y2
SCWSP-Y2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-M2
SCWSP-M2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-C2
SCWSP-C2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-K2
SCWSP-K2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-Y3
SCWSP-Y3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-M3
SCWSP-M3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-C3
SCWSP-C3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY SCWSP-K3
SCWSP-K3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVS-REF1
DVS-REF1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-Y2
DVSCT-Y2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-M2
DVSCT-M2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-C2
DVSCT-C2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-K2
DVSCT-K2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-Y3
DVSCT-Y3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-M3
DVSCT-M3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-C3
DVSCT-C3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DVSCT-K3
DVSCT-K3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DEV-EXT
DEV-EXT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY KSPITHUM
KSPITHUM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY DRROT-SW
DRROT-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CLN-TM
CLN-TM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY 4CBKSPIT
4CBKSPIT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY CPSCR-SW
CPSCR-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ROT-COND
ROT-CON D Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY ITBROTSW
ITBROTSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDMX-O-Y
PDMX-O-Y Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDMX-O-M
PDMX-O-M Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDMX-O-C
PDMX-O-C Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION BODY
BODY PDMX-O-K
PDMX-O-K Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST U1-NAME
U1-NAME Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST U2-NAME
U2-NAME Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST U3-NAME
U3-NAME Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST U4-NAME
U4-NAME Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST1-P1
CST1 -P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST1-P2
CST1 -P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST2-P1
CST2-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST2-P2
CST2-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST3-P1
CST3-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST3-P2
CST3-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST4-P1
CST4-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST4-P2
CST4-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST5-P1
CST5-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST5-P2
CST5-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST6-P1
CST6-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST6-P2
CST6-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST7-P1
CST7-P1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST7-P2
CST7-P2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST1-U1
CST1 -U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST1-U3
CST1 -U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST2-U1
CST2-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
371
371
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST2-U3
CST2-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST3-U1
CST3-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST3-U3
CST3-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST4-U1
CST4-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST4-U3
CST4-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST5-U1
CST5-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST5-U3
CST5-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST6-U1
CST6-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST6-U3
CST6-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST7-U1
CST7-U1 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST CST7-U3
CST7-U3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D1-ASIZE
D1-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D2-ASIZE
D2-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D3-ASIZE
D3-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D5-ASIZE
D5-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D6-ASIZE
D6-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D7-ASIZE
D7-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D8-ASIZE
D8-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION CST
CST D9-ASIZE
D9-ASIZE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE IMG-CONT
IMG-CONT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE AP-OPT
AP-OPT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE AP-ACCNT
AP-ACCNT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE AP-CODE
AP-CODE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE NWCT-TM
NWCT-TM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION INT-FACE
INT-FACE VTRNS-TO
VTRNS-TO Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COPY-LIM
COPY-LIM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SLEEP
SLEEP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SIZE-DET
SIZE-DET Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER2
COUNTER2 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER3
COUNTER3 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER4
COUNTER4 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER5
COUNTER5 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER6
COUNTER6 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DATE-DSP
DATE-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER MB-CCV
MB-CCV Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CONTROL
CONTROL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER B4-L-CNT
B4-L-CNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER MF-LG-ST
MF-LG-ST Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CNT-DISP
CNT-DISP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COPY-JOB
COPY-JOB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER OP-SZ-DT
OP-SZ-DT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER NW-SCAN
NW-SCAN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER INS-C/S
INS-C/S Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER HDCR-DSP
HDCR-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER JOB-INVL
JOB-INVL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER LGSW-DSP
LGSW-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER TAB-ROT
TAB-ROT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PR-PSESW
PR-PSESW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER IDPRN-SW
IDPRN-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CPRT-DSP
CPRT-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PCL-COPY
PCL-COPY Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CNT-SW
CNT-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER TAB-ACC
TAB-ACC Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER BCNT-AST
BCNT-AST Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
372
372
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
screen Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PRJOB-CP
PRJOB-CP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DFLT-CPY
DFLT-CPY Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DFLT-BOX
DFLT-BOX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DOC-REM
DOC-REM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DPT-ID-7
DPT-ID-7 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER RUI-RJT
RUI-RJT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CTM-S06
CTM-506 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER FREG-SW
FREG-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER IFAX-SZL
IFAX-SZL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER IFAX-PGD
IFAX-PGD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER MEAPSAFE
MEAPSAFE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER TRAY-FLL
TRAY-FLL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PRNT-POS
PRNT-POS Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER AFN-PSWD
AFN-PSWD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PTJAM-RC
PTJAM-RC Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PDL-NCSW
PDL-NCSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SLP-SLCT
SLP-SLCT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER PS-MODE
PS-MODE Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CNCT-RLZ
CNCT-RLZ Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER7
COUNTER7 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER COUNTER8
COUNTER8 Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER 2C-CT-SW
2C-CT-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER LDAP-SW
LDAP-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER FROM-OF
FROM-OF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DOM-ADD
DOM-ADD Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER FILE-OF
FILE-OF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER MAIL-OF
MAIL-OF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER IFAX-OF
IFAX-OF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER LDAP-DEF
LDAP-DEF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER FINGM-SW
FINGM-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DK3-ASST
DK3-ASST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER FREE-DSP
FREE-DSP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER TNRB-SW
TNRB-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CLR-TIM
CLR-TIM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER HDCR-DSW
HDCR-DSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DK1-ASST
DK1-ASST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DK4-ASST
DK4-ASST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER DK2-ASST
DK2-ASST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SNMP-COA
SNMP-COA Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SNMP-COU
SNMP-COU Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER BWCL-DSP
BWCL-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER STPL-MAX
STPL-MAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SCALL-SW
SCALL-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER SCALLCMP
SCALLCMP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER USBH-DSP
USBH-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER USBM-DSP
USBM-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER USBI-DSP
USBI-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER CTCHKDSP
CTCHKDSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER USBB-DSP
USBB-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER USBR-DSP
USBR-DSP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER POL-SCAN
POL-SCAN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER JA-SBOX
JA-SBOX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER JA-DFAX
JA-DFAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER
COPIER OPTION
OPTION USER
USER JA-REP
JA-REP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
373
373
2. Technical
Explanation

screen Large Middle
Middle Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FREP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-BOX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FORM Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PREV Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PULL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PDLB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JOBK
JA-JOBK Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JDF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI
JA-RU I Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-WEB Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER EXP-CRYP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP1SW
SLEEPISW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNCL-ATH Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER EZY-SCRP Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DMN-MTCH Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
● FEEDER
• FEEDER
ADJUST
ADJUST

Large Middle
Middle Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
FEEDER ADJUST DOCST
DOCST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPEED Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST DOCST2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPD2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN1
ADJMSCNI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN1
ADJSSCNI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN2
ADJSSCN2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
● SORTER
• SORTER
ADJUST
ADJUST
Initial screen
&Mal Large
scree Large Middle
Middle Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER ADJUST PNCH-Y Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST CV-REG-L Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-REG-S
CV-REG-S Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST CV-CENT Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CLCT-SB
CLCT-SB Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-F-A4 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-R-A4 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-F-L Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-R-L Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUING Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-DLV Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GRP-CHNG Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SIZE-H Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SIZE-W Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-LNG Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST 110RGT-1
ORGT-1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST 110RGT-2
ORGT-2 Yes
Yes No No
ORGT-3 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST 200RGT-1 Yes
Yes No No
374
374
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initial screen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER ADJUST 200RGT-2 Yes
Yes No No
200RGT-3 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SLD-MTR Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-VR0
STK-VRO Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-VR25 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-LOW
GLU-LOW Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-UP
GLU-UP Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-EDG1 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-EDG3
GLU-EDG3 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-AMT1 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-MOVE Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-TEMP Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUAMT1C
GLUAMTIC Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUAMT2C Yes
Yes No No
GLUAMT3C Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUAMT4C Yes
Yes No No
GLUAMT5C Yes
Yes No No
GLUAMT6C Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ1
PFLTRRZI Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC1
PFLTRRCI Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R31 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR31 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PF-A4R42 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PFLTRR42 Yes
Yes No No
Yes No No
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-F1 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-F2 Yes
Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-R1 Yes
Yes No No
375
375
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST STP-R2
STP-R2 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SDL-STP
SDL-STP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SDL-ALG
SDL-ALG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SBRL-MTR
SBRL-MTR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST RTR-DWA4
RTR-DWA4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST ST-ALG1
ST-ALG1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SW-UP-RL
SW-UP-RL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PUN-V-RG
PUN-V-RG Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PRCS-RET
PRCS-RET Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST UP-CL
UP-CL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST DW-CL
DW-CL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST THC-CL
THC-CL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST THC-PUSH
THC-PUSH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST OFST-STC
OFST-STC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST THN-STC
THN-STC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST STP-P-CH
STP-P-CH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST TRY-NIS
TRY-NIS Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST TRY-SU
TRY-SU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST FIN-NIS
FIN-NIS Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST 1SHT-SHF
1SHT-SHF Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SDL-SWCH
SDL-SWCH Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SDL-ALM
SDL-ALM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST THN-STCL
THN-STCL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PF-LGL41
PF-LGL41 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST PF-LGL42
PF-LGL42 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SC-OFST
SC-OFST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST KEY-RPT
KEY-RPT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST SET-SHFT
SET-SHFT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER ADJUST
ADJUST JOB-SHFT
JOB-SHFT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
MISC
MISC
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC PRESET
PRESET Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC SORTEDGE
SORTEDGE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC DOCORI
DOCORI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC LSFST
LSFST Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC RCVRYMOD
RCVRYMOD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC HEADORI
HEADORI Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC STOPTYPE
STOPTYPE Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C0SGNL
COSGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C1SGNL
CISGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C2SGNL
C2SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C3SGNL
C3SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C4SGNL
C4SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C6SGNL
C6SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C7SGNL
C7SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S0SGNL
SOSGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S1SGNL
SISGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S2SGNL
S2SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S3SGNL
S3SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S4SGNL
S4SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S5SGNL
SOSGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S6SGNL
S6SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC S7SGNL
S7SGNL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
376
376
2. Technical
Explanation
L Initial
Initialscreen
screens Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C0PW
COPW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C1PW
C1 PW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C3PW
C3PW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C0DLY
CODLY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C1DLY
C1 DLY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C3DLY
C3DLY Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC FSC2D
FSC2D Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC LSC2D
LSC2D Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C4SZ
C4SZ Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C4SWDL
C4SWDL Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC DFSHMIN
DFSHMIN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC OPSHMIN
OPSHMIN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC DFMINTIM
DFMINTIM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC OPMINTIM
OPMINTIM Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC DFMINSET
DFMINSET Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC OPMINSET
OPMINSET Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC DFMINJOB
DFMINJOB Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC OEMSNSR
OEMSNSR Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC TOUTS3
TOUTS3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC TOUTS4
TOUTS4 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC EXTFIN
EXTFIN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC NOFSETAF
NOFSETAF Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C5C6JDU
C5C6JDU Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C5C6JDSD
C5C6JDSD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER MISC
MISC C5C6BD
C5C6BD Yes
Yes No
No No
No
OPTION
OPTION
EInitial screen
ft! screen
SORTER
SORTER
Large
Large
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
Middle Small
Small
BLNK-SW
BLNK-SW
Case A
Case
Yes
Yes
A Case B
Case
No
No
B Case C
Case
No
No
C
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION MD-SPRTN
MD-SPRTN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION SDL-PRS
SDL-PRS Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION BUFF-SW
BUFF-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TRY-EJCT
TRY-EJCT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION PN-SKEW
PN-SKEW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION MHPN-OHP
MHPN-OHP Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TBWRNLVL
TBWRNLVL Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TBPCOUNT
TBPCOUNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TBP-POSW
TBP-POSW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION CURL-SW
CURL-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TRY-OVER
TRY-OVER Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION ST1-LMT
ST1-LMT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION ST2-LMT
ST2-LMT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF1N
GLU-OF1 N Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF2N
GLU-OF2N Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF3N
GLU-OF3N Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF4N
GLU-OF4N Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF1C
GLU-OF1 C Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF2C
GLU-OF2C Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF3C
GLU-OF3C Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION GLU-OF4C
GLU-OF4C Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TRM-LMT
TRM-LMT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TRY-PATH
TRY-PATH Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION PRCS-SP1
PRCS-SP1 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION STCR-DWN
STCR-DWN Yes
Yes No
No No
No
377
377
2. Technical
Explanation
Initial
Initialscreen
screen Large
Large Middle
Middle Small
Small Case A
Case A Case B
Case B Case C
Case C
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION BUFF-INT
BUFF-INT Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION PRCS-SP3
PRCS-SP3 Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION NSRT-STC
NSRT-STC Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION STP-MAX
STP-MAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION SDL-MAX
SDL-MAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION VFLD-MAX
VFLD-MAX Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION NEAT-MIX
NEAT-MIX Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION NEAT-SW
NEAT-SW Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION TRM-CNT
TRM-CNT Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION THN-TRSW
THN-TRSW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION THN-SW
THN-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION SWGUP-SW
SWGUP-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION CALG-SW
CALG-SW Yes
Yes No
No No
No
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION THN-STK
THN-STK Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
SORTER
SORTER OPTION
OPTION ST1-MFH
ST1-MFH Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
No
378
378
3 PeriodicalService
Adigki Periodical
Periodical
Service
Periodical Service
Service Operation
Operation Item....
Item.... 380
380
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
Periodical Service Operation Item
Process Unit
0 Process Unit
Bk
C
M
Y
[7]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[10]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
No. Part Name

Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Estimated Service Modes
Service Modes Remark Con- Operator
Con- Operator
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
(sheet), (Parts counter)
(Parts counter) tents mainte-
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning subsub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
replace-
replace- timing * items
items parts
parts
ment
ment
[1] Drum Cleaning FM2-9298 Less than 4 2,000,000 CLEANING PRE-EXP-Y Cleaning with CLEA
Pre-exposure Unit 45 minutes -_ PRE-EXP-M lint-free paper NING
(Y/M/C/Bk) PRE-EXP-C moistened
PRE-EXP-K with alcohol
380
380
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Service Modes Remark
Remark Con- Operator
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
replace-
replace- timing **
timing items
item parts
parts
ment
ment
II
[2] Drum
[2] Drum Unit
Unit Support
Support -- Less than
Less than 4 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING DRM-SFTS
DRM-SFTS Clean with dry CLEA Yes
Shaft
Shaft 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
500,000 lint-free paper NING
NING
[3] Developing As-
[3] - Less than
Less than 4 2,000,000 CLEANING PKIT-LFY Clean with dry CLEA Yes
sembly Lower
sembly Lower 45 minutes
45 minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 PKIT-LFM lint-free paper NING
NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) PKIT-LFC
PKIT-LF
[4] Drum Patch Sen-
[4] FM1-H019 Less
FM1-H019 Less than
than 2 2,000,000 CLEANING
2,000,000 CLEANING DV-P-S-Y Cleaning with CLEA
sor (Y/M)
sor (Y/M) 45 minutes
FM1-H020 45 minutes 2 _- DV-P-S-M lint-free paper NING
NING
Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sen-
Sen- DV-P-S-C moistened
moistened
sor (C/Bk)
sor (C/Bk) DV-P-S-K with alcohol
Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sen-
Sen- 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 DV-P-S-Y Re-
sor (Y/M)
sor (Y/M) -_ DV-P-S-M place-
place-
Drum Patch
Drum Patch Sen-
Sen- DV-P-S-C ment
ment
sor (C/Bk)
sor (C/Bk) DV-P-S-K
[5] Photosensitive
[5] Photosensitive 8533B
8533B Less than
Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1
1,500,000 PT-DR-Y Re- Yes
Yes
Drum (Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes 1,500,000
1,500,000 PT-DR-M place-
PT-DR-C ment
ment
PT-DRM
[6] Drum
[6] Drum Cleaning
Cleaning FC5-8829
FC5-8829 Less than
1,500,000 CL-BLD-Y Re- Yes
Yes
Blade (Y/M/C/Bk)
Blade (Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes
45 minutes 1,500,000
1,500,000 CL-BLD-M place-
place-
CL-BLD-C ment
ment
CLN-BLD
[7] Drum Cleaning Kit FM2-9258
[7] FM2-9258 Less than
1,500,000 BS-SL-Y Re- Yes
Yes
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes
45 minutes 1,500,000
1,500,000 BS-SL-M place-
place-
BS-SL-C
BS-SL-C ment
ment
BS-SL-K
[8] Drum Cleaning
[8] FE8-2737 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1
1,500,000 CL-FUR-Y Re-
Brush Roller 60 minutes
60 minutes -_ CL-FUR-M place-
place-
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) CL-FUR-C
CL-FUR-C ment
ment
CL-FUR-K
[9] Drum Cleaning
[9] FL2-2707 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1
1,500,000 SID-F-Y Included in
Included in the Re-
the Re-
Front/Rear Side FL2-2708 45 minutes 4 -_ SID-F-M Drum Clean- place-
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk)
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk) SID-F-C ing Kit ment
ment
SID-F-K
[10] Drum Cleaning
[10] FL0-2642
FLO-2642 Less than
Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 EDGE-F-Y Included in the Re-
Re-
Front/Rear End
Front/Rear End FL0-2643
FLO-2643 45 minutes
45 minutes 4 -_ EDGE-F-M Drum Clean-
Drum Clean- place-
place-
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk)
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk) EDGE-F-C ing Kit ment
ment
EDGE-F-K
[11] Drum Cleaning
[11] FL2-2709
FL2-2709 Less than
1,500,000 DRBL-1 SU-SHT-Y
SU-SHT-Y Included in
Included in the Re-
the Re-
Scoop-up Sheet
Scoop-up Sheet 45 minutes
45 minutes _- SU-SHT-M
SU-SHT-M Drum Clean-
Drum Clean- place-
place-
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) SU-SHT-C
SU-SHT-C ing Kit ment
ment
SU-SHT-K
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
iPR C10000VP (Intermittent
(Intermittent printing
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
C8000VP (Intermittent
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP)
(ORP) iPR C10000VP (Intermittent
iPR C10000VP (Intermittent printing
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
381
3. Periodical Service
PrimaryCharging
0 Primary ChargingAssembly
Assembly
Bk
C
M
Y
[4]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[1]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Primary Charging FM1-K629 Less than 5
[1] 4 4,000,000 PRDC-1 PRM-U-Y Re-
Re- Yes
Yes
Assembly
Assembly minutes
minutes (100ppm)
(100ppm) PRM-U-M place-
place-
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) 2,880,000
2,880,000 PRM-U-C
PRM-U-C ment
ment
(80ppm)
(80ppm) PRM-UNIT
500,000
500,000
(100ppm)
(100ppm)
360,000
360,000
(80ppm)
(80ppm)
[2] Primary Charging
[2] -- Less than
Less than 4 500,000 --
500,000 -- Cleaning with
Cleaning with CLEA
Assembly Shield
Assembly Shield 30 minutes
30 minutes 4
4 (100ppm)
(100ppm) lint-free paper NING
NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000
360,000 moistened
moistened
(80ppm)
(80ppm) with alcohol
when replac-
382
382
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q'tQ't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[2] Primary Charging
[2] -- Less than
Less than 4 - - - ing the Pri- CLEA
Assembly Shield
Assembly Shield 30 minutes
30 minutes 4 mary Charg-
mary Charg- NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) ing Wire
[3] Primary
[3] Primary Charging FC0-9857
Charging FCO-9857 Less than
Less than 4 500,000 PRDC-1
500,000 PRM-G-Y Re-
Assembly Grid 15 minutes (100ppm) PRM-G-M place-
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000
360,000 PRM-G-C
PRM-G-C ment
ment
(80ppm)
(80ppm) PRM-GRID
-
[4] Primary Charging FM2-9257
[4] Less than
500,000 PRM-U-Y2 Re-
Wire Unit 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-U-M2 place-
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000
360,000 PRM-U-C2 ment
ment
(80ppm)
(80ppm) PRM-UNT2
-
[5] Primary Charging FB4-3687
[5] Less than AR 500,000 PRDC-1
500,000 PRM-W-Y Re-
Wire (Y/M/C/Bk) 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-W-M place-
360,000
360,000 PRM-W-C ment
ment
(80ppm)
(80ppm) PRM-WIRE
-
[6] Primary Charging FL2-0464
[6] FL2-0464 Less than
500,000 PRM-F-Y Re-
Wire Cleaning Pad FL2-4271 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-F-M place-
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000
360,000 PRM-F-C ment
ment
(Primary Charging (80ppm)
(80ppm) PRM-F-K
Wire Cleaning Pad -_
Holder,
Holder,
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning
Slider )
[7] Primary Charging FLO-0508
[7] FL0-0508 Less than
500,000 PRDC-1 GR-PAD-Y Re-
Assembly Grid
Assembly Grid 15 minutes
15 minutes (100ppm)
(100ppm) GR-PAD-M place-
place-
Plate Cleaning 360,000
360,000 GR-PAD-C ment
ment
Pad (Y/M/C/Bk)
Pad (Y/M/C/Bk) (80ppm)
(80ppm) GR-PAD-K
-
[8] Primary Charging -
[8] Less than
Less than 4 500,000 CLEANING -
500,000 The operator
The CLEA
operator CLEA Yes
Yes
Wire Cleaning Mo- 10 minutes
10 minutes (100ppm)
(100ppm) cleans
cleans this
this NING
tor HP
tor HP Sensors
Sensors (Y/
(Y/ 360,000
360,000 part
part when
when re-
re-
M/C/Bk) (80ppm)
(80ppm) placing
placing the
the
-_ Primary
Primary
Charging As-
sembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
with a blower.
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
383
DevelopingAssembly
0 Developing Assembly
Bk
C
M
Y
[1]
[2], [3]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning items
sub items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Dustproof
[1] Dustproof Glass
Glass -- Less than
Less than 5
5 4 100,000 CLEANING DP-GRS-Y
100,000 Clean with dry CLEA Yes
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk) minutes
minutes 100,000
100,000 DP-GRS-M lint-free paper. NING
NING
DP-GRS-C If itit is
If is badly
badly
DP-GRS soiled,
soiled, clean
clean
with lint-free
paper
paper mois-mois-
tened
tened with with al-
al-
cohol.
[2] Developing As-
[2] FM1-A304 Less
FM1-A304 Less than
than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 DV-UNT-Y Re-
Re-
sembly (Y/M/C/Bk)
sembly (Y/M/C/Bk) 15 minutes
15 minutes -_ DV-UNT-M place-
place-
DV-UNT-C ment
ment
DV-UNT-K
384
384
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No. Part Name

Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing * items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
I 111._
[3] Developer 8537B Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 DV-MT-Y Re-
(Y/M/C/Bk) 8536B 45 minutes -_ DV-MT-M place-
8535B DV-MT-C ment
8534B DV-MT-K
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
385
385
ITBUnit
0 ITB Unit (1/2)
(1/2)
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
[7]
[9] [2] [1]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[6]
[5]
[7] [9]
386
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] ITB FM3-1644 Less than
Less than 1
1 2,400,000 DRBL-1
2,400,000 TR-BLT Re- Yes
Yes
30 minutes
30 minutes 2,400,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[2] Primary Transfer FC8-6852
FC8-6852 Less than
1,000,000 1TR-RL-Y Re- Yes
Yes
Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) 15 minutes
15 minutes 1,000,000
1,000,000 1TR-RL-M place-
place-
1TR-RL-C ment
ment
1TR-RL-K
ITB Steering
[3] ITB Steering Roller FC7-1858
Roller FC7-1858 Less than
Less than 1
1 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Clean with al- CLEA Yes
45 minutes
45 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 cohol
cohol and
and lint-
lint- NING
free paper.
free paper.
Then, clean
with lint-free
paper
paper mois-
mois-
tened
tened with
with wa-
wa-
ter
ter and
and wipe
wipe
away moisture
away moisture
with dry lint-
free paper.
free paper.
[4] ITB Idler Roller - Less than 2 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Clean with al- CLEA Yes
45 minutes
45 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 cohol
cohol and
and lint-
lint- NING
free paper.
free paper.
Then, clean
with lint-free
paper
paper mois-
mois-
tened with wa-
ter
ter and
and wipe
wipe
away moisture
away moisture
with dry lint-
free paper.
free paper.
[5] ITB Cleaning FC5-9156
FC5-9156 Less than
2,000,000 ITB-CLN1 Re- Yes
Yes
Brush Roller 30 minutes
30 minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[6] ITB Cleaning FC6-4910
FC6-4910 Less than
2,000,000 ITB-BLD1 Re- Yes
Yes
Blade
Blade 30 minutes
30 minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[7] Secondary
[7] Secondary Trans- FM1-A359 Less
Trans- FM1-A359 Less than
than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 2TR-INRL Re- Yes
Yes
fer Inner Roller 30 minutes
30 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 place-
place-
Unit
Unit ment
ment
[8] ITB Cleaning Unit FM1-A366
FM1-A366 Less
Less than
than 1
1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1
9,000,000 ITBCLN-U Re- Yes
Yes
15 minutes
15 minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
ment
[9] Secondary
[9] Secondary Trans- FL0-0362
Trans- FLO-0362 Less than
Less than 1
1 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 2TR-E-GU Re-
fer Inlet Upper 10 minutes
10 minutes -_ place-
place-
Guide
Guide ment
ment
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP)
(ORP) iPR
iPR C10000VP (Intermittent printing
C10000VP (Intermittent printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
387
387
ITBUnit
0 ITB Unit (2/2)
(2/2)
[7]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning items
sub items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] ITB Torque Limiter FE3-1826
[1] Less than 1
1 1,500,000 DRBL-1 TRQ-LIMT Re-
15 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[2] ITB Inner Surface FM2-2145
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 ITB-SCRP Re-
Re- Yes
Yes
Cleaning Scraper
Cleaning Scraper 45 minutes
45 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 place-
place-
Unit
Unit ment
ment
[3] ITB
[3] ITB Edge
Edge Sensor
Sensor WG8-5830 Less
WG8-5830 Less than
than 1
1 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
45 minutes
45 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 a blower
a blower brush
brush NING
388
388
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[4] ITB HP Sensor Less than
FM1-G742 Less than 2 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
45 minutes
45 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 a blower
a blower brush
brush NING
[5] Leading
[5] Leading Edge
Edge FL2-2024
FL2-2024 Less than 1
1 2,000,000 DRBL-1
2,000,000 PCH-S-T Re- Yes
Yes
Registration Patch
Registration Patch 15 minutes
15 minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
Sensor Cleaning
Sensor Cleaning ment
ment
Shutter
Shutter
[6] Leading
[6] Leading Edge
Edge FM2-9256
FM2-9256 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING TREG-SNS
TREG-SNS Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
Registration Patch
Registration Patch 30 minutes
30 minutes 2,400,000
2,400,000 ter
ter and
and lint-
lint- NING
Sensor
Sensor free paper.
free paper.
Registration Patch
[7] Registration Patch FMO-1481
FM0-1481 Less than
Less than 3
3 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING REGP-SNS
REGP-SNS After cleaning CLEA Yes
Sensor (Front/
Sensor (Front/ 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000
500,000 with a Blower NING
Middle/Rear)
Middle/Rear) Brush, clean
with lint-free
paper
paper mois-
mois-
tened
tened with
with wa-
wa-
ter.
ter.
ITB Patch
[8] ITB Patch Sensor FK3-3203
Sensor FK3-3203 Less than
Less than 3
3 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING REGP-SNS
REGP-SNS After cleaning CLEA Yes
(Y/M/C)
(Y/M/C) 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000
500,000 with a Blower NING
Brush, clean
with lint-free
paper
paper mois-
mois-
tened with wa-
ter.
ter.
[9] Registration
[9] Registration Patch
Patch -- Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING PCH-SHTR
PCH-SHTR Clean with a CLEA Yes
Shutter
Shutter 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000
500,000 blower
blower brush,
brush, NING
and then
and then with
with
water and lint-
free paper.
free paper.
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
389
389
3. Periodical
Service
SecondaryTransfer
0 Secondary Transfer Unit
Unit
[11]
[5] [4]
[1]
[8]
[3]
[8] [9] [9]
[12] [7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[10]
390
390
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Secondary
Less than 1
1 1,000,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S
1,000,000 Cleaning with CLEA Yes
fer Inlet Lower 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
NING
Guide
Guide moistened
moistened
with alcohol
The operator
The operator
cleans
cleans this
this
part
part when
when re-
re-
placing
placing the
the
Primary
Primary
Charging As-
sembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
(Y/M/C/Bk)
with a blower.
[2] Secondary Trans- FM1-A344 Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S Cleaning with CLEA Yes
fer Outlet
fer Outlet Separa-
Separa- 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
NING
tion Guide
tion Guide moistened
moistened
with alcohol
[3] Secondary
[3] Secondary Trans- FM1-A345 Less
Trans- FM1-A345 Less than
than 1
1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1
9,000,000 2TR-BL-U Re- Yes
Yes
fer Outer
fer Outer Belt
Belt Unit
Unit 10 minutes
10 minutes 3,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[4] Secondary
[4] Secondary Trans- FE3-1953
Trans- FE3-1953 Less than
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 2TR-BLT Re-
fer Outer
fer Outer Belt
Belt 30 minutes
30 minutes -- place-
place-
ment
ment
[5] Secondary
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 2TR-ROLL Re-
fer Outer Roller 30 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[6] Secondary
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 2TR-SP Re-
place-
Grounding Spring ment
ment
1
1
[7] Secondary
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 2TR-SP Re-
place-
Grounding Spring ment
ment
2
[8] Secondary Trans- FE4-6085 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 2TRCL-RL Re-
fer Cleaning Brush 30 minutes
30 minutes - place-
place-
Roller (Right)(Left) ment
ment
[9] Secondary
[9] Secondary Trans- FC5-9426
Trans- FC5-9426 Less than
1,000,000 2TRCL-BL Re-
fer Bias Roller 30 minutes
30 minutes - place-
place-
Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Blade ment
ment
[10] Secondary
Less than 1
1 1,000,000 DRBL-1
1,000,000 2TR-SIDS Re-
fer Cleaning
fer Cleaning Edge FL0-5504
Edge FLO-5504 15 minutes
15 minutes 1 - place-
place-
Seal (Front)
Seal (Front) // Sec-
Sec- ment
ment
ondary Transfer
ondary Transfer
Cleaning Edge
Cleaning Edge
Seal (Rear)
[11] Pre-fixing Feed -- Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S After cleaning CLEA
Sensor 1,
Sensor 1, Secon-
Secon- 10 minutes
10 minutes 1 - with a Blower NING
dary
dary Transfer
Transfer Out-
Out- Brush, clean
let Sensor
let Sensor with lint-free
paper
paper mois-
mois-
tened
tened with
with al-
al-
cohol.
[12] Secondary
Less than 1
1 1,000,000 DRBL-1
1,000,000 2TCLSCRP Re-
fer Scraper
fer Scraper Sheet
Sheet 15 minutes
place-
ment
ment
391
391
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
Registration Feed
Registration Feed Unit
Unit
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[3]
No. Part Name

Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't Estimated
at Estimated Service Modes
Con- Operator
time re- y life
y life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Cross-feed Roller FL2-4074
[1] Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING SS-RG-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Cleaning Member 15 minutes 500,000 a blower brush NING
Cross-feed Roller Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 CR-R-CLN Re-
Cleaning Member 10 minutes -_ place-
ment
[2] Cross-feed Roller FC5-9721
[2] Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING SS-RG-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
15 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
Cross-feed Roller Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 CR-RL Re-
ment
392
392
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No. Part Name

Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
items parts
parts
I i ik ceme
ceme
[3] Pre-fixing Feed
[3] FC6-8098 Less than 8 500,000 CLEANING 2TR-FDPS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Belt 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[4] Pre-fixing Feed
[4] FL3-2902 Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING BLT-BRSH Cleaning with CLEA
Belt Cleaning 10 minutes - a blower brush NING
Brush
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
393
Filter
0 Filter
[1]
[7]
[5] [4]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[8]
394
394
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Main
[1] Main Station
Station Up-
Up- FC9-5783
FC9-5783 Less than
Less than 5
5 3
3 1,000,000 PRDC-1 AR-FIL1 Re- Yes
Yes
per
per Left
Left Suction
Suction minutes
minutes 1,000,000 place-
place-
Filter ment
ment
[2] Waste
[2] Waste Toner
Toner Con- FM2-2058
Con- FM2-2058 Less than
Less than 5
5 1
1 50,000
50,000 DRBL-1 WST-TNR Re-
tainer
tainer minutes
minutes -- place-
place-
ment
ment
[3] Main
[3] Main Station
Station Rear FC7-4563
Rear FC7-4563 Less than
Less than 5
5 3
3 2,000,000 PRDC-1
2,000,000 OZ-FIL2 Re- Yes
Yes
Ozone Filter minutes
minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
(M/C/Bk) ment
ment
[4] Main
[4] Main Station
Less than 5
5 1
1 2,000,000 PRDC-1
2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL6 Re- Yes
Yes
Ozone Filter (Y) minutes
minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[5] Main
[5] Main Station
Station Rear FB2-4383
Rear FB2-4383 Less than
Less than 5
5 4
4 500,000 PRDC-1
500,000 TN-FIL1 Re- Yes
Yes
Toner Filter minutes
minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[6] Main
[6] Main Station
Station Up-
Up- FC9-6046
FC9-6046 Less than
Less than 5
5 3
3 1,000,000 PRDC-1 AR-FIL4 Re- Yes
Yes
per
per Right
Right Suction
Suction minutes
minutes 1,000,000
1,000,000 place-
place-
Filter ment
[7] Sub
[7] Sub Station
Less than 5
5 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING OZ-FIL-M Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
Middle Ozone Fil- minutes
minutes 500,000
500,000 ter
ter and
and lint-
lint- NING
ter
ter free paper.
free paper.
Less than
Less than 5
5 2,000,000 PRDC-1
Yes
minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
ment
ment
[8] Sub
[8] Sub Station
Station Ex-
Ex- FC6-2035
FC6-2035 Less than
Less than 5
5 3
3 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING OZ-FIL-M Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
haust Duct
haust Duct Unit
Unit minutes
minutes 500,000
500,000 ter
ter and
and lint-
lint- NING
Ozone Filter free paper.
free paper.
Less than 5 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL3 When replac- Re- Yes
minutes
minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 ing the Ozone place-
place-
Filter, be
Filter, be sure ment
sure ment
to
to clean
clean the
the fil-
fil-
ter
ter base
base
(FC6-8137)as
(FC6-8137)as
well.
[9] Power
[9] Power Unit
Unit Station
Station FC6-3483
FC6-3483 Less than
Less than 5
5 2
2 2,000,000 PRDC-1
Yes
Ozone Filter minutes
minutes 2,000,000
2,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
395
395
PrimaryFixing
0 Primary FixingAssembly
Assembly (1/3)
(1/3)
[11]
[6]
[3] [5]
[2]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[10]
[1] [2]
[8]
[9]
[9]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning items
sub items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing FL1-1151 Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX-UP-RL Re- Yes
Yes
Roller 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[2] Primary Fixing FE4-9405
FE4-9405 Less than
1,000,000 FX1-BUSH Re- Yes
Yes
Roller Insulating 30 minutes
30 minutes 1,000,000
1,000,000 place-
place-
Bush
Bush ment
ment
[3] Primary Fixing XG9-0419
XG9-0419 Less than
3,000,000 FX1-BEAR Re- Yes
Yes
Roller Bearing 30 minutes
30 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
396
396
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
item parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[4] Primary Fixing
[4] Less than
FM1-A391 Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS
500,000 Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
NING
witch moistened
moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing Less than
Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FX-TSW Re-
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes - place-
witch ment
ment
[5] Primary Fixing
[5] FK2-6479
FK2-6479 Less than
Less than 1
1 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FIX-TH1 Re-
Roller Main Ther- 30 minutes
30 minutes - place-
place-
mistor
mistor ment
ment
[6] Primary Fixing
[6] FK2-6478 Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Sub Ther- 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
NING
mistor
mistor moistened
moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing Less than
1,000,000 FIX-TH1 Re-
place-
mistor
mistor ment
ment
[7] Primary Fixing Re- FM1-T299
[7] Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX-RF-RL Re- Yes
Yes
fresh Roller 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[8] Primary Fixing De- FM3-2100
Less than 6
livery Lower
livery Lower Sepa-
Sepa- 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
NING
ration Claw
ration Claw moistened
moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing De- Less than
Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 EX-CREW1 Re-
livery Lower
livery Lower Sepa-
Sepa- 10 minutes
place-
ration Claw ment
[9] Primary Fixing In- FC7-4644
[9] Less than
Less than 1
1 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 FX1IN-RL Re-
ner Delivery Lower 15 minutes
place-
Roller ment
ment
[10] Primary Fixing In- -
[10] Less than
Less than 1
ner Delivery Sepa- 10 minutes 500,000
ration Air nozzle moistened
moistened
with alcohol
[11] Primary Fixing In- -
[11] Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA
ner Delivery Lower 10 minutes
10 minutes - lint-free paper NING
NING
Guide, Roller
Guide, Roller moistened
moistened
with alcohol
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
397
PrimaryFixing
0 Primary FixingAssembly
Assembly (2/3)
(2/3)
[9]
[10]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[3]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing
[1] FE3-2344 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX-WEB Re-
Web
Web 15 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[2] Primary Fixing Ex- FE3-1881
[2] Less than
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 F1-EX-BL Re-
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Belt
Belt 30 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[3] Primary Fixing Ex- XG9-0882
[3] XG9-0882 Less than
3,000,000 F1-EX-BE Re-
ternal Heat Roller 30 minutes
place-
Bearing
Bearing ment
ment
398
398
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[4] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-N365 Less
[4] Less than
than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 F1-EX-BE Re-
ternal Heat Belt In- 30 minutes
place-
sulating Bush
sulating Bush ment
ment
[5] Primary Fixing Ex- FE3-8031
[5] FE3-8031 Less than
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 FX-EX-C1 Re-
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Clean-
Clean- 15 minutes
place-
ing Roller ment
[6] Primary Fixing Ex- FK4-1411
[6] Less than 1
1 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FXEX-TH1 Re-
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Roller
Roller FK4-1412 30 minutes
30 minutes 1 -- place-
place-
Main Thermistor ment
ment
(Upper), (Lower)
(Upper), (Lower)
[7] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A379 Less than
[7] 1
1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX-EX-TS Re-
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Upper
Upper 15 minutes
15 minutes - place-
place-
Roller Thermos- ment
ment
witch
[8] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A379 Less
[8] Less than
than 1
1 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FX-EX-TS Re-
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Lower
Lower 15 minutes
place-
Roller Thermos- ment
ment
witch
[9] Primary Fixing As- FM1-A376 Less
[9] Less than
than 1
1 9,000,000 FIXING
9,000,000 FX-CNT Re- Yes
Yes
sembly (200V)/
(200V)/ 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
FM1-A467 ment
ment
(240V)
[10] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A377 Less
[10] Less than
than 1
1 9,000,000 DRBL-1
9,000,000 FX-CNT Re- Yes
Yes
ternal Heat
ternal Heat Belt
Belt (200V)/
(200V)/ 10 minutes
10 minutes 1,000,000
1,000,000 place-
place-
Unit
Unit FM1-A411 ment
ment
(240V)
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
399
399
3. Periodical
Service
PrimaryFixing
0 Primary Fixing Assembly
Assembly (3/3)
(3/3)
[12]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[11] [8]
[6]
[10]
[7]
400
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing Less than
FM1-A385 Less than 1
1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1 FX-BLT-U
9,000,000 Re- Yes
Yes
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Unit (200V)/
Unit (200V)/ 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000 place-
place-
FM1-A409 ment
ment
(240V)
[2] Primary Fixing FL0-0358
FLO-0358 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX-BLT-U Re-
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt 30 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[3] Primary Fixing FL2-5453
FL2-5453 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-OR Lubrication Re-
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt In-
In- 30 minutes
place-
ner Oil Coating ment
ment
Roller
[4] Primary Fixing FL2-6259 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-PC Lubrication Re-
Pressure Belt 45 minutes - place-
Pressure Pad
Pressure Pad Cov-
Coy- ment
ment
er
[5] Primary Fixing FL2-2648 Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX-LB-PD Re-
Pressure Belt
45 minutes - place-
place-
Pressure Pad
Pressure Pad ment
ment
[6] Primary Fixing FC5-9766
FC5-9766 Less than
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 FX-LB-ST Re-
Pressure Belt
45 minutes - place-
place-
Steering Roller
Steering Roller ment
ment
[7] Primary Fixing FM1-N242 Less than 1
1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 FXBLT-B1 The following Re-
Pressure Belt
45 minutes - 4 parts
4 parts are
are re-
replace-
place-
Bearing 1 Kit placed
placed atat the ment
the ment
same
same time
time asas
a service
a service kit.
kit.
- Primary Fix-
ing Pressure
Belt Bearing 1
x2
x2
- Primary Fix-
ing Pressure
Belt Bushing x
2
- Washer x 2
- E-ring x 2
XG9-0407 Less than
1,000,000 FXBLT-B1 Re-
Pressure Belt
place-
Bearing 3 ment
ment
XG9-0519 Less than
1,000,000 FXBLT-B1 Re-
Pressure Belt
place-
Bearing 4 ment
ment
XG9-0810 Less than
1,000,000 FXBLT-B1 Re-
Pressure Belt
place-
Bearing 5 ment
ment
[11] Primary Fixing FK2-3094 Less than
Less than 2 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FXLW-TH1 Re-
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Inlet
Inlet 45 minutes
place-
Thermistor ment
ment
[12] Primary Fixing In- - Less than
Less than 1
let Guide
let Guide 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
NING
moistened
with alcohol
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
401
SecondaryFixing
0 Secondary FixingAssembly
Assembly (1/3)
[11]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[2] [7]
[4]
[9]
[3]
[1] [2]
[8]
[10]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- y life (sheet),
y life (sheet), (Parts counter)
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning items
sub items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing *
timing * items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Secondary
Fixing FL1-1152 Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX2-UPRL Re- Yes
Yes
Roller 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[2] Secondary
Fixing FB4-3689
FB4-3689 Less than
Less than 2
2 1,000,000 DRBL-1
1,000,000 DRBL-1 FX2-BUSH
FX2-BUSH Re-
Re- Yes
Yes
Roller Insulating 30 minutes
30 minutes 1,000,000
1,000,000 place-
place-
Bush
Bush ment
ment
[3] Secondary
Fixing XG9-0419
XG9-0419 Less than
3,000,000 FX2-BEAR Re- Yes
Yes
Roller Bearing 30 minutes
30 minutes 3,000,000
3,000,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
402
402
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
item parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[4] FM1-A391 Less than 1
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes
30 minutes 500,000
NING
witch moistened
moistened
with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than
1,000,000 FX2-TSW Re-
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes - place-
witch ment
ment
[5] Secondary
Fixing FK2-6479
FK2-6479 Less than 1
1 1,000,000 PRDC-1
1,000,000 FX2-TH1 Re-
Roller Main Ther- 30 minutes
30 minutes - place-
place-
mistor
mistor ment
ment
[6] FK2-6478 Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
30 minutes 500,000
NING
mistor
mistor moistened
moistened
with alcohol
1,000,000 FX2-TH1 Re-
place-
mistor
mistor ment
ment
[7] FM1-T299 Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FXRF-RL2 Re- Yes
Yes
Refresh Roller 15 minutes
15 minutes 500,000
500,000 place-
place-
ment
ment
[8] Secondary
Fixing FM1-A401 Less than
FM1-A401 6
Delivery Lower 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
NING
Separation Claw
Separation Claw moistened
moistened
with alcohol
Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 EX-CREW2 Re-
Delivery Lower 10 minutes
place-
Separation Claw ment
[9] Secondary
[9] Secondary Fixing FM1-A402 Less than
Fixing FM1-A402 1
Inner Delivery Up- 10 minutes
10 minutes 500,000
NING
per
per Separation
Separation moistened
moistened
Plate
Plate with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-SEPA Re-
Inner Delivery Up- 15 minutes
15 minutes - place-
place-
per
per Separation
Separation ment
ment
Plate
Plate
[10] Secondary
Fixing FM1-K630 Less
FM1-K630 Less than
than 1
1 4,500,000 DRBL-1
4,500,000 FX2IN-RL
FX21N-RL Re-
Inner Delivery 15 minutes
place-
Lower Roller ment
ment
[11] - Less than
Less than 1
1 500,000 CLEANING
500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA
Inner Delivery 10 minutes
10 minutes - lint-free paper NING
NING
Guide
Guide moistened
moistened
with alcohol
**
•• Upper
Upper
iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
•• Lower
Lower
(ORP) iPR
(ORP) iPR C10000VP
printing of
of 100
100 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job) // iPR
iPR C8000VP
printing of
of 80
80 sheets
sheets per
per job)
job)
403
403
SecondaryFixing
0 Secondary FixingAssembly
Assembly (2/3)
[9]
[10]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[3]
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning items
sub items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
ceme
ceme
[1] Secondary
Fixing FE3-2344
FE3-2344 Less than 1
1 500,000 DRBL-1
500,000 FX2-WEB Re-
Web
Web 15 minutes
place-
ment
[2] Secondary
[2] Secondary Fixing FE3-1881
Fixing FE3-1881 Less than
Less than 1
1 3,000,000 DRBL-1
3,000,000 FX2-EXBL Re-
External Heat
External Heat Belt
Belt 30 minutes
place-
ment
ment
[3] Secondary
[3] Secondary Fixing XG9-0882
Fixing XG9-0882 Less than
3,000,000 F2-EX-BE Re-
External Heat Roll- 30 minutes - place-
er Bearing ment
ment
404
3.
3. Periodical
Periodical Service
Service
No.
No. Part Name
Part Name Parts No.
Parts No. Estimated
Estimated Q't
Q't Estimated
Con- Operator
time re-
time re- yy life
life (sheet),
tents mainte-
quired
quired for
for Cleaning sub
Cleaning sub items
items minor
minor nance
nance
repla-
repla- timing **
timing items
items parts
parts
• i giL ceme

Canon ImagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 11.0

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Canon ImagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 11.0

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Can on Revision 11.

Check visually. Insert the claw.

Check a sound. Push the part.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Delivery Reverse Unit Unit........................................................................................................................ 411

Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit Unit................................................................................... 637

Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller Roller.......................................................730730

Cleaning the Bypass

Image Position Adjustment

Measure against 0110JAM

Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................2779

Refurbishing the Fixing Assembly.....................................................................................................2840

Handling of Laser System

PRECAUCION RIBINCNIin OE CLAIM FREEMEN ASINI

Turn power switch ON

O Toner on Clothing or Skin

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

MIi4 •3t .Tt 4tittif 114JM,

Points to Note at Cleaning

LONG SHEET TRAY-A1

Long Sheet Tray-C1

Two-Knife Booklet Finisher-AN1

* Finisher-AN1/Saddle Finisher-AN2 is required on the downstream side.

HDD Data Encryption

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

High Primary High High

High Secondary High Th

Primary Charging Assembly

ITB Patch Sensor

Canon Maintenance Assist Tools Version 1.0.0

ALL Right Reserved Canon Inc., 2015

Developing Assembly —>

0 30 100 150 200 300

A handle dedicated to Fixing Assembly

ITB Drum Unit Support Shaft

Drum Unit Support Shaft Drum Unit Support Shaft

Toner Ejection Lever

Paper Type Pickup position

[24] [1] [7]

No. Name "1 No. Name

Tandem Feed Unit

Sub Station Duplex

No. Name No.

Select a furction. t F Show All

Flow of paper Left Deck Right Deck

J1025 J20 J21

Main controller PCB1

Name Function, specifications,

DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode

DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode

㻿㼃㻝 㻿㼃㻞 㻿㼃㻟

EFI Normal boot mode 10.255.255.1

㻿㼃㻝 㻿㼃㻞 㻿㼃㻟

Main controller PCB 2

Main controller PCB 2 BOTTOM VIEW

Open I/F PCB

Open I/F PCB

Name Function, specifications,

㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟

㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟